Relion 670 series

Transformer protection RET670 2.0 IEC

Technical Manual

Document ID: 1MRK 504 139-UEN

Issued: May 2014
Revision: Product version: 2.0

Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third
party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)
This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/
or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby
requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.

Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and
with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage
directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of
the IEC 60255 series.

Table of contents

Table of contents
Section 1

Introduction.....................................................................41
This manual......................................................................................41
Intended audience............................................................................41
Product documentation.....................................................................42
Product documentation set..........................................................42
Document revision history...........................................................43
Related documents......................................................................44
Document symbols and conventions................................................44
Symbols.......................................................................................44
Document conventions................................................................45
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping.......................................46

Section 2

Available functions.........................................................53
Main protection functions..................................................................53
Back-up protection functions............................................................55
Control and monitoring functions......................................................58
Communication.................................................................................62
Basic IED functions..........................................................................65

Section 3

Analog inputs..................................................................69
Introduction.......................................................................................69
Function block..................................................................................69
Signals..............................................................................................70
Settings.............................................................................................72
Monitored data..................................................................................79
Operation principle...........................................................................80

Section 4

Binary input and output modules....................................83

Binary input.......................................................................................83
Binary input debounce filter.........................................................83
Oscillation filter............................................................................83
Settings........................................................................................83
Setting parameters for binary input modules..........................83
Setting parameters for binary input/output module................84

Section 5

Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ..........................85

Local HMI screen behaviour.............................................................85
Identification................................................................................85
Settings........................................................................................85
Local HMI signals.............................................................................85
1

Technical Manual

Table of contents

Identification................................................................................85
Function block.............................................................................85
Signals.........................................................................................86
Basic part for LED indication module...............................................86
Identification................................................................................86
Function block.............................................................................86
Signals.........................................................................................87
Settings........................................................................................88
Monitored data.............................................................................88
Identification................................................................................88
Function block.............................................................................89
Signals.........................................................................................89
Settings........................................................................................89
Operation principle...........................................................................90
Local HMI....................................................................................90
Display....................................................................................90
LEDs.......................................................................................93
Keypad...................................................................................94
LED..............................................................................................96
Functionality ..........................................................................96
Status LEDs...........................................................................96
Indication LEDs......................................................................96
Function keys............................................................................104
Functionality ........................................................................104
Operation principle...............................................................104

Section 6

Differential protection...................................................107
Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF ........107
Identification..............................................................................107
Functionality .............................................................................107
Function block...........................................................................109
Signals.......................................................................................110
Settings......................................................................................113
Monitored data...........................................................................118
Operation principle....................................................................119
Function calculation principles.............................................121
Logic diagram.......................................................................142
Technical data...........................................................................146
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF .....................147
Identification..............................................................................147
Functionality..............................................................................147
Function block...........................................................................148
Signals.......................................................................................148
Settings......................................................................................148

2
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Monitored data...........................................................................149
Operation principle....................................................................149
Logic diagram.......................................................................150
Technical data...........................................................................151
Low impedance restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF ...........152
Identification..............................................................................152
Functionality..............................................................................152
Function block...........................................................................153
Signals.......................................................................................153
Settings......................................................................................154
Monitored data...........................................................................155
Operation principle....................................................................155
Fundamental principles of the restricted earth-fault
protection..............................................................................155
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance
differential protection............................................................157
Calculation of differential current and bias current...............159
Detection of external earth faults..........................................160
Algorithm of the restricted earth-fault protection..................162
Technical data...........................................................................162
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC ..........163
Identification..............................................................................163
Functionality..............................................................................163
Function block...........................................................................164
Signals.......................................................................................164
Settings......................................................................................165
Monitored data...........................................................................166
Operation principle....................................................................166
Technical data...........................................................................170

Section 7

Impedance protection...................................................173
Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic
ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR...................................................173
Identification..............................................................................173
Functionality..............................................................................173
Function block...........................................................................174
Signals.......................................................................................175
Settings......................................................................................176
Monitored data...........................................................................179
Operation principle....................................................................179
Full scheme measurement...................................................179
Impedance characteristic.....................................................180
Minimum operating current...................................................183
Measuring principles............................................................183
3

Technical Manual

Table of contents

Directional impedance element for quadrilateral

characteristics......................................................................186
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................189
Technical data...........................................................................192
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle
FDPSPDIS......................................................................................193
Identification..............................................................................193
Identification.........................................................................193
Functionality..............................................................................193
Function block...........................................................................194
Signals.......................................................................................194
Settings......................................................................................195
Operation principle....................................................................196
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................198
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................200
Three-phase faults...............................................................202
Load encroachment..............................................................202
Minimum operate currents....................................................207
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................207
Technical data...........................................................................213
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for
series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR.......213
Identification..............................................................................213
Functionality..............................................................................214
Function block...........................................................................214
Signals.......................................................................................215
Settings......................................................................................217
Monitored data...........................................................................220
Operation principle....................................................................221
Full scheme measurement...................................................221
Impedance characteristic.....................................................221
Minimum operating current...................................................225
Measuring principles............................................................225
Directionality for series compensation..................................228
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................230
Technical data...........................................................................233
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic
ZMHPDIS ......................................................................................234
Identification..............................................................................234
Functionality..............................................................................234
Function block...........................................................................235
Signals.......................................................................................235
Settings......................................................................................236
Operation principle....................................................................237
4
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Full scheme measurement...................................................237

Impedance characteristic.....................................................238
Basic operation characteristics.............................................239
Theory of operation..............................................................241
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................250
Technical data...........................................................................254
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS..................................................................254
Identification..............................................................................254
Functionality..............................................................................255
Function block...........................................................................255
Signals.......................................................................................256
Settings......................................................................................257
Operation principle....................................................................258
Full scheme measurement...................................................258
Impedance characteristic.....................................................259
Minimum operating current...................................................261
Measuring principles............................................................262
Directionality.........................................................................264
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................266
Technical data...........................................................................269
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic and
additional distance protection directional function for earth
faults ZDMRDIR, ZDARDIR...........................................................269
Identification..............................................................................269
Functionality..............................................................................270
Function block...........................................................................270
Signals.......................................................................................270
Settings......................................................................................271
Monitored data...........................................................................272
Operation principle....................................................................273
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR.............................................................................273
Additional distance protection directional function for
earth faults ZDARDIR...........................................................275
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC................................278
Identification..............................................................................278
Functionality..............................................................................278
Function block...........................................................................278
Signals.......................................................................................278
Settings......................................................................................279
Operation principle....................................................................279
Fault inception detection......................................................279

5
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS.....................................................................................281
Identification..............................................................................281
Functionality..............................................................................281
Function block...........................................................................282
Signals.......................................................................................282
Settings......................................................................................283
Operation principle....................................................................283
The phase selection function................................................283
Technical data...........................................................................294
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR................................295
Identification..............................................................................295
Functionality..............................................................................295
Function block...........................................................................296
Signals.......................................................................................296
Settings......................................................................................298
Operation principle....................................................................300
Full scheme measurement...................................................300
Impedance characteristic.....................................................301
Minimum operating current...................................................305
Measuring principles............................................................305
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral
characteristics......................................................................308
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................311
Technical data...........................................................................314
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS............................................................................315
Identification..............................................................................315
Functionality..............................................................................315
Function block...........................................................................316
Signals.......................................................................................316
Settings......................................................................................317
Operation principle....................................................................318
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................320
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................322
Three-phase faults...............................................................323
Load encroachment..............................................................324
Minimum operate currents....................................................329
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................330
Technical data...........................................................................335
High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS.....................................335
Identification..............................................................................335
Functionality..............................................................................335
6
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................337
Signals.......................................................................................337
Settings......................................................................................340
Monitored data...........................................................................344
Operation principle....................................................................344
Filtering.................................................................................344
Distance measuring zones...................................................345
Phase-selection element......................................................346
Directional element...............................................................347
Fuse failure...........................................................................348
Power swings.......................................................................348
Measuring principles............................................................348
Load encroachment..............................................................351
Simplified logic schemes......................................................352
Technical data...........................................................................358
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS ..................................358
Identification..............................................................................358
Functionality..............................................................................358
Function block...........................................................................360
Signals.......................................................................................360
Settings......................................................................................363
Monitored data...........................................................................368
Operation principle....................................................................369
Filtering.................................................................................369
Distance measuring zones...................................................369
Phase-selection element......................................................371
Directional element...............................................................371
Fuse failure...........................................................................372
Power swings.......................................................................373
Measuring principles............................................................373
Simplified logic schemes......................................................375
Technical data...........................................................................382
Power swing detection ZMRPSB ...................................................382
Identification..............................................................................382
Functionality..............................................................................382
Function block...........................................................................383
Signals.......................................................................................383
Settings......................................................................................384
Operation principle....................................................................385
Resistive reach in forward direction.....................................386
Resistive reach in reverse direction.....................................387
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction..................388
Basic detection logic.............................................................388
7
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Operating and inhibit conditions...........................................390

Technical data...........................................................................391
Power swing logic PSLPSCH ........................................................391
Identification..............................................................................391
Functionality..............................................................................392
Function block...........................................................................392
Signals.......................................................................................392
Settings......................................................................................393
Operation principle....................................................................393
Communication and tripping logic........................................393
Blocking logic.......................................................................394
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM ......................................................396
Identification..............................................................................396
Functionality..............................................................................396
Function block...........................................................................397
Signals.......................................................................................397
Settings......................................................................................398
Monitored data...........................................................................399
Operation principle....................................................................399
Technical data...........................................................................402
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM..................................................403
Identification..............................................................................403
Functionality..............................................................................403
Function block...........................................................................403
Signals.......................................................................................404
Settings......................................................................................405
Monitored data...........................................................................406
Operation principle....................................................................406
Lens characteristic...............................................................409
Detecting an out-of-step condition........................................411
Maximum slip frequency.......................................................412
Taking care of the circuit breaker ........................................413
Design..................................................................................415
Technical data...........................................................................416
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ...................................................416
Identification..............................................................................416
Functionality..............................................................................416
Function block...........................................................................416
Signals.......................................................................................416
Settings......................................................................................417
Operation principle....................................................................418
Under impedance protection for generators and transformers
ZGVPDIS........................................................................................421
8
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Identification..............................................................................421
Functionality..............................................................................421
Function block...........................................................................422
Signals.......................................................................................422
Settings......................................................................................423
Monitored data...........................................................................424
Operation principle....................................................................424
Operation principle of zone 1...............................................426
Operation principle of zone 2...............................................428
Operation principle of zone 3...............................................432
Load encroachment..............................................................432
Under voltage seal-in...........................................................433
Technical data...........................................................................434

Section 8

Current protection.........................................................435
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC .........................................................................................435
Identification..............................................................................435
Functionality..............................................................................435
Function block...........................................................................435
Signals.......................................................................................435
Settings......................................................................................436
Monitored data...........................................................................436
Operation principle....................................................................436
Technical data...........................................................................437
Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
OC4PTOC .....................................................................................437
Identification..............................................................................438
Functionality..............................................................................438
Function block...........................................................................439
Signals.......................................................................................439
Settings......................................................................................441
Monitored data...........................................................................446
Operation principle....................................................................447
Second harmonic blocking element...........................................451
Technical data...........................................................................452
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................453
Identification..............................................................................453
Functionality..............................................................................453
Function block...........................................................................453
Signals.......................................................................................453
Settings......................................................................................454
Monitored data...........................................................................454
Operation principle....................................................................454
9

Technical Manual

Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................455
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC .................................455
Identification..............................................................................455
Functionality..............................................................................456
Function block...........................................................................456
Signals.......................................................................................456
Settings......................................................................................457
Monitored data...........................................................................463
Operation principle....................................................................463
Operating quantity within the function..................................464
Internal polarizing.................................................................465
External polarizing for earth-fault function............................466
Directional detection for earth fault function.........................466
Base quantities within the protection....................................466
Internal earth-fault protection structure................................467
Four residual overcurrent steps............................................467
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................468
Second harmonic blocking element.....................................470
Switch on to fault feature......................................................472
Technical data...........................................................................474
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC .....................................................................475
Identification..............................................................................475
Functionality..............................................................................475
Function block...........................................................................476
Signals.......................................................................................476
Settings......................................................................................477
Monitored data...........................................................................482
Operation principle....................................................................482
Operating quantity within the function..................................482
Internal polarizing facility of the function..............................483
External polarizing for negative sequence function..............484
Internal negative sequence protection structure..................484
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages........................484
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................485
Technical data...........................................................................488
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE .....................................................................................488
Identification..............................................................................489
Functionality..............................................................................489
Function block...........................................................................491
10
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................491
Settings......................................................................................492
Monitored data...........................................................................494
Operation principle....................................................................494
Function inputs.....................................................................494
Technical data...........................................................................500
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/
Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR.........................................................501
Identification..............................................................................502
Functionality..............................................................................502
Function block...........................................................................503
Signals.......................................................................................503
Settings......................................................................................504
Monitored data...........................................................................505
Operation principle....................................................................506
Technical data...........................................................................510
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR ...........510
Identification..............................................................................510
Functionality..............................................................................510
Function block...........................................................................511
Signals.......................................................................................511
Settings......................................................................................512
Monitored data...........................................................................513
Operation principle....................................................................513
Technical data...........................................................................517
Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output
CCRBRF ........................................................................................517
Identification..............................................................................517
Functionality..............................................................................517
Function block...........................................................................518
Signals.......................................................................................518
Settings......................................................................................519
Monitored data...........................................................................520
Operation principle....................................................................520
Technical data...........................................................................523
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC...........................................523
Identification..............................................................................523
Functionality..............................................................................524
Function block...........................................................................524
Signals.......................................................................................524
Settings......................................................................................525
Monitored data...........................................................................525
Operation principle....................................................................525
Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................528
11
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................528

Technical data...........................................................................529
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP...............................529
Identification..............................................................................529
Functionality..............................................................................529
Function block...........................................................................530
Signals.......................................................................................530
Settings......................................................................................531
Monitored data...........................................................................532
Operation principle....................................................................532
Low pass filtering..................................................................534
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................535
Technical data...........................................................................536
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ................................537
Identification..............................................................................537
Functionality..............................................................................537
Function block...........................................................................538
Signals.......................................................................................538
Settings......................................................................................539
Monitored data...........................................................................541
Operation principle....................................................................541
Low pass filtering..................................................................543
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................543
Technical data...........................................................................545
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC .............................................545
Identification..............................................................................545
Functionality..............................................................................545
Function block...........................................................................546
Signals.......................................................................................546
Settings......................................................................................546
Monitored data...........................................................................547
Operation principle....................................................................547
Technical data...........................................................................548
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC............................................548
Identification..............................................................................549
Functionality..............................................................................549
Function block...........................................................................549
Signals.......................................................................................549
Settings......................................................................................551
Monitored data...........................................................................552
Operation principle....................................................................552
Measured quantities.............................................................552
Reconnection inhibit feature.................................................555
12
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Overcurrent feature..............................................................556
Undercurrent feature............................................................557
Capacitor harmonic overload feature...................................557
Capacitor reactive power overload feature...........................559
Technical data...........................................................................560
Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines
NS2PTOC ......................................................................................561
Identification..............................................................................561
Functionality..............................................................................561
Function block...........................................................................562
Signals.......................................................................................562
Settings......................................................................................563
Monitored data...........................................................................564
Operation principle....................................................................564
Start sensitivity.....................................................................566
Alarm function......................................................................566
Logic diagram.......................................................................567
Technical data...........................................................................567
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC..............568
Identification..............................................................................568
Functionality..............................................................................568
Function block...........................................................................569
Signals.......................................................................................569
Settings......................................................................................570
Monitored data...........................................................................571
Operation principle....................................................................571
Measured quantities.............................................................571
Base quantities.....................................................................571
Overcurrent protection..........................................................571
Logic diagram.......................................................................573
Undervoltage protection.......................................................573
Technical data...........................................................................574

Section 9

Voltage protection........................................................577
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ................................577
Identification..............................................................................577
Functionality..............................................................................577
Function block...........................................................................578
Signals.......................................................................................578
Settings......................................................................................579
Monitored data...........................................................................581
Operation principle....................................................................581
Measurement principle.........................................................582
Time delay............................................................................582
13

Technical Manual

Table of contents

Blocking................................................................................588
Design..................................................................................589
Technical data...........................................................................591
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ..................................591
Identification..............................................................................591
Functionality..............................................................................592
Function block...........................................................................592
Signals.......................................................................................592
Settings......................................................................................593
Monitored data...........................................................................595
Operation principle....................................................................595
Measurement principle.........................................................596
Time delay............................................................................596
Blocking................................................................................602
Design..................................................................................602
Technical data...........................................................................604
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV .................605
Identification..............................................................................605
Functionality..............................................................................605
Function block...........................................................................605
Signals.......................................................................................605
Settings......................................................................................606
Monitored data...........................................................................608
Operation principle....................................................................608
Measurement principle.........................................................608
Time delay............................................................................608
Blocking................................................................................614
Design..................................................................................614
Technical data...........................................................................615
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH ............................................616
Identification..............................................................................616
Functionality..............................................................................616
Function block...........................................................................617
Signals.......................................................................................617
Settings......................................................................................617
Monitored data...........................................................................618
Operation principle....................................................................619
Measured voltage.................................................................621
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................622
Cooling.................................................................................626
Overexcitation protection function measurands...................626
Overexcitation alarm............................................................627
Logic diagram.......................................................................627
14
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................628
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ......................................628
Identification..............................................................................628
Functionality..............................................................................628
Function block...........................................................................629
Signals.......................................................................................629
Settings......................................................................................629
Monitored data...........................................................................630
Operation principle....................................................................630
Technical data...........................................................................632
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ..................................................633
Identification..............................................................................633
Functionality..............................................................................633
Function block...........................................................................633
Signals.......................................................................................633
Settings......................................................................................634
Operation principle....................................................................634
Technical data...........................................................................636

Section 10 Frequency protection....................................................637

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF .............................................637
Identification..............................................................................637
Functionality..............................................................................637
Function block...........................................................................637
Signals.......................................................................................638
Settings......................................................................................638
Monitored data...........................................................................639
Operation principle....................................................................639
Measurement principle.........................................................639
Time delay............................................................................639
Voltage dependent time delay..............................................640
Blocking................................................................................641
Design..................................................................................641
Technical data...........................................................................642
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ...............................................643
Identification..............................................................................643
Functionality..............................................................................643
Function block...........................................................................644
Signals.......................................................................................644
Settings......................................................................................644
Monitored data...........................................................................645
Operation principle....................................................................645
Measurement principle.........................................................645
Time delay............................................................................645
15
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Blocking................................................................................646
Design..................................................................................646
Technical data...........................................................................647
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .............................647
Identification..............................................................................647
Functionality..............................................................................647
Function block...........................................................................648
Signals.......................................................................................648
Settings......................................................................................648
Monitored data...........................................................................649
Operation principle....................................................................649
Measurement principle.........................................................649
Time delay............................................................................649
Blocking................................................................................650
Design..................................................................................650
Technical data...........................................................................651

Section 11 Multipurpose protection................................................653

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC..........................653
Identification..............................................................................653
Functionality..............................................................................653
Function block...........................................................................654
Signals.......................................................................................654
Settings......................................................................................656
Monitored data...........................................................................663
Operation principle....................................................................663
Measured quantities within CVGAPC...................................663
Base quantities for CVGAPC function..................................666
Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................666
Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................671
Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................672
Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................672
Logic diagram.......................................................................672
Technical data...........................................................................677

Section 12 System protection and control......................................681

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC.......................................................681
Identification..............................................................................681
Functionality..............................................................................681
Function block...........................................................................681
Signals.......................................................................................681
Settings......................................................................................682
Operation principle....................................................................682
Filter calculation example..........................................................686
16
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Section 13 Secondary system supervision.....................................689

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC............................................689
Identification..............................................................................689
Functionality..............................................................................689
Function block...........................................................................689
Signals.......................................................................................690
Settings......................................................................................690
Operation principle....................................................................690
Technical data...........................................................................692
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC................................................692
Identification..............................................................................692
Functionality..............................................................................693
Function block...........................................................................693
Signals.......................................................................................694
Settings......................................................................................695
Monitored data...........................................................................696
Operation principle....................................................................696
Zero and negative sequence detection................................696
Delta current and delta voltage detection.............................698
Dead line detection...............................................................701
Main logic.............................................................................702
Technical data...........................................................................705
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC..................................................705
Identification..............................................................................705
Functionality..............................................................................705
Function block...........................................................................706
Signals.......................................................................................706
Settings......................................................................................707
Monitored data...........................................................................707
Operation principle....................................................................708
Technical data...........................................................................709

Section 14 Control..........................................................................711
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN......................................................................................711
Identification..............................................................................711
Functionality..............................................................................711
Function block...........................................................................712
Signals.......................................................................................712
Settings......................................................................................714
Monitored data...........................................................................717
Operation principle....................................................................717
Basic functionality.................................................................717
17
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Logic diagrams.....................................................................718
Technical data...........................................................................729
Interlocking ....................................................................................730
Functionality..............................................................................730
Operation principle....................................................................730
Logical node for interlocking SCILO .........................................733
Identification.........................................................................733
Functionality.........................................................................733
Function block......................................................................734
Signals..................................................................................734
Logic diagram.......................................................................734
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................735
Identification.........................................................................735
Functionality.........................................................................735
Function block......................................................................735
Logic diagram.......................................................................736
Signals..................................................................................736
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS..........................736
Identification.........................................................................736
Functionality.........................................................................736
Function block......................................................................737
Logic diagram.......................................................................738
Signals..................................................................................739
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................740
Identification.........................................................................741
Functionality.........................................................................741
Function block......................................................................741
Logic diagram.......................................................................742
Signals..................................................................................742
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................743
Identification.........................................................................743
Functionality.........................................................................744
Function block......................................................................745
Logic diagram.......................................................................746
Signals..................................................................................748
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH .....................................................751
Identification.........................................................................751
Functionality.........................................................................751
Function blocks....................................................................752
Logic diagrams.....................................................................754
Signals..................................................................................759
Interlocking for double CB bay DB ...........................................763
Identification.........................................................................763
18
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Functionality.........................................................................763
Logic diagrams.....................................................................765
Function block......................................................................768
Signals..................................................................................769
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE ..........................................773
Identification.........................................................................773
Functionality.........................................................................773
Function block......................................................................774
Logic diagram.......................................................................775
Signals..................................................................................780
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................782
Identification.........................................................................783
Functionality.........................................................................783
Function block......................................................................784
Logic diagram.......................................................................785
Signals..................................................................................786
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................788
Identification.........................................................................788
Functionality.........................................................................788
Function block......................................................................788
Logic diagram.......................................................................789
Signals..................................................................................789
Apparatus control APC...................................................................789
Functionality..............................................................................789
Error handling............................................................................790
Bay control QCBAY...................................................................793
Functionality.........................................................................793
Function block......................................................................793
Signals..................................................................................794
Settings................................................................................794
Operation principle...............................................................794
Local/Remote switch.................................................................796
Function block......................................................................797
Signals..................................................................................797
Settings................................................................................798
Operation principle...............................................................799
Switch controller SCSWI...........................................................800
Functionality ........................................................................800
Function block......................................................................800
Signals..................................................................................800
Settings................................................................................802
Operation principle...............................................................802
Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................808
19
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Functionality ........................................................................808
Function block......................................................................808
Signals..................................................................................809
Settings................................................................................810
Operation principle...............................................................810
Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................814
Functionality ........................................................................814
Function block......................................................................814
Signals..................................................................................815
Settings................................................................................816
Operation principle...............................................................816
Bay reserve QCRSV..................................................................820
Functionality.........................................................................820
Function block......................................................................820
Signals..................................................................................821
Settings................................................................................822
Operation principle...............................................................822
Reservation input RESIN...........................................................824
Functionality.........................................................................824
Function block......................................................................824
Signals..................................................................................825
Settings................................................................................826
Operation principle...............................................................826
Voltage control................................................................................828
Identification..............................................................................828
Functionality..............................................................................829
Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and
TR8ATCC .................................................................................829
Operation principle...............................................................829
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC ........................................................841
Operation principle...............................................................841
Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and
TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC.............................................................845
Function block...........................................................................849
Signals.......................................................................................852
Settings......................................................................................859
Monitored data...........................................................................867
Operation principle....................................................................868
Technical data...........................................................................869
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGAPC....................................................................870
Identification..............................................................................870
Functionality..............................................................................871
20
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................871
Signals.......................................................................................871
Settings......................................................................................873
Monitored data...........................................................................873
Operation principle....................................................................873
Graphical display..................................................................874
Selector mini switch VSGAPC........................................................875
Identification..............................................................................875
Functionality..............................................................................876
Function block...........................................................................876
Signals.......................................................................................876
Settings......................................................................................877
Operation principle....................................................................877
Generic communication function for Double Point indication
DPGAPC........................................................................................878
Identification..............................................................................878
Functionality..............................................................................878
Function block...........................................................................878
Signals.......................................................................................878
Settings......................................................................................879
Operation principle....................................................................879
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC........................879
Identification..............................................................................879
Functionality..............................................................................879
Function block...........................................................................880
Signals.......................................................................................880
Settings......................................................................................880
Operation principle....................................................................881
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS..........881
Identification..............................................................................881
Functionality..............................................................................882
Function block...........................................................................882
Signals.......................................................................................882
Settings......................................................................................883
Operation principle....................................................................898
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD....................................898
Identification..............................................................................898
Functionality..............................................................................898
Function block...........................................................................899
Signals.......................................................................................899
Settings......................................................................................900
Operation principle....................................................................900

Section 15 Scheme communication...............................................901

21
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent

protection ECPSCH .......................................................................901
Identification..............................................................................901
Functionality..............................................................................901
Function block...........................................................................901
Signals.......................................................................................902
Settings......................................................................................902
Operation principle....................................................................903
Blocking scheme..................................................................903
Permissive under/overreaching scheme..............................904
Unblocking scheme..............................................................905
Technical data...........................................................................906
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH...............................................907
Identification..............................................................................907
Functionality..............................................................................907
Function block...........................................................................908
Signals.......................................................................................908
Settings......................................................................................909
Operation principle....................................................................909
Directional comparison logic function...................................909
Fault current reversal logic...................................................909
Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................910
Technical data...........................................................................912

Section 16 Logic.............................................................................913
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC .......................913
Identification..............................................................................913
Functionality..............................................................................913
Function block...........................................................................913
Signals.......................................................................................914
Settings......................................................................................915
Operation principle....................................................................915
Logic diagram.......................................................................917
Technical data...........................................................................920
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC...........................................................920
Identification..............................................................................920
Functionality..............................................................................921
Function block...........................................................................921
Signals.......................................................................................921
Settings......................................................................................923
Operation principle....................................................................923
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH....................................................924
Identification..............................................................................924
22
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Functionality..............................................................................924
Function block...........................................................................925
Signals.......................................................................................925
Settings......................................................................................926
Operation principle....................................................................926
Identification...................................................................................926
Functionality..............................................................................926
Function block...........................................................................927
Operation principle....................................................................927
Signals.......................................................................................927
Settings......................................................................................928
Identification...................................................................................928
Functionality..............................................................................928
Function block...........................................................................929
Operation principle....................................................................929
Signals.......................................................................................929
Settings......................................................................................930
Configurable logic blocks................................................................930
Functionality..............................................................................930
Inverter function block INV........................................................932
Function block......................................................................932
Signals..................................................................................933
OR function block OR................................................................933
Function block......................................................................933
Signals..................................................................................933
AND function block AND...........................................................934
Function block......................................................................934
Signals..................................................................................934
Timer function block TIMER......................................................934
Function block......................................................................934
Signals..................................................................................935
Settings................................................................................935
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER..................................935
Function block......................................................................935
Signals..................................................................................935
Settings................................................................................936
Exclusive OR function block XOR.............................................936
Function block......................................................................936
Signals..................................................................................936
Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY...................................936
Function block......................................................................937
Signals..................................................................................937
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY.................937
23
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Function block......................................................................937
Signals..................................................................................938
Settings................................................................................938
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.................938
Function block......................................................................939
Signals..................................................................................939
Settings................................................................................939
Controllable gate function block GATE......................................939
Function block......................................................................939
Signals..................................................................................940
Settings................................................................................940
Settable timer function block TIMERSET..................................940
Function block......................................................................940
Signals..................................................................................940
Settings................................................................................941
Configurable logic Q/T....................................................................941
Functionality..............................................................................941
ANDQT function block...............................................................941
Function block......................................................................941
Signals..................................................................................941
ORQT function block.................................................................942
Function block......................................................................942
Signals..................................................................................942
Inverter function block INVERTERQT.......................................942
Function block......................................................................943
Signals..................................................................................943
Exclusive OR function block XORQT........................................943
Function block......................................................................943
Signals..................................................................................943
Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT.................................944
Function block......................................................................944
Signals..................................................................................944
Settings................................................................................945
Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT.................................945
Function block......................................................................945
Signals..................................................................................945
Settings................................................................................946
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT.............................946
Signals..................................................................................946
Settings................................................................................947
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT.............................947
Signals..................................................................................947
Settings................................................................................947
24
Technical Manual

Table of contents

InvalidLogic INVALIDQT............................................................947
Function block......................................................................948
Signals..................................................................................948
Single indication signal combining function block
INDCOMBSPQT........................................................................949
Signals..................................................................................949
Function block...........................................................................950
Signals..................................................................................950
Technical data................................................................................951
Fixed signals FXDSIGN..................................................................952
Identification..............................................................................952
Functionality..............................................................................952
Function block...........................................................................953
Signals.......................................................................................953
Settings......................................................................................953
Operation principle....................................................................953
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................954
Identification..............................................................................954
Function block...........................................................................954
Signals.......................................................................................954
Monitored data...........................................................................955
Settings......................................................................................955
Operation principle....................................................................955
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node
representation BTIGAPC................................................................956
Identification..............................................................................956
Functionality..............................................................................957
Function block...........................................................................957
Signals.......................................................................................957
Settings......................................................................................958
Monitored data...........................................................................958
Operation principle....................................................................958
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A........................................959
Identification..............................................................................959
Functionality..............................................................................959
Function block...........................................................................960
Signals.......................................................................................960
Setting parameters....................................................................961
Operation principle....................................................................961
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node
representation ITBGAPC................................................................962
Identification..............................................................................962
Functionality..............................................................................962
Function block...........................................................................963
25
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................963
Settings......................................................................................964
Operation principle....................................................................964
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC.....................................................................965
Identification..............................................................................965
Functionality..............................................................................965
Function block...........................................................................966
Signals.......................................................................................966
Settings......................................................................................967
Operation principle....................................................................967
Operation Accuracy..............................................................969
Memory storage...................................................................969
Technical data...........................................................................969

Section 17 Monitoring.....................................................................971
Measurements................................................................................971
Identification..............................................................................971
Functionality..............................................................................971
Function block...........................................................................973
Signals.......................................................................................975
Settings......................................................................................978
Monitored data...........................................................................989
Operation principle....................................................................993
Measurement supervision....................................................993
Measurements CVMMXN.....................................................997
Phase current measurement CMMXU...............................1002
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU............................................................1003
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI................................................................................1003
Technical data.........................................................................1003
Analog inputs................................................................................1005
Introduction..............................................................................1005
Function block.........................................................................1006
Signals.....................................................................................1006
Settings....................................................................................1008
Monitored data.........................................................................1015
Operation principle..................................................................1016
Gas medium supervision SSIMG.................................................1017
Identification............................................................................1017
Functionality............................................................................1017
Function block.........................................................................1018
Signals.....................................................................................1018
26
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Settings....................................................................................1019
Operation principle..................................................................1019
Technical data.........................................................................1020
Liquid medium supervision SSIML...............................................1020
Identification............................................................................1020
Functionality............................................................................1021
Function block.........................................................................1021
Signals.....................................................................................1021
Settings....................................................................................1022
Operation principle..................................................................1022
Technical data.........................................................................1023
Breaker monitoring SSCBR..........................................................1023
Identification............................................................................1023
Functionality............................................................................1024
Function block.........................................................................1024
Signals.....................................................................................1024
Settings....................................................................................1025
Monitored data.........................................................................1027
Operation principle..................................................................1027
Circuit breaker contact travel time......................................1029
Circuit breaker status.........................................................1030
Remaining life of circuit breaker.........................................1031
Accumulated energy...........................................................1032
Circuit breaker operation cycles.........................................1033
Circuit breaker operation monitoring..................................1034
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring...........................1035
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication..............................1036
Technical data.........................................................................1036
Event function EVENT..................................................................1036
Identification............................................................................1037
Functionality............................................................................1037
Function block.........................................................................1037
Signals.....................................................................................1037
Settings....................................................................................1038
Operation principle..................................................................1040
Disturbance report DRPRDRE.....................................................1041
Identification............................................................................1042
Functionality............................................................................1042
Function block.........................................................................1043
Signals.....................................................................................1044
Settings....................................................................................1049
Monitored data.........................................................................1088
Operation principle..................................................................1092
27
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Technical data.........................................................................1099
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP...................................1100
Identification............................................................................1100
Functionality............................................................................1100
Function block.........................................................................1101
Signals.....................................................................................1101
Settings....................................................................................1102
Operation principle..................................................................1102
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP..............................1103
Identification............................................................................1103
Functionality............................................................................1103
Function block.........................................................................1103
Signals.....................................................................................1104
Operation principle..................................................................1104
Limit counter L4UFCNT................................................................1104
Identification............................................................................1104
Identification.......................................................................1104
Functionality............................................................................1105
Operation principle..................................................................1105
Design................................................................................1105
Reporting............................................................................1106
Function block.........................................................................1107
Signals.....................................................................................1107
Settings....................................................................................1108
Monitored data.........................................................................1108
Technical data.........................................................................1108

Section 18 Metering.....................................................................1109
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT.......................................................1109
Identification............................................................................1109
Functionality............................................................................1109
Function block.........................................................................1109
Signals.....................................................................................1110
Settings....................................................................................1110
Monitored data.........................................................................1111
Operation principle..................................................................1111
Technical data.........................................................................1113
Function for energy calculation and demand handling
ETPMMTR....................................................................................1113
Identification............................................................................1113
Functionality............................................................................1113
Function block.........................................................................1114
Signals.....................................................................................1114
Settings....................................................................................1115
28
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Monitored data.........................................................................1116
Operation principle..................................................................1117
Technical data.........................................................................1120
Technical data....................................................................1120

Section 19 Station communication...............................................1121

670 series protocols.....................................................................1121
DNP3 protocol..............................................................................1121
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.......................................1121
Communication interfaces and protocols................................1121
Settings....................................................................................1122
Technical data.........................................................................1122
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC.............................................................1122
Functionality.......................................................................1123
Function block....................................................................1123
Signals................................................................................1123
Settings..............................................................................1124
Monitored data...................................................................1124
Operation principle.............................................................1125
Generic communication function for Measured Value
MVGAPC.................................................................................1125
Functionality.......................................................................1125
Function block....................................................................1125
Signals................................................................................1126
Settings..............................................................................1126
Monitored data...................................................................1127
Operation principle.............................................................1127
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication............1127
Functionality.......................................................................1127
Function block....................................................................1127
Signals................................................................................1128
Settings..............................................................................1128
Monitored data...................................................................1128
Principle of operation..........................................................1128
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol...................................1131
Introduction..............................................................................1131
Function block.........................................................................1131
Signals.....................................................................................1131
Output signals....................................................................1131
Settings....................................................................................1134
Monitored data.........................................................................1137
Operation principle..................................................................1138
Technical data.........................................................................1141
29
Technical Manual

Table of contents

LON communication protocol.......................................................1141

Functionality............................................................................1141
Settings....................................................................................1142
Operation principle..................................................................1142
Technical data.........................................................................1160
SPA communication protocol.......................................................1160
Functionality............................................................................1160
Design.....................................................................................1160
Settings....................................................................................1161
Operation principle..................................................................1161
Communication ports.........................................................1169
Technical data.........................................................................1169
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol...................................1169
Introduction..............................................................................1169
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS.........................1169
Functionality.......................................................................1169
Identification.......................................................................1170
Function block....................................................................1170
Signals................................................................................1170
Settings..............................................................................1171
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR........................................................................1171
Functionality.......................................................................1171
Identification.......................................................................1172
Function block....................................................................1172
Signals................................................................................1172
Settings..............................................................................1173
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR....1173
Functionality.......................................................................1173
Identification.......................................................................1173
Function block....................................................................1174
Signals................................................................................1174
Settings..............................................................................1174
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF.........1174
Functionality.......................................................................1174
Identification.......................................................................1174
Function block....................................................................1175
Signals................................................................................1175
Settings..............................................................................1175
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT.........................................................................1175
Functionality.......................................................................1175
Identification.......................................................................1175
Function block....................................................................1176
30
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Signals................................................................................1176
Settings..............................................................................1177
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED................................1177
Functionality.......................................................................1177
Identification.......................................................................1178
Function block....................................................................1178
Signals................................................................................1178
Settings..............................................................................1178
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV............1179
Functionality.......................................................................1179
Identification.......................................................................1179
Function block....................................................................1179
Signals................................................................................1179
Settings..............................................................................1180
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF...........................................................................1180
Functionality.......................................................................1180
Identification.......................................................................1180
Function block....................................................................1181
Signals................................................................................1181
Settings..............................................................................1181
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD..............1182
Functionality.......................................................................1182
Identification.......................................................................1182
Function block....................................................................1182
Signals................................................................................1182
Settings..............................................................................1183
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD................1183
Functionality.......................................................................1183
Identification.......................................................................1183
Function block....................................................................1183
Signals................................................................................1183
Settings..............................................................................1184
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD..........................................................................1184
Functionality.......................................................................1184
Identification.......................................................................1184
Function block....................................................................1184
Signals................................................................................1184
Settings..............................................................................1185
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD..........................................................................1185
Functionality.......................................................................1185
Identification.......................................................................1186
31
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Function block....................................................................1186
Signals................................................................................1186
Settings..............................................................................1186
IED commands with position and select for IEC
60870-5-103 I103POSCMD....................................................1187
Functionality.......................................................................1187
Identification.......................................................................1187
Function block....................................................................1187
Signals................................................................................1187
Settings..............................................................................1188
Operation principle .................................................................1188
General...............................................................................1188
Communication ports.........................................................1198
Technical data.........................................................................1199
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.......................................................................1199
Functionality............................................................................1199
Function block.........................................................................1200
Signals.....................................................................................1200
Settings....................................................................................1202
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV........................................1203
Function block.........................................................................1203
Signals.....................................................................................1203
Settings....................................................................................1204
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV............................................................................1205
Identification............................................................................1205
Functionality............................................................................1205
Function block.........................................................................1205
Signals.....................................................................................1205
Settings....................................................................................1206
Operation principle .................................................................1206
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV...........................................................................1206
Identification............................................................................1206
Functionality............................................................................1206
Function block.........................................................................1207
Signals.....................................................................................1207
Settings....................................................................................1207
Operation principle .................................................................1207
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV...........................................................................1208
Identification............................................................................1208
Functionality............................................................................1208
32
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Function block.........................................................................1208
Signals.....................................................................................1208
Settings....................................................................................1209
Operation principle .................................................................1209
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV............................................................................1209
Identification............................................................................1209
Functionality............................................................................1210
Function block.........................................................................1210
Signals.....................................................................................1210
Settings....................................................................................1210
Operation principle .................................................................1210
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive
GOOSEVCTRCONF....................................................................1211
Identification............................................................................1211
Functionality............................................................................1211
Settings....................................................................................1212
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV........1212
Identification............................................................................1212
Functionality............................................................................1212
Function block.........................................................................1212
Signals.....................................................................................1213
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND........................................1213
Functionality............................................................................1213
Design.....................................................................................1213
General...............................................................................1213
Function block.........................................................................1214
Signals.....................................................................................1214
Settings....................................................................................1216
Operation principle..................................................................1216
Security events on protocols SECALARM....................................1217
Security alarm SECALARM.....................................................1217
Signals................................................................................1217
Settings..............................................................................1217
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG.......................................1217
Activity logging ACTIVLOG.....................................................1217
Settings....................................................................................1217

Section 20 Remote communication..............................................1219

Binary signal transfer....................................................................1219
Identification............................................................................1219
Functionality............................................................................1219
Function block.........................................................................1220
Signals.....................................................................................1220
33
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Settings....................................................................................1222
Monitored data.........................................................................1225
Operation principle..................................................................1227
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit............1228
Function block.........................................................................1228
Signals.....................................................................................1229

Section 21 Basic IED functions....................................................1231

Authority check ATHCHCK...........................................................1231
Identification............................................................................1231
Functionality............................................................................1231
Settings....................................................................................1232
Operation principle .................................................................1232
Authorization handling in the IED.......................................1234
Authority management AUTHMAN...............................................1234
Identification............................................................................1234
AUTHMAN...............................................................................1235
Settings....................................................................................1235
FTP access with password FTPACCS.........................................1235
Identification............................................................................1235
FTP access with SSL, FTPACCS............................................1235
Settings....................................................................................1236
Authority status ATHSTAT...........................................................1236
Identification............................................................................1236
Functionality............................................................................1236
Function block.........................................................................1236
Signals.....................................................................................1236
Settings....................................................................................1237
Operation principle .................................................................1237
Self supervision with internal event list.........................................1237
Functionality............................................................................1237
Function block.........................................................................1237
Signals.....................................................................................1238
Settings....................................................................................1238
Operation principle..................................................................1238
Internal signals...................................................................1240
Supervision of analog inputs..............................................1241
Technical data.........................................................................1242
Time synchronization....................................................................1242
Functionality............................................................................1242
Function block.........................................................................1243
Signals.....................................................................................1243
Settings....................................................................................1243
Operation principle .................................................................1248
34
Technical Manual

Table of contents

General concepts...............................................................1248
Real-time clock (RTC) operation........................................1250
Synchronization alternatives..............................................1251
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization.................1254
Technical data.........................................................................1255
Parameter setting groups.............................................................1255
Functionality............................................................................1255
Function block.........................................................................1255
Signals.....................................................................................1255
Settings....................................................................................1256
Operation principle..................................................................1256
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK.................................................1258
Functionality............................................................................1258
Function block.........................................................................1258
Signals.....................................................................................1258
Settings....................................................................................1258
Operation principle .................................................................1259
Test mode functionality TEST......................................................1259
Functionality............................................................................1259
Function block.........................................................................1260
Signals.....................................................................................1260
Settings....................................................................................1260
Operation principle .................................................................1260
IED identifiers...............................................................................1262
Functionality............................................................................1262
Settings ...................................................................................1263
Product information......................................................................1263
Functionality............................................................................1263
Settings ...................................................................................1263
Factory defined settings..........................................................1264
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI............................................1264
Functionality............................................................................1264
Function block.........................................................................1265
Signals.....................................................................................1265
Operation principle..................................................................1266
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO .......................................1266
Functionality............................................................................1266
Function block.........................................................................1266
Signals.....................................................................................1266
Operation principle..................................................................1267
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI................................................1267
Functionality............................................................................1267
Function block.........................................................................1267
35
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Signals.....................................................................................1268
Operation principle..................................................................1268
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI...........................................1268
Functionality............................................................................1268
Frequency values....................................................................1269
Function block.........................................................................1270
Signals.....................................................................................1270
Settings....................................................................................1271
Operation principle .................................................................1273
Global base values GBASVAL.....................................................1274
Identification............................................................................1274
Functionality............................................................................1274
Settings....................................................................................1274
Primary system values PRIMVAL.................................................1274
Identification............................................................................1274
Functionality............................................................................1275
Settings....................................................................................1275
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM............................................1275
Functionality............................................................................1275
Function block.........................................................................1275
Signals.....................................................................................1275
Settings....................................................................................1276
Operation principle .................................................................1276
Denial of service DOS..................................................................1277
Functionality ...........................................................................1277
Function blocks........................................................................1277
Signals.....................................................................................1277
Settings....................................................................................1278
Monitored data.........................................................................1278
Operation principle..................................................................1280

Section 22 IED hardware.............................................................1281

Overview.......................................................................................1281
Variants of case size with local HMI display............................1281
Case from the rear side...........................................................1283
Hardware modules.......................................................................1288
Overview..................................................................................1288
Numeric processing module (NUM)........................................1289
Introduction.........................................................................1289
Functionality.......................................................................1289
Block diagram.....................................................................1290
Power supply module (PSM)...................................................1290
Introduction.........................................................................1290
Design................................................................................1290
36
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Technical data....................................................................1291
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)...........................1291
Transformer input module (TRM)............................................1291
Introduction.........................................................................1291
Design................................................................................1291
Technical data....................................................................1293
Analog digital conversion module, with time
synchronization (ADM) ...........................................................1294
Introduction.........................................................................1294
Design................................................................................1294
Binary input module (BIM).......................................................1296
Introduction.........................................................................1296
Design................................................................................1296
Signals................................................................................1299
Settings..............................................................................1300
Monitored data...................................................................1300
Technical data....................................................................1300
Binary output modules (BOM).................................................1301
Introduction.........................................................................1301
Design................................................................................1301
Signals................................................................................1303
Settings..............................................................................1303
Monitored data...................................................................1304
Technical data....................................................................1307
Static binary output module (SOM).........................................1308
Introduction.........................................................................1308
Design................................................................................1308
Signals................................................................................1309
Settings..............................................................................1310
Monitored data...................................................................1310
Technical data....................................................................1312
Binary input/output module (IOM)............................................1313
Introduction.........................................................................1313
Design................................................................................1313
Signals................................................................................1316
Settings..............................................................................1317
Monitored data...................................................................1317
Technical data....................................................................1319
mA input module (MIM)...........................................................1321
Introduction.........................................................................1321
Design................................................................................1321
Signals................................................................................1322
Settings..............................................................................1323
37
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Monitored data...................................................................1324
Technical data....................................................................1325
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ......................1325
Introduction.........................................................................1325
Design................................................................................1325
Technical data....................................................................1326
Galvanic RS485 communication module.................................1327
Introduction.........................................................................1327
Design................................................................................1327
Technical data....................................................................1328
Optical ethernet module (OEM)...............................................1329
Introduction.........................................................................1329
Functionality.......................................................................1329
Design................................................................................1329
Technical data....................................................................1330
Line data communication module (LDCM)..............................1330
Introduction.........................................................................1330
Design................................................................................1330
Technical data....................................................................1331
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)............1332
Introduction.........................................................................1332
Design................................................................................1333
Functionality.......................................................................1335
Technical data....................................................................1335
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)...............................1335
Introduction.........................................................................1335
Design................................................................................1336
Monitored data...................................................................1336
Technical data....................................................................1336
GPS antenna...........................................................................1336
Introduction.........................................................................1336
Design................................................................................1336
Technical data....................................................................1338
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B...........................1338
Introduction.........................................................................1338
Design................................................................................1338
Settings..............................................................................1339
Technical data....................................................................1339
Dimensions...................................................................................1340
Case without rear cover...........................................................1340
Case with rear cover................................................................1342
Flush mounting dimensions.....................................................1344
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions.................................1345
38
Technical Manual

Table of contents

Wall mounting dimensions.......................................................1346

External resistor unit for high impedance differential
protection.................................................................................1346
Mounting alternatives...................................................................1348
Flush mounting........................................................................1348
Overview............................................................................1348
Mounting procedure for flush mounting..............................1349
19 panel rack mounting..........................................................1350
Overview............................................................................1350
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting...............1351
Wall mounting..........................................................................1351
Overview............................................................................1351
Mounting procedure for wall mounting...............................1352
How to reach the rear side of the IED................................1353
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting...............................................1353
Overview............................................................................1353
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting..........1354
IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case...........1354
Side-by-side flush mounting....................................................1355
Overview............................................................................1355
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting.........1356
Technical data..............................................................................1356
Enclosure.................................................................................1356
Connection system..................................................................1357
Influencing factors...................................................................1357
Type tests according to standard............................................1358

Section 23 Labels.........................................................................1361
Labels on IED...............................................................................1361

Section 24 Connection diagrams.................................................1365

Section 25 IED and functionality tests..........................................1367
Section 26 Inverse time characteristics........................................1369
Application....................................................................................1369
Principle of operation....................................................................1372
Mode of operation....................................................................1372
Inverse characteristics..................................................................1377

Section 27 Glossary.....................................................................1407
Glossary.......................................................................................1407

39
Technical Manual

40

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 1

Introduction

1.1

This manual
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

1.2

Intended audience
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning
personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,
protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in
the IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic
knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

41
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

Decommissioning
Deinstalling & disposal

Maintenance

Operation

Product documentation set

Commissioning

1.3.1

Engineering

Product documentation

Planning & purchase

1.3

Installing

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN

Figure 1:

The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using
the various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides
instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project
structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of
protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication
engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP3.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The
manual provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters
are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED.
The manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for
assistance during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the
checking of external circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and

42
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

configuration as well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual

describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be
commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also during the service
and maintenance activities.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has
been commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring,
controlling and setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify
disturbances and how to view calculated and measured power grid data to
determine the cause of a fault.
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines
sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose
a typical protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance
for calculating settings.
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.
The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols
supported by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific
implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points
specific to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the
corresponding communication protocol manual.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical
reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and
during normal service.

1.3.2

Document revision history

Document revision/date
-/May 2014

History
First release

43
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction
1.3.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Related documents
Documents related to RET670

Identify number

Application manual

1MRK 504 138-UEN

Commissioning manual

1MRK 504 140-UEN

Product guide

1MRK 504 141-BEN

Technical manual

1MRK 504 139-UEN

Type test certificate

1MRK 504 141-TEN

670 series manuals

Identify number

Operation manual

1MRK 500 118-UEN

Engineering manual

1MRK 511 308-UEN

Installation manual

1MRK 514 019-UEN

Communication protocol manual, IEC

60870-5-103

1MRK 511 304-UEN

Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850

Edition 1

1MRK 511 302-UEN

Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850

Edition 2

1MRK 511 303-UEN

Communication protocol manual, LON

1MRK 511 305-UEN

Communication protocol manual, SPA

1MRK 511 306-UEN

Accessories guide

1MRK 514 012-BEN

Cyber security deployment guideline

1MRK 511 309-UEN

Connection and Installation components

1MRK 513 003-BEN

Test system, COMBITEST

1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4

Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1

Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard
which could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or

warning about the temperature of product surfaces.

44
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence
of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage
to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to
understand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged
equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury
or death. It is important that the user fully complies with all warning and
cautionary notices.

1.4.2

Document conventions

Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use
and
.
HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and
press
.
Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.

the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the

signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
the character * after an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
must be connected to another function block in the application
configuration to achieve a valid application configuration.

Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are
bordered by dashed lines.

45
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

1.4.3

Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts
and continues.
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in
another diagram have the suffix -cont.

IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Table 1:

IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Function block name

Edition 1 logical nodes

Edition 2 logical nodes

AEGPVOC

AEGGAPC

AEGPVOC

AGSAL

SECLLN0
AGSAL

AGSAL

ALMCALH

ALMCALH

ALTIM

ALTIM

ALTMS

ALTMS

ALTRK

ALTRK

BCZSPDIF

BCZSPDIF

BCZSPDIF

BCZTPDIF

BCZTPDIF

BCZTPDIF

BDCGAPC

SWSGGIO

BDCGAPC

BRCPTOC

BRCPTOC

BRCPTOC

BTIGAPC

B16IFCVI

BTIGAPC

BUSPTRC_B1

BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC

LLN0
BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B2

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B3

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B4

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B5

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B6

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B7

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B8

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B9

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B10

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B11

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B12

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B13

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B14

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B15

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B16

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B17

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

Table continues on next page

46
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block name

Edition 1 logical nodes

Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B18

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B19

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B20

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B21

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B22

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B23

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC_B24

BUSPTRC

BUSPTRC

BUTPTRC_B1

BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC

LLN0
BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC_B2

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC_B3

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC_B4

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC_B5

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC_B6

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC_B7

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC_B8

BUTPTRC

BUTPTRC

BZNSPDIF_A

BZNSPDIF

BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF

BZNSPDIF_B

BZNSPDIF

BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF

BZNTPDIF_A

BZNTPDIF

BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF

BZNTPDIF_B

BZNTPDIF

BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF

CBPGAPC

CBPLLN0
CBPMMXU
CBPPTRC
HOLPTOV
HPH1PTOV
PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC
RP3PDOP

LLN0
CBPPTRC
HOLPTOV
HPH1PTOV
PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC
RP3PDOP

CCPDSC

CCRPLD

CCPDSC

CCRBRF

CCRBRF

CCRBRF

CCSRBRF

CCSRBRF

CCSRBRF

CCSSPVC

CCSRDIF

CCSSPVC

CMMXU

CMMXU

CMMXU

CMSQI

CMSQI

CMSQI

COUVGAPC

COUVLLN0
COUVPTOV
COUVPTUV

LLN0
COUVPTOV
COUVPTUV

Table continues on next page

47
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block name

Edition 1 logical nodes

Edition 2 logical nodes

CVGAPC

GF2LLN0
GF2MMXN
GF2PHAR
GF2PTOV
GF2PTUC
GF2PTUV
GF2PVOC
PH1PTRC

LLN0
GF2MMXN
GF2PHAR
GF2PTOV
GF2PTUC
GF2PTUV
GF2PVOC
PH1PTRC

CVMMXN

CVMMXN

CVMMXN

DPGAPC

DPGGIO

DPGAPC

DRPRDRE

DRPRDRE

DRPRDRE

ECPSCH

ECPSCH

ECPSCH

ECRWPSCH

ECRWPSCH

ECRWPSCH

EF4PTOC

EF4LLN0
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC

LLN0
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC

EFPIOC

EFPIOC

EFPIOC

ETPMMTR

ETPMMTR

ETPMMTR

FDPSPDIS

FDPSPDIS

FDPSPDIS

FMPSPDIS

FMPSPDIS

FMPSPDIS

FRPSPDIS

FPSRPDIS

FPSRPDIS

FTAQFVR

FTAQFVR

FTAQFVR

FUFSPVC

SDDRFUF

FUFSPVC

GENPDIF

GENPDIF

LLN0
GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC

GOPPDOP

GOPPDOP

LLN0
GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC

GRPTTR

GRPTTR

LLN0
GRPTTR
GRPTUC

GSPTTR

GSPTTR

GSPTTR

GUPPDUP

GUPPDUP

LLN0
GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC

HZPDIF

HZPDIF

HZPDIF

INDCALCH

INDCALH

ITBGAPC

IB16FCVB

ITBGAPC

L3CPDIF

L3CPDIF

LLN0
L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC

L4UFCNT

L4UFCNT

L4UFCNT

Table continues on next page

48
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block name

Edition 1 logical nodes

Edition 2 logical nodes

L6CPDIF

L6CPDIF

LLN0
L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC

LAPPGAPC

LAPPLLN0
LAPPPDUP
LAPPPUPF

LLN0
LAPPPDUP
LAPPPUPF

LCCRPTRC

LCCRPTRC

LCCRPTRC

LCNSPTOC

LCNSPTOC

LCNSPTOC

LCNSPTOV

LCNSPTOV

LCNSPTOV

LCP3PTOC

LCP3PTOC

LCP3PTOC

LCP3PTUC

LCP3PTUC

LCP3PTUC

LCPTTR

LCPTTR

LCPTTR

LCZSPTOC

LCZSPTOC

LCZSPTOC

LCZSPTOV

LCZSPTOV

LCZSPTOV

LD0LLN0

LLN0

LLN0

LDLPSCH

LDLPDIF

LDLPSCH

LDRGFC

STSGGIO

LDRGFC

LEXPDIS

LEXPDIS

LLN0
LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC

LFPTTR

LFPTTR

LFPTTR

LMBRFLO

LMBRFLO

LMBRFLO

LOVPTUV

LOVPTUV

LOVPTUV

LPHD

LPHD

LPHD

LT3CPDIF

LT3CPDIF

LLN0
LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC

LT6CPDIF

LT6CPDIF

LLN0
LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC

MVGAPC

MVGGIO

MVGAPC

NS2PTOC

NS2LLN0
NS2PTOC
NS2PTRC

LLN0
NS2PTOC
NS2PTRC

NS4PTOC

EF4LLN0
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC

LLN0
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
PH1PTOC

OC4PTOC

OC4LLN0
GEN4PHAR
PH3PTOC
PH3PTRC

LLN0
GEN4PHAR
PH3PTOC
PH3PTRC

Table continues on next page

49
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block name

Edition 1 logical nodes

Edition 2 logical nodes

OEXPVPH

OEXPVPH

OEXPVPH

OOSPPAM

OOSPPAM

LLN0
OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC

OV2PTOV

GEN2LLN0
OV2PTOV
PH1PTRC

LLN0
OV2PTOV
PH1PTRC

PAPGAPC

PAPGAPC

PAPGAPC

PCFCNT

PCGGIO

PCFCNT

PH4SPTOC

OCNDLLN0
GEN4PHAR
PH1BPTOC
PH1PTRC

LLN0
GEN4PHAR
PH1BPTOC
PH1PTRC

PHPIOC

PHPIOC

PHPIOC

PRPSTATUS

RCHLCCH

RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH

PSLPSCH

ZMRPSL

PSLPSCH

PSPPPAM

PSPPPAM

LLN0
PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC

QCBAY

QCBAY

LLN0

QCRSV

QCRSV

QCRSV

REFPDIF

REFPDIF

REFPDIF

ROTIPHIZ

ROTIPHIZ

LLN0
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC

ROV2PTOV

GEN2LLN0
PH1PTRC
ROV2PTOV

LLN0
PH1PTRC
ROV2PTOV

SAPFRC

SAPFRC

SAPFRC

SAPTOF

SAPTOF

SAPTOF

SAPTUF

SAPTUF

SAPTUF

SCCVPTOC

SCCVPTOC

SCCVPTOC

SCILO

SCILO

SCILO

SCSWI

SCSWI

SCSWI

SDEPSDE

SDEPSDE

LLN0
SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC

SESRSYN

RSY1LLN0
AUT1RSYN
MAN1RSYN
SYNRSYN

LLN0
AUT1RSYN
MAN1RSYN
SYNRSYN

SINGLELCCH

SCHLCCH

SLGAPC

SLGGIO

SLGAPC

SMBRREC

SMBRREC

SMBRREC

SMPPTRC

SMPPTRC

SMPPTRC

Table continues on next page

50
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block name

Edition 1 logical nodes

Edition 2 logical nodes

SP16GAPC

SP16GGIO

SP16GAPC

SPC8GAPC

SPC8GGIO

SPC8GAPC

SPGAPC

SPGGIO

SPGAPC

SSCBR

SSCBR

SSCBR

SSIMG

SSIMG

SSIMG

SSIML

SSIML

SSIML

STBPTOC

STBPTOC

STBPTOC

STEFPHIZ

STEFPHIZ

STEFPHIZ

STTIPHIZ

STTIPHIZ

STTIPHIZ

SXCBR

SXCBR

SXCBR

SXSWI

SXSWI

SXSWI

T2WPDIF

T2WPDIF

LLN0
T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC

T3WPDIF

T3WPDIF

LLN0
T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC

TCLYLTC

TCLYLTC

TCLYLTC

TCMYLTC

TCMYLTC

TCMYLTC

TEIGAPC

TEIGGIO

TEIGAPC

TMAGAPC

TMAGGIO

TMAGAPC

TR1ATCC

TR1ATCC

TR1ATCC

TR8ATCC

TR8ATCC

TR8ATCC

TRPTTR

TRPTTR

TRPTTR

UV2PTUV

GEN2LLN0
PH1PTRC
UV2PTUV

LLN0
PH1PTRC
UV2PTUV

VDCPTOV

VDCPTOV

VDCPTOV

VDSPVC

VDRFUF

VDSPVC

VMMXU

VMMXU

VMMXU

VMSQI

VMSQI

VMSQI

VNMMXU

VNMMXU

VNMMXU

VRPVOC

VRLLN0
PH1PTRC
PH1PTUV
VRPVOC

LLN0
PH1PTRC
PH1PTUV
VRPVOC

VSGAPC

VSGGIO

VSGAPC

WRNCALH

WRNCALH

ZC1PPSCH

ZPCPSCH

ZPCPSCH

ZC1WPSCH

ZPCWPSCH

ZPCWPSCH

Table continues on next page

51
Technical Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block name

Edition 1 logical nodes

Edition 2 logical nodes

ZCLCPSCH

ZCLCPLAL

LLN0
ZCLCPSCH

ZCPSCH

ZCPSCH

ZCPSCH

ZCRWPSCH

ZCRWPSCH

ZCRWPSCH

ZCVPSOF

ZCVPSOF

ZCVPSOF

ZGVPDIS

ZGVLLN0
PH1PTRC
ZGVPDIS
ZGVPTUV

LLN0
PH1PTRC
ZGVPDIS
ZGVPTUV

ZMCAPDIS

ZMCAPDIS

ZMCAPDIS

ZMCPDIS

ZMCPDIS

ZMCPDIS

ZMFCPDIS

ZMFCLLN0
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS

LLN0
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS

ZMFPDIS

ZMFLLN0
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS

LLN0
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS

ZMHPDIS

ZMHPDIS

ZMHPDIS

ZMMAPDIS

ZMMAPDIS

ZMMAPDIS

ZMMPDIS

ZMMPDIS

ZMMPDIS

ZMQAPDIS

ZMQAPDIS

ZMQAPDIS

ZMQPDIS

ZMQPDIS

ZMQPDIS

ZMRAPDIS

ZMRAPDIS

ZMRAPDIS

ZMRPDIS

ZMRPDIS

ZMRPDIS

ZMRPSB

ZMRPSB

ZMRPSB

ZSMGAPC

ZSMGAPC

ZSMGAPC

52
Technical Manual

Section 2

Available functions

2.1

Main protection functions

= option quantities

3A03

= optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670

Transformer

RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

= number of basic instances

0-3

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

3-A02

3-A02

3-A02

2-B
1-A01

2-B
1-A01

RET670 (A25)

Section 2
Available functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Differential protection
T2WPDIF

87T

Transformer
differential
protection, two
winding

1-2

T3WPDIF

87T

Transformer
differential
protection, three
winding

1-2

HZPDIF

87

1Ph high
impedance
differential
protection

0-6

3-A02

REFPDIF

87N

Restricted earth
fault protection, low
impedance

0-3

LDRGFC

11RE
L

Additional security
logic for differential
protection

0-1

Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS,
ZMQAPDIS

21

Distance protection
zone, quadrilateral
characteristic

0-5

4-B12

4-B12

4-B12

4-B12

ZDRDIR

21D

Directional
impedance
quadrilateral

0-2

2-B12

2-B12

2-B12

2-B12

ZMCAPDIS

21

Additional distance
measuring zone,
quadrilateral
characteristic

Table continues on next page

53
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

RET670 (B40)

ZMCPDIS,
ZMCAPDIS

21

Distance
measuring zone,
quadrilateral
characteristic for
series
compensated lines

0-5

ZDSRDIR

21D

Directional
impedance
quadrilateral,
including series
compensation

0-2

FDPSPDIS

21

Phase selection,
quadrilateral
characteristic with
fixed angle

0-2

2-B12

2-B12

2-B12

2-B12

ZMHPDIS

21

Fullscheme
distance protection,
mho characteristic

0-5

4-B13

4-B13

4-B13

4-B13

ZMMPDIS,
ZMMAPDIS

21

Fullscheme
distance protection,
quadrilateral for
earth faults

0-5

4-B13

4-B13

4-B13

4-B13

ZDMRDIR

21D

Directional
impedance
element for mho
characteristic

0-2

2-B13

2-B13

2-B13

2-B13

ZDARDIR

Additional distance
protection
directional function
for earth faults

0-1

1-B13

1-B13

1-B13

1-B13

ZSMGAPC

Mho impedance
supervision logic

0-1

1-B13

1-B13

1-B13

1-B13

2-B13

2-B13

2-B13

2-B13

RET670

FMPSPDIS

21

Faulty phase
identification with
load
enchroachment

0-2

ZMRPDIS,
ZMRAPDIS

21

Distance protection
zone, quadrilateral
characteristic,
separate settings

0-5

FRPSPDIS

21

Phase selection,
quadrilateral
characteristic with
fixed angle

0-2

ZMFPDIS

21

High speed
distance protection

01

ZMFCPDIS

21

High speed
distance protection
for series
compensated lines

01

RET670 (A25)

RET670 (A40)

Transformer

RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table continues on next page

54
Technical Manual

68

PSLPSCH

Power swing
detection

0-1

Power swing logic

0-1

PSPPPAM

78

Pole slip/out-ofstep protection

0-1

OOSPPAM

78

Out-of-step
protection

01

Phase preference
logic

0-1

Underimpedance
for generators and
transformers

01

PPLPHIZ
ZGVPDIS

21

2.2

1-B12
1-B13

1-B12
1-B13

1-B12
1-B13

1-B12
1-B13

1-B14

1-B14

1-B14

1-B14

Back-up protection functions

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

Transformer
RET670 (B30)

Function
description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

RET670 (B40)

ZMRPSB

RET670 (A40)

RET670

Transformer

RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

RET670 (A25)

Section 2
Available functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

PHPIOC

50

Instantaneous
phase
overcurrent
protection

0-8

2-C19

OC4PTOC

51_671)

Four step phase

overcurrent
protection

0-8

2-C19

EFPIOC

50N

Instantaneous
residual
overcurrent
protection

0-8

2-C19

EF4PTOC

51N
67N2)

Four step
residual
overcurrent
protection

0-8

2-C19

NS4PTOC

46I2

Four step
directional
negative phase
sequence
overcurrent
protection

0-8

2-C42

2-C42

2-C42

3-C43

3-C43

2-C19

RET670

Current protection

Table continues on next page

55
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

RET670

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

Transformer
RET670 (B30)

Function
description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

1-C16

1-C16

1-C16

1-C16

1-C16

SDEPSDE

67N

Sensitive
directional
residual
overcurrent and
power protection

0-3

LCPTTR

26

Thermal overload
protection, one
time constant,
Celsius

02

LFPTTR

26

Thermal overload
protection, one
time constant,
Fahrenheit

02

TRPTTR

49

Thermal overload
protection, two
time constant

0-6

1B
1-C05

1B
1-C05

2B
1-C05

2B
1-C05

CCRBRF

50BF

Breaker failure
protection

0-6

CCPDSC

52PD

Pole discordance
protection

0-2

GUPPDUP

37

Directional
underpower
protection

0-2

1-C17

1-C17

1-C17

1-C17

GOPPDOP

32

Directional
overpower
protection

0-2

1-C17

1-C17

1-C17

1-C17

BRCPTOC

46

Broken
conductor check

Capacitor bank
protection

0-6

CBPGAPC
NS2PTOC

46I2

Negative
sequence time
overcurrent
protection for
machines

0-2

VRPVOC

51V

Voltage
restrained
overcurrent
protection

0-3

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV

27

Two step
undervoltage
protection

0-3

1-D01

1B
1-D01

1B
1-D01

1B
2-D02

1B
2-D02

2-D02

OV2PTOV

59

Two step
overvoltage
protection

0-3

1-D01

1B
1-D01

1B
1-D01

1B
1-D02

1B
1-D02

2-D02

Table continues on next page

56
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

Transformer
RET670 (B30)

Function
description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

1-D01

1B
1-D01

1B
1-D01

1B
1-D02

1B
1-D02

2-D02

1-D03

1-D03

2-D04

2-D04

RET670

ROV2PTOV

59N

Two step
residual
overvoltage
protection

0-3

OEXPVPH

24

Overexcitation
protection

0-2

VDCPTOV

60

Voltage
differential
protection

0-2

LOVPTUV

27

Loss of voltage
check

Frequency protection
SAPTUF

81

Underfrequency
protection

0-6

6-E01

6-E01

6-E01

6-E01

6-E01

SAPTOF

81

Overfrequency
protection

0-6

6-E01

6-E01

6-E01

6-E01

6-E01

SAPFRC

81

Rate-of-change
frequency
protection

0-6

6-E01

6-E01

6-E01

6-E01

6-E01

General current
and voltage
protection

0-9

6-F02

6-F02

6-F02

6-F02

Multipurpose filter

0-6

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC

General calculation
SMAIHPAC
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

57
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

RET670 (A25)

RET670 (B40)

RET670

Transformer

RET670 (A40)

Function description

RET670 (B30)

ANSI

RET670 (A30)

IEC 61850

Control and monitoring functions

RET670 (A10)

2.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

1-B, 2H01

1-B, 3H02

1-B, 4H03

1-H09

1-H09

1-H09

1-H09

1-H09

Control
SESRSYN

25

Synchrocheck,
energizing check and
synchronizing

0-6

APC30

Apparatus control for

up to 6 bays, max 30
apparatuses (6CBs)
incl. interlocking

0-1

QCBAY

Apparatus control

1+5/APC30

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

LOCREM

Handling of LRswitch
positions

1+5/APC30

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

LOCREMCTRL

LHMI control of PSTO

1+5/APC30

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

1+5/
APC3
0

TR1ATCC

90

Automatic voltage
control for tap
changer, single control

0-4

1-H11

1-H11

1-H11,
2-H16

1-H11,
2-H16

2
2-H16

TR8ATCC

90

Automatic voltage
control for tap
changer, parallel
control

0-4

1-H15

1-H15

1-H15,
2-H18

1-H15,
2-H18

2
2-H18

TCMYLTC

84

Tap changer control

and supervision, 6
binary inputs

0-4

TCLYLTC

84

Tap changer control

and supervision, 32
binary inputs

0-4

SLGAPC

Logic rotating switch

for function selection
and LHMI presentation

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

VSGAPC

Selector mini switch

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

DPGAPC

Generic
communication
function for Double
Point indication

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

SPC8GAPC

Single point generic

control 8 signals

AUTOBITS

AutomationBits,
command function for
DNP3.0

SINGLECMD

Single command, 16
signals

Table continues on next page

58
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

Transformer
RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

VCTRSEND

Horizontal
communication via
GOOSE for VCTR

GOOSEVCTRR
CV

Horizontal
communication via
GOOSE for VCTR

I103CMD

Function commands
for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

Function commands
generic for IEC
60870-5-103

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

I103POSCMD

IED commands with

position and select for
IEC 60870-5-103

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

I103IEDCMD

IED commands for

IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD

Function commands
user defined for IEC
60870-5-103

RET670

Secondary system supervision

CCSSPVC

87

Current circuit
supervision

0-5

Fuse failure
supervision

0-4

60

Fuse failure
supervision based on
voltage difference

0-4

1-G03

1-G03

1-G03

1-G03

1-G03

1-G03

94

Tripping logic

1-6

TMAGAPC

Trip matrix logic

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

ALMCALH

Logic for group alarm

WRNCALH

Logic for group

warning

INDCALH

Logic for group

indication

AND, OR, INV,

PULSETIMER,
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
RSMEMORY

Configurable logic
blocks

40-280

40-28
0

40-28
0

40-28
0

40-28
0

40-28
0

40-28
0

FUFSPVC
VDSPVC

Logic
SMPPTRC

Table continues on next page

59
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

Transformer
RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ANDQT, ORQT,
INVERTERQT,
XORQT,
SRMEMORYQ
T,
RSMEMORYQ
T,
TIMERSETQT,
PULSETIMERQ
T, INVALIDQT,
INDCOMBSPQ
T,
INDEXTSPQT

Configurable logic
blocks Q/T

01

SLGAPC,
VSGAPC, AND,
OR,
PULSETIMER,
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
INV

Extension logic
package

01

FXDSIGN

Fixed signal function

block

B16I

Boolean 16 to Integer
conversion

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

BTIGAPC

Boolean 16 to Integer
conversion with Logic
Node representation

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

IB16

Integer to Boolean 16
conversion

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

ITBGAPC

Integer to Boolean 16
conversion with Logic
Node representation

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

TEIGAPC

Elapsed time
integrator with limit
transgression and
overflow supervision

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

CVMMXN,
CMMXU,
VMMXU,
CMSQI,
VMSQI,
VNMMXU

Measurements

AISVBAS

Function block for

service value
presentation of
secondary analog
inputs

EVENT

Event function

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

RET670

Monitoring

Table continues on next page

60
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

Transformer
RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

DRPRDRE,
A1RADR,
A2RADR,
A3RADR,
A4RADR,
B1RBDR,
B2RBDR,
B3RBDR,
B4RBDR,
B5RBDR,
B6RBDR

Disturbance report

SPGAPC

Generic
communication
function for Single
Point indication

64

64

64

64

64

64

64

SP16GAPC

Generic
communication
function for Single
Point indication 16
inputs

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

MVGAPC

Generic
communication
function for Measured
Value

24

24

24

24

24

24

24

BINSTATREP

Logical signal status

report

RANGE_XP

Measured value
expander block

66

66

66

66

66

66

66

RET670

SSIMG

63

Gas medium
supervision

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

SSIML

71

Liquid medium
supervision

SSCBR

Circuit breaker
monitoring

0-6

3-M13

2-M12

4-M14

3-M13

6-M15

I103MEAS

Measurands for IEC

60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR

Measurands user
defined signals for
IEC 60870-5-103

I103AR

Function status autorecloser for IEC

60870-5-103

I103EF

Function status earthfault for IEC

60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

Function status fault

protection for IEC
60870-5-103

I103IED

IED status for IEC

60870-5-103

Table continues on next page

61
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

Transformer
RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

I103SUPERV

Supervison status for

IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

Status for user

defiend signals for
IEC 60870-5-103

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

L4UFCNT

Event counter with

limit supervision

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

PCFCNT

Pulse-counter logic

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

ETPMMTR

Function for energy

calculation and
demand handling

RET670

Metering

2.4

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

RET670

Transformer

RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

Communication

LONSPA, SPA

SPA
communication
protocol

ADE

LON
communication
protocol

HORZCOMM

Network variables
via LON

PROTOCOL

Operation
selection between
SPA and IEC
60870-5-103 for
SLM

RS485PROT

Operation
selection for
RS485

RS485GEN

RS485

DNPGEN

DNP3.0
communication
general protocol

Station communication

Table continues on next page

62
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

RET670

Transformer

RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

DNPGENTCP

DNP3.0
communication
general TCP
protocol

CHSERRS48
5

DNP3.0 for
EIA-485
communication
protocol

CH1TCP,
CH2TCP,
CH3TCP,
CH4TCP

DNP3.0 for TCP/

IP communication
protocol

CHSEROPT

DNP3.0 for TCP/

IP and EIA-485
communication
protocol

MST1TCP,
MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP

DNP3.0 for serial

communication
protocol

DNPFREC

DNP3.0 fault
records for TCP/IP
and EIA-485
communication
protocol

IEC61850-8-1

Parameter setting
function for IEC
61850

GOOSEINTLK
RCV

Horizontal
communication via
GOOSE for
interlocking

59

59

59

59

59

59

59

GOOSEBINR
CV

Goose binary
receive

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

GOOSEDPRC
V

GOOSE function
block to receive a
double point value

64

64

64

64

64

64

64

GOOSEINTR
CV

GOOSE function
block to receive an
integer value

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

GOOSEMVR
CV

GOOSE function
block to receive a
measurand value

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

GOOSESPRC
V

GOOSE function
block to receive a
single point value

64

64

64

64

64

64

64

GOOSEVCTR
CONF

GOOSE VCTR
configuration for
send and receive

Table continues on next page

63
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

RET670

Transformer

RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VCTRSEND

Horizontal
communication via
GOOSE for VCTR

GOOSEVCTR
RCV

Horizontal
communication via
GOOSE for VCTR

MULTICMDR
CV,
MULTICMDS
ND

Multiple command
and transmit

60/10

60/10

60/10

60/10

60/10

60/10

60/10

FRONT,
LANABI,
LANAB,
LANCDI,
LANCD

Ethernet
configuration of
links

GATEWAY

Ethernet
configuration of
link one

OPTICAL103

IEC 60870-5-103
Optical serial
communication

RS485103

IEC 60870-5-103
serial
communication for
RS485

AGSAL

Generic security
application
component

LD0LLN0

IEC 61850 LD0

LLN0

SYSLLN0

IEC 61850 SYS

LLN0

LPHD

Physical device
information

PCMACCS

IED Configuration
Protocol

SECALARM

Component for
mapping security
events on
protocols such as
DNP3 and IEC103

FSTACCS

Field service tool

access via SPA
protocol over
ethernet
communication

ACTIVLOG

Activity logging
parameters

ALTRK

Service Tracking

Table continues on next page

64
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)

RET670

Transformer

RET670 (B30)

Function description

RET670 (A30)

ANSI

RET670 (A10)

IEC 61850

SINGLELCCH

Single ethernet
port link status

PRPSTATUS

Dual ethernet port

link status

IEC 62439-3
parallel
redundancy
protocol

0-1

1-P03

1-P03

1-P03

1-P03

1-P03

1-P03

Binary signal
transfer receive/
transmit

6/36

6/36

6/36

6/36

6/36

6/36

6/36

Transmission of
analog data from
LDCM

6/3/3

6/3/3

6/3/3

6/3/3

6/3/3

6/3/3

6/3/3

Process bus
communication
IEC 61850-9-2 1)
PRP

Remote communication

Receive binary
status from remote
LDCM
Scheme communication
ECPSCH

85

Scheme
communication
logic for residual
overcurrent
protection

0-1

ECRWPSCH

85

Current reversal
and weak-end
infeed logic for
residual
overcurrent
protection

0-1

1) Only included for 9-2LE products

2.5
Table 2:

Basic IED functions

Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function

name

Description

INTERRSIG

Self supervision with internal event list

SELFSUPEVLST

Self supervision with internal event list

TIMESYNCHGEN

Time synchronization module

Table continues on next page

65
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850 or function
name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Description

SYNCHBIN,
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS,
SYNCHSNTP,
SYNCHSPA,
SYNCHCMPPS

Time synchronization

TIMEZONE

Time synchronization

DSTBEGIN,
DSTENABLE, DSTEND

GPS time synchronization module

IRIG-B

Time synchronization

SETGRPS

Number of setting groups

ACTVGRP

Parameter setting groups

TESTMODE

Test mode functionality

CHNGLCK

Change lock function

SMBI

Signal matrix for binary inputs

SMBO

Signal matrix for binary outputs

SMMI

Signal matrix for mA inputs

SMAI1 - SMAI20

Signal matrix for analog inputs

3PHSUM

Summation block 3 phase

ATHSTAT

Authority status

ATHCHCK

Authority check

AUTHMAN

Authority management

FTPACCS

FTP access with password

SPACOMMMAP

SPA communication mapping

SPATD

Date and time via SPA protocol

DOSFRNT

Denial of service, frame rate control for front port

DOSLANAB

Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB

DOSLANCD

Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD

DOSSCKT

Denial of service, socket flow control

GBASVAL

Global base values for settings

PRIMVAL

Primary system values

ALTMS

Time master supervision

ALTIM

Time management

ALTRK

Service tracking

ACTIVLOG

Activity logging parameters

FSTACCS

Field service tool access via SPA protocol over ethernet communication

PCMACCS

IED Configuration Protocol

SECALARM

Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103

DNPGEN

DNP3.0 communication general protocol

Table continues on next page

66
Technical Manual

Section 2
Available functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC 61850 or function

name

Description

DNPGENTCP

DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol

CHSEROPT

DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol

MSTSER

DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol

OPTICAL103

IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication

RS485103

IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485

IEC61850-8-1

Parameter setting function for IEC 61850

HORZCOMM

Network variables via LON

LONSPA

SPA communication protocol

LEDGEN

General LED indication part for LHMI

67
Technical Manual

68

Section 3
Analog inputs

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 3

Analog inputs

3.1

Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and
all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected
in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection
algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.
A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other
angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.
The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.

3.2

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.
The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in
the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool
they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED
and used internally in the configuration.

69
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs

3.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 3:
Name

TRM_12I Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

CH7(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 7

CH8(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 8

CH9(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 9

CH10(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 10

CH11(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 11

CH12(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 12

Table 4:
Name

TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

CH7(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 7

CH8(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 8

CH9(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 9

CH10(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 10

CH11(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 11

CH12(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 12

Table 5:
Name

TRM_6I Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

Table continues on next page

70
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

Table 6:
Name

TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

CH7(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 7

CH8(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 8

CH9(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 9

CH10(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 10

CH11(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 11

CH12(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 12

Table 7:
Name

TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

CH7(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 7

CH8(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 8

CH9(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 9

CH10(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 10

CH11(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 11

CH12(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 12

71
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs

3.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.

72
Technical Manual

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 8:

Section 3
Analog inputs

AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

73
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
PhaseAngleRef

74

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)
TRM40-Ch1
TRM40-Ch2
TRM40-Ch3
TRM40-Ch4
TRM40-Ch5
TRM40-Ch6
TRM40-Ch7
TRM40-Ch8
TRM40-Ch9
TRM40-Ch10
TRM40-Ch11
TRM40-Ch12
TRM41-Ch1
TRM41-Ch2
TRM41-Ch3
TRM41-Ch4
TRM41-Ch5
TRM41-Ch6
TRM41-Ch7
TRM41-Ch8
TRM41-Ch9
TRM41-Ch10
TRM41-Ch11
TRM41-Ch12
MU1-L1I
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
MU4-L1I
MU4-L2I
MU4-L3I
MU4-L4I
MU4-L1U
MU4-L2U
MU4-L3U
MU4-L4U
MU5-L1I
MU5-L2I
MU5-L3I
MU5-L4I
MU5-L1U
MU5-L2U
MU5-L3U
MU5-L4U
MU6-L1I
MU6-L2I
MU6-L3I
MU6-L4I
MU6-L1U
MU6-L2U
MU6-L3U
MU6-L4U

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
TRM40-Ch1

Description
Reference channel for phase angle
presentation

Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 9:
Name

TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint7

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec7

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim7

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint8

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec8

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim8

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint9

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec9

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim9

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint10

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec10

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim10

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint11

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec11

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

Table continues on next page

75
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTprim11

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint12

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec12

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim12

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

Table 10:
Name

TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

VTsec7

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim7

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec8

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim8

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec9

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim9

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec10

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim10

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec11

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

Table continues on next page

76
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

VTprim11

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec12

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim12

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

Step

Default

Table 11:

TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

Table 12:
Name

TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

Table continues on next page

77
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint7

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec7

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim7

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

VTsec8

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim8

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec9

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim9

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec10

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim10

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec11

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim11

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec12

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim12

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

Step

Default

Table 13:
Name

TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

Table continues on next page

78
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint7

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec7

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim7

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint8

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec8

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim8

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint9

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec9

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim9

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

VTsec10

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim10

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec11

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim11

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec12

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim12

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

3.5

Monitored data
Table 14:
Name
Status

AISVBAS Monitored data

Type
INTEGER

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

Unit
-

Description
Service value status

79
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 15:
Name
STATUS

Table 16:
Name
STATUS

Table 17:
Name
STATUS

Table 18:
Name
STATUS

Table 19:
Name
STATUS

3.6

TRM_12I Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

TRM_6I Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

Operation principle
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
into the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
out from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see
figure 2)

80
Technical Manual

Section 3
Analog inputs

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Forward means the direction is into the object.

Reverse means the direction is out from the object.
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Reverse

Definition of direction
for directional functions

Forward

Forward

Reverse

Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object

e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object

Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"

Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"
en05000456.vsd

IEC05000456 V1 EN

Figure 2:

Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject

or ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs
and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with their rated ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

81
Technical Manual

82

Section 4
Binary input and output modules

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 4

Binary input and output modules

4.1

Binary input

4.1.1

Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.
A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a
millisecond when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A
new debounced binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the
set DebounceTime value and the debounced input value is high or when the time
counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low. The default setting of
DebounceTime is 1 ms.
The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which
the counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down
to 0 again.

4.1.2

Oscillation filter
Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic
fields from for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the
disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.
An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the
counter value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked.
The input signal is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below
the set value OscRelease.

4.1.3

Settings

4.1.3.1

Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 20:
Name

BIM Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

On

Operation Off/On

DebounceTime

0.001 - 0.020

0.001

0.001

Debounce time for binary inputs

OscBlock

1 - 40

Hz

40

Oscillation block limit

OscRelease

1 - 30

Hz

30

Oscillation release limit

83
Technical Manual

Section 4
Binary input and output modules
4.1.3.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Setting parameters for binary input/output module

Table 21:

IOMIN Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

On

Binary input/output module in operation

(On) or not (Off)

DebounceTime

0.001 - 0.020

0.001

0.001

Debounce time for binary inputs

OscBlock

1 - 40

Hz

40

Oscillation block limit

OscRelease

1 - 30

Hz

30

Oscillation release limit

84
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 5

Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1

Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.2
Table 22:

SCREEN

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Settings
SCREEN Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DisplayTimeout

1 - 120

Min

10

Local HMI display timeout

ContrastLevel

-100 - 100

10

Contrast level for display

Default screen

DefaultScreen

EvListSrtOrder

Latest on top
Oldest on top

Latest on top

Sort order of event list

AutoIndicationDRP

Off
On

Off

Automatic indication of disturbance report

SubstIndSLD

No
Yes

No

Substitute indication on single line

diagram

InterlockIndSLD

No
Yes

No

Interlock indication on single line diagram

BypassCommands

No
Yes

No

Enable bypass of commands

5.2

Local HMI signals

5.2.1

Identification

5.2.2

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Local HMI signals

LHMICTRL

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block

85
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS

HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
IEC09000320-1-en.vsd

IEC09000320 V1 EN

Figure 3:

5.2.3

LHMICTRL function block

Signals
Table 23:

LHMICTRL Input signals

Name

Type

CLRLEDS

Table 24:

BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

LHMICTRL Output signals

Name

Type

Description

HMI-ON

BOOLEAN

Backlight of the LCD display is active

RED-S

BOOLEAN

Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady

YELLOW-S

BOOLEAN

Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady

YELLOW-F

BOOLEAN

Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing

CLRPULSE

BOOLEAN

A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCDHMI are cleared

LEDSCLRD

BOOLEAN

Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not

active

5.3

Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1

Identification
Function description

5.3.2

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Basic part for LED indication module

LEDGEN

Basic part for LED indication module

GRP1_LED1 GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 GRP3_LED15

Function block

86
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

LEDGEN
BLOCK
RESET

NEWIND
ACK
IEC09000321-1-en.vsd

IEC09000321 V1 EN

Figure 4:

LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN

Figure 5:

GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3

has a similar function block.

5.3.3

Signals
Table 25:
Name

LEDGEN Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Input to block the operation of the LEDs

RESET

BOOLEAN

Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Table 26:
Name

LEDGEN Output signals

Type

Description

NEWIND

BOOLEAN

New indication signal if any LED indication input

is set

ACK

BOOLEAN

A pulse is provided when the LEDs are

acknowledged

Table 27:
Name

GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

HM1L01R

BOOLEAN

Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

HM1L01Y

BOOLEAN

Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

HM1L01G

BOOLEAN

Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

87
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.3.4
Table 28:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

On

Operation Off/On

tRestart

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.0

Defines the disturbance length

tMax

0.1 - 100.0

0.1

1.0

Maximum time for the definition of a

disturbance

Table 29:
Name

GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SequenceType

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI

alarm group 1

LabelOff

0 - 18

G1L01_OFF

Label string shown when LED 1, alarm

group 1 is off

LabelRed

0 - 18

G1L01_RED

Label string shown when LED 1, alarm

group 1 is red

LabelYellow

0 - 18

G1L01_YELLOW

Label string shown when LED 1, alarm

group 1 is yellow

LabelGreen

0 - 18

G1L01_GREEN

Label string shown when LED 1, alarm

group 1 is green

5.3.5

Monitored data
Table 30:

GRP1_LED1 Monitored data

Name
LEDStatus

5.4.1

Type
INTEGER

Values (Range)
1=Red flash
2=Red steady
3=Yellow flash
4=Yellow steady
5=Green flash
6=Green steady
0=Off

Unit
-

Description
Status of LED 1, local
HMI alarm group 1

Identification
Function description
LCD part for HMI Function Keys
Control module

IEC 61850
identification
FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

88
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

5.4.2

Function block
^LEDCTL1

FNKEYMD1
^FKEYOUT1

IEC09000327 V1 EN

Figure 6:

FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block
for every function button.

5.4.3

Signals
Table 31:

FNKEYMD1 Input signals

Name

Type

LEDCTL1

BOOLEAN

Table 32:

Type

FKEYOUT1

Table 33:
Name

Description
LED control input for function key

FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name

5.4.4

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Output controlled by function key

Settings
FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Mode

Off
Toggle
Pulsed

Off

Output operation mode

PulseTime

0.001 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Pulse time for output controlled by

LCDFn1

LabelOn

0 - 18

LCD_FN1_ON

Label for LED on state

LabelOff

0 - 18

LCD_FN1_OFF

Label for LED off state

Table 34:

FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Type

Off
Menu shortcut
Control

MenuShortcut

Menu shortcut for

function key

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Function key type

89
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4

Operation principle

5.4.1

Local HMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC13000239-1-en.vsd
IEC13000239 V1 EN

Figure 7:

Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

Display (LCD)
Buttons
LED indicators
Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.4.1.1

Display
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x
240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting
the view depends on the character size and the view that is shown.

90
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

IEC13000063-2-en.vsd

IEC13000063 V2 EN

Figure 8:

Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too
long to be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is
indicated with three dots.
The content area shows the menu content.
The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in
and the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with
PCM600.
If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar
appears on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if
it does not fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

91
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC13000045-2-en.vsd
IEC13000045 V2 EN

Figure 9:

Truncated path

The number after the function instance, for example ETHFRNT:1, indicates the
instance number.
The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN

Figure 10:

Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs.
Three alarm LED pages are available.

92
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN

Figure 11:

Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each
panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button.
Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have
dynamic width that depends on the label string length that the panel contains.

5.4.1.2

LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start
and Trip.
There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related
to each three-color LED are divided into three pages.
There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in
one LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be
indicated since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority,
with red being the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one
page there is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another
page there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes
priority and is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation
mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.
Information pages for the alarm LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED
is indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up / Down
arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED.
Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED
panel as such.
The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any page
is lit. If there are un-acknowledged alarm LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks.
93

Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

To acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to
description of this menu for details).
There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons

and

. They represent the status of the circuit breaker.

5.4.1.3

Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either
as menu shortcut or control buttons.

IEC13000239-1-en.vsd
GUID-0C172139-80E0-45B1-8A3F-1EAE9557A52D V2 EN

Figure 12:

LHMI keypad

94
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

24

1
23

2
18

3
19

4
5
6

20
21

22

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17
IEC13000249-1-en.vsd

GUID-77E71883-0B80-4647-8205-EE56723511D2 V2 EN

Figure 13:

LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command pushbuttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6

Close

Open

Escape

Left

10

Down

11

Up

12

Right

13

Key

14

Enter

15

Remote/Local

16

Uplink LED

17

Not in use

18

Multipage

19

Menu

20

Clear

21

Help

22

Communication port

95
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

23

Programmable alarm LEDs

24

Protection status LEDs

5.4.2

LED

5.4.2.1

Functionality

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The function blocks HMI_LED and HMI_LEDS controls and supplies information
about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of the
function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is
selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by a HMI_LEDS
function block, that controls the color and the operating mode.
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting
or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used
as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

5.4.2.2

Status LEDs
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in the front of the IED, green, yellow
and red.
The green LED has a fixed function that present the healthy status of the IED. The
yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate
that a disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode
(flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.

5.4.2.3

Indication LEDs
Operating modes
Collecting mode

LEDs, which are used in collecting mode of operation, are accumulated

continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable
when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode

In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active
LEDs and activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only
LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6
(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A

96
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated
input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset

From local HMI

The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual

acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function
is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset
is performed via the

From function input

button and menus on the LHMI.

The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,

ACK_RST, to the function. This input can for example be configured to
a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the
button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects
indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

Automatic reset

The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED
follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each
LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 Follow type, the acknowledgment/reset
function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 Latched type with acknowledgement
are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched
type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type
and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning
S = Steady and F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color
corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected
sequence diagrams below.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:

97
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

= No indication
G=

= Steady light

Green

Y=

= Flash
R=

Yellow

Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN

Figure 14:

Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal

LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 15:

Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority
is as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated
in parallel is shown in Figure 16.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED

LED

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN

Figure 16:

Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing
instead of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if

98
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after
acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 17:

Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the

indication with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent
of if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In
Figure 18 it is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes
activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal.
The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority
signal resets.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED

LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN

Figure 18:

Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to Figure 19.

99
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN

Figure 19:

Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower

priority indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged
according to Figure 20.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN

Figure 20:

Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing
light have been alternated.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the
activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The
difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be
affected by the reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has
been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED
is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
100
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Activating
signal

LED

Reset
IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 21:

Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color
according to Figure 22.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED

LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN

Figure 22:

Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the
positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing
of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent
in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6
Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

101
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset

IEC01000239_2-en.vsd

IEC01000239 V2 EN

Figure 23:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.
Disturbance
tRestart

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 24:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

102
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Figure 25 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first
one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 25:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 26:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

103

Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.4.3

Function keys

5.4.3.1

Functionality

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the

left of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons.
Each button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application
configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can
control a binary signal.

5.4.3.2

Operation principle
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled
from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the
output status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in
turn be used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks,
binary I/O outputs etc.
FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and
parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and
parameters are normally set using the PST.

Operating sequence

The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.
Setting OFF
This mode always gives the output the value..
Input value

Output value
IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN

Figure 27:

Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE
In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input
has been written. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block
executes. The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.

104
Technical Manual

Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Input value

Output value
IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN

Figure 28:

Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED
In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this
time the output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function
block detects it being high and there is no output pulse.
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since
the edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the
output is zero; else the trigger edge is lost.
Input value
Output value

tpulse

tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd

IEC09000332 V1 EN

Figure 29:

Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

Input function

All inputs work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this
function block becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when
high. This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set
to off.

105
Technical Manual

106

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 6

Differential protection

6.1

Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and

T3WPDIF

6.1.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Transformer differential protection, twowinding

IEC 60617
identification

T2WPDIF

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87T

3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN

Transformer differential protection,

three-winding

T3WPDIF

87T

3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN

6.1.2

Functionality
The Transformer differential protection, two-winding T2WPDIF and Transformer
differential protection, three-winding T3WPDIF are provided with internal CT
ratio matching, vector group compensation and settable zero sequence current
elimination.
The function can be provided with up to six three-phase sets of current inputs. All
current inputs are provided with percentage bias restraint features, making the IED
suitable for two- or three-winding transformer in multi-breaker station arrangements.
Two-winding applications
two-winding power
transformer
xx05000048.vsd
IEC05000048 V1 EN

xx05000049.vsd

two-winding power
transformer with
unconnected delta
tertiary winding

IEC05000049 V1 EN

Table continues on next page

107
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

xx05000050.vsd
IEC05000050 V1 EN

two-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
two CT-sets on one
side
two-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
two CT-sets on both
sides

xx05000051.vsd
IEC05000051 V1 EN

Three-winding applications
three-winding power
transformer with all
three windings
connected

xx05000052.vsd
IEC05000052 V1 EN

three-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
two CT-sets on one
side
xx05000053.vsd
IEC05000053 V1 EN

Autotransformer with
two circuit breakers
and two CT-sets on
two out of three sides

xx05000057.vsd
IEC05000057 V1 EN

Figure 30:

CT group
arrangement for
differential protection

The setting facilities cover the application of the differential protection to all types
of power transformers and auto-transformers with or without load tap changer as
well as shunt reactors and local feeders within the station. An adaptive stabilizing
feature is included for heavy through-fault currents.By introducing the load tap
changer position, the differential protection pick-up can be set to optimum
sensitivity thus covering internal faults with low fault current level.
Stabilization is included for inrush and overexcitation currents respectively, crossblocking is also available. Adaptive stabilization is also included for system

108
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

recovery inrush and CT saturation during external faults. A high set unrestrained
differential current protection element is included for a very high speed tripping at
high internal fault currents.
Included is an sensitive differential protection element based on the theory of
negative sequence current component. This element offers the best possible
coverage of power transformer windings turn to turn faults.

6.1.3

Function block
T2WPDIF
I3PW1CT1*
TRIP
I3PW1CT2*
TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1*
TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2*
TRNSUNR
TAPOLTC1
TRNSSENS
OLTC1AL
START
BLOCK
STL1
BLKRES
STL2
BLKUNRES
STL3
BLKNSUNR
BLK2H
BLKNSSEN
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
BLKWAV
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2
BLKWAVL3
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG
IEC06000249_2_en.vsd
IEC06000249 V2 EN

Figure 31:

T2WPDIF function block

109
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

T3WPDIF
I3PW1CT1*
TRIP
I3PW1CT2*
TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1*
TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2*
TRNSUNR
I3PW3CT1*
TRNSSENS
I3PW3CT2*
START
TAPOLTC1
STL1
TAPOLTC2
STL2
OLTC1AL
STL3
OLTC2AL
BLK2H
BLOCK
BLK2HL1
BLKRES
BLK2HL2
BLKUNRES
BLK2HL3
BLKNSUNR
BLK5H
BLKNSSEN
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
BLKWAV
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2
BLKWAVL3
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG
IEC06000250_2_en.vsd
IEC06000250 V2 EN

Figure 32:

6.1.4

T3WPDIF function block

Signals
Table 35:
Name

T2WPDIF Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3PW1CT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding primary CT1

I3PW1CT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding primary CT2

I3PW2CT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding secondary CT1

I3PW2CT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding secondary CT2

TAPOLTC1

INTEGER

Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1

OLTC1AL

BOOLEAN

OLTC1 alarm

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKRES

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for restrained differential feature

BLKUNRES

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature

BLKNSUNR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential

feature

BLKNSSEN

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential

feature

110
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 36:
Name

T2WPDIF Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General, common trip signal

TRIPRES

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from restrained differential protection

TRIPUNRE

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection

TRNSUNR

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection

TRNSSENS

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection

START

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from any phase

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

BLK2H

BOOLEAN

Common second harmonic block signal from any

phase

BLK2HL1

BOOLEAN

Second harmonic block signal, phase L1

BLK2HL2

BOOLEAN

Second harmonic block signal, phase L2

BLK2HL3

BOOLEAN

Second harmonic block signal, phase L3

BLK5H

BOOLEAN

Common fifth harmonic block signal from any

phase

BLK5HL1

BOOLEAN

Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L1

BLK5HL2

BOOLEAN

Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L2

BLK5HL3

BOOLEAN

Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L3

BLKWAV

BOOLEAN

Common block signal, waveform criterion, from

any phase

BLKWAVL1

BOOLEAN

Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L1

BLKWAVL2

BOOLEAN

Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L2

BLKWAVL3

BOOLEAN

Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L3

IDALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases

OPENCT

BOOLEAN

An open CT was detected

OPENCTAL

BOOLEAN

Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a

delay ...

IDL1

REAL

Value of the instantaneous differential current,

phase L1

IDL2

REAL

Value of the instantaneous differential current,

phase L2

IDL3

REAL

Value of the instantaneous differential current,

phase L3

IDL1MAG

REAL

Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,

phase L1

IDL2MAG

REAL

Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,

phase L2

IDL3MAG

REAL

Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,

phase L3

IBIAS

REAL

Magnitude of the bias current, which is common

to all phases

IDNSMAG

REAL

Magnitude of the negative sequence differential

current
111

Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 37:
Name

T3WPDIF Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3PW1CT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding primary CT1

I3PW1CT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding primary CT2

I3PW2CT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding secondary CT1

I3PW2CT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding secondary CT2

I3PW3CT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding tertiary CT1

I3PW3CT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase winding tertiary CT2

TAPOLTC1

INTEGER

Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1

TAPOLTC2

INTEGER

Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 2

OLTC1AL

BOOLEAN

OLTC1 alarm

OLTC2AL

BOOLEAN

OLTC2 alarm

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKRES

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for restrained differential feature

BLKUNRES

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature

BLKNSUNR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential

feature

BLKNSSEN

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential

feature

Table 38:
Name

T3WPDIF Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General, common trip signal

TRIPRES

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from restrained differential protection

TRIPUNRE

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection

TRNSUNR

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection

TRNSSENS

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection

START

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from any phase

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

BLK2H

BOOLEAN

Common second harmonic block signal from any

phase

BLK2HL1

BOOLEAN

Second harmonic block signal, phase L1

BLK2HL2

BOOLEAN

Second harmonic block signal, phase L2

BLK2HL3

BOOLEAN

Second harmonic block signal, phase L3

BLK5H

BOOLEAN

Common fifth harmonic block signal from any

phase

Table continues on next page

112
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

6.1.5
Table 39:
Name

Type

Description

BLK5HL1

BOOLEAN

Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L1

BLK5HL2

BOOLEAN

Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L2

BLK5HL3

BOOLEAN

Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L3

BLKWAV

BOOLEAN

Common block signal, waveform criterion, from

any phase

BLKWAVL1

BOOLEAN

Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L1

BLKWAVL2

BOOLEAN

Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L2

BLKWAVL3

BOOLEAN

Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L3

IDALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases

OPENCT

BOOLEAN

An open CT was detected

OPENCTAL

BOOLEAN

Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a

delay ...

IDL1

REAL

Value of the instantaneous differential current,

phase L1

IDL2

REAL

Value of the instantaneous differential current,

phase L2

IDL3

REAL

Value of the instantaneous differential current,

phase L3

IDL1MAG

REAL

Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,

phase L1

IDL2MAG

REAL

Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,

phase L2

IDL3MAG

REAL

Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,

phase L3

IBIAS

REAL

Magnitude of the bias current, which is common

to all phases

IDNSMAG

REAL

Magnitude of the negative sequence differential

current

Settings
T2WPDIF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

SOTFMode

Off
On

On

Operation mode for switch onto fault

tAlarmDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

10.000

Time delay for diff currents alarm level

IDiffAlarm

0.05 - 1.00

IB

0.01

0.20

Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr,

usually W1 curr.

IdMin

0.05 - 0.60

IB

0.01

0.30

Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr,

usually W1 curr.

IdUnre

1.00 - 100.00

IB

0.01

10.00

Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of Winding 1

rated current

Table continues on next page

113
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CrossBlockEn

Off
On

On

Operation Off/On for cross-block logic

between phases

NegSeqDiffEn

Off
On

On

Operation Off/On for neg. seq.

differential protections

IMinNegSeq

0.02 - 0.20

IB

0.01

0.04

Neg. seq. curr. must be higher than this

level to be used

NegSeqROA

30.0 - 120.0

Deg

0.1

60.0

Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq.

fault discriminator

Unit

Step

Default

Table 40:

T2WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Description

EndSection1

0.20 - 1.50

IB

0.01

1.25

End of section 1, multiple of Winding 1

rated current

EndSection2

1.00 - 10.00

IB

0.01

3.00

End of section 2, multiple of Winding 1

rated current

SlopeSection2

10.0 - 50.0

0.1

40.0

Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain

characteristic, in %

SlopeSection3

30.0 - 100.0

0.1

80.0

Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain

characteristic, in %

I2/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

0.1

15.0

Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental

harm dif. curr. in %

I5/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

0.1

25.0

Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental

harm dif. curr. in %

OpenCTEnable

Off
On

Off

Open CT detection feature. Open

CTEnable Off/On

tOCTAlarmDelay

0.100 - 10.000

0.001

3.000

Open CT: time in s to alarm after an

open CT is detected

tOCTResetDelay

0.100 - 10.000

0.001

0.250

Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.

function is activated

tOCTUnrstDelay

0.10 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

Unrestrained diff. protection blocked

after this delay, in s

Step

Default

Table 41:

T2WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

GlobalBaseSelW1

1 - 12

Global base selector for winding 1

GlobalBaseSelW2

1 - 12

Global base selector for winding 2

ConnectTypeW1

WYE (Y)
Delta (D)

WYE (Y)

Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or Ddelta

ConnectTypeW2

WYE (Y)
Delta (D)

WYE (Y)

Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or Ddelta

Table continues on next page

114
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ClockNumberW2

0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]

0 [0 deg]

Phase displacement between W2 &

W1=HV winding, hour notation

ZSCurrSubtrW1

Off
On

On

Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for

W1 side, On / Off

ZSCurrSubtrW2

Off
On

On

Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for

W2 side, On / Off

TconfigForW1

No
Yes

No

Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1,

YES / NO

CT1RatingW1

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on

transf. W1 side

CT2RatingW1

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf.

W1 side

TconfigForW2

No
Yes

No

Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 2,

YES / NO

CT1RatingW2

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on

transf. W2 side

CT2RatingW2

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on

transf. W2 side

LocationOLTC1

Not Used
Winding 1 (W1)
Winding 2 (W2)

Not Used

Transformer winding where OLTC1 is

located

LowTapPosOLTC1

0 - 10

OLTC1 lowest tap position designation

(e.g. 1)

RatedTapOLTC1

1 - 100

OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position

designation (e.g. 6)

HighTapPsOLTC1

1 - 100

11

OLTC1 highest tap position designation

(e.g. 11)

TapHighVoltTC1

1 - 100

OLTC1 end-tap position with winding

highest no-load voltage

StepSizeOLTC1

0.01 - 30.00

0.01

1.00

Voltage change per OLTC1 step in

percent of rated voltage

Step

Default

Table 42:
Name

T3WPDIF Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

SOTFMode

Off
On

On

Operation mode for switch onto fault

feature

tAlarmDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

10.000

Time delay for diff currents alarm level

Table continues on next page

115
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection
Name

Unit

Step

Default

IDiffAlarm

0.05 - 1.00

IB

0.01

0.20

Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr,

usually W1 curr.

IdMin

0.05 - 0.60

IB

0.01

0.30

Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr,

usually W1 curr.

IdUnre

1.00 - 100.00

IB

0.01

10.00

Unrestr. prot. limit, multi. of base curr.

usually W1 curr.

CrossBlockEn

Off
On

On

Operation Off/On for cross-block logic

between phases

NegSeqDiffEn

Off
On

On

Operation Off/On for neg. seq.

differential protections

IMinNegSeq

0.02 - 0.20

IB

0.01

0.04

Neg. seq. curr. limit, mult. of base curr,

usually W1 curr.

NegSeqROA

30.0 - 120.0

Deg

0.1

60.0

Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq.

fault discriminator

Unit

Step

Default

Table 43:

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Description

T3WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Description

EndSection1

0.20 - 1.50

IB

0.01

1.25

End of section 1, multi. of base current,

usually W1 curr.

EndSection2

1.00 - 10.00

IB

0.01

3.00

End of section 2, multi. of base current,

usually W1 curr.

SlopeSection2

10.0 - 50.0

0.1

40.0

Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain

characteristic, in %

SlopeSection3

30.0 - 100.0

0.1

80.0

Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain

characteristic, in %

I2/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

0.1

15.0

Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental

harm dif. curr. in %

I5/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

0.1

25.0

Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental

harm dif. curr. in %

OpenCTEnable

Off
On

Off

Open CT detection feature. Open

CTEnable Off/On

tOCTAlarmDelay

0.100 - 10.000

0.001

3.000

Open CT: time in s to alarm after an

open CT is detected

tOCTResetDelay

0.100 - 10.000

0.001

0.250

Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.

function is activated

tOCTUnrstDelay

0.10 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

Unrestrained diff. protection blocked

after this delay, in s

Step

Default

Table 44:

T3WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

GlobalBaseSelW1

1 - 12

Global base selector for winding 1

GlobalBaseSelW2

1 - 12

Global base selector for winding 2

GlobalBaseSelW3

1 - 12

Global base selector for winding 3

ConnectTypeW1

WYE (Y)
Delta (D)

WYE (Y)

Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or Ddelta

Table continues on next page

116
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ConnectTypeW2

WYE (Y)
Delta (D)

WYE (Y)

Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or Ddelta

ConnectTypeW3

WYE (Y)
Delta (D)

Delta (D)

Connection type of winding 3: Y-wye or Ddelta

ClockNumberW2

0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]

0 [0 deg]

Phase displacement between W2 &

W1=HV winding, hour notation

ClockNumberW3

0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]

5 [150 deg lag]

Phase displacement between W3 &

W1=HV winding, hour notation

ZSCurrSubtrW1

Off
On

On

Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for

W1 side, On / Off

ZSCurrSubtrW2

Off
On

On

Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for

W2 side, On / Off

ZSCurrSubtrW3

Off
On

On

Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for

W3 side, On / Off

TconfigForW1

No
Yes

No

Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1,

YES / NO

CT1RatingW1

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on

transf. W1 side

CT2RatingW1

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf.

W1 side

TconfigForW2

No
Yes

No

Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 2,

YES / NO

CT1RatingW2

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on

transf. W2 side

CT2RatingW2

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on

transf. W2 side

TconfigForW3

No
Yes

No

Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 3,

YES / NO

CT1RatingW3

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on

transf. W3 side

CT2RatingW3

1 - 99999

3000

CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on

transf. W3 side

Table continues on next page

117
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

LocationOLTC1

Not Used
Winding 1 (W1)
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)

Not Used

Transformer winding where OLTC1 is

located

LowTapPosOLTC1

0 - 10

OLTC1 lowest tap position designation

(e.g. 1)

RatedTapOLTC1

1 - 100

OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position

designation (e.g. 6)

HighTapPsOLTC1

1 - 100

11

OLTC1 highest tap position designation

(e.g. 11)

TapHighVoltTC1

1 - 100

OLTC1 end-tap position with winding

highest no-load voltage

StepSizeOLTC1

0.01 - 30.00

0.01

1.00

Voltage change per OLTC1 step in

percent of rated voltage

LocationOLTC2

Not Used
Winding 1 (W1)
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)

Not Used

Transformer winding where OLTC2 is

located

LowTapPosOLTC2

0 - 10

OLTC2 lowest tap position designation

(e.g. 1)

RatedTapOLTC2

1 - 100

OLTC2 rated tap/mid-tap position

designation (e.g. 6)

HighTapPsOLTC2

1 - 100

11

OLTC2 highest tap position designation

(e.g. 11)

TapHighVoltTC2

1 - 100

OLTC2 end-tap position with winding

highest no-load voltage

StepSizeOLTC2

0.01 - 30.00

0.01

1.00

Voltage change per OLTC2 step in

percent of rated voltage

6.1.6

Monitored data
Table 45:
Name

T2WPDIF Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

OCTSIDE

INTEGER

Open CT side : 1 -> W 1

(pri), 2 -> W 2 (sec)

OPENCTIN

INTEGER

Open CT on Input : 1 for

input 1, 2 for input 2

OPENCTPH

INTEGER

Open CT in Phase : 1 for

L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3

IDL1MAG

REAL

Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L1

IDL2MAG

REAL

Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L2

Table continues on next page

118
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

REAL

Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L3

IBIAS

REAL

Magnitude of the bias

current, which is
common to all phases

IDNSMAG

REAL

Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current

Table 46:
Name

6.1.7

Type

IDL3MAG

T3WPDIF Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

OCTSIDE

INTEGER

Open CT side : 1 -> W 1

(pri), 2 -> W 2 (sec), 3 ->
W3

OPENCTIN

INTEGER

Open CT on Input : 1 for

input 1, 2 for input 2

OPENCTPH

INTEGER

Open CT in Phase : 1 for

L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3

IDL1MAG

REAL

Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L1

IDL2MAG

REAL

Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L2

IDL3MAG

REAL

Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L3

IBIAS

REAL

Magnitude of the bias

current, which is
common to all phases

IDNSMAG

REAL

Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current

Operation principle
The task of the power transformer differential protection is to determine whether a
fault is within the protected zone, or outside of the protected zone. The protected
zone is limited by the position of current transformers (see Figure 33), and in
principle can include more objects than just a transformer. If the fault is found to be
internal, the faulty power transformer must be quickly disconnected from the system.
The main CTs are normally supposed to be star connected. The main CTs can be
earthed in anyway (that is, either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). However
internally the differential function will always use reference directions towards the
protected transformer as shown in Figure 33. Thus the IED will always internally
measure the currents on all sides of the power transformer with the same reference

119
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

direction towards the power transformer windings as shown in Figure 33. For more
information see the Application manual.
IW1

E1S1

IW2

Z1S1

Z1S2

IW1

IW2

E1S2

IED

en05000186.vsd
IEC05000186 V1 EN

Figure 33:

Typical CT location and definition of positive current direction

Even in a healthy power transformer, the currents are generally not equal when
they flow through it. This is due to the ratio of the number of turns of the windings
and the connection group of the protected transformer. Therefore the differential
protection must first correlate all currents to each other before any calculation can
be performed.
First, compensation for the protected transformer transformation ratio and
connection group is made, and only then are the currents compared phase-wise.
This makes external auxiliary (interposing) current transformers unnecessary.
Conversion of all currents to the common reference side of the power transformer
is performed by pre-programmed coefficient matrices, which depends on the
protected power transformer transformation ratio and connection group. Once the
power transformer vector group, rated currents and voltages have been entered by
the user, the differential protection is capable to calculate off-line matrix
coefficients required in order to perform the on-line current comparison by means
of a fixed equation.
The negative-sequence-current-based internal-external fault discriminator, is used
with advantage in order to determine whether a fault is internal or external. It not
only positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can also
independently detect minor faults which may not be sensed by the "usual"
differential protection based on operate-restrain characteristic.
For all differential functions it is the common trip that is used to
initiate a trip of a breaker. The separate trip signals from the
different parts lacks the safety against maloperation. This will in
some cases result in a 6 ms time difference between, for example
restrained trip is issued and common trip is issued. The separate trip
signals are only used for information purpose of which part that has
caused the trip.

120
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

6.1.7.1

Function calculation principles

To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained
differential characteristics have been developed and is now adopted as the general
practice in the protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided
with a proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain
percentage differential current related to the current through the transformer. This
stabilizes the protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the
system to have good basic sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these
quantities are derived.

Fundamental frequency differential currents

The fundamental frequency differential current is a vectorial sum (sum of

fundamental frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from the different
sides of the protected power transformer.
Before any differential current can be calculated, the power transformer phase
shift, and its transformation ratio, must be accounted for. Conversion of all currents
to a common reference is performed in two steps:

all current phasors are phase-shifted to (referred to) the phase-reference side,
(whenever possible the first winding with star connection)
all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power
transformer (typically transformer high-voltage side)

The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on-line by the preprogrammed coefficient matrices, as shown in equation 1 for a two-winding power
transformer, and in equation 2 for a three-winding power transformer.
These are the internal compensation within the differential function.
The protected power transformer data is always entered per its
nameplate. The Differential function will correlate nameplate data
and select proper reference windings.

121
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IDL1
IL1_ W 1
IL1_ W 2
Un
_
W
2
IDL 2 = A IL 2 _ W 1 +

Un _ W 1 B IL 2 _ W 2
IDL3
IL3 _ W 1
IL3 _ W 2
1

(Equation 1)

EQUATION1880 V1 EN

where:
1.

is the resulting Differential Currents

2.

is the current contribution from the W1 side

3.

is the current contribution from the W2 side

IDL1
IL1_ W 1
IL1_ W 2
IL1_ W 3
IDL 2 = A IL 2 _ W 1 + Un _ W 2 B IL 2 _ W 2 + Un _ W 3 C IL 2 _ W 3

Un _ W 1

Un _ W 1

IL3 _ W 1
IDL3
IL3 _ W 2
IL3 _ W 3
1

(Equation 2)

EQUATION1556 V2 EN

where:
1.

is the resulting Differential Currents

2.

is the current contribution from the W1 side

3.

is the current contribution from the W2 side

4.

is the current contribution from the W3 side

and where, for equation 1 and equation 2:

IDL1

is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary amperes)

IDL2

is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L2 (in W1 side primary amperes)

IDL3

is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L3 (in W1 side primary amperes)

IL1_W1

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W1 side

IL2_W1

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W1 side

IL3_W1

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W1 side

IL1_W2

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W2 side

IL2_W2

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W2 side

IL3_W2

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W2 side

IL1_W3

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W3 side

IL2_W3

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W3 side

Table continues on next page

122
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IL3_W3

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W3 side

Ur_W1

is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1 side (setting parameter)

Ur_W2

is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W2 side (setting parameter)

Ur_W3

is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W3 side (setting parameter)

A, B and C

are three by three matrices with numerical coefficients

Values of the matrix A, B and C coefficients depend on:

1.
2.
3.

The Power transformer winding connection type, such as star (Y/y) or delta (D/
d)
The Transformer vector group such as Yd1, Dy11, YNautod5, Yy0d5 and so
on, which introduce phase displacement between individual windings currents
in multiples of 30.
The Settings for elimination of zero sequence currents for the individual
windings.

When the end user enters all these parameters, transformer differential function
automatically calculates the matrix coefficients. During this calculations the
following rules are used:
For the phase reference, the first winding with set star (Y) connection is always
used. For example, if the power transformer is a Yd1 power transformer, the HV
winding (Y) is taken as the phase reference winding. If the power transformer is a
Dy1, then the LV winding (y) is taken for the phase reference. If there is no star
connected winding, such as in Dd0 type of power transformers, then the HV delta
winding (D) is automatically chosen as the phase reference winding.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are in general composed of
currents of all sequences, that is, the positive-, the negative-, and the zero-sequence
currents. If the zero-sequence currents are eliminated (see section "Optional
Elimination of zero sequence currents"), then the differential currents can consist
only of the positive-, and the negative-sequence currents. When the zero-sequence
current is subtracted on one side of the power transformer, then it is subtracted
from each individual phase current.
As it can be seen from equation 1 and equation 2 the first entered winding (W1) is
always taken for ampere level reference (current magnitudes from all other sides
are always transferred to W1 side). In other words, within the differential
protection function, all differential currents and bias current are always expressed
in HV side primary Amperes.
It can be shown that the values of the matrix A, B & C coefficients (see equation 1
and equation 2) can be pre-calculated in advance depending on the relative phase
shift between the reference winding and other power transformer windings.
Table 47 summarizes the values of the matrices for all standard phase shifts
between windings.

123
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 47:

Matrices for differential current calculation

Matrix with Zero Sequence
Reduction set to On

Matrix for Reference Winding

2 -1 -1
1
-1 2 -1

3
-1 -1 2

Matrix for winding with 30

lagging

1 -1 0
0 1 -1

3
-1 0 1

1
1
1
3
-2

-2
1
1

-2

1
(Equation 6)

0 -1 1
1 0 -1

3
-1 1 0

-1 -1 2
1
2 -1 -1

3
-1 2 -1
-1 0 1
1 -1 0

3
0 1 -1

EQUATION1235 V1 EN

Matrix for winding which is in

opposite phase

-2
1
1
3
1

Matrix for winding with 150

leading

(Equation 12)

-1 1 0
0 -1 1

3
1 0 -1

EQUATION1238 V1 EN

EQUATION1234 V1 EN

(Equation 10)

Not applicable. Matrix on the

left used.

(Equation 11)

-2 1

1 -2

EQUATION1236 V1 EN

Not applicable. Matrix on the

left used.

0 0 1
1 0 0

0 1 0
(Equation 9)

EQUATION1233 V1 EN

Matrix for winding with 150

lagging

(Equation 7)

EQUATION1231 V1 EN

(Equation 8)

EQUATION1232 V1 EN

Matrix for winding with 120

lagging

Not applicable. Matrix on the

left used.

0 -1 0
0 0 -1

-1 0 0

EQUATION1230 V1 EN

Matrix for winding with 90

lagging

(Equation 4)

EQUATION1228 V1 EN

(Equation 5)

EQUATION1229 V1 EN

Matrix for winding with 60

lagging

1 0 0
0 1 0

0 0 1
(Equation 3)

EQUATION1227 V1 EN

Matrix with Zero Sequence

Reduction set to Off

-1 0 0
0 -1 0

0 0 -1
EQUATION1237 V1 EN

(Equation 13)

Not applicable. Matrix on the

left used.

(Equation 14)

Table continues on next page

124
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Matrix with Zero Sequence

Reduction set to On
Matrix for winding with 120
leading

-1 2 -1
1
-1 -1 2

3
2 -1 -1
EQUATION1239 V1 EN

Matrix for winding with 90

leading

0 1 -1
-1 0 1

3
1 -1 0

EQUATION1241 V1 EN

Matrix for winding with 60

leading

1
1
-2
3
1

-2
1

-2

(Equation 18)

1 0 -1
1
-1 1 0

3
0 -1 1
EQUATION1244 V1 EN

0 1 0
0 0 1

1 0 0
EQUATION1240 V1 EN

(Equation 16)

Not applicable. Matrix on the

left used.

(Equation 17)

EQUATION1242 V1 EN

Matrix for winding with 30

leading

(Equation 15)

Matrix with Zero Sequence

Reduction set to Off

0 0 -1
-1 0 0

0 -1 0
EQUATION1243 V1 EN

(Equation 19)

Not applicable. Matrix on the

left used.

(Equation 20)

By using this table complete equation for calculation of fundamental frequency

differential currents for two winding power transformer with YNd5 vector group
and enabled zero sequence current reduction on HV side will be derived. From the
given power transformer vector group the following is possible to be concluded:
1.
2.

The HV star (Y) connected winding will be used as the reference winding and
zero sequence currents shall be subtracted on that side
The LV winding is lagging for 150

With the help of table 47, the following matrix equation can be written for this
power transformer:

IDL1
2 -1 -1 IL1_ W1
-1 0 1 IL1_ W 2
IDL2 = 1 -1 2 -1 IL2 _ W1 + Ur _ W 2 1 1 -1 0 IL2 _ W 2

3

Ur _ W1 3

IDL3
-1 -1 2 IL3_ W1
0 1 -1 IL3_ W 2
(Equation 21)

EQUATION2015 V1 EN

where:
IDL1

is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary amperes)

IDL2

is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L2 (in W1 side primary amperes)

IDL3

is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L3 (in W1 side primary amperes)

IL1_W1

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W1 side

Table continues on next page

125
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IL2_W1

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W1 side

IL3_W1

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W1 side

IL1_W2

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W2 side

IL2_W2

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W2 side

IL3_W2

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W2 side

Ur_W1

is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1 side (setting parameter)

Ur_W2

is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W2 side (setting parameter)

As marked in equation 1 and equation 2, the first term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from
the W1 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for
eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of
the equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents
from the W2 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated
for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer
W1 side. The third term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total
contribution from the individual phase currents from the W3 side to the
fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These
current contributions are important, because they are used for calculation of
common bias current.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are the "usual" differential
currents, the magnitudes which are applied in a phase-wise manner to the operate restrain characteristic of the differential protection. The magnitudes of the
differential currents can be read as service values from the function and they are
available as outputs IDL1MAG, IDL2MAG, IDL3MAG from the differential
protection function block. Thus they can be connected to the disturbance recorder
and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault condition.

On-line compensation for load tap changer movement

A load tap changer is a mechanical device, which is used to step-wise change

number of turns within one power transformer winding. Consequently the power
transformer overall turns ratio is changed. Typically the load tap changer is located
within the HV winding (that is, winding 1, W1) of the power transformer. By
operating load tap changer, it is possible to step-wise regulate voltage on the LV
side of the power transformer. However at the same time the differential protection
for power transformer becomes unbalanced. Differential function in the IED has builtin feature to continuously monitor the load tap changer position and dynamically
compensate on-line for changes in power transformer turns ratio.
Differential currents are calculated as shown in equation 1 and equation 2. By
setting parameters, the winding location of the OLTC is defined. Also, the voltage
change of each step. Thus, if for example the load tap changer is located within
winding 1 the no-load voltage Vn_W1 will be treated as a function of the actual
load tap changer position in equation 1 and equation 2. Thus for every load tap
changer position a corresponding value for Ur_W1 will be calculated and used in
126
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

the above mentioned equations. By doing this, complete on-line compensation for
load tap changer movement is achieved. Differential protection will be ideally
balanced for every load tap changer position and no false differential current will
appear irrespective of actual load tap changer position.
Typically the minimum differential protection pickup for power transformer with
load tap changer is set between 30% to 40%. However with this load tap changer
compensation feature it is possible to set the differential protection in the IED more
sensitive with a pickup value of 15% to 20%.
Load tap changer position is measured within the IED by Tap changer control and
supervision, (TCLYLTC). Within this function block, the load tap changer position
value is continuously monitored to insure its integrity.
When any error in the load tap changer position is detected an alarm is given. This
signal shall be connected to the OLTCxAL input of the differential function block.
While OLTCxAL input has a logical value of one the differential protection
minimum pickup, originally defined by setting parameter IdMin, will be increased
by the set range of the load tap changer. Alternatively the differential current alarm
feature can be used to alarm for any problems in the whole load tap changer
compensation chain.
It shall be noted that:

two-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for one
load tap changer within the protected power transformer
three-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for up
to two load tap changers within the protected power transformer

Differential current alarm

Fundamental frequency differential current level is monitored all the time within
the differential function. As soon as all three fundamental frequency differential
currents are above the set threshold defined by setting parameter IDiffAlarm a
delay on pickup timer is started. When the pre-set time, defined by setting
parameter tAlarmDelay, has expired the differential current alarm is generated and
output signal IDALARM is set to logical value one. This feature can be effectively
used to provide alarm when load tap changer position compensation is used and
something in the whole compensation chain goes wrong. This alarm can be as well
used with some additional IED configuration logic to desensitize the differential
function.

Bias current

The bias current is calculated as the highest current amongst all individual winding
current contributions to the total fundamental frequency differential currents, as
shown in equation 1 and equation 2. All individual winding current contributions
are already referred to the power transformer winding one side (power transformer
HV winding) and therefore they can be compared regarding their magnitudes.
There are six (or nine in the case of a three-winding transformer) contributions to
the total fundamental differential currents, which are the candidates for the
127
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

common bias current. The highest individual current contribution is taken as a

common bias (restrain) current for all three phases. This "maximum principle"
makes the differential protection more secure, with less risk to operate for external
faults and in the same time brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the
operate - restrain characteristic.
It shall be noted that if the zero-sequence currents are subtracted from the separate
contributions to the total differential current, then the zero-sequence component is
automatically eliminated from the bias current as well. This ensures that for
secondary injection from just one power transformer side the bias current is always
equal to the highest differential current regardless of the fault type. During normal
through-load operation of the power transformer, the bias current is equal to the
maximum load current from two (three) -power transformer windings.
The magnitudes of the common bias (restrain) current expressed in HV side
amperes can be read as service value from the function. At the same time it is
available as an output IBIAS from the differential protection function block. It can
be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any
external or internal fault condition.
For application with so called "T" configuration, that is, two restraint CT inputs
from one side of the protected power transformer, such as in the case of breaker-anda-half schemes the primary CT ratings can be much higher than the rating of the
protected power transformer. In order to determine the bias current for such T
configuration, the two separate currents flowing in the T-side are scaled down to
the protected power transform level by means of additional settings. This is done in
order to prevent unwanted de-sensitizing of the overall differential protection. In
addition to that, the resultant currents (the sum of two currents) into the protected
power transformer winding, which is not directly measured is calculated, and
included in the common bias calculation. The rest of the bias calculation procedure
is the same as in protection schemes without breaker-and-a-half arrangements.

Optional Elimination of zero sequence currents

To avoid unwanted trips for external earth-faults, the zero sequence currents should
be subtracted on the side of the protected power transformer, where the zero
sequence currents can flow at external earth -faults.
The zero sequence currents can be explicitly eliminated from the differential
currents and common bias current calculation by special, dedicated parameter
settings, which are available for every individual winding.
Elimination of the zero sequence component of current is necessary whenever:

the protected power transformer cannot transform the zero sequence currents
to the other side.
the zero sequence currents can only flow on one side of the protected power
transformer.

In most cases, power transformers do not properly transform the zero sequence
current to the other side. A typical example is a power transformer of the star-delta
128
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

type, for example YNd1. Transformers of this type do not transform the zero
sequence quantities, but zero sequence currents can flow in the earthed starconnected winding. In such cases, an external earth-fault on the star-side causes
zero sequence current to flow on the star-side of the power transformer, but not on
the other side. This results in false differential currents - consisting exclusively of
the zero sequence currents. If high enough, these false differential currents can
cause an unwanted disconnection of the healthy power transformer. They must
therefore be subtracted from the fundamental frequency differential currents if an
unwanted trip is to be avoided.
For delta windings this feature shall be enabled only if an earthing transformer
exists within the differential zone on the delta side of the protected power transformer.
Removing the zero sequence current from the differential currents decreases to
some extent the sensitivity of the differential protection for internal earth -faults. In
order to counteract this effect to some degree, the zero sequence current is
subtracted not only from the three fundamental frequency differential currents, but
from the bias current as well.

Restrained and unrestrained limits of the differential protection

The power transformer differential protection function uses two limits, to which
actual magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency differential currents are
compared at each execution of the function.
The unrestrained (that is, non-stabilized, "instantaneous") part of the differential
protection is used for very high differential currents, where it should be beyond any
doubt, that the fault is internal. This settable limit is constant and not proportional
to the bias current. Neither harmonic, nor any other restrain is applied to this limit,
which is therefore allowed to trip the power transformer instantaneously.
The restrained (stabilized) part of the differential protection compares the
calculated fundamental differential (operating) currents and the bias (restrain)
current, by applying them to the operate - restrain characteristic. Practically, the
magnitudes of the individual fundamental frequency differential currents are
compared with an adaptive limit. This limit is adaptive because it is dependent on
the bias (that is, restrain) current magnitude. This limit is called the operate restrain characteristic. It is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint
characteristic, as shown in figure 34. The restrained characteristic is determined by
the following 5 settings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, multiple of trans. HV side rated current set

under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
EndSection1 (End of section 1, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
EndSection2 (End of section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
129

Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The restrained characteristic in figure 34 is defined by the settings:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

IdMin
EndSection1
EndSection2
SlopeSection2
SlopeSection3

operate current
[ times IBase ]

Operate

unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit

Operate

conditionally

2
Section 1

Section 2

Section 3
SlopeSection3

1
IdMin
SlopeSection2

Restrain

0
0

EndSection1
EndSection2

restrain current
[ times IBase ]

en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN

Figure 34:

Description of the restrained, and the unrestrained operate

characteristics

where:

slope = D Ioperate 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN

The operate - restrain characteristic is tailor-made and can be designed freely by

the user after his needs. The default characteristic is recommended to be used. It
gives good results in a majority of applications. The operate - restrain characteristic
has in principle three sections with a section-wise proportionality of the operate

130
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

value to the bias (restrain) current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic
equal to 0.95.
Section 1: This is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal
currents flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for
higher false differential currents is relatively low. An un-compensated on-load tapchanger is a typical reason for existence of the false differential currents in this
section. The slope in section 1 is always zero percent.
Section 2: In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to
cope with false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents
through the current transformers.
Section 3: The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher
tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault
currents, which may be expected in this section.
The operate - restrain characteristic should be designed so that it can be expected that:

for internal faults, the operate (differential) currents are always with a good
margin above the operate - restrain characteristic
for external faults, the false (spurious) operate currents are with a good margin
below the operate - restrain characteristic

Fundamental frequency negative sequence differential currents

Existence of relatively high negative sequence currents is in itself a proof of a

disturbance on the power system, possibly a fault in the protected power
transformer. The negative-sequence currents are a measurable indication of an
abnormal condition, similar to the zero sequence current. One of the several
advantages of the negative sequence currents compared to the zero sequence
currents is that they provide coverage for phase-to-phase and power transformer turnto-turn faults. Theoretically, the negative sequence currents do not exist during
symmetrical three-phase faults, however they do appear during initial stage of such
faults for a long enough time (in most cases) for the IED to make the proper
decision. Further, the negative sequence currents are not stopped at a power
transformer by the Yd, or Dy connection type. The negative sequence currents are
always properly transformed to the other side of any power transformer for any
external disturbance. Finally, the negative sequence currents are not affected by
symmetrical through-load currents.
For power transformer differential protection applications, the negative sequence
based differential currents are calculated by using exactly the same matrix
equations, which are used to calculate the traditional phase-wise fundamental
frequency differential currents. The same equation shall be fed by the negative
sequence currents from the two power transformer sides instead of individual phase
currents, as shown in matrix equation 23 for a case of two-winding, YNd5 power
transformer.

131
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IDL1 _ NS
2
IDL 2 _ NS = 1 -1

3
IDL3 _ NS
-1

-1
2
-1

-1

INS _ W 1
Ur _ W 2

-1 a INS _ W 1 +

2
Ur _ W 1
a INS _ W 1
2

-1
1
3
0

0
-1
1

INS _ W 2
0 a INS _ W 2
2

a INS _ W 2
-1
1

3
(Equation 23)

EQUATION1247 V1 EN

where:
1.

is the Negative Sequence Differential Currents

2.

is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W1 side

3.

is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W2 side

and where:
IDL1_NS

is the negative sequence differential current in phase L1 (in

W1 side primary amperes)

IDL2_NS

is the negative sequence differential current in phase L2 (in

W1 side primary amperes)

IDL3_NS

is the negative sequence differential current in phase L3 (in

W1 side primary amperes)

INS_W1

is the negative sequence current on the W1 side in primary

amperes (phase L1 reference)

INS_W2

is the negative sequence current on the W2 side in primary

amperes (phase L1 reference)

Ur_W1

is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1

side (setting parameter)

Ur_W2

is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2

side (setting parameter)

is the complex operator for sequence quantities,

a=e

j 120

=-

EQUATION1248 V1 EN

1
2

+ j

3
2
(Equation 24)

Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical three phase
current system on each transformer side (that is, negative sequence currents in
every phase will always have the same magnitude and be phase displaced for 120
electrical degrees from each other), it is only necessary to calculate the first
negative sequence differential current that is, IDL1_NS.
As marked in equation 23, the first term on the right hand side of the equation,
represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from the W1 side
compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the
right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution of the negative
sequence current from the W2 side compensated for eventual power transformer
132
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These negative
sequence current contributions are phasors, which are further used in directional
comparisons, to characterize a fault as internal or external. See section "Internal/
external fault discriminator" for more information.
The magnitudes of the negative sequence differential current expressed in the HV
side A can be read as service values from the function. In the same time it is
available as outputs IDNSMAG from the differential protection function block.
Thus, it can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded
during any external or internal fault condition.

Internal/external fault discriminator

The internal/external fault discriminator is a very powerful and reliable

supplementary criterion to the traditional differential protection. It is recommended
that this feature shall be always used (that is, On) when protecting three-phase
power transformers. The internal/external fault discriminator detects even minor
faults, with a high sensitivity and at high speed, and at the same time discriminates
with a high degree of dependability between internal and external faults.
The internal/external fault discriminator responds to the magnitudes and the
relative phase angles of the negative-sequence fault currents at the different
windings of the protected power transformer. The negative sequence fault currents
must first be referred to the same phase reference side, and put to the same
magnitude reference. This is done by the matrix expression (see equation 23).
Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator is based on the relative
position of the two phasors representing the winding one (W1) and winding two
(W2) negative sequence current contributions, respectively, defined by expression
shown in equation 23. It performs a directional comparison between these two
phasors. First, the LV side phasor is referred to the HV side (W1 side): both the
magnitude, and the phase position are referred to the HV (W1 side). Then the
relative phase displacement between the two negative sequence current phasors is
calculated. In case of three-winding power transformers, a little more complex
algorithm is applied, with two directional tests. The overall directional
characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator is shown in figure 35,
where the directional characteristic is defined by two setting parameters:
1.
2.

IMinNegSeq
NegSeqROA

133
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

90 deg
120 deg
If one or the
other of
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
is done, and
120 degrees
is mapped

Internal/external
fault boundary

NegSeqROA
(Relay
Operate
Angle)

180 deg

0 deg

IMinNegSeq

Internal
fault
region

External
fault
region

270 deg

en05000188-3-en.vsd

IEC05000188 V3 EN

Figure 35:

Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator

In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes

must be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the
other hand, in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault
discriminator, the value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this
limit value, called IminNegSeq, is settable in the range of 0.02 to 0.20 times the
IBase of the power transformer winding one. The default value is 0.04. Note that,
in order to enhance stability at higher fault currents, the relatively very low
threshold value IminNegSeq is dynamically increased at currents higher than
normal currents: if the bias current is higher than 110% of IBase ,then 10% of the
bias current is added to the IminNegSeq. Only if the magnitudes of both negative
sequence current contributions are above the actual limit, the relative position
between these two phasors is checked. If either of the negative sequence current
contributions, which should be compared, is too small (less than the set value for
IminNegSeq), no directional comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to
produce a wrong decision. This magnitude check guarantees stability of the
algorithm, when the power transformer is energized. The setting NegSeqROA
represents the Relay Operate Angle, which determines the boundary between the
internal and external fault regions. It can be selected in a range from 30 degrees to
90 degrees, with a step of 0.1 degree. The default value is 60 degrees. The
default setting 60 degree favours security in comparison to dependability.
If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault
discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence

134
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

current contributions from W1 and W2 sides of the power transformer using the
following two rules:

If the negative sequence current contributions from the W1 and the W2 sides
are in phase, the fault is internal (that is, both phasors are within protected zone)
If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are 180
degrees out of phase, the fault is external (that is, W1 phasors is outside
protected zone)

For example, for any unsymmetrical external fault, ideally the respective negative
sequence current contributions from the W1 and W2 power transformer sides will
be exactly 180 degrees apart and equal in magnitude, regardless the power
transformer turns ratio and phase displacement. An example is shown in figure 36,
which shows trajectories of the two separate phasors representing the negative
sequence current contributions from the HV and LV sides of an Yd5 power
transformer (after compensation of the transformer turns ratio and phase
displacement) by using equation 23) for an unsymmetrical external fault. Observe
that the relative phase angle between these two phasors is 180 electrical degrees at
any point in time. No current transformer saturation was assumed for this case.
"steady state"
for HV side
neg. seq. phasor

90
60

150

30
10
ms

180

0
0.1 kA
10
ms

0.2 kA

0.3 kA

0.4 kA

330

210

240
270

"steady state"
for LV side
neg. seq. phasor

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from HV side

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from LV side

en05000189.vsd
IEC05000189 V1 EN

Figure 36:

Trajectories of Negative Sequence Current Contributions from HV

and LV sides of Yd5 power transformer during external fault

135
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Under external fault conditions, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180
degrees. During internal faults, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to
possible different negative sequence source impedance angles on the W1 and W2
sides of the protected power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal
zero value. However, during heavy faults, CT saturation might cause the measured
phase angle to differ from 180 degrees for an external, and from 0 degrees for an
internal fault. See figure 37 for an example of a heavy internal fault with transient
CT saturation.
Dire ctiona l Compa ris on Crite rion: Inte rna l fa ult a s s e e n from the HV s ide
90
e xcurs ion
from 0 de gre e s
due to CT
s a tura tion

60

120
35 ms

30

150

de finite ly
a n inte rna l
fa ult
180
e xte rna l
fa ult
re gion

0.5 kA

210

330

trip c o mmand
in 12 ms
Inte rna l fa ult
de cla re d 7 ms
a fte r inte rna l
fa ult occure d

1.0 kA

240

300
270

1.5 kA

HV s ide contribution to the tota l ne ga tive s e que nce diffe re ntia l curre nt in kA
Dire ctiona l limit (within the re gion de limite d by 60 de gre e s is inte rna l fa ult)

en05000190.vsd
IEC05000190 V1 EN

Figure 37:

Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator for internal

fault with CT saturation

It shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the internal/
external fault discriminator algorithm in order to guarantee proper operation with
heavily saturated current transformers. The trustworthy information on whether a
fault is internal or external is typically obtained in about 10ms after the fault
inception, depending on the setting IminNegSeq, and the magnitudes of the fault
currents. During heavy faults, approximately 5ms time to full saturation of the
main CT is sufficient in order to produce a correct discrimination between internal
and external faults.

Unrestrained, and sensitive negative sequence protections

Two sub functions, which are based on the internal/external fault discriminator
with the ability to trip a faulty power transformer, are parts of the traditional power
transformer differential protection.
136
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The unrestrained negative sequence differential protection

The unrestrained negative sequence protection is activated if one or more start
signals have been set by the traditional differential protection algorithm. This
happens because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents
entered the operate region on the operate - restrain characteristic. So, this
protection is not independent of the traditional restrained differential protection - it
is activated after the first start signal has been placed.
If the same fault has been positively recognized as internal, then the unrestrained
negative sequence differential protection places its own trip request.
Any block signals by the harmonic and/or waveform criteria, which can block the
traditional differential protection are overridden, and the differential protection
operates quickly without any further delay.
This logic guarantees a fast disconnection of a faulty power transformer for any
internal fault.
If the same fault has been classified as external, then generally, but not
unconditionally, a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, the
further analysis of the fault conditions is initiated. If all the instantaneous
differential currents in phases where start signals have been issued are free of
harmonic pollution, then a (minor) internal fault, simultaneous with a predominant
external fault can be suspected. This conclusion can be drawn because at external
faults, major false differential currents can only exist when one or more current
transformers saturate. In this case, the false instantaneous differential currents are
polluted by higher harmonic components, the 2nd, the 5th etc.
Sensitive negative sequence based turn-to-turn fault protection
The sensitive, negative sequence current based turn-to-turn fault protection detects
the low level faults, which are not detected by the traditional differential protection
until they develop into more severe faults, including power transformer iron core.
The sensitive protection is independent from the traditional differential protection
and is a very good complement to it. The essential part of this sensitive protection
is the internal/external fault discriminator. In order to be activated, the sensitive
protection requires no start signal from the traditional power transformer biased
differential protection. If magnitudes of HV and LV negative sequence current
contributions are above the set limit for IminNegSeq, then their relative positions
are determined. If the disturbance is characterized as an internal fault, then a
separate trip request will be placed. Any decision on the way to the final trip
request must be confirmed several times in succession in order to cope with
eventual CT transients. This causes a short additional operating time delay due to
this security count. For very low level turn-to-turn faults the overall response time
of this protection is about 30ms.

Instantaneous differential currents

The instantaneous differential currents are calculated from the instantaneous values
of the input currents in order to perform the harmonic analysis and waveform

137
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

analysis upon each one of them (see section "Harmonic and waveform block
criteria" for more information).
The instantaneous differential currents are calculated using the same matrix
expression as shown in equation 1 and equation 2. The same matrices A, B and C
are used for these calculations. The only difference is that the matrix algorithm is
fed by instantaneous values of currents, that is, samples.

Harmonic and waveform block criteria

The two block criteria are the harmonic restrain and the waveform restrain. These
two criteria have the power to block a trip command by the traditional differential
protection, which produces start signals by applying the differential currents, and
the bias current, to the operate - restrain characteristic.
Harmonic restrain
The harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal is to prevent an unwanted trip
command due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, or due to
magnetizing currents at over-voltages.
The magnetizing currents of a power transformer flow only on one side of the
power transformer and are therefore always the cause of false differential currents.
The harmonic analysis (the 2nd and the 5th harmonic) is applied to the
instantaneous differential currents. Typical instantaneous differential currents
during power transformer energizing are shown in figure 38. The harmonic
analysis is only applied in those phases, where start signals have been set. For
example, if the content of the 2nd harmonic in the instantaneous differential current
of phase L1 is above the setting I2/I1Ratio, then a block signal is set for that phase,
which can be read as BLK2HL1 output of the differential protection.
Waveform restrain
The waveform restrain criterion is a good complement to the harmonic analysis.
The waveform restrain is a pattern recognition algorithm, which looks for intervals
within each fundamental power system cycle with low instantaneous differential
current. This interval is often called current gap in protection literature. However,
within differential function this criterion actually searches for long-lasting intervals
with low rate-of-change in instantaneous differential current, which are typical for
the power transformer inrush currents. Block signals BLKWAVLx are set in those
phases where such behavior is detected. The algorithm does not require any end
user settings. The waveform algorithm is automatically adapted dependent only on
the power transformer rated data.

138
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC05000343 V1 EN

Figure 38:

Inrush currents to a transformer as seen by a protective IED.

Typical is a high amount of the 2nd harmonic, and intervals of low
current, and low rate-of-change of current within each period.

Cross-blocking between phases

The basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block
operation (that is, tripping) of the other two phases due to the harmonic pollution of
the differential current in that phase (that is, waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic
content). In differential algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between
the phases via the setting parameter CrossBlockEn=On.
When parameter CrossBlockEn=On cross blocking between phases is introduced.
There is no time settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the
set bias characteristic (in the operate region) will be able to cross-block the other
two phases if it is itself blocked by any of the previously explained restrained
criteria. As soon as the operating point for this phase is below the set bias
characteristic (that is, in the restrain region) cross blocking from that phase will be
inhibited. In this way cross-blocking of the temporary nature is achieved. It should
be noted that this is the default setting value for this parameter.
When parameter CrossBlockEn=Off, any cross blocking between phases will be
disabled. It is recommended to use the value Off with caution in order to avoid the
unwanted tripping during initial energizing of the power transformer.

Switch onto fault feature

The transformer differential function has a built-in, advanced switch onto fault
feature. This feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter SOTFMode.
When enabled this feature ensures quick differential protection tripping in cases
where a transformer is energized with an internal fault (for example, forgotten
earthing on transformer LV side). Operation of this feature is based on the fact that
a current gap (term current gap is explained under waveblock feature above) will
exist within the first power system cycle when healthy power transformer is
energized. If this is not the case the waveblock criterion will reset quickly. This

139
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

quick reset of the waveblock criterion will temporarily disable the second harmonic
blocking feature of the differential protection function. This consequently ensures
fast operation of the transformer differential function for a switch onto a fault
condition. It shall be noted that this feature is only active during initial power
transformer energizing, under the first 50 ms. When the switch onto fault feature is
disabled by the setting parameter SOTFMode, the waveblock and second harmonic
blocking features work in parallel and are completely independent from each other.

Open CT detection feature

Transformer differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection

feature.
A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted
operation of the Transformer differential protection under normal load conditions.
Damage of secondary equipment may occur due to high voltage from open CT
circuit outputs. It is always an advantage, from the point of view of security and
reliability, to have the open CT detection function to block the Transformer
differential protection function in case of an open CT condition, and produce an
alarm signal to the operational personnel to quickly correct the open CT condition.
The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Off/On). When enabled, this feature tries to prevent mal-operation
when a loaded main CT connected to Transformer differential protection is by
mistake open circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect
interruption of one CT phase current at a time. If two or even all three-phase
currents of one set of CTs are accidentally interrupted at precisely the same time,
this feature cannot operate. Transformer differential protection generates a trip
signal if the false differential current is sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is
typically detected in 1214 ms, and if the load in the protected circuit is relatively
high, about the nominal load, the unwanted trip cannot always be prevented. Still,
the information about what was the cause of the open CT secondary circuit, is vital.
The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method,
similar to the waveform check used by the Power Transformer Differential
Protection in order to detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT
detection principle is based on the fact that for an open CT, the current in the phase
with the open CT suddenly drops to zero (that is, as seen by the protection), while
the currents of the other two phases continue as before.
The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions,
that is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...120% of
the rated load). If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition
cannot be detected. In addition to load condition requirement, Open CT function
also checks the differential current on faulty phase. If the differential current is
lower than 10% of IBase, the open CT condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the
Open CT algorithm only detects an open CT if the load on the power transformer
protected object is 10...120% of rated load and the differential current is higher
than 10% of IBase on that phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds (50
seconds in 60 Hz systems) after the bias current has entered the 10...120% range.

140
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The Open CT detection feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting:

OpenCTEnable = 0 (Off).
If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An
alarm signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to
operational personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected.
When the open CT condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is
reconnected), the functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which
is also defined by a setting (tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual maloperation after the reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit.
The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the
defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT
input and phase in which an open CT condition has been detected. These
indications are provided via the following outputs from the Transformer
differential protection function:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT

circuit has been detected.
Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit
has been detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding
which open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding
in which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase
L2; 3= Phase L3).

Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further
open CT circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note
that once the open CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically
within the differential function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT
condition. To reset the open CT circuit alarm automatically, the following
conditions must be fulfilled:

Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 120%

The open CT condition in the defective CT circuit has been corrected (for
example, current asymmetry disappears)
The above two conditions are fulfilled for a longer time than defined by the
setting parameter tOCTResetDelay

If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is
reset either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three
currents become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again
to search for open CT circuits within the protected zone.

141
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection
6.1.7.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for transformer differential protection are shown in
the following figures.

Derive equation to calculate differential currents

Open CT logic on W1 side

Open CT logic on W2 side

Phasors & samples

Trafo
Data

Phasors & samples

Phasor calculation of individual

phase current

Differential function

Phasor calculation of individual

phase current

A/D conversion scaling with CT

ratio

A/D conversion scaling with CT

ratio

ADM

Instantaneous (sample based)

Differential current, phase L1

IDL1

Instantaneous (sample based)

Differential current, phase L2

IDL2

Instantaneous (sample based)

Differential current, phase L3

IDL3

IDNSMAG

Negative sequence diff current

& NS current contribution from
individual windings

IDL1MAG

Fundamental frequency (phasor

based) Diff current, phase L1 &
phase current contributions from
individual windings

IDL2MAG

Fundamental frequency (phasor

based) Diff current, phase L2 &
phase current contributions from
individual windings

IDL3MAG

Fundamental frequency (phasor

based) Diff current, phase L3 &
phase current contributions from
individual windings

MAX

IBIAS

Settings for Zer. Seq.

Current Reduction
en06000554-3-en.vsd
IEC06000544 V3 EN

Figure 39:

Treatment of measured currents within IED for transformer differential function

Figure 39 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done in case of a twowinding transformer.
The following currents are inputs used in the power transformer differential
protection function. They must all be expressed in power system (primary) A.

142
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

1.

Instantaneous values of currents (samples) from the HV, and LV sides for twowinding power transformers, and from the HV, the first LV, and the second
LV side for three-winding power transformers.
Currents from all power transformer sides expressed as fundamental frequency
phasors with their real and imaginary parts. These currents are calculated
within the protection function by the fundamental frequency Fourier filters.
Negative sequence currents from all power transformer sides expressed as
phasors. These currents are calculated within the protection function by the
symmetrical components module.

2.
3.

The power transformer differential protection:

1.

Calculates three fundamental frequency differential currents and one common

bias current. The zero-sequence component can optionally be eliminated from
each of the three fundamental frequency differential currents and at the same
time from the common bias current.
Calculates three instantaneous differential currents. They are used for
harmonic, and waveform analysis. Instantaneous differential currents are
useful for post-fault analysis using disturbance recording
Calculates negative-sequence differential current. Contributions to it from both
(all three) power transformer sides are used by the internal/external fault
discriminator to detect and classify a fault as internal or external.

2.
3.

BLKUNRES
IdUnre

AND

b>a

TRIPUNREL1

IDL1MAG
IBIAS

STL1

AND

BLOCK
BLKRES

AND

IDL1

2nd
Harmonic
Wave
block

Switch on
to fault logic

OR

BLK2HL1
BLKWAVL1
BLK5HL1

5th
Harmonic
Cross Block
from L2 or L3
OpCrossBlock=On

AND

TRIPRESL1

OR

AND

Cross Block
to L2 or L3

en06000545.vsd
IEC06000545 V1 EN

Figure 40:

Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for

Phase L1

143
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Internal/
External
Fault
discrimin
ator

Neg.Seq. Diff
Current
Contributions

EXTFAULT
INTFAULT

&

OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS

Constant

a
b

b>a

&

STL1
STL2
STL3

TRNSSENS

TRNSUNR

>1

IEC05000167-2-en.vsd
IEC05000167-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 41:

Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for

external/internal fault discriminator

TRIPRESL1
TRIPRESL2
TRIPRESL3

OR

TRIPRES

OR

TRIPUNRE

TRIPUNREL1
TRIPUNREL2
TRIPUNREL3

TRNSSENS

OR

TRIP

TRNSUNR

en05000278.vsd
IEC05000278 V1 EN

Figure 42:

Transformer differential protection internal grouping of tripping

signals

144
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STL1
STL2
STL3

OR

START

OR

BLK2H

OR

BLK5H

OR

BLKWAV

BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2
BLKWAVL3

IEC05000279-2-en.vsd
IEC05000279-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 43:

Transformer differential protection internal grouping of logical signals

Logic in figures 40, 41, 42 and 43 can be summarized as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

The three fundamental frequency differential currents are applied in a phasewise manner to two limits. The first limit is the operate-restrain characteristic,
while the other is the high-set unrestrained limit. If the first limit is exceeded, a
start signal START is set. If the unrestrained limit is exceeded, an immediate
unrestrained trip TRIPUNRE and common trip TRIP are issued.
If a start signal is issued in a phase the harmonic and the waveform block
signals are checked. Only a start signal, which is free of all of its block signals
can result in a trip command. If the cross-block logic scheme is applied, then
only if all phases with set start signal are free of their respective block signals,
a restrained trip TRIPRES and common trip TRIP are issued
If a start signal is issued in a phase, and the fault has been classified as
internal, then any eventual block signals are overridden and unrestrained
negative-sequence trip TRNSUNR and common trip TRIP are issued without
any further delay. This feature is called the unrestrained negative-sequence
protection 110% bias.
The sensitive negative sequence differential protection is independent of any
start signals. It is meant to detect smaller internal faults such as turn-to-turn
faults, which are often not detected by the traditional differential protection.
The sensitive negative sequence differential protection starts whenever both
contributions to the total negative sequence differential current (that must be
compared by the internal/external fault discriminator) are higher than the value
of the setting IMinNegSeq. If a fault is positively recognized as internal, and
the condition is stable with no interruption for at least one fundamental
frequency cycle the sensitive negative sequence differential protection
TRNSSENS and common trip TRIP are issued. This feature is called the
sensitive negative sequence differential protection.
If a start signal is issued in a phase (see signal STL1), even if the fault has
been classified as an external fault, the instantaneous differential current of
that phase (see signal IDL1) is analyzed for the 2nd and the 5th harmonic
145

Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

6.

contents (see the blocks with the text inside: 2nd Harmonic; Wave block and
5th Harmonic). If there is less harmonic pollution. than allowed by the settings
I2/I1Ratio, and I5/I1Ratio, (then the outputs from the blocks 2nd harmonic and
5th harmonic is 0) then it is assumed that a minor simultaneous internal fault
must have occurred. Only under these conditions a trip command is allowed
(the signal TRIPRESL1 is = 1). The cross-block logic scheme is automatically
applied under such circumstances. (This means that the cross block signals
from the other two phases L2 and L3 is not activated to obtain a trip on the
TRIPRESL1 output signal in figure 40)
All start and blocking conditions are available as phase segregated as well as
common (that is three-phase) signals.

IDL1 MAG
I Diff Alarm

IDL2 MAG
I Diff Alarm

IDL3 MAG
I Diff Alarm

a
a>b
b

tAlarm Delay

&

a>b

IDALARM

a
a>b
b
en06000546.vsd

IEC06000546 V1 EN

Figure 44:

6.1.8

Differential current alarm logic

Technical data
Table 48:

T2WPDIF, T3WPDIF technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operating characteristic

Adaptable

1.0% of Ir for I
Ir
1.0% of I for I >
Ir

Reset ratio

> 90%

Unrestrained differential current limit

(100-5000)% ofIBase on high voltage

winding

1.0% of set
value

Minimum pickup

(5-60)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Second harmonic blocking

(5.0-100.0)% of fundamental
differential current

1.0% of Ir
Note:
fundamental
magnitude =
100% of Ir

Table continues on next page

146
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Fifth harmonic blocking

(5.0-100.0)% of fundamental
differential current

5.0% of Ir
Note:
fundamental
magnitude =
100% of Ir

Connection type for each of the

windings

Y or D

Phase displacement between high

voltage winding, W1 and each of the
windings, W2 and W3. Hour notation

011

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Id, restrained

function

Min = 20 ms
Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 2 to 0 x Id, restrained

function

Min = 10 ms
Max = 25 ms

Operate time at 0 to 5 x Id,

unrestrained function

Min = 10 ms
Max = 20 ms

Reset time at 5 to 0 x Id, unrestrained

function

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Critical impulse time

2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Id

6.2

1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

6.2.1

Identification
Function description

1Ph High impedance differential

protection

IEC 61850
identification

HZPDIF

IEC 60617
identification

Id

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

87

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN

6.2.2

Functionality
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF functions can be used
when the involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by wiring.
Actually all CT secondary circuits which are involved in the differential scheme
are connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor
which are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.
HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, reactors, motors, autotransformers, capacitor banks and so on. One such function block is used for a high-

147
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such function blocks are used to
form three-phase, phase-segregated differential protection. Several function block
instances (for example, six) can be available in a single IED.

6.2.3

Function block
HZPDIF
ISI*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
ALARM
MEASVOLT
IEC05000363-2-en.vsd

IEC05000363 V2 EN

Figure 45:

6.2.4

HZPDIF function block

Signals
Table 49:

HZPDIF Input signals

Name

Type

Description

GROUP
SIGNAL

Single phase current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

Table 50:

HZPDIF Output signals

Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm signal

MEASVOLT

REAL

Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

6.2.5

Settings

Table 51:

HZPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name

Default

ISI

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

U>Alarm

5 - 500

10

Alarm voltage level in volts on CT

secondary side

tAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Time delay to activate alarm

U>Trip

10 - 900

100

Operate voltage level in volts on CT

secondary side

SeriesResistor

50 - 20000

Ohm

250

Value of series resistor in Ohms

148
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

6.2.6

Monitored data
Table 52:
Name

HZPDIF Monitored data

Type

MEASVOLT

6.2.7

Values (Range)

REAL

Unit

Description

kV

Measured RMS voltage

on CT secondary side

Operation principle
High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all
CTs, used in the protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar
magnetizing characteristic and the same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of
the protected object. In order to make a scheme all CT secondary circuits belonging
to one phase are connected in parallel. From the CT junction points a measuring
branch is connected. The measuring branch is a series connection of one variable
setting resistor (or series resistor) RS with high ohmic value and an over-current
element. Thus, the high impedance differential protection responds to the current
flowing through the measuring branch. However, this current is result of a
differential voltage caused by this parallel CT connection across the measuring
branch. Non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in order to protect entire
scheme from high peak voltages which may appear during internal faults. Typical
high impedance differential scheme is shown in Figure 46. Note that only one
phase is shown in this figure.

RS

1
I> (50)

4
2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN

Figure 46:

HZPDIF scheme

Where in the Figure:

1.
2.

shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other
CTs, from the same phase, connected to this scheme.
shows the scheme earthing point.

149
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point

exists in such protection scheme.
3.
4.

shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.

shows the over-current measuring element.
The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current
element is designated as measuring branch.

5.
6.
7.

shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).

U is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the
measuring branch).
I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.
U and I are interrelated in accordance with the following
formula U=RS I.

Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only
measure one current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there
is no any stabilizing quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential
protection schemes. Therefore in order to guaranty the stability of the differential
relay during external faults the operating quantity must not exceed the set pickup
value. Thus, for external faults, even with severe saturation of some of the current
transformers, the voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise above the relay
set pickup value. To achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected
in such a way that the saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower
impedance path for the false differential current than the measuring branch. In case
of an external fault causing current transformer saturation, the non-saturated
current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through the
secondary winding of the saturated current transformer and not through the
measuring brunch of the relay. The voltage drop across the saturated current
transformer secondary winding appears also across the measuring brunch, however
it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-up value of the relay has to
be set above this false operating voltage.
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

6.2.7.1

Logic diagram
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF, see Figure 47.
The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected
to it. Thus the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to
the HZPDIF function. These current samples are first multiplied with the set value

150
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

for the used stabilizing resistor in order to get voltage waveform across the
measuring branch. The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get its RMS
value. Note that used filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete
removal of the DC current component which may be present in the primary fault
current. The voltage RMS value is then compared with set Alarm and Trip
thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms
within the function. The measured RMS voltage is available as a service value
from the function. The function has block and trip block inputs available as well.

IEC05000301 V1 EN

Figure 47:

6.2.8

Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection

HZPDIF

Technical data
Table 53:
Function

HZPDIF technical data

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage

(10-900) V
I=U/R

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio

>95% at (30-900) V

Maximum
continuous power

U>Trip2/SeriesResistor 200 W

Operate time at 0
to 10 x Ud

Min = 5 ms
Max = 15 ms

Reset time at 10
to 0 x Ud

Min = 75 ms
Max = 95 ms

Critical impulse
time

2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud

Table continues on next page

151
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate time at 0
to 2 x Ud

Min = 25 ms
Max = 35 ms

Reset time at 2
to 0 x Ud

Min = 50 ms
Max = 70 ms

Critical impulse
time

15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud

6.3

Low impedance restricted earth fault protection

REFPDIF

6.3.1

Identification
Function description
Restricted earth-fault protection, low
impedance

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

REFPDIF

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87N

IdN/I
SYMBOL-AA V1 EN

6.3.2

Functionality
Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedance function REFPDIF can be used on
all directly or low-impedance earthed windings. The REFPDIF function provides
high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding separately and
thus does not need inrush stabilization.
The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function with an additional zero
sequence current directional comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity
and stability during through faults.
REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five currents are measured at the most
complicated configuration as shown in Figure 48.

152
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

CT

CT

YNdx
CT

CB

CB

CB

CB
Autotransformer
CT

IED

The most typical

application

CB

CT

CB

CT

The most complicated

application - autotransformer
IEC05000058-2-en.vsd

IEC05000058-2 V1 EN

Figure 48:

6.3.3

Examples of applications of the REFPDIF

Function block
REFPDIF
I3P*
I3PW1CT1*
I3PW1CT2*
I3PW2CT1*
I3PW2CT2*
BLOCK

TRIP
START
DIROK
BLK2H
IRES
IN
IBIAS
IDIFF
ANGLE
I2RATIO
IEC06000251_2_en.vsd

IEC06000251 V2 EN

Figure 49:

6.3.4

REFPDIF function block

Signals
Table 54:
Name

REFPDIF Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for neutral current input

I3PW1CT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for primary CT1 current input

I3PW1CT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for primary CT2 current input

I3PW2CT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for secondary CT1 current input

I3PW2CT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for secondary CT2 current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

153
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 55:

REFPDIF Output signals

Name

6.3.5
Table 56:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip by restricted earth fault protection function

START

BOOLEAN

Start by restricted earth fault protection function

DIROK

BOOLEAN

Directional Criteria has operated for internal fault

BLK2H

BOOLEAN

Block due to 2-nd harmonic

IRES

REAL

Magnitude of fund. freq. residual current

IN

REAL

Magnitude of fund. freq. neutral current

IBIAS

REAL

Magnitude of the bias current

IDIFF

REAL

Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current

ANGLE

REAL

Direction angle from zerosequence feature

I2RATIO

REAL

Second harmonic ratio

Settings
REFPDIF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

IdMin

4.0 - 100.0

%IB

0.1

10.0

Maximum sensitivity in % of IBase

CTFactorPri1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

CT factor for HV side CT1 (CT1rated/

HVrated current)

CTFactorPri2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

CT factor for HV side CT2 (CT2rated/

HVrated current)

CTFactorSec1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

CT factor for MV side CT1 (CT1rated/

MVrated current)

CTFactorSec2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

CT factor for MV side CT2 (CT2rated/

MVrated current)

Table 57:
Name
ROA

Table 58:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

REFPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
60 - 90

Unit
Deg

Step
1

Default
60

Description
Relay operate angle for zero sequence
directional feature

REFPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

154
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

6.3.6

Monitored data
Table 59:
Name

REFPDIF Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

IRES

REAL

Magnitude of fund. freq.

residual current

IN

REAL

Magnitude of fund. freq.

neutral current

IBIAS

REAL

Magnitude of the bias

current

IDIFF

REAL

Magnitude of fund. freq.

differential current

ANGLE

REAL

deg

Direction angle from

zerosequence feature

I2RATIO

REAL

Second harmonic ratio

6.3.7

Operation principle

6.3.7.1

Fundamental principles of the restricted earth-fault protection

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF) detects earth
faults on earthed power transformer windings, most often an earthed star winding.
REFPDIF is a unit protection of the differential type. Since REFPDIF is based on
the zero sequence current, which theoretically only exists in case of an earth fault,
REFPDIF can be made very sensitive regardless of normal load currents. It is the
fastest protection a power transformer winding can have. The high sensitivity and
the high speed tend to make such a protection unstable. Special measures must be
taken to make it insensitive to conditions for which it should not operate, for
example, heavy through faults of phase-to-phase type or heavy external earth faults.
REFPDIF is a differential protection of the low impedance type. All three-phase
currents, and the neutral point current, must be fed separately to REFPDIF. The
fundamental frequency components of all currents are extracted from all input
currents, while other eventual zero sequence components, such as the 3rd harmonic
currents, are fully suppressed. Then the residual current phasor is calculated from
the three line current phasors. This zero sequence current phasor is added to the
neutral current vectorially, in order to obtain differential current.
The following facts may be observed from Figure 50 and Figure 51, where the
three line CTs are shown as connected together in order to measure the residual 3Io
current, for the sake of simplicity.

155
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

These three
zero-sequence
currents are not measured

zone of protection

Izs1

L1
Power
system

L1

Izs1

L2

L2

Izs1

L3

L3
3Izs1

Uzs
IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0
3I0 = 3Izs1

Ifault

IN = -3Izs1

(Summation in the IED)

Return path through

transformer

Current in the neutral

(measured as IN ) serves
as a directional reference
because it has the same
direction for both internal
and external faults.

Return path via

power system
External
fault
region

block

operate
IN

3I0
block

Zero-sequence differential
current for external fault
Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
Idiff = 3Izs1 - 3Izs1 = 0

ROA

External
fault
region

Internal
fault
region

block

ROA = Relay Operate Angle

IEC09000107-3-en.vsd
IEC09000107-3 V1 EN

Figure 50:

Zero sequence currents at an external earth fault

zone of protection

L1
Power
system

L2
L3

Izs2

Izs1

Izs2

Izs1

Izs2

Izs1

L1
L2
L3
3Izs1

Uzs
IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0
3I0 = -3Izs2

IN = -3Izs1

Ifault

(Summation in the IED)

Return path
through transformer

Return path via

power system
External
fault
region

block

3I0

block
External
fault
region

operate

ROA

block

IN (reference)
Internal
fault
region

Current in the neutral

(measured as IN ) serves
as a directional reference
because it has the same
direction for both internal
and external faults.

Zero-sequence differential
current for internal fault
Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
Idiff = 3Izs2 + 3Izs1 > 0
Idiff = Ifault
ROA = Relay Operate Angle

IEC09000108-3-en.vsd

IEC09000108-3 V1 EN

Figure 51:

1.

Zero sequence currents at an internal earth fault

For an external earth fault (Figure 50), the residual current 3Io and the neutral
current IN have equal magnitude, but they are seen within the IED as 180
degrees out-of-phase if the current transformers are connected as in Figure 50,
which is the ABB recommended connection. The differential current becomes

156
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

2.

3.

4.

zero as both CTs ideally measure exactly the same component of the earthfault current.
For an internal fault, the total earth- fault current is composed generally of two
zero sequence currents. One zero sequence current (3IZS1) flows towards the
power transformer neutral point and into the earth, while the other zero
sequence current (3IZS2) flows into the connected power system. These two
primary currents can be expected to have approximately opposite directions
(about the same zero sequence impedance angle is assumed on both sides of
the earth fault). However, on the secondary CT sides of the current
transformers, they will be approximately in phase if the current transformers
are oriented as in Figure 48, which is the orientation recommended by ABB.
The magnitudes of the two currents may be different, dependent on the
magnitudes of zero sequence impedances of both sides. No current can flow
towards the power system, if the only point where the system is earthed, is at
the protected power transformer. Likewise, no current can flow into the power
system, if the winding is not connected to the power system (circuit breaker
open and power transformer energized from the other side).
For both internal and external earth faults, the current in the neutral connection
IN always has the same direction, which is towards the earth (except in case of
autotransformers where the direction can vary).
The two internally processed zero sequence currents are 3Io and IN. The
vectorial sum is the REFPDIF differential current, which is equal to Idiff = IN
+3Io .

The line zero sequence (residual) current is calculated from 3 line (terminal)
currents. A bias quantity must give stability against false operations due to high
through fault currents. To stabilize REFPDIF at external faults, a fixed bias
characteristic is implemented.
REFPDIF should also be stable against heavy phase-to-phase internal faults, not
including earth. These faults may also give false zero sequence currents due to
saturated line CTs. Such faults, however are without neutral current, and can thus
be eliminated as a source of danger.
As an additional measure against unwanted operation, a directional check is made
in agreement with the above points 1 and 2. Operation is only allowed if the
currents 3Io and IN (as shown in Figure 50 and Figure 51) are both within the
operating region. By taking a smaller ROA, REFPDIF can be made more stable
under heavy external fault conditions, as well as under the complex conditions,
when external faults are cleared by other protections.

6.3.7.2

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance differential protection

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance (REFPDIF) is a protection of
differential type, a unit protection, whose settings are independent of any other
protection. It has some advantages compared to the transformer differential
protection. It is less complicated, as no current phase correction or magnitude

157
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

correction are needed, not even in the case of an eventual on-load tap changer
(OLTC). REFPDIF is not sensitive to inrush and overexcitation currents. The only
danger is an eventual current transformer saturation.
REFPDIF has only one operate-bias characteristic, which is described in the table
60 and shown in Figure 52.
Table 60:

Data of the operate-bias characteristic of REFPDIF

Default sensitivity
Idmin (zone 1)

Max. base
sensitivity Idmin
(zone 1)
% IBase

% IBase
30

Min. base sensitivity End of zone First slope

Idmin (zone 1)
1

Second
slope

% IBase

% IBase

100

125

70

100

The differential protection REFPDIF calculates a differential current and a bias

current. In case of internal earth faults, the differential current is theoretically equal
to the total earth-fault current. The bias current is supposed to give stability to
REFPDIF. The bias current is a measure of how high the currents are and how
difficult the conditions are under which the CTs operate. With a high bias, difficult
conditions can be suspected, and it will be more likely that the calculated
differential current has a component of a false current, primarily due to CT
saturation. This law is formulated by the operate-bias characteristic. This
characteristic divides the Idiff - Ibias plane in two areas. The area above the operatebias characteristic is the operate area, while the one below is the block area, see
Figure 52.
Zerosequence
diff. current
in per unit

D I operate
slope = ----------------* 100 %
D I restrain

5
Characteristic if
IdMin = 1.0 pu

4
Operate
conditionally

3
IdMin range: 0.04 1.00 IBase
Reset Ratio in all sections:
0.95 (a constant)

Slope 100%

2
Section 1

Section 3

Sec. 2

1
The characteristic
can be moved
up and down
(vertically)
by changing
the setting IdMin

Restrain

IdMin
Slope 70%

0
0

End Section 1
End Section 2

bias current
in per unit
IEC98000017-5-en.vsd

IEC98000017-5 V1 EN

Figure 52:

Operate - bias characteristic of the Restricted earth-fault

protection, low impedance REFPDIF

158
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

6.3.7.3

Calculation of differential current and bias current

The differential current (operate current), as a fundamental frequency phasor, is
calculated as (with designations as in Figure 50 and Figure 51):

Idiff = IN + 3 Io
(Equation 25)

EQUATION1533 V1 EN

where:
IN is current in the power transformer neutral as a fundamental frequency phasor.
3Io is residual current of the power transformer terminal currents as a phasor.
If there are two three-phase CT inputs, as in breaker-and-a-half configurations, see
figure 10, then their respective residual currents are added within the REFPDIF
function so that:
I3PW1 = I3PW1CT1 + I3PW1CT2
where the signals are defined in the input and output signal tables for REFPDIF.
The bias current is a measure (expressed internally as a true fundamental frequency
current in Amperes) of how difficult the conditions are under which the instrument
current transformers operate. Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current, the
corresponding zone (section) of the operate-bias characteristic is applied, when
deciding whether to trip, or not to trip. In general, the higher the bias current, the
higher the differential current required to produce a trip.
The bias current is the highest current of all separate input currents to REFPDIF,
that is, of current in phase L1, phase L2, phase L3, and the current in the neutral
point (designated as IN in Figure 50 and in Figure 51).
If there are two feeders included in the zone of protection of REFPDIF, as in case
of an auto-transformer with two feeders included on both sides, then the respective
bias current is found as the relatively highest of the following currents:
current[1] = max (I3PW1CT1)

1
CTFactorPri1
(Equation 26)

EQUATION1526 V1 EN

current[2] = max (I3PW1CT2)

1
CTFactorPri2
(Equation 27)

EQUATION1527 V1 EN

current[3] = max (I3PW2CT1)

EQUATION1528 V1 EN

1
CTFactorSec1
(Equation 28)

159
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

current[4] = max (I3PW2CT2)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

1
CTFactorSec2

EQUATION1529 V1 EN

(Equation 29)

current[5] = IN
EQUATION1530 V1 EN

(Equation 30)

The bias current is thus generally equal to none of the input currents. If all primary
ratings of the CTs were equal to IBase, then the bias current would be equal to the
highest current in Amperes. IBase shall be set equal to the rated current of the
protected winding where REFPDIF function is applied.

6.3.7.4

Detection of external earth faults

External faults are more common than internal earth faults for which the restricted
earth-fault protection should operate. It is important that the restricted earth-fault
protection remains stable during heavy external earth and phase-to-phase faults,
and also when such a heavy external fault is cleared by some other protection such
as overcurrent, or earth-fault protection. The conditions during a heavy external
fault, and particularly immediately after the clearing of such a fault may be
complex. The circuit breakers poles may not open exactly at the same moment,
some of the CTs may still be highly saturated, and so on.
The detection of external earth faults is based on the fact that for such a fault a high
neutral current appears first, while a false differential current only appears if one or
more current transformers saturate.
An external earth fault is thus assumed to have occurred when a high neutral
current suddenly appears, while at the same time the differential current Idiff
remains low, at least for a while. This condition must be detected before a trip
request is placed within REFPDIF. Any search for external fault is aborted if a trip
request has been placed. A condition for a successful detection is that it takes not
less than 4ms for the first CT to saturate.
For an internal earth fault, a true differential current develops immediately, while
for an external fault it only develops if a CT saturates. If a trip request comes first,
before an external fault could be positively detected, then it must be an internal fault.
If an external earth fault has been detected, then the REFPDIF is temporarily
desensitized.

Directional criterion

The directional criterion is applied in order to positively distinguish between

internal and external earth faults. This check is an additional criterion, which
should prevent malfunctions at heavy external earth faults, and during the
disconnection of such faults by other protections. Earth faults on lines connecting
the power transformer occur much more often than earth faults on a power
transformer winding. It is important therefore that the Restricted earth-fault

160
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

protection, low impedance (REFPDIF) must remain stable during an external fault,
and immediately after the fault has been cleared by some other protection.
For an external earth faults with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines
(3Io) and the neutral current (IN in Figure 50) are theoretically equal in magnitude
and are 180 degrees out-of-phase. The current in the neutral (IN) serves as a
directional reference because it has the same direction for both internal and
external earth faults. The directional criterion in REFPDIF protection makes it a
current-polarized protection.
However, if one or more CTs saturate under external fault conditions, then the
measured currents 3Io and IN may no longer be equal, nor will their positions in the
complex plane be exactly 180 degrees apart. There is a risk that the resulting false
differential current Idiff enters the operate area of the operate-restrain characteristic
under external fault conditions. If this happens, a directional test may prevent a
malfunction.
A directional check is only executed if:
1.
2.

a trip request signal has been issued (REFPDIF function START signal set to 1)
the residual current in lines (3Io) is at least 3% of the IBase current.

If a directional check is either unreliable or not possible to do, due to too small
currents, then the direction is cancelled as a condition for an eventual trip.
If a directional check is executed, the REFPDIF protection operation is only
allowed if currents 3Io and IN (as seen in Figure 50 and Figure 51) are both within
the operating region determined by the set value of ROA, in degrees.
ROA = 60 to 90 degrees; where ROA stands for Relay Operate Angle.

Second harmonic analysis

When energizing a transformer a false differential current may appear in earth fault
protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF). The phase CTs may saturate due
to a high DC component with a long duration, but the current through the neutral
CT does not have either the same DC component or the same amplitude and the
risk for saturation of this CT is not as high. As a result the differential current due
to the saturation may be so high that it reaches the operate characteristic. A
calculation of the content of 2nd harmonic in the neutral current is made when the
neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows and
some timing criteria are fulfilled. If the ratio between second and fundamental
harmonic exceeds 40%, REFPDIF is blocked.

161
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection
6.3.7.5

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Algorithm of the restricted earth-fault protection

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.
7.

8.

9.

6.3.8

Check if current in the neutral Ineutral (IN) is less than 50% of the base
sensitivity Idmin. If yes, only service values are calculated, then REFPDIF
algorithm is not used.
If current in the Ineutral (IN) is more than 50% of Idmin, then determine the
bias current Ibias.
Determine the differential (operate) current Idiff as a phasor, and calculate its
magnitude.
Check if the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is above the operate-bias characteristic. If yes,
increment the trip request counter by 1. If the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to
be below the operate-bias characteristic, then the trip request counter is reset to
zero.
If the trip request counter is still zero, search for an eventual heavy external
earth fault. The search is only made if the neutral current is at least 50% of the
Idmin current. If an external earth fault has been detected, a flag is set which
remains set until the external fault has been cleared. The external fault flag is
reset to zero when Ineutral falls below 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. Any
search for an external fault is aborted if trip request counter is more than zero.
As long as the external fault persists, an additional temporary trip condition is
introduced. This means that REFPDIF is temporarily desensitized.
If point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be above the operate-bias characteristic), so
that trip request counter is more than zero, a directional check can be made.
The directional check is made only if Iresidual (3Io) is more than 3% of the
IBase current. If the result of the check means external fault, then the
internal trip request is reset. If the directional check cannot be executed, then
direction is no longer a condition for a trip.
When neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some
windows and some timing criteria are fulfilled, the ratio of 2nd to fundamental
harmonic is calculated. If it is found to be above 60% the trip request counter
is reset and TRIP remains zero.
Finally, a check is made if the trip request counter is equal to, or higher than 2.
If yes, and at the same instance of time tREFtrip, the actual bias current at this
instance of time tREFtrip is at least 50% of the highest bias current Ibiasmax
(Ibiasmax is the highest recording of any of the three phase currents measured
during the disturbance), then REFPDIF sets output TRIP to 1. If the counter is
less than 2, the TRIP signal remains zero.

Technical data
Table 61:

REFPDIF technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate characteristic

Adaptable

1.0% of Ir for I Ir
1.0% of I for I > Ir

Reset ratio

>95%

Minimum pickup

(4.0-100.0)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Table continues on next page

162
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Directional characteristic

Fixed 180 degrees or 60 to

90 degrees

2.0 degrees

Operate time, trip at 0 to 10 x

IdMin

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Reset time, trip at 10 to 0 x IdMin

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Second harmonic blocking

60.0% of fundamental (hidden

setting)

1.0% of Ir

6.4

Additional security logic for differential protection

LDRGFC

6.4.1

Identification
Function description
Additional security logic for differential
protection

6.4.2

IEC 61850
identification
LDRGFC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
11

Functionality
Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) can help the
security of the protection especially when the communication system is in
abnormal status or for example when there is unspecified asymmetry in the
communication link. It helps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the
protection. LDRGFC is more sensitive than the main protection logic to always
release operation for all faults detected by the differential function. LDRGFC
consists of four sub functions:

Phase-to-phase current variation

Zero sequence current criterion
Low voltage criterion
Low current criterion

Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and it calculates
the variation using the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase current
variation function is major one to fulfill the objectives of the startup element.
Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. It increases the
security of protection during the high impedance fault conditions.
Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages as
inputs. It increases the security of protection when the three-phase fault occurred
on the weak end side.

163
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and it increases the
dependability during the switch onto fault case of unloaded line.
The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed through the line
and protection is not working correctly.
Features:

Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the abnormal status of the

protected system
Startup element does not influence the operation speed of main protection
Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high impedance faults and
three phase fault on weak side
It is possible to block the each sub function of startup element
Startup signal has a settable pulse time

6.4.3

Function block
LDRGFC
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKCV
BLKUC
BLK3I0
BLKUV
REMSTUP

START
STCVL1L2
STCVL2L3
STCVL3L1
STUC
ST3I0
STUV

IEC14000015-1-en.vsd
IEC14000015 V1 EN

Figure 53:

6.4.4

LDRGFC function block

Signals
Table 62:
Name

LDRGFC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKCV

BOOLEAN

Block of ph to ph current variation criterion

BLKUC

BOOLEAN

Block of the low current criterion

BLK3I0

BOOLEAN

Block of zero sequence current criterion

BLKUV

BOOLEAN

Block of under voltage criterion

REMSTUP

BOOLEAN

Startup signal of remote end

164
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 63:

LDRGFC Output signals

Name

6.4.5
Table 64:
Name

Type

Description

START

BOOLEAN

General startup signal

STCVL1L2

BOOLEAN

Start signal for current variation criterion for

phase L1L2

STCVL2L3

BOOLEAN

Start signal for current variation criterion for

phase L2L3

STCVL3L1

BOOLEAN

Start signal for current variation criterion for

phase L3L1

STUC

BOOLEAN

Start signal for low current criterion

ST3I0

BOOLEAN

Start signal for zero sequence current criterion

STUV

BOOLEAN

Start signal for under voltage criterion

Settings
LDRGFC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

tStUpReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

7.000

Reset delay for startup signal

OperationCV

Off
On

On

Operation current variation Off/On

ICV>

1 - 100

%IB

20

Fixed threshold for ph to ph current

variation criterion

OperationUC

Off
On

On

Operation low current criterion Off/On

IUC<

1 - 100

%IB

Start value for low current operation in %

of IBase

Operation3I0

Off
On

On

Operation zero sequence current

criterion Off/On

I3I0>

1 - 100

%IB

10

Start value for zero sequence current

criterion in % of IBase

OperationUV

Off
On

On

Operation under voltage criterion Off/On

UPhN<

1 - 100

%UB

60

Start value for phase voltage criterion in

% of UBase

UPhPh<

1 - 100

%UB

60

Start value for ph to ph voltage criterion

in % of UBase

165
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

Table 65:

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

LDRGFC Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tCV

0.000 - 0.005

0.001

0.002

Time delay for phase to phase current

variation

tUC

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Time delay for low current criterion

t3I0

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for zero sequence current

criterion

tUV

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for low voltage criterion

Table 66:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

6.4.6

Default

Description

LDRGFC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 67:
Name

6.4.7

Step

LDRGFC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

IL1

REAL

Current RMS value for

phase L1

IL2

REAL

Current RMS value for

phase L2

IL3

REAL

Current RMS value for

phase L3

3I0

REAL

Zero sequence current

value

UL1

REAL

kV

Voltage RMS value for

phase L1

UL2

REAL

kV

Voltage RMS value for

phase L2

UL3

REAL

kV

Voltage RMS value for

phase L3

UL12

REAL

kV

Voltage RMS value for

ph to ph L1L2

UL23

REAL

kV

Voltage RMS value for

ph to ph L2L3

UL31

REAL

kV

Voltage RMS value for

ph to ph L3L1

Operation principle
Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) takes the current
samples, current RMS values, phase voltage values, phase-to-phase voltage values,
zero sequence current and remote side startup signals as inputs.

166
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Startup signal becomes activated when any one of the current variation startup
signal, zero sequence current startup signal, voltage startup signal, and current
startup signal is activated.
Phase-to-phase current variation takes current samples and generates the startup
signal by comparing with the start value.
If the zero sequence current value is greater than the start value of zero sequence
current then the zero sequence current startup signal will be activated.
Voltage startup signal becomes activated when the any of phase voltage and line
voltage is less than the voltage start value and the remote startup signal has to be
activated.
Current startup signal becomes activated when the current value in all phases is
less than current start value.
Phase-to-phase current variation
Phase-to-phase current variation one is main startup element. It covers most of the
abnormal status of the system. The phase-to-phase current variation fails in high
impedance faults, three-phase fault on weak side and switch onto fault on unloaded
line because of low sensitivity in these cases.
Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and the signal is
evaluated using the sampling value based algorithm.
The phase-to-phase current variation criterion is shown below:

DiFF > 1.8DIT + DI ZD

EQUATION2255 V1 EN

Where:

sampling value of phase-to-phase current variation

IZD

setting of fixed threshold, which corresponds to setting ICV>. The default value for
the setting is 0.2IBase, where IBase is the base current.

IT

float threshold

It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation

1 2T -1
DIT = | DiFF (t - n) |
T n =T
EQUATION2256 V1 EN

Where:
T

count of sample values in one cycle

167
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

i is calculated using the below formula:

Di (k ) = [i ( k ) - i (k - N )] - [i (k - N ) - i (k - 2 N )]
= i ( k ) - 2i ( k - N ) + i (k - 2 N )
EQUATION2257 V1 EN

N is the number of samples in one cycle.

tCV

STCVL1L2

t
I3P

cont

tCV

Current variation
subfunction

STCVL2L3

tCV

STCVL3L1

OR

STCV
cont

IEC10000295-1-en.vsd
IEC10000295 V1 EN

Figure 54:

Current variation logic diagram

tCV is the time setting for the change of current criterion. Phase current samples
are included in input signal I3P.
Zero sequence current criterion
Zero sequence criterion is mainly for detection of remote IED high resistance faults
or some gradual faults. The criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. Zero
sequence current is compared with I3I0> for the t3I0 time to generate the zero
sequence current startup signal.
I3P

a
b

I3IO>

BLK3I0
BLOCK

a>b

AND

t3I0
t

ST3I0

OR

IEC09000778-2-en.vsd
IEC09000778 V2 EN

Figure 55:

Zero sequence current criterion logic diagram

168
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Here I3I0> is the setting of the maximum possible non-faulted zero sequence
current for the protected line. The default value for this setting is 0.1 IBase where
IBase is the rated current of the CT.
t3I0 is the time setting for the zero sequence current criterion.
The zero sequence current criterion can be blocked by activating the BLK3I0 input
signal.
Low voltage criterion
Low voltage criterion is mainly for detection of the three phase faults occurring on
weak side with pre fault no load condition. The low voltage criterion takes the
voltage phase values, voltage phase-to-phase values and remote startup signals as
inputs. The logic for low voltage criterion is shown below:
U3P (UPhN)

UPhN<
U3P (UPhPh)

b
a

UPhPh<

a<b

OR
a<b
tUV

REMSTUP (Recived)

AND

STUV

BLKUV
OR

BLOCK

IEC09000779-2-en.vsd
IEC09000779 V2 EN

Figure 56:

Low voltage criterion logic diagram

Voltage phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase and voltage
phase-to-phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase-to-phase. If
any of the phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltages is below the set voltage levels
for some time duration (tUV) then the low voltage START signal becomes
activated after receiving the remote startup signal. Low voltage criterion can be
blocked by activating BLKUV input signal.
If there are more than one remote IED, all the startup signals of the remote ends are
logically OR to obtain the REMSTUP signal from the remote side as input.
Low current criterion
The current in each phase is compared to the set current level. If all currents are
below setting IUC<, the STUC output is activated after the set delay tUC.

169
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

I3P

IUC<

BLKUC
BLOCK

a<b

tUC

AND

STUC

OR

IEC09000780-2-en.vsd
IEC09000780 V2 EN

Figure 57:

Low current criterion logic diagram

Security logic for differential protection

The configuration for the additional security logic for differential protection is
shown in Figure 58. The function will release tripping of the line differential
protection up to the end of timer tStUpReset.
Phase-phase
current variation

STCV

Zero sequence
current criterion

ST3IO

I0 >

tStUpReset
t

Low voltage
criterion

STUV

Low current
criterion

STUC

ULOW <

START

OR

Local side start-up

Send signal to
remote side

I0 <

REMSTUP

IEC10000296-2-en.vsd
IEC10000296 V2 EN

Figure 58:

6.4.8

Additional security logic for differential protection. Logic diagram for

start up element.

Technical data
Table 68:

LDRGFC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current, zero

sequence current

(1-100)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir

Operate current, low current

operation

(1-100)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir

Operate voltage, phase to

neutral

(1-100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Operate voltage, phase to

phase

(1-100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Table continues on next page

170
Technical Manual

Section 6
Differential protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Independent time delay, zero

sequence current at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 40 ms
whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low

current operation at 2 x Iset to 0

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 40 ms
whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low

voltage operation at 2 x Uset
to 0

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 40 ms
whichever is greater

Reset time delay for startup

signal at 0 to 2 x Uset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 40 ms
whichever is greater

171
Technical Manual

172

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 7

Impedance protection

7.1

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral

characteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR

7.1.1

Identification
Function description
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
characteristic (zone 1)

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMQPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral

characteristic (zone 2-5)

ZMQAPDIS

Directional impedance quadrilateral

ZDRDIR

21

S00346 V1 EN

21D

Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN

7.1.2

Functionality
The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and
reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer
connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
ZMQPDIS together with Phase selection with load encroachment FDPSPDIS has
functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
The distance protection zones can operate independently of each other in
directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode.

173
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.1.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
ZMQPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND

TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC06000256-2-en.vsd

IEC06000256 V2 EN

Figure 59:

ZMQPDIS function block

ZMQAPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND

TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC09000884-1-en.vsd

IEC09000884 V1 EN

Figure 60:

ZMQAPDIS function block (zone 2 - 5)

The two inputs I3P Three phase group signal for current and
U3P Three phase group signal for voltage, must be connected to
non-adaptive SMAI blocks if ANY OF THE ZONES are set for
directional operation. That is, the parameter DFTReference in used
SMAI must be set to InternalDFTRef. If adaptive SMAI block is
used this might result in a wrong directional and reach evaluation.

ZDRDIR
I3P*
U3P*

STDIRCND

IEC10000007-1-en.vsd
IEC10000007 V1 EN

Figure 61:

ZDRDIR function block

174
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.1.4

Signals
Table 69:
Name

ZMQPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

VTSZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output by fuse failure signal

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

STCND

INTEGER

External start condition (loop enabler)

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 70:
Name

ZMQPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General Start, issued from any phase or loop

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

STND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional start, issued from any phase or

loop

Table 71:
Name

ZMQAPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

VTSZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output by fuse failure signal

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

STCND

INTEGER

External start condition (loop enabler)

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

175
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 72:

ZMQAPDIS Output signals

Name

Type

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General Start, issued from any phase or loop

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

STND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional start, issued from any phase or

loop

Table 73:

ZDRDIR Input signals

Name

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

Table 74:

ZDRDIR Output signals

Name

Type

STDIRCND

7.1.5

Description

Description

INTEGER

Binary coded directional information per

measuring loop

Settings
Signals and settings for ZMQPDIS are valid for zone 1 while
signals and settings for ZMQAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5

Table 75:

ZMQPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

X0

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

Table continues on next page

176
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

R0

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

RFPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph

RFPE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E

OperationPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops

OpModetPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth

loops

OpModetPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-E

IMinOpPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops

IMinOpPE

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

IMinOpIN

5 - 1000

%IB

Minimum operate residual current for

Phase-Earth loops

Table 76:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

ZMQPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Table 77:

ZMQAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step
1

Step

Default
1

Default

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

X0

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

R0

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

RFPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph

RFPE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E

OperationPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops

OpModetPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph

Table continues on next page

177
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth

loops

OpModetPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-E

IMinOpPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops

IMinOpPE

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

Table 78:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

Table 79:
Name

Step

Default

Description

ZMQAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IMinOpPP

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase-phase current

for Phase-Phase loops

IMinOpPE

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

ArgNegRes

90 - 175

Deg

115

Angle of blinder in second quadrant for

forward direction

ArgDir

5 - 45

Deg

15

Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for

forward direction

Table 80:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

ZDRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

178
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.1.6

Monitored data
Table 81:

ZDRDIR Monitored data

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

L1Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L1

L2Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L2

L3Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L3

L1R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L1

L1X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L1

L2R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L2

L2X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L2

L3R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L3

L3X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L3

7.1.7

Operation principle

7.1.7.1

Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 62 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,
impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.
L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 1

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 2

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 3

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 4

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 5

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone RV
IEC05000458-2-en.vsd

IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 62:

The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-tophase fault.

179

Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

7.1.7.2

Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three
intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as,
three-phase faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the nondirectional impedance characteristics presented in figure 63 and figure 64. The phaseto-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-tophase characteristic presents the per phase reach.
X (Ohm/loop)

R1+Rn
RFPE

RFPE

X1+Xn

jN
RFPE

jN

Xn =

X0-X1
3

Rn =

R0-R1
3

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE

X1+Xn

RFPE

RFPE
IEC11000427-1-en.vsd

R1+Rn
IEC11000427 V1 EN

Figure 63:

Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop domain

180
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RFPP

(Ohm/phase)

R1

RFPP

X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG
1RVPG
-X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
--1X
11FWPE
XX
-X
X00PE
0PE
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3
3 3

X1

R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP

RFPP

X1

RFPP
2

R1

RFPP
2

IEC11000428-1-en.vsd

IEC11000428 V1 EN

Figure 64:

Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 65. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

181
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UL1

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1

Phase-to-earth
element

RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0

Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2

UL1

IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP

IL2

(Arc resistance)

UL2
R1 + j X1

UL1
Three-phase
fault

IL1

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3

IL3
UL3
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd

IEC08000282 V2 EN

Figure 65:

Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 65 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings and RFPP are the eventual fault
resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 65, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 66. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for
forward and reverse direction (there are different forward and reverse settings - Zx
and ZxRev respectively, where x = 1 - 5). Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.

182
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 66:

7.1.7.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic
(ZMQPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain
threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three-phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn < IMinOpPP.
ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.
All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir = Reverse.

7.1.7.4

Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

183
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 31 (example for a

phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 UL2
Zapp = ------------------------I L1 IL2
(Equation 31)

EQUATION1222 V1 EN

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth
faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 32.
Z app =

U L1
I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 32)

EQUATION1223 V2 EN

Where:
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED

U L1
I L1
IN
KN
is defined as:

KN =

Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1

EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0

is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach

X0

is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach

R1

is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

X1

is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

184
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.
The formula given in equation 32 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 33,
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN

(Equation 33)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION354 V1 EN

(Equation 34)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION355 V1 EN

(Equation 35)

with
w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN

(Equation 36)

where:
Re

designates the real component of current and voltage,

Im

designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and

f0

designates the rated system frequency

185
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 37)

EQUATION357 V1 EN

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 38)

EQUATION358 V1 EN

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and
reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.1.7.5

Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance
quadrilateral function ZDRDIR. Equation 39 and equation 40 are used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg

0.8 U 1L1 + 0.2 U 1L1 M

I L1

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 39)

EQUATION725 V2 EN

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

186
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

- ArgDir < arg

0.8 U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 U 1L1 L 2 M

I L1 L 2

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 40)

EQUATION726 V2 EN

where:
ArgDir

is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and

ArgNegRes

is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 67.

U 1L1
U 1L1M

I L1
U 1L1L 2

U 1L1L 2 M
I L1L 2

is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
is phase current in phase L1
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (as shown in figure 67). It should not be changed unless
system studies have shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the
output STDIRCND.
STDIR=

STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

187
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ArgNegRes

ArgDir

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 67:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in

Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
After 100 ms the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

188
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.1.7.6

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-tophase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one
logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 68.

Two types of function block, ZMQPDIS and ZMQAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMQPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMQAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FDPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately.
Input signal STCND is connected to FDPSPDIS or FMPSPDIS function output
STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be
configured to the STDIR output on ZDRDIR function.

189
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STZMPP

OR

STCND

STNDL1L2

L1L2

AND

L2L3

AND

L3L1

AND

STNDL3L1

L1N

AND

STNDL1N

L2N

AND

STNDL2N

L3N

AND

STNDL2L3

STNDL3N
STPE

OR

OR
VTSZ
BLOCK

AND

OR
BLOCFUNC

STND
BLK
99000557-2.vsd

IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 68:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external

start condition

Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 69.

IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN

Figure 69:

Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

190
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 70.
STNDL1N
DIRL1N

AND
STZMPE.

OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N

AND

STNDL3N

OR

DIRL3N

AND

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2

AND

OR

AND

15 ms
t

STL1

AND

15 ms
t

STL2

AND

15 ms
t

STL3

STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3

AND
OR

STNDL3L1
DIRL3L1

AND
STZMPP

OR
BLK

OR

AND

15 ms
t

START

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN

Figure 70:

Composition of start signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 71.

191
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP

tPP
t

AND

BLKFUNC

OR

Timer tPE=On
STZMPE

AND
OR

tPE
t

AND

AND

15ms
AND

BLKTR
BLK

TRIP

OR

STL1

AND

TRL1

STL2

AND

TRL2

STL3

AND

TRL3

IEC09000887-2-en.vsd
IEC09000887 V2 EN

Figure 71:

7.1.8

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

Technical data
Table 82:

ZMQPDIS Technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

Max 5 with selectable

direction

Minimum operate residual

current, zone 1

(5-1000)% of IBase

Minimum operate current, phaseto-phase and phase-to-earth

(10-1000)% of IBase

Positive sequence reactance

(0.10-3000.00) /
phase

Positive sequence resistance

(0.01-1000.00) /
phase

Zero sequence reactance

(0.10-9000.00) /
phase

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Zero sequence resistance

(0.01-3000.00) /
phase

Fault resistance, phase-to-earth

(0.10-9000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, phase-to-phase

(0.10-3000.00) /loop

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30

Table continues on next page

192
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and

Ph-E operation

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 40 ms whichever is greater

Operate time

25 ms typically

IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach

Min = 20 ms
Max = 35 ms

7.2

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

fixed angle FDPSPDIS

7.2.1

Identification

7.2.1.1

Identification
Function description
Phase selection with load
encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

FDPSPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

7.2.2

Functionality
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and
reinforcement of the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get
permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify
the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be
used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the
proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements
continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare
them with the set values.
193

Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.2.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
FDPSPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
DIRCND

TRIP
START
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE
IEC14000047-1-en.vsd

IEC10000047 V2 EN

Figure 72:

7.2.4

FDPSPDIS function block

Signals
Table 83:
Name

FDPSPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 84:
Name

FDPSPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip output

START

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or loop

STFWL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction

STFWL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction

STFWL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction

STFWPE

BOOLEAN

Earth fault detected in forward direction

STRVL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction

STRVL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction

STRVL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction

STRVPE

BOOLEAN

Earth fault detected in reverse direction

Table continues on next page

194
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

7.2.5

Type

Description

STNDL1

BOOLEAN

Non directional start in L1

STNDL2

BOOLEAN

Non directional start in L2

STNDL3

BOOLEAN

Non directional start in L3

STNDPE

BOOLEAN

Non directional start, phase-earth

STFW1PH

BOOLEAN

Start in forward direction for single-phase fault

STFW2PH

BOOLEAN

Start in forward direction for two- phase fault

STFW3PH

BOOLEAN

Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault

STPE

BOOLEAN

Current conditions release of phase-earth

measuring elements

STPP

BOOLEAN

Current conditions release of phase-phase

measuring elements

STCNDZ

INTEGER

Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

STCNDLE

INTEGER

Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

Settings

Table 85:

FDPSPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

INBlockPP

10 - 100

%IPh

40

3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase

measuring loops

INReleasePE

10 - 100

%IPh

20

3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth

measuring loops

RLdFw

1.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Forward resistive reach within the load

impedance area

RLdRv

1.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Reverse resistive reach within the load

impedance area

ArgLd

5 - 70

Deg

30

Load angle determining the load

impedance area

X1

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

X0

0.50 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

RFFwPP

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

RFRvPP

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

RFFwPE

1.00 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward

RFRvPE

1.00 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse

IMinOpPP

5 - 500

%IB

10

Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops

IMinOpPE

5 - 500

%IB

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

195
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 86:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

FDPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OperationZ<

Off
On

On

Operation of impedance based

measurement

OperationI>

Off
On

Off

Operation of current based measurement

IPh>

10 - 2500

%IB

120

Start value for phase over-current

element

IN>

10 - 2500

%IB

20

Start value for trip from 3I0 over-current

element

TimerPP

Off
On

Off

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph

TimerPE

Off
On

Off

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay to trip, Ph-E

Table 87:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

7.2.6

FDPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Operation principle
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection
with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS includes six
impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three
intended for phase-to-phase faults as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the
combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types
of faults.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements
continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current, and compare
them with the set values. The current signals are filtered by Fourier's recursive
filter, and separate trip counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring
elements.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FDPSPDIS uses information
from the directional function to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or
reverse direction.
The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

196
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

1.
2.
3.

Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:

1.
2.
3.

Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the
load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be
determined by the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function. There are outputs from FDPSPDIS that
indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse direction or non-directional, for
example STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.
These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FDPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 73.
X

Non-directional (ND)

Forward (FW)

Reverse (RV)
en08000286.vsd

IEC08000286 V1 EN

Figure 73:

Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation

of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic FDPSPDIS

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional
coming from the directional function . It shall be connected to the STDIR output on
197
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ZDRDIR, directional measuring block. This information is also transferred to the

input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMQPDIS, distance
measuring block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR=

STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in

forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward
direction in phase L1 and L2, binary code 192 means start in reverse direction in
phase L1 and L2A and B etc.
The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary
coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND
input on the ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

7.2.6.1

Phase-to-earth fault
For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be
according to equation 41.
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase
selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS.

ZPHSn =

ULn
ILn

EQUATION1255 V1 EN

(Equation 41)

where:
n

corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for FDPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 74. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 60.
The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 42 and equation 43.
198
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RN =

R0 - R1
3
(Equation 42)

EQUATION1256 V1 EN

XN =

X 0 - X1
3
(Equation 43)

EQUATION1257 V1 EN

X (ohm/loop)
Kr(X1+XN)
RFRvPE

RFFwPE

X1+XN
RFFwPE

R (Ohm/loop)

RFRvPE

60 deg

60 deg

X1+XN
Kr =

1
tan(60deg)

RFFwPE

RFRvPE
Kr(X1+XN)

en06000396.vsd
IEC06000396 V2 EN

Figure 74:

Characteristic of FDPSPDIS for phase-to-earth fault (setting

parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain (directional lines are drawn
as "line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 44 and equation 45.
3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
EQUATION2108 V1 EN

(Equation 44)

199
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

3 I0 INReleasePE
------------------------------------ Iphmax
100
(Equation 45)

EQUATION766 V1 EN

where:

IMinOpPE

is the minimum operation current for forward zones

INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phaseto-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax

7.2.6.2

is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be
according to equation 46.
ZPHS =

ULm - ULn
-2 ILn

EQUATION1258 V1 EN

(Equation 46)

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the
phase current in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 75.

200
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X (W /

phase)
0.5RFFwPP

0.5RFRvPP
KrX1

X1

0.5RFFwPP
60 deg

60 deg

R (W /
0.5RFRvPP

phase)

X1
Kr =

1
tan(60 deg)

KrX1
0.5RFRvPP

0.5RFFwPP
IEC09000047-2-en.vsd

IEC09000047 V2 EN

Figure 75:

The operation characteristics for FDPSPDIS at phase-to-phase

fault (setting parameters in italic, directional lines drawn as "line-dotdot-line"), ohm/phase domain

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current
conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop.
Those are according to equation 47 or equation 48.

3I 0 < IMinOpPE
(Equation 47)

EQUATION2109 V1 EN

3I 0 <

INBlockPP
Iph max
100

(Equation 48)

EQUATION2110 V1 EN

where:

IMinOpPE

is the minimum operation current for earth measuring loops,

INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and

Iphmax

is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

201
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.2.6.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 46, equation 47 and equation 48 are used to release the
operation of the function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all
directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counterclockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 76.
X (ohm/phase)
4 X1
3
90 deg
0.5RFFwPPK3
X1K3

4 RFFwPP
6

R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPPK3

K3 =

2
3

30 deg

IEC05000671-5-en.vsd
IEC05000671 V5 EN

Figure 76:

7.2.6.4

The characteristic of FDPSPDIS for three-phase fault (setting

parameters in italic)

Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is
always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 77. As illustrated, the
resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the
angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.

202
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RLdFw
ArgLd

ArgLd

ArgLd

RLdRv

ArgLd

IEC09000042-1-en.vsd
IEC09000042 V1 EN

Figure 77:

Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FDPSPDIS function. When output
signal STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FDPSPDIS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic (see figure 78, left illustration).
When output signal STCNDLE is selected, the operation characteristic will be as
the right illustration in figure 78. The reach will in this case be limit by the
minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.

203
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STCNDZ

STCNDLE
IEC10000099-1en.vsd

IEC10000099 V1 EN

Figure 78:

Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation

mode when load encroachment is activated

When FDPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 79. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area is
highlighted in black.

204
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN

Figure 79:

Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated

Figure 79 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation
the operate area is transformed according to figure 80. Notice in particular what
happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone.
Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90
degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to
quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach
around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load
encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.

205
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X (W /

phase)

Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W /

phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN

Figure 80:

Operating characteristic for FDPSPDIS in forward direction for threephase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 81. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement
as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same
time the characteristic will "shrink", divided by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and
RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.

206
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN

Figure 81:

Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the

quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected
by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage
in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four
should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

7.2.6.5

Minimum operate currents

The operation of the Phase selection with load encroachment function (FDPSPDIS)
is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS
value of the current in phase Ln.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).

7.2.6.6

Simplified logic diagrams

Figure 82 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-toearth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and

207
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is

available within the IED.
LDEblock
IRELPE

3I 0 0.5 IMinOpPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0
Iphmax
100

15 ms
t

&

OR
INBlockPP
3I 0 <
Iphmax
100

&

Bool to
integer

BLOCK

3I 0 < IMinOpPE

STPE

&

10 ms 20 ms
t
t

&

15 ms
t

STCNDLE

STPP
IRELPP

IEC09000149_2_en.vsd
IEC09000149 V2 EN

Figure 82:

Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A

STCNDLE output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment
characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 82. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring
elements, residual current and the load encroachment characteristic.
Figure 83 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase
selective signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n
change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the
fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is, within
the characteristic.

208
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N

OR

15 ms
t

STNDPE

OR

15 ms
t

STNDL1

OR

15 ms
t

STNDL2

AND

OR

15 ms
t

STNDL3

AND

INDL1L2

IRELPE
LDEblockL1N
ZML1N
LDEblockL2N
ZML2N
LDEblockL3N
ZML3N
LDEblockL1L2
ZML1L2
LDEblockL2L3
ZML2L3
LDEblockL3L1
ZML3L1

AND
AND
AND

AND

INDL2L3
INDL3L1

IRELPP
OR

15 ms
t

STNDPP

IEC00000545-3-en.vsd
IEC00000545-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 83:

Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 85 and figure 84. The directional criteria appears
as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase
selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex
network configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the
corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm.
Designation FW (figure 85) represents the forward direction as well as the
designation RV (figure 84) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals
are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.
Figure 84 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which
is created on the basis of the continuation of the impedance measuring conditions
and the load encroachment characteristic. This signal can be configured to STCND
functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the
operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring elements and
their phase related starting and tripping signals.

209
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

INDL1N
DRVL1N

AND

INDL1L2
DRVL1L2

AND

OR

15 ms
t

STRVL1

OR

15 ms
t

STRVPE

OR

15 ms
t

STRVL2

INDL3L1
DRVL3L1

AND

INDL2N
DRVL2N

AND

INDL1L2
AND
INDL2L3
DRVL2L3

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N
INDL1L2
INDL2L3
INDL3L1

AND

INDL3N
DRVL3N

AND

INDL2L3

Bool to
integer

15 ms
AND

OR

INDL3L1
AND

15 ms
OR

STCNDZ

STRVL3

STRVPP

IEC00000546_2_en.vsd
IEC00000546-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 84:

Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

210
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

AND
INDL1N
DFWL1N

AND

AND

OR

15 ms
t

INDL1L2
DFWL1L2

AND

OR

INDL3L1
DFWL3L1

DFWL2N

OR

15 ms
t

STFWL1

15 ms
t

STFWPE

15 ms
t

STFWL2

15 ms
t

STFW2PH

AND
AND

INDL1L2
AND

OR

INDL2L3
DFWL2L3

STFW1PH

AND

AND

INDL2N

15 ms
t

AND

OR

15 ms
t

AND

INDL3N
DFWL3N

AND

AND

INDL2L3
AND

15 ms
t

STFWL3

15 ms
t

STFW3PH

15 ms
t

STFWPP

OR

INDL3L1

AND
AND

OR

IEC05000201_2_en.vsd
IEC05000201 V2 EN

Figure 85:

Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure 86 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where
internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal
signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

211
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TimerPP=Off

tPP
t

AND
OR

TimerPE=Off

tPE
t

AND

AND
OR

TRIP

AND

STNDPP
STFWPP

OR

STRVPP
OR

STNDPE
STFWPE

START

OR

STRVPE

IEC08000441_2_en.vsd
IEC08000441-1 V2 EN

Figure 86:

TRIP and START signal logic

212
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.2.7

Technical data
Table 88:

FDPSPDIS technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Minimum operate current

(5-500)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive

sequence

(0.503000.00) /phase

Resistive reach, positive

sequence

(0.101000.00) /phase

Reactive reach, zero sequence

(0.509000.00) /phase

Resistive reach, zero sequence

(0.503000.00) /phase

2.5% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

Fault resistance, phase-to-earth

faults, forward and reverse

(1.009000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, phase-tophase faults, forward and reverse

(0.503000.00) /loop

Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle

(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees

Reset ratio

105% typically

7.3

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated lines
ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR

7.3.1

Identification
Function description
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral
characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 1)

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMCPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 2-5)

ZMCAPDIS

21

S00346 V1 EN

Directional impedance quadrilateral,

including series compensation

ZDSRDIR

21D

Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN

213
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.3.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and
reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different
types and lengths.
Quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMCPDIS function has functionality for load encroachment which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
X
Forward
operation

R
Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 87:

Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load

encroachment function activated

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables
in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

7.3.3

Function block
ZMCPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND

TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC07000036-2-en.vsd

IEC07000036 V2 EN

Figure 88:

ZMCPDIS function block

214
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ZMCAPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND

TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC09000890-1-en.vsd

IEC09000890 V1 EN

Figure 89:

ZMCAPDIS function block

ZDSRDIR

I3P*
U3P*

STFW
STRV
STDIRCND
IEC07000035-2-en.vsd

IEC07000035 V2 EN

Figure 90:

7.3.4

ZDSRDIR function block

Signals
Input and output signals is shown for zone 1, zone 2 - 5 are equal.

Table 89:
Name

ZMCPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

VTSZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output by fuse failure signal

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

STCND

INTEGER

External start condition (loop enabler)

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 90:
Name

ZMCPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

Table continues on next page

215
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

START

BOOLEAN

General Start, issued from any phase or loop

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

STND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional start, issued from any phase or

loop

Table 91:
Name

ZMCAPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

VTSZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output by fuse failure signal

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

STCND

INTEGER

External start condition (loop enabler)

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 92:
Name

ZMCAPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General Start, issued from any phase or loop

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

STND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional start, issued from any phase or

loop

Table 93:

ZDSRDIR Input signals

Name

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

216
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 94:

ZDSRDIR Output signals

Name

7.3.5

Type

Description

STFW

BOOLEAN

Start in forward direction

STRV

BOOLEAN

Start in reverse direction

STDIRCND

INTEGER

Binary coded directional information per

measuring loop

Settings
Settings for ZMCPDIS are valid for zone 1, while settings for
ZMCAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5

Table 95:

ZMCPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

OperationPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops

X1FwPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward

R1PP

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

RFFwPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

X1RvPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse

RFRvPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

OpModetPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth

loops

X1FwPE

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward

R1PE

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-E

X0PE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E

R0PE

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

47.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle, Ph-E

RFFwPE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward

X1RvPE

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse

Table continues on next page

217
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
Name

Step

Default

RFRvPE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse

OpModetPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-E

IMinOpPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops

IMinOpPE

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

IMinOpIN

5 - 1000

%IB

Minimum operate residual current for

Phase-Earth loops

Table 96:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Description

ZMCPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Table 97:

ZMCAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step
1

Step

Default
1

Default

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

OperationPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops

X1FwPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward

R1PP

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

RFFwPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

X1RvPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse

RFRvPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

OpModetPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth

loops

X1FwPE

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward

R1PE

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-E

X0PE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E

R0PE

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

47.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle, Ph-E

Table continues on next page

218
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

RFFwPE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward

X1RvPE

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse

RFRvPE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse

OpModetPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-E

IMinOpPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops

IMinOpPE

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

Table 98:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

ZMCAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Table 99:

ZDSRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step
1

Step

Default
1

Default

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Description

OperationSC

NoSeriesComp
SeriesComp

SeriesComp

Special directional criteria for voltage

reversal

IMinOpPE

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

IMinOpPP

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase-phase current

for Phase-Phase loops

ArgNegRes

90 - 175

Deg

130

Angle of blinder in second quadrant for

forward direction

ArgDir

5 - 45

Deg

15

Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for

forward direction

INReleasePE

10 - 100

%IPh

20

3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth

measuring loops

INBlockPP

10 - 100

%IPh

40

3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase

measuring loops

OperationLdCh

Off
On

On

Operation of load discrimination

characteristic

RLdFw

1.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Forward resistive reach within the load

impedance area

RLdRv

1.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Reverse resistive reach within the load

impedance area

ArgLd

5 - 70

Deg

30

Load angle determining the load

impedance area

X1FwPP

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward

R1PP

0.10 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

7.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

Table continues on next page

219
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Step

Default

RFFwPP

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

X1RvPP

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse

RFRvPP

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

X1FwPE

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward

R1PE

0.10 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

7.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-E

X0FwPE

0.50 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,

forward

R0PE

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

20.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle, Ph-E

RFFwPE

1.00 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward

X1RvPE

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse

X0RvPE

0.50 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,

reverse

RFRvPE

1.00 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse

Step

Default

Table 100:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

7.3.6

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

ZDSRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 101:
Name

ZDSRDIR Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

L1Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L1

L2Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L2

L3Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L3

L1R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L1

L1X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L1

L2R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L2

L2X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L2

L3R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L3

L3X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L3

220
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.3.7

Operation principle

7.3.7.1

Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase
faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 91 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones.
L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 1

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 2

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 3

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 4

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 5

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone RV
IEC05000458-2-en.vsd

IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 91:

The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-tophase fault

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

7.3.7.2

Impedance characteristic
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines
(ZMCPDIS) include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-toearth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase faults.
The distance measuring zone operates according to the non-directional impedance
characteristics presented in figure 92 and figure 93. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

221
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+RNFw
RFRvPE

RFFwPE

X 0 PE - X 1FwPE
3
X
PG- 1RVPG 1RvPE
XX00PE
1XRVPE
XNRV
=XXNFw

XNRV XNRv
==
3
3
X 1FwPE
XNFw =

XX0 PE
- X-1X
FWPE
0 PG
1FWPG
XNFW
XNFW==
3 3

X1FwPE+XNFw

jN

jN

RNFw =

R0 PE - R1PE
3

R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPE

RFFwPE

X1RvPE+XNRv

jN
RFRvPE

RFFwPE
IEC09000625-1-en.vsd

IEC09000625 V1 EN

Figure 92:

Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain

222
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RFRvPP

(Ohm/phase)

R1PP

RFFwPP

X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
X
0
PE
--1X
11FWPE
X
0
PE
X 0 PG X
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3 33

X1FwPP

j
jN
RFRvPP

RFFwPP

j
R (Ohm/phase)

X1RvPP

jN
RFRvPP

RFFwPP

IEC09000632-1-en.vsd

IEC09000632 V1 EN

Figure 93:

Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 94. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

223
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UL1

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1

Phase-to-earth
element

RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0

Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2

UL1

IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP

IL2

(Arc resistance)

UL2
R1 + j X1

UL1
Three-phase
fault

IL1

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3

IL3
UL3
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd

IEC08000282 V2 EN

Figure 94:

Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 94 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 94, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 95. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach
is symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.

224
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 95:

7.3.7.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP.
ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.
All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

7.3.7.4

Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

225
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 49

(example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 UL2
Zapp = ------------------------I L1 IL2
(Equation 49)

EQUATION1222 V1 EN

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase.
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults
(example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 50.
Z app =

U L1
I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 50)

EQUATION1223 V2 EN

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN

KN =

is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1

EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0

is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach

X0

is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach

R1

is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

X1

is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.

226
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The formula given in equation 50 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder
applications. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 51,
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN

(Equation 51)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION354 V1 EN

(Equation 52)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION355 V1 EN

(Equation 53)

with
w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN

(Equation 54)

where:
Re

designates the real component of current and voltage,

Im

designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and

f0

designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:

227
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN

(Equation 55)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN

(Equation 56)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and
reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.3.7.5

Directionality for series compensation

In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing
voltage is performed by an undervoltage control. In case of series compensated
line, a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the
memory must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory
control can not be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series
compensated network the polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an
impedance measurement criterion.
The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is
continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to
run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A nondirectional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty
phase or phases.
At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases
are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.
The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault
frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the
accuracy of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network
is at a three phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition
can only be predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.
In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can
not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The
achieved direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is
blocked and kept until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored
until the fault is cleared).

228
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional
measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three
phase fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of
the polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited
to 100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance
measurement to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to
cover (with some margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance
quadrilateral, including series compensation (ZDSRDIR) function. Equation 57 and
equation 58 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-toearth fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg

U 1L1M
< ArgNeg Re s
I L1
(Equation 57)

EQUATION2004 V2 EN

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to:
- ArgDir < arg

U 1L1L 2 M
< ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
(Equation 58)

EQUATION2006 V2 EN

where:

ArgDir

is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and

ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see Figure 96.
U1L1M

is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1

is phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2M

is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2

is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively, see Figure 96, and it should not be changed unless system
studies have shown the necessity.
ZDSRDIR generates a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4.

229
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ArgNegRes

ArgDir

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 96:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

7.3.7.6

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by Ln, where n represents the
corresponding phase number (L1, L2, and L3). The phase-to-phase signals are
designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers
(L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one
logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 97.

Two types of function block, ZMCPDIS and ZMCAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMCPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMCAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.

230
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the
zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each
condition separately. It is connected to Phase selection with load enchroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.

STZMPP

OR

STCND

STNDL1L2

L1L2

AND

L2L3

AND

L3L1

AND

STNDL3L1

L1N

AND

STNDL1N

L2N

AND

STNDL2N

L3N

AND

STNDL2L3

STNDL3N
STPE

OR

OR
VTSZ
BLOCK

AND

OR
BLOCFUNC

STND
BLK
99000557-2.vsd

IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 97:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 98.

231
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN

Figure 98:

Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 99.
STNDL1N
DIRL1N

AND
STZMPE.

OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N

AND

STNDL3N

OR

DIRL3N

AND

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2

AND

OR

AND

15 ms
t

STL1

AND

15 ms
t

STL2

AND

15 ms
t

STL3

STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3

AND
OR

STNDL3L1
DIRL3L1

AND
STZMPP

OR
BLK

OR

AND

15 ms
t

START

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN

Figure 99:

Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 100.

232
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP

tPP
t

AND

BLKFUNC

OR

Timer tPE=On
STZMPE

AND
OR

tPE
t

AND

AND

15ms
AND

BLKTR
BLK

TRIP

OR

STL1

AND

TRL1

STL2

AND

TRL2

STL3

AND

TRL3

IEC09000887-2-en.vsd
IEC09000887 V2 EN

Figure 100:

7.3.8

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

Technical data
Table 102:

ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS Technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

Max 5 with selectable direction

Minimum operate residual

current, zone 1

(5-1000)% of IBase

Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph

and Ph-E

(10-1000)% of IBase

Positive sequence reactance

(0.10-3000.00) /phase

Positive sequence resistance

(0.10-1000.00) /phase

Zero sequence reactance

(0.01-9000.00) /phase

Zero sequence resistance

(0.01-3000.00) /phase

Fault resistance, Ph-E

(0.10-9000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, Ph-Ph

(0.10-3000.00) /loop

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees measured

with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and

Ph-E operation

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever
is greater

Operate time

25 ms typically

IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach

Min = 20 ms
Max = 35 ms

233
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.4

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho

characteristic ZMHPDIS

7.4.1

Identification
Function description

Full-scheme distance protection, mho

characteristic

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617 identification

ZMHPDIS

ANSI/IEEE
C37.2 device
number
21

S00346 V1 EN

7.4.2

Functionality
The numerical mho line distance protection is a, up to four zone full scheme
protection for back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults.
The full scheme technique provides back-up protection of power lines with high
sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication.
The four zones have fully independent measuring and settings, which gives high
flexibility for all types of lines.
Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the function.
The function can be used as under impedance back-up protection for transformers
and generators.

234
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.4.3

Function block
ZMHPDIS
I3P*
TRIP
U3P*
TRL1
CURR_INP*
TRL2
VOLT_INP*
TRL3
POL_VOLT*
TRPE
BLOCK
TRPP
BLKZ
START
BLKZMTD
STL1
BLKHSIR
STL2
BLKTRIP
STL3
BLKPE
STPE
BLKPP
STPP
EXTNST
STTIMER
INTRNST
DIRCND
STCND*
LDCND
IEC06000423-2-en.vsd
IEC06000423 V3 EN

Figure 101:

7.4.4

ZMHPDIS function block

Signals
Table 103:
Name

ZMHPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for current sample signals

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for voltage sample signals

CURR_INP

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for current signals

VOLT_INP

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for voltage signals

POL_VOLT

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for polarizing voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Block due to fuse failure

BLKZMTD

BOOLEAN

Block signal for blocking of time domaine function

BLKHSIR

BOOLEAN

Blocks time domain function at high SIR

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocks all operate output signals

BLKPE

BOOLEAN

Blocks phase-to-earth operation

BLKPP

BOOLEAN

Blocks phase-to-phase operation

EXTNST

BOOLEAN

External start

INTRNST

BOOLEAN

Internal start

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

STCND

INTEGER

External start condition (loop enabler)

LDCND

INTEGER

External load condition (loop enabler)

235
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 104:

ZMHPDIS Output signals

Name

7.4.5
Table 105:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip General

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip phase L3

TRPE

BOOLEAN

Trip phase-to-earth

TRPP

BOOLEAN

Trip phase-to-phase

START

BOOLEAN

Start General

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start phase L3

STPE

BOOLEAN

Start phase-to-earth

STPP

BOOLEAN

Start phase-to-phase

STTIMER

BOOLEAN

Start timer

Settings
ZMHPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

DirMode

Off
Offset
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction mode

LoadEncMode

Off
On

Off

Load encroachment mode Off/On

ReachMode

Overreach
Underreach

Overreach

Reach mode Over/Underreach

ZnTimerSel

Timers seperated
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start

Timers seperated

Zone timer selection

OpModePE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth

loops

ZPE

0.005 - 3000.000

Ohm/p

0.001

30.000

Positive sequence impedance setting for

Phase-Earth loop

ZAngPE

10 - 90

Deg

85

Angle for positive sequence line

impedance for Phase-Earth loop

KN

0.00 - 3.00

0.01

0.80

Magnitude of earth return compensation

factor KN

KNAng

-180 - 180

Deg

-15

Angle for earth return compensation

factor KN

Table continues on next page

236
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ZRevPE

0.005 - 3000.000

Ohm/p

0.001

30.000

Reverse reach of the phase to earth

loop(magnitude)

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Delay time for operation of phase to

earth elements

IMinOpPE

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum operation phase to earth current

OpModePP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops

ZPP

0.005 - 3000.000

Ohm/p

0.001

30.000

Impedance setting reach for phase to

phase elements

ZAngPP

10 - 90

Deg

85

Angle for positive sequence line

impedance for Phase-Phase elements

ZRevPP

0.005 - 3000.000

Ohm/p

0.001

30.000

Reverse reach of the phase to phase

loop(magnitude)

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Delay time for operation of phase to phase

IMinOpPP

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum operation phase to phase

current

Table 106:
Name

ZMHPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OffsetMhoDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Direction mode for offset mho

OpModetPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

OpModetPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-ph

Table 107:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

ZMHPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step

Default

7.4.6

Operation principle

7.4.6.1

Full scheme measurement

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
are executed in parallel for all zones.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.
237
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.4.6.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Impedance characteristic
The Mho distance function ZMHPDIS is present with four instances so that four
separate zones could be designed. Each instance can be selected to be either
forward or reverse with positive sequence polarized mho characteristic;
alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics is also available. One
example of the operating characteristic is shown in Figure 102 A) where zone 5 is
selected offset mho.
The directional mho characteristic of Figure 102 B) has a dynamic expansion due
to the source impedance. Instead of mho characteristic crossing origin, which is
only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the
coordinates of the negative source impedance giving an expansion of the circle of
Figure 102 B).

jx

Mho, zone4
Zs=0

Mho, zone3
Mho, zone2

Mho, zone1
Zs=Z1
Zs=2Z1
R
Offset mho, zone5

IEC09000143-3-en.vsd
IEC09000143 V3 EN

Figure 102:

Mho, offset mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic

The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults than a plain cross polarized characteristic. However, if the
source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the
security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions.
The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a
section of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the
setting parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment
function increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering
238
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

with the load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS,
where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load
encroachment from FMPSPDIS to the zone measurement is given in binary format
to the input signal LDCND.

7.4.6.3

Basic operation characteristics

Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter
Operation.
Each zone can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the
parameter DirMode .
The operation for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase fault can be individually
switched On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is
possible to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to
Underreach. In this mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by
20% and the filtering is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring.
If the ReachMode is set to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and
no extra filtering introduced. The latter setting is recommended for overreaching
pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and reverse zone where overreaching on
transients is not a major issue either because of less likelihood of overreach with
higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.
The offset Mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by
the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a
directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from
the directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal
to the input DIRCND.
The zone reach for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually
in polar coordinates.
The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the corresponding
arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP.
Compensation for earth -return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth-return
path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE .
KNMag =
EQUATION1579 V1 EN

Z0-Z1
3 Z1
(Equation 59)

239
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

KNAng = arg

Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1

)
(Equation 60)

EQUATION1580 V1 EN

where
Z0

is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in /phase

Z1

is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in /phase

The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time
delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be
set to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.
The operate timers triggering input depends on the parameter ZnTimerSel setting.
The parameter ZnTimerSel can be set to:

Timers separated: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by

the respective measuring loop start signals.
Timers linked: Start of any of the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase loops will
trigger both the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase timers.
Internal start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the
INTRNST input.
Start from PhSel: The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered
by the STCND and LDCND inputs. Each of the two inputs consist binary status
information related to the six measuring loops. Hence if any of the measuring
loop status is high in both two inputs STCND and LDCND, then the timers will
be triggered. In case when LoadEnchMode is off then only STCND enables the
timer.
It is not recommended to use this timer setting for the Zone
instance where LoadEnchMode is off.

External start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

EXTNST input.

The function can be blocked in the following ways:

activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based time domain algorithm
activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the
algorithm for high SIR values

240
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals

activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs
activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs

The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function
or from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In
both cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the
input BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS)
The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been
detected by ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be
connected to the BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.
At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the builtin resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a while.
The input BLKHSIR is connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC for
increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive
underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.

7.4.6.4

Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of a operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor
by more than 90 degrees, the function operates and gives a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault
Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in Figure 103. The condition for
deriving the angle is according to equation 61.

b = arg(U L1 L 2 - I L1 L 2 ZPP ) - arg(U pol )

(Equation 61)

EQUATION1789 V1 EN

where

U L1L2

is the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1790 V2
EN

I L1L2

is the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1791 V2
EN

ZPP

is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault

Upol

is the polarizing voltage

241
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage

(UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of
the Mho circle for close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90270
IL1L2X

Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP

Upol
UL1L2

IL1L2R

en07000109.vsd
IEC07000109 V1 EN

Figure 103:

Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-toL2 fault

Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has
the settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the
two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater than or equal to 90
(figure 104). The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for L1-to-L2 fault can be defined according to equation 62.

242
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

U-(-IL1L2 ZRevPP)

b = arg

U -IL1L2 ZPP

(Equation 62)

EQUATION1792 V1 EN

where

is the UL1L2 voltage

EQUATION1800 V1 EN

ZRevPP

is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction

IL1L2jX

Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP

U
Ucomp2 = U = IFZF=UL1L2
IL1L2R

- IL1L2 Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd
IEC07000110 V1 EN

Figure 104:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase

L1-to-L2 fault.

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction
When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria
beside the one for offset mho (90<<270) is introduced, that is the angle between
the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and
fourth quadrant. See figure 105. Operation occurs if 90270 and
ArgDirArgNegRes.

243
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

where

ArgDir

is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.

ArgNegRes

is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.

is calculated according to equation 62

The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the
mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) for information
about the mho directional element.
IL1L2jX

ZPP

UL1L2

ArgNegRes

IL1L2
ArgDir

en07000111.vsd
IEC07000111 V1 EN

Figure 105:

Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase

L1-to-L2 fault

Offset mho, reverse direction

The operation area for offset mho in reverse direction is according to figure 106.
The operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180.
Operation occurs if 90270 and 180 - ArgDir ArgNegRes + 180
The is derived according to equation 62 for the mho circle and is the angle
between the voltage and current.

244
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X
ZPP

ArgNegRes

IL1L2

ArgDir

UL1L2

ZRevPP
en06000469.eps
IEC06000469 V1 EN

Figure 106:

Operation characteristic for reverse phase L1-to-L2 fault

Phase-to-earth fault
Mho
The measuring of earth faults uses earth-return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the
influence from the earth-return path.
For an earth fault in phase L1, the compensation voltage Ucomp can be derived, as
shown in Figure 107.

245
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Ucomp = U pol - I L1 Z loop

(Equation 63)

EQUATION1793 V1 EN

where
Upol

is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1-to- earth fault)

Zloop

is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as

Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN

where
Z1

is the positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)

KN

is the zero-sequence compensator factor

The angle between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1-to-earth
fault is

= arg U L1 I L1 + 3I 0 KN ZPE arg (Upol )

(Equation 64)

GUID-A9492CDF-D3B7-4DC5-8E06-6638BEE2540B V2 EN

where
UL1

is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1

IL1

is the phase current in faulty phase L1

3I0

is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase L1

KN

Z0-Z1
3 Z1
the setting parameter for the zero sequence
compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and
the angle KNAng.

Upol

is the 100% of positive sequence memorized

voltage UL1

246
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IL1X
IL1ZN

Ucomp

IL1 Zloop
IL1ZPE
Upol
f
IL1 (Ref)

IL1R

en06000472_2.vsd
IEC06000472 V2 EN

Figure 107:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase

L1-to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho
The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the setting reach for
the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The
vector ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for
ZRevPP is AngZPE+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle between the
two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see
figure 108. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for L1-to-earth fault can be defined as

UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )

b = arg

UL1- IL1L ZPE

(Equation 65)

EQUATION1802 V1 EN

U L1

is the phase L1 voltage

EQUATION1
805 V1 EN

247
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IL1L 2 jX

U comp1 = UL1 - I L1 ZPE

IL1 ZPE

UL1

U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 ZRevPE)

IL1L2 R

- I L1 Z Re vPe
en 06000465.vsd
IEC06000465 V1 EN

Figure 108:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction
In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset
mho will introduce an extra criterion for operation. Beside the basic criteria for
offset mho according to equation 65 and 90270, also the criteria that the angle
between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and
fourth quadrant. See figure 109. Operation occurs if 90270 and
ArgDirArgNegRes.
where

ArgDir

is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.

ArgNegRes

is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.

is calculated according to equation 65

248
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IL1 jX

UL1

ArgNegRes

IL1R

IL1
ArgDir

en 06000466.vsd
IEC06000466 V1 EN

Figure 109:

Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1-toearth fault

Offset mho, reverse direction

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in
reverse direction will introduce an extra criterion for operation compare to the
normal offset mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the
fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The
operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir
and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 110.
The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for L1-to-earth fault
is 90270 and 180-ArgdirArgNegRes+180.
The is derived according to equation 65 for the offset mho circle and is the
angle between the voltage and current.

249
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X
ZPE

ArgNegRes

IL
1
ArgDir

UL1
ZRevPE

en06000470.eps
IEC06000470 V1 EN

Figure 110:

7.4.6.5

Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for L1-toearth fault

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones
The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-tophase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one
logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 111.

The ZMHPDIS function block is used in the IED for each zone.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment function FMPSPDIS within the IED,
250
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding
boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal STCND is
connected from FMPSPDIS function output signal STCNDPHS.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal
DIRCND must be configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR
function.
OffsetMhoDir=
Non-directional

AND

AND

DirMode=Offset
STCND

T
F

AND

AND
LoadEnchMode=
On/Off
LDCND

T
F

True

AND

Release

DIRCND
OffsetMhoDir=
Forward/Reverse
DirMode=
Forward/Reverse

AND

BLKZ
BLOCK

OR

IEC11000216-1-en.vsd
IEC11000216 V1 EN

Figure 111:

Simplified logic for release start signal

When load encroachment mode is switched on (LoadEnchMode=On), start signal

STCND is also checked against LDCND signal.
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 111.
Composition of the phase start signals is presented in figure 69.

251
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Release

STL1N
STL2N
STL3N

STPE

OR

AND

STL1

OR
AND
AND

STL2

OR
STL1L2
STL2L3

AND
AND
STL3

OR
STL3L1

AND

OR

OR

START

STPP

IEC11000217-1-en.vsd
IEC11000217 V1 EN

Figure 112:

Composition of starting signals

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 71.

252
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Timer tPP=On

tPP
t

AND

STPP

OR
Timer tPE=On

tPE
t

AND

STPE

15ms
AND

BLKTRIP

TRIP

STL1

AND

TRL1

STL2

AND

TRL2

STL3

AND

TRL3

IEC11000218-1-en.vsd
IEC11000218 V1 EN

Figure 113:

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

Zone timer logic for the distance protection is symbolically presented in figure 114.
STPE
BLOCK
&
&
a
a=b
b

Internal
start

Internal
start

a
b

TRPE

tON
t

STTIMER

&

a<b

&

tON
t

&&

TRPP
STPP

ZnTimerSel
FALSE

1
internalCommonStart

1 timers seperated
2 timers linked
3 internal start

phSelStart

4 start from phSel

externalCommonStart

5 external start

IEC12000463-3-en.vsd

IEC12000463 V2 EN

Figure 114:

Zone timer logic

253
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.4.7

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 108:

ZMHPDIS technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones, Ph-E

Max 4 with selectable direction

Minimum operate current

(1030)% of IBase

Positive sequence impedance,

Ph-E loop

(0.0053000.000) W/phase

Positive sequence impedance

angle, Ph-E loop

(1090) degrees

Reverse reach, Ph-E loop

(Magnitude)

(0.0053000.000) /phase

2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: 85 degrees

Magnitude of earth return

compensation factor KN

(0.003.00)

Angle for earth compensation

factor KN

(-180180) degrees

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees measured

with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and PhE operation

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 60 ms whichever is
greater

Operate time

22 ms typically

IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time at 0.5 to 1.5 x Zreach

Min = 30 ms
Max = 45 ms

7.5

Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for

earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS

7.5.1

Identification
Function description
Fullscheme distance protection,
quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1)

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMMPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

Fullscheme distance protection,

quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 2-5)

ZMMAPDIS

21

S00346 V1 EN

254
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.5.2

Functionality
The distance protection is a , up to five zone protection with three fault loops for
phase-to-earth- fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each
zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and
cables of different types and lengths.
The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth fault functions
ZMMDPIS and ZMMAPDIS have functionality for load encroachment, which
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at
load exporting end at phase to earth- faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables
in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

7.5.3

Function block
ZMMPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND

TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC06000454-2-en.vsd

IEC06000454 V2 EN

Figure 115:

ZMMPDIS function block

ZMMAPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND

TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC09000947-1-en.vsd

IEC09000947 V1 EN

Figure 116:

ZMMAPDIS function block

255
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.5.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 109:
Name

ZMMPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output by fuse failure signal

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

STCND

INTEGER

External start condition (loop enabler)

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 110:
Name

ZMMPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General Start, issued from any phase or loop

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

STND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional start, issued from any phase or

loop

Table 111:
Name

ZMMAPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output by fuse failure signal

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

STCND

INTEGER

External start condition (loop enabler)

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

256
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 112:

ZMMAPDIS Output signals

Name

7.5.5
Table 113:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General Start, issued from any phase or loop

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

STND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional start, issued from any phase or

loop

Settings
ZMMPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1

0.10 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

X0

0.50 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

R0

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

RFPE

1.00 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E

OpModetPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-E

IMinOpPE

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

IMinOpIN

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum operate residual current for

Phase-Earth loops

Table 114:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

ZMMPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

257
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 115:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ZMMAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1

0.10 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

X0

0.50 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

R0

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

RFPE

1.00 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E

OpModetPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-E

IMinOpPE

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

Table 116:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

ZMMAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step

Default

7.5.6

Operation principle

7.5.6.1

Full scheme measurement

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

The different fault loops within the IED are operating in parallel in the same
principle as a full scheme measurement.
Figure 117 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.

258
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

Zone 1

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

Zone 2

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

Zone 3

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

Zone 4

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

Zone 5

en07000080.vsd
IEC07000080 V1 EN

Figure 117:

7.5.6.2

The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase

fault.

Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault
loop for each phase.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the nondirectional impedance characteristics presented in Figure 118. The characteristic is
illustrated with the full loop reach.

259
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn
RFPE

RFPE

X1PE+Xn

jN
RFPE

Xn =

X0PE-X1PE
3

Rn =

R0PE-R1PE
3

jN

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE

RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN

Figure 118:

Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.

The fault loop reach may also be presented as in Figure 119.

UL1

ILn

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1

Phase-to-earth
element

RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

en06000412.vsd

IEC06000412 V1 EN

Figure 119:

Fault loop model

260
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The R1 and jX1 in Figure 119 represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE is presented in order to convey
the fault resistance reach.
The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward, Off or Reverse
direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is
illustrated in Figure 120. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is
conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.
X

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 120:

7.5.6.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
Both current limits IMinOpPE and IMinOpIN are automatically
reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in
reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

261
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.5.6.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.
Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3).
The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-earth fault follow equation
66
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner.
Z app =

U L1
I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 66)

EQUATION1223 V2 EN

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN

KN =

is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1

EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0

is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach

X0

is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach

R1

is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

X1

is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.

262
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The formula given in equation 66 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder
applications. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 67,
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN

(Equation 67)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION354 V1 EN

(Equation 68)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION355 V1 EN

(Equation 69)

with
w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN

(Equation 70)

where:
Re

designates the real component of current and voltage,

Im

designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and

f0

designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal
to:

263
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 71)

EQUATION357 V1 EN

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 72)

EQUATION358 V1 EN

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and
reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.5.6.5

Directionality
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the Directional impedance
element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR function. Equation 73 is used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-earth fault.

- ArgDir < arg

0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

I L1

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 73)

EQUATION1617 V1 EN

where:

ArgDir

is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and

ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 121.
U1L1

is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M

is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1

is phase current in phase L1

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (see figure 121) and it should not be changed unless system
studies have shown the necessity.
ZDMRDIR gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on
the evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1
adds 4 etc.

264
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ArgNegRes

ArgDir

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 121:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage
exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for
all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

265
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.5.6.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring phase-toearth loops.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the
corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E).
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one
logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 122.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the
zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each
condition separately. It is connected to the Phase selection with load
enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the
relevant signals on the DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the DIRCND output on the Directional
impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function.

266
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STCND

L1N

AND

STNDL1N

L2N

AND

STNDL2N

L3N

AND

STNDL3N
STNDPE

OR

OR
BLKZ
BLOCK

AND

OR

STND
BLK
en06000408-2.vsd

IEC06000408 V2 EN

Figure 122:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 123.
STNDL1N
AND

15 ms
t

STL1

AND

15 ms
t

STL2

AND

15 ms
t

STL3

AND

15 ms
t

START

STNDL2N
STNDL3N

OR
BLK

en06000409.vsd
IEC06000409 V1 EN

Figure 123:

Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 124.

267
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STNDL1N
DIRL1N

AND
OR

STNDL2N
DIRL2N
STNDL3N
DIRL3N

STZMPE.

&

AND

AND

&

15 ms
t

STL1

&

15 ms
t

STL2

&

15 ms
t

STL3

&

15 ms
t

START

BLK
OR

en07000081.vsd
IEC07000081 V1 EN

Figure 124:

Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 125.

Timer tPE=On
STZMPE

AND

tPE
t
15ms

TRIP

BLKTR

AND

STL1

AND

TRL1

STL2

AND

TRL2

STL3

AND

TRL3

en07000082.vsd
IEC07000082 V1 EN

Figure 125:

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

268
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.5.7

Technical data
Table 117:

ZMMPDIS technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

Max 5 with selectable direction

Minimum operate current

(10-30)% of IBase

Positive sequence reactance

(0.50-3000.00) W/phase

Positive sequence resistance

(0.10-1000.00) /phase

Zero sequence reactance

(0.50-9000.00) /phase

Zero sequence resistance

(0.50-3000.00) /phase

Fault resistance, Ph-E

(1.00-9000.00) W/loop

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees measured

with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and PhE operation

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 40 ms whichever
is greater

Operate time

25 ms typically

IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach

Min = 20 ms
Max = 35 ms

7.6

Directional impedance element for mho

characteristic and additional distance protection
directional function for earth faults ZDMRDIR,
ZDARDIR

7.6.1

Identification
Function description
Directional impedance element for mho
characteristic

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZDMRDIR

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D

S00346 V1 EN

Function description
Additional distance protection
directional function for earth faults

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZDARDIR

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

S00346 V1 EN

269
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be supervised by a phase unselective
directional function based on symmetrical components (option).

7.6.3

Function block
ZDMRDIR
I3P*
U3P*

DIR_CURR
DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND
IEC06000422_2_en.vsd

IEC06000422 V2 EN

Figure 126:

ZDMRDIR function block

ZDARDIR
I3P*
U3P*
I3PPOL*
DIRCND

STFWPE
STRVPE
DIREFCND

IEC06000425-2-en.vsd
IEC06000425 V2 EN

Figure 127:

7.6.4

ZDARDIR function block

Signals
Table 118:
Name

ZDMRDIR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

Table 119:
Name

ZDMRDIR Output signals

Type

Description

CURR

GROUP SIGNAL

Group signal for current signals to Mho function

VOLT

GROUP SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage signals to Mho function

POL

GROUP SIGNAL

Group signal for polarization voltage signals to

Mho function

STFW

BOOLEAN

Start in forward direction

STRV

BOOLEAN

Start in reverse direction

STDIRCND

INTEGER

Binary coded directional information per

measuring loop

270
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 120:

ZDARDIR Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Current signals

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage signals

I3PPOL

GROUP
SIGNAL

Polarisation current signals

DIRCND

INTEGER

Binary coded directional signal

ZDARDIR Output signals

Name

Table 122:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 121:

7.6.5

Default

Type

Description

STFWPE

BOOLEAN

Forward start signal from phase-to-ground

directional element

STRVPE

BOOLEAN

Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground

directional element

DIREFCND

INTEGER

Start direction Binary coded

Settings
ZDMRDIR Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DirEvalType

Impedance
Comparator
Imp/Comp

Comparator

Directional evaluation mode Impedance /

Comparator

ArgNegRes

90 - 175

Deg

115

Angle of blinder in second quadrant for

forward direction

ArgDir

5 - 45

Deg

15

Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for

forward direction

IMinOpPE

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

IMinOpPP

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase-phase current

for Phase-Phase loops

Table 123:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

ZDMRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

271
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 124:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

PolMode

-3U0
-U2
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-U2comp

-3U0

Polarization quantity for opt dir function

for P-E faults

AngleRCA

-90 - 90

Deg

75

Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or

base angle)

I>

5 - 200

%IB

Minimum operation current in % of IBase

UPol>

4 - 100

%UB

Minimum polarizing voltage in % of UBase

IPol>

5 - 100

%IB

10

Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase

Table 125:
Name

ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AngleOp

90 - 180

Deg

160

Operation sector angle

Kmag

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm

0.01

40.00

Boost-factor in -U0comp and -U2comp

polarization

Step

Default

Table 126:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

7.6.6

ZDARDIR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 127:
Name

ZDMRDIR Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

L1Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L1

L2Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L2

L3Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L3

L1R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L1

L1X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L1

L2R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L2

L2X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L2

L3R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L3

L3X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L3

272
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.6.7

Operation principle

7.6.7.1

Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance element
for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR). Equation 74 and equation 75 are used to
classify that the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phaseto-phase fault respectively.

- ArgDir < arg

0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

I L1

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 74)

EQUATION1617 V1 EN

- ArgDir < arg

0.85 U1L1L 2 + 0.15 U1L1L 2 M

I L1L 2

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 75)

EQUATION1619 V1 EN

Where:
ArgDir

Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees)

ArgNegRes

Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 128 for mho characteristics.

U1L1

Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M

Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1

Phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2

Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

U1L1L2M

Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2

Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 128) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.
If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the
mho characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparatortype calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of
infinite radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the
directional lines are implemented based on an impedance calculation equivalent to
the one used for the quadrilateral impedance characteristics.
When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection,
mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for
parameter DirEvalType is vital:
273
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

alternative Comparator is strongly recommended

alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used
alternative Impedance should not be used. This altenative is
intended for use together with Distance protection zone,
quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)

X
Zset reach point

ArgNegRes

-ArgDir

-Zs
en06000416.vsd
IEC06000416 V1 EN

Figure 128:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
STDIRCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32
Example: If only L1N start, the value is 1, if start in L1N and L3N are detected, the
value is 1+4=5.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage
exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase, thus the directional element can use it
for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.

274
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip continues.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operate value, no directional

indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of
its rated value.

The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function

has the following output signals:
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation
and is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
bit 11
(2048)

bit 10
(1024)

bit 9
(512)

bit 8
(256)

bit 7
(128)

bit 6
(64)

STRVL3L1=
1

STRVL2L3=
1

STRVL1L2=
1

STRVL3N=1

STRVL2N=1

STRVL1N=1

bit 5
(32)

bit 4
(16)

bit 3
(8)

bit 2
(4)

bit 1
(2)

bit 0
(1)

STFWL3L1=
1

STFWL2L3=
1

STFWL1L2=
1

STFWL3N=1

STFWL2N=1

STFWL1N=1

The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an ORfunction of all the forward starting conditions, that is, STFWL1N, STFWL2N,
STFWL3N, STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is
similar to the STFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an ORfunction of all the reverse starting conditions, that is, STRVL1N, STRVL2N,
STRVL3N, STRVL1L2, STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1.
Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service
values:

7.6.7.2

resistance phase L1
reactance phase L1
resistance phase L2
reactance phase L2
resistance phase L3
reactance phase L3
direction phase L1
direction phase L2
direction phase L3

Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults

ZDARDIR
A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage to operate. The positive-sequence memorypolarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:
275

Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These

elements always expand back to the source.
Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in threephase faults.
A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is
important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.

There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse
phase to phase faults and double phase-to-earth faults during high load periods. To
solve these, additional directional element is used.
For phase-to-earth faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one
of following types of polarization:

Zero-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence voltage
Zero-sequence current

These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the Additional distance

protection directional function for earth faults (ZDARDIR).
Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection.
The measurement principle is illustrated in figure 129.

- 3U 0
AngleOp
AngleRCA

3I 0
en06000417.vsd
IEC06000417 V1 EN

Figure 129:

Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional

element

Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the

negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the
protection.

276
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zerosequence current, for example, the current in the neutral of a power transformer.
The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current
compensation is described in figure 130. The same also applies for the negativesequence function.

I0

Z0 SA

I0

Z0 SB

Z0 Line

Charac te ris tic

ang le

U0

U0

K*I0
U0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418.vsd

IEC06000418 V1 EN

Figure 130:

Principle for zero sequence compensation

Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the
normal directional element that works on a per phase base. The enable signals are
per phase and to enable the measuring element in a specific phase, both the
additional directional element and the normal directional element, for that phase
must indicate correct direction.
These polarization quantities, voltage and current, are stabilized against minimum
polarizing voltage (UPOL>) and current (IPOL>). That means if polarizing voltage
is greater than UPOL> setting, and if polarizing current is greater than IPol>, then
only they are used for direction determination.
Normal
directional
element
L1N, L2N, L3N
Additional
directional
element

AND

Release of distance
measuring element
L1N, L2N, L3N

AND per
phase
en06000419.vsd

IEC06000419 V1 EN

Figure 131:

Earth distance element directional supervision

277
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.7

Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC

7.7.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Mho Impedance supervision logic

7.7.2

IEC 60617
identification

ZSMGAPC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault
inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for
loss of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.
ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different parts:
1.
2.

7.7.3

A fault inception detection logic

High SIR detection logic

Function block
ZSMGAPC
I3P*
BLKZMTD
U3P*
BLKCHST
BLOCK
CHSTOP
REVSTART
HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN
IEC06000426-2-en.vsd
IEC06000426 V2 EN

Figure 132:

7.7.4

ZSMGAPC function block

Signals
Table 128:
Name

ZSMGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and

DFT magnitude

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of the function

REVSTART

BOOLEAN

Indication of reverse start

BLOCKCS

BOOLEAN

Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end

CBOPEN

BOOLEAN

Indicates that the breaker is open

278
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 129:

ZSMGAPC Output signals

Name

7.7.5
Table 130:
Name

Type

Description

BLKZMTD

BOOLEAN

Block signal for blocking of time domained mho

BLKCHST

BOOLEAN

Blocking signal to remote end to block

overreaching zone

CHSTOP

BOOLEAN

Stops the blocking signal to remote end

HSIR

BOOLEAN

Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit

Settings
ZSMGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

PilotMode

Off
On

Off

Pilot mode Off/On

Zreach

0.1 - 3000.0

Ohm

0.1

38.0

Line impedance

IMinOp

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum operating current for SIR

measurement

Table 131:
Name

ZSMGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DeltaI

0 - 200

%IB

10

Current change level in % of IBase for

fault inception detection

Delta3I0

0 - 200

%IB

10

Zero seq current change level in % of

IBase

DeltaU

0 - 100

%UB

Voltage change level in % of UBase for

fault inception detection

Delta3U0

0 - 100

%UB

Zero seq voltage change level in % of

UBase

SIRLevel

5 - 15

10

Settable level for source impedance ratio

Table 132:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

ZSMGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

7.7.6

Operation principle

7.7.6.1

Fault inception detection

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

The aim for the fault inception detector is to detect quickly that a fault has occurred
on the system.

279
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents
or zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase
voltage or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and
corresponding phase voltage or 3U0 and 3I0 exceeds the settings DeltaI and
DeltaU respectively. Delta3U0 and Delta3I0 and the input signal BLOCK is not
activated, the output signal FLTDET is activated indicating that a system fault has
occurred.
If the setting PilotMode is set to On in blocking scheme and the fault inception
function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST is issued and send to
remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be
fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal:
1.
2.
3.

The setting PilotMode has to be set to On

The breaker has to be closed, that is, the input signal CBCLOSE has to be activated
A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, that is, input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal
BLOCKCS is not activated

Or
A fault inception is detected
If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the
BLKCHST signal, the function issues a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end.
The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:
1.
2.
3.

The function has to be in pilot mode, that is, the setting PilotMode has to be
set to On
The carrier send signal should be blocked, that is, input signal BLOCKCS is On
and,
A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was
not blocked, that is, input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS are not activated.

ZSMGAPC function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation
of the change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3U0). It
operates if the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting DeltaU or 3U0 exceeds
the setting Delta3U0.
If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection
function is blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external
fuse failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated
by activating the output BLKZ, which are connected to the input BLKZ on the
distance Mho function block.
During fault inception a lot of transients are developed which in turn might cause
the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC)
increases the filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by

280
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

activating the output BLKZMD, which is connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho
distance function block.

High SIR detection

High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and
distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function.
The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the
setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any
of the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting SIRLevel. The HSIR signal is
intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.

7.8

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS

7.8.1

Identification
Function description
Faulty phase identification with load
encroachment for mho

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

FMPSPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

7.8.2

Functionality
The ability to accurately and reliably classify different types of fault so that single
phase tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in today's
power systems.
The phase selection function is design to accurately select the proper fault loop(s)
in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in
some cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted
operation. Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment,
which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones
without interfering with the load.
The output signals from the phase selection function produce important
information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis as well.

281
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.8.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
FMPSPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
ZSTART
TR3PH
1POLEAR

STL1
STL2
STL3
STPE
STCNDPHS
STCNDPLE
STCNDLE
START
IEC06000429-2-en.vsd

IEC06000429 V2 EN

Figure 133:

7.8.4

FMPSPDIS function block

Signals
Table 133:
Name

FMPSPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

ZSTART

BOOLEAN

Start from underimpdeance function

TR3PH

BOOLEAN

Three phase tripping initiated

1POLEAR

BOOLEAN

Single pole autoreclosing in progress

Table 134:
Name

FMPSPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

STL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3

STPE

BOOLEAN

Earth fault detected

STCNDPHS

INTEGER

Binary coded starts from phase selection

STCNDPLE

INTEGER

Binary coded starts from ph sel with load

encroachment

STCNDLE

INTEGER

Binary coded starts from load encroachment only

START

BOOLEAN

Indicates that something has started

282
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.8.5
Table 135:
Name

Settings
FMPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IMaxLoad

10 - 5000

%IB

200

Maximum load for identification of three

phase fault in % of IBase

RLd

1.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Load encroachment resistive reach in

ohm/phase

ArgLd

5 - 70

Deg

20

Load encroachment inclination of load

angular sector

Table 136:
Name

FMPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DeltaIMinOp

5 - 100

%IB

10

Delta current level in % of IBase

DeltaUMinOp

5 - 100

%UB

20

Delta voltage level in % of UBase

U1Level

5 - 100

%UB

80

Pos seq voltage limit for identification of 3ph fault

I1LowLevel

5 - 200

%IB

10

Pos seq current level for identification of

3-ph fault in % of IBase

U1MinOp

5 - 100

%UB

20

Minimum operate positive sequence

voltage for ph sel

U2MinOp

1 - 100

%UB

Minimum operate negative sequence

voltage for ph sel

INRelPE

10 - 100

%IB

20

3I0 limit for release ph-e measuring

loops in % of max phase current

INBlockPP

10 - 100

%IB

40

3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase

measuring loops in % of max phase
current

Table 137:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

FMPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

7.8.6

Operation principle

7.8.6.1

The phase selection function

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function
can be decomposed into six different parts:
1.
2.
3.

A high speed delta based current phase selector

A high speed delta based voltage phase selector
A symmetrical components based phase selector

283
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

4.
5.
6.

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Fault evaluation and selection logic

A load encroachment logic
A blinder logic

The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

Delta based current and voltages

The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on
patent US4409636.
The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho measuring element and
is essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power
Line Carrier (PLC) communication system along the protected line.
The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that
filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when
no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault
occurs, currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the currents
and voltages resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line.
At this point the notch filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output
is processed by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship
between phases to determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.
The current and voltage delta based phase selector gives a real output signal if the
following criterion is fulfilled (only phase L1 shown):
Max(UL1,UL2,UL3)>DeltaUMinOp
Max(IL1,IL2,IL3)>DeltaIMinOp
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3

are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1

DeltaUMinOp and DeltaIMinOp

are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current
filters to decide that a fault has occurred. A slow evolving fault may not
produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a
case speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components
phase selector will operate.

The delta voltages ULn and delta current ILn (n index for phase order) are the
voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1.
The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type.
The logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing
by the largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The
condition for fault type classification for the voltages and currents can be expressed
as:

284
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

FaulType =

( UL1, UL2, UL3)

MAX ( UL1, UL 2, UL3)
(Equation 76)

EQUATION1621 V2 EN

FaulType =

( IL1, IL2, IL3)

MAX ( IL1, IL 2, IL3)
(Equation 77)

EQUATION1622 V2 EN

The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending)
Single phase-to-earth;

FaultType=1

Phase-to-phase fault

FaultType=2

Three-phase fault;

FaultType=3

The output signal is 1 for single phase-to-earth fault, 2 for phase-to-phase fault and
3 for three-phase fault. At this point the filter does not know if earth was involved
or not.
Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.
When a single phase-to-earth fault has been detected, the logic determines the
largest quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase-to-phase fault is detected, the two
largest phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs.
The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the wave shape. Therefore the
output is forced to wait a certain time by means of a timer. If the timer expires, and
a fault is detected in one phase only, the fault is deemed as phase-to-earth. This
way a premature single phase-to-earth fault detection is not released for a phase-tophase fault. If, however, earth current is detected before the timer expires, the phaseto-earth fault is released sooner.
If another phase picks up during the time delay, the wait time is reduced by a
certain amount. Each detection of either phase-to-earth or additional phases further
reduce the initial time delay and allow the delta phase selector output to be faster.
There is no time delay if all three phases are faulty.
The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time
as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input blocks the
delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the
DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too
abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.
285
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Symmetrical component based phase selector

The symmetrical component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence

voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents.
All the symmetrical quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference
to phase L1.
The function is made up of four main parts:
A

Detection of the presence of earth fault

A phase-to-phase logic block based on U1/U2 angle relationship

A phase-to-earth component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships

between U2/I0 and U2/U1 is evaluated to determine earth fault or phase- to-phase to earth fault

Logic for detection of three-phase fault

Presence of earth-fault detection

This detection of earth fault is performed in two levels, first by evaluation of the
magnitude of zero sequence current, and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and
negative sequence voltage. It is a complement to the earth-fault signal built-in in
the Symmetrical component based phase selector.
The complementary based zero-sequence current function evaluates the presence of
earth fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting
parameter INRelPE. The output signal is used to release the earth-fault loop. It is a
complement to the earth-fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector.
The condition for releasing the phase-to-earth loop is as follows:
The output from this detection is used to release the earth-fault loop.
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE
where:
|3I0|

is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0

maxIph

is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents

INRelPE

is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the
maximum phase current

The earth-fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current
by the main sequence function meets the following conditions:
|3I0|>IBase 0.5
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE
where:
maxIph

is the maximal current magnitude found in any of the three phases

INRelPE

is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth measuring loop in % of IBase

IBase

is the global setting of the base current (A)

286
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of
zero sequence current may not be significant and the above detection may fail. In
those cases the detection enters the second level, with evaluation of zero and
negative sequence voltage. The release of the earth-fault loops can then be
achieved if all of the following conditions are fulfilled:
|3U0|>|U2| 0.5
|3U0|>|U1| 0.2
|U1|> UBase 0.2/(3)
and
3I0<0.1 IBase
or
3I0<maxIph INRelPE
where:
3U0

is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage

U2

is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point

k5

is design parameter

ILmax

is the maximal phase current

IMinOp

is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase

Phase-to-phase fault detection

The detection of phase-to-phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle
difference between the sequence voltages U2 and U1.

IEC06000383-2-en.vsd
IEC06000383 V2 EN

Figure 134:

Definition of fault sectors for phase-to-phase fault

287
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The phase-to-phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle
between the sequence voltages U2 and U1 lies within the sector defined according
to figure 134 and the following conditions are fulfilled:
|U1|>U1MinOP
|U2|>U2MinOp
where:

U1MinOP and U2MinOp

are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltages

The positive sequence voltage U1L1 in figure 134 above is reference.

If there is a three-phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase
signals, even if the general conditions for U2 and U1 are fulfilled.
Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth-fault detection
The detection of phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth fault (US patent
5390067) is based on two conditions:
1. Angle relationship between U2 and I0
2. Angle relationship between U2 and U1
The condition 1 determines faulty phase at single phase-to-earth fault by evaluating
the argument between U2 and I0.
80

L2-E sector

L3-E sector
U2L1
(Ref)

200

L1-E sector
320

IEC06000384_2_en.vsd
IEC06000384 V3 EN

Figure 135:

Condition 1: Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between U2

and I0

The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in
radians as input to the U2 and I0 function block. The input angle is released only if
288
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

the fault is in forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault
is classified as forward direction if the angle between U0 and I0 lies between 20 to
200 degrees, see figure 136.

Forward

200

20

Reverse

en06000385.vsd

IEC06000385 V1 EN

Figure 136:

Directional element used to release the measured angle between

Uo and I0

The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If
the angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that
sector will be active see figure 135. Only one sector signal is allowed to be
activated at the same time.
The sector function for condition 1 has an internal release signal which is active if
the main sequence function has classified the angle between U0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:
|U2|>U2MinOp
|3I0|> 0.05 IBase
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE
where:
U2 and IN

are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zerosequence current (3I0)

U2MinOp

is the setting parameter for minimum operating negative sequence

voltage

maxIph

is the maximum phase current

INRelPE

is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth loop

The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.

289
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The condition 2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence
voltage U2 and the positive sequence voltage U1. Since this is a phase-to-phase
voltage relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse
direction. A phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same
angle boarders as for condition 1. If the calculated angle between U2 and U1 lies
within one sector, the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The
condition 2 is released if both the following conditions are fulfilled:
|U2|>U2MinOp
|U1|>U1MinOP
where:
|U1| and |U2|

are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltages.

U1MinOP and U2MinOp

are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operating voltages.

140

L3-E sector
20

L1-E sector

U1L1
(Ref)

L2-E sector

260

IEC06000413_2_en.vsd

IEC06000413 V2 EN

Figure 137:

Condition 2: U2 and U1 angle relationship

If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single
phase-to-earth. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be
the complement of the second condition, that is, a phase-to-phase-to- earth fault.
Condition 1 and

Condition 2

Fault type

L3-E

L3-E

L3-E

L2-E

L1-E

L2-L3-E

The sequence phase selector is blocked when earth is not involved or if a threephase fault is detected.

290
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Three-phase fault detection

Unless it has been categorized as a single or two-phase fault, the function classifies
it as a three-phase fault if the following conditions are fulfilled:
|U1|<U1Level
and
|I1|>I1LowLevel
or
|I1|>IMaxLoad
where:
|U1| and |I1|

are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude

U1Level ,
I1LowLevel

are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current

IMaxLoad

is the setting of the maximum load current

The output signal for detection of three-phase fault is only released if not earth
fault and phase-to-phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.
The conditions for not detecting earth fault are the inverse of equation 5 to 10.
The condition for not detecting phase-to-phase faults is determined by three
conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase-to-phase fault.
Those are:
1:
earth fault is detected
or
|3I0|> 0.05 IBase
and
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE
2:
phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase faults are not fulfilled
and
maxIph<0.1 IBase
and
|I2|<0.1 maxIph
3:
|3I0|>maxIph INBlockPP
or
|I2|<maxIph I2ILmax

291
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

where:
maxIph

is the maximum of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3

INRelPE

is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth fault loops

|I2|

is the magnitude of the negative sequence current

I2ILmax

is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current
to the maximum phase current in percent of IBase

INBlockPP

is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring
loops

Fault evaluation and selection logic

The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified
according to figure 138. Only phase L1 is shown in the figure. If the internal signal
3 Phase fault is activated, all four outputs START, STL1, STL2 and STL3 gets
activated.

DeltaIL1

DeltaUL1
Sequence based
function

L1L2 fault

a
OR

a>b
then c=a
else c=b

a<b
then c=b
else c=a

FaultPriority
Adaptive release
dependent on result
from Delta logic

OR

L1N fault
3 Phase fault
STL1

&

IL1Valid
BLOCK

IEC06000386-2-en.vsd
IEC06000386 V2 EN

Figure 138:

Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase L1

Load encroachment logic

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic
based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality
is always activated in faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho
(FMPSPDIS) function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched
On/Offin the respective impedance measuring function.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 139. As illustrated, the
resistive reach in forward and reverse direction and the angle of the sector is the
292
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the
load encroachment function, as shown in figure 139.

Blinder
Blinder provides a mean to discriminate high load from a fault. The operating
characteristic is illustrated in figure 139. There are six individual measuring loops
with the blinder functionality. Three phase-to-earth loops which estimate the
impedance according to
Zn = Uph / Iph
and three phase-to-phase loops according to
Zph-ph = Uph-ph / Iph-ph
The start operations from respective loop are binary coded into one word and
provides an output signal STCNDPLE.
X

jX

Operation area

Operation area

RLd
ArgLd

ArgLd

R
R

ArgLd

ArgLd
RLd

Operation area

No operation area

No operation area

en06000414.vsd
IEC06000414 V1 EN

Figure 139:

Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic

Outputs

The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic
phase selector activates the output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3. If an earth fault
is detected the signal STPE gets activated.
The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the
signal STCNDPHS. If only one phase is started (L1, L2 or L3), the corresponding
phase-to-earth element is enabled. STPE is expected to be made available for twophase and three-phase faults for the correct output to be selected. The fault loop is
indicated by one of the decimal numbers below.

293
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The output STCNDPHS provides release information from the phase selection part
only. STCNDLE provides release information from the load encroachment part
only. STCNDPLE provides release information from the phase selection part and
the load encroachment part combined, that is, both parts have to issue a release at
the same time (this signal is normally not used in the zone measuring element). In
these signals, each fault type has an associated value, which represents the
corresponding zone measuring loop to be released. The values are presented in
table 137.
0=

no faulted phases

1=

L1E

2=

L2E

3=

L3E

4=

-L1L2E

5=

-L2L3E

6=

-L3L1E

7=

-L1L2L3E

8=

-L1L2

9=

-L2L3

10=

-L3L1

11=

L1L2L3

An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase-to-earth outputs are
to be asserted when the earth input G is not asserted.
The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is operating.
STCNDPLE is connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral impedance
measuring zones to be blocked. The signal must be connected to the input LDCND
for selected mho impedance measuring zones .
The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to
release the blocking from the load encroachment function.

7.8.7

Technical data
Table 138:

FMPSPDIS technical data

Function
Load encroachment criteria:
Load resistance, forward and
reverse

Range or value
(1.003000.00) W/phase
(570) degrees

Accuracy
2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.530) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

294
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.9

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral

characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS,
ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR

7.9.1

Identification
Function description
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
characteristic, separate settings (zone
1)

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMRPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral

characteristic, separate settings (zone
2-5)

ZMRAPDIS

21

S00346 V1 EN

Function description
Directional impedance quadrilateral

7.9.2

IEC 61850
identification
ZDRDIR

IEC 60617
identification
Z<->

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D

Functionality
The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and
reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer
connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMRPDIS together with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode.

295
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.9.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
ZMRPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND

TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC08000248-1-en.vsd

IEC08000248 V1 EN

Figure 140:

ZMRPDIS function block

ZMRAPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND

TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC08000290_1_en.vsd

IEC08000290 V1 EN

Figure 141:

ZMRAPDIS function block

ZDRDIR

I3P*
U3P*

STDIRCND

IEC09000639-1-en.vsd
IEC09000639 V1 EN

7.9.4

Signals
Table 139:
Name

ZMRPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output by fuse failure signal

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

STCND

INTEGER

External start condition (loop enabler)

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

296
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 140:
Name

ZMRPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General Start, issued from any phase or loop

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

STND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional start, issued from any phase or

loop

Table 141:
Name

ZMRAPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output by fuse failure signal

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

STCND

INTEGER

External start condition (loop enabler)

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 142:
Name

ZMRAPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General Start, issued from any phase or loop

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

STND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional start, issued from any phase or

loop

297
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 143:

ZDRDIR Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

group connection for current abs 2

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

group connection for voltage abs 2

ZDRDIR Output signals

Name

Type

STDIRCND

Table 145:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 144:

7.9.5

Default

Description

INTEGER

Binary coded directional information per

measuring loop

Settings
ZMRPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1PP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach PhPh

R1PP

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

X1PE

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E

R1PE

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-E

RFPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph

X0PE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E

RFPE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E

R0PE

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle, Ph-E

OperationPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops

OpModetPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth

loops

OpModetPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-E

Table continues on next page

298
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IMinOpPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops

IMinOpPE

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

IMinOpIN

5 - 1000

%IB

Minimum operate residual current for

Phase-Earth loops

Table 146:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

Table 147:
Name

ZMRPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

ZMRAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1PP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach PhPh

R1PP

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

X1PE

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E

R1PE

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-E

RFPP

0.10 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph

X0PE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E

RFPE

0.10 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E

R0PE

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle, Ph-E

OperationPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops

OpModetPP

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth

loops

OpModetPE

Off
On

On

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-E

IMinOpPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops

IMinOpPE

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

299
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 148:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

Table 149:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ZMRAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step

Default

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IMinOpPP

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase-phase current

for Phase-Phase loops

IMinOpPE

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

ArgNegRes

90 - 175

Deg

115

Angle of blinder in second quadrant for

forward direction

ArgDir

5 - 45

Deg

15

Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for

forward direction

Table 150:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

ZDRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step

Default

7.9.6

Operation principle

7.9.6.1

Full scheme measurement

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 62 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,
impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.

300
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 1

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 2

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 3

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 4

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 5

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone RV
IEC05000458-2-en.vsd

IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 142:

The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-tophase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

7.9.6.2

Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three
intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as,
three-phase faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the nondirectional impedance characteristics presented in figure 63 and figure 64. The phaseto-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-tophase characteristic presents the per phase reach.

301
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn
RFPE

RFPE

X1PE+Xn

jN
RFPE

Xn =

X0PE-X1PE
3

Rn =

R0PE-R1PE
3

jN

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE

RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN

Figure 143:

Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring , ohm/loop domain

302
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RFPP

(Ohm/phase)

R1PP

RFPP

X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
X
0
PE
--1X
11FWPE
X
0
PE
X 0 PG X
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3 33

X1PP

R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP

RFPP

X1PP

RFPP
2

R1PP

RFPP
2

en07000062.vsd

IEC07000062 V2 EN

Figure 144:

Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 65. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

303
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UL1

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1

Phase-to-earth
element

RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0

Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2

UL1

IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP

IL2

(Arc resistance)

UL2
R1 + j X1

UL1
Three-phase
fault

IL1

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3

IL3
UL3
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd

IEC08000282 V2 EN

Figure 145:

Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 65 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPE and RFPP are the
eventual fault resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 65, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 66. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for
forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

304
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 146:

7.9.6.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic
(ZMRPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain
threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops can be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three-phase currents, that is residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn< IMinOpPP.
ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.
All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is OperationDir=Reverse

7.9.6.4

Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

305
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 31 (example for a

phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 UL2
Zapp = ------------------------I L1 IL2
(Equation 78)

EQUATION1222 V1 EN

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth
faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 32.
Z app =

U L1
I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 79)

EQUATION1223 V2 EN

Where:
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED

U L1
I L1
IN
KN
is defined as:

KN =

Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1

EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0

is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach

X0

is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach

R1

is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

X1

is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

306
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.
The formula given in equation 32 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 33,
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN

(Equation 80)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION354 V1 EN

(Equation 81)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION355 V1 EN

(Equation 82)

with
w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN

(Equation 83)

where:
Re

designates the real component of current and voltage,

Im

designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and

f0

designates the rated system frequency

307
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 84)

EQUATION357 V1 EN

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 85)

EQUATION358 V1 EN

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and
reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.9.6.5

Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance
quadrilateral function ZDRDIR. Equation 39 and equation 40 are used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg

0.8 U 1L1 + 0.2 U 1L1 M

I L1

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 86)

EQUATION725 V2 EN

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

308
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

- ArgDir < arg

0.8 U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 U 1L1 L 2 M

I L1 L 2

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 87)

EQUATION726 V2 EN

where:
ArgDir

is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and

ArgNegRes

is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 67.

U 1L1
U 1L1M

I L1
U 1L1L 2

U 1L1L 2 M
I L1L 2

is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
is phase current in phase L1
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (as shown in figure 67). It should not be changed unless
system studies have shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the
output STDIRCND.
STDIR=

STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

309
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ArgNegRes

ArgDir

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 147:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in

Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
After 100 ms the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

310
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.9.6.6

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N.. The phase-tophase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one
logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 68.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FRPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately.
Input signal STCND is connected to FRPSPDISfunction output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be
configured to the STDIRCND output on directional function ZDRDIR function.

311
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STZMPP

OR

STCND

STNDL1L2

L1L2

AND

L2L3

AND

L3L1

AND

STNDL3L1

L1N

AND

STNDL1N

L2N

AND

STNDL2N

L3N

AND

STNDL2L3

STNDL3N
STPE

OR

OR
VTSZ
BLOCK

AND

OR

STND
BLK

BLOCFUNC

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 148:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external

start condition

Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 69.

STNDL1N

OR

STNDL2N
STNDL3N
STNDL1L2

OR

AND

15 ms
t

STL1

AND

15 ms
t

STL2

AND

15 ms
t

STL3

AND

15 ms
t

START

STNDL2L3
STNDL3L1

OR
OR

BLK
IEC09000889-1-en.vsd
IEC09000889 V1 EN

Figure 149:

Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

312
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 70.
STNDL1N
DIRL1N

AND
STZMPE.

OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N

AND

STNDL3N

OR

DIRL3N

AND

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2

AND

OR

AND

15 ms
t

STL1

AND

15 ms
t

STL2

AND

15 ms
t

STL3

STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3

AND
OR

STNDL3L1
DIRL3L1

AND
STZMPP

OR
BLK

OR

AND

15 ms
t

START

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN

Figure 150:

Composition of start signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 71.

313
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP

tPP
t

AND

BLKFUNC

OR

Timer tPE=On
STZMPE

AND
OR

tPE
t

AND

AND

15ms
AND

BLKTR
BLK

TRIP

OR

STL1

AND

TRL1

STL2

AND

TRL2

STL3

AND

TRL3

IEC09000887-2-en.vsd
IEC09000887 V2 EN

Figure 151:

7.9.7

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

Technical data
Table 151:

ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

Max 5 with selectable

direction

Minimum operate residual

current, zone 1

(5-1000)% of IBase

Minimum operate current, phaseto-phase and phase-to-earth

(10-1000)% of IBase

Positive sequence reactance

(0.10-3000.00) /
phase

Positive sequence resistance

(0.01-1000.00) /
phase

Zero sequence reactance

(0.10-9000.00) /
phase

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Zero sequence resistance

(0.01-3000.00) /
phase

Fault resistance, phase-to-earth

(0.10-9000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, phase-to-phase

(0.10-3000.00) /loop

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30

Table continues on next page

314
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Definite time delay phase-phase

and phase-earth operation

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 40 ms whichever is greater

Operate time

25 ms typically

IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach

Min = 20 ms
Max = 35 ms

7.10

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

settable angle FRPSPDIS

7.10.1

Identification
Function description
Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with settable angle

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

FRPSPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

7.10.2

Functionality
The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that
single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in
today's power systems. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the
distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FRPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements
continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare
them with the set values.

315
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.10.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
FRPSPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
DIRCND

TRIP
START
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE
IEC08000430-2-en.vsd

IEC08000430 V2 EN

Figure 152:

7.10.4

FRPSPDIS function block

Signals
Table 152:
Name

FRPSPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 153:
Name

FRPSPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip output

START

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or loop

STFWL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction

STFWL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction

STFWL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction

STFWPE

BOOLEAN

Earth fault detected in forward direction

STRVL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction

STRVL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction

STRVL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction

STRVPE

BOOLEAN

Earth fault detected in reverse direction

Table continues on next page

316
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

7.10.5
Table 154:
Name

Type

Description

STNDL1

BOOLEAN

Non directional start in L1

STNDL2

BOOLEAN

Non directional start in L2

STNDL3

BOOLEAN

Non directional start in L3

STNDPE

BOOLEAN

Non directional start, phase-earth

STFW1PH

BOOLEAN

Start in forward direction for single-phase fault

STFW2PH

BOOLEAN

Start in forward direction for two- phase fault

STFW3PH

BOOLEAN

Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault

STPE

BOOLEAN

Current conditions release of phase-earth

measuring elements

STPP

BOOLEAN

Current conditions release of phase-phase

measuring elements

STCNDZ

INTEGER

Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

STCNDLE

INTEGER

Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

Settings
FRPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

INBlockPP

10 - 100

%IPh

40

3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase

measuring loops

INReleasePE

10 - 100

%IPh

20

3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth

measuring loops

RLdFw

1.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Forward resistive reach within the load

impedance area

RLdRv

1.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Reverse resistive reach within the load

impedance area

ArgLd

5 - 70

Deg

30

Load angle determining the load

impedance area

X1

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1PP

0.10 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

R1PE

0.10 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

1.50

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-E

X0

0.50 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

R0PE

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle, Ph-E

RFFwPP

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

RFRvPP

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

RFFwPE

1.00 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward

RFRvPE

1.00 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse

IMinOpPP

5 - 500

%IB

10

Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops

IMinOpPE

5 - 500

%IB

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops

317
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 155:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

FRPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TimerPP

Off
On

Off

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph

TimerPE

Off
On

Off

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-E

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay to trip, Ph-E

Table 156:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

7.10.6

FRPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Operation principle
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) includes six impedance
measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for
phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the
combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types
of faults.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FRPSPDIS uses information
from the directional function ZDRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in
forward or reverse direction.
The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:

Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the
load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be
determined by the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

318
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function ZDRDIR.
There are output from FRPSPDIS that indicate whether a start is in forward or
reverse direction or non-directional, for example STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.
These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FRPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 73.
X

Non-directional (ND)

Forward (FW)

Reverse (RV)
en08000286.vsd

IEC08000286 V1 EN

Figure 153:

Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation

of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS)

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment".
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional
coming from the directional function ZDRDIR. It shall be connected to the STDIR
output on ZDRDIR. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on
the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMRPDIS block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR=

STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in

forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward
direction in phase L1 and L2 etc.
319
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary

coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND
input on the ZMRPDIS distance measuring zones block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
STCNDZ = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

7.10.6.1

Phase-to-earth fault
For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to
equation 41.
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase
selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS).

ZPHSn =

ULn
ILn
(Equation 88)

EQUATION1255 V1 EN

where:
n

corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for FRPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 74. The characteristic has a settable angle for the resistive boundary in the
first quadrant of 70.
The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 44 and equation 45.
RN =

R 0 PE - R1PE
3

EQUATION-2125 V1 EN

(Equation 89)

R0 - R1
RN =
3
EQUATION1256 V1 EN

XN =

(Equation 89)

X 0 - X1
3

EQUATION1257 V1 EN

(Equation 90)

320
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X (ohm/loop)
R1PE+RN
RFRvPE

RFFwPE

X1+XN
RFFwPE
R (Ohm/loop)

RFRvPE

X1+XN

RFFwPE

RFRvPE
R1PE+RN

IEC09000633-1-en.vsd
IEC09000633 V1 EN

Figure 154:

Characteristic of FRPSPDIS for phase to earth fault (directional

lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 44 and equation 45.
3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
(Equation 91)

EQUATION2108 V1 EN

3 I0 INReleasePE
------------------------------------ Iphmax
100
(Equation 92)

EQUATION766 V1 EN

where:

IMinOpPE

is the minimum operation current for forward zones

INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phaseto-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax

is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

321
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.10.6.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to
equation 46.
ZPHS =

ULm - ULn
-2 ILn
(Equation 93)

EQUATION1258 V1 EN

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the
phase current in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 75.
X (ohm/phase)
0.5FRvPP

R1PP 0.5RFFwPP

X1

0.5RFFwPP

R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPP

0.5RFRvPP

R1PP

X1

0.5RFFwPP

IEC09000634-1-en.vsd

IEC09000634 V1 EN

Figure 155:

The operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS at phase-to-phase fault

(directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current
conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop.
Those are according to equation 47 or equation 48.

322
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

3I 0 < IMinOpPE
(Equation 94)

EQUATION2109 V1 EN

3I 0 <

INBlockPP
Iph max
100
(Equation 95)

EQUATION2110 V1 EN

where:

IMinOpPE

is the minimum operation current for forward earth measuring loops,

INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and

Iphmax

7.10.6.3

is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 46, equation 47 and equation 48 are used to release the
operation of the function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all
directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counterclockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 76.

323
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X (ohm/phase)
4 X1PP
3

0.5RFFwPPK3
X1K3

30 deg

RFwPP

2
3

R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPPK3
K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)

30 deg

IEC09000635-1-en.vsd
IEC09000635 V2 EN

Figure 156:

7.10.6.4

The characteristic of FRPSPDIS for three-phase fault (set angle 70)

Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is
always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 78. As illustrated, the
resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the
angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.

324
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RLdFw
ArgLd

ArgLd

ArgLd

RLdRv

ArgLd

IEC09000042-1-en.vsd
IEC09000042 V1 EN

Figure 157:

Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FRPSPDIS function. When output
signal STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FRPSPDIS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic, see figure 79.
When output signal STCNDI is selected, the operation characteristic will be as in
figure 78. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current
and the distance measuring zones.

325
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STCNDZ

STCNDLE
IEC10000099-1en.vsd

IEC10000099 V1 EN

Figure 158:

Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation

mode when load encroachment is activated

When FRPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 79. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of
the zone together with the load encroachment is highlighted in black.

326
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN

Figure 159:

Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated

Figure 79 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation
the operate area is transformed according to figure 80. Notice in particular what
happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone.
Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100
degrees instead of the original 70 degrees (if the angle setting is 70 degrees). The
blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards
and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or
less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a
margin to the load impedance.

327
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X (W /

phase)

Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W /

phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN

Figure 160:

Operating characteristic for FRPSPDIS in forward direction for threephase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 81. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement
as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same
time the characteristic will "shrink" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv
reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.

328
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN

Figure 161:

Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the

quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected
by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage
in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four
should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

7.10.6.5

Minimum operate currents

The operation of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain
threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS
value of the current in phase Ln.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).

329
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.10.6.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Simplified logic diagrams

Figure 82 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-toearth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is
available within the IED.
LDEblock
IRELPE

3I 0 0.5 IMinOpPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0
Iphmax
100

15 ms
t

&

OR
INBlockPP
3I 0 <
Iphmax
100

&

Bool to
integer

BLOCK

3I 0 < IMinOpPE

STPE

&

10 ms 20 ms
t
t

&

15 ms
t

STCNDLE

STPP
IRELPP

IEC09000149_2_en.vsd
IEC09000149 V2 EN

Figure 162:

Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A

STCNDLE output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment
characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 82. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring
elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.
Figure 83 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase
selective signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n
change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the
fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is within
the characteristic.

330
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N

OR

15 ms
t

STNDPE

OR

15 ms
t

STNDL1

OR

15 ms
t

STNDL2

AND

OR

15 ms
t

STNDL3

AND

INDL1L2

IRELPE
LDEblockL1N
ZML1N
LDEblockL2N
ZML2N
LDEblockL3N
ZML3N
LDEblockL1L2
ZML1L2
LDEblockL2L3
ZML2L3
LDEblockL3L1
ZML3L1

AND
AND
AND

AND

INDL2L3
INDL3L1

IRELPP
OR

15 ms
t

STNDPP

IEC00000545-3-en.vsd
IEC00000545-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 163:

Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 84 and figure 85. The directional criteria appears
as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase
selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex
network configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the
corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm.
Designation FW (figure 85) represents the forward direction as well as the
designation RV (figure 84) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals
are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.
Figure 84 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which
is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be
configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and
this way influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone
measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.

331
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

INDL1N
DRVL1N

AND

INDL1L2
DRVL1L2

AND

OR

15 ms
t

STRVL1

OR

15 ms
t

STRVPE

OR

15 ms
t

STRVL2

INDL3L1
DRVL3L1

AND

INDL2N
DRVL2N

AND

INDL1L2
AND
INDL2L3
DRVL2L3

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N
INDL1L2
INDL2L3
INDL3L1

AND

INDL3N
DRVL3N

AND

INDL2L3

Bool to
integer

15 ms
AND

OR

INDL3L1
AND

15 ms
OR

STCNDZ

STRVL3

STRVPP

IEC00000546_2_en.vsd
IEC00000546-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 164:

Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

332
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

AND
INDL1N
DFWL1N

AND

AND

OR

15 ms
t

INDL1L2
DFWL1L2

AND

OR

INDL3L1
DFWL3L1

DFWL2N

OR

15 ms
t

STFWL1

15 ms
t

STFWPE

15 ms
t

STFWL2

15 ms
t

STFW2PH

AND
AND

INDL1L2
AND

OR

INDL2L3
DFWL2L3

STFW1PH

AND

AND

INDL2N

15 ms
t

AND

OR

15 ms
t

AND

INDL3N
DFWL3N

AND

AND

INDL2L3
AND

15 ms
t

STFWL3

15 ms
t

STFW3PH

15 ms
t

STFWPP

OR

INDL3L1

AND
AND

OR

IEC05000201_2_en.vsd
IEC05000201 V2 EN

Figure 165:

Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure86 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where
internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal
signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

333
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TimerPP=Off

tPP
t

AND
OR

TimerPE=Off

tPE
t

AND

AND
OR

TRIP

AND

STNDPP
STFWPP

OR

STRVPP
OR

STNDPE
STFWPE

START

OR

STRVPE

IEC08000441_2_en.vsd
IEC08000441-1 V2 EN

Figure 166:

TRIP and START signal logic

334
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.10.7

Technical data
Table 157:

FRPSPDIS technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Minimum operate current

(5-500)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive

sequence

(0.503000.00) /phase

Resistive reach, positive

sequence

(0.101000.00) /phase

Reactive reach, zero sequence

(0.509000.00) /phase

Resistive reach, zero sequence

(0.503000.00) /phase

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

Fault resistance, Ph-E faults,

forward and reverse

(1.009000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults,

forward and reverse

(0.503000.00) /loop

Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle

(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees

Reset ratio

105% typically

7.11

High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS

7.11.1

Identification
Function description
High speed distance protection zone
(zone 1)

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMFPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

7.11.2

Functionality
The High speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) is providing sub-cycle, down
towards half-cycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and
up to around SIR 5. At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care
during difficult conditions in high voltage transmission networks, like faults on
long heavily loaded lines and faults generating heavily distorted signals. These
faults are handled with outmost security and dependability, although sometimes
with reduced operating speed.

335
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The ZMFPDIS function is a six zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of
the independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with singlephase autoreclosing.
The zones can operate independently of each other in directional (forward or
reverse) or non-directional mode. However, zone1 and zone2 is designed to
measure in forward direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in
the reverse direction. This makes them suitable, together with a communication
scheme, for protection of power lines and cables in complex network
configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.
A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the
distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.
The ZMFPDIS function-block itself incorporates a phase-selection element and a
directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 670-series, where these
elements were represented with separate function-blocks.
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change
criteria (i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. Naturally,
there is also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its
operation only on voltage and current phasors.
The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast
and correct directional decision during various power system operating conditions,
including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zerosequence in-feed.

336
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.11.3

Function block
ZMFPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZ1
BLKZ2
BLKZ3
BLKZ4
BLKZ5
BLKZRV
BLKTRZ1
BLKTRZ2
BLKTRZ3
BLKTRZ4
BLKTRZ5
BLKTRZRV

TRIPZ1
TRL1Z1
TRL2Z1
TRL3Z1
TRIPZ2
TRL1Z2
TRL2Z2
TRL3Z2
TRIPZ3
TRIPZ4
TRIPZ5
TRIPZRV
STARTZ1
STNDZ1
STARTZ2
STL1Z2
STL2Z2
STL3Z2
STNDZ2
STARTZ3
STNDZ3
STARTZ4
STNDZ4
STARTZ5
STNDZ5
STARTZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STARTND
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
IEC11000433-2-en.vsd

IEC11000433 V2 EN

Figure 167:

7.11.4

ZMFPDIS function block

Signals
Table 158:
Name

ZMFPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire

function

Table continues on next page

337
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

VTSZ

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire

function

BLKZ1

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 1

BLKZ2

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 2

BLKZ3

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 3

BLKZ4

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 4

BLKZ5

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 5

BLKZRV

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of reverse

zone

BLKTRZ1

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 1

BLKTRZ2

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 2

BLKTRZ3

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 3

BLKTRZ4

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 4

BLKTRZ5

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 5

BLKTRZRV

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of

reverse zone

Table 159:
Name

ZMFPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIPZ1

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 forward direction

TRL1Z1

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction

TRL2Z1

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 - forward direction

TRL3Z1

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 - forward direction

TRIPZ2

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 forward direction

TRL1Z2

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction

TRL2Z2

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction

TRL3Z2

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction

TRIPZ3

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone

direction

TRIPZ4

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone

direction

TRIPZ5

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone

direction

TRIPZRV

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV reverse dir.

STARTZ1

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 forward direction

STNDZ1

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any

direction

STARTZ2

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 forward direction

STL1Z2

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction

Table continues on next page

338
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

STL2Z2

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction

STL3Z2

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction

STNDZ2

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - any

direction

STARTZ3

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone

direction

STNDZ3

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - any

direction

STARTZ4

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone

direction

STNDZ4

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - any

direction

STARTZ5

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone

direction

STNDZ5

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - any

direction

STARTZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone RV reverse dir.

STL1ZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse direction

STL2ZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L2 from zone RV - reverse direction

STL3ZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L3 from zone RV - reverse direction

STNDZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any

direction

STARTND

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in any phase or phases - any

direction

STNDL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction

STNDL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - any direction

STNDL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - any direction

STFWL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction

STFWL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction

STFWL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction

STFWPE

BOOLEAN

Fault with earth connection detected - forward

direction

STRVL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction

STRVL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction

STRVL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction

STRVPE

BOOLEAN

Fault with earth connection detected - reverse

direction

STFW1PH

BOOLEAN

Single-phase fault detected - forward direction

STFW2PH

BOOLEAN

Two-phase fault detected - forward direction

STFW3PH

BOOLEAN

Three-phase fault detected - forward direction

STPE

BOOLEAN

Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction

STPP

BOOLEAN

Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction

339
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.11.5
Table 160:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
ZMFPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Mode Off / On

RLdFw

0.01 - 5000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

60.00

Resistance determining the load

impedance area - forward

RLdRv

0.01 - 5000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

60.00

Resistance determining the load

impedance area - reverse

XLd

0.01 - 10000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

400.00

Reactance determining the load

impedance area

ArgLd

5 - 70

Deg

30

Angle determining the load impedance

area

CVTtype

Any
Passive type
None (Magnetic)

Passive type

CVT selection determining filtering of the

function

OpModeZ1

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 1

X1PPZ1

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, zone 1

R1PPZ1

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive sequence resistive reach, PhPh, zone 1

X1PEZ1

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, zone 1

R1PEZ1

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,

zone 1

X0Z1

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 1

R0Z1

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 1

RFPPZ1

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1

RFPEZ1

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1

tPPZ1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1

tPEZ1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1

IMinOpPPZ1

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 1

IMinOpPEZ1

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 1

OpModeZ2

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 2

X1Z2

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach,

zone 2

R1Z2

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 2

X0Z2

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 2

R0Z2

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 2

Table continues on next page

340
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

RFPPZ2

Values (Range)
0.01 - 9000.00

Unit
Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Description
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2

RFPEZ2

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2

tPPZ2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 2

tPEZ2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 2

IMinOpPPZ2

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 2

IMinOpPEZ2

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 2

OpModeZ3

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 3

DirModeZ3

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of zone 3 (which will be the Fw

direction of zone 3)

X1Z3

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach,

zone 3

R1Z3

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 3

X0Z3

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 3

R0Z3

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 3

RFPPZ3

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3

RFPEZ3

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3

tPPZ3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 3

tPEZ3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 3

IMinOpPPZ3

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 3

IMinOpPEZ3

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 3

OpModeZ4

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 4

DirModeZ4

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of zone 4 (which will be the Fw

direction of zone 4)

X1Z4

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach,

zone 4

R1Z4

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 4

X0Z4

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 4

R0Z4

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 4

RFPPZ4

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4

RFPEZ4

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4

tPPZ4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.200

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 4

tPEZ4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.200

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 4

IMinOpPPZ4

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 4

Table continues on next page

341
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IMinOpPEZ4

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 4

OpModeZ5

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 5

DirModeZ5

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of zone 5 (which will be the Fw

direction of zone 5)

X1Z5

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach,

zone 5

R1Z5

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 5

X0Z5

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 5

R0Z5

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 5

RFPPZ5

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5

RFPEZ5

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5

tPPZ5

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.600

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 5

tPEZ5

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.600

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 5

IMinOpPPZ5

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 5

IMinOpPEZ5

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 5

OpModeZRV

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone RV

X1ZRV

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach,

zone RV

R1ZRV

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive sequence resistive reach, zone

RV

X0ZRV

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, zone RV

R0ZRV

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero sequence resistive reach, zone RV

RFPPZRV

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV

RFPEZRV

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV

tPPZRV

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV

tPEZRV

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV

IMinOpPPZRV

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone RV

IMinOpPEZRV

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone RV

342
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 161:
Name

ZMFPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ZoneLinkStart

Phase Selection
1st starting zone

Phase Selection

Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked

trip delay timers

INReleasePE

5 - 400

%IPh

400

3I0 limit for releasing Phase-to-Earth

measuring loops

TimerModeZ1

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 1

TimerLinksZ1

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 1

TimerModeZ2

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 2

TimerLinksZ2

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 2

TimerModeZ3

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 3

TimerLinksZ3

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 3

TimerModeZ4

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 4

TimerLinksZ4

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 4

TimerModeZ5

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 5

TimerLinksZ5

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 5

TimerModeZRV

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone RV

TimerLinksZRV

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone RV

343
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 162:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

7.11.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ZMFPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 163:
Name

7.11.7

Unit

ZMFPDIS Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

L1Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L1

L2Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L2

L3Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L3

L1L2Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in loop L1L2

L2L3Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in loop L2L3

L3L1Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in loop L3L1

L1R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L1

L1X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L1

L2R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L2

L2X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L2

L3R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L3

L3X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L3

Operation principle
Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text
without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is
equally valid for all zones.

7.11.7.1

Filtering
Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half cycle
filter.

344
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.
A half cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while
odd harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach
however; instead there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the
same order as the magnitude ratio between the harmonic and fundamental component.

7.11.7.2

Distance measuring zones

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase
faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 91 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.
L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 1

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 2

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 3

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 4

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 5

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone RV
IEC05000458-2-en.vsd

IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 168:

The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-tophase fault

Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection
function with six measuring elements.
It is well-known that transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the
transient overreach of a distance protection. At the same time these transients can
be very diverse in nature from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can
be distinguished by the algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a
setting (CVTtype) is introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of
CVT applied and thus providing the advantage of knowing how performance
should be optimized, even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.
There are basically two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive
and the active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device
that is employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a

345
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

negative impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher
source impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.
It is worth mentioning here that the IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little
or no use in this connection. It is not primarily the damping of transients that is
important; it is the frequency content of the transients that is decisive, i.e. how
difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency. So, even if two CVTs, one passive
and the other active type, comply with the same transient class, the active type
requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid transient overreach.
For avoiding overreach and at the same time achieving fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing
(retained from REL 531) is implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for
every measuring loop and quadrilateral characteristic. There are no specific reach
settings for this circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral zone settings to
determine a reach that will be appropriate. This implies that the circular
characteristic will always have somewhat shorter reach than the quadrilateral zone.

7.11.7.3

Phase-selection element
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change
criteria (i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. Naturally,
there is also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its
operation only on voltage and current phasors.
The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is
not restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change
phase. This significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on
heavily loaded lines. One exception however is three-phase faults, for which the
load encroachment characteristic always has to be applied, in order to distinguish
fault from load.
The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and
carry on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not
be sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the
load area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the
indication will be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.
Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference
compared to the previous phase selection function in the 500- and 670-series (that
is, FDPSPDIS). Measurement in two phase-to-earth loops at the same time is
associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth faults at the same time, one
each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the zero sequence current is
relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio. In fact, in these situations
zone measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-earth loops and the
phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous faults closer

346
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

to the remote bus will gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-phase-earth

fault and the function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone measurements also
here.
In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely of zero sequence
nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phaseto-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.
However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth)
zone measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, there is a setting INReleasePE
that can be lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phaseto-earth measurement should be activated.

7.11.7.4

Directional element
Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a sum of positive sequence voltage and memory voltage
with phase currents. This has been the standard method up to now in the 670-series
(ZDRDIR). For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this
method is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the
phase current, the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative
sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during
high load condition. Finally, zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever
there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.
Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per
measuring loop, are defined by the following equations.

15 < arg

( (1 k ) U1

L1

+ k U 1L1M )

I L1

< 120
(Equation 96)

EQUATION2546 V2 EN

15 < arg

( (1 k ) U1

L1L 2

+ k U 1L1L 2 M )

I L1L 2

< 120
(Equation 97)

EQUATION2547 V2 EN

Where:
U1L1

is the positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1.

U1L1M

is the positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1.

IL1

is the phase current in phase L1.

U1L1L2

is the voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

U1L1L2M is the memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).
IL1L2

is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

is the factor determining the amount of memory voltage.

347
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees. The
value of the k factor determining the amount of memory voltage used is normally
0.8. However, if the SeriesComp option is chosen (only available in ZMFCPDIS)
the value is changed to 0.95.

7.11.7.5

Fuse failure
The ZMFPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (SDDRFUF) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.
A built-in supervision feature within high-speed distance protection itself, based on
phase current change, will ensure that the SDDRFUF blocking signal is received in
time. Namely, the intentional time delay will be introduced if no current magnitude
change greater than 5% of IBase has been detected for any of the three phase currents.

7.11.7.6

Power swings
There is need for external blocking of the ZMFPDIS function during power
swings, either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external
device.

7.11.7.7

Measuring principles
All ZMFPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance
characteristics presented in Figure 169 and Figure 170. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is given in ohms-per-loop domain while the phase-to-phase
characteristic is given in ohms-per-phase domain.

348
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn
RFPE

RFPE

X1PE+Xn

jN
RFPE

Xn =

X0PE-X1PE
3

Rn =

R0PE-R1PE
3

jN

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE

RFPE
IEC11000415-1-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC11000415 V1 EN

Figure 169:

ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop

domain

349
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RFPP

(Ohm/phase)

R1PP

RFPP

X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
PE
11FWPE
XX
00
PE
-X-1X
X
0
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
=
XNFW
XNFW==
3
3 3

X1PP

j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP

RFPP

X1PP

RFPP
2

R1PP

RFPP
2

IEC11000416-1-en.vsd

IEC11000416 V1 EN

Figure 170:

ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The faulty loop in relation to the fault type can be presented as in Figure 171. The
main intension with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach
should be interpreted and set. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always
represents the total fault resistance of the loop, regardless the fact that the fault
resistance (arc) may be divided into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase
faults. The R1 + jX1 represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location.

350
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UL1

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1

Phase-to-earth
element

RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0

UL1
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2

IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP

IL2

(Arc resistance)

UL2
R1 + j X1

Three-phase
fault or Phase-tophase-earth fault

UL1

IL1

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3

IL3
UL3
IEC11000419-2-en.vsd

IEC11000419 V2 EN

Figure 171:

7.11.7.8

Fault loop model

Load encroachment
In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic
without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load
encroachment and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high
emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The effect of load
encroachment is illustrated to the left in Figure 172. The entrance of the load
impedance inside the characteristic is of course not desirable and the way to handle
this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the resistive reach
settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone characteristic
and the minimum load impedance. Such a solution has the drawback that it will
reduce the sensitivity of the distance protection, that is, the ability to detect
resistive faults.
The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the
characteristic shown in Figure 172. The load encroachment algorithm will increase
the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at
351

Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd, the
resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be set according to Figure 172
affording higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due
to load encroachment. Separate resistive blinder setting is available in forward and
reverse direction.
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded, medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to
get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem.
See section "".
X

Z1

Z1

Load impedance
area in forward
R
direction

ArgLd

ArgLd

ArgLd

R
ArgLd
RLdRv

RLdFw

IEC09000248_1_en.vsd
IEC09000248 V1 EN

Figure 172:

7.11.7.9

Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

Simplified logic schemes

PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phaseselection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones
and determine which loops should be released to operate.
FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary
signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is activated if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.
The internal input 'IN present' is activated if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 10%
of the maximum phase current magnitude and at the same time is above 5% of
IBase. However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is
changed to residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.

352
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

FW(Ln & LmLn)

DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z1

FW(Ln & LmLn)

DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z2

RV(Ln & LmLn)

DIR(Ln & LmLn)ZRV

DirModeZ3-5

TRUE (1)
FW(Ln & LmLn)
RV(Ln & LmLn)

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z3-5

IEC12000137-2-en.vsd
IEC12000137 V2 EN

Figure 173:

ZML1Zx
PHSL1
DIRL1Zx
ZML2Zx
PHSL2
DIRL2Zx
ZML3Zx
PHSL3
DIRL3Zx
ZML1L2Zx
PHSL1L2
DIRL1L2Zx
ZML2L3Zx
PHSL2L3
DIRL2L3Zx
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1
DIRL3L1Zx

Connection of directional signals to Zones

PEZx

OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR

AND

L1Zx

AND
OR

AND

L2Zx

AND
OR

AND

L3Zx

AND
AND
AND
OR

OR

PPZx

NDZx

IEC12000140-1-en.vsd
IEC12000140 V1 EN

Figure 174:

Intermediate logic

353
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-E

PPZx

AND

PEZx

AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx
BLKTRZx

OR

tPPZx
AND

AND

AND

TZx

OR

tPEZx
AND

OR

TimerLinksZx

OR

ZoneLinkStart
STPHS

OR

Phase Selection
1st starting zone

LNKZ1
LNKZ2
LNKZRV
OR
LNKZ3
LNKZ4
LNKZ5

OR

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink & ZoneLink
No Links

FALSE (0)
AND

LNKZx

TimerLinksZx =
LoopLink & ZoneLink

IEC12000139-2-en.vsd
IEC12000139 V2 EN

Figure 175:

Logic for linking of timers

354
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

15 ms
t

TZx

TRIPZx

AND

BLKTRZx
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx

OR

AND

OR

AND
AND
15 ms
t

L1Zx

15 ms
t

L2Zx

15 ms
t

L3Zx
PPZx
PEZx

OR

15 ms
t
15 ms
t

NDZx

AND
AND
AND

AND

AND

TRL1Zx
TRL2Zx
TRL3Zx
STL1Zx
STL2Zx
STL3Zx

STARTZx

STNDZx

IEC12000138-1-en.vsd
IEC12000138 V1 EN

Figure 176:

Start and trip outputs

355
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

15 ms
t

OR

STPE

AND

PHSL1
PHSL2

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

PHSL3
PHSL1L2
PHSL2L3
PHSL3L1
OR

BLOCK
VTSZ

15 ms
t

AND

AND

AND

STPP

AND

OR

OR

STARTND
STPHS
IEC12000133-1-en.vsd

IEC12000133 V1 EN

Figure 177:

Additional start outputs 1

356
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

PHSL1
FWL1
PHSL2
FWL2
PHSL3
FWL3

AND
AND

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

AND

PHSL1L2
FWL1L2
PHSL2L3
FWL2L3
PHSL3L1
FWL3L1

AND
AND

STFWL1

AND

STFWL2

AND

STFWL3

AND

AND
OR

IN present

BLOCK
VTSZ

AND

STFWPE

STFW1PH

=1
OR

STFW2PH

=2

STFW3PH

=3

IEC12000134-1-en.vsd
IEC12000134 V1 EN

Figure 178:

Additional start outputs 2

PHSL1
RVL1
PHSL2
RVL2
PHSL3
RVL3

AND
AND

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

AND

PHSL1L2
RVL1L2
PHSL2L3
RVL2L3
PHSL3L1
RVL3L1

AND
AND

STRVL1

AND

STRVL2

AND

STRVL3

AND

AND
OR

IN present
BLOCK
VTSZ

AND

STRVPE

OR

IEC12000141-1-en.vsd
IEC12000141 V1 EN

Figure 179:

Additional start outputs 3

357

Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.11.8

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 164:

ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

3 selectable
directions, 3 fixed
directions

Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph

and Ph-E

(5-6000)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Positive sequence reactance

reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop

(0.01 - 3000.00) ohm/

phase

Positive sequence resistance

reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop

(0.00 - 1000.00) ohm/

phase

Zero sequence reactance reach

(0.01 - 9000.00) ohm/p

Zero sequence resistive reach

(0.00 - 3000.00) ohm/p

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E

and Ph-Ph

(0.01 -9000.00) ohm/l

Dynamic overreach

< 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30

Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E

and Ph-Ph operation

(0.000-60.000) s

2.0% or 35 ms whichever is greater

Operate time

16 ms typically

IEC 60255-121

Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach

Min = 20 ms
Max = 35 ms

Reset ratio

105% typically

2.0% of static accuracy

2.0 deg static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: At 0 deg and 85 deg

7.12

High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS

7.12.1

Identification
Function description
High speed distance protection zone
(zone 1-6)

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMFCPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

7.12.2

Functionality
High speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS) provides sub-cycle, down towards halfcycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and up to around
SIR 5. At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care during difficult
conditions in high voltage transmission networks, like faults on long heavily loaded

358
Technical Manual

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 7
Impedance protection

lines and faults generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled with
outmost security and dependability, although sometimes with reduced operating
speed.
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is fundamentally the same function as
ZMFPDIS but provides more flexibility in zone settings to suit more complex
applications, such as series compensated lines. In operation for series compensated
networks, the parameters of the directional function are altered to handle voltage
reversal.
The ZMFCPDIS function is a six-zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of
the independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with singlephase autoreclosing.
The zones can operate independently of each other in directional (forward or
reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with a
communication scheme, for protection of power lines and cables in complex
network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.
A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the
distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.
The ZMFCPDIS function block incorporates a phase-selection element and a
directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 670series, where these
elements were represented with separate function blocks.
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change
criteria, with significant increased dependability. Naturally, there is also a part
operating with continuous criteria that operates in parallel
The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast
and correct directional evaluation during various conditions, including close-in threephase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.

359
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.12.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
ZMFCPDIS
I3P*
TRIPZ1
U3P*
TRL1Z1
BLOCK
TRL2Z1
VTSZ
TRL3Z1
BLKZ1
TRIPZ2
BLKZ2
TRL1Z2
BLKZ3
TRL2Z2
BLKZ4
TRL3Z2
BLKZ5
TRIPZ3
BLKZRV
TRIPZ4
BLKTRZ1
TRIPZ5
BLKTRZ2
TRIPZRV
BLKTRZ3
STARTZ1
BLKTRZ4
STNDZ1
BLKTRZ5
STARTZ2
BLKTRZRV
STL1Z2
STL2Z2
STL3Z2
STNDZ2
STARTZ3
STNDZ3
STARTZ4
STNDZ4
STARTZ5
STNDZ5
STARTZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STARTND
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
IEC11000422-1-en.vsd
IEC11000422 V1 EN

Figure 180:

7.12.4

ZMFCPDIS function block

Signals
Table 165:
Name

ZMFCPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire

function

VTSZ

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire

function

Table continues on next page

360
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

BLKZ1

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 1

BLKZ2

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 2

BLKZ3

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 3

BLKZ4

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 4

BLKZ5

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 5

BLKZRV

BOOLEAN

Resets all outputs and internal timers of reverse

zone

BLKTRZ1

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 1

BLKTRZ2

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 2

BLKTRZ3

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 3

BLKTRZ4

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 4

BLKTRZ5

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 5

BLKTRZRV

BOOLEAN

Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of

reverse zone

Table 166:
Name

ZMFCPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIPZ1

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 forward direction

TRL1Z1

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction

TRL2Z1

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 - forward direction

TRL3Z1

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 - forward direction

TRIPZ2

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 forward direction

TRL1Z2

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction

TRL2Z2

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction

TRL3Z2

BOOLEAN

Trip in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction

TRIPZ3

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone

direction

TRIPZ4

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone

direction

TRIPZ5

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone

direction

TRIPZRV

BOOLEAN

Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV reverse dir.

STARTZ1

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 forward direction

STNDZ1

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any

direction

STARTZ2

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 forward direction

STL1Z2

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction

STL2Z2

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction

Table continues on next page

361
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

STL3Z2

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction

STNDZ2

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - any

direction

STARTZ3

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone

direction

STNDZ3

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - any

direction

STARTZ4

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone

direction

STNDZ4

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - any

direction

STARTZ5

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone

direction

STNDZ5

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - any

direction

STARTZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone RV reverse dir.

STL1ZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse direction

STL2ZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L2 from zone RV - reverse direction

STL3ZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in phase L3 from zone RV - reverse direction

STNDZRV

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any

direction

STARTND

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in any phase or phases - any

direction

STNDL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction

STNDL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - any direction

STNDL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - any direction

STFWL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction

STFWL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction

STFWL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction

STFWPE

BOOLEAN

Fault with earth connection detected - forward

direction

STRVL1

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction

STRVL2

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction

STRVL3

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction

STRVPE

BOOLEAN

Fault with earth connection detected - reverse

direction

STFW1PH

BOOLEAN

Single-phase fault detected - forward direction

STFW2PH

BOOLEAN

Two-phase fault detected - forward direction

STFW3PH

BOOLEAN

Three-phase fault detected - forward direction

STPE

BOOLEAN

Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction

STPP

BOOLEAN

Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction

362
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.12.5
Table 167:
Name

Settings
ZMFCPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Mode Off / On

OperationSC

NoSeriesComp
SeriesComp

NoSeriesComp

Selection of series compensation

operation Off / On

RLdFw

0.01 - 5000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

60.00

Resistance determining the load

impedance area - forward

RLdRv

0.01 - 5000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

60.00

Resistance determining the load

impedance area - reverse

XLd

0.01 - 10000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

400.00

Reactance determining the load

impedance area

ArgLd

5 - 70

Deg

30

Angle determining the load impedance

area

CVTtype

Any
Passive type
None (Magnetic)

Passive type

CVT selection determining the filtering of

the function

OpModeZ1

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 1

X1FwPPZ1

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 1, forward dir.

R1FwPPZ1

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 1, forward dir.

RFPPZ1

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,

forw & rev dir.

X1RvPPZ1

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,

reverse direction

X1FwPEZ1

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,

zone 1, forward dir.

R1FwPEZ1

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone

1, forward dir.

X0FwPEZ1

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone

1, forward direction

R0FwPEZ1

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 1,

forward direction

RFPEZ1

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1,

forw & rev dir.

X1RvPEZ1

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 1,

reverse direction

tPPZ1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1

tPEZ1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1

IMinOpPPZ1

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 1

IMinOpPEZ1

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 1

Table continues on next page

363
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OpModeZ2

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 2

X1FwPPZ2

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 2, forward dir.

R1FwPPZ2

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 2, forward dir.

RFPPZ2

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2,

forw & rev dir.

X1RvPPZ2

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2,

reverse direction

X1FwPEZ2

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,

zone 2, forward dir.

R1FwPEZ2

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone

2, forward dir.

X0FwPEZ2

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone

2, forward direction

R0FwPEZ2

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 2,

forward direction

RFPEZ2

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2,

forw & rev dir.

X1RvPEZ2

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 2,

reverse direction

tPPZ2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 2

tPEZ2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 2

IMinOpPPZ2

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 2

IMinOpPEZ2

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 2

OpModeZ3

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 3

DirModeZ3

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of zone 3 (which will be the Fw

direction of zone 3)

X1FwPPZ3

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 3, zone direction

R1FwPPZ3

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 3, zone direction

RFFwPPZ3

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,

zone direction

X1RvPPZ3

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,

opposite to zone dir

RFRvPPZ3

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,

opposite to zone dir.

X1FwPEZ3

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,

zone 3, zone direction

Table continues on next page

364
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

R1FwPEZ3

Values (Range)
0.00 - 1000.00

Unit
Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Description
Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
3, zone direction

X0FwPEZ3

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone

3, zone direction

R0FwPEZ3

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 3,

zone direction

RFFwPEZ3

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,

zone direction

X1RvPEZ3

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 3,

opposite to zone dir

RFRvPEZ3

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,

opposite to zone dir.

tPPZ3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 3

tPEZ3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 3

IMinOpPPZ3

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 3

IMinOpPEZ3

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 3

OpModeZ4

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 4

DirModeZ4

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of zone 4 (which will be the Fw

direction of zone 4)

X1FwPPZ4

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 4, zone direction

R1FwPPZ4

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 4, zone direction

RFFwPPZ4

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,

zone direction

X1RvPPZ4

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,

opposite to zone dir

RFRvPPZ4

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,

opposite to zone dir.

X1FwPEZ4

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,

zone 4, zone direction

R1FwPEZ4

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone

4, zone direction

X0FwPEZ4

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone

4, zone direction

R0FwPEZ4

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 4,

zone direction

RFFwPEZ4

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4,

zone direction

X1RvPEZ4

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 4,

opposite to zone dir

RFRvPEZ4

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4,

opposite to zone dir.

Table continues on next page

365
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

tPPZ4

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
1.200

Description
Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 4

tPEZ4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.200

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 4

IMinOpPPZ4

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 4

IMinOpPEZ4

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 4

OpModeZ5

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone 5

DirModeZ5

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of zone 5 (which will be the Fw

direction of zone 5)

X1FwPPZ5

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 5, zone direction

R1FwPPZ5

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 5, zone direction

RFFwPPZ5

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,

zone direction

X1RvPPZ5

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,

opposite to zone dir

RFRvPPZ5

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,

opposite to zone dir.

X1FwPEZ5

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,

zone 5, zone direction

R1FwPEZ5

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone

5, zone direction

X0FwPEZ5

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone

5, zone direction

R0FwPEZ5

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 5,

zone direction

RFFwPEZ5

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5,

zone direction

X1RvPEZ5

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 5,

opposite to zone dir

RFRvPEZ5

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5,

opposite to zone dir.

tPPZ5

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.600

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 5

tPEZ5

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.600

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 5

IMinOpPPZ5

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone 5

IMinOpPEZ5

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone 5

OpModeZRV

Disable-Zone
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,

zone RV

X1FwPPZRV

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

zone RV, reverse dir.

Table continues on next page

366
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

R1FwPPZRV

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,

zone RV, reverse dir.

RFPPZRV

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,

rev & forw dir.

X1RvPPZRV

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,

forward direction

X1FwPEZRV

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-E, zone RV,

reverse direction

R1FwPEZRV

0.00 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone

RV, reverse dir.

X0FwPEZRV

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone

RV, reverse direction

R0FwPEZRV

0.00 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone

RV, reverse direction

RFPEZRV

0.01 - 9000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV,

rev & forw dir.

X1RvPEZRV

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone RV,

forward direction

tPPZRV

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV

tPEZRV

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV

IMinOpPPZRV

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate ph-ph current for

Phase-Phase loops, zone RV

IMinOpPEZRV

5 - 6000

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops, zone RV

Table 168:
Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

ZMFCPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ZoneLinkStart

Phase Selection
1st starting zone

Phase Selection

Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked

trip delay timers

INReleasePE

5 - 400

%IPh

400

3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth

measuring loops

TimerModeZ1

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 1

TimerLinksZ1

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 1

TimerModeZ2

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 2

TimerLinksZ2

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 2

Table continues on next page

367
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TimerModeZ3

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 3

TimerLinksZ3

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 3

TimerModeZ4

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 4

TimerLinksZ4

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 4

TimerModeZ5

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone 5

TimerLinksZ5

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone 5

TimerModeZRV

Disable all
Enable Ph-E
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh

Enable Ph-E PhPh

On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip

output, zone RV

TimerLinksZRV

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

LoopLink (tPPtPE)

How start of trip delay timers should be

linked for zone RV

Table 169:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

7.12.6

ZMFCPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 170:
Name

ZMFCPDIS Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

L1Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L1

L2Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L2

L3Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in phase L3

Table continues on next page

368
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

7.12.7

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

L1L2Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in loop L1L2

L2L3Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in loop L2L3

L3L1Dir

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction in loop L3L1

L1R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L1

L1X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L1

L2R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L2

L2X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L2

L3R

REAL

Ohm

Resistance in phase L3

L3X

REAL

Ohm

Reactance in phase L3

Operation principle
Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text
without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is
equally valid for all zones.

7.12.7.1

Filtering
Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the
ZMFCPDIS function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a
half-cycle filter.
The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.
A half-cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while
odd harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach; instead
there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the
magnitude ratio between the harmonic and the fundamental component.

7.12.7.2

Distance measuring zones

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase
faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 91 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.

369
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 1

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 2

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 3

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 4

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 5

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone RV
IEC05000458-2-en.vsd

IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 181:

The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-tophase fault

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.
It is well-known that transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the
transient overreach of a distance protection. At the same time these transients can
be very diverse in nature from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can
be distinguished by the algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a
setting is introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of CVT
applied and thus providing the advantage of knowing how performance should be
optimized, even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.
There are basically two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive
and the active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device
that is employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a
negative impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher
source impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.
It is worth mentioning here that the IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little
or no use in this connection. It is not primarily the damping of transients that is
important; it is the frequency content of the transients that is decisive, i.e. how
difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency. So, even if two CVTs, one passive
and the other active type, comply with the same transient class, the active type
requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid transient overreach.
For avoiding overreach and at the same time achieving fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing
(retained from REL 531) is implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for
every measuring loop and quadrilateral characteristic. There are no specific reach
settings for this circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral zone settings to
determine a reach that will be appropriate. This implies that the circular
characteristic will always have somewhat shorter reach than the quadrilateral zone.

370
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.12.7.3

Phase-selection element
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change
criteria. The current change criteria itself can however only be relied on for a short
period following the fault inception (during what we will call the current change
phase). Subsequent switching in the network may render the change in current
invalid. So, naturally, the phase-selection element also operates on continuous
criteria.
The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is
not restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change
phase. This significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on
heavily loaded lines. One exception, however, is three-phase faults, for which the
load encroachment characteristic always has to be applied, in order to distinguish
fault from load.
The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and
carry on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not
be sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the
load area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the
indication will be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.
Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference
compared to the previous phase selection function in the 500- and 600-series (that
is, FDPSPDIS). Measurement in two phase-to-earth loops at the same time is
associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth faults at the same time, one
each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the zero sequence current is
relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio.In fact, in these situations zone
measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-earth loops and the phaseto-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous faults closer to the
remote bus will gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-phase-earth fault and
the function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone measurements also here.
In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely lack of zero
sequence nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed
in the phase-to-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.
However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth)
zone measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, the setting INReleasePE can be
lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-earth
measurement should be activated.

7.12.7.4

Directional element
Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a sum of positive sequence voltage and memory voltage

371
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

with phase currents. This has been the standard method up to now in the 600-series
(ZDRDIR). For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this
method is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the
phase current, the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative
sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during
high load condition. Finally, zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever
there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.
Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per
measuring loop, are defined by the following equations (examples for L1and L1L2
only):

15 < arg

( (1 k ) U1

L1

+ k U 1L1M )

I L1

< 120
(Equation 98)

EQUATION2546 V2 EN

15 < arg

( (1 k ) U1

L1L 2

+ k U 1L1L 2 M )

I L1L 2

< 120
(Equation 99)

EQUATION2547 V2 EN

Where:
U1L1

is the positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1.

U1L1M

is the positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1.

IL1

is the phase current in phase L1.

U1L1L2

is the voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

U1L1L2M is the memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).
IL1L2

is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

is the factor determining the amount of memory voltage.

The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees. The
value of the k factor determining the amount of memory voltage used is normally
0.8. However, if the SeriesComp option is chosen (only available in ZMFCPDIS)
the value is changed to 0.95.

7.12.7.5

Fuse failure
The ZMFCPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (SDDRFUF) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.
However, to guarantee that also very fast operation is blocked in a fuse failure
situation, there is a built-in supervision based on change in current that will delay
operation before the SDDRFUF blocking signal is received. The delay will be
introduced if no (vector) magnitude change greater than 5% of IBase has been
detected in any of the phase currents.

372
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.12.7.6

Power swings
There is need for external blocking of the ZMFCPDIS function during power
swings, either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external
device.

7.12.7.7

Measuring principles
All ZMFCPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance
characteristics presented in figure 182 and figure 183. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+RNFw
RFFwPE

RFRvPE

X 0 PE - X 1FwPE
3
PG- 1RVPGX 1RvPE
XX00PE
X 1XRVPE
XNRV
= XNFw

XNRVXNRv
==
33
X 1FwPE
XNFw =

XX0 PE
- X-1X
FWPE
0 PG
1FWPG
XNFW
XNFW==
3 3

X1FwPE+XNFw

jN

jN

RNFw =

R0 PE - R1PE
3

R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPE

RFFwPE

X1RvPE+XNRv

jN
RFRvPE

RFFwPE

R1PE+RNRv

IEC11000417-1-en.vsd

IEC11000417 V1 EN

Figure 182:

ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/

loop domain

373
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RFRvPP

(Ohm/phase)

R1PP

RFFwPP

X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
PE
11FWPE
XX
00
PE
-X-1X
X
0
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
=
XNFW
XNFW==
3
3 3

X1FwPP

j
jN
RFRvPP

RFFwPP

j
R (Ohm/phase)

X1RvPP

jN
RFRvPP

RFFwPP

IEC11000418-1-en.vsd

IEC11000418 V1 EN

Figure 183:

ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

Note that for ZMFCPDIS, the reverse zone ZRV, as well as any of
zones 3-5, that are set to DirMode=Reverse will get their operating
impedances inverted (rotated 180 degrees) internally in order to
make use of the main settings, which are the settings designated
Fw. Therefore, a reverse zone will have its Fw-settings
(RFFwPPZRV, X1FwPEZ3, and so on) applied in the third
quadrant, that is, towards the busbar instead of the line.
The fault loop reach in relation to each fault type may also be presented as in figure
171. The main intension with this illustration is to make clear how the fault
resistive reach should be interpreted. Note in particular that the setting RFPP
always represents the total fault resistance of the loop, even while the fault
resistance (arc) may be divided into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase-toearth faults. The R1 and jX1 represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location.

374
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UL1

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1

Phase-to-earth
element

RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0

UL1
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2

IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP

IL2

(Arc resistance)

UL2
R1 + j X1

Three-phase
fault or Phase-tophase-earth fault

UL1

IL1

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3

IL3
UL3
IEC11000419-2-en.vsd

IEC11000419 V2 EN

Figure 184:

7.12.7.8

Fault loop model

Simplified logic schemes

PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phaseselection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones
and determine which loops should be released to possibly issue a start or a trip.
FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary
signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is set true if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.
The internal input 'IN present' is true if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 7% of
IBase. However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is
changed to residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.

375
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

15 ms
t

OR

STPE

AND

PHSL1
PHSL2

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

PHSL3
PHSL1L2
PHSL2L3
PHSL3L1
OR

BLOCK
VTSZ

15 ms
t

AND

AND

AND

STPP

AND

OR

OR

STARTND
STPHS
IEC12000133-1-en.vsd

IEC12000133 V1 EN

Figure 185:

Additional start outputs 1

376
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

PHSL1
FWL1
PHSL2
FWL2
PHSL3
FWL3

AND
AND

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

AND

PHSL1L2
FWL1L2
PHSL2L3
FWL2L3
PHSL3L1
FWL3L1

AND
AND

STFWL1

AND

STFWL2

AND

STFWL3

AND

AND
OR

IN present

BLOCK
VTSZ

AND

=1

STFWPE

STFW1PH

OR
=2

=3

STFW2PH

STFW3PH

IEC12000134-1-en.vsd
IEC12000134 V1 EN

Figure 186:

Additional start outputs 2

FW(Ln & LmLn)

DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z1

FW(Ln & LmLn)

DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z2

RV(Ln & LmLn)

DIR(Ln & LmLn)ZRV

DirModeZ3-5

TRUE (1)
FW(Ln & LmLn)
RV(Ln & LmLn)

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z3-5

IEC12000137-2-en.vsd
IEC12000137 V2 EN

Figure 187:

Connection of directional signals to zones

377
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

15 ms
t

TZx

TRIPZx

AND

BLKTRZx
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx

OR

AND

OR

AND
AND
15 ms
t

L1Zx

15 ms
t

L2Zx

15 ms
t

L3Zx
PPZx
PEZx

OR

15 ms
t
15 ms
t

NDZx

AND
AND
AND

AND

AND

TRL1Zx
TRL2Zx
TRL3Zx
STL1Zx
STL2Zx
STL3Zx

STARTZx

STNDZx

IEC12000138-1-en.vsd
IEC12000138 V1 EN

Figure 188:

Start and trip outputs

378
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-E

PPZx

AND

PEZx

AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx
BLKTRZx

OR

tPPZx
AND

AND

AND

TZx

OR

tPEZx
AND

OR

TimerLinksZx

OR

ZoneLinkStart
STPHS

OR

Phase Selection
1st starting zone

LNKZ1
LNKZ2
LNKZRV
OR
LNKZ3
LNKZ4
LNKZ5

OR

LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
LoopLink & ZoneLink
No Links

FALSE (0)
AND

LNKZx

TimerLinksZx =
LoopLink & ZoneLink

IEC12000139-2-en.vsd
IEC12000139 V2 EN

Figure 189:

Logic for linking of timers

379
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

PHSL1
RVL1
PHSL2
RVL2
PHSL3
RVL3

AND
AND

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

OR

15 ms
t

AND

PHSL1L2
RVL1L2
PHSL2L3
RVL2L3
PHSL3L1
RVL3L1

AND
AND

STRVL1

AND

STRVL2

AND

STRVL3

AND

AND
OR

IN present
BLOCK
VTSZ

AND

STRVPE

OR

IEC12000141-1-en.vsd
IEC12000141 V1 EN

Figure 190:

Additional start outputs 3

380
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ZML1Zx
PHSL1
DIRL1Zx
ZML2Zx
PHSL2
DIRL2Zx
ZML3Zx
PHSL3
DIRL3Zx
ZML1L2Zx
PHSL1L2
DIRL1L2Zx
ZML2L3Zx
PHSL2L3
DIRL2L3Zx
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1
DIRL3L1Zx

PEZx

OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR

AND

L1Zx

AND
OR

AND

L2Zx

AND
OR

AND

L3Zx

AND
AND
AND
OR

OR

PPZx

NDZx

IEC12000140-1-en.vsd
IEC12000140 V1 EN

Figure 191:

Intermediate logic

381
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.12.8

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 171:

ZMFCPDIS technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

3 selectable
directions, 3 fixed
directions

Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph

and Ph-E

(5 - 6000)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Positive sequence reactance

reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop

(30 - 3000) /phase

Positive sequence resistance

reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop

(30 - 3000) /phase

Zero sequence reactance reach

(100.00 - 9000.00) /p

Zero sequence resistive reach

(15.00 - 3000.00) /p

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E

and Ph-Ph

(1.00 - 9000.00) /l

Dynamic overreach

< 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVT's
and 0.5 < SIR <30

Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E

and Ph-Ph operation

(0.000 - 60.000) s

Operate time

16 ms typically

Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach

Min = 20 ms
Max = 35 ms

Reset ratio

105% typically

" +- 2.0% static accuracy +- 2.0 deg

static angular accuracy Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur Current
range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir Angle: At 0 deg
and 85 deg"

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is greater

IEC 60255-121
-

7.13

Power swing detection ZMRPSB

7.13.1

Identification
Function description
Power swing detection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMRPSB

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
68

Zpsb
SYMBOL-EE V1 EN

7.13.2

Functionality
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big
generation plants.

382
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Power swing detection function ZMRPSB is used to detect power swings and
initiate block of all distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth-fault currents
during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB function, to allow fault clearance.

7.13.3

Function block
ZMRPSB
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKI01
BLKI02
BLK1PH
REL1PH
BLK2PH
REL2PH
I0CHECK
TRSP
EXTERNAL

START
ZOUT
ZIN

IEC06000264-2-en.vsd
IEC06000264 V2 EN

Figure 192:

7.13.4

ZMRPSB function block

Signals
Table 172:
Name

ZMRPSB Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKI01

BOOLEAN

Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition

BLKI02

BOOLEAN

Block inhibit of start output for subsequent

residual current detection

BLK1PH

BOOLEAN

Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode

REL1PH

BOOLEAN

Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode

BLK2PH

BOOLEAN

Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode

REL2PH

BOOLEAN

Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode

I0CHECK

BOOLEAN

Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit

start output

TRSP

BOOLEAN

Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping

function

EXTERNAL

BOOLEAN

Input for external detection of power swing

383
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 173:

ZMRPSB Output signals

Name

7.13.5
Table 174:
Name

Type

Description

START

BOOLEAN

Power swing detected

ZOUT

BOOLEAN

Measured impedance within outer impedance

boundary

ZIN

BOOLEAN

Measured impedance within inner impedance

boundary

Settings
ZMRPSB Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Mode On / Off

X1InFw

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Inner reactive boundary, forward

R1LIn

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Line resistance for inner characteristic

angle

R1FInFw

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance coverage to inner

resistive line, forward

X1InRv

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Inner reactive boundary, reverse

R1FInRv

0.01 - 1000.00

Ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance line to inner resistive

boundary, reverse

OperationLdCh

Off
On

On

Operation of load discrimination

characteristic

RLdOutFw

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Outer resistive load boundary, forward

ArgLd

5 - 70

Deg

25

Load angle determining load impedance

area

RLdOutRv

0.01 - 3000.00

Ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Outer resistive load boundary, reverse

kLdRFw

0.50 - 0.90

Mult

0.01

0.75

Multiplication factor for inner resistive

load boundary, forward

kLdRRv

0.50 - 0.90

Mult

0.01

0.75

Multiplication factor for inner resistive

load boundary, reverse

tEF

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Timer for overcoming single-pole

reclosing dead time

IMinOpPE

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum operate current in % of IBase

Table 175:

ZMRPSB Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tP1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.045

Timer for detection of initial power swing

tP2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.015

Timer for detection of subsequent power

swings

tW

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.250

Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer

Step

Default

Description

Table continues on next page

384
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tH

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.500

Timer for holding power swing START

output

tR1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

Timer giving delay to inhibit by the

residual current

tR2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow

swing

Table 176:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

7.13.6

Step

Default

Description

ZMRPSB Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Operation principle
Power swing detection (ZMRPSB ) function comprises an inner and an outer
quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, as shown in
figure 193.
Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a
power swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the
outer and the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times
longer than a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance
measuring principle is the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The
impedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases
separately.
One-out-of-three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to
the specific system operating conditions.

385
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

jX

X1OutFw
X1InFw

DRv

R1LIn

ZL

DFw
j

R1FInRv

R1FInFw

DFw

ArgLd

ArgLd

DRv

DFw
DFw

R
DFw

DRv

DFw

RLdInRv RLdInFw

DRv
j

RLdOutRv RLdOutFw

DRv

X1InRv
X1OutRv
IEC09000222_1_en.vsd

IEC09000222 V1 EN

Figure 193:

Operating characteristic for ZMRPSB function (setting parameters

in italic)

The impedance measurement within ZMRPSB function is performed by solving

equation 100 and equation 101 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2
and L3).

ULn
Rset
Re
I
L
n

EQUATION1183 V2 EN

(Equation 100)

ULn
Im
Xset
n
I
L

EQUATION1184 V2 EN

(Equation 101)

The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries.

7.13.6.1

Resistive reach in forward direction

To avoid load encroachment, the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by
setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value
while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 102.

386
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RLdInFw = kLdRFwRLdOutFw
EQUATION1185 V2 EN

(Equation 102)

where:

kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting
the parameter ArgLd.
The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same ArgLd and RLdOutFw and calculated value RLdInFw).
The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better
adaptation to the distance measuring zones. The angle is the same as the line angle
and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the
line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the
inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw.
From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a
distance between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is
valid for R direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and
second quadrant.

7.13.6.2

Resistive reach in reverse direction

To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction, the resistive reach is limited by
setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment
zone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by
using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 103.

RLdInRv = kLdRRvRLdOutRv
EQUATION1187 V2 EN

(Equation 103)

where:

kLdRRv is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv, a
distance between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is
valid for R direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and
fourth quadrant.
The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load
encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner
boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.

387
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load
encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line
resistance R1LIn. The argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is
the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and
outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction, that is
DRv.

7.13.6.3

Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to
the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,
where:
DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw RLdOutFw

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined
as X1InRv + DRv.
where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv RLdOutRv

7.13.6.4

Basic detection logic

The operation of the Power swing detection ZMRPSB is only released if the
magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current,
IMinOpPE.
ZMRPSB function can operate in two operating modes:

The 1 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of

the three phases. Figure 194 presents a composition of an internal detection
signal DET-L1 in this particular phase.
The 2 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least
two out of three phases. Figure 195 presents a composition of the detection
signals DET1of3 and DET2of3.

Signals ZOUTLn (outer boundary) and ZINLn (inner boundary) in figure 194 are
related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase
separately (n represents the corresponding L1, L2 and L3). They are internal
signals, calculated by ZMRPSB function.
The tP1 timer in figure 194 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are
usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the
detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate
area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part
388
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

of figure 194 (internal input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers)
are duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the
same settings.
ZOUTL1
ZINL1

0-tP1
0

AND

AND

OR
-loop

-loop

0-tP2
0

OR

AND

ZOUTL2
ZOUTL3

detected

AND

DET-L1

OR

0
0-tW
IEC05000113-2-en.vsd

IEC05000113 V2 EN

Figure 194:

DET-L1
DET-L2
DET-L3

Detection of power swing in phase L1

DET1of3 - int.

>1

&
&

>1

DET2of3 - int.

&
IEC01000057-2-en.vsd
IEC01000057-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 195:

Detection of power swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode

389
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ZOUTL1

ZOUT

OR

ZOUTL2

ZINL1

ZOUTL3

TRSP

ZIN

OR

ZINL2

AND

ZINL3

tEF
AND

I0CHECK
10 ms
t

AND

BLKI02

OR
tR1

AND

INHIBIT

OR

-loop
tR2
AND

BLKI01

BLOCK
-loop
DET1of3 - int.
REL1PH
BLK1PH
DET2of3 - int.
REL2PH
BLK2PH

AND
tH
OR
AND

t
OR

START

AND

EXTERNAL
en05000114.vsd
IEC05000114 V1 EN

Figure 196:

7.13.6.5

Simplified block diagram for ZMRPSB function

Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 196 presents a simplified logic diagram for the Power swing detection
function ZMRPSB. The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the
detailed logic diagrams in figure 194 and figure 195 respectively.
Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the
functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH.
The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter
OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated from
RLdOutFw and RLdOutRv. The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral.
There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:

390
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.13.7

Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output START signal

instantaneously.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected
and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the
time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to
disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01
functional input.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer,
if an earth-fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and
the power swing has been detected before the earth-fault (activation of the
signal I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the
logical 1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input.
The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input
I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance
has been seen within the outer characteristic of ZMRPSB operate
characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of
ZMRPSB function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent
single-phase fault after single-phase autoreclosing dead time, if the initial singlephase fault and single-phase opening of the circuit breaker causes the power
swing in the remaining two phases.

Technical data
Table 177:

ZMRPSB technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Reactive reach

(0.10-3000.00) W/phase

Resistive reach

(0.101000.00) W/loop

Power swing detection operate

time

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 10 ms whichever
is greater

Second swing reclaim operate

time

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 20 ms whichever
is greater

Minimum operate current

(5-30)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

7.14

Power swing logic PSLPSCH

7.14.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Power swing logic

PSLPSCH

2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

391
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.14.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementary function to Power Swing
Detection (ZMRPSB) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of
faults on power lines during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when
the distance protection function should normally be blocked. The complete logic
consists of two different parts:

Communication and tripping part: provides selective tripping on the basis of

special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which
are not blocked during the system oscillations.
Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection
zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the
adjacent power lines and other primary elements.

7.14.3

Function block
PSLPSCH
BLOCK
STZMUR
STZMOR
STPSD
STDEF
STZMPSD
CACC
AR1P1
CSUR
CR

TRIP
STZMURPS
BLKZMUR
BLKZMOR
CS

IEC07000026-3-en.vsd
IEC07000026 V3 EN

Figure 197:

7.14.4

PSLPSCH function block

Signals
Table 178:
Name

PSLPSCH Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

STZMUR

BOOLEAN

Start of the underreaching zone

STZMOR

BOOLEAN

Start of the overreaching zone

STPSD

BOOLEAN

Power swing detected

STDEF

BOOLEAN

Start from Earth Fault Protection in forward or

reverse direction

STZMPSD

BOOLEAN

Operation of Power Swing Detection external

characteristic

CACC

BOOLEAN

Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated

AR1P1

BOOLEAN

Single pole auto-reclosing in progress

CSUR

BOOLEAN

Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing

zone

CR

BOOLEAN

Carrier receive signal during power swing

detection operation

392
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 179:

PSLPSCH Output signals

Name

7.14.5
Table 180:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip through Power Swing Logic

STZMURPS

BOOLEAN

Start of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to

be used in configuration

BLKZMUR

BOOLEAN

Block trip of underreaching impedance zone

BLKZMOR

BOOLEAN

Block trip of overreaching distance protection

zones

CS

BOOLEAN

Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing

Settings
PSLPSCH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

tDZ

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.050

Permitted max oper time diff between

higher and lower zone

tDZMUR

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Delay for oper of underreach zone with

detected diff in oper time

tCS

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Conditional timer for sending the CS at

power swings

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Conditional timer for tripping at power

swings

tBlkTr

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

Timer for blocking the overreaching

zones trip

7.14.6

Operation principle

7.14.6.1

Communication and tripping logic

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 198.

393
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STDEF
AR1P1

&

STPSD
BLOCK

&

tCS
t

&

tTrip

tBlkTr
t

CS

CSUR

&

BLKZMPS

t
CACC
CR

&

>1

TRIP

en06000236.vsd
IEC06000236 V1 EN

Figure 198:

Simplified logic diagram power swing communication and tripping

logic

The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the
BLOCK functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the STDEF
functional input signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by
the logical one on the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal
BLKZMPS remains logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally
(BLOCK is logical zero) and the earth-fault is detected on protected line (STDEF
is logical one), which is connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero).
Timer tBlkTr prolongs the duration of this blocking condition, if the measured
impedance remains within the operate area of the Power Swing Detection
(ZMRPSB) function (STPSD input active). The BLKZMPS can be used to block
the operation of the power-swing zones.
Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP
functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output
CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates
the TRIP functional output.
Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the STPSD input has been
active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.
Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PLTR_CRD and CR (local
trip condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not
blocked by one of the above conditions and the STPSD signal has been present
longer then the time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.

7.14.6.2

Blocking logic
Figure 199 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the
underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their
clearance on the remote power lines.

394
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

&
BLKZMH

&
STZML
BLOCK
STMZH
STZMPSD
STPSD

tZL
t

&
&

tDZ
t

&

>1

STZMLL

>1

&
-loop

en06000237.vsd
IEC06000237 V1 EN

Figure 199:

Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power

swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines
and other system elements

The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional input BLOCK. It can start only
if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that Power
swing detection (ZMRPSB) function must not detect power swinging over the
protected power line.
STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the
impedance must be detected within the external boundary of ZMRPSB function.
STZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault
must be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example
zone 2.

The STZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic
instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following
conditions:

If the STZMUR signal appears at the same time as the STZMOR or if it

appears with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer
tDZ.
If the STZMUR signal appears after the STZMOR signal with a time delay
longer than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the
time delay set on the tZL timer.

The BLKZMOR functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the
higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area
after tDZ time delay.

395
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 181:

PSLPSCH technical data

Function

Range or value

Permitted maximum
operating time difference
between higher and lower
zone

(0.000 60.0000) s

0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater

Delay for operation of

underreach zone with
detected difference in
operating time

(0.000 60.0000) s

0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater

Conditional timer for sending

the CS at power swings

(0.000 60.0000) s

0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater

Conditional timer for tripping

at power swings

(0.000 60.0000) s

0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater

Timer for blocking the

overreaching zones trip

(0.000 60.0000) s

0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater

7.15

Pole slip protection PSPPPAM

7.15.1

Identification

7.15.2

Accuracy

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Pole slip protection

PSPPPAM

IEC 60617
identification
Ucos

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
78

Functionality
Sudden events in an electric power system such as large changes in load, fault
occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power
swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the
synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of
the pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) is to detect, evaluate, and take the required
action for pole slipping occurrences in the power system.

396
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.15.3

Function block
PSPPPAM
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKGEN
BLKMOTOR
EXTZONE1

TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
START
ZONE1
ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
UCOS
UCOSPER

IEC10000045-1-en.vsd
IEC10000045 V1 EN

Figure 200:

7.15.4

PSPPPAM function block

Signals
Table 182:
Name

PSPPPAM Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Current group connection

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage group connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKGEN

BOOLEAN

Block operation in generating direction

BLKMOTOR

BOOLEAN

Block operation in motor direction

EXTZONE1

BOOLEAN

Extension of zone1 with zone2 region

Table 183:
Name

PSPPPAM Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TRIP1

BOOLEAN

Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1

TRIP2

BOOLEAN

Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2

START

BOOLEAN

Common start signal

ZONE1

BOOLEAN

First slip in zone1 region

ZONE2

BOOLEAN

First slip in zone2 region

GEN

BOOLEAN

Generator is faster than the system

MOTOR

BOOLEAN

Generator is slower than the system

SFREQ

REAL

Slip frequency

SLIPZOHM

REAL

Slip impedance in ohms

SLIPZPER

REAL

Slip impedance in percent of ZBase

UCOS

REAL

UCosPhi voltage

UCOSPER

REAL

UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase

397
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.15.5
Table 184:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
PSPPPAM Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation On / Off

OperationZ1

Off
On

On

Operation Zone1 On / Off

OperationZ2

Off
On

On

Operation Zone2 On / Off

ImpedanceZA

0.00 - 1000.00

0.01

10.00

Forward impedance in % of Zbase

ImpedanceZB

0.00 - 1000.00

0.01

10.00

Reverse impedance in % of Zbase

ImpedanceZC

0.00 - 1000.00

0.01

10.00

Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase

AnglePhi

72.00 - 90.00

Deg

0.01

85.00

Angle of the slip impedance line

StartAngle

0.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

110.0

Rotor angle for the start signal

TripAngle

0.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

90.0

Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals

N1Limit

1 - 20

Count limit for the trip1 signal

N2Limit

1 - 20

Count limit for the trip2 signal

Table 185:
Name
ResetTime

Table 186:
Name

PSPPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
5.000

Description
Time without slip to reset all signals

PSPPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MeasureMode

PosSeq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1

PosSeq

Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,

L3L1)

InvertCTcurr

No
Yes

No

Invert current direction

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

398
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.15.6

Monitored data
Table 187:
Name

7.15.7

PSPPPAM Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

SFREQ

REAL

Hz

Slip frequency

SLIPZOHM

REAL

Ohm

Slip impedance in ohms

SLIPZPER

REAL

Slip impedance in
percent of ZBase

UCOS

REAL

kV

UCosPhi voltage

UCOSPER

REAL

UCosPhi voltage in
percent of UBase

Operation principle
If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the
impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signaled. If
the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to
right and motoring is signaled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a
motor).
The movements in the impedance plane can be seen in Figure 201. The transient
behavior is described by the transient EMF's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.

399
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Zone 1
EB

Zone 2

Xd

XT

XS

IED

EA

jX

A
XS

Pole slip
impedance
movement

XT

Apparent generator
impedance

Xd
B

IEC06000437_2_en.vsd
IEC06000437 V2 EN

Figure 201:

Movements in the impedance plain

where:
X'd

= transient reactance of the generator

XT

= short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer

ZS

= impedance of the power system A

The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:

the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase
the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an
angular velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
the corresponding direction is not blocked.

400
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN

Figure 202:

Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the

equivalent generators

An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle
exceeds the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.
Slipping is detected when:

a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.

When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in
zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone
1 when signal EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the
centre of slipping).
After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and depending on the direction
of slip - either GEN or MOTOR are issued.
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line
is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of
rotor movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is
crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite
direction within ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.

401
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated
after N2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.
All signals are reset if:

the direction of movement reverses

the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime.

Imin > 0.10 IBase

Ucosj < 0.92 UBase

AND
START

AND

0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz

d startAngle
ZONE1

AND

Z cross line ZA - ZC

ZONE2

AND

Z cross line ZC - ZB

Counter
N1Limit

a
b

ab

TRIP1

AND

d tripAngle

OR
Counter

N2Limit

a
b ab

TRIP

TRIP2

AND

en07000005.vsd
IEC07000005 V1 EN

Figure 203:

7.15.8

Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection PSPPPAM

Technical data
Table 188:

PSPPPAM technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Impedance reach

(0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase

2.0% of Ur/Ir

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters

(1 - 20)

402
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.16

Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM

7.16.1

Identification
Function description
Out-of-step protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

OOSPPAM

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
78

<

7.16.2

Functionality
The out-of-step protection OOSPPAM function in the IED can be used for both
generator protection and as well for line protection applications.
The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect, evaluate, and take the
required action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system.
The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and trips the generator as fast
as possible, after the first pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in zone
1, which normally includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the
center of oscillation is found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, more
than one pole-slip is usually allowed before the generator-transformer unit is
disconnected. A parameter setting is available to take into account the circuit
breaker opening time. If there are several out-of-step relays in the power system,
then the one which finds the center of oscillation in its zone 1 should operate first.
Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in OOSPPAM function to allow
the direct connection of two groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for
very powerful generators, with stator windings split into two groups per phase,
when each group is equipped with current transformers. The protection function
performs a simple summation of the currents of the two channels I3P1 and I3P2.

7.16.3

Function block
OOSPPAM
I3P1*
I3P2*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKGEN
BLKMOT
EXTZ1

TRIP
TRIPZ1
TRIPZ2
START
GENMODE
MOTMODE
R
X
SLIPFREQ
ROTORANG
UCOSPHI

IEC12000188-3-en.vsd
IEC12000188 V3 EN

Figure 204:

OOSPPAM function block

403

Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.16.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 189:
Name

OOSPPAM Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for three-phase current input 1

I3P2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for three-phase current input 2

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for three-phase voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKGEN

BOOLEAN

Block operation in generating direction

BLKMOT

BOOLEAN

Block operation in motor direction

EXTZ1

BOOLEAN

Extension of zone1 reach to zone2 settings

Table 190:
Name

OOSPPAM Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip, issued when either zone 1 or zone

2 give trip

TRIPZ1

BOOLEAN

Zone 1 trip

TRIPZ2

BOOLEAN

Zone 2 trip

START

BOOLEAN

Set when measured impedance enters lens

characteristic

GENMODE

BOOLEAN

Generator rotates faster than the system during

pole slip

MOTMODE

BOOLEAN

Generator rotates slower than the system during

pole slip

REAL

Real part of measured positive-sequence

impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)

REAL

Imaginary part of measured positive-seq

impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)

SLIPFREQ

REAL

Slip frequency in Hz

ROTORANG

REAL

Rotor angle as estimated by the out-of-step

function

UCOSPHI

REAL

Estimated Ucos(Phi) voltage during pole slip, in V

404
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.16.5
Table 191:
Name

Settings
OOSPPAM Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationZ1

Off
On

On

Operation Zone1 Off / On

ReachZ1

1.00 - 100.00

% ZFw

0.01

50.00

Percentage part of total forward

impedance; defines Z1 reach

OperationZ2

Off
On

On

Operation Zone2 Off / On

tBreaker

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

0.040

Breaker opening time; use default 0s

value if it is unknown

Table 192:
Name

OOSPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

NoOfSlipsZ1

1 - 20

Number of pole-slips in zone 1 required

to get zone 1 trip

NoOfSlipsZ2

1 - 60

Number of pole-slips in zone 2 required

to get zone 2 trip

tReset

1.000 - 60.000

0.001

6.000

Time without any slip required to

completely reset function

Table 193:
Name

OOSPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

ForwardR

0.00 - 1000.00

%ZB

0.01

1.00

Real part of total forward impedance for

Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)

ForwardX

0.00 - 1000.00

%ZB

0.01

10.00

Imag. part of total forward impedance for

Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)

ReverseR

0.00 - 1000.00

%ZB

0.01

1.00

Real part of source impedance behind

relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)

ReverseX

0.00 - 1000.00

%ZB

0.01

10.00

Imag. part of source impedance behind

relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)

InvertCTCurr

No
Yes

No

Invert current direction

Table 194:
Name

OOSPPAM Non group settings (advanced)

Step

Default

StartAngle

Values (Range)
90.0 - 130.0

Unit
Deg

0.1

110.0

Description
Angle between two rotors to get the start
signal, in deg

TripAngle

15.0 - 90.0

Deg

0.1

60.0

Maximum rotor angle to allow trip

signals, in deg

405
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.16.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Monitored data
Table 195:
Name

7.16.7

OOSPPAM Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CURRENT

REAL

Magnitude of the
measured positivesequence current, in A

VOLTAGE

REAL

kV

Magnitude of the
measured positivesequence voltage, in V

REAL

Real part of measured

positive-sequence
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)

REAL

Imaginary part of
measured positive-seq
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)

SLIPFREQ

REAL

Hz

Slip frequency in Hz

ROTORANG

REAL

deg

Rotor angle as estimated

by the out-of-step
function

UCOSPHI

REAL

kV

Estimated Ucos(Phi)
voltage during pole slip,
in V

Operation principle
General
Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor
angle (power angle), delivering active electrical power to the power system, which
is approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis.The
currents and voltages are constant and stable. An out-of-step condition is
characterized by periodic changes in the rotor angle, that leads to a wild flow of the
synchronizing power; so there are also periodic changes of rotational speed,
currents and voltages. When displayed in the complex impedance plane, these
changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the complex load impedance Z(R,
X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or at the location of the
instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power subsystems. This is
shown in Figure 205.

406
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

1.5

trajectory

of Z(R, X)

The 2nd
pole slip
occurred

The 1st
pole slip
occurred

X in Ohms

to the 3rd
pole-slip

Pre-disturbance
RE
normal load
- - - ----------- - - - Z(R, X)
------Zone 2
3 ---1 ----0
-- 2
--^ --^ ^ ^ ^ --^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
-Zone 1
------- relay
----R in Ohms
limit of reach ------- - ----- ------ 0- - - pre-disturbance Z(R, X)
lens determined

- -- - - - -by the setting

1 Z(R, X) under 3-phase fault
StartAngle = 120
SE
2 Z(R, X) when fault cleared

0.5

-0.5

3 Z when pole-slip declared

-1

-1.5

-1

-0.5
0
0.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms

1.5
IEC10000109-1-en.vsd

IEC10000109 V1 EN

Figure 205:

Loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for a typical case of

generator losing step after a short circuit that was not cleared fast
enough

Under typical, normal load conditions, when the protected generator supplies the
active and the reactive power to the power system, the complex impedance Z(R, X)
is in the 1st quadrant, point 0 in Figure 205. One can see that under a three-phase
fault conditions, the centre of oscillation is at the point of fault, point 1, which is
logical, as all three voltages are zero or near zero at that point. Under the fault
conditions the generator accelerated and when the fault was finally cleared, the
complex impedance Z(R, X) jumped to the point 2. By that time, the generator has
already lost its step, Z(R, X) continues its way from the right-hand side to the lefthand side, and the 1st pole-slip cannot be avoided. If the generator is not
immediately disconnected, it will continue pole-slipping see Figure 205, where
two pole-slips (two pole-slip cycles) are shown. Under out-of-step conditions, the
centre of oscillation is where the locus of the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses
the (impedance) line connecting the points SE (Sending End), and RE (Receiving
End). The point on the SE RE line where the trajectory of Z(R, X) crosses the
impedance line can change with time and is mainly a function of the internal
induced voltages at both ends of the equivalent two-machine system, that is, at
points SE and RE.
Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance
relative to a generators terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable
means of detecting whether machines are out-of-step and pole-slipping is taking
place. Measurement of the rotor (power) angle is important as well.
Rotor (power) angle can be thought of as the angle between the two lines,
connecting point 0 in Figure 205, that is, Z(R, X) under normal load, with the

407
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

points SE and RE, respectively. These two lines are not shown in Figure 205.
Normal values of the power angle, that is, under stable, steady-state, load
conditions, are from 30 to 60 electrical degrees. It can be observed in Figure 206
that the angle reaches 180 degrees when the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses
the impedance line SE RE. It then changes the sign, and continues from -180
degrees to 0 degrees, and so on. Figure 206 shows the rotor (power) angle and the
magnitude of Z(R, X) against time for the case from Figure 205.

Impe dance Z in Ohm and rotor a ngle in radian

4
3

|Z| in Ohms
angle in rad

normal
load

rotor (power)
angle

Z(R, X) unde r fa ult lies

on the impe dance line
or nea r (for 3-ph faults )

|Z|

0
0
fault 500 ms
fa ult
occ urrs

-1

Unde r 3-pha s e fa ult

condition rotor a ngle
of a pp. 180 de gre e s
is m e a s ure d ...

-2

3
2

-3

1
-4

200

400

Z(R,X) cros s e d
the im pe da nce line , Z-line ,
conne cting points S E - RE

600
800
1000
Time in millis econds

1200

1400

IEC10000110-2-en.vsd
IEC10000110 V2 EN

Figure 206:

Rotor (power) angle and magnitude of the complex impedance

Z(R, X) against the time

In order to be able to fully understand the principles of OOSPPAM, a stable case,

that is, a case where the disturbance does not make a generator to go out-of-step,
must be shown.

408
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

SE

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

0.8

RE

G
relay

0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6

this circle forms

the right-hand side
edge of the lens

-0.8
-1

Z(R,X) 20 ms
after line out

fault

- - - - - RE
- ----- ----- 4 - ---zone 2 - ------ 2
---1
------ fault
-3
X-line ^ -^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^
^
^
^ ^ ^ ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
----- Z-line
--------limit of
-- relay
lens -reach
-110 -----zone 1- ------------ ------- ---- - -- - - -- - SE

0.6

-1

X [Ohm]

-0.5

pre-fault
Z(R,X)
5
0

0 pre-fault Z(R, X)
3 Z(R, X) under fault
5 Z 20 ms after line out
6 pow er line reclosed

0
0.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms

1.5

IEC10000111-1-en.vsd

IEC10000111 V1 EN

Figure 207:

A stable case where the disturbance does not make the generator
to go out-of-step

It shall be observed that for a stable case, as shown in Figure 207, where the
disturbance does not cause the generator to lose step, the complex impedance Z(R,
X) exits the lens characteristic on the same side (point 4) it entered it (point 2), and
never re-enters the lens. In a stable case, where the protected generator remains in
synchronism, the complex impedance returns to quadrant 1, and, after the
oscillations fade, it returns to the initial normal load position (point 0), or near.

7.16.7.1

Lens characteristic
A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that
the power system in which OOSPPAM is installed, is modeled as a two-machine
equivalent system, or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system.
Then the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM in the direction of the
normal load flow (that is from the measurement point to the remote system) can be
taken as forward. The lens characteristic, as shown in Figure205 and Figure207, is
obtained so that two equal in size but differently offset Mho characteristics are set
to overlap. The resultant lens characteristic is the loci of complex impedance Z(R,
X) for which the rotor (power) angle is constant, for example 110 degrees or 120
degrees; if the rotor (power) angle approaches this value, then there is a high risk to
have an out of step condition. The limit-of- reach circle is constructed
automatically by the algorithm; it is about 10% wider than the the circle that has
the line SE-RE as diameter (that is the out-of-step characteristic which corresponds
to the rotor (power) angle of 90 degrees). Figure 208 illustrates construction of the
lens characteristic for a power system.

409
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

0.6
0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6

X
Position of the OOS
- RE
- - - - relay is the origin of
-- - -- ----the R - X plane
---- Ze
-- Zone 2
-X-line
---determined
-- Zline
--by the ^ ^- ^
^ ^ ^-- ^
setting
^ ^ ^ ^
^ ^ ^ --- ^
-ReachZ1
^ ^ ^--Ztr
R
----- Zone 1 -relay
-120 -- Z(R,X)
---Z-line --
-- Zgen
----limit-of-reach - locus
-- Lens is the
---
-circle depends on -of
constant
rotor (power)
---the position of the
- e.g. 120.
-- - --angle,
- points SE and RE
- - -- - - - - - -Lens' width determined
SE
by the setting StartAngle
-0.8

-0.6

-0.4

-0.2
0
0.2
0.4
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms

0.6

0.8

IEC10000112-1-en.vsd
IEC10000112 V1 EN

Figure 208:

Construction of the lens characteristic for a power system

ReverseZ
ReverseZ(ReverseR,
ReverseX))
Zgen(Rgen , Xgen)

ForwardZ(ForwardR, ForwardX)

Ztr(Rtr, Xtr)

Generator
13.8 kV

Zline(Rline, Xline)

Infinite power
system

Transformer
13.8 / 220 kV
13.8 kV

Zeq(Req, Xeq)

Power line
220 kV

System
equivalent

SE

REG

RE
Out-Of-Step
protection
OOSPPAM

ReverseR = Rg
ReverseX = Xd

ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req

ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq

All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13.8 kV

IEC10000113-2-en.vsd

IEC10000113 V2 EN

Figure 209:

Example of an actual power system

To be able to automatically construct the lens characteristic for a system shown in

Figure 209, the actual power system must be modeled as a two-machine equivalent
system, or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent system, the following
information is necessary: Zgen(Rgen, Xgen), Ztr(Rtr, Xtr), Zline(Rline, Xline),
Zeq(Req, Xeq), and the setting StartAngle , for example 120 degrees. All
impedances must be referred to the voltage level where the out-of-step protection
relay is placed; in the case shown in Figure 209 the relay is connected to the
terminals of the generator and, therefore, the previous quantities shall be referred to
410
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

the generator nominal voltage and nominal current. The impedances from the
position of the out-of-step protection in the direction of the normal load flow can
be taken as forward.
The out-of-step relay, as in Figure 209 looks into the system and the impedances in
that direction are forward impedances:

ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq (All values referred to generator voltage)

ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req (All values referred to generator voltage)

The impedances that can be measured in the reverse direction are:

ReverseX = Xd' (Generator transient reactance suitable for this protection)

ReverseR = Rg (Relatively very small, can often be neglected)

Resistances are much smaller than reactances, but in general can not be neglected.
The ratio (ForwardX + ReverseX) / (ForwardR + ReverseR) determines the
inclination of the Z-line, connecting the point SE (Sending End) and RE
(Receiving End), and is typically approximately 85 degrees. While the length of the
Z-line depends on the values of ForwardX, ReverseX, ForwardR, and ReverseR,
the width of the lens is a function of the setting StartAngle .The lens is broader for
smaller values of the StartAngle , and becomes a circle for StartAngle = 90 degrees.
When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens, pole slipping is imminent,
and a start signal is issued. The angle recommended to form the lens is 110 or 120
degrees, because it is this rotor (power) angle where problems with dynamic
stability usually begin. Rotor (power) angle 120 degrees is sometimes called the
angle of no return because if this angle is reached under generator power swings,
the generator is most likely to lose step.

7.16.7.2

Detecting an out-of-step condition

An out-of-step condition is characterized by periodic changes of the rotor angle,
that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing power; so there are also periodic
changes of rotational speed, currents and voltages. When displayed in the complex
impedance plane, these changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the
complex load impedance Z(R, X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or
at the location of the instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power
sub-systems. This was shown in Figure 205. When a synchronous machine is out-ofstep, pole-slips occur. To recognize a pole-slip, the complex impedance Z(R,X)
must traverse the lens from right to left in case of a generator and in the opposite
direction in case of a motor. Another requirement is that the travel across the lens
takes no less than a specific minimum traverse time, typically 40...60 milliseconds.
The above timing is used to discriminate a fault from an out-of-step condition. In
Figure 205, some important points on the trajectory of Z(R, X) are designated.
Point 0: the pre-fault, normal load Z(R, X). Point 1: impedance Z under a threephase fault with low fault resistance: Z lies practically on, or very near, the Z-line.
Transition of the measured Z from point 0 to point 1 takes app. 20 ms, due to
Fourier filters. Point 2: Z immediately after the fault has been cleared. Transition of
411

Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

the measured Z from point 1 to point 2 takes approximately 20 ms, due to Fourier
filters. The complex impedance then travels in the direction from the right to the
left, and exits the lens on the opposite side. When the complex impedance exits the
lens on the side opposite to its entrance, the 1st pole-slip has already occurred and
more pole-slips can be expected if the generator is not disconnected. Figure 205
shows two pole-slips. Figures like Figure 205 and Figure 207 are always possible
to draw by means of the analog output data from the pole-slip function, and are of
great help with eventual investigations of the performance of the out-of-step function.

7.16.7.3

Maximum slip frequency

A pole-slip may be detected if it has a slip frequency lower than a maximum value
fsMax. The specific value of fsMax depends on the setting (parameter) StartAngle
(which determines the width of the lens characteristic). A parameter in this
calculation routine is the value of the minimum traverse time, traverseTimeMin.
The minimum traverse time is the minimum time that the travel of the complex
impedance Z(R, X) through the lens, from one side to the other, must last in order
to recognize that a pole-slip has occurred. The value of the internal constant
traverseTimeMin is a function of the set StartAngle.For values of StartAngle <=
110, traverseTimeMin = 50 ms. For values StartAngle > 110, traverseTimeMin =
40 ms. The expression which relates the maximum slip frequency fsMax and the
traverseTimeMin is as follows:
fsMax [ Hz ]

StartAngle []
1000
1.000

traverseTimeMin [ ms ]
180 []

(Equation 104)

IECEQUATION2319 V1 EN

The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 50 ms is:

StartAngle = 90 fsMax = 20 0.500 = 10.000 Hz
StartAngle = 100 fsMax = 20 0.444 = 8.888 Hz
StartAngle = 110 fsMax = 20 0.388 = 7.777 Hz

(default 110)

The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 40 ms is:

StartAngle = 120 fsMax = 25 0.333 = 8.333 Hz
StartAngle = 130 fsMax = 25 0.277 = 6.944 Hz

The minimum value of fsMax is 6.994 Hz. When StartAngle = 110 degrees, fsMax
= 7.777 Hz. This implies, that the default StartAngle = 110 degrees covers 90% of
cases as, the typical final slip frequency is between 2 - 5Hz. In practice, however,
before the slip frequency, for example 7.777 Hz, is reached, at least three pole-slips
have occurred. In other words, if we consider a linear increase of frequency from
50 Hz to 57.777 Hz, at least three pole-slips will occur (in fact: (57.777 - 50) / 2 =
3.889). The exact instantaneous slip-frequency expressed in Hz (corresponding to
number of pole slips per second) is difficult to calculate. The easiest and most
412
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

exact method is to measure time between two successive pole slips. This means
that, the instantaneous slip-frequency is measured only after the second pole-slip, if
the protected machine is not already disconnected after the first pole-slip. The
measured value of slipsPerSecond (SLIPFREQ) is equal to the average slipfrequency of the machine between the last two successive pole-slips.

7.16.7.4

Taking care of the circuit breaker

Although out-of-step events are relatively rare, the out-of-step protection should
take care of the circuit breaker health. The electromechanical stress to which the
breaker is exposed shall be minimized. The maximum currents flowing under out-ofstep conditions can be even greater that those for a three-phase short circuit on
generator terminals; see Figure 211. The currents flowing are highest at rotor angle
180 degrees, and smallest at 0 degrees, where relatively small currents flow. To
open the circuit breaker at 180 degrees, when not only the currents are highest, but
the two internal (that is, induced) voltages at both ends are in opposition, could be
fatal for the circuit breaker. There are two methods available in order to minimize
the stress; the second method is more advanced than the first one.

The first method

The circuit breaker is only allowed to break the current when the rotor angle has
become less than the set value TripAngle, on its way to 0 electrical degrees. A
recommended value for the setting TripAngle is 90 degrees or less, for example 60
degrees. Figure 210 illustrates the case with TripAngle = 90 degrees. The offset
Mho circle represents loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the rotor
(power) angle is 90 degrees. If the circuit breaker must not open before the rotor
angle has reached 90 degrees on its way towards 0 degrees, then it is clear that the
circle delimits the R X plane into a no trip and a trip region. For TripAngle =
90 degrees, the trip command will be issued at point 3 when the complex
impedance Z(R, X) exits the circle. By that time the relay logic had already
ascertained the loss of step, and the general decision to trip the generator has
already been taken.

The second method

This method is more exact. If the break-time of the circuit breaker is known, (and
specified as the setting tBreaker) than it is possible to initiate a trip (break)
command almost exactly tBreaker milliseconds before the rotor (power) angle
reaches 0 degrees, where the currents are at their minimum possible values. The
breaker contacts open at almost exactly 0 degrees, as illustrated in Figure 211 for
tBreaker = 0.060 s. The point in time when the breaker opening process must be
initiated is estimated by solving on-line the so called synchronizer differential
equation. Note that if tBreaker is left on the initial (default) value, which is zero
(0), then the alternative setting TripAngle decides when the trip command is given.
If specified tBreaker > 0, for example tBreaker = 0.040 second, then automatically,
the TripAngle is ignored and the second, more exact method applied.

413
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

0.6

trip
region

0.4

3
here rotor
angle
is -90

0.2

X[Ohm]

loci of Z(R, X)
no trip
region
no trip
region

-0.6

here
rotor angle
is +90

-0.4

rotor angle
= 180

relay

R[Ohm]

Z - line connects
points SE & RE

this circle

is loci of
the rotor
angle = 90

outside the
circle is the trip
region for
TripAngle <= 90

-0.4

1
2

no trip
region
inside
circle

-0.2

RE - Receiving End (infinite bus)

SE - Sending End (generator)

-0.2
0
0.2
0.4
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms

0.6

0.8

IEC10000114-1-en.vsd
IEC10000114 V1 EN

Figure 210:

The imaginary offset Mho circle represents loci of the impedance

Z(R, X) for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees

Current in kA, trip command to CB, rotor angle in rad

35

very high currents due

to out-of-step condition

pos. seq. current in kA

trip command to CB

30

rotor angle in radian

fault cleared

25

2nd

20

current increases under

fault conditions
current decreases

15
fault
occurs

10
5

trip command
issued here
normal load current

min. current
tBreaker = 60 ms

rotor angle

0
-5

after 1st
pole slip

angle towards 0
0

200

400
600
800
Time in milliseconds

1000

1200

IEC10000115-1-en.vsd
IEC10000115 V1 EN

Figure 211:

Trip initiation when the break-time of the circuit breaker is known

414
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.16.7.5

Design
At every execution of the function the following is calculated: active power P,
reactive power Q, rotor angle ROTORANG, quantity UCOSPHI, the positivesequence current CURRENT and voltage VOLTAGE. All other quantities, that can as
well be read as outputs, are only calculated if the Z(R, X) enters the limit of reach
zone, which is a circle in the complex (R X) plane. When the complex impedance
Z(R, X) enters the limit-of-reach region, the algorithm:

determines in which direction the impedance Z moves, that is, the direction the
lens is traversed
measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the other one

If the traverse time is more than the limit 40 or 50 ms, a pole-slip is declared. If the
complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens on the same side it entered, then it is a
stable case and the protected machine is still in synchronism. If a pole-slip has been
detected, then it is determined in which zone the centre of oscillation is located. If
the number of actual pole-slips exceeds the maximum number of allowed poleslips in either of the zones, a trip command is issued taking care of the circuit
breaker safety.
UPSRE
UPSIM
UPSMAG
IPSRE
IPSIM

R
X

Calculation of
R and X parts
of the complex
positivesequence
impedance
Z(R, X)

R
X

Z(R,X)
Z(R,X)
within limit of
reach?

NO

Return

YES
Z(R,X)
within lens
characteristic?

UCOSPHI
NO

ROTORANG
Function alert
SLIPFREQ

YES
LEFT
Motor losing
step ?

Calculation of
positive- sequence
active power P,
reactive power Q,
rotor angle
ROTORANG
and
UCOSPHI

Z(R,X)
entered lens
from?

GENMODE
Z(R,X)
RIGHT
exited lens
on the left- hand
side?
Generator losing
step ?
YES
Was
traverse time
more than
50 ms?

ROTORANG

NO

YES (pole- slip!)

UCOSPHI

MOTMODE

NO

ZONE 2

>= 1

Number
of pole- slips
exceeded in
a zone?

TRIP

NO

ZONE 1

Open
circuit
breaker
safely

TRIPZ1
TRIPZ2

IEC10000116-3-en.vsd
IEC10000116 V3 EN

Figure 212:

OOSPPAM Simplified function block

415
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.16.8

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 196:

OOSPPAM technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Impedance reach

(0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase

2.0% of Ur/(3 Ir)

Rotor start angle

(90.0 - 130.0) degrees

5.0 degrees

Rotor trip angle

(15.0 - 90.0) degrees

5.0 degrees

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters

(1 - 20)

7.17

Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ

7.17.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Phase preference logic

7.17.2

PPLPHIZ

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is intended to be used in isolated or high
impedance earthed networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the
faulty lines at cross-country fault.
Phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single phase-to-earth faults in isolated
and high impedance earthed networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by
distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or
the lagging phase-earth loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred
fault based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase
preference combinations are available for selection.

7.17.3

Function block
PPLPHIZ
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
RELL1N
RELL2N
RELL3N
STCND

START
ZREL

IEC07000029-2-en.vsd
IEC07000029 V2 EN

Figure 213:

7.17.4

PPLPHIZ function block

Signals

416
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 197:

PPLPHIZ Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

RELL1N

BOOLEAN

Release condition for the L1 to earth loop

RELL2N

BOOLEAN

Release condition for the L2 to earth loop

RELL3N

BOOLEAN

Release condition for the L3 to earth loop

STCND

INTEGER

Integer coded external release signals

PPLPHIZ Output signals

Name

Table 199:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 198:

7.17.5

Default

Type

Description

START

BOOLEAN

Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of

direction

ZREL

INTEGER

Integer coded output release signal

Settings
PPLPHIZ Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OperMode

No Filter
NoPref
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a

No Filter

Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)

UPN<

0 - 100

%UB

70

Operate value of phase undervoltage in

% of UBase/sqrt(3)

UPP<

0 - 100

%UB

50

Operate value of line to line

undervoltage (% of UBase)

3U0>

5 - 300

%UB

20

Operate value of residual voltage in % of

UBase/sqrt(3)

IN>

10 - 200

%IB

20

Operate value of residual current (% of

IBase)

tUN

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Pickup-delay for residual voltage

tOffUN

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Dropoff-delay for residual voltage

tIN

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Pickup-delay for residual current

417
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 200:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

7.17.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

PPLPHIZ Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Operation principle
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ has 10 operation modes, which can be set by the
parameter OperMode. The different modes and their explanation are shown in
table 201 below. The difference between cyclic and acyclic operation can be
explained by the following example. Assume a L1 fault on one line and a L3 fault
on another line. For OperMode = 1231c the line with L3 fault will be tripped (L3
before L1) while for OperMode = 123a the line with L1 1 fault will be tripped (L1
before L3).
Table 201:
OperMode

Operation modes for Phase preference logic

Description

No filter

No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-toearth faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at crosscountry faults

No pref

No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-earth faults, trip is allowed

without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault

1231 c

Cyclic 1231c; L1 before L2 before L3 before L1

1321 c

Cyclic 1321c; L1 before L3 before L2 before L1

123 a

Acyclic 123a; L1 before L2before L3

132 a

Acyclic 132a; L1 before L3 before L2

213 a

Acyclic 213a; L2 before L1 before L3

231 a

Acyclic 231a; L2 before L3 before L1

312 a

Acyclic 312a; L3 before L1 before L2

321 a

Acyclic 321a; L3 before L2 before L1

The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled voltage and current
discrimination and the second one labeled phase preference evaluation, see
figure 214.
The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty
phases and to determine if there is a cross-country fault. If cross-country fault is
detected, an internal signal Detected cross-country fault is created and sent to the
phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the
condition for trip.
The voltage and current discrimination part gives phase segregated start signals if
the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting parameter UPN< at the
same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting parameter 3U0>. If
there is a start in any phase the START output signal will be activated.

418
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The internal signal for detection of cross-country fault, DetectCrossCountry, that

come from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be
achieved in three different ways:
1.
2.

3.

The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> for a time
longer than the setting of pick-up timer tIN.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> at the same
time as the magnitude of 3U0 has been above the setting parameter 3U0>
during a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tUN.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> at the same
time as one of the following conditions are fulfilled:

the measured phase-to-phase voltage in at least one of the phase

combinations has been below the setting parameter UPP< for more than
20 ms.
At least two of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter UPN<
for more than 20 ms.

The second part, phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal
DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the
input signal STCND together with phase selection start condition (from phase
selection functions) connected to input STCND, and the information from the
setting parameter OperMode are used to determine the condition for trip. To
release the Phase preference logic, at least two out of three phases must be faulty.
The fault classification whether it is a single phase-to-earth, two-phase or crosscountry fault and which phase to be tripped at cross-country fault is converted into
a binary coded signal and sent to the distance protection measuring zone to release
the correct measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode. This is done by
activating the output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input STCND on the
distance zone measuring element.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STCND =
L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32. Example: if only
L1N start the value is 1, if start L1N and L3N are choosen, the value is 1+4=5.
The release signals from phase selection will only be gated with the cross-country
check from IN and UN but without time delay. If no phase selection start has
occurred, the release is based on current and voltage discriminating part only.
The input signal STCND consist of binary information of fault type and is
connected to the output STCND on phase selection function. The fault must be
activated in at least two phases to be classified as a cross-country fault in the phase
preference part of the logic.
The input signals RELxxx are additional fault release signals that can be connected
to external protection functions through binary input.
The output START and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK

419
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UL1
UL2
UL3

UL1UL2
UL2UL3
UL3UL1
IN

Voltage and
Current
Discrimination

UN
UPN<

START

AND

UPP<
IN>

Detect CrossCountry fault

UN0>

OperMode
RELL1N
RELL2N

Phase Preference
Evaluation

ZREL

AND

RELL3N
STCND

BLOCK

IEC09000220_1_en.vsd
IEC09000220 V2 EN

Figure 214:

Simplified block diagram for Phase preference logic

Table 202:

PPLPHIZ technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage

(1 - 100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, undervoltage

< 105%

Operate value, residual voltage

(5 - 300)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur for U
Ur
0.5% of U for U
> Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage

> 95%

Operate value, residual current

(10 - 200)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir for I
Ir
1.0% of I for I >
Ir

Reset ratio, residual current

> 95%

Independent time delay for

residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.000 - 60.000) s

0.2% or 25 ms
whichever is
greater

Table continues on next page

420
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Independent time delay for

residual voltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Uset

(0.000 - 60.000) s

0.2% or 25 ms
whichever is
greater

Independent dropoff-delay for

residual voltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x
Uset

(0.000 - 60.000) s

0.2% or 25 ms
whichever is
greater

Operating mode

No Filter, NoPref
Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a

7.18

Under impedance protection for generators and

transformers ZGVPDIS

7.18.1

Identification
Function description
Under impedance function for
generators and transformers

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZGVPDIS

ANSI/
IEEEidentification
21G

S00346 V1 EN

7.18.2

Functionality
The under impedance protection is a three zone full scheme impedance protection
using offset mho characteristics for detecting faults in the generator, generatortransformer and transmission system. The three zones have fully independent
measuring loops and settings. The functionality also comprises an under voltage sealin feature to ensure issuing of a trip even if the current transformer goes into
saturation and, in addition, the positive-sequence-based load encroachment feature
for the second and the third impedance zone. Built-in compensation for the step-up
transformer vector group connection is available.

421
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection
7.18.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
ZGVPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKUV

TRIP
TRZ1
TRZ2
TRZ3
TRUV
START
STZ1
STZ2
STZ3
STUV
IEC14000018-1-en.vsd

IEC14000018 V1 EN

Figure 215:

7.18.4

ZGVPDIS function block

Signals
Table 203:
Name

ZGVPDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for current sample signals

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for voltage sample signals

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of the function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Block due to fuse failure

BLKUV

BOOLEAN

Block of the under voltage seal in

Table 204:
Name

ZGVPDIS Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip

TRZ1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal Zone 1

TRZ2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal Zone 2

TRZ3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal Zone 3

TRUV

BOOLEAN

Trip from Under voltage seal in

START

BOOLEAN

General start

STZ1

BOOLEAN

Start signal Zone 1

STZ2

BOOLEAN

Start signal Zone 2

STZ3

BOOLEAN

Start signal Zone 3

STUV

BOOLEAN

Start of under voltage seal in

422
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

7.18.5
Table 205:
Name

Settings
ZGVPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

ImpedanceAng

5 - 90

Deg

80

Impedance angle in degrees, common

for all zones

IMinOp

5 - 80

%IB

10

Minimum operate phase current

OpModeZ1

Off
PP Loops

PP Loops

Operation mode of Zone 1: Off/Ph-Ph

loops

Z1Fwd

3.0 - 100.0

% Zb

0.1

8.0

Zone 1 forward reach in % of rated

impedance, 100%=full load

Z1Rev

3.0 - 100.0

% Zb

0.1

8.0

Zone 1 reverse reach in % of rated

impedance, 100%=full load

tZ1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to operate for Zone 1

OpModeZ2

Off
PP Loops
EnhancedReach

EnhancedReach

Operation mode of Zone 2: Off/Ph-Ph/

EnhancedReach

Z2Fwd

3.0 - 200.0

% Zb

0.1

15.0

Zone 2 forward reach in % of rated

impedance, 100%=full load

Z2Rev

3.0 - 200.0

% Zb

0.1

8.0

Zone 2 reverse reach in % of rated

impedance, 100%=full load

tZ2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.500

Time delay to operate for Zone 2

OpModeZ3

Off
PP Loops
EnhancedReach

EnhancedReach

Operation mode of Zone 3: Off/Ph-Ph/

EnhancedReach

Z3Fwd

3.0 - 200.0

% Zb

0.1

75.0

Zone 3 forward reach in % of rated

impedance, 100%=full load

Z3Rev

3.0 - 200.0

% Zb

0.1

8.0

Zone 3 reverse reach in % of rated

impedance, 100%=full load

tZ3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.500

Time delay to operate for Zone 3

OpModeU<

Off
Z2Start
Z3Start

Off

Enable under voltage seal in (Off/Z2Start/

Z3Start)

U<

5 - 90

%UB

70

Start value of under voltage seal in

tU<

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Time delay to operate for under voltage

seal in

Table 206:
Name

ZGVPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

RLd

5 - 120

% Zb

50

Resistive reach in % for load

encroachment charateristics

ArgLd

5 - 85

Deg

38

Load encroachment inclination of load

angular sector

LoadEnchModZ2

Off
On

Off

Enable load encroachement for Zone 2

Off/On

LoadEnchModZ3

Off
On

On

Enable load encroachement for Zone 3

Off/On
423

Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 207:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

7.18.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ZGVPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

1 - 12

Step

Description

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

Monitored data
Table 208:

ZGVPDIS Monitored data

Name

7.18.7

Default

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UL1

REAL

kV

Voltage in phase L1

UL2

REAL

kV

Voltage in phase L2

UL3

REAL

kV

Voltage in phase L3

IL1

REAL

Current in phase L1

IL2

REAL

Current in phase L2

IL3

REAL

Current in phase L3

Operation principle
The full scheme backup distance element constitutes of three operating zones.
Zone1 has only the phase-to-phase loops enabled. Zone2 and zone3 can be selected
for phase to-phase or Enhanced reach loop. Each measuring loop use the offset
mho characteristic
The base value of impedance can be calculated according to equation 105.
ZBase =

UBase
3 IBase
(Equation 105)

IECEQUATION1400024 V1 EN

Where,

ZBase

is the base value of impedance

UBase

is the line-to-line voltage rating at the generator terminal

IBase

is the line current rating at the generator terminal

The minimum operating current is provided using the setting IMinOp.

All the outputs will be blocked by activation of the BLOCK or BLKZ input.

Offset mho characteristic

ZGVPDIS consists of three distance elements operated for three zones separately.
Each zone consists of measuring loops which uses self-polarized offset mho
characteristics with both forward and reverse reach settings for the detection of the

424
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

fault in the respective zone. The operating characteristics of all the three zones are
shown in Figure 216. The ImpedanceAngle setting is common to all three zones.
jX

Offset Mho, Zone3

Offset Mho, Zone2

Offset Mho, Zone1
ImpedanceAng
R

IEC11000294-2-en.vsd
IEC11000294 V2 EN

Figure 216:

Offset mho characteristics of three zones

The complete functionality is shown in figure 217.

425
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

U3P

STZ1

I3P

ZONE 1

BLKZ

OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
tZ1

BLOCK

TRZ1

START

STZ2

ZONE 2
OpModeZ2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
tZ2
LoadEnchModZ2

TRZ2

OPERATE

1
1

STZ3

ZONE 3
OpModeZ3
Z3Fwd
Z3Rev
tZ3
LoadEnchModZ3

TRZ3

LoadEnch
RLd
ArgLd

BLCKUV

UVSealIn

TRUV

OpModeU<
U<
tU<

STUV

IEC11000295-3-en.vsd
IEC11000295 V2 EN

Figure 217:

7.18.7.1

Block diagram of ZGVPDIS

Operation principle of zone 1

In general, the zone 1 must cover the generator winding, the cables or busbars and
step up transformer.
Under impedance functionality is provided as selective protection for the phase-tophase faults in zone 1. Hence the functionality of zone 1 includes only phase-tophase measuring loops.
Zone 1 functionality can be set to PP Loops or Off using the setting OpModeZ1.
Figure 218 shows the functionality of zone 1.

426
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BLOCK
BLKZ

U3P
I3P

Comparator
ZL1L2 <
OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng
Comparator
ZL2L3 <

STZ1

tZ1
1

TRZ1

OPModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng
Comparator
ZL3L1 <
OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng

IEC11000297-3-en.vsd
IEC11000297 V3 EN

Figure 218:

Block diagram of zone 1

The functionality included in zone 1:

Comparator to detect, if the operating impedance has entered inside zone 1

offset mho characteristic.
All three phase-to-phase loops are implemented separately.
Forward and reverse reach values are provided in percentage of impedance
base value at generator.
Operate time delay is provided.

Comparator characteristics
The comparator consists of offset mho characteristics. Three individual
comparators are provided in the three phase-to-phase loops. The offset mho
characteristic is as shown in figure 219.

427
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IL1L2 jX
IL1L2 Z 1Fwd
Ucomp1=UL1L2 - I L1L2 Z1Fwd

Ucomp2=UL1L2 + IL1L2 Z1REV

IL1L2 R

- IL1L2 Z1REV
IEC11000296-2-en.vsd
IEC11000296 V2 EN

Figure 219:

Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-L2 fault in zone 1

Criteria: Operation occurs if 90 270.

In the above characteristics, Z1Fwd and Z1Rev are the forward and reverse reach
percentage values and ImpedanceAng is the characteristic angle provided for the
zone 1 operation region.
Z 1Fwd

Z 1Fwd ImpedanceAng
(Equation 106)

IECEQUATION14000025 V2 EN

Z 1Rev

Z 1rev ImpedanceAng
(Equation 107)

IECEQUATION14000026 V2 EN

Voltage and current phasors selected for phase-to-phase loops are:

Sl.No

Phase-to-phase loop
1
2
3

L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1

Voltage phasor

Current phasor

UL1L 2

IL1L 2

UL2 L3

IL 2 L3

UL3L1

IL3L1

Operate time
The operate time delay for zone 1 can be provided using the setting tZ1.

7.18.7.2

Operation principle of zone 2

Figure 220 shows the function block diagram describing the functionality of zone 2.

428
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

U3P

Zero
sequence
Voltage
Compensation

I3P

BLKZ

Measuring Loop
EnhancedReach
OpModeZ2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
ImpedanceAng
1
Measuring Loop
phase-to-phase

STZ2

&

(ZL1L2<,ZL2L3<,ZL3L1<)

OpModeZ2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
ImpedanceAng

tZ2
t

TRZ2

LoadEnchModZ2
Load
Encroachment
RLd
ArgLd

IEC11000298-2-en.vsd

IEC11000298 V2 EN

Figure 220:

Block diagram of zone 2

Zone 2 can be used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer and the HV bus
bar. It also covers to some degree, the stator winding. The time to trip is provided
in order to coordinate with the zone 1 element on the shortest outgoing line from
the bus.
Zone 2 coverage provides backup for the phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in
generator. It also protects LV winding of generator transformer and phase-to-earth,
phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in the HV side of transformer and the bus. A
separate maximum current feature is provided in phase-to-earth loop selection
which gives correct reach measurement for phase-to-phase fault on HV side. Zero
sequence compensation for the phase voltages is given in phase-to-earth measuring
loops in order to prevent operation for the stator earth faults.
Zone 2 can be selected for different measuring loops using the setting OpModeZ2.
The OpModeZ2 can be selected as Off or PP Loops or EnhancedReach. If the
OpModeZ2 is selected as EnhancedReach the phase-to-earth measuring loop (L1E,
L2E and L3E with maximum phase current) is used for the measurement.
Figure 221 shows the logic to detect the phase to earth loop with maximum phase
current.

429
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

i1Mag

startPh1
startPh2

&
i2Mag

a
b

a
b

&

start

B
a==b

startPh3

&

&

1
i3Mag

&

a==b

C
a==b

MAX

IEC11000307_1_en.vsd

IEC11000307 V1 EN

Figure 221:

Logic diagram for the selection of the maximum current loop

The phase-to-earth voltage is compensated with zero sequence voltage in order to

avoid the function operating for earth faults in zone 1, that is, complete generator
stator winding and LV winding of the power transformer.
The reach settings for zone 2 can be provided using the Z2Fwd, Z2Rev and
ImpedanceAng settings. The Z2Fwd is forward reach setting and Z2Rev is reverse
reach setting. The offset mho characteristic for phase-to-earth loop is shown in
Figure 222. The offset mho characteristics for phase-to-phase loop is shown in
Figure 223.
IL1 jX
IL1 Z 2 Fwd

Ucomp1 UL1E U 0 IL1 Z 2 Fwd

Ucomp 2 U L1E U 0 IL1 Z 2 REV

IL1 R
IL1 Z 2 REV
IEC11000299-2-en.vsd
IEC11000299 V2 EN

Figure 222:

Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-to-E fault in zone 2

430
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IL1L 2 jX
IL1L2 Z 2 Fwd

Ucomp1 UL1L2 IL1L2 Z 2 Fwd

Ucomp 2 UL1L 2 IL1L 2 Z 2 REV

IL1L 2 R
IL1L 2 Z 2 REV
IEC11000300-2-en.vsd
IEC11000300 V2 EN

Figure 223:

Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-to-L2 fault in zone 2

Operation occurs if 90 270.

Impedance defined in the Figure 222 and 223 is described in equation 108.
Z 2 Fwd

Z 2 Fwd ImpedanceAng

Z 2 Rev

Z 2 Rev ImpedanceAng
(Equation 108)

GUID-007D6357-B7CF-4C21-B772-2245F06C83A2 V2 EN

Voltage and current phasors selected for different measuring loops:

Phase Phase:
Sl.No
1
2
3

Measuring Loop
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1

Voltage Phasor

Current Phasor

UL1L 2

IL1L 2

UL2 L3

IL 2 L3

UL3L1

IL3L1

Enhanced Reach:

431
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Sl.No

Measuring Loop

IL1

IL2

IL3

Voltage Phasor

Current Phasor

UL1E - U 0

IL1

UL 2 E - U 0

IL2

UL3E - U 0

IL3

Operate time
The operate time delay for zone 2 can be provided using the setting tZ2.
Zone 2 is provided load encroachment detection feature based on positive sequence
components measurements.. This feature avoids the function from operating due to
load encroachment. The load encroachment feature for zone 2 can be set using
LoadEnchModZ2 to On or Off.

7.18.7.3

Operation principle of zone 3

Zone 3 is used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer, interconnecting bus
network and outgoing lines. The time to trip should be provided in order to
coordinate with the transmission line protection.
The zone 3 will provide protection from phase-to-earth, phase-phase and threephase faults on the HV side of the system. The zone 3 functionality is same as zone
2 hence the explanation of zone 2 applies except the zone 3 has separate reach
(Z3Fwd, Z3Rev), operate timer (tZ3) and load encroachment enable
(LoadEnchModZ3) settings.

7.18.7.4

Load encroachment
The load encroachment characteristics can be set for zone2 and zone3. Load
encroachment can be enabled for zone 2 by setting LoadEnchModZ2 to On.
Similarly the load encroachment for zone 3 can be enabled by setting
LoadEnchModZ3 to On.
The load encroachment characteristic is based on positive sequence quantities and
can be set using the settings RLd and ArgLd.
RLd is the positive sequence resistive reach value in percentage. ArgLd is angle in
degrees from the origin to the resistive axis as shown in Figure 224.

432
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Load encroachment characteristic

jX

ArgLd

ArgLd
-RLd

ArgLd

RLd

R
ArgLd

IEC11000304_1_en
IEC11000304 V1 EN

Figure 224:

7.18.7.5

Load encroachment characteristics

Under voltage seal-in

The under voltage seal-in logic ensures the trip under fault condition, where as
under impedance function will reset due to CT saturation. The start signal of zone 2
and zone 3 elements trigger the under voltage seal-in. This can be selected using
the setting OpModeU< . The setting OpModeU< can be selected as Off or Z2Start
or Z3Start. Select Z2Start to choose zone 2 for triggering the seal-in logic.
Similarly, select Z3Start to choose zone 3 for triggering the seal-in logic.
Under voltage seal-in is activated from the criterion based on line-to-line voltage
magnitude. The voltage criteria checks by comparing all three line-to-line voltage
levels with the level given by the setting parameter U<. If any loop detects lower
voltage, the under voltage seal-in logic gets triggered, provided the respective
selected zone start is also high. Once the under voltage seal-in logic is triggered,
the pick-up signal STUV becomes high. If it is constantly high for a time longer
than the setting tU<, the tripping signal TRUV is issued as a pulse signal with a
duration of one second.
Figure 225 shows the functionality of under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3.

433
Technical Manual

Section 7
Impedance protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STUV

q1
BLOCK
BLKUV

1
Zone 2 Start

OpModeU< =
0 =
1 =
2 =

Off
Z2Start
Z3Start

int

tU<

&

b0

&
Zone 3 Start

U<

uP2P3

U<

uP3P1
U<

10 ms
t

TRUV
tPulse =1sec

&

b1

uP1P2

q1

Drop-Off
timer

a<b

a<b

a
a<b
b

IEC11000306.vsd

IEC11000306 V2 EN

Figure 225:

7.18.8

Under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3

Technical data
Table 209:

ZGVPDIS Technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

Forward reach

(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zr
where Zr=UBase/3IBase

5.0% of set impedance

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir

Reverse reach

(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zr
where Zr=UBase/3IBase

5.0% of set impedance

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir

Impedance angle

(5 - 90) degrees

Reset ratio

105% typically

Start time at 1.2 to 0.8 x set

impedance

Min = 15 ms

Independent time delay to

operate at 1.2 to 0.8 x set
impedance

Max = 35 ms
(0.000 60.000) s

0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
greater

434
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 8

Current protection

8.1

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3phase output PHPIOC

8.1.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Instantaneous phase overcurrent

protection 3-phase output

IEC 60617
identification

PHPIOC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50

3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN

8.1.2

Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach
and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

8.1.3

Function block
PHPIOC
I3P*
BLOCK
ENMULT

TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
IEC04000391-2-en.vsd

IEC04000391 V2 EN

Figure 226:

8.1.4

PHPIOC function block

Signals
Table 210:
Name

PHPIOC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase current

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

ENMULT

BOOLEAN

Enable current start value multiplier

435
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 211:

PHPIOC Output signals

Name

8.1.5
Table 212:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from any phase

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

Settings
PHPIOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OpMode

2 out of 3
1 out of 3

1 out of 3

Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out

of 3

IP>>

5 - 2500

%IB

200

Operate phase current level in % of IBase

Table 213:
Name
StValMult

Table 214:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

8.1.6

PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0.5 - 5.0

Step

0.1

Default
1.0

Description
Multiplier for operate current level

PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 215:
Name

8.1.7

Unit

PHPIOC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

IL1

REAL

Current in phase L1

IL2

REAL

Current in phase L2

IL3

REAL

Current in phase L3

Operation principle
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the
fundamental frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase
current. These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent

436
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are
compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this
phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn
(n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the
parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the
parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

8.1.8

Technical data
Table 216:

PHPIOC technical data

Function

8.2

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(5-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio

> 95% at (502500)% of

IBase

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms

Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset

Min. = 15ms
Max. = 25ms

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset

Min. = 5ms
Max. = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset

Min. = 25ms
Max. = 40 ms

Critical impulse time

2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Dynamic overreach

< 5% at t = 100 ms

Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output OC4PTOC

437
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.2.1

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Identification
Function description
Four step phase overcurrent protection
3-phase output

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

OC4PTOC

3I>
4
4

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51/67

alt

TOC-REVA V1 EN

8.2.2

Functionality
The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC has an
inverse or definite time delay independent for step 1 to 4 separately.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined time characteristic.
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.
Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to
block each step individually

438
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.2.3

Function block
OC4PTOC
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKST3
BLKST4
ENMULT1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4

TRIP
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
2NDHARM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
IEC06000187-2-en.vsd

IEC06000187 V2 EN

Figure 227:

8.2.4

OC4PTOC function block

Signals
Table 217:
Name

OC4PTOC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

BLKST1

BOOLEAN

Block of Step1

BLKST2

BOOLEAN

Block of Step2

Table continues on next page

439
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

BLKST3

BOOLEAN

Block of Step3

BLKST4

BOOLEAN

Block of Step4

ENMULT1

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step1

ENMULT2

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step2

ENMULT3

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step3

ENMULT4

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step4

Table 218:
Name

OC4PTOC Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TR1

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step1

TR2

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step2

TR3

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step3

TR4

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step4

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

TR1L1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase L1

TR1L2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase L2

TR1L3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase L3

TR2L1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase L1

TR2L2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase L2

TR2L3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase L3

TR3L1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step3 phase L1

TR3L2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step3 phase L2

TR3L3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step3 phase L3

TR4L1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step4 phase L1

TR4L2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step4 phase L2

TR4L3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step4 phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

ST1

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step1

ST2

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step2

ST3

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step3

ST4

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step4

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L2

Table continues on next page

440
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

8.2.5
Table 219:
Name

Type

Description

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from phase L3

ST1L1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step1 phase L1

ST1L2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step1 phase L2

ST1L3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step1 phase L3

ST2L1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step2 phase L1

ST2L2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step2 phase L2

ST2L3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step2 phase L3

ST3L1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step3 phase L1

ST3L2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step3 phase L2

ST3L3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step3 phase L3

ST4L1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step4 phase L1

ST4L2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step4 phase L2

ST4L3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step4 phase L3

ST2NDHRM

BOOLEAN

Second harmonic detected

DIRL1

INTEGER

Direction for phase1

DIRL2

INTEGER

Direction for phase2

DIRL3

INTEGER

Direction for phase3

Settings
OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

AngleRCA

40 - 65

Deg

55

Relay characteristic angle (RCA)

AngleROA

40 - 89

Deg

80

Relay operation angle (ROA)

StartPhSel

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of

3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)

DirMode1

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,

forward, reverse)

Table continues on next page

441
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist1

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 1

I1>

5 - 2500

%IB

1000

Operating phase current level for step 1

in % of IBase

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Independent (definite) time delay of step

1

k1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 1

IMin1

1 - 10000

%IB

100

Minimum operate current for step1 in %

of IBase

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 1

I1Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for current operate level for

step 1

DirMode2

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,

forward, reverse)

Characterist2

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 2

I2>

5 - 2500

%IB

500

Operating phase current level for step 2

in % of IBase

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Independent (definite) time delay of step

2

Table continues on next page

442
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

k2

Values (Range)
0.05 - 999.00

Unit
-

0.01

0.05

Description
Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2

IMin2

1 - 10000

%IB

50

Minimum operate current for step2 in %

of IBase

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 2

I2Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for current operate level for

step 2

DirMode3

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,

forward, reverse)

Characterist3

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 3

I3>

5 - 2500

%IB

250

Operating phase current level for step 3

in % of IBase

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Independent (definite) time delay of step

3

k3

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 3

IMin3

1 - 10000

%IB

33

Minimum operate current for step3 in %

of IBase

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 3

I3Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for current operate level for

step 3

DirMode4

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,

forward, reverse)

Table continues on next page

443
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist4

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 4

I4>

5 - 2500

%IB

175

Operating phase current level for step 4

in % of IBase

t4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Independent (definite) time delay of step

4

k4

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 4

IMin4

1 - 10000

%IB

17

Minimum operate current for step4 in %

of IBase

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 4

I4Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for current operate level for

step 4

Table 220:
Name

OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IMinOpPhSel

1 - 100

%IB

Minimum current for phase selection in

% of IBase

2ndHarmStab

5 - 100

%IB

20

Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %

of fundamental curr

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for step 1

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Constant reset time for step 1

tPCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 1

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer

programmable curve for step 1

Table continues on next page

444
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer

programmable curve for step 1

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer

programmable curve for step 1

HarmBlock1

Off
On

Off

Enable block of step 1 from harmonic

restrain

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for step 2

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Constant reset time for step 2

tPCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 2

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer

programmable curve for step 2

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer

programmable curve for step 2

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer

programmable curve for step 2

HarmBlock2

Off
On

Off

Enable block of step 2 from harmonic

restrain

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for step 3

tReset3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Constant reset time for step 3

tPCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 3

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer

programmable curve for step 3

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer

programmable curve for step 3

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer

programmable curve for step 3

HarmBlock3

Off
On

Off

Enable block of step 3 from harmonic

restrain

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for step 4

Table continues on next page

445
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

tReset4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Constant reset time for step 4

tPCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 4

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer

programmable curve for step 4

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer

programmable curve for step 4

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer

programmable curve for step 4

HarmBlock4

Off
On

Off

Enable block of step 4 from harmonic

restrain

Table 221:
Name

Step

Default

Description

OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MeasType

DFT
RMS

DFT

Selection between DFT and RMS

measurement

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

8.2.6

Monitored data
Table 222:
Name

OC4PTOC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

DIRL1

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction for phase1

DIRL2

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction for phase2

DIRL3

INTEGER

1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Direction for phase3

IL1

REAL

Current in phase L1

IL2

REAL

Current in phase L2

IL3

REAL

Current in phase L3

446
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.2.7

Operation principle
The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC is divided into four
different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3
and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/
Reverse.
The protection design can be divided in four parts:

The direction element

The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
The four step over current function
The mode selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter
DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

faultState

Direction
Element

I3P

dirPh1Flt
dirPh2Flt
dirPh3Flt

4 step over current

element
One element for each
step

faultState

START

U3P

TRIP

Harmonic
Restraint
Element

harmRestrBlock

enableDir
Mode Selection

enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740-2-en.vsd
IEC05000740 V2 EN

Figure 228:

Functional overview of OC4PTOC

447
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3.
The sampled analogue phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function
block. Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four
step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC, it is possible
to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible
to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component
and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If
RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in
addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from
the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected
current values are fed to OC4PTOC.
In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to
the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2
and STL3 are, without delay, activated. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are
common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall
be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC.
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the
local HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in
service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from
the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set
restrain current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as
current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for
the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional
measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization
voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage
(15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2

I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
(Equation 109)

EQUATION1449 V1 EN

U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3
EQUATION1450 V1 EN

I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
(Equation 110)

Table continues on next page

448
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1

I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
(Equation 111)

EQUATION1451 V1 EN

Phase-earth short circuit:

U refL1 = U L1

I dirL1 = I L1
(Equation 112)

EQUATION1452 V1 EN

U refL 2 = U L 2

I dirL 2 = I L 2
(Equation 113)

EQUATION1453 V1 EN

U refL 3 = U L 3

I dirL 3 = I L 3

EQUATION1454 V1 EN

(Equation 114)

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage

exceeds 4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for
all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition
seals in.

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function
and an angle window AngleROA.

449
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Reverse

Uref
RCA

ROA

ROA

Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN

Figure 229:

Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.
If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is
available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The
possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".
All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
binary input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

450
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

|IOP|
Ix>

Characteristx=DefTime
a

AND

OR

a>b

tx

TRx

STx

AND

txmin

BLKSTx

AND

BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse
DirModex=Off

OR

STAGEx_DIR_Int

DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
DirModex=Reverse

FORWARD_Int

REVERSE_Int

AND

OR

AND

IEC12000008-1-en.vsd
IEC12000008-1-en.vsd
IEC12000008 V1 EN

Figure 230:

Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse

characteristics".
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the
set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the
operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network
switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The
trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

8.2.8

Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC
can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the
fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level
defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can
be selectively blocked by parameter HarmRestrainx setting. When 2nd harmonic
restraint feature is active, the OC4PTOC function output signal 2NDHARMD will
be set to logical value one.

451
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BLOCK
a
0.07*IBase

IOP

a>b

Extract second
harmonic current
component
Extract
fundamental
current component

a>b

2NDHARMD

AND
a>b

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
2ndHarmStab

IEC13000014-1-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V1 EN

Figure 231:

8.2.9

Second harmonic blocking

Technical data
Table 223:

OC4PTOC technical data

Function

Setting range

Accuracy

Operate current

(5-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio

> 95% at (502500)%

of lBase

Min. operating current

(1-10000)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA)

(40.065.0) degrees

2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA)

(40.089.0) degrees

2.0 degrees

2nd harmonic blocking

(5100)% of
fundamental

2.0% of Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x

Iset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2 % or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Minimum operate time

(0.000-60.000) s

2.0 % or 40 ms whichever is
greater

Inverse characteristics, see

table 1038, table 1039 and table
1040

16 curve types

See table 1038, table 1039 and table

1040

Operate time, start non-directional

at 0 to 2 x Iset

Min. = 15 ms

Reset time, start non-directional

at 2 to 0 x Iset

Min. = 15 ms

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2
x Iset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms

452
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.3

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

EFPIOC

8.3.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Instantaneous residual overcurrent

protection

IEC 60617
identification

EFPIOC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50N

IN>>
IEF V1 EN

8.3.2

Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow use for instantaneous earth-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the
transformer impedance at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC can be configured
to measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs or the current
from a separate current input.

8.3.3

Function block
EFPIOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTEN

TRIP

IEC06000269-2-en.vsd
IEC06000269 V2 EN

Figure 232:

8.3.4

EFPIOC function block

Signals
Table 224:
Name

EFPIOC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase currents

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKAR

BOOLEAN

Block input for auto reclose

ENMULT

BOOLEAN

Enable current multiplier

453
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 225:

EFPIOC Output signals

Name

Type

TRIP

8.3.5
Table 226:
Name

Description

BOOLEAN

Trip signal

Settings
EFPIOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

IN>>

5 - 2500

%IB

200

Operate residual current level in % of

IBase

Table 227:
Name
StValMult

Table 228:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

8.3.6

EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0.5 - 5.0

Step

0.1

Default
1.0

Description
Multiplier for operate current level

EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 229:
Name
IN

8.3.7

Unit

EFPIOC Monitored data

Type
REAL

Values (Range)
-

Unit
A

Description
Residual current

Operation principle
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current,
as well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This
current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC).
In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of
the function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a
signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate
the output signal TRIP.

454
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be
activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

8.3.8

Technical data
Table 230:

EFPIOC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(5-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio

> 95% at (502500)% of

lBase

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms

Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2
x Iset

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset

Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset

Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time

2 ms typically at 0 to 10
x Iset

Dynamic overreach

< 5% at t = 100 ms

8.4

Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero

sequence or negative sequence directionality)
EF4PTOC

8.4.1

Identification
Function description
Four step residual overcurrent
protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

EF4PTOC

IN
4
4

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51N/67N

alt

TEF-REVA V1 EN

455
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.4.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite
time delay independent for each step.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.
EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the
steps.
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.
Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking
the input from neutral CT

8.4.3

Function block
EF4PTOC
I3P*
U3P*
I3PPOL*
I3PDIR*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKST3
BLKST4
ENMULT1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4
CBPOS
CLOSECB
OPENCB

TRIP
TRIN1
TRIN2
TRIN3
TRIN4
TRSOTF
START
STIN1
STIN2
STIN3
STIN4
STSOTF
STFW
STRV
2NDHARMD

IEC06000424-2-en.vsd
IEC06000424 V3 EN

Figure 233:

8.4.4

EF4PTOC function block

Signals
Table 231:
Name

EF4PTOC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for operate current

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for polarizing voltage

I3PPOL

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for polarizing current

Table continues on next page

456
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Default

Description

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for directional current

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

General block

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

BLKST1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1 (Start and trip)

BLKST2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2 (Start and trip)

BLKST3

BOOLEAN

Block of step 3 (Start and trip)

BLKST4

BOOLEAN

Block of step 4 (Start and trip)

ENMULT1

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step1

ENMULT2

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step2

ENMULT3

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step3

ENMULT4

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step4

CBPOS

BOOLEAN

Breaker position

CLOSECB

BOOLEAN

Breaker close command

OPENCB

BOOLEAN

Breaker open command

Table 232:
Name

8.4.5

Type

I3PDIR

EF4PTOC Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip signal

TRIN1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 1

TRIN2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 2

TRIN3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 3

TRIN4

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 4

TRSOTF

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

STIN1

BOOLEAN

Start signal step 1

STIN2

BOOLEAN

Start signal step 2

STIN3

BOOLEAN

Start signal step 3

STIN4

BOOLEAN

Start signal step 4

STSOTF

BOOLEAN

Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault

function

STFW

BOOLEAN

Start signal forward direction

STRV

BOOLEAN

Start signal reverse direction

2NDHARMD

BOOLEAN

2nd harmonic block signal

Settings

457
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

Table 233:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

EnDir

Disable
Enable

Enable

Enabling the Directional calculation

AngleRCA

-180 - 180

Deg

65

Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)

polMethod

Voltage
Current
Dual

Voltage

Type of polarization

UPolMin

1 - 100

%UB

Minimum voltage level for polarization in

% of UBase

IPolMin

2 - 100

%IB

Minimum current level for polarization in

% of IBase

RNPol

0.50 - 1000.00

Ohm

0.01

5.00

Real part of source impedance used for

current polarisation

XNPol

0.50 - 3000.00

Ohm

0.01

40.00

Imaginary part of source imp. used for

current polarisation

IN>Dir

1 - 100

%IB

10

Residual current level in % of IBase for

Direction release

2ndHarmStab

5 - 100

20

Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %

of fundamental curr

BlkParTransf

Off
On

Off

Enable blocking at energizing of parallel

transformers

UseStartValue

IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>

IN4>

Current level blk at parallel transf (step1,

2, 3 or 4)

SOTF

Off
SOTF
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime

Off

SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/

Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)

ActivationSOTF

Open
Closed
CloseCommand

Open

Select signal to activate SOTF: CBOpen/ -Closed/ -Close cmd

StepForSOTF

Step 2
Step 3

Step 2

Select start from step 2 or 3 to start SOTF

HarmBlkSOTF

Off
On

Off

Enable harmonic restrain function in

SOTF

tSOTF

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Time delay for SOTF

t4U

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Switch-onto-fault active time

ActUnderTime

CB position
CB command

CB position

Select signal to activate under time (CB

Pos / CB Command)

tUnderTime

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

Time delay for under time

DirMode1

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,

Forward, Reverse)

Table continues on next page

458
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist1

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay characteristic for step 1

IN1>

1 - 2500

%IB

100

Residual current operate level for step 1

in % of IBase

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of step 1 when definite time

char. is selected

k1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the step 1 selected

time characteristic

IMin1

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

100.00

Minimum operate residual current for

step 1 in % of IBase

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse time

characteristic step 1

IN1Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for the residual current setting

value for step 1

HarmBlock1

Off
On

On

Enable block of step 1 from harmonic

restrain

DirMode2

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 2 (Off, Non-dir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist2

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay characteristic for step 2

IN2>

1 - 2500

%IB

50

Residual current operate level for step 2

in % of IBase

Table continues on next page

459
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

t2

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.400

Description
Time delay of step 2 when definite time
char. is selected

k2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the step 2 selected

time characteristic

IMin2

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

50

Minimum operate residual current for

step 2 in % of IBase

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse time

characteristic step 2

IN2Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for the residual current setting

value for step 2

HarmBlock2

Off
On

On

Enable block of step 2 from harmonic

restrain

DirMode3

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 3 (Off, Non-dir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist3

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay characteristic for step 3

IN3>

1 - 2500

%IB

33

Residual current operate level for step 3

in % of IBase

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Time delay of step 3 when definite time

char. is selected

k3

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the step 3 selected

time characteristic

IMin3

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

33

Minimum operate residual current for

step 3 in % of IBase

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse time

characteristic step 3

IN3Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for the residual current setting

value for step 3

HarmBlock3

Off
On

On

Enable block of step 3 from harmonic

restrain

DirMode4

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 4 (Off, Non-dir,

Forward, Reverse)

Table continues on next page

460
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist4

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay characteristic for step 4

IN4>

1 - 2500

%IB

17

Residual current operate level for step 4

in % of IBase

t4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.200

Time delay of step 4 when definite time

char. is selected

k4

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the step 4 selected

time characteristic

IMin4

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

17

Minimum operate residual current for

step 4 in % of IBase

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse time

characteristic step 4

IN4Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for the residual current setting

value for step 4

HarmBlock4

Off
On

On

Enable block of step 4 from harmonic

restrain

Table 234:
Name

EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step1

(Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 1

tPCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Param P for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 1

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Param A for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 1

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Param B for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 1

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param C for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 1

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Param PR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 1

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Param TR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 1

Table continues on next page

461
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param CR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 1

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step2

(Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 2

tPCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Param P for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 2

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Param A for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 2

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Param B for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 2

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param C for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 2

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Param PR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 2

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Param TR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 2

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param CR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 2

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step3

(Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)

tReset3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 3

tPCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Param P for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 3

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Param A for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 3

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Param B for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 3

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param C for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 3

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Param PR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 3

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Param TR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 3

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param CR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 3

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step4

(Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)

tReset4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 4

tPCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Param P for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 4

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Param A for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 4

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Param B for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 4

Table continues on next page

462
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param C for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 4

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Param PR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 4

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Param TR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 4

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param CR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 4

Table 235:
Name

EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

SeqTypeIDir

Zero seq
Neg seq

Zero seq

Choice of measurand for directional

current

SeqTypeIPol

Zero seq
Neg seq

Zero seq

Choice of measurand for polarizing

current

SeqTypeUPol

Zero seq
Neg seq

Zero seq

Choice of measurand for polarizing

voltage

8.4.6

Monitored data
Table 236:
Name

8.4.7

EF4PTOC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

IOp

REAL

Operating current level

UPol

REAL

kV

Polarizing voltage level

IPol

REAL

Polarizing current level

UPOLIANG

REAL

deg

Polarizing angle
between voltage and
current

IPOLIANG

REAL

deg

Polarizing current angle

Operation principle
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:

463
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

1.
2.
3.
4.

I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
U3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. Supply either zero or
negative sequence voltage to the directional functionality
I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity. Provide polarizing
current to the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the
grounding of a power transformer.
I3PDIR, input used for Directional detection. Supply either zero or negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

8.4.7.1

Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:
1.

directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for
example, connected to:

2.

parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases

(Holm-Green connection).
one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and earth (that is, current transformer located in the star point
of a star connected transformer winding).
one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two star
points of double star shunt capacitor bank).

calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula
(will take I2 from SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was
connected to I3P input also):

If zero sequence current is selected,

Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION1874 V2 EN

(Equation 115)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3

are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

464
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The
phasor magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in nondirectional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This
signal will, without delay, activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this
step and a common START signal.

8.4.7.2

Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the
direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual
current (3I0) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1.

directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then
typically connected to one single current transformer located between power
system star point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).

2.

For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT

input can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in
all three phases (Holm-Green connection).

calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION2018 V2 EN

(Equation 117)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This
phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance
in order to calculate equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the
following formula:
465
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UIPol = Z 0s IPol = (RNPol + j XNPol) IPol

EQUATION1877 V2 EN

(Equation 118)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be
bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the
voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UTotPol=UUPol + UIPol=UPol + Z 0s IPol = UPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) Ipol
IECEQUATION2408 V1 EN

(Equation 119)

UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence
component depending upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with
the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault
(Forward/Reverse).

8.4.7.3

External polarizing for earth-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx to provide
external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the
following functions if available in the IED:
1.
2.

8.4.7.4

Distance protection directional function.

Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose
protection function.

Directional detection for earth fault function

Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for earth fault
function. In some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong.
Negative sequence quantities will be used in such scenario. The user can select
either zero sequence components or negative sequence components for detecting
directionality with the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input always connected to
the same source as I3P input.

8.4.7.5

Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base
current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in

466
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase

voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

8.4.7.6

Internal earth-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Four residual overcurrent steps.

Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in
blocking during switching of parallel transformers.
Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

8.4.7.7

Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in
facilities:

Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted
that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual
overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
directional supervision element.
Residual current start value.
Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault
protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to
section "Inverse characteristics".
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For
the complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "".
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external
binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual
current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value
1.
467

Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 234.
BLKTR
EMULTX
IMinx

Characteristx=DefTime

a>b

|IOP|

tx

AND

OR

a>b

AND

TRINx

INxMult

STINx

AND

T
F

INx>

AND

Inverse

BLKSTx

AND

BLOCK

Characteristx=Inverse
txmin
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int

OR

HarmRestrainx=Off
DirModex=Off

OR

STEPx_DIR_Int

DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
DirModex=Reverse

FORWARD_Int

REVERSE_Int

AND

OR

AND

IEC10000008-4-en.vsd

IEC10000008 V4 EN

Figure 234:

Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x =

step 1, 2, 3 or 4

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary
input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary
input BLKTR.

8.4.7.8

Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function
It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent
steps shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the
directional supervision element and the integrated directional
comparison function.
The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current
lop is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:
1.
2.
3.

When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
WhenpolMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 235, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

468
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Operating area

STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR

Characteristic for reverse

release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg

Characteristic
for STRV

40% of
IN>DIR

RCA +85 deg

RCA
65

Upol = -3U 0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward

release of measuring steps

IN>DIR

STFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW

IEC11000243-1-en.ai

IEC11000243 V1 EN

Figure 235:

Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using

the zero sequence components

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is

bigger than 40% of I>Dir and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward
and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will

set EF4PTOC function output binary signals:
1.
2.

STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is

bigger than setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element
detects fault in forward direction.
STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is
bigger than 60% of setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision
element detects fault in reverse direction.

469
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison step is shown in figure 236:
| IopDir |

a
a>b
b

0.6

REVERSE_Int

STRV

AND

X
a
a>b

I>Dir

0.4

FORWARD_Int

STFW

AND

FWD
polMethod=Voltage

OR

polMethod=Dual

UPolMin
UPol

polMethod=Current

OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol

T
0.0 F

IPolMin
I3PDIR

AND

FORWARD_Int

AND

REVERSE_Int

Directional
Characteristic

AngleRCA

UTotPol
T
F

Complex
Number

RVS

UIPol
0.0

T
F

STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int

OR
AND

BLOCK

IEC07000067-5-en.vsd

IEC07000067 V5 EN

Figure 236:

8.4.7.9

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC
can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of
the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component
in the residual current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter
2ndHarmStab) then 2NDHARMD function output signal is set to logical value one
and harmonic restraining feature to the function block will be applicable.
Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:

470
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

1.
2.
3.

Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk

Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk
Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter
2ndHarmStab setting

If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then 2NDHARMD function output
signal is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function
block is applicable.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking
can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature
might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers
in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush
current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is
switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will
cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called
transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two
transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents thus gives a
small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however
significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel
transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the first transformer.
Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short
period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets.
If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched
as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step
current level by using setting UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic sealin feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously
fulfilled:
1.
2.
3.

Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible
to select which one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or
IN3> or IN4>).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined
by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 237.

471
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BLOCK
a
0.07*IBase

Extract
fundamental
current component

a>b

Extract second
harmonic current
component

IOP

a>b

2NDHARMD

AND
a>b

2ndHarmStab

q-1

t=70ms
t

OR
AND

OR

2ndH_BLOCK_Int

BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|

UseStartValue

a>b

IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000015-2-en.vsd

IEC13000015 V2 EN

Figure 237:

8.4.7.10

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature

Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault
logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate
either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there
is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing
sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations.
The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation
is defined by the setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse.
The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position
open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a

472
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give
a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200
ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The UnderTime logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF
function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint
feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can
occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB
poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is
activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker
close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter
ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set
delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300
ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance
protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The UnderTime logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
SOTF

Open
t4U
Closed

ActivationSOTF

Close command

tSOTF
AND

STIN2

AND

StepForSOTF

STIN3

OperationMode
BLOCK

OFF
SOTF

UNDERTIME

TRIP

UnderTime
tUnderTime

2nd Harmonic

HarmResSOFT

AND

SOTF or
UnderTime

OR

Open
OR

Close

t4U
Close command

ActUnderTime

AND

STIN4
IEC06000643-3-en.vsd
IEC06000643 V3 EN

Figure 238:

Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features

EF4PTOC Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC
function is shown in figure 239:

473
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

signal to
communication
scheme

Directional Check
Element

Direction
Element

INPol
3U0

4 step over current

element
One element for each
step

operatingCurrent
earthFaultDirection

3I0

TRIP

angleValid

I3PDIR
DirMode
enableDir

3I0

Harmonic
Restraint
Element

harmRestrBlock

start step 2, 3 and 4

Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault

DirMode
Mode
Selection

enableDir

TRIP

CB
pos
or cmd

enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

IEC06000376-2-en.vsd
IEC06000376 V2 EN

Figure 239:

8.4.8

Functional overview of EF4PTOC

Technical data
Table 237:

EF4PTOC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(1-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio

> 95% at (10-2500)% of lBase

Relay characteristic angle

(-180 to 180) degrees

2.0 degrees

Operate current for directional

comparison

(1100)% of lBase

For RCA 60 degrees:

2.5% of Ir at I Ir
2.5% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay for step

1, 2, 3, and 4 at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Inverse characteristics, see

table 1038, table 1039 and table
1040

16 curve types

See table 1038, table 1039 and

table 1040

Second harmonic restrain

operation

(5100)% of fundamental

2.0% of Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage

(1100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Table continues on next page

474
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Minimum polarizing current

(2-100)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Real part of source Z used for

current polarization

(0.50-1000.00) W/phase

Imaginary part of source Z used

for current polarization

(0.503000.00) W/phase

Operate time, start function at 0

to 2 x Iset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Reset time, start function at 2 to

0 x Iset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

8.5

Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC

8.5.1

Identification
Function description
Four step negative sequence
overcurrent protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2

device number

NS4PTOC

I2

46I2

4
4

alt

IEC10000053 V1 EN

8.5.2

Functionality
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized.
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the
steps.

475
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.5.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
NS4PTOC
I3P*
I3PDIR*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKST3
BLKST4
ENMULT1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4

TRIP
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STFW
STRV
IEC10000054-2-en.vsd

IEC10000054 V2 EN

Figure 240:

8.5.4

NS4PTOC function block

Signals
Table 238:
Name

NS4PTOC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for operate current

I3PDIR

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for directional current

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for polarizing voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

General block

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

BLKST1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1 (Start and trip)

BLKST2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2 (Start and trip)

BLKST3

BOOLEAN

Block of step 3 (Start and trip)

BLKST4

BOOLEAN

Block of step 4 (Start and trip)

ENMULT1

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step1

ENMULT2

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step2

ENMULT3

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step3

ENMULT4

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step4

476
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 239:

NS4PTOC Output signals

Name

8.5.5
Table 240:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip signal

TR1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 1

TR2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 2

TR3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 3

TR4

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 4

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

ST1

BOOLEAN

Start signal step 1

ST2

BOOLEAN

Start signal step 2

ST3

BOOLEAN

Start signal step 3

ST4

BOOLEAN

Start signal step 4

STFW

BOOLEAN

Forward directional start signal

STRV

BOOLEAN

Reverse directional start signal

Settings
NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

EnDir

Disable
Enable

Enable

Enabling the Directional calculation

AngleRCA

-180 - 180

Deg

65

Relay characteristic angle (RCA)

UPolMin

1 - 100

%UB

Minimum voltage level for polarization in

% of UBase

I2>Dir

1 - 100

%IB

10

Residual current level in % of IBase for

Direction release

DirMode1

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,

forward, reverse)

Table continues on next page

477
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist1

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay characteristic for step 1

I2-1>

1 - 2500

%IB

100

Negative sequence current op level for

step 1 in % of IBase

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of step 1 when definite time

char. is selected

k1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the step 1 selected

time characteristic

IMin1

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

100.00

Minimum current for step 1

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse time

characteristic step 1

I1Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting

value for step 1

DirMode2

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,

forward, reverse)

Characterist2

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay characteristic for step 2

I2-2>

1 - 2500

%IB

50

Negative sequence current op level for

step 2 in % of IBase

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Time delay of step 2 when definite time

char. is selected

Table continues on next page

478
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

k2

Values (Range)
0.05 - 999.00

Unit
-

0.01

0.05

Description
Time multiplier for the step 2 selected
time characteristic

IMin2

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

50

Minimum current for step 2

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse time

characteristic step 2

I2Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting

value for step 2

DirMode3

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,

forward, reverse)

Characterist3

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay characteristic for step 3

I2-3>

1 - 2500

%IB

33

Negative sequence current op level for

step 3 in % of IBase

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Time delay of step 3 when definite time

char. is selected

k3

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the step 3 selected

time characteristic

IMin3

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

33

Minimum current for step 3

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse time

characteristic step 3

I3Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting

value for step 3

DirMode4

Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,

forward, reverse)

Table continues on next page

479
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist4

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay characteristic for step 4

I2-4>

1 - 2500

%IB

17

Negative sequence current op level for

step 4 in % of IBase

t4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.200

Time delay of step 4 when definite time

char. is selected

k4

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the step 4 selected

time characteristic

IMin4

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

17

Minimum current for step 4

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse time

characteristic step 4

I4Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting

value for step 4

Table 241:
Name

NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step1

(Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 1

tPCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Param P for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 1

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Param A for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 1

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Param B for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 1

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param C for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 1

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Param PR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 1

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Param TR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param CR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 1

Table continues on next page

480
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step2

(Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 2

tPCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Param P for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 2

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Param A for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 2

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Param B for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 2

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param C for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 2

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Param PR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 2

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Param TR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 2

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param C for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 2

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step3

(Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)

tReset3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 3

tPCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Param P for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 3

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Param A for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 3

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Param B for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 3

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param C for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 3

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Param PR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 3

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Param TR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 3

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param CR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 3

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step4

(Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)

tReset4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 4

tPCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Param P for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 4

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Param A for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 4

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Param B for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 4

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param C for customized inverse trip time

curve for step 4

Table continues on next page

481
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Param PR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 4

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Param TR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 4

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Param CR for customized inverse reset

time curve for step 4

Table 242:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

8.5.6

NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 243:
Name

8.5.7

Unit

NS4PTOC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

IOp

REAL

Operating current level

UPol

REAL

kV

Polarizing voltage level

UPOLIANG

REAL

deg

Polarizing angle
between voltage and
current

Operation principle
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the
following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.

I3P, input used for Operating Quantity.

U3P, input used for Polarizing Quantity.
I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

8.5.7.1

Operating quantity within the function

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always
uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative
sequence current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The
pre-processing block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the preprocessing block by using the following formula:

482
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

I2 =

1
3

IL1 + a IL 2 + a IL 3
2

)
(Equation 120)

EQUATION2266 V2 EN

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3

are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg

a2

similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg

The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with
the set operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the
negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is
used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to
true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this
step and a common START signal.

8.5.7.2

Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the
fault (Forward/Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the
voltage polarizing method.
NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P.
This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The preprocessing block calculates -U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:
UPol = -U 2 = -

1
(UL1 + a 2 UL 2 + a UL3 )
3

EQUATION2267 V2 EN

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3

are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing

483
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined
by setting UpolMin.
Note that U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the
required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.

8.5.7.3

External polarizing for negative sequence function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions
if available in the IED:

8.5.7.4

Distance protection directional function

Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose
protection function

Internal negative sequence protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative
sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

8.5.7.5

Four negative sequence overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as
measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:

Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter

setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional
decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself.
The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision
Element described in the next paragraph.
Negative sequence current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative
sequence overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse
characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves,
refer to Chapter ""

484
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this

parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For
the complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter ""
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by
external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase
negative sequence current pickup value when function binary input
ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in
the following figure:
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime

|IOP|

ENMULTx
IxMult

AND

OR

a>b

AND

tx

TRx

STx

AND

T
F

Ix>

txmin

BLKSTx

AND

BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse
OR

DirModex=Off

STAGEx_DIR_Int

DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
DirModex=Reverse

FORWARD_Int

REVERSE_Int

AND

OR

AND

IEC09000683-3-en.vsd
IEC09000683 V2 EN

Figure 241:

Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4

NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.

8.5.7.6

Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function
At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must
be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional
485

Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

supervision element and the integrated directional comparison

function.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 235, to determine the direction of the fault.

Reverse
Area

Upol=-U2

AngleRCA

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

IEC10000031-1-en.vsd
IEC10000031 V1 EN

Figure 242:

Operating characteristic for fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than

40% of I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward
and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC output binary signals:

486
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

1.
2.

STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward

area, see fig 235 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 235. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
I>Dir)

These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison step is shown in figure 236:
|Iop|

0.6

a a>
b b

STRV

AND

X
a a>
b b

I>Dir
0.4

REVERSE_Int

FORWARD_Int

STFW

AND

UPolMin
IPolMin
Iop
UPol

RVS

STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK

AND

FORWARD_Int

AND

REVERSE_Int

D i r e c ti o n a l
t
C h a r a c e ri s ti c

FWD
AngleRCA

OR
AND

IEC07000067-4.vsd
IEC07000067-4 V2 EN

Figure 243:

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

487
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.5.8

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 244:

NS4PTOC technical data

Function

8.6

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, negative

sequence current, step 1-4

(1-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio

> 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase

Independent time delay for

step 1, 2, 3, and 4 at 0 to 2 x
Iset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Inverse characteristics, see

table 1038, table 1039 and
table 1040

16 curve types

See table 1038, table 1039 and

table 1040

Minimum operate current for

steps 1 - 4

(1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle

(-180 to 180) degrees

2.0 degrees

Operate value, negative

current for directional release

(1100)% of IBase

For RCA 60 degrees:

2.5% of Ir at I Ir
2.5% of I at I > Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage

(1100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current

(2-100)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Real part of negative

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization

(0.50-1000.00) W/phase

Imaginary part of negative

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization

(0.503000.00) W/phase

Operate time, start function at

0 to 2 x Iset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Reset time, start function at 2

to 0 x Iset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Critical impulse time, start

function

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Impulse margin time, start

function

15 ms typically

Transient overreach

<10% at = 100 ms

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE

488
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.6.1

Identification
Function description
Sensitive directional residual over
current and power protection

8.6.2

IEC 61850
identification
SDEPSDE

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
67N

Functionality
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth
fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toearth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current
and the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle.
Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle .
Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phaseto-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the
residual power component 3I0 3U0 cos , where is the angle between the
residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a
characteristic angle.
A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.
A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional
residual overvoltage protection.
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always
has -90 phase shift compared to the residual voltage ( 3U0). The characteristic
angle is chosen to -90 in such a network.
In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor,
the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be
used for the earth fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is
chosen to 0.
As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider
the following:

489
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of
IBase, 1 A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high
impedance network applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse
time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed
networks, with large capacitive earth fault currents. In such networks, the
active fault current would be small and by using sensitive directional residual
power protection, the operating quantity is elevated. Therefore, better
possibility to detect earth faults. In addition, in low impedance earthed
networks, the inverse time characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of
high zero-resistive fault currents.

Phase
currents
IN

Phaseground
voltages
UN
IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN

Figure 244:

Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3. For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.
Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to
GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0)
will be used.

490
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.6.3

Function block
SDEPSDE
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKTRDIR
BLKNDN
BLKUN

TRIP
TRDIRIN
TRNDIN
TRUN
START
STDIRIN
STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL
IEC07000032-2-en.vsd

IEC07000032 V2 EN

Figure 245:

8.6.4

SDEPSDE function block

Signals
Table 245:
Name

SDEPSDE Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Blocks all the outputs of the function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks the trip outputs of the function

BLKTRDIR

BOOLEAN

Blocks the directional operate outputs of the

function

BLKNDN

BOOLEAN

Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs

BLKUN

BOOLEAN

Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

Table 246:
Name

SDEPSDE Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip of the function

TRDIRIN

BOOLEAN

Trip of the directional residual over current function

TRNDIN

BOOLEAN

Trip of non directional residual over current

TRUN

BOOLEAN

Trip of non directional residual over voltage

START

BOOLEAN

General start of the function

STDIRIN

BOOLEAN

Start of the directional residual over current

function

STNDIN

BOOLEAN

Start of non directional residual over current

STUN

BOOLEAN

Start of non directional residual over voltage

STFW

BOOLEAN

Start of directional function for a fault in forward

direction

Table continues on next page

491
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

8.6.5
Table 247:
Name

Type

Description

STRV

BOOLEAN

Start of directional function for a fault in reverse

direction

STDIR

INTEGER

Direction of fault. A general signal common to all

three mode of residual over current protection

UNREL

BOOLEAN

Residual voltage release of operation of all

directional modes

Settings
SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OpMode

3I0Cosfi
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi

3I0Cosfi

Selection of operation mode for protection

DirMode

Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of operation forward or reverse

RCADir

-179 - 180

Deg

-90

Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg

RCAComp

-10.0 - 10.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Relay characteristic angle compensation

ROADir

0 - 90

Deg

90

Relay open angle ROA used as release

in phase mode, in deg

INCosPhi>

0.25 - 200.00

%IB

0.01

1.00

Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res

over current in % of IBase

SN>

0.25 - 200.00

%SB

0.01

10.00

Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv

time count in % of SBase

INDir>

0.25 - 200.00

%IB

0.01

5.00

Set level for directional residual over

current prot in % of IBase

tDef

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Definite time delay directional residual

overcurrent, in sec

SRef

0.03 - 200.00

%SB

0.01

10.00

Reference value of res power for inverse

time count in % of SBase

kSN

0.00 - 2.00

0.01

0.10

Time multiplier setting for directional

residual power mode

OpINNonDir>

Off
On

Off

Operation of non-directional residual

overcurrent protection

INNonDir>

1.00 - 400.00

%IB

0.01

10.00

Set level for non directional residual over

current in % of IBase

tINNonDir

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Time delay for non-directional residual

over current, in sec

Table continues on next page

492
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TimeChar

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

IEC Norm. inv.

Operation curve selection for IDMT

operation

tMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.040

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT

curves, in sec

kIN

0.05 - 2.00

0.01

1.00

IDMT time mult for non-dir res over

current protection

OpUN>

Off
On

Off

Operation of non-directional residual

overvoltage protection

UN>

1.00 - 200.00

%UB

0.01

20.00

Set level for non-directional residual over

voltage in % of UBase

tUN

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay for non-directional residual

over voltage, in sec

INRel>

0.25 - 200.00

%IB

0.01

1.00

Residual release current for all

directional modes in % of IBase

UNRel>

1.00 - 300.00

%UB

0.01

3.00

Residual release voltage for all direction

modes in % of UBase

Step

Default

Table 248:
Name

SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.040

Description
Time delay used for reset of definite
timers, in sec

tPCrv

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Setting P for customer programmable

curve

tACrv

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Setting A for customer programmable

curve

tBCrv

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Setting B for customer programmable

curve

tCCrv

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Setting C for customer programmable

curve

ResetTypeCrv

Immediate
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

IEC Reset

Reset mode when current drops off.

Table continues on next page

493
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tPRCrv

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Setting PR for customer programmable

curve

tTRCrv

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Setting TR for customer programmable

curve

tCRCrv

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Setting CR for customer programmable

curve

Table 249:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

Table 250:
Name
RotResU

8.6.6

SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit

Step

Default
1

Description
Global base selection for function groups

SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0 deg
180 deg

Unit

Step

Default
180 deg

Description
Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
necessary

Monitored data
Table 251:

SDEPSDE Monitored data

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

INCOSPHI

REAL

Magnitude of residual
current along the
polarizing quantity
3I0cos(Fi-RCA)

IN

REAL

Measured magnitude of
the residual current 3I0

UN

REAL

kV

Measured magnitude of
the residual voltage 3U0

SN

REAL

MVA

Measured magnitude of
residual power
3I03U0cos(Fi-RCA)

ANG FI-RCA

REAL

deg

Angle between 3U0 and

3I0 minus RCA (Fi-RCA)

8.6.7

Operation principle

8.6.7.1

Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from preprocessor blocks.
The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:

494
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (|
=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)|). The reference voltage (Uref) is the polarizing quantity
which is used for directionality and is defined as Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir, that is
-3U0 inversely rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir. RCADir is normally
set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as
the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is
set equal to -90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The
function operates when 3I0cos gets larger than the set value.
RCADir = 0o,ROADir = 90o

3I0

j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref

3I0 cosj

IEC06000648-4-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V4 EN

Figure 246:

RCADir set to 0
Uref

RCADir = 90 , ROADir = 90

3I0

3I0 cos
= ang (3I0 ) ang (Uref )

3U0

IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN

Figure 247:

RCADir set to -90

495
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos , the residual current 3I0, and the residual
voltage 3U0 must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhi>, INRel> and UNRel>.
Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 251.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip
from this sub-function has definite time delay.
ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the
reference direction in order to detect directionality. Figure 248 shows the
restrictions made by the ROADir.

RCADir = 0o

3I0

Operate area

j
3I0 cos j

-3U0 = Uref

ROADir

IEC06000650_2_en.vsd
IEC06000650 V2 EN

Figure 248:

Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value.
It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer
angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 249:

496
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RCADir = 0

Operate area

-3U0 =Uref

Instrument
transformer
angle error

RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (prim)

3I0 (to prot)

en06000651.vsd
IEC06000651 V2 EN

Figure 249:

Explanation of RCAComp

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
(Uref = -3U0 e-jRCA) compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (|
=ang(3I0)ang(Uref)|). The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos gets larger
than the set value SN>. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 251.
For trip, the residual power 3I0 3U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the
release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction
is defined as 3I0 3U0cos ( + 180) the set value.

497
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
t inv =

kSN (3I0 3U 0 cos j(reference))

3I0 3U 0 cos j(measured)
(Equation 121)

EQUATION1942 V2 EN

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and

The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the
angle | = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)| is within the sector RCADir ROADir
RCADir = 0
ROADir = 80

Operate area
3I0
-3U0

IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN

Figure 250:

Example of characteristic

For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel> and INDir>, and
residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel>. In addition, the angle shall
be in the set area defined by ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical
diagram in Figure 251.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir

498
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

This variant has definite time delay.

Directional functions

For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in
the forward direction, and STRV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the
directional function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction, a fault in the
reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is
set to operate for faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction will
give the start signal STFW.

Non-directional earth fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle.
The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or backup to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.
The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as
sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country
faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the
sensitive earth fault protection will saturate.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay (TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC
60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the
output signal STNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the
inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection

All the directional functions shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher
than a set level UNRel>.
In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection,
with its own definite time delay tUN and set level UN>.
For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output
signal STUN is active for the set delay tUNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP
and TRUN get activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is
shown in Figure 251.

499
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

OpINNonDir> = On

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STNDIN

&

INNonDir>

TRNDIN

TimeChar

IN

OpUN> = On

STUN

&

UN>

tUN
t

TRUN

OpMode = 3I0Cosfi
INRel>

&

UNRel>

&
tDef
t

INCosPhi>

OpMode = 3I0 and fi

&

INDir>

&
tDef
t

OpMode = 3I03U0Cosfi

&

SN>

STDIRIN

TRDIRIN

&
t

Direction
Detection
Logic

RCADir
RCAComp

S
N

STFW

&

STRV

&

ROADir
DirMode = Forward
DirMode = Reverse

IEC06000653.vsd

IEC06000653 V4 EN

Figure 251:

8.6.8

Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection

Technical data
Table 252:

SDEPSDE technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate level for 3I0cosj

directional residual
overcurrent

(0.25-200.00)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for 3I03U0

cosj directional residual
power

(0.25-200.00)% of SBase

1.0% of Sr at S Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr

Operate level for 3I0 and j

residual overcurrent

(0.25-200.00)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

500
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

8.7

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate level for nondirectional overcurrent

(1.00-400.00)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for nondirectional residual

overvoltage

(1.00-200.00)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Residual release current for

all directional modes

(0.25-200.00)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Residual release voltage for

all directional modes

(1.00-300.00)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate time for nondirectional residual

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset

Min = 40 ms

Reset time for non-directional

residual overcurrent at 2 to 0
x Iset

Min = 40 ms

Operate time for directional

residual overcurrent at 0 to 2
x Iset

Min = 115 ms

Reset time for directional

residual overcurrent at 2 to 0
x Iset

Min = 25 ms

Independent time delay for

non-directional residual
overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Uset

(0.000 60.000) sec

0.2% or 80 ms whichever is
greater

Independent time delay for

non-directional residual
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.000 60.000) sec

0.2% or 80 ms whichever is
greater

Independent time delay for

directional residual
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.000 60.000) sec

0.2% or 180 ms whichever is

greater

Inverse characteristics

16 curve types

See table 1038, table 1039 and table

1040

Relay characteristic angle

RCA

(-179 to 180) degrees

2.0 degrees

Relay Open angle ROA

(0 to 90) degrees

2.0 degrees

Max = 65 ms

Max = 65 ms

Max = 165 ms

Max = 65 ms

Thermal overload protection, one time constant,

Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR

501
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.7.1

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Identification
Function description

8.7.2

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Thermal overload protection, one time

constant, Celsius

LCPTTR

26

Thermal overload protection, one time

constant, Fahrenheit

LFPTTR

26

Functionality
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the thermal limits has
generated a need of a thermal overload protection for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius
or Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used is LCPTTR (Celsius) or
LFPTTR (Fahrenheit).
An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.
Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after
operation are presented.

502
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.7.3

Function block
LCPTTR
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
ENMULT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

TRIP
START
ALARM
LOCKOUT

IEC13000199-1-en.vsd
IEC13000199 V1 EN

LFPTTR
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
ENMULT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

TRIP
START
ALARM
LOCKOUT

IEC13000301-1-en.vsd
IEC13000301 V1 EN

Figure 252:

8.7.4

LCPTTR/LFPTTR function bloc

Signals
Table 253:
Name

LCPTTR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

ENMULT

BOOLEAN

Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or

more lines

AMBTEMP

REAL

Ambient temperature from external temperature

sensor

SENSFLT

BOOLEAN

Validity status of ambient temperature sensor

RESET

BOOLEAN

Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 254:

LFPTTR Input signals

Name

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

ENMULT

BOOLEAN

Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or

more lines

AMBTEMP

REAL

Ambient temperature from external temperature

sensor

SENSFLT

BOOLEAN

Validity status of ambient temperature sensor

RESET

BOOLEAN

Reset of internal thermal load counter

503
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 255:

LCPTTR Output signals

Name

Type

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

START

BOOLEAN

Start Signal

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm signal

LOCKOUT

BOOLEAN

Lockout signal

Table 256:

LFPTTR Output signals

Name

8.7.5
Table 257:
Name

Description

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

START

BOOLEAN

Start Signal

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm signal

LOCKOUT

BOOLEAN

Lockout signal

Settings
LCPTTR Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

TRef

0 - 300

Deg C

90

End temperature rise above ambient of

the line when loaded with IRef

IRef

0 - 400

%IB

100

The load current (in % of IBase) leading

to TRef temperature

IMult

1-5

Current multiplier when function is used

for two or more lines

Tau

1 - 1000

Min

45

Time constant of the line in minutes.

AlarmTemp

0 - 200

Deg C

80

Temperature level for start (alarm)

TripTemp

0 - 300

Deg C

90

Temperature level for trip

ReclTemp

0 - 300

Deg C

75

Temperature for reset of lockout after trip

tPulse

0.05 - 0.30

0.01

0.10

Operate pulse length. Minimum one

execution cycle

AmbiSens

Off
On

Off

External temperature sensor available

DefaultAmbTemp

-50 - 100

Deg C

20

Ambient temperature used when

AmbiSens is set to Off.

DefaultTemp

-50 - 300

Deg C

50

Temperature raise above ambient

temperature at startup

Table 258:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

LCPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

504
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 259:
Name

LFPTTR Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

TRef

0 - 600

Deg F

160

End temperature rise above ambient of

the line when loaded with IRef

IRef

0 - 400

%IB

100

The load current (in % of IBase) leading

to TRef temperature

IMult

1-5

Current multiplier when function is used

for two or more lines

Tau

1 - 1000

Min

45

Time constant of the line in minutes.

AlarmTemp

0 - 400

Deg F

175

Temperature level for start (alarm)

TripTemp

0 - 600

Deg F

195

Temperature level for trip

ReclTemp

0 - 600

Deg F

170

Temperature for reset of lockout after trip

tPulse

0.05 - 0.30

0.01

0.10

Operate pulse length. Minimum one

execution cycle

AmbiSens

Off
On

Off

External temperature sensor available

DefaultAmbTemp

-50 - 250

Deg F

60

Ambient temperature used when

AmbiSens is set to Off.

DefaultTemp

-50 - 600

Deg F

100

Temperature raise above ambient

temperature at startup

Table 260:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

8.7.6

LFPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 261:
Name

LCPTTR Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

TTRIP

INTEGER

Estimated time to trip (in

min)

TENRECL

REAL

Estimated time to reset

of lockout (in min)

TEMP

REAL

deg

Calculated temperature
of the device

TEMPAMB

REAL

deg

Ambient temperature
used in the calculations

TERMLOAD

REAL

Temperature relative to
operate temperature

505
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 262:

LFPTTR Monitored data

Name

8.7.7

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

TTRIP

INTEGER

Estimated time to trip (in

min)

TENRECL

REAL

Estimated time to reset

of lockout (in min)

TEMP

REAL

Temperature
Fahrenheit

Calculated temperature
of the device

TEMPAMB

REAL

Temperature
Fahrenheit

Ambient temperature
used in the calculations

TERMLOAD

REAL

Temperature relative to
operate temperature

Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal
overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR function. The
temperature is displayed either in Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on whether
LCPTTR/LFPTTR function is selected.
From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated
according to the expression:

Q final

I
=
I ref

Tref

EQUATION1167 V1 EN

(Equation 122)

where:
I

is the largest phase current,

Iref

is a given reference current and

Tref

is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this

temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a START
output signal is activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

506
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Dt

Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t

EQUATION1168 V1 EN

(Equation 123)

where:
Qn

is the calculated present temperature,

Qn-1

is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,

Qfinal

is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,

Dt

is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant
value. The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal,
TEMP.
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the
output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip
level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:

Q
- Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1169 V1 EN

(Equation 124)

The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated
when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting
ReclTemp.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

Q
- Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final

Q
Q
final
n

EQUATION1170 V1 EN

(Equation 125)

507
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

In the above equation, the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient
temperature. The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure
signal, TENRECL. This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated.
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the
parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one
line is used in the protection algorithm by dividing the measured current by the
total number of cables. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be activated.
The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.

508
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

START

Final Temp > Trip Temp

TEMP

Calculation of actual
temperature

AMBTEMP

ALARM

Actual Temp > Alarm Temp

I3P

ENMULT

Calculation of final
temperature
TRIP

Actual Temp > Trip Temp

SENSFLT

Lockout logic

BLOCK

LOCKOUT

Actual Temp < Recl Temp

Calculation of time to trip

TTRIP

BLKTR

Calculation of time to reset

of lockout

TENRECL

IEC09000637-2-en.vsd
IEC09000637 V2 EN

Figure 253:

Functional overview of LCPTTR/LFPTTR

509
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.7.8

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 263:

LCPTTR/LFPTTR technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Reference current

(2-400)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Reference temperature

(0-300)C, (0 - 600)F

1.0C, 2.0F

Operate time:

Time constant t = (11000)

minutes

IEC 60255-8,
5.0% or 200
ms whichever is
greater

Alarm temperature

(0-200)C, (0-400)F

2.0C, 4.0F

Operate temperature

(0-300)C, (0-600)F

2.0C, 4.0F

Reset level temperature

(0-300)C, (0-600)F

2.0C, 4.0F

2
2

I - Ip
t = t ln
2 2 TTrip - TAmb 2
I ref
I - Ip - T
ref

EQUATION13000039 V2 EN

(Equation 126)

TTrip= set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs

8.8

Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR

8.8.1

Identification
Function description
Thermal overload protection, two time
constants

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

TRPTTR

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
49

SYMBOL-A V1 EN

8.8.2

Functionality
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be
damaged. The insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a
consequence of this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults will
increase.

510
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the
transformer (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal
model of the transformer with two time constants, which is based on current
measurement.
Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be
done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to
increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.
The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.

8.8.3

Function block
TRPTTR
I3P*
BLOCK
COOLING
ENMULT
RESET

TRIP
START
ALARM1
ALARM2
LOCKOUT
WARNING
IEC06000272_2_en.vsd

IEC06000272 V2 EN

Figure 254:

8.8.4

TRPTTR function block

Signals
Table 264:
Name

TRPTTR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

COOLING

BOOLEAN

Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and

time constant

ENMULT

BOOLEAN

Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting

RESET

BOOLEAN

Reset of function

Table 265:

TRPTTR Output signals

Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip Signal

START

BOOLEAN

Start signal

ALARM1

BOOLEAN

First level alarm signal

ALARM2

BOOLEAN

Second level alarm signal

LOCKOUT

BOOLEAN

Lockout signal

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Warning signal: Trip within set warning time

511
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.8.5
Table 266:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
TRPTTR Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

IRef

10.0 - 1000.0

%IB

1.0

100.0

Reference current in % of IBase

IRefMult

0.01 - 10.00

0.01

1.00

Multiplication Factor for reference current

IBase1

30.0 - 250.0

%IB

1.0

100.0

Base current,IBase1 without Cooling

input in % of IBase

IBase2

30.0 - 250.0

%IB

1.0

100.0

Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input

ON in % of IBase

Tau1

1.0 - 500.0

Min

1.0

60.0

Time constant without cooling input in

min, with IBase1

Tau2

1.0 - 500.0

Min

1.0

60.0

Time constant with cooling input in min,

with IBase2

IHighTau1

30.0 - 250.0

%IB1

1.0

100.0

Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling

TC1 by TC1-IHIGH

Tau1High

5 - 2000

%tC1

100

Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is >

IHIGH-TC1

ILowTau1

30.0 - 250.0

%IB1

1.0

100.0

Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling

TC1 by TC1-ILOW

Tau1Low

5 - 2000

%tC1

100

Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is <

ILOW-TC1

IHighTau2

30.0 - 250.0

%IB2

1.0

100.0

Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling

TC2 by TC2-IHIGH

Tau2High

5 - 2000

%tC2

100

Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is

>IHIGH-TC2

ILowTau2

30.0 - 250.0

%IB2

1.0

100.0

Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling

TC2 by TC2-ILOW

Tau2Low

5 - 2000

%tC2

100

Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is <

ILOW-TC2

ITrip

50.0 - 250.0

%IBx

1.0

110.0

Steady state operate current level in %

of IBasex

Alarm1

50.0 - 99.0

%Itr

1.0

80.0

First alarm level in % of heat content trip

value

Alarm2

50.0 - 99.0

%Itr

1.0

90.0

Second alarm level in % of heat content

trip value

ResLo

10.0 - 95.0

%Itr

1.0

60.0

Lockout reset level in % of heat content

trip value

ThetaInit

0.0 - 95.0

1.0

50.0

Initial Heat content, in % of heat content

trip value

Warning

1.0 - 500.0

Min

0.1

30.0

Time setting, below which warning would

be set (in min)

tPulse

0.01 - 0.30

0.01

0.10

Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec).

512
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 267:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

8.8.6

TRPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

1 - 12

Step

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 268:

TRPTTR Monitored data

Name

8.8.7

Default

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

HEATCONT

REAL

Percentage of the heat

content of the
transformer

I-MEASUR

REAL

Current measured by the

function in % of the rated
current

TTRIP

INTEGER

Estimated time to trip (in

min)

TRESLO

INTEGER

Estimated time to reset

of the function (in min)

TTRIPCAL

INTEGER

0=Not Active
1=Long Time
2=Active

Calculated time status to

trip: not active/long time/
active

TRESCAL

INTEGER

0=Not Active
1=Long Time
2=Active

Calculated time status to

reset: not active/long
time/active

Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the true RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values
are fed to the protection function.
From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat
content) is calculated according to the expression:

Q final

I
=
I ref

(Equation 127)

EQUATION1171 V1 EN

where:
I

is the largest phase current

Iref

is a given reference current

513
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current, then the start output signal START
will be activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
If

Q final > Q n
(Equation 128)

EQUATION1172 V1 EN

Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final

Dt

- Q n-1 ) 1 - e t

(Equation 129)

EQUATION1173 V1 EN

If

Q final < Qn
(Equation 130)

EQUATION1174 V1 EN

Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Q n -1 ) e

Dt

(Equation 131)

EQUATION1175 V1 EN

where:
Qn

is the calculated present temperature

Qn-1

is the calculated temperature at the previous time step

Qfinal

is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current

Dt

is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature

is the set thermal time constant Tau1 or Tau2 for the protected transformer

The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported

from the function as a real figure HEATCONT.
When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or
Alarm2 the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When
the temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to
continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.
There is also a calculation of the time to operation with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:

Q
- Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1176 V1 EN

(Equation 132)

514
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as
an integer output TTRIP.
After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The
output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is
above the set lockout release temperature setting ResLo.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.

Q
- Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final

Q final - Q n

EQUATION1177 V1 EN

(Equation 133)

In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation

127. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported
from the function as a real figure, TRESLO.
When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated
time to trip is continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this
calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output
WARNING is activated.
In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.

515
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Final Temp
> TripTemp

RESET

START

HEATCONT

Calculation
of heat
content

I3P
ENMULT

Calculation
of final
temperature

ALARM1

Actual Temp >

Alarm1,Alarm2
Temp

ALARM2

Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp

COOLING

Management of
setting
parameters: Tau,
IBase

S
R

Tau used

LOCKOUT

Actual Temp
< Recl
Temp

Calculation
of time to
trip

Calculation
of time to
reset of
lockout

TTRIP
WARNING

TRESCAL

IEC05000833-2-en.vsd
IEC05000833 V2 EN

Figure 255:

Functional overview of TRPTTR

516
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.8.8

Technical data
Table 269:

TRPTTR technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Base current 1 and 2

(30250)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Operate time:

Ip = load current before overload

occurs
Time constant = (1500)
minutes

5.0% or 200 ms whichever

is greater

Alarm level 1 and 2

(5099)% of heat content

operate value

2.0% of heat content trip

Operate current

(50250)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Reset level temperature

(1095)% of heat content trip

2.0% of heat content trip

I 2 - I p2

t = t ln
I 2 - I ref 2

EQUATION1356 V2 EN

(Equation 134)

I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
Iref = reference load current

8.9

Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and

output CCRBRF

8.9.1

Identification
Function description
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase
activation and output

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

CCRBRF

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50BF

3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN

8.9.2

Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based,
contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve
high security against inadvertent operation.
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.

517
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria
can be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase
plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip
command.
CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of
the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an
incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.

8.9.3

Function block
CCRBRF
I3P*
BLOCK
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
CBCLDL1
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT

TRBU
TRBU2
TRRET
TRRETL1
TRRETL2
TRRETL3
CBALARM

IEC06000188-2-en.vsd
IEC06000188 V2 EN

Figure 256:

8.9.4

CCRBRF function block

Signals
Table 270:
Name

CCRBRF Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for current inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

START

BOOLEAN

Three phase start of breaker failure protection

function

STL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal of phase L1

STL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal of phase L2

STL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal of phase L3

CBCLDL1

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker closed in phase L1

CBCLDL2

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker closed in phase L2

CBCLDL3

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker closed in phase L3

CBFLT

BOOLEAN

CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip

instantaneously

518
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 271:

CCRBRF Output signals

Name

8.9.5
Table 272:
Name

Type

Description

TRBU

BOOLEAN

Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function

TRBU2

BOOLEAN

Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection

function

TRRET

BOOLEAN

Retrip by breaker failure protection function

TRRETL1

BOOLEAN

Retrip by breaker failure protection function

phase L1

TRRETL2

BOOLEAN

Retrip by breaker failure protection function

phase L2

TRRETL3

BOOLEAN

Retrip by breaker failure protection function

phase L3

CBALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

Settings
CCRBRF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

FunctionMode

Current
Contact
Current/Contact

Current

Detection for trip based on Current/

Contact/Current&Contact

BuTripMode

2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4

1 out of 3

Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out of

3 or 1 out of 4

RetripMode

Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check

Retrip Off

Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos

Check/No CB Pos Check

IP>

5 - 200

%IB

10

Operate phase current level in % of IBase

IN>

2 - 200

%IB

10

Operate residual current level in % of

IBase

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of re-trip

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Time delay of back-up trip

t2MPh

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase

start

tPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Trip pulse duration

Table 273:
Name

CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

I>BlkCont

5 - 200

%IB

20

I> in % of IBase block operation using

Function Mode Contact

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.030

Additional time delay to t2 for a second

back-up trip

tCBAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit

breaker indicated

519
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

Table 274:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

8.9.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 275:
Name

8.9.7

Unit

CCRBRF Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

IL1

REAL

Measured current in
phase L1

IL2

REAL

Measured current in
phase L2

IL3

REAL

Measured current in
phase L3

IN

REAL

Measured residual
current

Operation principle
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase
selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second
attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set
time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used.
The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line
protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With
the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit
breaker is larger than the operate current level.
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is
detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS
evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication.
The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening,
that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact
detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its
time a back-up trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:

The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the backup trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-

520
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed

breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out
of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or
high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/
or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and
for multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if
the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
30 ms

START
STL1

OR

BFP Started L1
150 ms
AND

S
R

BLOCK

SR

AND

Time out L1

OR

Reset L1

Retrip Time Out L1

BackupTrip L1

OR

IEC09000976-1-en.vsd
IEC09000976 V1 EN

Figure 257:

Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic

IP>
a
b

FunctionMode

a>b

Current

OR

AND

OR

Time out L1
OR

Current and Contact

IL1

AND

Current High L1
CB Closed L1

AND

OR

BFP Started L1
a

I>BlkCont
CBCLDL1

Reset L1

Contact

a>b

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

Contact Closed L1

IEC09000977-1-en.vsd
IEC09000977 V1 EN

Figure 258:

Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF, CB position evaluation

521
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BFP Started L1

t1

RetripMode

OR

TRRET

OR

TRRETL1

OR

OR

AND

CB Pos Check
CB Closed L1

CBFLT

TRRETL2

tPulse

AND

No CBPos Check
1

TRRETL3

From other
phases

Retrip Time Out L1

AND

IEC09000978-3-en.vsd

IEC09000978 V3 EN

Figure 259:

Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

BFP Started L1
BFP Started L2

AND

BFP Started L3

AND

IN

IN>

BUTripMode
1

From other
phases

a>b

Contact Closed L1

2 out of 4
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
Current High L2
Current High L3

OR
OR

Current High L1
CBFLT

AND

AND

BFP Started L1

t2
t

t2MPh
AND

OR

From other
phases

BFP Started L2

AND

OR

AND

Backup Trip L1

OR

tPulse

From other Backup Trip L2

phases Backup Trip L3

OR

2 of 3

OR

TRBU

tPulse

BFP Started L3

t3
S
AND

SR

OR

TRBU2

IEC09000979-3-en.vsd

IEC09000979 V3 EN

Figure 260:

Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function

Internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, Current High L3 have
logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting
parameter IP>.

522
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.9.8

Technical data
Table 276:

CCRBRF technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate phase
current

(5-200)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase

current

> 95%

Operate residual
current

(2-200)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual

current

> 95%

Phase current level

for blocking of
contact function

(5-200)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio

> 95%

Operate time for

current detection

10 ms typically

Reset time for

current detection

15 ms maximum

Time delay for re-trip

at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater

Time delay for backup trip at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater

Time delay for backup trip at multi-phase

start at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 20 ms whichever is
greater

Additional time delay

for a second back-up
trip at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 20 ms whichever is
greater

Time delay for alarm

for faulty circuit
breaker

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater

8.10

Pole discordance protection CCPDSC

8.10.1

Identification
Function description
Pole discordance protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

CCPDSC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
52PD

PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN

523
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.10.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal
stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
persists the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.
The Pole discordance protection function CCPDSC operates based on information
from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional
criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

8.10.3

Function block
CCPDSC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL

TRIP
START

IEC13000305-1-en.vsd
IEC13000305 V1 EN

Figure 261:

8.10.4

CCPDSC function block

Signals
Table 277:
Name

CCPDSC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase currents

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKDBYAR

BOOLEAN

Block of function at CB single phase auto reclosing cycle

CLOSECMD

BOOLEAN

Close order to CB

OPENCMD

BOOLEAN

Open order to CB

EXTPDIND

BOOLEAN

Pole discordance signal from CB logic

POLE1OPN

BOOLEAN

Pole one opened indication from CB

POLE1CL

BOOLEAN

Pole one closed indication from CB

POLE2OPN

BOOLEAN

Pole two opened indication from CB

POLE2CL

BOOLEAN

Pole two closed indication from CB

POLE3OPN

BOOLEAN

Pole three opened indication from CB

POLE3CL

BOOLEAN

Pole three closed indication from CB

524
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 278:

CCPDSC Output signals

Name

8.10.5
Table 279:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal to CB

START

BOOLEAN

Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

Settings
CCPDSC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

Time delay between trip condition and

trip signal

ContSel

Off
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.

Off

Contact function selection

CurrSel

Off
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor

Off

Current function selection

CurrUnsymLevel

0 - 100

80

Unsym magn of lowest phase current

compared to the highest.

CurrRelLevel

0 - 100

%IB

10

Current magnitude for release of the

function in % of IBase

Table 280:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

8.10.6

CCPDSC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 281:
Name

8.10.7

Unit

CCPDSC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

IMin

REAL

Lowest phase current

IMax

REAL

Highest phase current

Operation principle
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 262.

525
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

circuit breaker

Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker

en05000287.vsd
IEC05000287 V2 EN

Figure 262:

Pole discordance external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 263.
C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B.

poleTwoClosed from C.B.
poleThreeClosed from C.B.
+

poleOneOpened from C.B.

poleTwoOpened from C.B.
poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd

IEC05000288 V1 EN

Figure 263:

Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set
delay.
Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current
measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the
largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the
setting CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer
(tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP
signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be

526
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open

or close command.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences
with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance
protection function CCPDSC is shown in figure 264.
BLOCK
OR

BLKDBYAR

PolPosAuxCont
AND

POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL

Discordance
detection
AND

t
t

150 ms
TRIP

OR
PD Signal from CB
AND

EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD

t+200 ms
OR

OPENCMD

AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN

Figure 264:

Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCPDSC contact and current based

CCPDSC is blocked if:

The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single
phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal
1PT1 on SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external
device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this
527
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress

from the external autoreclosing device.
If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can
generate a trip signal TRIP:

8.10.7.1

Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

Unsymmetrical current detection.

Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discordance status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO
contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for
each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a
150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.

8.10.7.2

Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
three phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set
time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker
has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200
ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load
conditions.
The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs
can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from
the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may
be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close
command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

528
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.10.8

Technical data
Table 282:

CCPDSC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(0100)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Independent time delay

between trip condition and trip
signal

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 25 ms whichever
is greater

8.11

Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP

8.11.1

Identification
Function description
Directional underpower protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

GUPPDUP

P<

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37

2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN

8.11.2

Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not
to protect the generator itself.
Figure 265 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.

529
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Underpower IED

Overpower IED

Operate
Line

Operate
Line

Margin

Margin

Operating point
without
turbine torque

Operating point
without
turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 265:

8.11.3

Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

Function block
GUPPDUP
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2

TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
START
START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
IEC07000027-2-en.vsd

IEC07000027 V2 EN

Figure 266:

8.11.4

GUPPDUP function block

Signals
Table 283:
Name

GUPPDUP Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Current group connection

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage group connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLOCK1

BOOLEAN

Block of stage 1

BLOCK2

BOOLEAN

Block of stage 2

530
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 284:

GUPPDUP Output signals

Name

8.11.5
Table 285:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TRIP1

BOOLEAN

Trip of stage 1

TRIP2

BOOLEAN

Trip of stage 2

START

BOOLEAN

Common start

START1

BOOLEAN

Start of stage 1

START2

BOOLEAN

Start of stage 2

REAL

Active Power in MW

PPERCENT

REAL

Active power in % of SBase

REAL

Reactive power in MVAr

QPERCENT

REAL

Reactive power in % of SBase

Settings
GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OpMode1

Off
UnderPower

UnderPower

Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On

Power1

0.0 - 500.0

%SB

0.1

1.0

Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1

direction in % of SBase

Angle1

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Characteristic angle for max power

senistivity stage 1

TripDelay1

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Trip delay for stage 1

DropDelay1

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.06

Drop-off delay for stage 1

OpMode2

Off
UnderPower

UnderPower

Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On

Power2

0.0 - 500.0

%SB

0.1

1.0

Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase

Angle2

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Characteristic angle for max power

senistivity stage 2

TripDelay2

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Trip delay for stage 2

DropDelay2

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.06

Drop-off delay for stage 2

Step

Default

Table 286:
Name

GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

0.000 - 0.999

0.001

0.000

Low pass filter coefficient for power

measurement, P and Q

Hysteresis1

0.2 - 5.0

%SB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % SBase

Hysteresis2

0.2 - 5.0

%SB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % SBase

IAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

current error at 5% of Ir

Table continues on next page

531
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

current error at 30% of Ir

IAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

current error at 100% of Ir

UAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

voltage error at 5% of Ur

UAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

voltage error at 30% of Ur

UAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

voltage error at 100% of Ur

IAngComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Corr of error betw current and voltage

angles at 5% of Ir

IAngComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Corr of error betw current and voltage

angles at 30% of Ir

IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Corr of error betw current and voltage

angles at 100% of Ir

Table 287:
Name

GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

Mode

L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

Pos Seq

Selection of measured current and

voltage

8.11.6

Monitored data
Table 288:
Name

8.11.7

GUPPDUP Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

REAL

MW

Active Power in MW

PPERCENT

REAL

Active power in % of
SBase

REAL

MVAr

Reactive power in MVAr

QPERCENT

REAL

Reactive power in % of
SBase

Operation principle
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is
shown in figure 267. The function has two stages with individual settings.

532
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Chosen current
phasors

Chosen voltage
phasors

P
Complex
power
calculation

Derivation of
S(composant)
in Char angle

S(angle)

S(angle) <
Power1

TRIP1
START1

S(angle) <
Power2

TRIP2
START2

P = POWRE
Q = POWIM

IEC09000018-2-en.vsd
IEC09000018 V2 EN

Figure 267:

Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 289.
Table 289:

Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode

L1, L2, L3

Formula used for complex power calculation

S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN

Arone

S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN

PosSeq

(Equation 138)

S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN

L3L1

(Equation 137)

S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN

L2L3

(Equation 136)

S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN

L1L2

(Equation 135)

(Equation 139)

S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN

(Equation 140)

Table continues on next page

533
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Set value: Mode

L1

Formula used for complex power calculation

S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN

L2

S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN

L3

(Equation 141)

(Equation 142)

S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN

(Equation 143)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting
Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is
activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For
directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay
TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At
trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The
absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + droppower1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very
low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be
calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) +
Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will
reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop
out and that the timer of the stage will reset.

8.11.7.1

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is
possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the

534
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following

recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 144)

EQUATION1959 V1 EN

Where
S

is a new measured value to be used for the protection function

Sold

is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k
TD

is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
k=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

8.11.7.2

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
268.

535
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 268:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values
or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in
percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value:
Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

8.11.8

Technical data
Table 290:

GUPPDUP technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Power level
for Step 1 and Step 2

(0.0500.0)% of SBase

1.0% of Sr at S Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
where

Characteristic angle
for Step 1 and Step 2

(-180.0180.0) degrees

2.0 degrees

Independent time delay to operate for

Step 1 and Step 2 at 2 to 0.5 x Sr and
k=0.000

(0.01-6000.00) s

0.2% or 40 ms
whichever is greater

536
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.12

Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP

8.12.1

Identification
Function description
Directional overpower protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

GOPPDOP

P>

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
32

2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN

8.12.2

Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to
protect the generator itself.
Figure 269 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

537
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Underpower IED

Overpower IED

Operate
Line

Operate
Line

Margin

Margin

Operating point
without
turbine torque

Operating point
without
turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 269:

8.12.3

Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

Function block
GOPPDOP
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2

TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
START
START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
IEC07000028-2-en.vsd

IEC07000028 V2 EN

Figure 270:

8.12.4

GOPPDOP function block

Signals
Table 291:
Name

GOPPDOP Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Current group connection

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage group connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLOCK1

BOOLEAN

Block of stage 1

BLOCK2

BOOLEAN

Block of stage 2

538
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 292:

GOPPDOP Output signals

Name

8.12.5
Table 293:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TRIP1

BOOLEAN

Trip of stage 1

TRIP2

BOOLEAN

Trip of stage 2

START

BOOLEAN

Common start

START1

BOOLEAN

Start of stage 1

START2

BOOLEAN

Start of stage 2

REAL

Active power P in MW

PPERCENT

REAL

Active power P in % of SBase

REAL

Reactive power Q in MVAr

QPERCENT

REAL

Reactive power Q in % of SBase

Settings
GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OpMode1

Off
OverPower

OverPower

Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On

Power1

0.0 - 500.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1

direction in % of SBase

Angle1

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Characteristic angle for max power

senistivity stage 1

TripDelay1

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Trip delay for stage 1

DropDelay1

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.06

Drop-off delay for stage 1

OpMode2

Off
OverPower

OverPower

Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On

Power2

0.0 - 500.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2

direction in % of SBase

Angle2

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Characteristic angle for max power

senistivity stage 2

TripDelay2

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Trip delay for stage 2

DropDelay2

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.06

Drop-off delay for stage 2

539
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

Table 294:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

0.000 - 0.999

0.001

0.000

Low pass filter coefficient for power

measurement, P and Q

Hysteresis1

0.2 - 5.0

%SB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of

SBase

Hysteresis2

0.2 - 5.0

%SB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of

SBase

IAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

current error at 5% of Ir

IAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

current error at 30% of Ir

IAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

current error at 100% of Ir

UAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

voltage error at 5% of Ur

UAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

voltage error at 30% of Ur

UAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude correction compensates

voltage error at 100% of Ur

IAngComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Corr of error betw current and voltage

angles at 5% of Ir

IAngComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Corr of error betw current and voltage

angles at 30% of Ir

IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Corr of error betw current and voltage

angles at 100% of Ir

Table 295:
Name

GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

Mode

L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

Pos Seq

Selection of measured current and

voltage

540
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.12.6

Monitored data
Table 296:
Name

8.12.7

GOPPDOP Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

REAL

MW

Active power P in MW

PPERCENT

REAL

Active power P in % of
SBase

REAL

MVAr

Reactive power Q in
MVAr

QPERCENT

REAL

Reactive power Q in %
of SBase

Operation principle
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is
shown in figure 271. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors

Chosen voltage
phasors

P
Complex
power
calculation

Derivation of
S(composant)
in Char angle

S(angle)

S(angle) >
Power1

TRIP1
START1

S(angle) >
Power2

TRIP2
START2

P = POWRE
Q = POWIM

IEC06000567-2-en.vsd
IEC06000567 V2 EN

Figure 271:

Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 297.

541
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 297:
Set value: Mode
L1, L2, L3

Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation

S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN

Arone

S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN

PosSeq

(Equation 151)

S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN

L3

(Equation 150)

S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN

L2

(Equation 149)

S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN

L1

(Equation 148)

S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN

L3L1

(Equation 147)

S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN

L2L3

(Equation 146)

S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN

L1L2

(Equation 145)

(Equation 152)

S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN

(Equation 153)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting
Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a
trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of
any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any
of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The
absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) droppower1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low,
normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be

542
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2)

Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out
ant that the timer of the stage will reset.

8.12.7.1

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is
possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the
measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 154)

EQUATION1959 V1 EN

Where
S

is a new measured value to be used for the protection function

Sold

is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k

is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k =
0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

8.12.7.2

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
272.

543
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 272:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of
base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in
percent of base power: QPERCENT.

544
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.12.8

Technical data
Table 298:

GOPPDOP technical data

Function

Range or value

Accurac
y

Power level
for Step 1 and Step 2

(0.0500.0)% of SBase

1.0%
of Sr
at S
Sr

1.0%
of S at
S > Sr

Characteristic angle
for Step 1 and Step 2

(-180.0180.0) degrees

2.0
degree
s

Operate time, start at 0.5 to 2 x Sr and k=0.000

Min =10 ms
Max = 25 ms

Reset time, start at 2 to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000

Min = 35 ms
Max = 55 ms

Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 and

Step 2 at 0.5 to 2 x Sr and k=0.000

(0.01-6000.00) s

8.13

Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

8.13.1

Identification
Function description
Broken conductor check

8.13.2

IEC 61850
identification
BRCPTOC

IEC 60617
identification
-

0.2%
or
40 ms
whiche
ver is
greate
r

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46

Functionality
Conventional protection functions cannot detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase
selective current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected,
gives an alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.

545
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.13.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
BRCPTOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
START

IEC07000034-2-en.vsd
IEC07000034 V2 EN

Figure 273:

8.13.4

BRCPTOC function block

Signals
Table 299:

BRCPTOC Input signals

Name

Type

Group signal for current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

BRCPTOC Output signals

Name

Table 301:
Name

Description

GROUP
SIGNAL

Table 300:

8.13.5

Default

I3P

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Operate signal of the protection logic

START

BOOLEAN

Start signal of the protection logic

Settings
BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

Iub>

50 - 90

%IM

50

Highest and lowest phase currents

difference in % of highest phase current

IP>

5 - 100

%IB

20

Minimum phase current for operation of

Iub> in % of IBase

tOper

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Operate time delay

Table 302:
Name
tReset

BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

0.010 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.100

Description
Time delay in reset

546
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 303:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

8.13.6

BRCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 304:
Name
IUNBAL

8.13.7

Unit

BRCPTOC Monitored data

Type
REAL

Values (Range)
-

Unit
-

Description
Measured unbalance of
phase currents

Operation principle
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by
detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The currentmeasuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.
The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if:

The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the
highest phase current
The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel

lines. If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will
experience an increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first
two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period
longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated.
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 274
BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:

The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local
HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal
functions.

547
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip
to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE

and
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START

or

BLOCK

Function Enable
and

Unsymmetrical
Current Detection

tOper
t

TRIP

STI
IL1<50%IP>
IL2<50%IP>

or

IL3<50%IP>
IEC09000158-3-en.vsd
IEC09000158 V3 EN

Figure 274:

8.13.8

Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

Technical data
Table 305:

BRCPTOC technical data

Function

8.14

Range or value

Accuracy

Minimum phase current for operation

(5100)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Unbalance current operation

(5090)% of maximum current

1.0% of Ir

Independent operate time delay

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 45 ms
whichever is greater

Independent reset time delay

(0.010-60.000) s

0.2% or 30 ms
whichever is greater

Start time at current change from Ir to 0

Min = 25 ms
Max = 35 ms

Reset time at current change from 0 to Ir

Min = 5 ms
Max = 20 ms

Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC

548
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.14.1

8.14.2

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Capacitor bank protection

CBPGAPC

Functionality
Shunt Capacitor Banks (SCB) are used in a power system to provide reactive
power compensation and power factor correction. They are as well used as integral
parts of Static Var Compensators (SVC) or Harmonic Filters installations.
Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function is specially designed to provide
protection and supervision features for SCBs.

8.14.3

Function block
CBPGAPC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKOC
BLKUC
BLKUCCUT
BLKQOL
BLKHOL

TRIP
TROC
TRUC
TRQOL
TRHOL
START
STOC
STUC
STQOL
STHOL
STOCL1
STOCL2
STOCL3
STUCL1
STUCL2
STUCL3
STQOLL1
STQOLL2
STQOLL3
STHDTL1
STHDTL2
STHDTL3
STHIDML1
STHIDML2
STHIDML3
RECNINH

IEC14000046-1-en.vsd
IEC08000500 V2 EN

Figure 275:

8.14.4

CBPGAPC function block

Signals
Table 306:
Name

CBPGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three Phase Current Input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block the complete function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block all trip output signals

Table continues on next page

549
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

BLKOC

BOOLEAN

Block over current functionality

BLKUC

BOOLEAN

Block under current functionality

BLKUCCUT

BOOLEAN

Block UC function when the capacitor bank is

disconnected

BLKQOL

BOOLEAN

Block reactive power over load functionality

BLKHOL

BOOLEAN

Block harmonic over load functionality

Table 307:
Name

CBPGAPC Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip signal

TROC

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for over current

TRUC

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for under current

TRQOL

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for reactive power over load

TRHOL

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for harmonic over load

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

STOC

BOOLEAN

Start signals for over current

STUC

BOOLEAN

Start signal for under current

STQOL

BOOLEAN

Start signal for reactive power over load

STHOL

BOOLEAN

Start signal for harmonic over load

STOCL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal for over current of phase L1

STOCL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal for over current of phase L2

STOCL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal for over current of phase L3

STUCL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal for under current of phase L1

STUCL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal for under current of phase L2

STUCL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal for under current of phase L3

STQOLL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal for reactive power over load of phase

L1

STQOLL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal for reactive power over load of phase

L2

STQOLL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal for reactive power over load of phase

L3

STHDTL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time

stage phase L1

STHDTL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time

stage phase L2

STHDTL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time

stage phase L3

STHIDML1

BOOLEAN

Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of

phase L1

STHIDML2

BOOLEAN

Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of

phase L2

STHIDML3

BOOLEAN

Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of

phase L3

RECNINH

BOOLEAN

Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit signal

550
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.14.5
Table 308:
Name

Settings
CBPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

OperationRecIn

Off
On

On

Inhibit reconnection for operation Off/On

IRecnInhibit<

4 - 1000

%IB

10

Current in % of IBase below which the

SCB is disconnected

tReconnInhibit

1.00 - 6000.00

0.01

300.00

Time delay for Capacitor Bank voltage to

discharge to <5%

OperationOC

Off
On

On

Operation over current Off/On

IOC>

10 - 900

%IB

135

Start level for over current operation, %

of IBase

tOC

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

30.00

Time delay for over current operation

OperationUC

Off
On

Off

Operation under current Off/On

IUC<

5 - 100

%IB

70

Start level for under current operation in

% of IBase

tUC

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

Time delay for under current operation

OperationQOL

Off
On

On

Operation reactive power over load Off/

On

QOL>

10 - 900

130

Start level for reactive power over load in

%

tQOL

1.00 - 6000.00

0.01

60.00

Time delay for reactive power overload

operation

OperationHOL

Off
On

On

Operation harmonic over load Off/On

HOLDTU>

10 - 500

200

Start value of voltage in % for DT

harmonic voltage overload

tHOLDT

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

Time delay for operation of harmonic

voltage overload

HOLIDMTU>

80 - 200

110

Start value of voltage in % for IDMT

harm. voltage overload

kHOLIDMT

0.50 - 1.50

0.01

1.00

Time multiplier for harmonic voltage

overload IDMT curve

tMaxHOLIDMT

0.05 - 6000.00

0.01

2000.00

Maximum trip delay for harmonic voltage

overload

tMinHOLIDMT

0.05 - 60.00

0.01

0.10

Minimum trip delay for harmonic voltage

overload

Step

Default

Table 309:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

CBPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

551
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.14.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Monitored data
Table 310:
Name

8.14.7

CBPGAPC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CAPDISC

BOOLEAN

Capcitor bank
disconnected

IPEAKL1

REAL

Equivalant RMS current

for phase L1

IPEAKL2

REAL

Equivalant RMS current

for phase L2

IPEAKL3

REAL

Equivalant RMS current

for phase L3

URMSL1

REAL

Calculated voltage RMS

for phase L1

URMSL2

REAL

Calculated voltage RMS

for phase L2

URMSL3

REAL

Calculated voltage RMS

for phase L3

QL1

REAL

Reactive power value for

phase L1

QL2

REAL

Reactive power value for

phase L2

QL3

REAL

Reactive power value for

phase L3

Operation principle
Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function measures the SCB three-phase
current. CBPGAPC has several built-in features:

8.14.7.1

Overcurrent stage
Undercurrent stage
Reconnection inhibit
Harmonic overload
Reactive power overload

Measured quantities
Three-phase input current from the SCB is connected via the preprocessing block
to CBPGAPC function. From this preprocessing block CBPGAPC function obtains
the following quantities for every phase:

Current sample values with sampling rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and
1.2 kHz in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power
system cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous current

552
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

waveform of the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol
i~
Equivalent RMS current value based on Peak Current measurement. This
value is obtained as maximum absolute current sample value over last power
system cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol
IpeakRMS
Equivalent true RMS current value based on the following formula:

~m

TRMS

m =1

N
(Equation 155)

EQUATION2232 V1 EN

where N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (that is, 20) and i~m
are last N samples of the current waveform. In further text this equivalent true rms
current quantity will be marked with symbol ITRMS.
Note that the measured IpeakRMS value is available as a service value in primary
amperes for every phase from the function.
From the measured SCB currents, voltage value across every SCB phase is
calculated. This is done by continuous integration of the measured current
waveform by using the following principal equation:

u (t ) =

1
C

i ( t ) t

(Equation 156)

EQUATION2233 V1 EN

Where:
u(t)

is voltage waveform across capacitor

i(t)

is capacitor current waveform

is capacitance in Farads

By using this integration procedure and subsequent filtering the following

quantities for every phase are calculated within the function:

Voltage sample values with rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz
in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system
cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous voltage waveform
across the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol u~
Equivalent rms voltage value based on Peak Voltage measurement. This value
is obtained as maximum absolute voltage sample value over last power system
cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol UpeakRMS
Equivalent true RMS voltage value based on the following formula:

553
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TRMS

2
~m

m =1

N
(Equation 157)

EQUATION2234 V1 EN

Where:
N

is used number of samples in one power system cycle (for example, 20)

u~m

are last N samples of the voltage waveform

In further text this equivalent true RMS voltage quantity will be marked with
symbol UTRMS
Some additional filtering of the calculated voltage quantities is additionally
performed within the function in order to avoid equivalent RMS voltage values
overshooting during capacitor switching.
In order to avoid dependence of the current integration on exact value of the
protected capacitor bank capacitance the whole integration process is done in per
unit system. In order to convert measured current in primary amperes into per unit
value the base current for the protected capacitor bank shall be known. This value
is set as parameter IBase and it represents the rated SCB current in primary
amperes at fundamental frequency. This value is calculated for a three-phase SCB
as follows:

IBase =

1000 Q [ MVAr ]
3 U [ kV ]

(Equation 158)

EQUATION2235 V1 EN

Where:

IBase

is base current for the function in primary amperes

Q[MVAr]

is shunt capacitor bank MVAr rating

U[kV]

is shunt capacitor bank rated phase-to-phase voltage in kV

Once the base current is known the internal voltage calculations can be performed.
Note that the calculated UpeakRMS value is available as a service value in percent
for every phase from the function.
Generated reactive power (Q) by the capacitor bank is calculated within the
function for every phase as given by the following equation:

Q =U

TRMS

EQUATION2236 V1 EN

TRMS

(Equation 159)

554
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Where:
Q

is generated reactive power in per-unit

UTRMS

is capacitor equivalent true RMS voltage in per-unit

ITRMS

is capacitor equivalent true RMS current in per-unit

Additional filtering of the calculated Q quantity is performed within the function in

order to avoid overshooting during capacitor switching. Note that the calculated Q
value is available as a service value in percent for every phase from the function.
Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase of the
capacitor bank protection function are shown in figure 276.
I3P

I PeakRMS [A]

Overcurrent
Undercurrent

I TRMS[A]

i~ [A]
IBase

u~ [pu]

Reconnection Inhibit

TRMS
FILTER

UTRMS[pu]

PEAK
FILTER

UPeakRMS[pu]

Reactive Power Overload

Harmonic Overload

IEC09000746.vsd
IEC09000746 V1 EN

Figure 276:

8.14.7.2

Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one

phase

Reconnection inhibit feature

This feature determines that capacitor banks are disconnected from the power
system and is used to prevent reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live
network. The IRMS values of the three phase currents are compared with the
IRecnInhibit< parameter in order to determine when the capacitor bank is
energized or disconnected. The simplified logic diagram is shown in fig 277.

555
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

currentRMS

IRecnInhibit<

0.02 s
a>b

CapBank

Energised

CAPDISC
Phx

NOT

IEC08000345-1-en.vsd
IEC08000345 V1 EN

Figure 277:

Capacitor bank energization check for one phase. Similar for all
three phases

When SCB is disconnected in all three phases, the reconnection inhibit signal will
be given. This signal will be active until the preset time elapsed and is used to
inhibit the reconnection of charged capacitor bank to live network. The internal
logic diagram for the inhibit feature is shown in figure 278.
CAPDISC
_ Ph1
CAPDISC

CAPDISC Ph2

tReconnInhibit

AND

AND

CAPDISC Ph3
-2

RECNINH

AND

Z-2

en08000346.vsd
IEC08000346 V1 EN

Figure 278:

8.14.7.3

Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit

Overcurrent feature
The overcurrent protection feature protects the capacitor bank from excessive
current conditions. The sub function takes the current peakRMS value from the
preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the current is
compared with the setting of parameter IOC>. Whenever the peakRMS value of
the current crosses the set level the function sends a START signal as output. The
signal is passed through the definite timer for giving the TRIP signal. Each phase
will have its own START and TRIP signals for overcurrent. The internal logic for
the overcurrent feature is shown in fig 279.

556
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IPeakRMS

a
b

IOC>

tOC

a>b

AND

TROC

AND

OperationOC=On

STOC

BLKTR
BLKOC

OR

BLOCK

IEC08000350-1-en.vsd
IEC08000350 V1 EN

Figure 279:

8.14.7.4

Capacitor bank overcurrent protection

Undercurrent feature
Undercurrent protection feature is used to disconnect the capacitor bank from the
rest of the power system when the voltage at the capacitor bank terminals is too
low for too long period of time. This sub function uses the current peakRMS value
from the preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the
current is compared to the set value of the parameter IUC<. Whenever the
peakRMS value of the current falls below the set undercurrent level, the function
will send a START signal as output. The function can be blocked when the current
falls below the cut off level. The capacitor bank disconnected signals are used for
this blocking. This feature will help to prevent trip operation when the capacitor
bank is disconnected from the power system. The TRIP output signal is delayed by
a definite timer. Each phase will have its own START and TRIP signals for
undercurrent. The internal logic for the undercurrent feature is shown in fig 280.
IPeakRMS

a
b

IUC<

b>a
tUC

AND
OperationUC=On

AND

BLKUC
BLOCK

TRUC

STUC

OR

CAPDISC
BLKTR

en08000351.vsd
IEC08000351 V1 EN

Figure 280:

8.14.7.5

Capacitor bank undercurrent protection

Capacitor harmonic overload feature

Harmonic overload protection feature will protect the capacitor from over load
conditions caused by harmonics. The sub-function protects the capacitor in two

557
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

stages, first stage is Inverse time delay (IDMT) based and a second stage is based
on Definite Time (DT) delay.

Voltage Peak RMS [pu]

IDMT curve has adjustable k factor and inverse time characteristic is shown in
figure 281, where k = 1. The IDMT curve starts only when the equivalent RMS
voltage value is higher than set value of parameter HOLIDMTU> and stays active
until the value falls below the reset value.

2.3
2.1
1.9
1.7
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.1

10

100

1000

10000

Operate Time [s]

IEC08000352-1-en.vsd
IEC08000352 V1 EN

Figure 281:

IDMT curve for harmonic overload (kHOLIDMT=1.0)

Main seven operating points for this IDMT curve are defined by IEC/ANSI
standards and they are shown in above figure and summarized in the following table:
Table 311:

Main operating points for IDMT curve

UpeakRMS
[pu]

1.15

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.7

2.0

2.2

Time [s]

1800

300

60

15

1.0

0.3

0.12

Note the following regarding this IDMT curve:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

When parameter kHOLIDMT has different value from 1.0 operating time is
proportionally changed (for example, when kHOLIDMT =0.9 operating times
will be 90% of the values shown in above figure 281 and table 311)
Between the seven main points in table 311, the operate time is calculate by
using linear interpolation in the logarithmic scale
Integration process is used to calculate the operate time for varying voltage
condition
By setting parameter tMinHOLIDMT =0.1s standard requirements for
minimum operating time of 100ms for harmonic overload IDMT curve can be
fluffed
By setting parameter tMaxHOLIDMT =2000s operation for small harmonics
overload condition when UpeakRMS is in-between 1.1pu and 1.2pu is assured

558
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Harmonic overload definite time curve has settings facilities for independent
pickup and time delay. It can be used as separate tripping stage or as an alarm stage.
Both of these two harmonic overload stages are active during capacitor bank
energizing and are capable to properly measure and operate up to and including 9th
harmonic.
The internal logic for harmonic overload feature is shown in figure 282:
UPeakRMS [pu]

STHDTLx
a
a>b

HOLDTU>

b
tHOLDT

AND

OperationHOL=On

OR

AND

TRHOL

BLKHOL
BLOCK

OR

OR

STHOL

BLKTR

AND

OperationHOL=On
UPeakRMS [pu]

TR

a
a>b

HOLIDMTU>

kHOLIDMT

IDMT

tMaxHOLIDMT
tMinHOLIDMT

ST

STHIDMLx

UPeakRMS [pu]

IEC09000752-1-en.vsd
IEC09000752 V1 EN

Figure 282:

8.14.7.6

Simplified logic diagram for harmonic overload

Capacitor reactive power overload feature

Reactive power overload protection feature will protect the capacitor bank from
reactive power overload conditions.
The sub-function will use the reactive power values as input. The reactive power
input values are calculated from the true RMS value of voltage and current. The
reactive power value is compared with the QOL> setting. When the reactive power
value exceeds the QOL> setting the STQOL signal will be activated. The start
signal is delayed by the definite timer before activating the TRQOL signal. The
internal logic diagram for this feature is shown in figure 283.

559
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Q [pu]

a
a>b
b

QOL>

tQOL

AND

OperationQOL=On

t
TRQOL

AND
BLKTR
BLKQOL

STQOL

OR

BLOCK

en08000353.vsd
IEC08000353 V1 EN

Figure 283:

8.14.8

Capacitor bank reactive power overload protection

Technical data
Table 312:

CBPGAPC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, overcurrent

(10-900)% of lBase

2.0% of Ir at I Ir
2.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent

>95% at (100-900)% of IBase

Start time, overcurrent, at 0

to 2 x Iset

Min = 5 ms
Max = 20 ms

Reset time, overcurrent, at

2 x Iset to 0

Min = 25 ms
Max = 40 ms

Critical impulse time,

overcurrent protection start

2 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
1 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time,

overcurrent protection start

10 ms typically

Operate value,
undercurrent

(5-100)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir

Reset ratio, undercurrent

<105% at (30-100)% of IBase

Operate value,
reconnection inhibit
function

(4-1000)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate value, reactive

power overload function

(10-900)%

1.0% of Sr at S Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr

Operate value, voltage

protection function for
harmonic overload
(Definite time)

(10-500)%

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate value, voltage

protection function for
harmonic overload (Inverse
time)

(80-200)%

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristic

According to IEC 60871-1 (2005) and

IEEE/ANSI C37.99 (2000)

20% or 200 ms
whichever is greater

Table continues on next page

560
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Maximum trip delay,

harmonic overload IDMT

(0.05-6000.00) s

20% or 200 ms
whichever is greater

Minimum trip delay,

harmonic overload IDMT

(0.05-60.00) s

20% or 200 ms
whichever is greater

Independent time delay,

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.2% or 30 ms
whichever is greater

Independent time delay,

undercurrent at 2 x Iset to 0

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.2% or 60 ms
whichever is greater

Independent time delay,

reactive power overload
function at 0 to 2 x QOL>

(1.00-6000.00) s

0.2% or 60 ms
whichever is greater

Independent time delay,

harmonic overload at 0 to 2
x HOL>

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms
whichever is greater

8.15

Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for

machines NS2PTOC

8.15.1

Identification
Function description
Negative sequence time overcurrent
protection for machines

8.15.2

IEC 61850
identification
NS2PTOC

IEC 60617
identification
2I2>

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46I2

Functionality
Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC is intended
primarily for the protection of generators against possible overheating of the rotor
caused by negative sequence current in the stator current.
The negative sequence currents in a generator may, among others, be caused by:

Unbalanced loads
Line to line faults
Line to earth faults
Broken conductors
Malfunction of one or more poles of a circuit breaker or a disconnector

NS2PTOC can also be used as a backup protection, that is, to protect the generator
in case line protections or circuit breakers fail to clear unbalanced system faults.
To provide an effective protection for the generator for external unbalanced
conditions, NS2PTOC is able to directly measure the negative sequence current.

561
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

NS2PTOC also has a time delay characteristic which matches the heating
2
characteristic of the generator I 2 t = K as defined in standard IEEE C50.13.
where:
I2

is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated

generator current

is operating time in seconds

is a constant which depends of the generators size and design

NS2PTOC has a wide range of K settings and the sensitivity and capability of
detecting and tripping for negative sequence currents down to the continuous
capability of a generator.
In order to match the heating characteristics of the generator a reset time parameter
can be set.
A separate definite time delayed output is available as an alarm feature to warn the
operator of a potentially dangerous situation.

8.15.3

Function block
NS2PTOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKST1
BLKST2

TRIP
TR1
TR2
START
ST1
ST2
ALARM
NSCURR
IEC08000359-2-en.vsd

IEC08000359-1-EN V2 EN

Figure 284:

8.15.4

NS2PTOC function block

Signals
Table 313:
Name

NS2PTOC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for neg seq.

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKST1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1

BLKST2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip signals

562
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 314:

NS2PTOC Output signals

Name

8.15.5
Table 315:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TR1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 1

TR2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 2

START

BOOLEAN

Common start signal

ST1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step 1

ST2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step 2

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm signal

NSCURR

REAL

Negative sequence current in primary amps

Settings
NS2PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

tAlarm

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

3.00

Time delay for Alarm (operated by

START signal), in sec

OpStep1

Off
On

On

Enable execution of step 1

I2-1>

3 - 500

%IB

10

Negative sequence current level for step

1 in % of IBase

CurveType1

Definite
Inverse

Definite

Selection of definite or inverse timecharacteri. for step 1

t1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

Definite time delay for trip of step 1, in sec

tResetDef1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for reset of definite timer of

step 1, in sec

K1

1.0 - 99.0

0.1

10.0

Neg. seq. capability value of generator

for step 1, in sec

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 1

t1Max

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1000.00

Maximum trip delay for step 1, in sec

ResetMultip1

0.01 - 20.00

0.01

1.00

Reset multiplier for K1, defines reset

time of inverse curve

OpStep2

Off
On

On

Enable execution of step 2

I2-2>

3 - 500

%IB

10

Negative sequence current level for step

2 in % of IBase

CurveType2

Definite
Inverse

Definite

Selection of definite or inverse timecharacteri. for step 2

t2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

Definite time delay for trip of step 2, in sec

tResetDef2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for reset of definite timer of

step 2, in sec

Table continues on next page

563
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

K2

1.0 - 99.0

0.1

10.0

Neg. seq. capability value of generator

for step 2, in sec

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 2

t2Max

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1000.00

Maximum trip delay for step 2, in sec

ResetMultip2

0.01 - 20.00

0.01

1.00

Reset multiplier for K2, defines reset

time of inverse curve

Step

Default

Table 316:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

8.15.6

Values (Range)

NS2PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 317:
Name
NSCURR

8.15.7

Description

NS2PTOC Monitored data

Type
REAL

Values (Range)
-

Unit
A

Description
Negative sequence
current in primary amps

Operation principle
The negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC)
function directly measures the amplitude of the negative phase sequence
component of the measured current. NS2PTOC sets the START, ST1 or ST2
outputs active and starts to count trip time only when the measured negative
sequence current value rises above the set value of parameters I2-1> or I2-2>
respectively.
To avoid oscillation in the output signals, a certain hysteresis has been included.
For both steps, the reset ratio is 0.97.
Step 1 of NS2PTOC can operate in the Definite Time (DT) or Inverse Time
(IDMT) mode depending on the selected value for the CurveType1 parameter. If
CurveType1= Definite, NS2PTOC operates with a Definite Time Delay
characteristic and if CurveType1 = Inverse, NS2PTOC operates with an Inverse
Time Delay characteristic. Step 2 is operating in an analogous way as Step 1.
Definite time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of measured negative
sequence current. Once the measured negative sequence current exceeds the set
level, the settable definite timer t1 or t2 respectively, starts to count and the
corresponding trip signal gets activated after the pre-set definite time delay has
elapsed. Reset time in definite time mode is determined by the setting parameters
tResetDef1 or tResetDef2 respectively. If NS2PTOC has already started but not

564
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tripped and measured negative sequence current drops below the start value, the
start outputs remains active for the time defined by the resetting parameters.
A BLOCK input signal resets NS2PTOC momentarily.
When the parameter CurveType1 is set to Inverse, an inverse curve is selected
according to selected value for parameter K1. The minimum trip time setting of
parameter t1Min and reset time parameter ResetMultip1 also influence step
operation. However, to match the heating characteristics of the generator, the reset
time is depending on the setting of parameter K1, which must be set according to
the generators negative sequence current capacity.

K = I 2 2t
EQUATION2112 V1 EN

Where:
I2

is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current

is operating time in seconds

is a constant [s], which depends on generator size and design

Operate
time

t1Max
(Default= 1000 s)

t1Min
(Default= 5 s)

K1

Current I2-1>
IEC09000691-2-en.vsd
IEC09000691 V2 EN

Figure 285:

Inverse time characteristic with t1Min and t1Max

For a detailed description of inverse time characteristic, see chapter "Inverse

characteristics".
The reset time is exponential and is given by the following expression:

565
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ResetMultip

ResetTime [ s ] =
K
I 2
NS 1
I Start

(Equation 160)

EQUATION2111 V4 EN

Where

8.15.7.1

INS

is the measured negative sequence current

IStart

is the desired start level in pu of rated generator current

ResetMultip

is multiplier of the generator capability constant K equal to setting K1 and thus

defines reset time of inverse time characteristic

Start sensitivity
The trip start levels Current I2-1> and I2-2> of NS2PTOC are freely settable over
a range of 3 to 500 % of rated generator current IBase. The wide range of start
setting is required in order to be able to protect generators of different types and sizes.
After start, a certain hysteresis is used before resetting start levels. For both steps
the reset ratio is 0.97.

8.15.7.2

Alarm function
The alarm function is operated by START signal and used to warn the operator for
an abnormal situation, for example, when generator continuous negative sequence
current capability is exceeded, thereby allowing corrective action to be taken
before removing the generator from service. A settable time delay tAlarm is
provided for the alarm function to avoid false alarms during short-time unbalanced
conditions.

566
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.15.7.3

Logic diagram
CurveType1=Definite

t1

Negative sequence current

a
b

TR1

OR

a>b

I2-1>

ST1

AND
Inverse

Operation=ON

txMin
AND

BLKST1

BLOCK
CurveType1=Inverse
IEC08000466-3-en.vsd
IEC08000466-1-EN V3 EN

Figure 286:

Simplified logic diagram for step 1 of Negative sequence time

overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC)

Step 2 for Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines

(NS2PTOC) is similar to step 1 above except that it lacks the inverse characteristic.

ST1

START

OR

ST2

tAlarm

ALARM

TR1

TRIP

OR

TR2

IEC09000690-2-en.vsd
IEC09000690 V2 EN

Figure 287:

8.15.8

Simplified logic diagram for the START, ALARM and TRIP signals
for NS2PTOC

Technical data
Table 318:

NS2PTOC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value
negative sequence
overcurrent

(3-500)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio

>95%

Operate time, start at

0 to 2 x Iset

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2

to 0 x Iset

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

Time characteristics

Definite or Inverse

Table continues on next page

567
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Inverse time
characteristic
I 22t = K

K=1.0-99.0

5.0% or 40 ms whichever is
greater

Reset time, inverse

characteristic
I 22t = K

Reset Multiplier = 0.01-20.00

10.0% or 40 ms whichever
is greater

Minimum trip delay

IDMT

(0.000-60.000) s

5.0% or 40 ms whichever is
greater

Maximum trip delay

IDMT at 0.5 to 2 x Iset

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Independent time
delay at 0.5 to 2 x Iset

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Independent time
delay for Alarm at 0.5
to 2 x Iset

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

8.16

Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC

8.16.1

Identification
Function description
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent
protection

8.16.2

IEC 61850
identification
VRPVOC

IEC 60617
identification
I>/U<

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51V

Functionality
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC) function can be used as
generator backup protection against short-circuits.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used
either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be
voltage controlled/restrained.
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the
function in order to provide functionality for overcurrent protection with
undervoltage seal-in.

568
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.16.3

Function block
VRPVOC
TRIP
TROC
TRUV
START
STOC
STUV

I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKOC
BLKUV

IEC12000184-1-en.vsd
IEC12000184 V1 EN

Figure 288:

8.16.4

VRPVOC function block

Signals
Table 319:
Name

VRPVOC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for current inputs

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for voltage inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function both stages

BLKOC

BOOLEAN

Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage (ANSI

51V)

BLKUV

BOOLEAN

Block of under voltage function

Table 320:
Name

VRPVOC Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip signal

TROC

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from voltage restrained overcurrent

stage

TRUV

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from undervoltage function

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

STOC

BOOLEAN

Start signal from voltage restrained overcurrent

stage

STUV

BOOLEAN

Start signal from undervoltage function

569
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection
8.16.5
Table 321:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
VRPVOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

StartCurr

2.0 - 5000.0

%IB

1.0

120.0

Start current level in % of IBase

Characterist

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time

IEC Norm. inv.

Time delay curve type for 51V Voltage

restrained overcurrent

tDef_OC

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

Definite time delay for Over Current

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

1.00

Time multiplier for Inverse Definite

Minimum Time curves

tMin

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for Inverse

Definite Minimum Time curve

Operation_UV

Off
On

Off

Operation of under-voltage stage (ANSI

27) Off / On

StartVolt

2.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Voltage for start of under-voltage stage

in % of UBase

tDef_UV

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Definite time time delay when used for

Under-Voltage

EnBlkLowV

Off
On

Off

Enable internal low voltage level

blocking for Under-Voltage

BlkLowVolt

0.0 - 5.0

%UB

0.1

3.0

Internal low voltage level for blocking of

UV in % of UBase

Table 322:
Name

VRPVOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VDepMode

Step
Slope

Slope

Voltage dependent mode OC (step,

slope)

VDepFact

5.0 - 100.0

0.1

25.0

Start current level in % of pickup when

U< 25% of UBase

UHighLimit

30.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

100.0

Voltage high limit setting in % of UBase

Step

Default

Table 323:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

VRPVOC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

570
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.16.6

Monitored data
Table 324:

VRPVOC Monitored data

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

IMAX

REAL

Maximum phase current

magnitude

UUMIN

REAL

kV

Minimum ph-to-ph
voltage magnitude

8.16.7

Operation principle

8.16.7.1

Measured quantities
The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC function is always
connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration
tool (ACT), but it will always measure the maximum of the three-phase currents
and the minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages. If frequency tracking mode
for preprocessing blocks is used, then the function operates properly in wide
frequency range (e.g. 10-90 Hz).

8.16.7.2

Base quantities
GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base
quantities of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:
IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes.
UBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in
primary kV.

8.16.7.3

Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current
quantity with the set start level. The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is higher than the set level.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection operation is made dependent of a measured voltage

quantity. This means that the start level of the overcurrent step is not constant but
decreases with the decrease in magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. This
feature affects the start current value of both definite time and inverse time IDMT
overcurrent protection; in particular the overcurrent with IDMT curve operates
faster during low voltage conditions. Two different types of dependencies are
available:

Voltage restrained overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Slope);

the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 289.
571

Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The voltage restrained characteristic is defined by the two points:

(0.25*UBase ; VDepFact *StartCurr/100*IBase) and (UHighLimit/
100*UBase; StartCurr/100*IBase). In the first point the factor 0.25 that
multiply UBase cannot be changed.
Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

0,25

UHighLimit

UBase

IEC10000123-2-en.vsd
IEC10000123 V2 EN

Figure 289:

Example for start level of the current variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Step);

the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 290.
Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

UHighLimit

UBase
IEC10000124-2-en.vsd

IEC10000124 V2 EN

Figure 290:

Example for start level of the current variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

572
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

8.16.7.4

Logic diagram
DEF time
selected
OR

MaxPhCurr

TROC

STOC

a>b

StartCurr

Inverse
Inverse
time
selected

Voltage
control or
restraint
feature

MinPh-PhVoltage

IEC10000214-1-en.vsd
IEC10000214 V1 EN

Figure 291:

Simplified internal logic diagram for overcurrent function

DEF time
selected
MinPh-phVoltage

TRUV

b>a

StartVolt

AND

STUV

Operation_UV=On
BLKUV
IEC10000213-1-en.vsd
IEC10000213 V1 EN

Figure 292:

8.16.7.5

Simplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function

Undervoltage protection
The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity with the set start level. The undervoltage step starts if the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity is lower than the set level.

573
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The start signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the start signal is logical
TRUE for longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to
logical TRUE.
This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to
provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.

8.16.8

Technical data
Table 325:

VRPVOC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Start overcurrent

(2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir at IIr
1.0% of I at I>Ir

Reset ratio,
overcurrent

> 95%

Operate time, start

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset

Min = 15 ms

Reset time, start

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset

Min = 15 ms

Independent time
delay to operate at 0
to 2 x Iset

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Inverse time
characteristics

13 curve types

ANSI/IEEE C37.112
IEC 60255151
5.0% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
0.10 k 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
See Table and Table

Minimum operate
time for inverse time
characteristics

(0.00 - 60.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

High voltage limit,

voltage dependent
operation

(30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase

1.0% of Ur

Start undervoltage

(2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio,
undervoltage

< 105%

Operate time start

undervoltage at 2 to 0
x Uset

Min = 15 ms

Reset time start

undervoltage at 0 to 2
x Uset

Min = 15 ms

Independent time
delay to operate,
undervoltage at 2 to 0
x Uset

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

Max = 30 ms

Max = 30 ms

Max = 30 ms
-

Max = 30 ms
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Table continues on next page

574
Technical Manual

Section 8
Current protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function
Internal low voltage
blocking

Range or value
(0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase

Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time
Impulse margin time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time
Impulse margin time

10ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset

15 ms typically

Accuracy
0.25% of Ur
-

575
Technical Manual

576

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 9

Voltage protection

9.1

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

9.1.1

Identification
Function description
Two step undervoltage protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

UV2PTUV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27

3U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN

9.1.2

Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed
back-up to primary protection.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

577
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection
9.1.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
UV2PTUV
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2

TRIP
TR1
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
IEC06000276-2-en.vsd

IEC06000276 V2 EN

Figure 293:

9.1.4

UV2PTUV function block

Signals
Table 326:
Name

UV2PTUV Input signals

Type

Default

Description

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase voltages

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR1

BOOLEAN

Block of operate signal, step 1

BLKST1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1

BLKTR2

BOOLEAN

Block of operate signal, step 2

BLKST2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2

Table 327:
Name

UV2PTUV Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TR1

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step1

TR1L1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase L1

TR1L2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase L2

TR1L3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase L3

TR2

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step2

TR2L1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase L1

TR2L2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase L2

TR2L3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

Table continues on next page

578
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

9.1.5
Table 328:
Name

Type

Description

ST1

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step1

ST1L1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step1 phase L1

ST1L2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step1 phase L2

ST1L3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step1 phase L3

ST2

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step2

ST2L1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step2 phase L1

ST2L2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step2 phase L2

ST2L3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step2 phase L3

Settings
UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationStep1

Off
On

On

Enable execution of step 1

Characterist1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of

3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1

U1<

1.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

70.0

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in

% of UBase, step 1

t1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

Definitive time delay of step 1

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 1

k1

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 1

IntBlkSel1

Off
Block of trip
Block all

Off

Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1

IntBlkStVal1

1 - 50

%UB

20

Voltage setting for internal blocking in %

of UBase, step 1

tBlkUV1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of internal (low level)

blocking for step 1

HystAbs1

0.0 - 50.0

%UB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1

OperationStep2

Off
On

On

Enable execution of step 2

Characterist2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 2

Table continues on next page

579
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OpMode2

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of

3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2

U2<

1.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in

% of UBase, step 2

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Definitive time delay of step 2

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 2

k2

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 2

IntBlkSel2

Off
Block of trip
Block all

Off

Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2

IntBlkStVal2

1 - 50

%UB

20

Voltage setting for internal blocking in %

of UBase, step 2

tBlkUV2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of internal (low level)

blocking for step 2

HystAbs2

0.0 - 50.0

%UB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 329:
Name

UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.025

Description
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of used IDMT reset curve type

for step 1

tIReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1

ACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 1

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for step 1

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CrvSat1

0 - 100

Tuning param for prog. under voltage

IDMT curve, step 1

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite

Time curve step 2

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of used IDMT reset curve type

for step 2

tIReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2

ACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

Table continues on next page

580
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 2

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for step 2

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CrvSat2

0 - 100

Tuning param for prog. under voltage

IDMT curve, step 2

Table 330:
Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ConnType

PhN DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT

PhN DFT

Group selector for connection type

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

9.1.6

Monitored data
Table 331:
Name

9.1.7

UV2PTUV Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UL1

REAL

kV

Voltage in phase L1

UL2

REAL

kV

Voltage in phase L2

UL3

REAL

kV

Voltage in phase L3

Operation principle
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding
START signal is generated. UV2PTUV can be set to START/TRIP based on 1 out
of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If
the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the
chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted
trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage
controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than
the set blocking level the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is
generated.The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can
be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.

581
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS
value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The
voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phaseto-phase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV )

3
(Equation 161)

EQUATION1429 V2 EN

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 162)

EQUATION1990 V1 EN

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square
root of three.

9.1.7.1

Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV measures phase-to-earth or phaseto-phase voltages and compare against set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters
OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START
outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be
lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.1.7.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:

inverse curve A
inverse curve B
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

t=

k
Un < -U

Un <

EQUATION1431 V2 EN

(Equation 163)

582
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

where:
Un<

Set value for step 1 and step 2

Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

t=

k 480

Un < - U
- 0.5
32
Un <

2.0

+ 0.055

EQUATION1432 V2 EN

(Equation 164)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

kA
t=
+D
p

Un < - U
-C
B
Un <

EQUATION1433 V2 EN

(Equation 165)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un<
down to Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/
100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
-C > 0
100

EQUATION1435 V1 EN

(Equation 166)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The
details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 26.3
"Inverse characteristics".

583
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

IDMT Voltage

Time
IEC12000186-1-en.vsd
IEC12000186 V1 EN

Figure 294:

Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite
time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the
inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it
should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 295 and figure 296.

584
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tIReset1
Voltage

tIReset1
START

HystAbs1

Measured
Voltage

TRIP

U1<

Time
t

START
TRIP

Time
Integrator

Frozen Timer

Instantaneous

Linearly
decreased

Time
IEC05000010-4-en.vsd

IEC05000010 V4 EN

Figure 295:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

585
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tIReset1

Voltage

tIReset1
START

START

HystAbs1

Measured Voltage
TRIP

U1<

Time
t

START

TRIP

Time
Integrator

Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous

Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-3.vsd

IEC05000011 V3 EN

Figure 296:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure
297. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 298 and figure 299 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

586
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ST1

a<b

U1<

t1

tReset1

TR1

b
AND

IEC09000785-3-en.vsd
IEC09000785 V3 EN

Figure 297:

Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1
tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN

Figure 298:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset

587
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN

Figure 299:

9.1.7.3

Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or
completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTR1:

blocks all trip outputs of step 1

BLKST1:

blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1

BLKTR2:

blocks all trip outputs of step 2

BLKST2:

blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked.
The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal
blocking can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking.
Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will
get very low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the
blocking function, as seen in figure 300. The delay of the blocking function must
be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.

588
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Disconnection

Normal voltage
U1<
U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1

tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min

IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN

Figure 300:

9.1.7.4

Blocking function

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to
the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3
out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step
undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 301.

589
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UL1

Comparator
UL1 < U1<

UL2

Comparator
UL2 < U1<

UL3

Comparator
UL3 < U1<

Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

ST1L1
Phase 1

ST1L2
Phase 2
Phase 3

IntBlkStVal1
START

Time integrator
MinVoltSelector

tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1

TRIP

Start t1
t1Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic

ST1L3
ST1

OR

TR1L1

Step 1

TR1L2
TR1L3
TR1

OR
Comparator
UL1 < U2<

Comparator
UL2 < U2<

Comparator
UL3 < U2<

Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
IntBlkStVal2

ST2L1
Phase 1

ST2L2
Phase 2
Phase 3

START

Start t2
t2Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic

ST2L3
ST2

OR

TR2L1

Step 2
MinVoltSelector

Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2

TR2L2

TRIP

TR2L3
TR2

OR
OR

OR

START

TRIP

IEC05000834-2-en.vsd
IEC05000834 V2 EN

Figure 301:

Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

590
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

9.1.8

Technical data
Table 332:

UV2PTUV technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage, low

and high step

(1.0100.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Absolute hysteresis

(0.050.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Internal blocking
level, step 1 and
step 2

(150)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Inverse time
characteristics for
step 1 and step 2,
see table 1050

See table 1050

Definite time delay,

step 1 at 1.2 to 0 x
Uset

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.2% or 40ms whichever is

greater

Definite time delay,

step 2 at 1.2 to 0 x
Uset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 40ms whichever is

greater

Minimum operate
time, inverse
characteristics

(0.00060.000) s

0.2% or 40ms whichever is

greater

Operate time, start at

2 to 0 x Uset

Min= 15 ms
Max= 30 ms

Reset time, start at 0

to 2 x Uset

Min= 15 ms
Max= 30 ms

Operate time, start at

1.2 to 0 x Uset

Min= 5 ms
Max= 25 ms

Reset time, start at 0

to 1.2 x Uset

Min= 15 ms
Max= 35 ms

Critical impulse time

5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0 x Uset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

9.2

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

9.2.1

Identification
Function description
Two step overvoltage protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

OV2PTOV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59

3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN
V2 EN

591
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection
9.2.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

9.2.3

Function block
OV2PTOV
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2

TRIP
TR1
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
IEC06000277-2-en.vsd

IEC06000277 V2 EN

Figure 302:

9.2.4

OV2PTOV function block

Signals
Table 333:
Name

OV2PTOV Input signals

Type

Default

Description

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for three phase voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR1

BOOLEAN

Block of operate signal, step 1

BLKST1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1

BLKTR2

BOOLEAN

Block of operate signal, step 2

BLKST2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2

Table 334:
Name

OV2PTOV Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TR1

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step1

TR1L1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase L1

Table continues on next page

592
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

9.2.5
Table 335:
Name

Type

Description

TR1L2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase L2

TR1L3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase L3

TR2

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step2

TR2L1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase L1

TR2L2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase L2

TR2L3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase L3

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

ST1

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step1

ST1L1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step1 phase L1

ST1L2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step1 phase L2

ST1L3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step1 phase L3

ST2

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step2

ST2L1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step2 phase L1

ST2L2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step2 phase L2

ST2L3

BOOLEAN

Start signal from step2 phase L3

Settings
OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationStep1

Off
On

On

Enable execution of step 1

Characterist1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of

3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1

U1>

1.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in

% of UBase, step 1

t1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

Definitive time delay of step 1

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 1

k1

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 1

HystAbs1

0.0 - 50.0

%UB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1

OperationStep2

Off
On

On

Enable execution of step 2

Table continues on next page

593
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 2

OpMode2

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of

3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2

U2>

1.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in

% of UBase, step 2

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Definitive time delay of step 2

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 2

k2

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 2

HystAbs2

0.0 - 50.0

%UB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 336:
Name

OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.025

Description
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of used IDMT reset curve type

for step 1

tIReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1

ACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 1

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for step 1

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CrvSat1

0 - 100

Tuning param for prog. over voltage

IDMT curve, step 1

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite

Time curve step 2

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of used IDMT reset curve type

for step 2

tIReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2

ACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

Table continues on next page

594
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 2

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for step 2

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CrvSat2

0 - 100

Tuning param for prog. over voltage

IDMT curve, step 2

Table 337:
Name

OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ConnType

PhN DFT
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS

PhN DFT

Group selector for connection type

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

9.2.6

Monitored data
Table 338:
Name

9.2.7

OV2PTOV Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UL1

REAL

kV

Voltage in phase L1

UL2

REAL

kV

Voltage in phase L2

UL3

REAL

kV

Voltage in phase L3

Operation principle
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or threephase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is
issued. OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3
out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains
above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage
UBase, which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase
fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.
595

Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-tophase voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth
voltage over:

U > (%) UBase( kV )

3
(Equation 167)

EQUATION1434 V1 EN

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

U > (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 168)

EQUATION1993 V1 EN

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square
root of three.

9.2.7.1

Measurement principle
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set
values, U1> for Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and
OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out
of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.

9.2.7.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:

inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

t=

k
U - Un >

Un >

IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN

(Equation 169)

596
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

where:
Un>

Set value for step 1 and step 2

Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

t=

k 480

U - Un >
- 0.5
32
U
>
n

2.0

- 0.035

(Equation 170)

IECEQUATION2423 V1 EN

The type C curve is described as:

t=

k 480

U - Un >
- 0.5
32
Un >

3.0

+ 0.035

(Equation 171)

IECEQUATION2425 V1 EN

The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B,

C, D, k and p are settings:

t=

kA
U -Un >

-C
B
Un >

EQUATION1439 V2 EN

+D

(Equation 172)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
-C > 0
100

EQUATION1435 V1 EN

(Equation 173)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 303. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".

597
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

Time
IEC05000016-2-en.vsd
IEC05000016 V2 EN

Figure 303:

Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the
measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that
the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for
each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to allow a
high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time.

598
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tIReset1
tIReset1

Voltage
START

TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1

Measured
Voltage

Time
t

START

TRIP

Time
Integrator

Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer

Instantaneous

Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd

IEC09000055 V2 EN

Figure 304:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

599
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tIReset1

Voltage
START

START

tIReset1
HystAbs1

TRIP

U1>
Measured
Voltage

Time
t

START

TRIP

Time
Integrator

Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous

Linearly
decreased

IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN

Figure 305:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
306. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 298 and figure 299 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s
(where n means either 1 or 2 respectively), instantaneous reset of the definite time
delayed stage is ensured.

600
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ST1

tReset1

a
a>b

U1>

t1
t

TR1

AND
OFF
Delay

ON
Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 306:

Detailed logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation

U1>

START

TRIP
tReset1

t1

IEC10000037-2-en.vsd
IEC10000037 V2 EN

Figure 307:

Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

601
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000038-2-en.vsd
IEC10000038 V2 EN

Figure 308:

9.2.7.3

Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

Blocking
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or
completely, by binary input signals where:

9.2.7.4

BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTR1:

blocks all trip outputs of step 1

BLKST1:

blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1

BLKTR2:

blocks all trip outputs of step 2

BLKST2:

blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually
compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time
characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step
overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 309.

602
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UL1

Comparator
UL1 > U1>

UL2

Comparator
UL2 > U1>

UL3

Comparator
UL3 > U1>

ST1L1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

Phase 1

ST1L2
Phase 2
Phase 3

START

MaxVoltSelect

Time integrator
tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1

TRIP

Start
t1
t1Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic

ST1L3
ST1

OR

TR1L1
TR1L2

Step 1

TR1L3
TR1

OR

Comparator
UL1 > U2>
Comparator
UL2 > U2>
Comparator
UL3 > U2>

Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

Time integrator
tIreset2
ResetTypeCrv2

ST2L2

Phase 2
Phase 3

START

MaxVoltSelect

ST2L1

Phase 1

TRIP

Start
t2
t2Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic

ST2L3
ST2

OR

TR2L1
TR2L2

Step 2

TR2L3
TR2

OR
OR

OR

START

TRIP

IEC05000013-2-en.vsd
IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN

Figure 309:

Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

603
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection
9.2.8

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 339:
Function

OV2PTOV technical data

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate
voltage, step 1
and 2

(1.0-200.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute
hysteresis

(0.050.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time
characteristics
for steps 1 and
2, see
table 1049

See table 1049

Definite time
delay, low step
(step 1) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater

Definite time
delay, high step
(step 2) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater

Minimum
operate time,
Inverse
characteristics

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 45 ms whichever is greater

Operate time,
start at 0 to 2 x
Uset

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

Reset time,
start at 2 to 0 x
Uset

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

Operate time,
start at 0 to 1.2
x Uset

Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms

Reset time,
start at 1.2 to 0
x Uset

Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse
time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset

Impulse margin
time

15 ms typically

604
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

9.3

Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

9.3.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Two step residual overvoltage

protection

IEC 60617
identification

ROV2PTOV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59N

3U0
TRV V1 EN

9.3.2

Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV function calculates the
residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it
from a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point
voltage transformer.
ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.

9.3.3

Function block
ROV2PTOV
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2

TRIP
TR1
TR2
START
ST1
ST2
IEC06000278-2-en.vsd

IEC06000278 V2 EN

Figure 310:

9.3.4

ROV2PTOV function block

Signals
Table 340:
Name

ROV2PTOV Input signals

Type

Default

Description

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase voltages

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR1

BOOLEAN

Block of operate signal, step 1

Table continues on next page

605
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Block of step 1

BLKTR2

BOOLEAN

Block of operate signal, step 2

BLKST2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2

ROV2PTOV Output signals

Name

Table 342:
Name

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 341:

9.3.5

Default

BLKST1

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TR1

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step1

TR2

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step2

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

ST1

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step1

ST2

BOOLEAN

Common start signal from step2

Settings
ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationStep1

Off
On

On

Enable execution of step 1

Characterist1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 1

U1>

1.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

30.0

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),

step 1 in % of UBase

t1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

Definitive time delay of step 1

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 1

k1

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 1

HystAbs1

0.0 - 50.0

%UB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1

OperationStep2

Off
On

On

Enable execution of step 2

Characterist2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for

step 2

U2>

1.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

45.0

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),

step 2 in % of UBase

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Definitive time delay of step 2

Table continues on next page

606
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 2

k2

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 2

HystAbs2

0.0 - 50.0

%UB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 343:
Name

Step

Default

Description

ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.025

Description
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of used IDMT reset curve type

for step 1

tIReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1

ACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 1

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for step 1

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CrvSat1

0 - 100

Tuning param for prog. over voltage

IDMT curve, step 1

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of used IDMT reset curve type

for step 2

tIReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2

ACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 2

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for step 2

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CrvSat2

0 - 100

Tuning param for prog. over voltage

IDMT curve, step 2

607
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

Table 344:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

9.3.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 345:
Name
ULevel

9.3.7

Step

ROV2PTOV Monitored data

Type
REAL

Values (Range)
-

Unit
kV

Description
Magnitude of measured
voltage

Operation principle
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect high singlephase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage
can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power
transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary
windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the threephase voltages and internally in the IED calculate the corresponding residual
voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV. ROV2PTOV
has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time
delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.

9.3.7.1

Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.3.7.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:

608
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

t=

k
U - Un >

Un >
(Equation 174)

IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN

where:
Un>

Set value for step 1 and step 2

Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

t=

k 480

U - Un >
- 0.5
32
U
>
n

2.0

- 0.035

(Equation 175)

IECEQUATION2423 V1 EN

The type C curve is described as:

t=

k 480
U - Un >

- 0.5
32
U>

3.0

+ 0.035

(Equation 176)

IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

t=

kA
U -Un >

-C
B
Un >

EQUATION1439 V2 EN

+D

(Equation 177)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
-C > 0
100

EQUATION1440 V1 EN

(Equation 178)
609

Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section
"Inverse characteristics".
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves
for the inverse time mode (IDMT).
If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and
tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the
corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to
the hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 304 and figure 305.

610
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tIReset1
tIReset1

Voltage
START

TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1

Measured
Voltage

Time
t

START

TRIP

Time
Integrator

Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer

Instantaneous

Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd

IEC09000055 V2 EN

Figure 311:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

611
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tIReset1

Voltage
START

START

tIReset1
HystAbs1

TRIP

U1>
Measured
Voltage

Time
t

START

TRIP

Time
Integrator

Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous

Linearly
decreased

IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN

Figure 312:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
313. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 298 and figure 299 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

612
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ST1

tReset1

a
a>b

U1>

t1
t

TR1

AND
OFF
Delay

ON
Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 313:

Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1
tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN

Figure 314:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

613
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN

Figure 315:

9.3.7.3

Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

Blocking
It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV
partially or completely, by binary input signals where:

9.3.7.4

BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTR1:

blocks all trip outputs of step 1

BLKST1:

blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1

BLKTR2:

blocks all trip outputs of step 2

BLKST2:

blocks all START and trip inputs related to step 2

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.
Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV)
is schematically described in figure 316.

614
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UN

Comparator
UN > U1>
START

Time integrator
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1

ST1

Phase 1

TRIP

Start
t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Output
Logic

TR1

Step 1

Comparator
UN > U2>
START

Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2

ST2

Phase 1

TRIP

TR2

Start
t2
tReset2
&
Trip
Output
Logic

OR

Step 2

START

OR

TRIP

IEC05000748_2_en.vsd
IEC05000748 V2 EN

Figure 316:

9.3.8

Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

Technical data
Table 346:

ROV2PTOV technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage,
step 1 and step 2

(1.0-200.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute
hysteresis

(0.050.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time
characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 1051

See table 1051

Definite time
delay low step
(step 1) at 0 to 1.2
x Uset

(0.006000.00) s

0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater

Table continues on next page

615
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Definite time
delay high step
(step 2) at 0 to 1.2
x Uset

(0.00060.000) s

0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater

Minimum operate
time

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater

Operate time,
start at 0 to 2 x Uset

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start

at 2 to 0 x Uset

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

Operate time,
start at 0 to 1.2 x
Uset

Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, start

at 1.2 to 0 x Uset

Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse
time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset

Impulse margin
time

15 ms typically

9.4

Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

9.4.1

Identification
Function description
Overexcitation protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

OEXPVPH

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
24

U/f >
SYMBOL-Q V1 EN

9.4.2

Functionality
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into nonlaminated components that are not designed to carry flux. This will cause eddy
currents to flow. These eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe
damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. The function has
settable inverse operating curves and independent alarm stages.

616
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

9.4.3

Function block
OEXPVPH
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
RESET

TRIP
START
ALARM

IEC05000329-2-en.vsd
IEC05000329 V3 EN

Figure 317:

9.4.4

OEXPVPH function block

Signals
Table 347:

OEXPVPH Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Current connection

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

RESET

BOOLEAN

Reset operation

OEXPVPH Output signals

Name

Table 349:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 348:

9.4.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip from overexcitation function

START

BOOLEAN

Overexcitation above set operate level

(instantaneous)

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)

Settings
OEXPVPH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

V/Hz>

100.0 - 180.0

%UB/f

0.1

110.0

Operate level of V/Hz at no load and

rated freq in % of (UBase/frated)

V/Hz>>

100.0 - 200.0

%UB/f

0.1

140.0

High level of V/Hz above which tMin is

used, in % of (UBase/frated)

XLeak

0.000 - 200.000

Ohm

0.001

0.000

Winding leakage reactance in primary

ohms

TrPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec)

tMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

7.000

Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse

curve, in sec

Table continues on next page

617
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

tMax

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

1800.00

Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse

curve, in sec

tCooling

0.10 - 9000.00

0.01

1200.00

Transformer magnetic core cooling time

constant, in sec

CurveType

IEEE
Tailor made

IEEE

Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor

made

kForIEEE

1 - 60

Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type

curve

AlarmLevel

50.0 - 120.0

0.1

100.0

Alarm operate level as % of operate level

tAlarm

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

5.00

Alarm time delay, in sec

Default

Table 350:
Name

Default

Description

OEXPVPH Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

t1Tailor

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

7200.00

Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made

curve, in sec

t2Tailor

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

3600.00

Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec

t3Tailor

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

1800.00

Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec

t4Tailor

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

900.00

Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec

t5Tailor

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

450.00

Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec

t6Tailor

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

225.00

Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made

curve, in sec

Step

Default

Table 351:
Name

Description

OEXPVPH Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

MeasuredU

PosSeq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1

L1L2

Selection of measured voltage

MeasuredI

L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq

L1L2

Selection of measured current

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

9.4.6

Monitored data
Table 352:
Name

OEXPVPH Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

TMTOTRIP

REAL

Calculated time to trip for

overexcitation, in sec

VPERHZ

REAL

V/Hz

Voltage to frequency
ratio in per-unit

THERMSTA

REAL

Overexcitation thermal
status in % of trip level

618
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

9.4.7

Operation principle
The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH) function is growing as
the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate near
their designated limits most of the time.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. If an
emergency that causes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged
unless corrective action is taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an
overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.
Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination
with below-normal frequency. Such conditions may occur when a transformer unit
is loaded, but are more likely to arise when the transformer is unloaded, or when
loss of load occurs. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular
danger to experience overexcitation conditions. It follows from the fundamental
transformer equation, see equation 179, that the peak flux density Bmax is directly
proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f and
turns n.
E = 4.44 f n Bmax A
(Equation 179)

EQUATION898 V2 EN

The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 180.

M ( p.u.) =

E f

( Ur ) ( fr )

IECEQUATION2296 V1 EN

(Equation 180)

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing.

If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically
1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into
other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current
circulations.
Overexcitation will result in:

overheating of the non-laminated metal parts

a large increase in magnetizing currents
an increase in core and winding temperature
an increase in transformer vibration and noise

Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per

hertz (V/Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or
if this is not possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the
source after a delay ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.

619
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected

generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are
subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of
the turbine. In such cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a startup of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not
possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay,
by the TRIP signal.
The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not
more than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the
ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not
exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a
sustained basis, see equation 181.
E
--------- 1.1 Ur
fr
f
(Equation 181)

EQUATION900 V1 EN

or equivalently, with 1.1 Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 182.

E
f

V Hz >
fr
(Equation 182)

IECEQUATION2297 V2 EN

where:

V/Hz>

is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

V/Hz> is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does
not know exactly what to set, then the default value for V/Hz> = 110 % given by
the IEC 60076-1 standard shall be used.
In OEXPVPH, the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 183.
M ( p.u. ) =
IECEQUATION2299 V1 EN

E f
Ur fr
(Equation 183)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1
for any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Ur/fr. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in %
of Ur/fr.
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in
general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For
no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power
transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the
620
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

voltage U which is measured and fed to OEXPVPH , depending on the direction of

the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where
OEXPVPH is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding.
It is important to specify in the application configuration on which side of the
power transformer OEXPVPH is placed.
As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full
load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the
transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage,
no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be
equally divided between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 =
Xleak2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.
OEXPVPH calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage
reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH is connected) is known to the user. The
assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is
unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the
leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on
the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers
the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage
reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to
Xc/2. OEXPVPH protection will then take the given measured voltage U, as the
induced voltage E.
It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events
such as loss-of-load, etc. A high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean
overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single phase-to-earth
fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases-to-earth, but no
overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially
unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each
winding.

9.4.7.1

Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation
protection is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH shall be set to
measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines
the two currents that must be used. This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.
It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI are set to
same value.
If, for example, voltage UL1L2 is fed to OEXPVPH, then currents IL1, and IL2
must be applied. From these two input currents, current IL1L2 = IL1 - IL2 is
calculated internally by the OEXPVPH algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage
must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm
exits without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.
621

Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is
connected, then OEXPVPH shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and
current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current
are used by OEXPVPH. A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher
than 70% of rated phase-to-earth voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH exits
immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.

OEXPVPH can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from

the power flow.
The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.

9.4.7.2

Operate time of the overexcitation protection

The operate time of OEXPVPH is a function of the relative overexcitation.
Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:

the so called IEEE law, and

a tailor-made law.

The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match the transformer core capability well.
The square law is according to equation 184.
top =

0.18 k

V Hz> - 1

0.18 k
overexcitation

IECEQUATION2298 V2 EN

(Equation 184)

where:
M

the relative excitation

V/Hz>

is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and

is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 319.

Parameter k (time multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

The relative excitation M is calculated using equation185

622
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Umeasured

fmeasured
=

Umeasured

frated

UBase UBase fmeasured

frated
(Equation 185)

IECEQUATION2404 V1 EN

An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral

expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to
equation 186.
top

(M (t) - V

Hz > ) dt 0.18 k
2

(Equation 186)

IECEQUATION2300 V1 EN

A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it
becomes true that:
n

Dt

( M(j)

V/Hz> ) 0.18 k

j=k

(Equation 187)

EQUATION906 V1 EN

where:
Dt

is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH and

M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is
given as Ur/fr.

As long as M > V/Hz> (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only
be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will
be tripped at j = n.
Inverse delays as per figure 319, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 318.

623
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

delay in s
tMax

under excitation

inverse delay law

overexcitation
tMin
0
M=V/Hz>
V/Hz>

Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz>

Mmax
Emax

Excitation M
E (only if f = fr = const)
99001067.vsd

IEC99001067 V1 EN

Figure 318:

Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax and tMin

A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low
degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In
case the inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEXPVPH trips after tMax seconds.
A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high
degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin,
OEXPVPH function trips after tMin seconds. The inverse delay law is not valid for
values exceeding Mmax. The delay will be tMin, irrespective of the overexcitation
level, when values exceed Mmax (that is, M>V/Hz>).

624
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

Time (s)

1000

100
k = 60

k = 20

k = 10
k=9
k=8
k=7
k=6
k=5

10

k=4
k=3
k=2

k=1
1

10

20

OVEREXCITATION IN %

30

40

(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373.vsd

IEC01000373 V1 EN

Figure 319:

Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation

The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH setting V/

Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where
the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example,
V/Hz>> = 140 %, then M is according to equation 188.
M=

(V

Hz>> ) / f
Ur/fr

IECEQUATION2286 V1 EN

= 1.40
(Equation 188)

The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In

this case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided
into five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as
shown in figure 320. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5
=> t6.

625
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

delay in s

tMax

tMin

underexcitation

Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
0

Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M

Mmax

Emaxcont

99001068.vsd
IEC99001068 V1 EN

Figure 320:

An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic

Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by
linear interpolation.
Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual
delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.

9.4.7.3

Cooling
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH is basically a thermal protection; therefore a
cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied.
Parameter Setting tool is an OEXPVPH setting, with a default time constant
tCooling of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their
previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is
assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an
overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter
than it would be otherwise.

9.4.7.4

Overexcitation protection function measurands

A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in
PCM600. This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if
the overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This
information can be useful during small or moderate overexcitation situations.
If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is tMax, then the estimation of
the remaining time to trip is done against tMax.
The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a
monitored data value VPERHZ and is calculated from the expression:
M ( p.u. ) =
IECEQUATION2299 V1 EN

E f
Ur fr
(Equation 189)

626
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

If VPERHZ value is less than setting V/Hz> (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to V/Hz> (in %), the excitation is exactly equal
to the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than V/Hz>,
the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100,
while V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum
continuous excitation limit.
The monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected
power transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip
value which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same
time, as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then
for some reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or tMin,
then the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when
tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the
very long delay is limited by tMax, then the OEXPVPH TRIP output signal will be
set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.

9.4.7.5

Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set
2% lower than (V/Hz>) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the
operator an early warning.

9.4.7.6

Logic diagram
BLOCK
AlarmLevel

tAlarm

&

ALARM

&

TRIP

M>V/Hz>

V/Hz>
U3P
I3P

Calculation
of internal
induced
voltage Ei

Ei

M=
(Ei / f)
(Ur / fr)

&

IEEE law

tMax
M
Tailor-made law
M>V/Hz>>

Xleak

tMin

t
V/Hz>>

M = relative V/Hz as service value

IEC05000162-3-en.vsd
IEC05000162 V3 EN

Figure 321:

A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection

OEXPVPH

627
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.

9.4.8

Technical data
Table 353:

OEXPVPH technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, start

(100180)% of (UBase/frated)

0.5% of U

Operate value, alarm

(50120)% of start level

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate value, high level

(100200)% of (UBase/frated)

0.5% of U

Curve type

IEEE or customer defined

5.0 % or 45 ms,
whichever is greater

IEEE : t =

(0.18 k )
( M - 1) 2

EQUATION1319 V1 EN

(Equation 190)

where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)
Minimum time delay for inverse
function

(0.00060.000) s

1.0% or 45 ms,
whichever is greater

Maximum time delay for inverse

function

(0.009000.00) s

1.0% or 45 ms,
whichever is greater

Alarm time delay

(0.009000.00)

1.0% or 45 ms,
whichever is greater

9.5

Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV

9.5.1

Identification
Function description
Voltage differential protection

9.5.2

IEC 61850
identification
VDCPTOV

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
60

Functionality
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages
from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step
and one trip step.

628
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

9.5.3

Function block
VDCPTOV
U3P1*
U3P2*
BLOCK

TRIP
START
ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF
IEC06000528-2-en.vsd

IEC06000528 V2 EN

Figure 322:

9.5.4

VDCPTOV function block

Signals
Table 354:

VDCPTOV Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Bus voltage

U3P2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Capacitor voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

VDCPTOV Output signals

Name

Table 356:
Name

Description

U3P1

Table 355:

9.5.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Voltage differential protection operated

START

BOOLEAN

Start of voltage differential protection

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Voltage differential protection alarm

U1LOW

BOOLEAN

Loss of U1 voltage

U2LOW

BOOLEAN

Loss of U2 voltage

UL1DIFF

REAL

Differential Voltage phase L1

UL2DIFF

REAL

Differential Voltage phase L2

UL3DIFF

REAL

Differential Voltage phase L3

Settings
VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

BlkDiffAtULow

No
Yes

Yes

Block operation at low voltage

UDTrip

2.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

5.0

Operate level, in % of UBase

Table continues on next page

629
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Time delay for voltage differential

operate, in seconds

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for voltage differential reset,

in seconds

UDAlarm

2.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

2.0

Alarm level, in % of UBase

tAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Time delay for voltage differential alarm,

in seconds

U1Low

1.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

70.0

Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase

U2Low

1.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

70.0

Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase

tBlock

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time for undervoltage block

Table 357:

Step

Default

Description

VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

RFL1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Ratio compensation factor phase L1

U2L1*RFL1=U1L1

RFL2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Ratio compensation factor phase L2

U2L2*RFL2=U1L2

RFL3

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Ratio compensation factor phase L3

U2L3*RFL3=U1L3

Table 358:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

9.5.6

Step

Default

Description

VDCPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 359:
Name

9.5.7

Unit

VDCPTOV Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UL1DIFF

REAL

kV

Differential Voltage
phase L1

UL2DIFF

REAL

kV

Differential Voltage
phase L2

UL3DIFF

REAL

kV

Differential Voltage
phase L3

Operation principle
The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on
comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase.
Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage
transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx. The

630
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip
level UDATrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given
after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage
supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The
outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage
is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for
loss of all three phases.
Loss of all U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.
VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision
function SDDRFUF.
To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as
service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve
full balance in normal service.
The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 323.

631
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UDTripL1>

AND

UDTripL2>

O
R

AND

UDTripL3>

tReset tTrip
t
t

TRIP

AND

AND

START

AND
UDAlarmL1>

AND

UDAlarmL2>

O
R

AND

UDAlarmL3>

tAlarm

AND

ALARM

AND

U1LOW

AND

U1<L1
AND

U1<L2

tAlarm
t
AND

U1<L3
OR

BlkDiffAtULow
U2<L1
U2<L2

AND

t1
t

U2LOW

AND

U2<L3
BLOCK

en06000382-2.vsd
IEC06000382 V3 EN

Figure 323:

9.5.8

Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV

Technical data
Table 360:

VDCPTOV technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Voltage difference for alarm and

trip

(2.0100.0) % of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Under voltage level

(1.0100.0) % of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Independent time delay for

voltage differential alarm at 0.8
to 1.2 x UDAlarm

(0.00060.000)s

0.2% or 40 ms whichever
is greater

Independent time delay for

voltage differential trip at 0.8 to
1.2 x UDTrip

(0.00060.000)s

0.2% or 40 ms whichever
is greater

Independent time delay for

voltage differential reset at 1.2 to
0.8 x UDTrip

(0.00060.000)s

0.2% or 40 ms whichever
is greater

632
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

9.6

Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

9.6.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Loss of voltage check

9.6.2

IEC 60617
identification

LOVPTUV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27

Functionality
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is suitable for use in networks with an automatic
system restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the
circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer
than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.

9.6.3

Function block
LOVPTUV
U3P*
BLOCK
CBOPEN
VTSU

TRIP
START

IEC07000039-2-en.vsd
IEC07000039 V2 EN

Figure 324:

9.6.4

LOVPTUV function block

Signals
Table 361:
Name

LOVPTUV Input signals

Type

Default

Description

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block the all outputs

CBOPEN

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker open

VTSU

BOOLEAN

Block from voltage circuit supervision

Table 362:
Name

LOVPTUV Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal

START

BOOLEAN

Start signal

633
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection
9.6.5
Table 363:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

UPE

1 - 100

%UB

70

Operate voltage in % of base voltage

UBase

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

7.000

Operate time delay

Table 364:
Name

LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

tPulse

0.050 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Duration of TRIP pulse

tBlock

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Time delay to block when all 3ph

voltages are not low

tRestore

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay for enable the function after

restoration

Table 365:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

9.6.6

Step

Default

Description

LOVPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Operation principle
The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage
measurement. LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes
if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three
phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The START
output signal indicates start.
Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase
voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock.
LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at
least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open
circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the
function block.
Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a
length set by setting tPulse.
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU
input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated
circuit breaker.

634
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and
the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE

&
Blocked = Yes

BLOCK

START

>1
Function Enable

tTrip

&

STUL1N

tPulse

TRIP

&

STUL2N

only 1 or 2 phases are low for

at least 10 s (not three)

Latched
Enable

STUL3N

&

tBlock

>1

CBOPEN

Reset Enable

>1

&

VTSU

>1

tRestore

Set Enable

>1

Line restored for

at least 3 s

IEC07000089_2_en.vsd
IEC07000089 V2 EN

Figure 325:

Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

635
Technical Manual

Section 9
Voltage protection
9.6.7

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 366:

LOVPTUV technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage

(1100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Pulse timer when disconnecting

all three phases

(0.05060.000) s

0.2% or 15 ms whichever
is greater

Time delay for enabling the

functions after restoration

(0.00060.000) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever
is greater

Operate time delay when

disconnecting all three phases

(0.00060.000) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever
is greater

Time delay to block when all

three phase voltages are not low

(0.00060.000) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever
is greater

636
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 10

Frequency protection

10.1

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF

10.1.1

Identification
Function description
Underfrequency protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SAPTUF

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81

f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN

10.1.2

Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF measures frequency with high accuracy, and
is used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and
so on. Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore.
SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines

10.1.3

Function block
SAPTUF
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKREST

TRIP
START
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
IEC06000279_2_en.vsd

IEC06000279 V2 EN

Figure 326:

SAPTUF function block

637
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection
10.1.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 367:

SAPTUF Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for voltage inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocking operate output

BLKREST

BOOLEAN

Blocking restore output

SAPTUF Output signals

Name

Table 369:
Name

Description

U3P

Table 368:

10.1.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip signal

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

RESTORE

BOOLEAN

Restore signal for load restoring purposes

BLKDMAGN

BOOLEAN

Measurement blocked due to low voltage

amplitude

FREQ

REAL

Measured frequency

Settings
SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

StartFrequency

35.00 - 75.00

Hz

0.01

48.80

Frequency set value

tDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Operate time delay

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for reset

tRestore

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Restore time delay

RestoreFreq

45.00 - 65.00

Hz

0.01

50.10

Restore frequency value

TimerMode

Definite timer
Volt based timer

Definite timer

Setting for choosing timer mode

UNom

50.0 - 150.0

%UB

1.0

100.0

Nominal voltage for voltage based timer

in % of UBase

UMin

50.0 - 150.0

%UB

1.0

90.0

Lower operation limit for voltage based

timer in % of UBase

Exponent

0.0 - 5.0

0.1

1.0

For calculation of the curve form for

voltage based timer

tMax

0.010 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Maximum time operation limit for voltage

based timer

tMin

0.010 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Minimum time operation limit for voltage

based timer

638
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 370:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

10.1.6

SAPTUF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 371:
Name

10.1.7

Step

SAPTUF Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

ULevel

REAL

kV

Level of measured
voltage

FREQ

REAL

Hz

Measured frequency

Operation principle
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used to detect low power system frequency.
SAPTUF can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent
time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time
delay will be longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the
voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the
voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

10.1.7.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency
function is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases
the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTUF gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is
issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should
be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.1.7.2

Time delay
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time
delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay
and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the
setting TimeDlyOperate sets the time delay.

639
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 327
and equation 191. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time
delay to apply.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay TimeDlyOperate. If the START condition, with respect to
the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset,
after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is
not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
On the output of SAPTUF a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency
returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

10.1.7.3

Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced,
to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 191. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a
similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and
overvoltage functions.
U - UMin
t=
UNom - UMin

Exponent

( tMax - tMin ) + tMin

(Equation 191)

EQUATION1182 V1 EN

where:
t

is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),

is the measured voltage

Exponent

is a setting,

UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to

tMax, tMin

are time settings.

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 327, for:

640
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UMin

= 90%

UNom

= 100%

tMax

= 1.0 s

tMin

= 0.0 s

Exponent

= 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

TimeDlyOperate [s]

0
Exponenent

1
2

3
0.5

90

95

100

U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
IEC05000075 V1 EN

Figure 327:

10.1.7.4

Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF. The time delay to operate is plotted as a
function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
respectively.

Blocking
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF partially or completely,
by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP:

blocks the TRIP output

BLKREST:

blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

10.1.7.5

Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the
positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The
time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special
voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting

641
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay

TimeDlyRestore. The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF is
schematically described in figure 328.

Block
BLKDMAGN

BLOCK

OR
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Voltage

Frequency

Time integrator

Comparator
f < StartFrequency

TimerOperation Mode
Selector

START

TimeDlyOperate

TRIP

Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic

START

TimeDlyReset

TRIP

100 ms
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq

TimeDlyRestore

RESTORE

en05000726.vsd

IEC05000726 V1 EN

Figure 328:

10.1.8

Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF

Technical data
Table 372:

SAPTUF technical data

Function
Operate value, start function, at symmetrical three
phase voltage
Operate time, start at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz

Range or value

Accuracy

(35.00-75.00) Hz

fn = 50 Hz

fn = 60 Hz
Reset time, start at fset - 0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time function at fset + 0.02 Hz

to fset - 0.02 Hz

(0.000-60.000)s

2.0 mHz
Min. = 80 ms
Max. = 95 ms
Min. = 65 ms

Max. = 80 ms
0.2% or
100 ms
whichever
is greater

Table continues on next page

642
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Reset time, definite time function at fset - 0.02 Hz to

fset + 0.02 Hz

(0.000-60.000)s

0.2% or
120 ms
whichever
is greater

Voltage dependent time delay

Settings:
UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase
Exponent=0.0-5.0
tMax=(0.01060.000)s
tMin=(0.01060.000)s

1.0% or
120 ms
whichever
is greater

U - UMin
t=
UNom - UMin

Exponent

( tMax - tMin ) + tMin

(Equation 192)

EQUATION1182 V1 EN

U=Umeasured

10.2

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

10.2.1

Identification
Function description
Overfrequency protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SAPTOF

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81

f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN

10.2.2

Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.
SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for
generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency
stage initiating load restoring. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines
643

Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection
10.2.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
SAPTOF
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP

TRIP
START
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
IEC06000280_2_en.vsd

IEC06000280 V2 EN

Figure 329:

10.2.4

SAPTOF function block

Signals
Table 373:

SAPTOF Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for voltage inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocking operate output

SAPTOF Output signals

Name

Table 375:
Name

Description

U3P

Table 374:

10.2.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip signal

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

BLKDMAGN

BOOLEAN

Measurement blocked due to low amplitude

FREQ

REAL

Measured frequency

Settings
SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

StartFrequency

35.00 - 90.00

Hz

0.01

51.20

Frequency set value

tDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Operate time delay

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for reset

Table 376:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

SAPTOF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

644
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

10.2.6

Monitored data
Table 377:
Name

10.2.7

SAPTOF Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

ULevel

REAL

kV

Level of measured
voltage

FREQ

REAL

Hz

Measured frequency

Operation principle
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower
than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

10.2.7.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. Overfrequency
protection SAPTOF is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTOF is blocked, and the
output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations
of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.2.7.2

Time delay
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting TimeDlyOperate.
TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay, TimeDlyReset. If the START condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset, after
that the defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus
minimum operate time of the start function (80 - 90 ms).

645
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection
10.2.7.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Blocking
It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely,
by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP:

blocks the TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

10.2.7.4

Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the
positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design
of overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in figure 330.

BLOCK
BLKTRIP

BLOCK
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Voltage

Time integrator
Definite Time Delay

Frequency

Comparator
f > StartFrequency

BLKDMAGN

OR

START

Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic

START

TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP

en05000735.vsd

IEC05000735 V1 EN

Figure 330:

Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF

646
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

10.2.8

Technical data
Table 378:

SAPTOF technical data

Function
Operate value, start function
at symmetrical three-phase
voltage

Range or value

Accuracy

(35.00-90.00) Hz

Operate time, start at fset 0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz

2.0 mHz

fn = 50Hz

Min. = 80 ms
Max. = 95 ms

fn = 60 Hz

Min. = 65 ms
Max. = 80 ms

Reset time, start at fset +

0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time

function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset
+ 0.02 Hz

(0.000-60.000)s

0.2% 100 ms
whichever is greater

Reset time, definite time

function at fset + 0.02 Hz to
fset - 0.02 Hz

(0.000-60.000)s

0.2% 120 ms,

whichever is greater

10.3

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

10.3.1

Identification
Function description
Rate-of-change frequency protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SAPFRC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81

df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN

10.3.2

Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC gives an early
indication of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with
high accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and
remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between a positive or negative
change of frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on
positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phaseneutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog
inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting
guidelines.

647
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection
10.3.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
SAPFRC
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKREST

TRIP
START
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
IEC06000281-2-en.vsd

IEC06000281 V2 EN

Figure 331:

10.3.4

SAPFRC function block

Signals
Table 379:

SAPFRC Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for voltage inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocking operate output

BLKREST

BOOLEAN

Blocking restore output

SAPFRC Output signals

Name

Table 381:
Name

Description

U3P

Table 380:

10.3.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient

START

BOOLEAN

Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient

RESTORE

BOOLEAN

Restore signal for load restoring purposes

BLKDMAGN

BOOLEAN

Blocking indication due to low amplitude

Settings
SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

StartFreqGrad

-10.00 - 10.00

Hz/s

0.01

0.50

Frequency gradient start value, the sign

defines direction

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Operate time delay in positive / negative

frequency gradient mode

RestoreFreq

45.00 - 65.00

Hz

0.01

49.90

Restore frequency value

tRestore

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Restore time delay

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for reset

648
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

10.3.6

Monitored data
Table 382:
Name
STARTDUR

10.3.7

SAPFRC Monitored data

Type
REAL

Values (Range)
-

Unit
%

Description
Start duration in
percents of the total
operation time

Operation principle
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes, increase as well as, decrease at an early stage. SAPFRC has a
settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the
set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time
delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above
the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time
delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of
the function is available, that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage
IntBlockLevel, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued. If
the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

10.3.7.1

Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is
measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. Rate-ofchange frequency protection SAPFRC is also dependent on the voltage magnitude.
If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPFRC is
blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in
frequency. If SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued,
then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency
recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of
StartFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.3.7.2

Time delay
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay,
tTrip. .
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition
continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the START condition, with
respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that

649
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s
the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore
functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore
sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the
restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

10.3.7.3

Blocking
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) can be partially or totally blocked,
by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP:

blocks the TRIP output

BLKREST:

blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

10.3.7.4

Design
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) measuring element continuously
measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power
system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay
time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the
RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has
earlier been issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls
if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of
SAPFRC is schematically described in figure 332.

650
Technical Manual

Section 10
Frequency protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET

Voltage

OR

BLOCK
BLKDMAGN

Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Rate-of-Change
of Frequency

Comparator
If
[StartFreqGrad<0
START
AND
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START

Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
TimeDlyOperate

Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic

START

TimeDlyReset
TRIP

100 ms
Frequency

Comparator
f > RestoreFreq

TimeDlyRestore

RESTORE

en05000835.vsd
IEC05000835 V1 EN

Figure 332:

10.3.8

Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

Technical data
Table 383:

SAPFRC Technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, start function

(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s

10.0 mHz/s

Operate value, restore

enable frequency

(45.00-65.00) Hz

2.0 mHz

Definite restore time delay

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 100 ms whichever is

greater

Definite time delay for

frequency gradient trip

(0.200-60.000) s

0.2% or 120 ms whichever is

greater

Definite reset time delay

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250 ms whichever is

greater

651
Technical Manual

652

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 11

Multipurpose protection

11.1

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

11.1.1

Identification
Function description
General current and voltage protection

11.1.2

IEC 61850
identification
CVGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
2(I>/U<)

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
The protection module is recommended as a general backup protection with many
possible application areas due to its flexible measuring and setting facilities.
The built-in overcurrent protection feature has two settable current levels. Both of
them can be used either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. The
overcurrent protection steps can be made directional with selectable voltage
polarizing quantity. Additionally they can be voltage and/or current controlled/
restrained. 2nd harmonic restraining facility is available as well. At too low
polarizing voltage the overcurrent feature can be either blocked, made non
directional or ordered to use voltage memory in accordance with a parameter setting.
Additionally two overvoltage and two undervoltage steps, either with definite time
or inverse time characteristic, are available within each function.
The general function suits applications with underimpedance and voltage
controlled overcurrent solutions. The general function can also be utilized for
generator transformer protection applications where positive, negative or zero
sequence components of current and voltage quantities are typically required.

653
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection
11.1.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
CVGAPC
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKOC1
BLKOC1TR
ENMLTOC1
BLKOC2
BLKOC2TR
ENMLTOC2
BLKUC1
BLKUC1TR
BLKUC2
BLKUC2TR
BLKOV1
BLKOV1TR
BLKOV2
BLKOV2TR
BLKUV1
BLKUV1TR
BLKUV2
BLKUV2TR

TRIP
TROC1
TROC2
TRUC1
TRUC2
TROV1
TROV2
TRUV1
TRUV2
START
STOC1
STOC2
STUC1
STUC2
STOV1
STOV2
STUV1
STUV2
BLK2ND
DIROC1
DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE
IEC05000372-2-en.vsd

IEC05000372 V2 EN

Figure 333:

11.1.4

CVGAPC function block

Signals
Table 384:
Name

CVGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKOC1

BOOLEAN

Block of over current function OC1

BLKOC1TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for over current function OC1

ENMLTOC1

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

OC1

BLKOC2

BOOLEAN

Block of over current function OC2

BLKOC2TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for over current function OC2

ENMLTOC2

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

OC2

BLKUC1

BOOLEAN

Block of under current function UC1

BLKUC1TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for under current function UC1

BLKUC2

BOOLEAN

Block of under current function UC2

BLKUC2TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for under current function UC2

BLKOV1

BOOLEAN

Block of over voltage function OV1

Table continues on next page

654
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

BLKOV1TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for over voltage function OV1

BLKOV2

BOOLEAN

Block of over voltage function OV2

BLKOV2TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for over voltage function OV2

BLKUV1

BOOLEAN

Block of under voltage function UV1

BLKUV1TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for under voltage function UV1

BLKUV2

BOOLEAN

Block of under voltage function UV2

BLKUV2TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 385:
Name

CVGAPC Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip signal

TROC1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1

TROC2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2

TRUC1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1

TRUC2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2

TROV1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1

TROV2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2

TRUV1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1

TRUV2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2

START

BOOLEAN

General start signal

STOC1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from overcurrent function OC1

STOC2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from overcurrent function OC2

STUC1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from undercurrent function UC1

STUC2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from undercurrent function UC2

STOV1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from overvoltage function OV1

STOV2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from overvoltage function OV2

STUV1

BOOLEAN

Start signal from undervoltage function UV1

STUV2

BOOLEAN

Start signal from undervoltage function UV2

BLK2ND

BOOLEAN

Block from second harmonic detection

DIROC1

INTEGER

Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)

DIROC2

INTEGER

Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)

UDIRLOW

BOOLEAN

Low voltage for directional polarization

CURRENT

REAL

Measured current value

ICOSFI

REAL

Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)

VOLTAGE

REAL

Measured voltage value

UIANGLE

REAL

Angle between voltage and current

655
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection
11.1.5
Table 386:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

CurrentInput

phase1
phase2
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph

MaxPh

Select current signal which will be

measured inside function

VoltageInput

phase1
phase2
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph

MaxPh

Select voltage signal which will be

measured inside function

OperHarmRestr

Off
On

Off

Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off /

On

l_2nd/l_fund

10.0 - 50.0

1.0

20.0

Ratio of second to fundamental current

harmonic in %

EnRestrainCurr

Off
On

Off

Enable current restrain function On / Off

RestrCurrInput

PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
Max

PosSeq

Select current signal which will be used

for curr restrain

RestrCurrCoeff

0.00 - 5.00

0.01

0.00

Restraining current coefficient

RCADir

-180 - 180

Deg

-75

Relay Characteristic Angle

ROADir

1 - 90

Deg

75

Relay Operate Angle

LowVolt_VM

0.0 - 5.0

%UB

0.1

0.5

Below this level in % of UBase setting

ActLowVolt takes over

Operation_OC1

Off
On

Off

Operation OC1 Off / On

StartCurr_OC1

2.0 - 5000.0

%IB

1.0

120.0

Operate current level for OC1 in % of

IBase

Table continues on next page

656
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CurveType_OC1

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for OC1

tDef_OC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

Independent (definite) time delay of OC1

k_OC1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time

delay for OC1

IMin1

1 - 10000

%IB

100

Minimum operate current for step1 in %

of IBase

tMin_OC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT

curves for OC1

VCntrlMode_OC1

Voltage control
Off

Off

Control mode for voltage controlled OC1

function

VDepMode_OC1

Step
Slope

Step

Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step,

slope)

VDepFact_OC1

0.02 - 5.00

0.01

1.00

Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1

is U dependent

ULowLimit_OC1

1.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of

UBase

UHighLimit_OC1

1.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

100.0

Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of

UBase

HarmRestr_OC1

Off
On

Off

Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic

restrain

DirMode_OC1

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,

forward, reverse)

DirPrinc_OC1

I&U
IcosPhi&U

I&U

Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for

OC1

ActLowVolt1_VM

Non-directional
Block
Memory

Non-directional

Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1

(Nodir, Blk, Mem)

Operation_OC2

Off
On

Off

Operation OC2 Off / On

StartCurr_OC2

2.0 - 5000.0

%IB

1.0

120.0

Operate current level for OC2 in % of

IBase

Table continues on next page

657
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CurveType_OC2

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for OC2

tDef_OC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

Independent (definite) time delay of OC2

k_OC2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time

delay for OC2

IMin2

1 - 10000

%IB

50

Minimum operate current for step2 in %

of IBase

tMin_OC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT

curves for OC2

VCntrlMode_OC2

Voltage control
Off

Off

Control mode for voltage controlled OC2

function

VDepMode_OC2

Step
Slope

Step

Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step,

slope)

VDepFact_OC2

0.02 - 5.00

0.01

1.00

Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2

is U dependent

ULowLimit_OC2

1.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of

UBase

UHighLimit_OC2

1.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

100.0

Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of

UBase

HarmRestr_OC2

Off
On

Off

Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic

restrain

DirMode_OC2

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,

forward, reverse)

DirPrinc_OC2

I&U
IcosPhi&U

I&U

Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for

OC2

ActLowVolt2_VM

Non-directional
Block
Memory

Non-directional

Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2

(Nodir, Blk, Mem)

Operation_UC1

Off
On

Off

Operation UC1 Off / On

EnBlkLowI_UC1

Off
On

Off

Enable internal low current level blocking

for UC1

BlkLowCurr_UC1

0 - 150

%IB

20

Internal low current blocking level for

UC1 in % of IBase

StartCurr_UC1

2.0 - 150.0

%IB

1.0

70.0

Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in %

of IBase

Table continues on next page

658
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

tDef_UC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

Description
Independent (definite) time delay of UC1

tResetDef_UC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite

Time curve UC1

HarmRestr_UC1

Off
On

Off

Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic

restrain

Operation_UC2

Off
On

Off

Operation UC2 Off / On

EnBlkLowI_UC2

Off
On

Off

Enable internal low current level blocking

for UC2

BlkLowCurr_UC2

0 - 150

%IB

20

Internal low current blocking level for

UC2 in % of IBase

StartCurr_UC2

2.0 - 150.0

%IB

1.0

70.0

Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in %

of IBase

tDef_UC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

Independent (definite) time delay of UC2

HarmRestr_UC2

Off
On

Off

Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic

restrain

Operation_OV1

Off
On

Off

Operation OV1 Off / On

StartVolt_OV1

2.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of

UBase

CurveType_OV1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for OV1

tDef_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite

time use of OV1

tMin_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

for OV1

k_OV1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time

delay for OV1

Operation_OV2

Off
On

Off

Operation OV2 Off / On

StartVolt_OV2

2.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of

UBase

CurveType_OV2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for OV2

tDef_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite

time use of OV2

tMin_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

for OV2

k_OV2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time

delay for OV2

Operation_UV1

Off
On

Off

Operation UV1 Off / On

StartVolt_UV1

2.0 - 150.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in %

of UBase

Table continues on next page

659
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CurveType_UV1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for UV1

tDef_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite

time use of UV1

tMin_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

for UV1

k_UV1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time

delay for UV1

EnBlkLowV_UV1

Off
On

On

Enable internal low voltage level

blocking for UV1

BlkLowVolt_UV1

0.0 - 5.0

%UB

0.1

0.5

Internal low voltage blocking level for

UV1 in % of UBase

Operation_UV2

Off
On

Off

Operation UV2 Off / On

StartVolt_UV2

2.0 - 150.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in %

of UBase

CurveType_UV2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for UV2

tDef_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite

time use of UV2

tMin_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

for UV2

k_UV2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time

delay for UV2

EnBlkLowV_UV2

Off
On

On

Enable internal low voltage level

blocking for UV2

BlkLowVolt_UV2

0.0 - 5.0

%UB

0.1

0.5

Internal low voltage blocking level for

UV2 in % of UBase

Table 387:

CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CurrMult_OC1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting

value for OC1

ResCrvType_OC1

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for OC1

tResetDef_OC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite

Time curve OC1

P_OC1

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for OC1

A_OC1

0.000 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for OC1

B_OC1

0.000 - 99.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for OC1

Table continues on next page

660
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

C_OC1

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for OC1

PR_OC1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer

programmable curve for OC1

TR_OC1

0.005 - 600.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer

programmable curve for OC1

CR_OC1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer

programmable curve for OC1

CurrMult_OC2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting

value for OC2

ResCrvType_OC2

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for OC2

tResetDef_OC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite

Time curve OC2

P_OC2

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for OC2

A_OC2

0.000 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for OC2

B_OC2

0.000 - 99.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for OC2

C_OC2

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for OC2

PR_OC2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer

programmable curve for OC2

TR_OC2

0.005 - 600.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer

programmable curve for OC2

CR_OC2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer

programmable curve for OC2

tResetDef_UC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite

Time curve UC2

ResCrvType_OV1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for OV1

tResetDef_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time

use of OV1

tResetIDMT_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves

for OV1

A_OV1

0.005 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for OV1

B_OV1

0.500 - 99.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for OV1

C_OV1

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for OV1

D_OV1

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for OV1

P_OV1

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for OV1

Table continues on next page

661
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ResCrvType_OV2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for OV2

tResetDef_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time

use of OV2

tResetIDMT_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves

for OV2

A_OV2

0.005 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for OV2

B_OV2

0.500 - 99.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for OV2

C_OV2

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for OV2

D_OV2

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for OV2

P_OV2

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for OV2

ResCrvType_UV1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for UV1

tResetDef_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time

use of UV1

tResetIDMT_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves

for UV1

A_UV1

0.005 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for UV1

B_UV1

0.500 - 99.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for UV1

C_UV1

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for UV1

D_UV1

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for UV1

P_UV1

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for UV1

ResCrvType_UV2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for UV2

tResetDef_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time

use of UV2

tResetIDMT_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves

for UV2

A_UV2

0.005 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for UV2

B_UV2

0.500 - 99.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for UV2

Table continues on next page

662
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

C_UV2

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for UV2

D_UV2

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer

programmable curve for UV2

P_UV2

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for UV2

Table 388:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

11.1.6

CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit

Step

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Monitored data
Table 389:
Name

CVGAPC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

DIROC1

INTEGER

1=Forward
0=Nondirectional
2=Reverse

Directional mode of OC1

(nondir, forward,reverse)

DIROC2

INTEGER

1=Forward
0=Nondirectional
2=Reverse

Directional mode of OC2

(nondir, forward,reverse)

CURRENT

REAL

Measured current value

ICOSFI

REAL

Measured current
multiplied with cos (Phi)

VOLTAGE

REAL

kV

Measured voltage value

UIANGLE

REAL

deg

Angle between voltage

and current

11.1.7

Operation principle

11.1.7.1

Measured quantities within CVGAPC

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to
three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it
will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end
user in the setting tool.
The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 390.

663
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 390:

Current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the

parameter

CurrentInput

Comment

Phase1

CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor

Phase2

CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 current phasor

Phase3

CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 current phasor

PosSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence

current phasor

NegSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative

sequence current phasor

3ZeroSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence

current phasor multiplied by factor 3

MaxPh

CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with

maximum magnitude

MinPh

CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with

minimum magnitude

UnbalancePh

CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which

is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set
to 0 all the time

10

Phase1-Phase2

CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated

as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and
phase L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2)

11

Phase2-Phase3

CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated

as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and
phase L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3)

12

Phase3-Phase1

CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated

as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and
phase L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1)

13

MaxPh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the

maximum magnitude

14

MinPh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the

minimum magnitude

15

UnbalancePh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which

is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the
time

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 391:
Table 391:

Voltage selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the

parameter

VoltageInput

Comment

Phase1

CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor

Phase2

CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor

Phase3

CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor

Table continues on next page

664
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Set value for the

parameter

VoltageInput

Comment

PosSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence

voltage phasor

-NegSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative

sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.

-3ZeroSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence

voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the
directional feature when used.

MaxPh

CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with

maximum magnitude

MinPh

CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with

minimum magnitude

UnbalancePh

CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,

which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0 all the time

10

Phase1-Phase2

CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage
phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (UL1-UL2)

11

Phase2-Phase3

CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage
phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (UL2-UL3)

12

Phase3-Phase1

CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage
phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor ( UL3-UL1)

13

MaxPh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the

maximum magnitude

14

MinPh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the

minimum magnitude

15

UnbalancePh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,

which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and phph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0 all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 391 is always
applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT
inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2
& UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information
about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing
block, which will then take automatic care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 392 for built-in
current restraint feature:

665
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 392:

Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the

parameter RestrCurr

11.1.7.2

Comment

PosSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence

current phasor

NegSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative

sequence current phasor

3ZeroSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence

current phasor multiplied by factor 3

MaxPh

CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with

maximum magnitude

Base quantities for CVGAPC function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for
every CVGAPC function.
Base current shall be entered as:
1.
2.

rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 390.
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by
3 (1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to
15, as shown in table 390.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1.
2.

11.1.7.3

rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 391.
rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 391.

Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 390) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set
level. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent
pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come
if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same
time.

666
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component

in the measured current quantity (see table 390). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

PosSeq (positive sequence current)

NegSeq (negative sequence current)
UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first
harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.

Directional feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant
phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 390) and measured voltage
phasor (see table 391). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent
and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling
this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the
current flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means
towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object).
For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured
voltage phasor (see table 391) and measured current phasor (see table 390) will be
used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user
to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper
directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will
simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the
directional criteria.
Table 393 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones)
for these two quantities from traditional directional relays.
Table 393:
Set value for the
parameter

CurrentInput

Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature

Set value for the
parameter

VoltageInput

Comment

PosSeq

PosSeq

Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)

NegSeq

-NegSeq

Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)

3ZeroSeq

-3ZeroSeq

Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to
-90 depending on the power system earthing (that
is, solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)

Table continues on next page

667
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Set value for the

parameter

CurrentInput

Set value for the

parameter

Comment

VoltageInput

Phase1

Phase2-Phase3

Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Phase2

Phase3-Phase1

Directional overcurrent function for the second phase

is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Phase3

Phase1-Phase2

Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.
Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and
IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool,
checks that:

the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by
the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 334).

U=-3U0

RCADir
Ipickup

ROADir

I=3Io

Operate region
mta line
en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN

Figure 334:

I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function

where:

RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool,

checks that:

668
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined
by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter
setting; see figure 334).

U=-3U0

RCADir
Ipickup

ROADir

I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN

Figure 335:

CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

where:

RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the preset value. User can select one of the following three options:

Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100
ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined
during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup
level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured

voltage quantity (see table 391). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

669
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd

IEC05000324 V1 EN

Figure 336:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter

VDepMode_OC1=Step)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1

Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd

IEC05000323 V1 EN

Figure 337:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT

670
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

curves (overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage
conditions).

Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining

current quantity (see table 392). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the
restraining current.

IMeasured
te
ra
pe
O

ea
ar

IsetHigh

tr
es
*I r
f
f
e
Co
s tr
e
I>R

ain

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN

Figure 338:

Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time
delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for
longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to
one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the end user setting.

11.1.7.4

Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 390) with the set pickup
level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start
signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value
one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip
671

Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the setting.

11.1.7.5

Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 391) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.

11.1.7.6

Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity (see table 391) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.

11.1.7.7

Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following
figures.

672
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IED

Phasors &
samples

Current and voltage selection

settings

Selection of which current

and voltage shall be given to
the built-in protection
elements

Selected current
Selected voltage

Restraint current selection

Selection of restraint current

Selected restraint current

Phasors &
samples

Phasor calculation of
individual currents

CVGAPC function

Phasor calculation of
individual voltages

A/D conversion scaling

with CT ratio

A/D conversion
scaling with CT ratio

ADM

IEC05000169_2_en.vsd
IEC05000169 V2 EN

Figure 339:

Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function

Figure 339 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.
1.
2.
3.

Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function:

1.
2.
3.

Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 390) for
internally measured current.
Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 391) for
internally measured voltage.
Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 392) for
internally measured restraint current.

673
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

CURRENT

UC1
2
Selected current

TRUC1

nd

Harmonic
restraint

STUC2

UC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint

TRUC2

STOC1

OC1

Selected restraint current

2nd Harmonic
restraint

TROC1

Current restraint

BLK2ND
DIROC1

Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint

STOC2
TROC2

OC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint
Directionality

UDIRLOW
DIROC2

Voltage control /
restraint

STOV1

OV1

TROV1

OV2

TROV2

UV1

TRUV1

STOV2

Selected voltage

STUV1

STUV2

UV2

TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN

Figure 340:

CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements

674
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Logic in figure 340 can be summarized as follows:

1.
2.
3.

Enable
second
harmonic

The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements.
Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of
its START and TRIP output signals.
More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the
following four figures
Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements &
steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

Second
harmonic check

DEF time
selected

BLKTROC
1

DEF

AND

TROC1

OR

Selected current

a
b

StartCurr_OC1

a>b

OC1=On
BLKOC1

STOC1

AND

Inverse
Voltage
control or
restraint
feature

Selected voltage

Selected restrain current

Directionality
check

DIR_OK

Inverse
time
selected

Current
Restraint
Feature
Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831.vsd

IEC05000831 V1 EN

Figure 341:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)

675
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current

b>a

DEF

TRUC1

AND

AND

StartCurr_UC1

Operation_UC1=On

STUC1

Bin input: BLKUC1

en05000750.vsd
IEC05000750 V1 EN

Figure 342:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has
the same internal logic)

DEF time
selected

BLKTROV1

DEF

AND

TROV1

OR
Selected voltage

a
b

StartVolt_OV1

a>b

STOV1

AND
Inverse

Operation_OV1=On
BLKOV1

Inverse time
selected

en05000751.vsd
IEC05000751 V1 EN

Figure 343:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)

676
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

DEF time
selected

BLKTRUV
1

DEF

AND

TRUV1

OR
Selected voltage

b>a

STUV1

AND

StartVolt_UV1

Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
selected

BLKUV1

en05000752.vsd
IEC05000752 V1 EN

Figure 344:

11.1.8

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)

Technical data
Table 394:

CVGAPC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Measuring current
input

phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,

UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph

Base current

(1 - 99999) A

Measuring voltage
input

phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,

UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph

Base voltage

(0.05 - 2000.00) kV

Start overcurrent,
step 1 and 2

(2 - 5000)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir for IIr

1.0% of I for I>Ir

Start undercurrent,
step 1 and 2

(2 - 150)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir for IIr

1.0% of I for I>Ir

Independent time
delay, overcurrent at
0 to 2 x Iset

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Independent time
delay, undercurrent
at 2 to 0 x Iset

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Overcurrent:
Start time at 0 to 2 x
Iset

Table continues on next page

677
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Function
Reset time at 2 to 0 x
Iset

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Range or value

Accuracy

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Start time at 2 to 0 x
Iset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 0 to 2 x
Iset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

See table 1038 and

table 1039

Parameter ranges for customer defined

characteristic no 17:
k: 0.05 - 999.00
A: 0.0000 - 999.0000
B: 0.0000 - 99.0000
C: 0.0000 - 1.0000
P: 0.0001 - 10.0000
PR: 0.005 - 3.000
TR: 0.005 - 600.000
CR: 0.1 - 10.0

See table 1038 and table 1039

Voltage level where

voltage memory
takes over

(0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Start overvoltage,
step 1 and 2

(2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur for U Ur
0.5% of U for U > Ur

Start undervoltage,
step 1 and 2

(2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur for U Ur
0.5% of U for U > Ur

Independent time
delay, overvoltage at
0.8 to 1.2 x Uset

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Independent time
delay, undervoltage
at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Start time at 0.8 to

1.2 x Uset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to

0.8 x Uset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Start time at 1.2 to

0.8 x Uset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to

0.8 x Uset

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

High and low voltage

limit, voltage
dependent operation

(1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase

1.0% of Ur for UUr

1.0% of U for U>Ur

Directional function

Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse

Relay characteristic
angle

(-180 to +180) degrees

2.0 degrees

Relay operate angle

(1 to 90) degrees

2.0 degrees

Reset ratio,
overcurrent

> 95%

Undercurrent:

Overvoltage:

Undervoltage:

Table continues on next page

678
Technical Manual

Section 11
Multipurpose protection

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Reset ratio,
undercurrent

< 105%

Reset ratio,
overvoltage

> 95%

Reset ratio,
undervoltage

< 105%

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Overcurrent:

Undercurrent:

Overvoltage:

Undervoltage:

679
Technical Manual

680

Section 12
System protection and control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 12

System protection and control

12.1

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC

12.1.1

Identification

12.1.2

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Multipurpose filter

SMAIHPAC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
The multi-purpose filter function block, SMAIHPAC, is arranged as a three-phase
filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the
standard pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that
it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal. Thus it
can, for example, be used to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for
synchronous generator.

12.1.3

Function block
SMAIHPAC
BLOCK
G3P*

AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC13000180-1-en.vsd

IEC13000180 V1 EN

12.1.4

Signals
Table 395:
Name

SMAIHPAC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

G3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Analog input group from SMAI

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

681
Technical Manual

Section 12
System protection and control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 396:

SMAIHPAC Output signals

Name

12.1.5
Table 397:
Name

Type

Description

AI3P

GROUP SIGNAL

Analog input 3-phase group

AI1

GROUP SIGNAL

Analog input 1

AI2

GROUP SIGNAL

Analog input 2

AI3

GROUP SIGNAL

Analog input 3

AI4

GROUP SIGNAL

Analog input 4

Settings
SMAIHPAC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ConnectionType

Ph - Ph
Ph - N

Ph - N

Analogue input connection type

SetFrequency

2.0 - 500.0

Hz

0.1

50.0

Desired frequency to be extracted by the

filter

FreqBandWidth

0.0 - 60.0

Hz

0.1

0.0

Extra added frequency band around the

set frequency

FilterLength

0.1 s
0.2 s
0.5 s
1.0 s
2.0 s
4.0 s

1.0 s

Approximate length of the filtering

window in seconds

OverLap

0 - 95

20

Filtering window overlap between two

calculations in percent

12.1.6

Operation principle
For all four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual
quantity) the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20
samples per fundamental system cycle are first stored. When enough samples are
available in the internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the
setting parameter SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally
available for each of the calculated phasors:

Magnitude
Phase angle
Exact frequency of the extracted signal

Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This
algorithm is different from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically
used by the numerical IEDs. This filter provides extremely good accuracy of
measurement and excellent noise rejection, but at the same time it has much slower
response time. It is capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle and

682
Technical Manual

Section 12
System protection and control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

actual frequency) of any signal (e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the
connected CTs and/or VTs. The magnitude and the phase angle of this phasor are
calculated with very high precision. For example the magnitude and phase angle of
the phasor can be estimated even if it has magnitude of one per mille (i.e. 1 ) in
comparison to the dominating signal (e.g. the fundamental frequency component).
Several instances of this function block are provided. These instances are fully
synchronized between each-other in respect of phase angle calculation. Thus if two
multi-purpose filters are used for some application, one for current and the second
one for the voltage signals, the power values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can
be calculated from them by the over-/under-power function or CVMMXN
measurement function block.
In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as well:

Phasors for the individual phases as well as phase-to-phase phasors

True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory
Positive sequence phasor
Negative sequence phasor
Zero sequence phasor
etc.

In order to properly calculate phase-to-phase phasors from the individual phase

phasors or vice versa, the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided. It
defines what quantities (i.e. individual phases or phase-to-phase quantities) are
physically connected to the IED analogue inputs by wiring. Then the IED knows
which one of them are the measured quantities and the other one is then internally
calculated. This setting is only important for the VT inputs, because the CTs are
typically star connected all the time.
Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function
or overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-power function many
different protection applications can be arranged. For example the following
protection, monitoring or measurement features can be realized:

Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators

Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and
synchronous generators
Super-synchronous protection
Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, subharmonic, inter-harmonic etc.
Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the threephase power system
Sensitive reverse power protection
Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
etc.

683
Technical Manual

Section 12
System protection and control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU
(Phase-phase voltage measurement), etc.
The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the
extracted signal. Thus the user can check the actual frequency of some
phenomenon in the power system (e.g. frequency of the sub-synchronous currents)
and compare it with expected value obtained previously by either calculation or
simulation. For the whole three-phase filter group the frequency of the signal
connected to the first input (i.e. phase L1) is reported. This value can be then used
either by over-/under-frequency protections or reported to the built-in HMI or any
other external client via the measurement blocks such is the CVMMXN.
How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on
the setting parameter FilterLength. Table 398 gives overview of the used number
of samples for phasor calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of
samples is always a power of number two.
Table 398:

Length of the filtering window

Value for parameter

FilterLength

Used No of samples for

calculation (fixed,
independent from rated
frequency)

Corresponding length of
the input waveform in
miliseconds for 50Hz
power system

Corresponding length of
the input waveform in
miliseconds for 60Hz
power system

0.1 s

128 = 27

128 ms

107 ms

0.2 s

256 = 28

256 ms

213 ms

0.5 s

512 = 29

512 ms

427 ms

1.0 s

1024 = 210

1024 ms

853 ms

2.0 s

2048 = 211

2048 ms

1707 ms

4.0 s

4096 = 212

4096 ms

3413 ms

Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines
certain filter properties as described below:
First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall
always be longer than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted.
Actually the best results are obtained if at least five complete periods are available
within the filtering window. Thus, this filter feature will limit which filter lengths
can be used to extract low frequency signals. For example if 16,7 Hz signal shall be
extracted the minimum filter length in milliseconds shall be:
3

1000
16.7

= 180ms

EQUATION000028 V1 EN

(Equation 193)

Thus based on the data from Table 398 the minimum acceptable value for this
parameter would be FilterLength = 0.2 s but more accurate results will be
obtained by using FilterLength = 0.5 s

684
Technical Manual

Section 12
System protection and control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Second feature which is determined by the selected value for parameter

FilterLength is the capability of the filter to separate the desired signal from the
other disturbing signals which may have similar frequency value. Note that the
filter output will be the phasor with the highest magnitude within certain pass
frequency band around the SetFrequency. Table 399 defines the natural size of
this pass frequency band for the filter, depending on the selected value for
parameter FilterLength.
Table 399:

Pass frequency band due to FilterLength

Value for parameter FilterLength For 50Hz power system

For 60Hz power system

0.1 s

22.5 Hz

27.0 Hz

0.2 s

11.5 Hz

14.0 Hz

0.5 s

6.0 Hz

7.2 Hz

1.0 s

3.0 Hz

3.6 Hz

2.0 s

1.5 Hz

1.8 Hz

4.0 s

0.8 Hz

1.0 Hz

Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the
disturbing signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise
present in the input signal waveform. For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be
extracted in 50Hz power system, then from Table 399 it can be concluded that
FilterLength=1,0 s shall be selected as a minimum value. However if frequency
deviation of the fundamental frequency signal in the power system are taken into
account it may be advisable to select FilterLength=2,0 s for such application.
Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency
band the filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the
signal frequency will have value minus one. Finally the set value for parameter
FilterLength also defines the response time of the filter after a step change of the
measured signal. The filter will correctly estimate the new signal magnitude once
75% of the filter length has been filed with the new signal value (i.e. after the change).
If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate
but wider filter) it is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value
different from zero for parameter FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass
band can be defined as:
(value given in Table 399 + one-half of the set FreqBandWidth value)
Example if in 60Hz system the selected values are FilterLength =1.0 s and
FreqBandWidth = 5.0 the total filter pass band will be (3.6+5.0/2)= 6.1 Hz.
It shall be noted that the phasor calculation is relatively computation demanding
(required certain amount of the CPU processing time). In order to control the CPU
usage for this filter, the setting parameter OverLap is used. This setting parameter
defines how often the new phasor value is calculated during time period defined by
the set value for the parameter FilterLength (see Table 398). The following list

685
Technical Manual

Section 12
System protection and control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

gives some examples how this parameter influence the calculation rate for the
extracted phasor:

12.1.7

when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per
FilterLength
when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per
FilterLength

Filter calculation example

In the following Figure an example from an installation of this filter on a large, 50
Hz turbo generator with a rating in excess of 1000 MVA is presented. In this
installation filter is used to measure the stator sub-synchronous resonance currents.
For this particular installation the following settings were used for the filter:

SetFrequency= 31.0 Hz
FilterLength= 1.0 s
OverLap = 75%
FreqBandWidth= 0.0 Hz

IEC13000178-2-en.vsd
IEC13000178 V2 EN

Figure 345:

Example of filter calculation

The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED.
The following traces are presented in this Figure.
a) Waveforms of the stator three-phase currents given in primary kA.

686
Technical Manual

Section 12
System protection and control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

b) RMS value of the sub-synchronous resonance current extracted by the filter in

primary amperes.
c) Frequency of the extracted sub-synchronous resonance current provided by the
filter in Hz.
Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well
indicates with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor
magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub-synchronous current component.
The following can be observed in the Figure:

The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary.

The measured magnitude of the sub-synchronous current is around 173 A
primary (that is, 0.5% of the fundamental 50 Hz component).
The frequency of this sub-synchronous current component is 31.24 Hz.

With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency
are calculated approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four
times per 1024 ms).

687
Technical Manual

688

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 13

Secondary system supervision

13.1

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

13.1.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Current circuit supervision

13.1.2

CCSSPVC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87

Functionality
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negativesequence current functions.
It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of
open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high
voltages will stress the secondary circuit.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate
input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to
block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.

13.1.3

Function block
CCSSPVC
I3P*
IREF*
BLOCK

FAIL
ALARM
IEC13000304-1-en.vsd

IEC13000304 V1 EN

Figure 346:

CCSSPVC function block

689
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.1.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 400:

CCSSPVC Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for three phase current input

IREF

GROUP
SIGNAL

Residual reference current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

CCSSPVC Output signals

Name

Table 402:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 401:

13.1.5

Default

Type

Description

FAIL

BOOLEAN

Detection of current circuit failure

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for current circuit failure

Settings
CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

IMinOp

10 - 200

%IB

20

Minimum operate current differential

level in % of IBase

Table 403:
Name
Ip>Block

Table 404:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

13.1.6

CCSSPVC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
20 - 500

Unit
%IB

Step
1

Default
150

Description
Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase

CCSSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Operation principle
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual
current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 347.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

690
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of
the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than
the set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM
will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after
the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function
when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.
I>Ip>Block
IL1
IL2
IL3
I ref

IL1
IL2
IL3
Iref

+
+
+

BLOCK

I>IMinOp

x
0,8

+
-

1,5 x Ir
10 ms

OR

AND

FAIL

20 ms 100 ms

OPERATION

150 ms

1s

ALARM

BLOCK
en05000463.tif
IEC05000463 V2 EN

Figure 347:

Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 348.

691
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
area

Slope = 0.8
I MinOp

| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN

Figure 348:

Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S
I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

13.1.7

Technical data
Table 405:

CCSSPVCtechnical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(10-200)% of IBase

10.0% of Ir at I Ir
10.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Operate current

>90%

Block current

(20-500)% of IBase

Reset ratio, Block current

>90% at (50-500)% of IBase

5.0% of Ir at I Ir
5.0% of I at I > Ir

13.2

Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC

13.2.1

Identification
Function description
Fuse failure supervision

IEC 61850
identification
FUFSPVC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

692
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

13.2.2

Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise
might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection
methods, negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional
delta voltage and delta current detection.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in
isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence
quantities.
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.
The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in
order to take into account the particular earthing of the network.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to
the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure,
which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during
station operations.

13.2.3

Function block
FUFSPVC
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
CBCLOSED
MCBOP
DISCPOS
BLKTRIP

BLKZ
BLKU
3PH
DLD1PH
DLD3PH
STDI
STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3

IEC14000065-1-en.vsd
IEC14000065 V1 EN

Figure 349:

FUFSPVC function block

693
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.2.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 406:
Name

FUFSPVC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Current connection

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

CBCLOSED

BOOLEAN

Active when circuit breaker is closed

MCBOP

BOOLEAN

Active when external MCB opens protected

voltage circuit

DISCPOS

BOOLEAN

Active when line disconnector is open

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocks operation of function when active

Table 407:
Name

FUFSPVC Output signals

Type

Description

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Start of current and voltage controlled function

BLKU

BOOLEAN

General start of function

3PH

BOOLEAN

Three-phase start of function

DLD1PH

BOOLEAN

Dead line condition in at least one phase

DLD3PH

BOOLEAN

Dead line condition in all three phases

STDI

BOOLEAN

Common start signal of sudden change in current

STDIL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L1

STDIL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L2

STDIL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L3

STDU

BOOLEAN

Common start signal of sudden change in voltage

STDUL1

BOOLEAN

Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L1

STDUL2

BOOLEAN

Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L2

STDUL3

BOOLEAN

Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L3

694
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

13.2.5
Table 408:
Name

Settings
FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OpMode

Off
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs

UZsIZs

Operating mode selection

3U0>

1 - 100

%UB

30

Operate level of residual overvoltage

element in % of UBase

3I0<

1 - 100

%IB

10

Operate level of residual undercurrent

element in % of IBase

3U2>

1 - 100

%UB

30

Operate level of neg seq overvoltage

element in % of UBase

3I2<

1 - 100

%IB

10

Operate level of neg seq undercurrent

element in % of IBase

OpDUDI

Off
On

Off

Operation of change based function Off/

On

DU>

1 - 100

%UB

60

Operate level of change in phase voltage

in % of UBase

DI<

1 - 100

%IB

15

Operate level of change in phase current

in % of IBase

UPh>

1 - 100

%UB

70

Operate level of phase voltage in % of

UBase

IPh>

1 - 100

%IB

10

Operate level of phase current in % of

IBase

SealIn

Off
On

On

Seal in functionality Off/On

USealln<

1 - 100

%UB

70

Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in

% of UBase

IDLD<

1 - 100

%IB

Operate level for open phase current

detection in % of IBase

UDLD<

1 - 100

%UB

60

Operate level for open phase voltage

detection in % of UBase

Table 409:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

695
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.2.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Monitored data
Table 410:
Name

FUFSPVC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

3I0

REAL

Magnitude of zero
sequence current

3I2

REAL

Magnitude of negative
sequence current

3U0

REAL

kV

Magnitude of zero
sequence voltage

3U2

REAL

kV

Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage

13.2.7

Operation principle

13.2.7.1

Zero and negative sequence detection

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 350:

the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

the zero-sequence current 3I0
the negative sequence current 3I2
the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and
3I0<, 3U2> and 3I2<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zerosequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zerosequence current is below the set value 3I0<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured
negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured
negative sequence current is below the set value 3I2<.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the
two line ends.

696
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Sequence Detection
3I0<

CurrZeroSeq

IL1

IL2

IL3

Zero
sequence
filter

3I0
a
b

a>b

100 ms
t

3I2

Negative
sequence
filter
a
b

3I2<

CurrNegSeq

a>b

100 ms
t

AND

AND

3U0>

FuseFailDetZeroSeq

FuseFailDetNegSeq
VoltZeroSeq

UL1

UL2

UL3

Zero
sequence
filter
Negative
sequence
filter

a
b

3U0

a>b
VoltNegSeq

a
b

a>b

3U2

3U2>

IEC10000036-2-en.vsd
IEC10000036 V2 EN

Figure 350:

Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on
local HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.

Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and
DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions
occur:

The input BLOCK is activated

The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not
present
The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to
other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block
for 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during

697
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the
fuse failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent
of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of
voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of
the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.

13.2.7.2

Delta current and delta voltage detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 351. The calculation of
the changes of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The
calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and
DU>. The algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without
a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The following
quantities are calculated in all three phases:

The change in voltage DU

The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are

fulfilled for a phase:

The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more
than 1.5 cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
The magnitude of DU is higher than the corresponding setting DU>
The magnitude of DI is below the setting DI<

698
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:

The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting
IPh>
The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in at least one phase together with
high current for the same phase will set the output. The measured phase current is
used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected
line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be
followed by current change lower than the setting DI<, and therefore a false fuse
failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled for at least
one phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is
connected to FALSE , then only the first criterion can enable the delta function.If
the DUDI detection of one phase sets the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at the
level high, then the signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the
voltage of that phase is lower then the setting Uph>.
In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The
internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage,
or respectively current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on
a sample analysis algorithm. In particular DelatU is activated if at least three
consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting DU>. In a similar way
DelatI is activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher then the
setting DI<. When DeltaU or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1,
STDUL2, STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1, STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a
sudden change of voltage or current detection, are activated with a 20 ms time off
delay. The common start output signals STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms
time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or current is detected.
The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.

699
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
IL1

DI detection based on sample analysis

DeltaIL1

DI<
UL1

DU detection based on sample analysis

AND

DU>
a
b

UPh>
IL2

a>b

1.5 cycle
t

20 ms
t

DeltaUL1

DeltaIL2

DUDI detection Phase 2

UL2

DeltaUL2

Same logic as for phase 1

IL3

DeltaIL3

DUDI detection Phase 3

UL3

DeltaUL3

Same logic as for phase 1

UL1

a
b

IL1

a
b

IPh>

a<b

a>b

AND

CBCLOSED
UL2

a
b

IL2

AND

a
b

a
b

IL3

a
b

OR

AND

a<b

a>b

AND
AND

UL3

OR

OR

OR

AND

a<b

a>b

AND
AND

OR

OR

AND

OR

FuseFailDetDUDI
IEC12000166-2-en.vsd

IEC12000166 V2 EN

Figure 351:

Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part

700
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

intBlock
AND
DeltaIL1
DeltaIL2
DeltaIL3

20 ms
t

OR

20 ms
t

AND

AND

20 ms
t
AND

AND
DeltaUL1
DeltaUL2

20 ms
t
20 ms
t

OR

AND

AND

STDI

STDIL1

STDIL2

STDIL3

STDU

STDUL1

STDUL2

20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
AND

STDUL3

IEC12000165-1-en.vsd
IEC12000165 V1 EN

Figure 352:

13.2.7.3

Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output

signals

Dead line detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 353. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to
be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated.
If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated

701
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Dead Line Detection

IL1

a
b

IL2

a
b

IL3

a
b

a<b

AllCurrLow

AND
a<b
a<b

IDLD<

DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1

a
b

UL2

a
b

UL3

a
b

a<b
a<b

AND
OR

DLD1PH

AND
AND

a<b

AND

AND

AND

DLD3PH

UDLD<
intBlock

IEC10000035-1-en.vsd
IEC10000035 V2 EN

Figure 353:

13.2.7.4

Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 354. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting
parameter Operation to On or Off.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode
selector, OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The
different operation modes are:

Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work
in parallel (OR-condition for operation).
UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work
in series (AND-condition for operation).
OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that
has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will
be activated).

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.

702
Technical Manual

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is
released, the function will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal
BLKZ will be activated as well if the internal dead phase detection,
DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used
for blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection,
energizing check, and so on). The output BLKZ shall be used to block the
impedance protection functions.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase
voltages is below the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ
signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If
all three phase voltages drop below the set value USealIn< and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The
signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ will now be active as long as any phase voltage is
below the set value USealIn<.
If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored
in the non-volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary
power interruption or re-start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value
in its non-volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present
before the shut down. All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn< before
fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.
The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above
the setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence
voltage has been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all
phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (criteria for open phase detection) and
the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary
input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the
VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ
in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open
independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of
150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation
of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts
of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be
affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the
distance protection.

703
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE

AND

BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK

intBlock

OR
20 ms
t

BLKTRIP
AND

100 ms
t
FusefailStarted

All UL < USealIn<

OR

AND

AND

AND

SealIn = On

3PH

AND
Any UL < UsealIn<
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND

OpDUDI = On

OR

5s
t

FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs

OpMode

CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq

OR

UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs

OR

UZsIZs AND UNsINs

OptimZsNs
OR
a
b

AND

a>b

AND
200 ms
t

DeadLineDet1Ph

AND
150 ms
t

MCBOP

All UL > UsealIn<

VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq

60 s
t

OR

OR

OR

OR

AND

AND

BLKZ

BLKU

AND
5s
t

AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED
DISCPOS

IEC10000033-2-en.vsd

IEC10000033 V2 EN

Figure 354:

Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main

logic

704
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

13.2.8

Technical data
Table 411:

FUFSPVCtechnical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage, zero sequence

(1-100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence

(1100)% of IBase

0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence

(1-100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence

(1100)% of IBase

0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage change level

(1-100)% of UBase

10.0% of Ur

Operate current change level

(1100)% of IBase

10.0% of Ir

Operate phase voltage

(1-100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Operate phase current

(1100)% of IBase

0.5% of Ir

Operate phase dead line voltage

(1-100)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Operate phase dead line current

(1100)% of IBase

0.5% of Ir

Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 to 0 x Ur

Min. = 10 ms
Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

13.3

Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC

13.3.1

Identification
Function description
Fuse failure supervision

13.3.2

IEC 61850
identification
VDSPVC

IEC 60617
identification
VTS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
60

Functionality
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of
measured voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:

Distance protection function.

Undervoltage function.
Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary

circuits between voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional
operations can be prevented by VDSPVC.

705
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement

circuit, based on phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused
circuits. VDSPVC blocking output can be configured to block functions that need
to be blocked in case of faults in the voltage circuit.

13.3.3

Function block
VDSPVC
U3P1*
U3P2*
BLOCK

MAINFUF
PILOTFUF
U1L1FAIL
U1L2FAIL
U1L3FAIL
U2L1FAIL
U2L2FAIL
U2L3FAIL
IEC14000048-1-en.vsd

IEC12000142 V2 EN

Figure 355:

13.3.4

VDSPVC function block

Signals
Table 412:
Name

VDRFUF Input signals

Type

Default

Description

U3P1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Main fuse voltage

U3P2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Pilot fuse voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

Table 413:

VDRFUF Output signals

Name

Type

Description

MAINFUF

BOOLEAN

Block of main fuse failure

PILOTFUF

BOOLEAN

Alarm of pilot fuse failure

U1L1FAIL

BOOLEAN

Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L1

U1L2FAIL

BOOLEAN

Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L2

U1L3FAIL

BOOLEAN

Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L3

U2L1FAIL

BOOLEAN

Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L1

U2L2FAIL

BOOLEAN

Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L2

U2L3FAIL

BOOLEAN

Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L3

706
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

13.3.5
Table 414:
Name

Settings
VDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Mode Off / On

Ud>MainBlock

10.0 - 80.0

%UB

0.1

20.0

Blocking picked up voltage level in % of

UBase when main fuse fails

Ud>PilotAlarm

10.0 - 80.0

%UB

0.1

30.0

Alarm picked up voltage level in % of

UBase when pilot fuse fails

SealIn

Off
On

On

Seal in functionality Off/On

USealIn

0.0 - 100.0

%UB

0.1

70.0

Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of

UBase

Step

Default

Table 415:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

Table 416:
Name

VDRFUF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

VDRFUF Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ConTypeMain

Ph-N
Ph-Ph

Ph-N

Selection of connection type for main

fuse group

ConTypePilot

Ph-N
Ph-Ph

Ph-N

Selection of connection type for pilot

fuse group

13.3.6

Monitored data
Table 417:
Name

VDRFUF Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UL1DIF_A

REAL

kV

Differential voltage
phase L1 for alarm
functionality

UL2DIF_A

REAL

kV

Differential voltage
phase L2 for alarm
functionality

UL3DIF_A

REAL

kV

Differential voltage
phase L3 for alarm
functionality

Table continues on next page

707
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision
Name

13.3.7

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UL1DIF_B

REAL

kV

Differential voltage
phase L1 for block
functionality

UL2DIF_B

REAL

kV

Differential voltage
phase L2 for block
functionality

UL3DIF_B

REAL

kV

Differential voltage
phase L3 for block
functionality

Operation principle
VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main
and pilot fuse groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is
theoretical zero in the healthy condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be
due to a fuse failure.
If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainL1 <
vPilotL1 or vMainL2 < vPilotL2 or vMainL3 < vPilotL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>MainBlock), a blocking signal will be
initiated to indicate the main fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent
functions. In addition, the function also indicates the phase in which the voltage
reduction has occurred.
If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotL1 <
vMainL1 or vPilotL2 < vMainL2 or vPilotL3 < vMainL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>PilotAlarm), an alarm signal will be
initiated to indicate the pilot fuse failure and also the faulty phase where the
voltage reduction occurred.
When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions
are restored above the USealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when
normal voltage conditions are restored.

708
Technical Manual

Section 13
Secondary system supervision

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

5s

a
a<b
USealIn

AND

OR

SealIn=0
vPilotL1

vMainL1

U1L1FAIL

MAX

a>b

OR

AND

Ud>MainBlock

OR

0
MIN

MAINFAIL

ABS

a>b

AND

U2L1FAIL

Ud> PilotAlarm
BLOCK

OR
vPilotL2

PILOTFAIL
U1L2FAIL

vMainL2

Phase L2, same as Phase L1

U2L2FAIL

vPilotL3
vMainL3

Phase L3, same as Phase L1

U2L3FAIL

U1L3FAIL

IEC12000144-1-en.vsd

IEC12000144 V1 EN

Figure 356:

13.3.8

Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC

Technical data
Table 418:

VDSPVC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, block of main

fuse failure

(10.0-80.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio

<110%

Operate time, block of main fuse

failure at 1 to 0 x Ur

Min = 5 ms

Reset time, block of main fuse

failure at 0 to 1 x Ur

Min = 15 ms

Operate value, alarm for pilot

fuse failure

(10.0-80.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio

<110%

Operate time, alarm for pilot

fuse failure at 1 to 0 x Ur

Min = 5 ms

Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse

failure at 0 to 1 x Ur

Min = 15 ms

Max = 15 ms

Max = 30 ms

Max = 15 ms

Max = 30 ms

709
Technical Manual

710

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 14

Control

14.1

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN

14.1.1

Identification
Function description
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and
synchronizing

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SESRSYN

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
25

sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN

14.1.2

Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN function checks
that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at
least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
1 breaker or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and
can have different settings.
For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is
provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled
closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be
connected. The synchronizing function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle
difference, slip frequency and frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled
closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.

711
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.1.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
SESRSYN
U3PBB1*
SYNOK
U3PBB2*
AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1*
AUTOENOK
U3PLN2*
MANSYOK
BLOCK
MANENOK
BLKSYNCH
TSTSYNOK
BLKSC
TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG
TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN
TSTENOK
B1QCLD
USELFAIL
B2QOPEN
B1SEL
B2QCLD
B2SEL
LN1QOPEN
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN
SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD
SYNFAIL
UB1OK
UOKSYN
UB1FF
UDIFFSYN
UB2OK
FRDIFSYN
UB2FF
FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK
FRDERIVA
ULN1FF
UOKSC
ULN2OK
UDIFFSC
ULN2FF
FRDIFFA
STARTSYN
PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH
FRDIFFM
TSTSC
PHDIFFM
TSTENERG
INADVCLS
AENMODE
UDIFFME
MENMODE
FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
IEC10000046-1-en.vsd
IEC10000046 V1 EN

Figure 357:

14.1.4

SESRSYN function block

Signals
Table 419:
Name

SESRSYN Input signals

Type

Default

Description

U3PBB1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,

busbar 1

U3PBB2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,

busbar 2

U3PLN1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,

line 1

U3PLN2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,

line 2

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

General block

BLKSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Block synchronizing

BLKSC

BOOLEAN

Block synchro check

BLKENERG

BOOLEAN

Block energizing check

B1QOPEN

BOOLEAN

Open status for CB or disconnector connected to

bus1

Table continues on next page

712
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

B1QCLD

BOOLEAN

Close status for CB or disconnector connected to

bus1

B2QOPEN

BOOLEAN

Open status for CB or disconnector connected to

bus2

B2QCLD

BOOLEAN

Close status for CB or disconnector connected to

bus2

LN1QOPEN

BOOLEAN

Open status for CB or disconnector connected to

line1

LN1QCLD

BOOLEAN

Close status for CB or disconnector connected to

line1

LN2QOPEN

BOOLEAN

Open status for CB or disconnector connected to

line2

LN2QCLD

BOOLEAN

Close status for CB or disconnector connected to

line2

UB1OK

BOOLEAN

Bus1 voltage transformer OK

UB1FF

BOOLEAN

Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure

UB2OK

BOOLEAN

Bus2 voltage transformer OK

UB2FF

BOOLEAN

Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure

ULN1OK

BOOLEAN

Line1 voltage transformer OK

ULN1FF

BOOLEAN

Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure

ULN2OK

BOOLEAN

Line2 voltage transformer OK

ULN2FF

BOOLEAN

Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure

STARTSYN

BOOLEAN

Start synchronizing

TSTSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Set synchronizing in test mode

TSTSC

BOOLEAN

Set synchro check in test mode

TSTENERG

BOOLEAN

Set energizing check in test mode

AENMODE

INTEGER

Input for setting of automatic energizing mode

MENMODE

INTEGER

Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 420:
Name

SESRSYN Output signals

Type

Description

SYNOK

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing OK output

AUTOSYOK

BOOLEAN

Auto synchro check OK

AUTOENOK

BOOLEAN

Automatic energizing check OK

MANSYOK

BOOLEAN

Manual synchro check OK

MANENOK

BOOLEAN

Manual energizing check OK

TSTSYNOK

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing OK test output

TSTAUTSY

BOOLEAN

Auto synchro check OK test output

TSTMANSY

BOOLEAN

Manual synchro check OK test output

TSTENOK

BOOLEAN

Energizing check OK test output

USELFAIL

BOOLEAN

Selected voltage transformer fuse failed

B1SEL

BOOLEAN

Bus1 selected

Table continues on next page

713
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

14.1.5
Table 421:
Name

Type

Description

B2SEL

BOOLEAN

Bus2 selected

LN1SEL

BOOLEAN

Line1 selected

LN2SEL

BOOLEAN

Line2 selected

SYNPROGR

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing in progress

SYNFAIL

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing failed

UOKSYN

BOOLEAN

Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set

limits

UDIFFSYN

BOOLEAN

Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing

FRDIFSYN

BOOLEAN

Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing

FRDIFFOK

BOOLEAN

Frequency difference in band for synchronizing

FRDERIVA

BOOLEAN

Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing

UOKSC

BOOLEAN

Voltage amplitudes above set limits

UDIFFSC

BOOLEAN

Voltage difference out of limit

FRDIFFA

BOOLEAN

Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation

PHDIFFA

BOOLEAN

Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto

operation

FRDIFFM

BOOLEAN

Frequency difference out of limit for Manual

operation

PHDIFFM

BOOLEAN

Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual

Operation

INADVCLS

BOOLEAN

Inadvertent circuit breaker closing

UDIFFME

REAL

Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set

voltage base value

FRDIFFME

REAL

Calculated difference of frequency

PHDIFFME

REAL

Calculated difference of phase angle

UBUS

REAL

Bus voltage

ULINE

REAL

Line voltage

MODEAEN

INTEGER

Selected mode for automatic energizing

MODEMEN

INTEGER

Selected mode for manual energizing

Settings
SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

OperationSynch

Off
On

Off

Operation for synchronizing function Off/

On

UHighBusSynch

50.0 - 120.0

%UBB

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing

in % of UBaseBus

UHighLineSynch

50.0 - 120.0

%UBL

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit line for synchronizing

in % of UBaseLine

Table continues on next page

714
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Unit

Step

Default

UDiffSynch

Values (Range)
0.02 - 0.50

pu

0.01

0.10

Description
Voltage difference limit for synchronizing
in p.u of set voltage base value

FreqDiffMin

0.003 - 0.250

Hz

0.001

0.010

Minimum frequency difference limit for

synchronizing

FreqDiffMax

0.050 - 0.500

Hz

0.001

0.200

Maximum frequency difference limit for

synchronizing

FreqRateChange

0.000 - 0.500

Hz/s

0.001

0.300

Maximum allowed frequency rate of

change

tBreaker

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.080

Closing time of the breaker

tClosePulse

0.050 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Breaker closing pulse duration

tMaxSynch

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

600.00

Resets synch if no close has been made

before set time

tMinSynch

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Minimum time to accept synchronizing

conditions

OperationSC

Off
On

On

Operation for synchronism check

function Off/On

UHighBusSC

50.0 - 120.0

%UBB

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck

in % of UBaseBus

UHighLineSC

50.0 - 120.0

%UBL

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck

in % of UBaseLine

UDiffSC

0.02 - 0.50

pu

0.01

0.15

Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck

in p.u of set voltage base value

FreqDiffA

0.003 - 1.000

Hz

0.001

0.010

Frequency difference limit between bus

and line Auto

FreqDiffM

0.003 - 1.000

Hz

0.001

0.010

Frequency difference limit between bus

and line Manual

PhaseDiffA

5.0 - 90.0

Deg

1.0

25.0

Phase angle difference limit between

bus and line Auto

PhaseDiffM

5.0 - 90.0

Deg

1.0

25.0

Phase angle difference limit between

bus and line Manual

tSCA

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto

tSCM

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay output for synchrocheck

Manual

AutoEnerg

Off
DLLB
DBLL
Both

DLLB

Automatic energizing check mode

ManEnerg

Off
DLLB
DBLL
Both

Both

Manual energizing check mode

ManEnergDBDL

Off
On

Off

Manual dead bus, dead line energizing

UHighBusEnerg

50.0 - 120.0

%UBB

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit bus for energizing

check in % of UBaseBus

UHighLineEnerg

50.0 - 120.0

%UBL

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit line for energizing

check in % of UBaseLine

ULowBusEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

%UBB

1.0

40.0

Voltage low limit bus for energizing

check in % of UBaseBus

Table continues on next page

715
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Step

Default

ULowLineEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

%UBL

1.0

40.0

Voltage low limit line for energizing

check in % of UBaseLine

UMaxEnerg

50.0 - 180.0

%UB

1.0

115.0

Maximum voltage for energizing in % of

UBase, Line and/or Bus

tAutoEnerg

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay for automatic energizing

check

tManEnerg

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay for manual energizing check

Table 422:
Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SelPhaseBus1

Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence

Phase L1

Select phase for busbar1

GblBaseSelBus

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups, Bus

GblBaseSelLine

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups, Line

SelPhaseBus2

Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence

Phase L1

Select phase for busbar2

SelPhaseLine1

Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence

Phase L1

Select phase for line1

SelPhaseLine2

Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence

Phase L1

Select phase for line2

CBConfig

No voltage sel.
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB

No voltage sel.

Select CB configuration

Table 423:
Name
PhaseShift

SESRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
-180 - 180

Unit
Deg

Step
1

Default
0

Description
Additional phase angle for selected line
voltage

716
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.1.6

Monitored data
Table 424:
Name

SESRSYN Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UDIFFME

REAL

Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value

FRDIFFME

REAL

Hz

Calculated difference of
frequency

PHDIFFME

REAL

deg

Calculated difference of
phase angle

UBUS

REAL

kV

Bus voltage

ULINE

REAL

kV

Line voltage

14.1.7

Operation principle

14.1.7.1

Basic functionality
The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities
are simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares
them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the
actual measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and
also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit
breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all
measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the
output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit
breaker and the closing circuit.
For double bus single circuit breaker and 1 circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the
correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1
circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary
contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the application manual.

717
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.1.7.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams

The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN
function components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and
Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchrocheck

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchrocheck function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings
SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation
is made automatically for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle
difference caused if different setting values are selected for both sides of the
breaker. If needed an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected
line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.
When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference:
FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If additional phase
angle adjustment is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is
deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The
frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured
and may not exceed the set value FreqDiff.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are
available and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as
required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively.
Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can
be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking
conditions. UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA,
FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency
difference and phase angle difference conditions are out of limits.

718
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit
breaker has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated,
if the voltage conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference
between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to
smaller than 5 degrees.
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.
OperationSC = On
AND

AND

TSTAUTSY

TSTSC
InvalidSelection
BLKSC
BLOCK

AND
OR

AND

BLOCK

AUTOSYOK

0-60 s
t

AND

tSCA

UDiffSC
AND

50 ms
t

UHighBusSC
UOKSC

AND

UHighLineSC

FreqDiffA

PhaseDiffA

UDIFFSC
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
UDIFFME

voltageDifferenceValue

FRDIFFME

frequencyDifferenceValue

PHDIFFME

phaseAngleDifferenceValue

PhDiff > 60

AND

32 ms
t

100 ms
AND

INADVCLS

PhDiff < 5

IEC07000114-5-en.vsd
IEC07000114 V5 EN

Figure 358:

Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchrocheck function

Synchronizing

When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set
values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the
voltages are both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the
set value for UDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both

719
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

sides are higher than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line
is acceptable, the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable
frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency
FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to be smaller than the internally
preset value of 15 degrees.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum
frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to
allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time.
There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At
operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the
function resets. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not
fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by
mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.

OperationSynch=On
TSTSYNCH
STARTSYN
InvalidSelection
Block

AND

OR

SYNPROGR

AND

S
R

BLKSYNCH

UDiffSynch
50 ms

UHighBusSynch

AND

SYNOK

AND

UHighLineSynch

OR

FreqDiffMax

TSTSYNOK

AND

FreqDiffMin

FreqRateChange

AND

fBus&fLine 5Hz
Phase Diff < 15 deg

tClose
Pulse

tMax
Synch

SYNFAIL

AND

PhaseDiff=closing angle
FreqDiff
tBreaker

Close pulse
in advance

IEC06000636-4-en.vsd
IEC06000636 V4 EN

Figure 359:

Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

720
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Energizing check

Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Energizing check function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they
are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg
and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg
for line energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse
supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing
direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective
MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function
block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both.
Not connected input will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool.
The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The
modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function.
TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

721
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

manEnergOpenBays

MANENOK

OR

TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR

BLOCK
selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB

AND

OR

ULowLineEnerg

tManEnerg
AND

OR

AND

BOTH

ManEnerg

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL

AND

UHighLineEnerg
AND

ManEnergDBDL

TSTENOK

AND

UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine 5 Hz
IEC14000031-1-en.vsd

IEC14000031 V1 EN

Figure 360:

Manual energizing

TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR

BLOCK
selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB

AND

ULowLineEnerg

OR

tAutoEnerg
AND

OR

AND

AUTOENOK

BOTH

AutoEnerg

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL

AND

UHighLineEnerg
UMaxEnerg

AND

TSTENOK

fBus and fLine 5 Hz

IEC14000030-1-en.vsd

IEC14000030 V1 EN

Figure 361:

Automatic energizing

722
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BLKENERG
BLOCK

OR

AND

manEnergOpenBays

ManEnerg
1 bus CB

CBConfig

AND

B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN

AND

OR

B1QCLD
B2QOPEN

AND

LN2QOPEN
1 bus alt. CB
AND

B2QCLD

AND

OR

OR

AND

Tie CB
AND

AND

OR

AND

IEC14000032-1-en.vsd
IEC14000032 V1 EN

Figure 362:

Open bays

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are
connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function
in the IED. Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be
used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs
labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage
circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact
indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.
The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage
and the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line
voltage. Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the
status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a
fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the
synchrocheck function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse
failure is needed.

Voltage selection

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage

transformers for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN
function and determines the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and

723
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and
Bus voltages and MCB supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting
is also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for
the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type
contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible
to use an inverter for one of the positions.
If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is
allowed, it is considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed
for manual energizing in 1 breaker and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual
energization of a completely open diameter in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by
internal logic.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for
single CB and double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the
disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPENB2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector
connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the
bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs
B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.
The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OKUB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the
MCB for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can
alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected
in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal
is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as
the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic
diagram is shown in figure 363.

724
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

B1QOPEN
B1QCLD

B1SEL

AND

B2QOPEN
B2QCLD

B2SEL

AND

AND

invalidSelection
busVoltage

bus1Voltage
bus2Voltage

UB1OK
UB1FF

OR

UB2OK
UB2FF

OR

ULN1OK
ULN1FF

OR

AND
OR

AND

selectedFuseOK

AND

USELFAIL

AND

BLOCK

en05000779-2.vsd
IEC05000779 V2 EN

Figure 363:

Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 1 breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for
the complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker
is described.
With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1
1/2 circuit breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt.
Bus CB or Tie CB.
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN
function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to
the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar
depending on the best selection of voltage circuit.
Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,
LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL

725
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage, which indicates B1SEL.
The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and
with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available
from each fuse (MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and
the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output
combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1
circuit breaker is closed.
The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2
circuit breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2.
If a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is
set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip.
This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.
The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is
shown in figure 364 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 365.

726
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

LN1QOPEN
LN1QCLD

LN1SEL

AND

B1QOPEN
B1QCLD

LN2SEL

AND

AND

LN2QCLD

AND

invalidSelection

AND
AND

B2QOPEN
B2QCLD

B2SEL

OR

LN2QOPEN

AND

lineVoltage

line1Voltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF
UB2OK
UB2FF

OR
OR
OR

ULN1OK
ULN1FF

OR

ULN2OK
ULN2FF

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND

selectedFuseOK

USELFAIL

AND

BLOCK

en05000780-2.vsd
IEC05000780 V2 EN

Figure 364:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement

727
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

LN1QOPEN
LN1QCLD

LN1SEL

AND

B1SEL

1
B1QOPEN
B1QCLD

AND

AND

AND

busVoltage

line1Voltage
bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2QCLD

LN2SEL

AND

B2SEL

1
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD

AND

AND

AND

OR

invalidSelection

lineVoltage

line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF
UB2OK
UB2FF

OR

AND
OR

OR

ULN1OK
ULN1FF

OR

ULN2OK
ULN2FF

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND

selectedFuseOK

USELFAIL

AND

BLOCK

en05000781-2.vsd
IEC05000781 V2 EN

Figure 365:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.

728
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.1.8

Technical data
Table 425:

SESRSYN technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Phase shift, jline - jbus

(-180 to 180) degrees

Voltage high limit for

synchronizing and
synchrocheck

(50.0-120.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, synchrocheck

> 95%

Frequency difference limit

between bus and line for
synchrocheck

(0.003-1.000) Hz

2.5 mHz

Phase angle difference limit

between bus and line for
synchrocheck

(5.0-90.0) degrees

2.0 degrees

Voltage difference limit

between bus and line for
synchronizing and
synchrocheck

(0.02-0.5) p.u

0.5% of Ur

Time delay output for

synchrocheck when angle
difference between bus and
line jumps from PhaseDiff +
2 degrees to PhaseDiff - 2
degrees

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Frequency difference
minimum limit for
synchronizing

(0.003-0.250) Hz

2.5 mHz

Frequency difference
maximum limit for
synchronizing

(0.050-0.500) Hz

2.5 mHz

Maximum allowed frequency

rate of change

(0.000-0.500) Hz/s

10.0 mHz/s

Breaker closing pulse

duration

(0.050-60.000) s

0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater

tMaxSynch, which resets

synchronizing function if no
close has been made before
set time

(0.000-6000.00) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Minimum time to accept

synchronizing conditions

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Voltage high limit for

energizing check

(50.0-120.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit

> 95%

Voltage low limit for

energizing check

(10.0-80.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, voltage low limit

< 105%

Maximum voltage for

energizing

(50.0-180.0)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Table continues on next page

729
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Time delay for energizing

check when voltage jumps
from 0 to 90% of Urated

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 100 ms whichever is

greater

Operate time for

synchrocheck function when
angle difference between
bus and line jumps from
PhaseDiff + 2 degrees to
PhaseDiff - 2 degrees

Min = 15 ms
Max = 30 ms

Operate time for energizing

function when voltage jumps
from 0 to 90% of Urated

Min = 70 ms
Max = 90 ms

14.2

Interlocking

14.2.1

Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage
switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to
prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each
IED is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
system at any given time.

14.2.2

Operation principle
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control
IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV
apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which
arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication
system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking
condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the
operation is performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data
on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection.
Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of
switching devices that may affect it.

730
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a
bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function
and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between
standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level
interlocking signals can include the following kind of information:

Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
External release (to add special conditions for release)
Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 366.
Interlocking
modules in
other bays

Interlocking
module

Apparatus control
modules
SCILO

SCSWI

SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
SCILO

SCSWI

SXCBR

Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd

SCILO

SCSWI

SXSWI

IEC04000526 V1 EN

Figure 366:

Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:

Unearthed busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 367 illustrates the data exchange principle.

731
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Station bus
Bay 1

Bay n

WA1 not earthed

WA2 not earthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

Bus coupler

Disc QB1 and QB2 closed

Disc QB1 and QB2 closed

...
..

WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

WA1 not earthed

WA2 not earthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

WA1 and WA2 interconn

in other bay

WA1
WA2
QB1

QB2

QB1

QB2

QA1

QA1

QB9

QB9

QB2

QB1

QC1

QC2

QA1

en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN

Figure 367:

Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release
for execution of the function will not be given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and

earthing switches are always identical.
Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches,
are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where
they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So
a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If
there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs
must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example,
without load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a
section, that is, the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the
earthing switch operation is concerned.
Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage
systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if
the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other
closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is
completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed
connections, or if they are earthed on both sides.
Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

732
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between

CB and transformer.
Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:

Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add
these specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at
the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations
ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

14.2.3

Logical node for interlocking SCILO

14.2.3.1

Identification
Function description
Logical node for interlocking

14.2.3.2

IEC 61850
identification
SCILO

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3

Functionality
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

733
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.3.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
SCILO
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE

IEC05000359-2-en.vsd
IEC05000359 V2 EN

Figure 368:

14.2.3.4

SCILO function block

Signals
Table 426:

SCILO Input signals

Name

Type

Description

POSOPEN

BOOLEAN

Open position of switch device

POSCLOSE

BOOLEAN

Closed position of switch device

OPEN_EN

BOOLEAN

Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled

CLOSE_EN

BOOLEAN

Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 427:

SCILO Output signals

Name

14.2.3.5

Default

Type

Description

EN_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is

enabled

EN_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is

enabled

Logic diagram
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if
the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a
defined end position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this
case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be
true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are
enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical
nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals
come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node
Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.

734
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

SCILO
=1

EN_OPEN

&

>1
&

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

&
&

EN_CLOSE

>1

en04000525.vsd

IEC04000525 V1 EN

Figure 369:

SCILO function logic diagram

14.2.4

Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES

14.2.4.1

Identification
Function description
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch

14.2.4.2

IEC 61850
identification
BB_ES

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3

Functionality
The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one
busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 370.

QC

en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN

Figure 370:

14.2.4.3

Switchyard layout BB_ES

Function block
BB_ES
QC_OP
QC_CL
BB_DC_OP
VP_BB_DC
EXDU_BB

QCREL
QCITL
BBESOPTR
BBESCLTR

IEC05000347-2-en.vsd
IEC05000347 V2 EN

Figure 371:

BB_ES function block

735

Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.4.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Logic diagram
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC
BB_DC_OP
EXDU_BB

&

QC_OP
QC_CL

QCREL
QCITL
BBESOPTR
BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

IEC04000546 V1 EN

14.2.4.5

Signals
Table 428:

BB_ES Input signals

Name

Type

Default

Description

QC_OP

BOOLEAN

Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position

QC_CL

BOOLEAN

Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position

BB_DC_OP

BOOLEAN

All disconnectors on this busbar part are open

VP_BB_DC

BOOLEAN

Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part

are valid

EXDU_BB

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bays with disc on this

busbar part

Table 429:

BB_ES Output signals

Name

Type

Description

QCREL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC is allowed

QCITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC is forbidden

BBESOPTR

BOOLEAN

QC on this busbar part is in open position

BBESCLTR

BOOLEAN

QC on this busbar part is in closed position

14.2.5

Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS

14.2.5.1

Identification
Function description
Interlocking for bus-section breaker

14.2.5.2

IEC 61850
identification
A1A2_BS

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3

Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bussection circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 372. The
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit
breaker.

736
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

WA2 (A2)

WA1 (A1)

QB1

QC1

QB2

QC2

QA1

QC3

QC4

A1A2_BS

en04000516.vsd

IEC04000516 V1 EN

Figure 372:

14.2.5.3

Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

Function block
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
BBTR_OP
VP_BBTR
EXDU_12
EXDU_ES
QA1O_EX1
QA1O_EX2
QA1O_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

A1A2_BS
QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC4REL
QC4ITL
S1S2OPTR
S1S2CLTR
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPS1S2TR
VPQB1TR
VPQB2TR

IEC05000348-2-en.vsd
IEC05000348 V2 EN

Figure 373:

A1A2_BS function block

737
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.5.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
VPQB1
QB1_OP
QA1O_EX1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQA1
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC3
VPS1QC1
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

A1A2_BS
=1

VPQA1

=1

VPQB1

=1

VPQB2

=1

VPQC3

=1

VPQC4

=1

VPS1QC1

=1

VPS2QC2

&

>1
1

QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL

&
&

&
&

>1
1

QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL

&

en04000542.vsd

IEC04000542 V1 EN

738
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQA1
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB1
VPQB2
QB1_OP
QB2_OP

&

>1
1

QB2REL
QB2ITL

&

&

1
1

QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC4REL
QC4ITL

QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1

QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR

QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2

QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR

QB1_OP
QB2_OP
QA1_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQA1

>1

S1S2OPTR
S1S2CLTR
VPS1S2TR

&

en04000543.vsd

IEC04000543 V1 EN

14.2.5.5

Signals
Table 430:
Name

A1A2_BS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in closed position

QC4_OP

BOOLEAN

QC4 is in open position

QC4_CL

BOOLEAN

QC4 is in closed position

S1QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position

S1QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position

S2QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position

S2QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position

BBTR_OP

BOOLEAN

No busbar transfer is in progress

VP_BBTR

BOOLEAN

Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar

transfer

Table continues on next page

739
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay connected to

busbar 1 and 2

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.

QC1 or QC2

QA1O_EX1

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus QA1

QA1O_EX2

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus QA1

QA1O_EX3

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus QA1

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 431:
Name

14.2.6

Type

EXDU_12

A1A2_BS Output signals

Type

Description

QA1OPREL

BOOLEAN

Opening of QA1 is allowed

QA1OPITL

BOOLEAN

Opening of QA1 is forbidden

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is forbidden

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is forbidden

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is forbidden

QC3REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC3 is allowed

QC3ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC3 is forbidden

QC4REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC4 is allowed

QC4ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC4 is forbidden

S1S2OPTR

BOOLEAN

No bus section connection between bus section 1

and 2

S1S2CLTR

BOOLEAN

Bus coupler connection between bus section 1

and 2 exists

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

VPS1S2TR

BOOLEAN

Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2

are valid

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC

740
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.6.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Interlocking for bus-section

disconnector

14.2.6.2

A1A2_DC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3

Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 374.
A1A2_DC function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section
disconnector.
QB
WA1 (A1)

WA2 (A2)

QC1

QC2

A1A2_DC

en04000492.vsd

IEC04000492 V1 EN

Figure 374:

14.2.6.3

Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

Function block
A1A2_DC
QB_OP
QBOPREL
QB_CL
QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP
QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL
QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP
DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL
DCCLTR
S1DC_OP
VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3
IEC05000349-2-en.vsd
IEC05000349 V2 EN

Figure 375:

A1A2_DC function block

741
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.6.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Logic diagram
A1A2_DC
QB_OP
QB_CL

=1

VPQB

VPDCTR
DCOPTR
DCCLTR

S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES

VPS1QC1

=1

VPS2QC2

=1

&

>1
1

QBOPREL
QBOPITL

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES

&

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3

&

en04000544.vsd

IEC04000544 V1 EN

IEC04000545 V1 EN

14.2.6.5

Signals
Table 432:
Name

A1A2_DC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QB_OP

BOOLEAN

QB is in open position

QB_CL

BOOLEAN

QB is in closed position

S1QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position

S1QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position

Table continues on next page

742
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

S2QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position

S2QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position

S1DC_OP

BOOLEAN

All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open

position

S2DC_OP

BOOLEAN

All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open

position

VPS1_DC

BOOLEAN

Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1

are valid

VPS2_DC

BOOLEAN

Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2

are valid

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.

QC1 or QC2

EXDU_BB

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bays with disc conn to

section 1 and 2

QBCL_EX1

BOOLEAN

External close condition for section disconnector

QB

QBCL_EX2

BOOLEAN

External close condition for section disconnector

QB

QBOP_EX1

BOOLEAN

External open condition for section disconnector

QB

QBOP_EX2

BOOLEAN

External open condition for section disconnector

QB

QBOP_EX3

BOOLEAN

External open condition for section disconnector

QB

Table 433:

A1A2_DC Output signals

Name

Type

Description

QBOPREL

BOOLEAN

Opening of QB is allowed

QBOPITL

BOOLEAN

Opening of QB is forbidden

QBCLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QB is allowed

QBCLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QB is forbidden

DCOPTR

BOOLEAN

The bus section disconnector is in open position

DCCLTR

BOOLEAN

The bus section disconnector is in closed position

VPDCTR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

14.2.7

Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC

14.2.7.1

Identification
Function description
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay

IEC 61850
identification
ABC_BC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3

743
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.7.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 376. The
function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or
double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1

QB2

QB20

QB7

QC1
QA1

QC2

en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN

Figure 376:

Switchyard layout ABC_BC

744
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.7.3

Function block
ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QB20_OP
QB20_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
BBTR_OP
BC_12_CL
VP_BBTR
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_12
EXDU_BC
QA1O_EX1
QA1O_EX2
QA1O_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB20_EX1
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2

QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QB7REL
QB7ITL
QB20REL
QB20ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
QB220OTR
QB220CTR
QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
BC12OPTR
BC12CLTR
BC17OPTR
BC17CLTR
BC27OPTR
BC27CLTR
VPQB1TR
VQB220TR
VPQB7TR
VPQB12TR
VPBC12TR
VPBC17TR
VPBC27TR

IEC05000350-2-en.vsd
IEC05000350 V2 EN

Figure 377:

ABC_BC function block

745
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.7.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB20_OP
QB20_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
VPQB1
QB1_OP
QA1O_EX1
VPQB20
QB20_OP
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12

ABC_BC
=1

VPQA1

=1

VPQB1

=1

VPQB20

=1

VPQB7

=1

VPQB2

=1

VPQC1

=1

VPQC2

=1

VPQC11

=1

VPQC21

=1

VPQC71

&

QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL

>1
1

&
&

QA1O_EX3
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQB7
VPQB20

&

QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL

en04000533.vsd

IEC04000533 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL
QB1ITL

&

&

en04000534.vsd

IEC04000534 V1 EN

746
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL
QB2ITL

&

&

en04000535.vsd

IEC04000535 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB20
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2

&

>1
1

QB7REL
QB7ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB20REL
QB20ITL

&

en04000536.vsd

IEC04000536 V1 EN

747
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQB1
VPQB20
VPQB7
VPQB2
QB1_OP
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB20
VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
VPQB7
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QB20_OP
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQB20
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QB7_OP
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQB7
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QB7_OP
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQB7

&

1
1

&

&

>1

&
>1

QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL

QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
QB220OTR
QB220CTR
VQB220TR
QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
VPQB7TR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB12TR
BC12OPTR
BC12CLTR
VPBC12TR

&
>1

BC17OPTR
BC17CLTR
VPBC17TR

&
>1

BC27OPTR
BC27CLTR
VPBC27TR

&

en04000537.vsd

IEC04000537 V1 EN

14.2.7.5

Signals
Table 434:
Name

ABC_BC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

QB7_OP

BOOLEAN

QB7 is in open position

QB7_CL

BOOLEAN

QB7 is in closed position

QB20_OP

BOOLEAN

QB20 is in open position

QB20_CL

BOOLEAN

QB20 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in closed position

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open

position

Table continues on next page

748
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed

position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open

position

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed

position

QC71_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open

position

QC71_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed

position

BBTR_OP

BOOLEAN

No busbar transfer is in progress

BC_12_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA1 and WA2

VP_BBTR

BOOLEAN

Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar

transfer

VP_BC_12

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and

WA2 are valid

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay containing earthing

switches

EXDU_12

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/

WA2 busbars

EXDU_BC

BOOLEAN

No transmission error from any other bus coupler

bay

QA1O_EX1

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus QA1

QA1O_EX2

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus QA1

QA1O_EX3

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus QA1

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB1_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB2_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB20_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB20

QB20_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB20

QB7_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB7

QB7_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 435:
Name

ABC_BC Output signals

Type

Description

QA1OPREL

BOOLEAN

Opening of QA1 is allowed

QA1OPITL

BOOLEAN

Opening of QA1 is forbidden

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is forbidden

Table continues on next page

749
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is forbidden

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is forbidden

QB7REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB7 is allowed

QB7ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB7 is forbidden

QB20REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB20 is allowed

QB20ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB20 is forbidden

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is forbidden

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is forbidden

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QB220OTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 and QB20 are in open position

QB220CTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position

QB7OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB7 is in open position

QB7CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB7 is in closed position

QB12OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position

QB12CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 and QB2 are not in open position

BC12OPTR

BOOLEAN

No connection via the own bus coupler between

WA1 and WA2

BC12CLTR

BOOLEAN

Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between

WA1 and WA2

BC17OPTR

BOOLEAN

No connection via the own bus coupler between

WA1 and WA7

BC17CLTR

BOOLEAN

Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between

WA1 and WA7

BC27OPTR

BOOLEAN

No connection via the own bus coupler between

WA2 and WA7

BC27CLTR

BOOLEAN

Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between

WA2 and WA7

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

VQB220TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open

or closed)

VPQB7TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB12TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or

closed)

VPBC12TR

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and

WA2 are valid

VPBC17TR

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and

WA7 are valid

VPBC27TR

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and

WA7 are valid

750
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.8

Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH

14.2.8.1

Identification
Function description

14.2.8.2

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter

BH_CONN

Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter

BH_LINE_A

Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter

BH_LINE_B

Functionality
The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A,
BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter
according to figure 378.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB2

QB1
QC1

QC1

QA1

QA1
QC2

QC2

QB6

QB6
QC3

BH_LINE_A

QC3

QB61

QA1

BH_LINE_B

QB62

QB9

QB9
QC1

QC2

QC9

QC9

BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd
IEC04000513 V1 EN

Figure 378:

Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard
layout.
751
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.8.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function blocks
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB6_OP
QB6REL
QB6_CL
QB6ITL
QB1_OP
QB1REL
QB1_CL
QB1ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC3_OP
QC3REL
QC3_CL
QC3ITL
QB9_OP
QB9REL
QB9_CL
QB9ITL
QC9_OP
QC9REL
QC9_CL
QC9ITL
CQA1_OP
QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL
QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP
VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
IEC05000352-2-en.vsd
IEC05000352 V2 EN

Figure 379:

BH_LINE_A function block

752
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB6_OP
QB6REL
QB6_CL
QB6ITL
QB2_OP
QB2REL
QB2_CL
QB2ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC3_OP
QC3REL
QC3_CL
QC3ITL
QB9_OP
QB9REL
QB9_CL
QB9ITL
QC9_OP
QC9REL
QC9_CL
QC9ITL
CQA1_OP
QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL
QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP
VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
IEC05000353-2-en.vsd
IEC05000353 V2 EN

Figure 380:

QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2

BH_LINE_B function block

BH_CONN
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB61REL
QB61ITL
QB62REL
QB62ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL

IEC05000351-2-en.vsd
IEC05000351 V2 EN

Figure 381:

BH_CONN function block

753
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.8.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Logic diagrams
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
VPQB61
VPQB62
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61
VPQB62
QB61_OP
QB62_OP

BH_CONN
=1

VPQA1

=1

VPQB61

=1

VPQB62

=1

VPQC1

=1

VPQC2

=1

VP1QC3

=1

VP2QC3
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL

&
&

>1
1

QB61REL
QB61ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB62REL
QB62ITL

&

&

1
1

QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
en04000560.vsd

IEC04000560 V1 EN

754
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB6_OP
QB6_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQB1
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2

BH_LINE_A
=1

VPQA1

=1

VPQB1

=1

VPQB6

=1

VPQC9

=1

VPQB9

=1

VPQC1

=1

VPQC2

=1

VPQC3

=1

VPCQA1

=1

VPCQC1

=1

VPCQC2

=1

VPCQB61

=1

VPQC11

=1

VPVOLT
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL

&
&

>1
1

QB6REL
QB6ITL

&

en04000554.vsd

IEC04000554 V1 EN

755
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
VPQB1
VPQB6
QB1_OP
QB6_OP
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPCQB61
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1
VPQB6
VPQC9
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QB9_EX3

&

QB1REL
QB1ITL

>1
1

&

&

QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL

1
1

QC3REL
QC3ITL

&
1

&

>1

QB9REL
QB9ITL

>1
&

en04000555.vsd

IEC04000555 V1 EN

CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1

>1

&

>1

&

&

&

QC9REL
QC9ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd

IEC04000556 V1 EN

756
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB6_OP
QB6_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQB2
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2

BH_LINE_B
=1

VPQA1

=1

VPQB2

=1

VPQB6

=1

VPQC9

=1

VPQB9

=1

VPQC1

=1

VPQC2

=1

VPQC3

=1

VPCQA1

=1

VPCQC1

=1

VPCQC2

=1

VPCQB62

=1

VPQC21

=1

VPVOLT
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL

&
&

>1
1

QB6REL
QB6ITL

&

en04000557.vsd

IEC04000557 V1 EN

757
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB2
VPQB6
QB2_OP
QB6_OP
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPCQB62
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1
VPQB6
VPQC9
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QB9_EX3

&

QB2REL
QB2ITL

>1
1

&

&

QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL

1
1

QC3REL
QC3ITL

&
1

&

>1

QB9REL
QB9ITL

>1
&

en04000558.vsd

IEC04000558 V1 EN

CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2

>1

&

>1

&

&

&

QC9REL
QC9ITL
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd

IEC04000559 V1 EN

758
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.8.5

Signals
Table 436:
Name

BH_LINE_A Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in closed position

QB6_OP

BOOLEAN

QB6 is in open position

QB6_CL

BOOLEAN

QB6 is in close position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in closed position

QB9_OP

BOOLEAN

QB9 is in open position

QB9_CL

BOOLEAN

QB9 is in closed position

QC9_OP

BOOLEAN

QC9 is in open position

QC9_CL

BOOLEAN

QC9 is in closed position

CQA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQB61_OP

BOOLEAN

QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQB61_CL

BOOLEAN

QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open

position

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed

position

VOLT_OFF

BOOLEAN

There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure

VOLT_ON

BOOLEAN

There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)

failure

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bay containing earthing

switch QC11

QB6_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB6

QB6_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB6

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB9_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

Table continues on next page

759
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

QB9_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX4

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX5

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX6

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX7

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 437:
Name

BH_LINE_A Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is forbidden

QB6REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB6 is allowed

QB6ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB6 is forbidden

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is forbidden

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is forbidden

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is forbidden

QC3REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC3 is allowed

QC3ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC3 is forbidden

QB9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB9 is allowed

QB9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB9 is forbidden

QC9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC9 is allowed

QC9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC9 is forbidden

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 438:
Name

BH_LINE_B Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in closed position

QB6_OP

BOOLEAN

QB6 is in open position

QB6_CL

BOOLEAN

QB6 is in close position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in open position

Table continues on next page

760
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in closed position

QB9_OP

BOOLEAN

QB9 is in open position

QB9_CL

BOOLEAN

QB9 is in closed position

QC9_OP

BOOLEAN

QC9 is in open position

QC9_CL

BOOLEAN

QC9 is in closed position

CQA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQB62_OP

BOOLEAN

QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQB62_CL

BOOLEAN

QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open

position

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed

position

VOLT_OFF

BOOLEAN

There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure

VOLT_ON

BOOLEAN

There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)

failure

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bay containing earthing

switch QC21

QB6_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB6

QB6_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB6

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB9_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX4

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX5

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX6

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX7

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

761
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 439:
Name

BH_LINE_B Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is forbidden

QB6REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB6 is allowed

QB6ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB6 is forbidden

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is forbidden

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is forbidden

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is forbidden

QC3REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC3 is allowed

QC3ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC3 is forbidden

QB9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB9 is allowed

QB9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB9 is forbidden

QC9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC9 is allowed

QC9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC9 is forbidden

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 440:
Name

BH_CONN Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in closed position

QB61_OP

BOOLEAN

QB61 is in open position

QB61_CL

BOOLEAN

QB61 is in closed position

QB62_OP

BOOLEAN

QB62 is in open position

QB62_CL

BOOLEAN

QB62 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in closed position

1QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

QC3 on line 1 is in open position

1QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

QC3 on line 1 is in closed position

2QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

QC3 on line 2 is in open position

2QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

QC3 on line 2 is in closed position

QB61_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB61

Table continues on next page

762
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

QB61_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB61

QB62_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB62

QB62_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB62

Table 441:

BH_CONN Output signals

Name

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is forbidden

QB61REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB61 is allowed

QB61ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB61 is forbidden

QB62REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB62 is allowed

QB62ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB62 is forbidden

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is forbidden

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is forbidden

14.2.9

Interlocking for double CB bay DB

14.2.9.1

Identification
Function description

14.2.9.2

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Interlocking for double CB bay

DB_BUS_A

Interlocking for double CB bay

DB_BUS_B

Interlocking for double CB bay

DB_LINE

Functionality
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including
DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement according to figure 382.

763
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1

QB2
QC1

QA1

QC4
QA2
DB_BUS_B

DB_BUS_A
QC2
QB61

QC5
QB62
QC3

QB9

DB_LINE
QC9

en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN

Figure 382:

Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and
the disconnectors and earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B handles the
circuit breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and
earthing switches of this section.

764
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.9.3

Logic diagrams
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VPQB61
VPQB1
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

DB_BUS_A
=1

VPQA1

=1

VPQB61

=1

VPQB1

=1

VPQC1

=1

VPQC2

=1

VPQC3

=1
&
&

>1
1

VPQC11
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB61REL
QB61ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB1REL
QB1ITL

&

en04000547.vsd

IEC04000547 V1 EN

VPQB61
VPQB1
QB61_OP
QB1_OP
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1

&

1
1

QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd

IEC04000548 V1 EN

765
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VPQB62
VPQB2
VPQA2
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPQC21
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

DB_BUS_B
=1

VPQA2

=1

VPQB62

=1

VPQB2

=1

VPQC4

=1

VPQC5
VPQC3

=1
=1
&
&

>1
1

VPQC21
QA2CLREL
QA2CLITL
QB62REL
QB62ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB2REL
QB2ITL

&

en04000552.vsd

IEC04000552 V1 EN

VPQB62
VPQB2
QB62_OP
QB2_OP
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2

&

1
1

QC4REL
QC4ITL
QC5REL
QC5ITL
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd

IEC04000553 V1 EN

766
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQA1
VPQA2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1

DB_LINE
=1

VPQA1

=1

VPQA2

=1

VPQB61

=1

VPQC1

=1

VPQC2

=1

VPQB62

=1

VPQC4

=1

VPQC5

=1

VPQB9

=1

VPQC3

=1

VPQC9

=1
&

VPVOLT
>1
1

&

QB9REL
QB9ITL

en04000549.vsd

IEC04000549 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5

&

>1

&

&

&

en04000550.vsd

IEC04000550 V1 EN

767
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQB61
VPQB62
VPQB9
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF

&
1

&
1

QC3REL
QC3ITL

QC9REL
QC9ITL
en04000551.vsd

IEC04000551 V1 EN

14.2.9.4

Function block
DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB1_OP
QB61REL
QB1_CL
QB61ITL
QB61_OP
QB1REL
QB61_CL
QB1ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC3_OP
QB1OPTR
QC3_CL
QB1CLTR
QC11_OP
VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
IEC05000354-2-en.vsd
IEC05000354 V2 EN

Figure 383:

DB_BUS_A function block

768
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5

QB9REL
QB9ITL
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL

IEC05000356-2-en.vsd
IEC05000356 V2 EN

Figure 384:

DB_LINE function block

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2CLREL
QA2_CL
QA2CLITL
QB2_OP
QB62REL
QB2_CL
QB62ITL
QB62_OP
QB2REL
QB62_CL
QB2ITL
QC4_OP
QC4REL
QC4_CL
QC4ITL
QC5_OP
QC5REL
QC5_CL
QC5ITL
QC3_OP
QB2OPTR
QC3_CL
QB2CLTR
QC21_OP
VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
IEC05000355-2-en.vsd
IEC05000355 V2 EN

Figure 385:

14.2.9.5

DB_BUS_B function block

Signals
Table 442:
Name

DB_BUS_A Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

Table continues on next page

769
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QB61_OP

BOOLEAN

QB61 is in open position

QB61_CL

BOOLEAN

QB61 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in closed position

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open

position

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed

position

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bay containing earthing

switch QC11

QB61_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB61

QB61_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB61

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

Table 443:
Name

DB_BUS_A Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is forbidden

QB61REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB61 is allowed

QB61ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB61 is forbidden

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is forbidden

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is forbidden

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is forbidden

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

770
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 444:
Name

DB_BUS_B Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA2_OP

BOOLEAN

QA2 is in open position

QA2_CL

BOOLEAN

QA2 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

QB62_OP

BOOLEAN

QB62 is in open position

QB62_CL

BOOLEAN

QB62 is in closed position

QC4_OP

BOOLEAN

QC4 is in open position

QC4_CL

BOOLEAN

QC4 is in closed position

QC5_OP

BOOLEAN

QC5 is in open position

QC5_CL

BOOLEAN

QC5 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in closed position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open

position

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed

position

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bay containing earthing

switch QC21

QB62_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB62

QB62_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB62

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 445:
Name

DB_BUS_B Output signals

Type

Description

QA2CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA2 is allowed

QA2CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA2 is forbidden

QB62REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB62 is allowed

QB62ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB62 is forbidden

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is forbidden

QC4REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC4 is allowed

QC4ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC4 is forbidden

QC5REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC5 is allowed

QC5ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC5 is forbidden

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

771
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 446:
Name

DB_LINE Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in closed position

QA2_OP

BOOLEAN

QA2 is in open position

QA2_CL

BOOLEAN

QA2 is in closed position

QB61_OP

BOOLEAN

QB61 is in open position

QB61_CL

BOOLEAN

QB61 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in closed position

QB62_OP

BOOLEAN

QB62 is in open position

QB62_CL

BOOLEAN

QB62 is in closed position

QC4_OP

BOOLEAN

QC4 is in open position

QC4_CL

BOOLEAN

QC4 is in closed position

QC5_OP

BOOLEAN

QC5 is in open position

QC5_CL

BOOLEAN

QC5 is in closed position

QB9_OP

BOOLEAN

QB9 is in open position

QB9_CL

BOOLEAN

QB9 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in closed position

QC9_OP

BOOLEAN

QC9 is in open position

QC9_CL

BOOLEAN

QC9 is in closed position

VOLT_OFF

BOOLEAN

There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)

failure

VOLT_ON

BOOLEAN

There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)

failure

QB9_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX4

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX5

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 447:
Name

DB_LINE Output signals

Type

Description

QB9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB9 is allowed

QB9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB9 is forbidden

QC3REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC3 is allowed

QC3ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC3 is forbidden

QC9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC9 is allowed

QC9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC9 is forbidden

772
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.10

Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE

14.2.10.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Interlocking for line bay

14.2.10.2

ABC_LINE

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3

Functionality
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 386. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar
or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1

QB2

QB7
QC1

QA1
QC2
QB9
QC9

en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN

Figure 386:

Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

773
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.10.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
ABC_LINE
QA1CLREL
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB9_OP
QB9REL
QB9_CL
QB9ITL
QB1_OP
QB1REL
QB1_CL
QB1ITL
QB2_OP
QB2REL
QB2_CL
QB2ITL
QB7_OP
QB7REL
QB7_CL
QB7ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC9_OP
QC9REL
QC9_CL
QC9ITL
QC11_OP
QB1OPTR
QC11_CL
QB1CLTR
QC21_OP
QB2OPTR
QC21_CL
QB2CLTR
QC71_OP
QB7OPTR
QC71_CL
QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP
QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL
QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP
VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL
VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP
VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL
VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4
IEC05000357-2-en.vsd
IEC05000357 V2 EN

Figure 387:

ABC_LINE function block

774
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.10.4

Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2

ABC_LINE
=1

VPQA1

=1

VPQB9

=1

VPQB1

=1

VPQB2

=1

VPQB7

=1

VPQC1

=1

VPQC2

=1

VPQC9

=1

VPQC11

=1

VPQC21

=1

VPQC71

=1

VPVOLT
&

&

QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL

QB9REL
QB9ITL

>1
1

&

en04000527.vsd
IEC04000527 V1 EN

775
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP

&

VPQB2

&

QB1REL

1
1

QB1ITL

EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2

VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES

&

QB1EX3

en04000528.vsd
IEC04000528 V1 EN

776
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES

&

VPQB1
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

&

VPQC1
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES

&

QB2REL

1
1

QB2ITL

QB2_EX1

QB2_EX2

QB2_EX3

en04000529.vsd
IEC04000529 V1 EN

777
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQC9
VPQC71

&

VP_BB7_D

QB7REL

>1
1

QB7ITL

VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

&

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX2

IEC04000530 V1 EN

778
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

&

>1

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQB9
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB7_OP
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF

&

&

1
1

&
1

QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL

QC9REL
QC9ITL

en04000531.vsd
IEC04000531 V1 EN

779
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1

QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR

QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2

QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR

QB7_OP
QB7_CL
VPQB7

QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
VPQB7TR

QB1_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2

>1

&

QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB12TR
en04000532.vsd

IEC04000532 V1 EN

14.2.10.5

Signals
Table 448:
Name

ABC_LINE Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in closed position

QB9_OP

BOOLEAN

QB9 is in open position

QB9_CL

BOOLEAN

QB9 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

QB7_OP

BOOLEAN

QB7 is in open position

QB7_CL

BOOLEAN

QB7 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in closed position

QC9_OP

BOOLEAN

QC9 is in open position

QC9_CL

BOOLEAN

QC9 is in closed position

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open

position

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed

position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open

position

Table continues on next page

780
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed

position

QC71_OP

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open

position

QC71_CL

BOOLEAN

Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed

position

BB7_D_OP

BOOLEAN

Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own

bay are open

BC_12_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA1 and WA2

BC_17_OP

BOOLEAN

No bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA1 and WA7

BC_17_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA1 and WA7

BC_27_OP

BOOLEAN

No bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA2 and WA7

BC_27_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA2 and WA7

VOLT_OFF

BOOLEAN

There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)

failure

VOLT_ON

BOOLEAN

There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)

failure

VP_BB7_D

BOOLEAN

Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar

WA7 are valid

VP_BC_12

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and

WA2 are valid

VP_BC_17

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and

WA7 are valid

VP_BC_27

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and

WA7 are valid

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay containing earthing

switches

EXDU_BPB

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay with disconnectors

on WA7

EXDU_BC

BOOLEAN

No transmission error from any bus coupler bay

QB9_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB9_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB9

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB1_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB2_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB7_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB7

Table continues on next page

781
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB7

QB7_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB7

QB7_EX4

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 449:
Name

14.2.11

Type

QB7_EX2

ABC_LINE Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is forbidden

QB9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB9 is allowed

QB9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB9 is forbidden

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is forbidden

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is forbidden

QB7REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB7 is allowed

QB7ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB7 is forbidden

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is forbidden

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is forbidden

QC9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC9 is allowed

QC9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC9 is forbidden

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

QB7OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB7 is in open position

QB7CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB7 is in closed position

QB12OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position

QB12CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 and QB2 are not in open position

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB7TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB12TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or

closed)

Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO

782
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.11.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Interlocking for transformer bay

14.2.11.2

AB_TRAFO

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3

Functionality
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a
transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 388.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1

QB2
QC1

QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2

T
QC3
QA2
QC4
QB3

QA2 and QC4 are not

used in this interlocking

QB4

en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN

Figure 388:

Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

783
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.2.11.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB1_OP
QB1REL
QB1_CL
QB1ITL
QB2_OP
QB2REL
QB2_CL
QB2ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QB3_OP
QB1OPTR
QB3_CL
QB1CLTR
QB4_OP
QB2OPTR
QB4_CL
QB2CLTR
QC3_OP
QB12OPTR
QC3_CL
QB12CLTR
QC11_OP
VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
VPQB2TR
QC21_OP
VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
IEC05000358-2-en.vsd
IEC05000358 V2 EN

Figure 389:

AB_TRAFO function block

784
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.11.4

Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB3_OP
QB3_CL
QB4_OP
QB4_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QA1_EX1

AB_TRAFO
=1

VPQA1

=1

VPQB1

=1

VPQB2

=1

VPQC1

=1

VPQC2

=1

VPQB3

=1

VPQB4

=1

VPQC3

=1

VPQC11

=1

VPQC21
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL

&

>1
&

en04000538.vsd

IEC04000538 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL
QB1ITL

&

&

en04000539.vsd

IEC04000539 V1 EN

785
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL
QB2ITL

&

&

en04000540.vsd

IEC04000540 V1 EN

VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQB3
VPQB4
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP

&

1
1

QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL

QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1

QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR

QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2

QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB12TR

>1

&

en04000541.vsd

IEC04000541 V1 EN

14.2.11.5

Signals
Table 450:
Name

AB_TRAFO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

QA1 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

QC1 is in closed position

Table continues on next page

786
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

QC2 is in closed position

QB3_OP

BOOLEAN

QB3 is in open position

QB3_CL

BOOLEAN

QB3 is in closed position

QB4_OP

BOOLEAN

QB4 is in open position

QB4_CL

BOOLEAN

QB4 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

QC3 is in closed position

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position

BC_12_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA1 and WA2

VP_BC_12

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and

WA2 are valid

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay containing earthing

switches

EXDU_BC

BOOLEAN

No transmission error from any bus coupler bay

QA1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QA1

QA1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QA1

QA1_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QA1

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB1_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB1

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

QB2_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 451:
Name

AB_TRAFO Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of QA1 is forbidden

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB1 is forbidden

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QB2 is forbidden

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC1 is forbidden

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is allowed

Table continues on next page

787
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of QC2 is forbidden

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 is in closed position

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB2 is in closed position

QB12OPTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position

QB12CLTR

BOOLEAN

QB1 and QB2 are not in open position

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB12TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or

closed)

14.2.12

Position evaluation POS_EVAL

14.2.12.1

Identification

14.2.12.2

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Position evaluation

POS_EVAL

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals
OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

14.2.12.3

Function block
POSITION

POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
IEC09000079_1_en.vsd

IEC09000079 V1 EN

Figure 390:

POS_EVAL function block

788
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.2.12.4

Logic diagram
Position including quality

POSITION

POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

Open/close position of
switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is
not used.
Input position (Value)

14.2.12.5

Signal quality

Output OPENPOS

Output CLOSEPOS

0 (Breaker
intermediate)

Good

1 (Breaker open)

Good

2 (Breaker closed)

Good

3 (Breaker faulty)

Good

Any

Invalid

Any

Oscillatory

Signals
Table 452:

POS_EVAL Input signals

Name

Type

POSITION

Table 453:

INTEGER

Default
0

Description
Position status including quality

POS_EVAL Output signals

Name

Type

Description

OPENPOS

BOOLEAN

Open position

CLOSEPOS

BOOLEAN

Close position

14.3

Apparatus control APC

14.3.1

Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate
is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
Apparatus control features:

789
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
Selection and supervision of operator place
Command supervision
Block/deblock of operation
Block/deblock of updating of position indications
Substitution of position and quality indications
Overriding of interlocking functions
Overriding of synchrocheck
Operation counter
Suppression of mid position

Two types of command models can be used:

Direct with normal security

SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated
with an additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The
command sequence with enhanced security is always terminated by a
CommandTermination service primitive and an AddCause telling if the command
was successful or if something went wrong.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.

14.3.2

Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 454 describes the cause values given on local HMI.
The translation to AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table
455. For IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used,
for edition 1 also a number of vendor specific causes are used. The values are
available in the command response to commands from IEC61850-8-1 clients. An
output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit
breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the latest value of the
cause during the latest command.
Table 454:

Values for "cause" signal

Cause Name
number

Description

Supported

None

Control action successfully executed

Not-supported

Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready

state

Blocked-byswitching-hierarchy

Not successful since one of the downstream Loc

switches like in CSWI has the value TRUE

Table continues on next page

790
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Cause Name
number

Description

Supported

Select-failed

Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select

service)

Invalid-position

Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position

(Pos in XCBR or XSWI)

Position-reached

Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in

XCBR or XSWI)

Parameter-changein-execution

Control action is blocked due to running parameter

change

Step-limit

Control action is blocked, because tap changer has

reached the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)

Blocked-by-Mode

Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or

XCBR/XSWI)is in a mode (Mod) which doesnt allow
any switching

Blocked-by-process

Control action is blocked due to some external event at

process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR or
XSWI)

10

Blocked-byinterlocking

Control action is blocked due to interlocking of

switching devices (in CILO attribute
EnaOpn.stVal=FALSE or EnaCls.stVal=FALSE

11

Blocked-bysynchrocheck

Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to

exceed of time limit and missing synchronism condition

12

Command-alreadyin-execution

Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because

control action is already running

13

Blocked-by-health

Control action is blocked due to some internal event

that prevents a successful operation (Health)

14

1-of-n-control

Control action is blocked, because another control

action in a domain (for example substation) is already
running (in any XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the
DPC.stSeld=TRUE)

15

Abortion-by-cancel

Control action is aborted due to cancel service

16

Time-limit-over

Control action is terminated due to exceed of some

time limit

17

Abortion-by-trip

Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with

ACT.general=TRUE)

18

Object-not-selected

Control action is rejected, because control object was

not selected

19

Object-alreadyselected

Select action is not executed, because the addressed

object is already selected

20

No-access-authority

Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority

21

Ended-withovershoot

Control action executed but the end position has

overshoot

22

Abortion-due-todeviation

Control action is aborted due to deviation between the

command value and the measured value

23

Abortion-bycommunication-loss

Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection

with the client that issued the control

24

Blocked-bycommand

Control action is blocked due to the data attribute

CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE

Table continues on next page

791
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Cause Name
number

Description

Supported

26

Inconsistentparameters

The parameters between successive control services

are not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select
and Operate service are different

27

Locked-by-otherclient

Another client has already reserved the object

-22

Wrong_CTL_Model

Command from client uses wrong control model

-24

Blocked_for_Open_
Cmd

Blocked for Open command

-25

Blocked_For_Close
_Cmd

Blocked for Close Command

-30

longOperationTime

Operation time too long

-31

switchNotStartMovi
ng

Switch did not start moving

-32

persistantIntermedi
ateState

Switch stopped in intermediate state

-33

switchReturnedToIn
itPos

Switch returned to the initial position

-34

switchInBadState

Switch is in a bad position state

-35

notExpectedFinalPo
sition

Switch did not reach the expected final position

Table 455:
Internal Cause
Number

Translation of cause values for IEC61850 edition 2 and edition 1

AddCause in IEC61850-8-1
Ed 2

Name

Ed 1

25

None

Not-supported

Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy

Select-failed

Invalid-position

Position-reached

Parameter-change-in-execution

Step-limit

Blocked-by-Mode

Blocked-by-process

10

10

10

Blocked-by-interlocking

11

11

11

Blocked-by-synchrocheck

12

12

12

Command-already-in-execution

13

13

13

Blocked-by-health

14

14

14

1-of-n-control

15

15

Abortion-by-cancel

16

16

16

Time-limit-over

17

17

17

Abortion-by-trip

Table continues on next page

792
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Internal Cause
Number

AddCause in IEC61850-8-1

Name

Ed 2

Ed 1

18

18

18

Object-not-selected

19

19

Object-already-selected

20

20

No-access-authority

21

21

Ended-with-overshoot

22

22

Abortion-due-to-deviation

23

23

Abortion-by-communication-loss

24

24

-23

Blocked-by-command

26

26

Inconsistent-parameters

27

27

12

Locked-by-other-client

-22

-22

Wrong_CTL_Model

-24

24

-24

Blocked_for_Open_Cmd

-25

24

-25

Blocked_For_Close_Cmd

-30

24

-30

longOperationTime

-31

16

-31

switchNotStartMoving

-32

16

-32

persistantIntermediateState

-33

22

-33

switchReturnedToInitPos

-34

-34

switchInBadState

-35

22

-35

notExpectedFinalPosition

14.3.3

Bay control QCBAY

14.3.3.1

Functionality
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local
remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay.
QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay.

14.3.3.2

Function block
QCBAY
LR_OFF

PSTO

LR_LOC

UPD_BLKD

LR_REM

CMD_BLKD

LR_VALID

LOC

BL_UPD

STA

BL_CMD

REM
IEC10000048-2-en.vsd

IEC10000048 V2 EN

Figure 391:

QCBAY function block

793
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.3.3.3

Signals
Table 456:

QCBAY Input signals

Name

Type

External Local/Remote switch is in Off position

LR_LOC

BOOLEAN

External Local/Remote switch is in Local position

LR_REM

BOOLEAN

External Local/Remote switch is in Remote

position

LR_VALID

BOOLEAN

Data representing the L/R switch position is valid

BL_UPD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal to block the position updates

BL_CMD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal to block the command

QCBAY Output signals

Name

Table 458:
Name

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 457:

14.3.3.4

Default

LR_OFF

Type

Description

PSTO

INTEGER

Value for the operator place allocation

UPD_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Update of position is blocked

CMD_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Function is blocked for commands

LOC

BOOLEAN

Local operation allowed

STA

BOOLEAN

Station operation allowed

REM

BOOLEAN

Remote operation allowed

Settings
QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AllPSTOValid

Priority
No priority

Priority

Override Priority of originators,

commands from both local, station and
remote are allowed

RemoteIncStation

No
Yes

No

Both Station and Remote control are

allowed but not Local when local remote
switch is in remote

14.3.3.5

Operation principle
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)
and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch
control functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay
control (QCBAY) function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the
IEC61850-8-1 edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC61850 edition 1 the
functionality is not described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the
Bay control function is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.

794
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The
switch connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The
positions are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from
station and/or remote level and local means that operation is allowed from the IED
level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which
means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected
internally, not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED
the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to
select this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be
ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output
will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch,
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to
QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted
Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/
remote switch position according to Table 459. In addition, there are two
parameters that affect the value of the PSTO signal.
If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote
state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both
local and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in
Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of the switch that is, 0. In this
case it is not possible to control anything
If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set and the LR-switch position is in Remote
state, the PSTO value is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to
operate from both station and remote level without any priority.
Table 459:
Local panel
switch positions

PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions

PSTO
value

AllPSTOValid RemoteInc
(setting
Station
parameter)
(setting
parameter)

LocSta.CtlVal Possible
(command)
locations that
shall be able to
operate

0 = Off

Not possible
to operate

1 = Local

Priority

Local Panel

1 = Local

No priority

Local or
Remote level
without any
priority

2 = Remote

Priority

No

TRUE

Station level

2 = Remote

No priority

No

FALSE

Remote level

Table continues on next page

795
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Local panel
switch positions

PSTO
value

AllPSTOValid RemoteInc
(setting
Station
parameter)
(setting
parameter)

LocSta.CtlVal Possible
(command)
locations that
shall be able to
operate

2 = Remote

Priority

Yes

Station or
Remote level

2 = Remote

No priority

Local, Station
or Remote
level without
any priority

3 = Faulty

Not possible
to operate

Blockings

The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the
IED Users tool in PCM600.

14.3.4

Local/Remote switch
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are
connected via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay
control QCBAY function block. The parameter ControlMode in function block
LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or
from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

796
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.3.4.1

Function block
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
LOCCTRL
REMCTRL
LHMICTRL

OFF
LOCAL
REMOTE
VALID
IEC05000360-2-en.vsd

IEC05000360 V2 EN

Figure 392:

PSTO1
PSTO2
PSTO3
PSTO4
PSTO5
PSTO6
PSTO7
PSTO8
PSTO9
PSTO10
PSTO11
PSTO12

LOCREM function block

LOCREMCTRL
HMICTR1
HMICTR2
HMICTR3
HMICTR4
HMICTR5
HMICTR6
HMICTR7
HMICTR8
HMICTR9
HMICTR10
HMICTR11
HMICTR12
IEC05000361-2-en.vsd

IEC05000361 V2 EN

Figure 393:

14.3.4.2

LOCREMCTRL function block

Signals
Table 460:
Name

LOCREM Input signals

Type

Default

Description

CTRLOFF

BOOLEAN

Disable control

LOCCTRL

BOOLEAN

Local in control

REMCTRL

BOOLEAN

Remote in control

LHMICTRL

INTEGER

LHMI control

Table 461:
Name

LOCREM Output signals

Type

Description

OFF

BOOLEAN

Control is disabled

LOCAL

BOOLEAN

Local control is activated

REMOTE

BOOLEAN

Remote control is activated

VALID

BOOLEAN

Outputs are valid

797
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 462:

LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Name

Type
INTEGER

PSTO input channel 1

PSTO2

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 2

PSTO3

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 3

PSTO4

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 4

PSTO5

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 5

PSTO6

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 6

PSTO7

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 7

PSTO8

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 8

PSTO9

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 9

PSTO10

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 10

PSTO11

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 11

PSTO12

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 12

LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name

Table 464:
Name
ControlMode

Description

PSTO1

Table 463:

14.3.4.3

Default

Type

Description

HMICTR1

INTEGER

Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR2

INTEGER

Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR3

INTEGER

Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR4

INTEGER

Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR5

INTEGER

Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR6

INTEGER

Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR7

INTEGER

Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR8

INTEGER

Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR9

INTEGER

Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR10

INTEGER

Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR11

INTEGER

Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR12

INTEGER

Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

Settings
LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Internal LR-switch
External LR-switch

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Internal LR-switch

Description
Control mode for internal/external LRswitch

798
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.3.4.4

Operation principle
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the
local/remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 394, where the inputs on
function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is
used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between
external and local HMI source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The
outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted
Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID

QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
STA
BL_ UPD
REM
BL_ CMD

LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID

QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
STA
BL_ UPD
REM
BL_ CMD

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1
HMICTR1
PSTO2
HMICTR2
PSTO3
HMICTR3
PSTO4
HMICTR4
PSTO5
HMICTR5
PSTO6
HMICTR6
PSTO7
HMICTR7
PSTO8
HMICTR8
PSTO9
HMICTR9
PSTO 10
HMICTR 10
PSTO 11
HMICTR 11
PSTO 12
HMICTR 12
IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V2 EN

Figure 394:

Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can
be different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the
local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen
page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote
position to applicable bay and screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have

799
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the
IED Users tool in PCM600.

14.3.5

Switch controller SCSWI

14.3.5.1

Functionality
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may
handle and operate on one three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.

14.3.5.2

Function block
SCSWI
BLOCK
PSTO
L_SEL
L_OPEN
L_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
BL_CMD
RES_GRT
RES_EXT
SY_INPRO
SYNC_OK
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS1
XPOS2
XPOS3

EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SEL_OP
SEL_CL
SELECTED
RES_RQ
START_SY
CANC_SY
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
POLEDISC
CMD_BLK
L_CAUSE
POS_INTR
XOUT

IEC05000337-3-en.vsd
IEC05000337 V3 EN

Figure 395:

14.3.5.3

SCSWI function block

Signals
Table 465:
Name

SCSWI Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

L_SEL

BOOLEAN

Select signal from local panel

L_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Open signal from local panel

L_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Close signal from local panel

AU_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Used for local automation function

AU_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Used for local automation function

BL_CMD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal for block of the command

RES_GRT

BOOLEAN

Positive acknowledge that all reservations are

made

Table continues on next page

800
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

RES_EXT

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made externally

SY_INPRO

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing function in progress

SYNC_OK

BOOLEAN

Closing is permitted at set to true by the

synchrocheck

EN_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Enables open operation

EN_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Enables close operation

XPOSL1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase

XPOSL2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase

XPOSL3

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase

Table 466:
Name

SCSWI Output signals

Type

Description

EXE_OP

BOOLEAN

Execute command for open direction

EXE_CL

BOOLEAN

Execute command for close direction

SEL_OP

BOOLEAN

Selected for open command

SEL_CL

BOOLEAN

Selected for close command

SELECTED

BOOLEAN

Select conditions are fulfilled

RES_RQ

BOOLEAN

Request signal to the reservation function

START_SY

BOOLEAN

Starts the external synchronizing function

CANC_SY

BOOLEAN

Cancels the external synchronizing function,

started through START_SY

POSITION

INTEGER

Position indication

OPENPOS

BOOLEAN

Open position indication

CLOSEPOS

BOOLEAN

Closed position indication

POLEDISC

BOOLEAN

The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after

a set time

CMD_BLK

BOOLEAN

Commands are blocked

L_CAUSE

INTEGER

Latest value of the error indication during command

POS_INTR

BOOLEAN

Stopped in intermediate position

XOUT

BOOLEAN

Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated

commands as e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively
closing to the SCSWI function. They work without regard to how
the operator place selector, PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on
the outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input,

801
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

EN_OPEN respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no

interlocking is active.

L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command

sequence connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the
operator place selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote
with no priority. If the control model used is Select before operate,
Also the corresponding enable input must be set, and no
interlocking is active. The L_SEL input must be set before
L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the control model is Select
before operate.

14.3.5.4
Table 467:
Name

Settings
SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CtlModel

Dir Norm
SBO Enh

SBO Enh

Specifies control model type

PosDependent

Always permitted
Not perm at 00/11

Always permitted

Permission to operate depending on the

position

tSelect

0.00 - 600.00

0.01

30.00

Maximum time between select and

execute signals

tResResponse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Allowed time from reservation request to

reservation granted

tSynchrocheck

0.00 - 600.00

0.01

10.00

Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil

close conditions

tSynchronizing

0.00 - 600.00

0.01

0.00

Supervision time to get the signal

synchronizing in progress

tExecutionFB

0.00 - 600.00

0.01

30.00

Maximum time from command execution

to termination

tPoleDiscord

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Allowed time to have discrepancy

between the poles

SuppressMidPos

Off
On

On

Mid-position is suppressed during the

time tIntermediate

InterlockChk

Sel & Op phase

Op phase

Sel & Op phase

Selection if interlock check should be

done in select phase

14.3.5.5

Operation principle
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are
fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.

Control handling

802
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The
control model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the
"SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is
supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of
position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step
in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the
command sequence, the sequence is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be
read from the function block and used for example at commissioning.
There is no relation between the command direction and the actual
position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible
to execute a close command.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the
parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad
state no execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution
command is sent independent of the position value.

Evaluation of position

The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the
switch controller SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive
the position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for
further evaluation.
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the onephase switches, following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position:

switch control position = open

All switches in close position:

switch control position = close

One switch =open, two switches= close (or

inversely):

switch control position = intermediate

Any switch in intermediate position:

switch control position = intermediate

Any switch in bad state:

switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it
goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first
changed phase.

803
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will
change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole
discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance
situation, that is, the positions of the one-phase switches are not equal positions for
a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause"
values from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch
(SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The different blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.

Dependence on Operator place

For commands from communication protocol, such as IEC61850-8-1 and DNP,

and through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is
evaluated, and only commands from enabled operator places are accepted, see
Table 459. Commands through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are
always from the local operator place. For commands through the inputs AU_OPEN
and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is not evaluated, thus also accepted when the
operator place selector is set to Faulty or Off.

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and
the synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck
function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result
from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the
operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the
synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the
synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch
function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).

804
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI

will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send
the closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled,
see Figure 396. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision
of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-bysynchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 400.
SCSWI
EXE_CL

SXCBR
OR

CLOSE

SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECB
Synchro
check

Synchronizing
function

IEC09000209-2-en.vsd
IEC09000209 V2 EN

Figure 396:

Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams

The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the
execute command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command
execution after the selection of the object to operate.

805
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

select
execute command
tSelect
timer

t1

t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause'

is set
en05000092.vsd

IEC05000092 V1 EN

Figure 397:

tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback
reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT
command termination
tResResponse
timer

t1

t1>tResResponse, then
1-of-n-control in 'cause'
is set
en05000093.vsd

IEC05000093 V1 EN

Figure 398:

tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 399.

806
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

execute command
position L1 open
close
position L2 open
close
position L3 open
close
cmd termination L1
cmd termination L2
cmd termination L3
cmd termination
position

open
close

tExecutionFB timer

t1>tExecutionFB, then
long-operation-time in
'cause' is set

t1

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample .

APCtExecutionFB=IEC0
5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd

IEC05000094 V2 EN

Figure 399:

tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true
at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will
not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck
conditions are not fulfilled.
The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time
between the start signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing
is in progress.

807
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1

START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing

t2

t2>tSynchronizing, then
blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd

IEC05000095 V1 EN

Figure 400:

tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

14.3.6

Circuit breaker SXCBR

14.3.6.1

Functionality
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to
supervise the switching operation and position.

14.3.6.2

Function block
SXCBR
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
CBOPCAP
TR_OPEN
TR_CLOSE
RS_CNT
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN

XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SUBSTED
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
TR_POS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
EEHEALTH
CBOPCAP

IEC05000338-3-en.vsd
IEC05000338 V3 EN

Figure 401:

SXCBR function block

808
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.3.6.3

Signals
Table 468:
Name

SXCBR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

LR_SWI

BOOLEAN

Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard

OPEN

BOOLEAN

Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch

CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch

BL_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal to block the open command

BL_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal to block the close command

BL_UPD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal for block of the position updating

POSOPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O

POSCLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O

CBOPCAP

INTEGER

Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =

CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More

TR_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal for open position of truck from I/O

TR_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal for close position of truck from I/O

RS_CNT

BOOLEAN

Resets the operation counter

EEH_WARN

BOOLEAN

Warning from external equipment

EEH_ALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm from external equipment

XIN

BOOLEAN

Execution information from CSWI

Table 469:
Name

SXCBR Output signals

Type

Description

XPOS

GROUP SIGNAL

Group connection to CSWI for CB

EXE_OP

BOOLEAN

Executes the command for open direction

EXE_CL

BOOLEAN

Executes the command for close direction

OP_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Indication that the function is blocked for open

commands

CL_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Indication that the function is blocked for close

commands

UPD_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Update of position indication is blocked

OPENPOS

BOOLEAN

Apparatus open position

CLOSEPOS

BOOLEAN

Apparatus closed position

TR_POS

INTEGER

Truck position indication

CNT_VAL

INTEGER

Operation counter value

L_CAUSE

INTEGER

Latest value of the error indication during command

EEHEALTH

INTEGER

External equipment health. 1=No warning or

alarm, 2=Warning, 3=Alarm

CBOPCAP

INTEGER

Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =

CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More

809
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.3.6.4
Table 470:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

tStartMove

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Supervision time for the apparatus to

move after a command

tIntermediate

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Allowed time for intermediate position

AdaptivePulse

Not adaptive
Adaptive

Not adaptive

Output resets when a new correct end

position is reached

tOpenPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Output pulse length for open command

tClosePulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Output pulse length for close command

InitialCount

0 - 20000

Initial number of operations (Initial count

value)

14.3.6.5

Step

Default

Description

Operation principle
The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for
example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC
61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function
executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time
supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be
allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous
conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 454.
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local
HMI, a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal
from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The
health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to
IEC61850-8-1. The operation counter functionality and the external equipment
health supervision are independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.

Local/Remote switch

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard
level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher
level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in Figure 402.

810
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TR

From I/O

UE

Local= Operation at
switch yard level

switchLR
FAL

SE

Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 402:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autoreclosure.
The blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution

The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality
of the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual
value because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR
will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions
determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the
position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for
updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The
substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1

data object is marked as substituted and old data, but the position of
the connected SCSWI is only marked as old data.
811
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Time diagrams

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 403 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
AdaptivePulse = TRUE

EXE_CL
Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
attribute in 'cause' is set

tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove

tIntermediate timer
t2

if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 403:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 404 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.

812
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

EXE_CL
tClosePulse

en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 404:

Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse
time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits
for the end of the execution pulse before telling the activating
function that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and
CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is
shown in Figure 405 .

813
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_OP
tOpenPulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 405:

Open command with open position indication

14.3.7

Circuit switch SXSWI

14.3.7.1

Functionality
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary
output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

14.3.7.2

Function block
SXSWI
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
SWOPCAP
RS_CNT
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN

XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
EEHEALTH
SWOPCAP

IEC05000339-3-en.vsd
IEC05000339 V3 EN

Figure 406:

SXSWI function block

814
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.3.7.3

Signals
Table 471:
Name

SXSWI Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

LR_SWI

BOOLEAN

Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard

OPEN

BOOLEAN

Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch

CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch

BL_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal to block the open command

BL_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal to block the close command

BL_UPD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal for block of the position updating

POSOPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O

POSCLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O

SWOPCAP

INTEGER

Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =

C, 4 = O and C

RS_CNT

BOOLEAN

Resets the operation counter

EEH_WARN

BOOLEAN

Warning from external equipment

EEH_ALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm from external equipment

XIN

BOOLEAN

Execution information from CSWI

Table 472:
Name

SXSWI Output signals

Type

Description

XPOS

GROUP SIGNAL

Group connection to CSWI for DIS

EXE_OP

BOOLEAN

Executes the command for open direction

EXE_CL

BOOLEAN

Executes the command for close direction

OP_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Indication that the function is blocked for open

commands

CL_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Indication that the function is blocked for close

commands

UPD_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Update of position indication is blocked

OPENPOS

BOOLEAN

Apparatus open position

CLOSEPOS

BOOLEAN

Apparatus closed position

CNT_VAL

INTEGER

Operation counter value

L_CAUSE

INTEGER

Latest value of the error indication during command

EEHEALTH

INTEGER

External equipment health. 1=No warning or

alarm, 2=Warning, 3=Alarm

SWOPCAP

INTEGER

Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =

C, 4 = O and C

815
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.3.7.4
Table 473:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

tStartMove

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Supervision time for the apparatus to

move after a command

tIntermediate

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

15.000

Allowed time for intermediate position

AdaptivePulse

Not adaptive
Adaptive

Not adaptive

Output resets when a new correct end

position is reached

tOpenPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Output pulse length for open command

tClosePulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Output pulse length for close command

SwitchType

Load Break
Disconnector
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch

Disconnector

1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,
3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw

InitialCount

0 - 20000

Initial number of operations (Initial count

value)

14.3.7.5

Step

Default

Description

Operation principle
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands,
evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions.
Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs
the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an
appropriate "cause" value, see Table 454.
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a
binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the
Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.
Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according
to IEC61850-8-1.

Local/Remote switch

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If
the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection
functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in
Figure 407.

816
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TR

From I/O

UE

Local= Operation at
switch yard level

switchLR
FAL

SE

Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 407:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autorecloser.
The blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution

The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of
the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use
the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the
process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the
position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for
updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The
substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1

data object is marked as substituted and old data, but the position
of the connected SCSWI is only marked as old data.
817
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Time diagrams

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 408 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
AdaptivePulse = TRUE

EXE_CL
Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
attribute in 'cause' is set

tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove

tIntermediate timer
t2

if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 408:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 409 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.

818
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

EXE_CL
tClosePulse

en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 409:

Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and
CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is
shown in Figure 410.

819
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_OP
tOpenPulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 410:

Open command with open position indication

14.3.8

Bay reserve QCRSV

14.3.8.1

Functionality
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking
information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

14.3.8.2

Function block
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_RQ1
RES_RQ2
RES_RQ3
RES_RQ4
RES_RQ5
RES_RQ6
RES_RQ7
RES_RQ8
BLK_RES
OVERRIDE
RES_DATA

RES_GRT1
RES_GRT2
RES_GRT3
RES_GRT4
RES_GRT5
RES_GRT6
RES_GRT7
RES_GRT8
RES_BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000340-2-en.vsd

IEC05000340 V2 EN

Figure 411:

QCRSV function block

820
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.3.8.3

Signals
Table 474:
Name

QCRSV Input signals

Type

Default

Description

EXCH_IN

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different

BayRes blocks

RES_RQ1

BOOLEAN

Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ2

BOOLEAN

Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ3

BOOLEAN

Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ4

BOOLEAN

Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ5

BOOLEAN

Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ6

BOOLEAN

Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ7

BOOLEAN

Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ8

BOOLEAN

Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Reservation is not possible and the output signals

are reset

OVERRIDE

BOOLEAN

Signal to override the reservation

RES_DATA

INTEGER

Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 475:
Name

QCRSV Output signals

Type

Description

RES_GRT1

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT2

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT3

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT4

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT5

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT6

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT7

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT8

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to

operate

RES_BAYS

BOOLEAN

Request for reservation of other bays

ACK_TO_B

BOOLEAN

Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved

RESERVED

BOOLEAN

Indicates that the bay is reserved

EXCH_OUT

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different

BayRes blocks

821
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.3.8.4
Table 476:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

tCancelRes

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

10.000

Supervision time for canceling the

reservation

ParamRequest1

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at

selection of apparatus 1

ParamRequest2

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at

selection of apparatus 2

ParamRequest3

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at

selection of apparatus 3

ParamRequest4

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at

selection of apparatus 4

ParamRequest5

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at

selection of apparatus 5

ParamRequest6

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at

selection of apparatus 6

ParamRequest7

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at

selection of apparatus 7

ParamRequest8

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at

selection of apparatus 8

14.3.8.5

Step

Default

Description

Operation principle
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function
starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the
own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible
to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the
own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller
(SCWI). The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and
V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal
EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay
only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to
know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with
the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the
number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of
the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already
is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output
signal RESERVED.

822
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output
RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is
connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command
sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the
"cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay
that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If
not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and
wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done
by activating the output RES_BAYS.
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-ncontrol" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped
into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input
RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the
acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the
bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is

blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay.
This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the
OVERRIDE input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the
external acknowledge.

Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight
apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to Figure 412. If more than one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must
be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

823
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

RES_BAYS

ACK_TO_B

RESERVED

IEC05000088_2_en.vsd
IEC05000088 V2 EN

Figure 412:

Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

14.3.9

Reservation input RESIN

14.3.9.1

Functionality
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from
other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays
(up to 60 instances are available).

14.3.9.2

Function block
RESIN1
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES

ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000341-2-en.vsd

IEC05000341 V2 EN

Figure 413:

RESIN1 function block

824
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RESIN2
EXCH_IN
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES

ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd

IEC09000807 V1 EN

Figure 414:

14.3.9.3

RESIN2 function block

Signals
Table 477:
Name

RESIN1 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BAY_ACK

BOOLEAN

Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.

from this bay

BAY_VAL

BOOLEAN

The reserv. and acknow. signals from another

bay are valid

BAY_RES

BOOLEAN

Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 478:
Name

RESIN1 Output signals

Type

Description

ACK_F_B

BOOLEAN

All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from

this bay

ANY_ACK

BOOLEAN

Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from

this bay

VALID_TX

BOOLEAN

The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays

are valid

RE_RQ_B

BOOLEAN

Request from other bay to reserve this bay

V_RE_RQ

BOOLEAN

Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid

EXCH_OUT

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different

ResIn blocks

Table 479:
Name

RESIN2 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

EXCH_IN

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different

ResIn blocks

BAY_ACK

BOOLEAN

Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.

from this bay

BAY_VAL

BOOLEAN

The reserv. and acknow. signals from another

bay are valid

BAY_RES

BOOLEAN

Request from other bay to reserve this bay

825
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 480:

RESIN2 Output signals

Name

14.3.9.4
Table 481:
Name
FutureUse

Table 482:
Name
FutureUse

14.3.9.5

Type

Description

ACK_F_B

BOOLEAN

All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from

this bay

ANY_ACK

BOOLEAN

Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from

this bay

VALID_TX

BOOLEAN

The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays

are valid

RE_RQ_B

BOOLEAN

Request from other bay to reserve this bay

V_RE_RQ

BOOLEAN

Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid

EXCH_OUT

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different

ResIn blocks

Settings
RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Bay in use
Bay future use

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Bay in use

Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future
use

RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Bay in use
Bay future use

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Bay in use

Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future
use

Operation principle
The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic
conditions. The logic diagram in Figure 415 shows how the output signals are
created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block
representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.

826
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

EXCH_IN

INT
BIN

ACK_F_B

&
FutureUse

BAY_ACK

1
ANY_ACK

VALID_TX

&
BAY_VAL

1
RE_RQ_B

BAY_RES

&
V _RE_RQ

BIN

EXCH_OUT
INT

en05000089.vsd
IEC05000089 V1 EN

Figure 415:

Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 416 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN
modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay"
used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last
RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles
the reservation function in the own bay.

827
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

Bay 1

Bay 2

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

Bay n

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

QCRSV
RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN

Figure 416:

Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

14.4

Voltage control

14.4.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Automatic voltage control for tap

changer, single control

TR1ATCC

Automatic voltage control for tap

changer, parallel control

TR8ATCC

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
90

U
IEC10000165 V1 EN

90

U
IEC10000166 V1 EN

Tap changer control and supervision, 6

binary inputs

TCMYLTC

84

Tap changer control and supervision,

32 binary inputs

TCLYLTC

84

828
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.4.2

Functionality
The voltage control functions, Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single
control TR1ATCC, Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control
TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC
as well as Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are
used for control of power transformers with a on-load tap changer. The functions
provide automatic regulation of the voltage on the secondary side of transformers
or alternatively on a load point further out in the network.
Control of a single transformer, as well as control of up to eight transformers in
parallel is possible. For parallel control of power transformers, three alternative
methods are available, the master-follower method, the circulating current method
and the reverse reactance method. The first two methods require exchange of
information between the parallel transformers and this is provided for within IEC
61850-8-1.
Voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility of to avoid
simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a
transformer in a group which regulates it to a correct tap position even though the
LV CB is open, compensation for a possible capacitor bank on the LV side bay of a
transformer, extensive tap changer monitoring including contact wear and hunting
detection, monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so that for example, the
voltage control can be blocked if the power reverses etc.

14.4.3

Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and

TR8ATCC
The Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control and
TR8ATCC for parallel control function controls the voltage on the LV side of a
transformer either automatically or manually. The automatic control can be either
for a single transformer, or for a group of parallel transformers.

14.4.3.1

Operation principle
The LV-side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring point. If
necessary, the LV side current is used as load current to calculate the line-voltage
drop to the regulation point. This current is also used when parallel control with the
circulating current method is used.
In addition, all three-phase currents from the HV-winding (usually the winding
where the tap changer is situated) are used by the Automatic voltage control for tap
changer TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control function
for over current blocking.
The setting MeasMode is a selection of single-phase, or phase-phase, or positive
sequence quantity. It is to be used for voltage and current measurement on the LV-

829
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

side. The involved phases are also selected. Thus, single-phases as well as phasephase or three-phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected
for current and voltage.
The analog input signals are normally common for other functions in the IED for
example, protection functions.
The LV-busbar voltage is designated UB, load current IL and for
load point voltage UL will be used in the text to follow.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC measures the
magnitude of the busbar voltage UB. If no other additional features are enabled
(line voltage drop compensation), this voltage is further used for voltage regulation.
TR1ATCC then compares this voltage with the set voltage, USet and decides
which action should be taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint,
a deadband (degree of insensitivity) is introduced. The deadband is symmetrical
around USet, see figure 417, and it is arranged in such a way that there is an outer
and an inner deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband start the
timer to initiate tap commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured
voltage is once again back inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer
deadband is denoted U. The setting of U, setting Udeadband should be set to a
value near to the power transformers tap changer voltage step (typically 75125%
of the tap changer step).
Security Range

*)

*)

Ublock

DU
DU
DUin DUin

Raise Cmd

Umin

U1

Uset

Lower Cmd

U2

*)

Umax

Voltage Magnitude

*) Action in accordance with setting

IEC06000489_2_en.vsd
IEC06000489 V2 EN

Figure 417:

Control actions on a voltage scale

During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage UB, stays within the outer
deadband (interval between U1 and U2 in figure 417). In that case no actions will
be taken by the TR1ATCC. However, if UB becomes smaller than U1, or greater
than U2, an appropriate lower or raise timer will start. The timer will run as long as
the measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition persists
longer than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC will initiate that the appropriate
ULOWER or URAISE command will be sent from Tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC, or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC to the
transformer load tap changer. If necessary, the procedure will be repeated until the
magnitude of the busbar voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of
830
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

the inner deadband is denoted Uin. The inner deadband Uin, setting
UDeadbandInner should be set to a value smaller than U. It is recommended to
set the inner deadband to 25-70% of the U value.
This way of working is used by TR1ATCC while the busbar voltage is within the
security range defined by settings Umin and Umax
A situation where UB falls outside this range will be regarded as an abnormal
situation.
Instead of controlling the voltage at the LV busbar in the same substation as the
transformer itself, it is possible to control the voltage at a load point out in the
network, downstream from the transformer. The Line Voltage Drop Compensation
(LDC) can be selected by a setting parameter, and it works such that the voltage
drop from the transformer location to the load point is calculated based on the
measured load current and the known line impedance.
In order to prevent unnecessary load tap changer operations caused by temporary
voltage fluctuations and to coordinate load tap changer operations in radial
networks, a time delay is used for the tapping command to the load tap changer.
The time delay can be either definite time or inverse time and two time settings are
used, the first (t1) for the initial delay of a tap command, and the second (t2) for
consecutive tap commands.

Automatic control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC

Parallel control of power transformers means control of two or more power

transformers connected to the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also
on the HV side. Special measures must be taken in order to avoid a runaway
situation where the tap changers on the parallel transformers gradually diverge and
end up in opposite end positions.
Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with Automatic control
for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC:

master-follower method
reverse reactance method
circulating current method.

Parallel control with the master-follower method

In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and
will regulate the voltage in accordance with the principles Automatic voltage
control for a tap changer. Selection of the master is made by activating the binary
input FORCMAST in the TR8ATCC function block for one of the transformers in
the group.
The followers can act in one of two alternative ways selected by a setting parameter:
1.

Raise and lower commands (URAISE and ULOWER) generated by the

master, initiates the corresponding command in all follower TR8ATCCs

831
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

2.

simultaneously, and consequently they will blindly follow the master

commands irrespective of their individual tap positions.
The followers read the tap position of the master and adapt to the same tap
position or to a tap position with an offset relative to the master. In this mode,
the followers can also be time delayed relative to the master.

Parallel control with the reverse reactance method

In the reverse reactance method, the LDC (Line voltage drop compensation) is
used. The purpose of which is normally to control the voltage at a load point
further out in the network. The very same function can also be used here but with a
completely different objective. Whereas the LDC, when used to control the voltage
at a load point, gives a voltage drop along a line from the busbar voltage UB to a
load point voltage UL, the LDC, when used in the reverse reactance parallel control
of transformers, gives a voltage increase (actually, by adjusting the ratio XL/RL
with respect to the power factor, the length of the vector UL will be approximately
equal to the length of UB) from UB up towards the transformer itself.
When the voltage at a load point is controlled by using LDC, the line impedance
from the transformer to the load point is defined by the setting Xline. If a negative
reactance is entered instead of the normal positive line reactance, parallel
transformers will act in such a way that the transformer with a higher tap position
will be the first to tap down when the busbar voltage increases, and the transformer
with a lower tap position will be the first to tap up when the busbar voltage
decreases. The overall performance will then be that a runaway tap situation will be
avoided and that the circulating current will be minimized.
Parallel control with the circulating current method
This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC function
blocks (one TR8ATCC function for each transformer in the parallel group). The
TR8ATCC function block can either be located in the same IED, where they are
configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different IEDs. If the functions are
located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay
communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE
interbay communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete
exchange of TR8ATCC data, analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made
cyclically every 300 ms.
The main objectives of the circulating current method for parallel voltage control are:
1.
2.

Regulate the busbar or load voltage to the preset target value.

Minimize the circulating current in order to achieve optimal sharing of the
reactive load between parallel transformers.

The busbar voltage UB is measured individually for each transformer in the

parallel group by its associated TR8ATCC function. These measured values will
then be exchanged between the transformers, and in each TR8ATCC block, the

832
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

mean value of all UB values will be calculated. The resulting value UBmean will
then be used in each IED instead of UB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring
that the same value is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that
one erroneous measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation.
At the same time, supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed.
Figure 418 shows an example with two transformers connected in parallel. If
transformer T1 has higher no load voltage it will drive a circulating current which
adds to the load current in T1 and subtracts from the load current in T2.

UT1
ICC...T2

T1

T2

+
IT1

ZT1

IT2

ZT2

ICC...T1

ICC...T1

IT1

UT2

ICC...T2

IT2

UB
IL

UL

IL

Load

UL

Load
IEC06000484_2_en.vsd

IEC06000484 V2 EN

Figure 418:

Circulating current in a parallel group of two transformers

It can be shown that the magnitude of the circulating current in this case can be
approximately calculated with the formula:

I cc _ T 1 = I cc _ T 2 =
EQUATION1866 V1 EN

UT1 - UT 2
ZT 1 + ZT 2
(Equation 194)

Because the transformer impedance is dominantly inductive, it is possible to use

just the transformer reactances in the above formula. At the same time this means
that T1 circulating current lags the busbar voltage by almost 90, while T2
circulating current leads the busbar voltage by almost 90.
See figure 419.

833
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UT1
UB

CT1*ICC_T1*ZT1
CT2*ICC_T2*ZT2

UT2

IL

IT2

IT1

2*Udeadband

ICC_T2
T2 Receives Cir_Curr
IL = IT1+ IT2
Icc_T1 = Imag {IT1- (ZT2/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
Icc_T2 = Imag {IT2- (ZT1/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}

ICC_T1
T1 Produces Cir_Curr

en06000525.vsd

IEC06000525 V1 EN

Figure 419:

Vector diagram for two power transformers working in parallel

Thus, by minimizing the circulating current flow through transformers, the total
reactive power flow is optimized as well. In the same time, at this optimum state
the apparent power flow is distributed among the transformers in the group in
proportion to their rated power.
In order to calculate the circulating current, measured current values for the
individual transformers must be communicated between the participating
TR8ATCC functions. It should be noted that the Fourier filters in different IEDs
run asynchronously, which means that current and voltage phasors cannot be
exchanged and used for calculation directly between the IEDs. In order to
synchronize measurements within all IEDs in the parallel group, a common
reference must be chosen. The most suitable reference quantity for all transformers,
belonging to the same parallel group, is the busbar voltage. This means that the
measured busbar voltage is used as a reference phasor in all IEDs, and the position
of the current phasors in a complex plane is calculated in respect to this reference.
This is a simple and effective solution, which eliminates any additional need for
synchronization between the IEDs regarding TR8ATCC function.
At each transformer bay, the real and imaginary parts of the current on the
secondary side of the transformer are calculated from measured values, and
distributed to the TR8ATCC functions belonging to the same parallel group.
As mentioned before, only the imaginary part (reactive current component) of the
individual transformer current is needed for the circulating current calculations.

834
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The real part of the current will, however, be used to calculate the total through
load current and will be used for the line voltage drop compensation.
The total load current is defined as the sum of all individual transformer currents:
k

I L = Ii
i =1

EQUATION1867 V1 EN

(Equation 195)

where the subscript i signifies the transformer bay number and k the number of
parallel transformers in the group (k 8). Next step is to extract the circulating
current Icc_i that flows in bay i. It is possible to identify a term in the bay current
which represents the circulating current. The magnitude of the circulating current
in bay i, Icc_i , can be calculated as:
I cc _ i = - Im( I i - K i I L )
EQUATION1868 V1 EN

(Equation 196)

where Im signifies the imaginary part of the expression in brackets and Ki is a

constant which depends on the number of transformers in the parallel group and
their short-circuit reactances. The TR8ATCC function automatically calculates this
constant based on the transformer reactances which are setting parameters, and
shall be given in primary ohms calculated from each transformer rating plate. The
minus sign is added in the above equation in order to get a positive value of the
circulating current for the transformer that generates it.
In this way each TR8ATCC function calculates the circulating current of its own bay.
A plus sign means that the transformer produces circulating current while, a minus
sign means that the transformer receives circulating current.
As a next step, it is necessary to estimate the value of the no-load voltage in each
transformer. To do that the magnitude of the circulating current in each bay is first
converted to a voltage deviation, Udi, with the following formula:
U di = Ci I cc _ i X i
EQUATION1869 V1 EN

(Equation 197)

where Xi is the short-circuit reactance for transformer i and Ci, is a setting

parameter named Comp which serves the purpose of alternatively increasing or
decreasing the impact of the circulating current in the TR8ATCC control
calculations. It should be noted that Udi will have positive values for transformers
that produce circulating current and negative values for transformers that receive
circulating current.
Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be
approximated with:
835
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

U i = U Bmean + U di
(Equation 198)

EQUATION1870 V1 EN

Generally speaking, this value for the no-load voltage can then be put into the
voltage control function in a similar way as for the single transformer described
previously. Ui would then be regarded similarly to the single transformer measured
busbar voltage, and further control actions taken.
For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated noload voltage will be greater/smaller than the measured voltage UBmean. The
calculated no-load voltage will thereafter be compared with the set voltage USet. A
steady deviation which is outside the outer deadband will result in ULOWER or
URAISE being initiated alternatively. In this way the overall control action will
always be correct since the position of a tap changer is directly related to the
transformer no-load voltage. The sequence resets when UBmean is inside the inner
deadband at the same time as the calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in
the parallel group are inside the outer deadband. The example in figure 420,is a
fabricated case and not very realistic, but it illustrates some details on how the
described regulation works.
T1

T1 No-load voltage

T2

T3

T4

UBmean

DB1

DB2
USet
DB2

DB1
IEC06000526_2_en.vsd
IEC06000526 V2 EN

Figure 420:

Selection of transformer to tap

In the figure 420, voltage is considered as increasing above the line denoted USet,
and decreasing below that line.
In the TR8ATCC function for T1 and T4, the calculated no-load voltage for T1 and
T4 respectively, is above the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband.
836
Technical Manual

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 14
Control

In the TR8ATCC function for T2, the calculated no-load voltage for T2, viewed
from the upper DB1, is not outside (above) the deadband, but as viewed from the
lower DB1 it is outside (below) the deadband. However, there is a restriction in a
situation like this, when the measured busbar voltage, UBmean, is on the opposite
side of the USet line (in figure 420), then UBmean must be inside DB1 if the
calculated no-load voltage for that transformer shall qualify as a candidate for
tapping. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T2,
although below DB1, would not be considered for tapping in this case.
In the TR8ATCC function for T3, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, is above
the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband. However, viewed from the
upper limit DB1, transformers with negative voltage deviation, Udi, are disregarded
and similarly, viewed from the lower limit DB1, transformers with positive voltage
deviation, Udi, are disregarded. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load
voltage for T3, although above DB1, would not be considered in this case. Thus in
the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, although above DB1,
would not be considered for tapping in this case.
It is possible to avoid simultaneous tapping, and to distribute tapping actions
evenly among the parallel transformers in a busbar group. This is a selected by a
setting parameter, and the algorithm in the TR8ATCC function will then select the
transformer with the greatest voltage deviation Udi to tap first that is, after time
delay t1. Thereafter, the transformer with the then greatest value of Udi amongst the
remaining transformers in the group will tap after a further time delay t2, and so
on. This is made possible as the calculation of Icc is updated every time the
measured values are exchanged on the horizontal communication (every 300 ms).
If two transformers have equal magnitude of Udi, then there is a predetermined
order governing which one is going to tap first.

837
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Logic diagrams
AUTO
UL

U1 INNER DB

a
U2 INNER DB

a<b

>

a>b

<

a<b

>1

>

a>b

>1

>

a>b

&
URAISE

a
U2 DB

UB

U MAX

FSD

&

&

a
U1 DB

<

>1

ULOWER

&
&

en06000509.vsd
IEC06000509 V1 EN

Figure 421:

Simplified logic for automatic control in single mode operation

838
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

AUTO
PARALLEL START
OPERSIMTAP

&

UL

U1 INNER DB

<

a<b

&

&
&

>

a>b

&

U2 INNER DB

&

U CIRCCOMP
MIN

<

a<b

>

a>b

>

a>b

>1

URAISE

>1

U1 DB
U CIRCCOMP
MAX

U2 DB

UB

U MAX

FSD

>1
>1

>1

ULOWER

&
&

en06000511.vsd
IEC06000511 V1 EN

Figure 422:

Simplified logic for parallel control in the circulating current mode

839
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

UCCT4

a
a=b
b

UCCT3

&

T4PG

T4

a=b
b
UCCT2

&

T3PG

UCCT1

T3
1

a=b
b

&

T2PG

&
T2

a=b

&

&
T1

&

&
&

&
1

SIMLOWER

SIMRAISE

&

&

MAX
T1PG
a
a=b

&

T1

a=b
b

&

T2PG

&

T3PG

&
T3

a=b
b

T2
1

a=b
b

&

&
T4

&

T4PG

&
&

&

&

&

MIN

ADAPT

a
a=b

ActualUser

Udeadband

a=b
b

LoadVoltage
HOMING
OperSimTap

en06000521.vsd
IEC06000521 V1 EN

Figure 423:

Simplified logic for simultaneous tapping prevention

840
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

From the Master via

horizontal comm.
relativePosition

a<b

<

&

raiseVoltageOut

&

lowerVoltageOut
a

a>b

>

&

b
Follow Tap

&

&

&

=
1

URAISE

=
1

ULOWER

YLTCOUT ATCCIN

&

tapPosition

&

tapInHighVoltPos
tapInLowVoltPos
en06000510.vsd
IEC06000510 V1 EN

Figure 424:

14.4.4

Simplified logic for parallel control in Master-Follower mode

Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC
The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC) and 32
binary inputs TCLYLTC gives the tap commands to the tap changer, and
supervises that commands are carried through correctly. It has built-in extensive
possibilities for tap changer position measurement, as well as supervisory and
monitoring features. This is used in the voltage control and can also give
information about tap position to the transformer differential protection.

14.4.4.1

Operation principle
Reading of tap changer position

The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC function
block in the following ways:
1.
2.
3.

Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions).
Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray
coded binary signals.
Via a mA input signal.

841
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Via binary input signals, one per tap position

In this option, each tap position has a separate contact that is hard wired to a binary
input in the IED. Via the Signal Matrix tool in PCM600, the contacts on the binary
input card are then directly connected to the

inputs B1 B6 on TCMYLTC function

or inputs B1 B32 on TCLYLTC function.

Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray
coded binary signals
The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) decodes
binary data from up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may
be decoded either as BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the
parameter CodeType.
It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the
parity check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.
The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) can be used as supervisory input
for indication of any external error ( Binary Input Module) in the system for
reading of tap changer position. Likewise, the input OUTERR can be used as a
supervisory of the Binary Input Module.
The truth table (see table 483) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded
Decimal, and Gray coded signals.

842
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 483:

Binary, BCD and Gray conversion

IEC06000522 V1 EN

The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from
decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.

843
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 484:

Gray code conversion

IEC06000523 V1 EN

Via a mA input signal

Any of the six inputs on the mA card (MIM) can be used for the purpose of tap
changer position reading connected to the Tap changer control and supervision, 6
binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC.

844
Technical Manual

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 14
Control

The measurement of the tap changer position via MIM module is based on the
principle that the specified mA input signal range (usually 4-20 mA) is divided into
N intervals corresponding to the number of positions available on the tap changer.
All mA values within one interval are then associated with one tap changer
position value.
The number of available tap changer positions N is defined by the setting
parameters LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap, which define the tap position for lowest
voltage and highest voltage respectively.

14.4.5

Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and

TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC
The two function blocks Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control
TR1ATCC and parallel control TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are
connected to each other according to figure 425 below.

845
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

I3P1

TR8ATCC
ATCCOUT

I3P2

MAN

U3P2

AUTO
IBLK

BLOCK

TCLYLTC
URAISE
YLTCIN

TCINPROG
INERR
RESETERR
OUTERR

ULOWER
HIPOSAL
LOPOSAL
POSERRAL

MANCTRL

PGTFWD

AUTOCTRL

PLTREV

RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL

QGTFWD

RS_OPCNT TCERRAL

PSTO

QLTREV

RAISEV

REVACBLK

LOWERV

PARITY
BIERR

POSOUT
CONVERR

EAUTOBLK

UHIGH

B1

NEWPOS

DEBLKAUT

ULOW

B2

HIDIFPOS

LVA1

UBLK

B3

INVALPOS

LVA2

HOURHUNT

B4

YLTCOUT

LVA3

DAYHUNT

B5

LVA4

HUNTING

B6

SINGLE

B7

PARALLEL

B8

HOMING

B9

LVARESET
RSTERR
DISC
Q1ON

ADAPT

B10

Q2ON

TOTBLK

B11

Q3ON

AUTOBLK

B12

MASTER

B13

T1INCLD

FOLLOWER

B14

T2INCLD

MFERR

B15

T3INCLD

OUTOFPOS

B16

T4INCLD

COMMERR

B17

T5INCLD

ICIRC

B18

T6INCLD

TRFDISC

B19

T7INCLD

VTALARM

B20

T8INCLD

T1PG

B21

FORCMAST

T2PG

B22

RSTMAST

T3PG

B23

ATCCIN

T4PG

B24

HORIZ1

T5PG

B25

HORIZ2

T6PG

B26

HORIZ3

T7PG

B27

HORIZ4

T8PG

B28

SNGLMODE

(Rmk. In case of
parallel control,
this signal shall
also be connected
to HORIZx input of
the parallel
transformer
TR8ATCC function
block)

HORIZ5

B29

HORIZ6

B30

HORIZ7

B31

HORIZ8

B32
MA

IEC06000507_2_en.vsd

IEC06000507 V2 EN

Figure 425:

Connection between TR8ATCC and TCLYLTC

The TR8ATCC and TR1ATCC function blocks have an output signal ATCCOUT,
which is connected to input YLTCIN on TCMYLTC. The data set sent from
ATCCOUT to YLTCIN contains 5 binary signals, one word containing 10 binary
signals and 1 analog signal. For TR8ATCC data is also sent from output
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC function input HORIZx, when the master-follower
or circulating current mode is used.

846
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 485:
Signal

Binary signals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Description

raiseVolt

Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a raise command

lowerVolt

Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a lower command

automaticCtrl

The regulation is in automatic control

extRaiseBlock

Block raise commands

extLowerBlock

Block lower commands

Table 486:
Signal

Binary signals contained in word enableBlockSignals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Description

CircCurrBl

Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of high circulating current

CmdErrBl

Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of command error

OCBl

Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of over current

MFPosDiffBl

Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the tap difference between a

follower and the master is greater than the set value

OVPartBl

Alarm/Block raise commands because the busbar voltage is above Umax

RevActPartBl

Alarm/Block raise commands because reverse action is activated

TapChgBl

Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error

TapPosBl

Alarm/Block commands in one direction because the tap changer has

reached an end position, or Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of
tap changer error

UVBl

Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the busbar voltage is below Ublock

UVPartBl

Alarm/Block lower commands because the busbar voltage is between Umin

and Ublock

Table 487:
Signal
currAver

Analog signal: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Description
Value of current in the phase with the highest current value

In case of parallel control of transformers, the data set sent from output signal
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC blocks input HORIZx contains one "word"
containing 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals:
Table 488:
Signal

Binary signals contained in word status: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Description

TimerOn

This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is
going to tap when the set time has expired.

automaticCTRL

Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control

mutualBlock

Activated when the automatic control is blocked

disc

Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar

receiveStat

Signal used for the horizontal communication

Table continues on next page

847
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signal

Description

TermIsForcedMaster

Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower

parallel control mode

TermIsMaster

Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel

control mode

termReadyForMSF

Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control

mode

raiseVoltageOut

Order from the master to the followers to tap up

lowerVoltageOut

Order from the master to the followers to tap down

Table 489:
Signal

Analog signals: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Description

voltageBusbar

Measured busbar voltage for this transformer

ownLoad Currim

Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer

ownLoadCurrre

Measured load current real part for this transformer

reacSec

Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side

relativePosition

The transformer's actual tap position

voltage Setpoint

The transformer's set voltage (USet) for automatic control

The TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function blocks have an output YLTCOUT. As

shown in figure 425, this output shall be connected to the input ATCCIN and it
contains 10 binary signals and 4 integer signals:
Table 490:
Signal

Binary signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Description

tapInOperation

Tap changer in operation, changing tap position

direction

Direction, raise or lower, for the most recent tap changer operation

tapInHighVoltPos

Tap changer in high end position

tapInLowVoltPos

Tap changer in low end position

tapPositionError

Error in reading of tap position ( tap position out of range, more than one
step change, BCD code error (unaccepted combination), parity fault, mA out
of range, hardware fault for example, BIM etc.)

tapChgError

This is set high when the tap changer has not carried through a raise/lower
command within the expected max. time, or if the tap changer starts tapping
without a given command.

cmdError

This is set high if a given raise/lower command is not followed by a tap

position change within the expected max. time

raiseVoltageFb

Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a raise command shall be executed

lowerVoltageFb

Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a lower command shall be executed

timeOutTC

Setting value of tTCTimeout that tTCTimeout has timed out.

848
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 491:

Integer signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Signal

14.4.6

Description

tapPosition

Actual tap position as reported from the load tap changer

numberOfOperations

Accumulated number of tap changer operations

tapPositionMaxVolt

Tap position for highest voltage

tapPositionMinVolt

Tap position for lowest voltage

Function block
TR1ATCC
I3P1*
ATCCOUT
I3P2*
MAN
U3P2*
AUTO
BLOCK
IBLK
MANCTRL
PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL
PLTREV
PSTO
QGTFWD
RAISEV
QLTREV
LOWERV
REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK
UHIGH
DEBLKAUT
ULOW
LVA1
UBLK
LVA2
HOURHUNT
LVA3
DAYHUNT
LVA4
HUNTING
LVARESET
TIMERON
RSTERR
TOTBLK
ATCCIN
AUTOBLK
UGTUPPDB
ULTLOWDB
IEC07000041_2_en.vsd
IEC07000041 V2 EN

Figure 426:

TR1ATCC function block

849
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TR8ATCC
ATCCOUT
I3P1*
I3P2*
MAN
U3P2*
AUTO
BLOCK
IBLK
MANCTRL
PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL
PLTREV
PSTO
QGTFWD
RAISEV
QLTREV
LOWERV
REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK
UHIGH
DEBLKAUT
ULOW
LVA1
UBLK
LVA2
HOURHUNT
LVA3
DAYHUNT
LVA4
HUNTING
LVARESET
SINGLE
RSTERR
PARALLEL
DISC
TIMERON
Q1ON
HOMING
Q2ON
ADAPT
Q3ON
TOTBLK
SNGLMODE
AUTOBLK
T1INCLD
MASTER
T2INCLD
FOLLOWER
T3INCLD
MFERR
T4INCLD
OUTOFPOS
T5INCLD
UGTUPPDB
T6INCLD
ULTLOWDB
T7INCLD
COMMERR
T8INCLD
ICIRC
FORCMAST
TRFDISC
RSTMAST
VTALARM
ATCCIN
T1PG
HORIZ1
T2PG
HORIZ2
T3PG
HORIZ3
T4PG
HORIZ4
T5PG
HORIZ5
T6PG
HORIZ6
T7PG
HORIZ7
T8PG
HORIZ8
IEC07000040_2_en.vsd
IEC07000040 V2 EN

Figure 427:

TR8ATCC function block

TCMYLTC
YLTCIN*
URAISE
TCINPROG
ULOWER
INERR
HIPOSAL
RESETERR
LOPOSAL
OUTERR
POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT
CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT
TCERRAL
PARITY
POSOUT
BIERR
CONVERR
B1
NEWPOS
B2
HIDIFPOS
B3
INVALPOS
B4
TCPOS
B5
YLTCOUT
B6
MA
IEC07000038_2_en.vsd
IEC07000038 V2 EN

Figure 428:

TCMYLTC function block

850
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TCLYLTC
URAISE
YLTCIN*
TCINPROG
ULOWER
INERR
HIPOSAL
RESETERR
LOPOSAL
OUTERR
POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT
CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT
TCERRAL
PARITY
POSOUT
BIERR
CONVERR
B1
NEWPOS
B2
HIDIFPOS
B3
INVALPOS
B4
TCPOS
B5
YLTCOUT
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
MA
IEC07000037_2_en.vsd
IEC07000037 V2 EN

Figure 429:

BLOCK

TCLYLTC function block

VCTRRCV
VCTR_REC
COMVALID
DATVALID
IEC07000045-2-en.vsd

IEC07000045 V2 EN

Figure 430:

VCTRRCV function block

851
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.4.7

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 492:
Name

TR1ATCC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input group for current on HV side

I3P2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input group for current on LV side

U3P2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input group for voltage on LV side

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

MANCTRL

BOOLEAN

Binary "MAN" command

AUTOCTRL

BOOLEAN

Binary "AUTO" command

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

RAISEV

BOOLEAN

Binary "UP" command

LOWERV

BOOLEAN

Binary "DOWN" command

EAUTOBLK

BOOLEAN

Block the voltage control in automatic control mode

DEBLKAUT

BOOLEAN

Binary "Deblock Auto" command

LVA1

BOOLEAN

Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1

LVA2

BOOLEAN

Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2

LVA3

BOOLEAN

Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3

LVA4

BOOLEAN

Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4

LVARESET

BOOLEAN

Reset LVA adjustment to 0

RSTERR

BOOLEAN

Resets the automatic control commands raise

and lower

ATCCIN

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection from YLTCOUT

Table 493:
Name

TR1ATCC Output signals

Type

Description

ATCCOUT

GROUP SIGNAL

Group connection to horizontal communication

and YLTCIN

MAN

BOOLEAN

The control is in manual mode

AUTO

BOOLEAN

Automatic control mode is active

IBLK

BOOLEAN

One phase current is above the settable limit

PGTFWD

BOOLEAN

Active power above the settable limit

powerActiveForw

PLTREV

BOOLEAN

Active power below the settable limit

powerActiveRev

QGTFWD

BOOLEAN

Reactive power above the settable limit

powerReactiveForw

QLTREV

BOOLEAN

Reactive power below the settable limit

powerReactiveRev

REVACBLK

BOOLEAN

Block caused by reversed action

Table continues on next page

852
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

UHIGH

BOOLEAN

Busbar voltage above the settable limit

voltBusbMaxLimit

ULOW

BOOLEAN

Busbar voltage below the settable limit

voltBusbMinLimit

UBLK

BOOLEAN

Busbar voltage below the settable limit

voltBusbBlockLimit

HOURHUNT

BOOLEAN

Alarm for too many tap changer operations during

the last hour

DAYHUNT

BOOLEAN

Alarm for too many tap changer operations during

the last 24 hours

HUNTING

BOOLEAN

Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer

operations within the time sliding window

TIMERON

BOOLEAN

Raise or lower command to the tap activated

TOTBLK

BOOLEAN

Block of auto and manual commands

AUTOBLK

BOOLEAN

Block of auto commands

UGTUPPDB

BOOLEAN

Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER

command to come

ULTLOWDB

BOOLEAN

Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE

command to come

RAISE

BOOLEAN

Raise voltage order to tapchanger

LOWER

BOOLEAN

Lower voltage order to tapchanger

USETOUT

REAL

Voltage setpoint used in single mode (service

value)

IPRIM

REAL

Max of 3 phase currents (service value)

Table 494:
Name

TR8ATCC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input group for current on HV side

I3P2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input group for current on LV side

U3P2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input group for voltage on LV side

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

MANCTRL

BOOLEAN

Binary "MAN" command

AUTOCTRL

BOOLEAN

Binary "AUTO" command

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

RAISEV

BOOLEAN

Binary "UP" command

LOWERV

BOOLEAN

Binary "DOWN" command

EAUTOBLK

BOOLEAN

Block the voltage control in automatic control mode

DEBLKAUT

BOOLEAN

Binary "Deblock Auto" command

LVA1

BOOLEAN

Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1

LVA2

BOOLEAN

Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2

LVA3

BOOLEAN

Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3

Table continues on next page

853
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

LVA4

BOOLEAN

Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4

LVARESET

BOOLEAN

Reset LVA adjustment to 0

RSTERR

BOOLEAN

Resets the automatic control commands raise

and lower

DISC

BOOLEAN

Disconnected transformer

Q1ON

BOOLEAN

Capacitor or reactor bank 1 connected

Q2ON

BOOLEAN

Capacitor or reactor bank 2 connected

Q3ON

BOOLEAN

Capacitor or reactor bank 3 connected

SNGLMODE

BOOLEAN

The voltage control in single control

T1INCLD

BOOLEAN

Transformer1 included in parallel group

T2INCLD

BOOLEAN

Transformer2 included in parallel group

T3INCLD

BOOLEAN

Transformer3 included in parallel group

T4INCLD

BOOLEAN

Transformer4 included in parallel group

T5INCLD

BOOLEAN

Transformer5 included in parallel group

T6INCLD

BOOLEAN

Transformer6 included in parallel group

T7INCLD

BOOLEAN

Transformer7 included in parallel group

T8INCLD

BOOLEAN

Transformer8 included in parallel group

FORCMAST

BOOLEAN

Force transformer to master

RSTMAST

BOOLEAN

Reset forced master transformer to default

ATCCIN

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection from YLTCOUT

HORIZ1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for horizontal communication

from T1

HORIZ2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for horizontal communication

from T2

HORIZ3

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for horizontal communication

from T3

HORIZ4

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for horizontal communication

from T4

HORIZ5

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for horizontal communication

from T5

HORIZ6

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for horizontal communication

from T6

HORIZ7

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for horizontal communication

from T7

HORIZ8

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for horizontal communication

from T8

854
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 495:
Name

TR8ATCC Output signals

Type

Description

ATCCOUT

GROUP SIGNAL

Group connection to horizontal communication

and YLTCIN

MAN

BOOLEAN

The control is in manual mode

AUTO

BOOLEAN

Automatic control mode is active

IBLK

BOOLEAN

One phase current is above the settable limit

PGTFWD

BOOLEAN

Active power above the settable limit

powerActiveForw

PLTREV

BOOLEAN

Active power below the settable limit

powerActiveRev

QGTFWD

BOOLEAN

Reactive power above the settable limit

powerReactiveForw

QLTREV

BOOLEAN

Reactive power below the settable limit

powerReactiveRev

REVACBLK

BOOLEAN

Block caused by reversed action

UHIGH

BOOLEAN

Busbar voltage above the settable limit

voltBusbMaxLimit

ULOW

BOOLEAN

Busbar voltage below the settable limit

voltBusbMinLimit

UBLK

BOOLEAN

Busbar voltage below the settable limit

voltBusbBlockLimit

HOURHUNT

BOOLEAN

Alarm for too many tap changer operations during

the last hour

DAYHUNT

BOOLEAN

Alarm for too many tap changer operations during

the last 24 hours

HUNTING

BOOLEAN

Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer

operations within the time sliding window

SINGLE

BOOLEAN

The transformer operates in single mode

PARALLEL

BOOLEAN

The transformer operates in parallel mode

TIMERON

BOOLEAN

Raise or lower command to the tap activated

HOMING

BOOLEAN

Transformer is in homing conditions

ADAPT

BOOLEAN

The transformer is adapting

TOTBLK

BOOLEAN

Block of auto and manual commands

AUTOBLK

BOOLEAN

Block of auto commands

MASTER

BOOLEAN

The transformer is master

FOLLOWER

BOOLEAN

This transformer is a follower

MFERR

BOOLEAN

The number of masters is different from one

OUTOFPOS

BOOLEAN

To high difference in tap positions

UGTUPPDB

BOOLEAN

Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER

command to come

ULTLOWDB

BOOLEAN

Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE

command to come

COMMERR

BOOLEAN

Communication error

ICIRC

BOOLEAN

Block from high circulating current

Table continues on next page

855
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

TRFDISC

BOOLEAN

The transformer is disconnected

VTALARM

BOOLEAN

VT supervision alarm

T1PG

BOOLEAN

Transformer1 included in parallel group

T2PG

BOOLEAN

Transformer2 included in parallel group

T3PG

BOOLEAN

Transformer3 included in parallel group

T4PG

BOOLEAN

Transformer4 included in parallel group

T5PG

BOOLEAN

Transformer5 included in parallel group

T6PG

BOOLEAN

Transformer6 included in parallel group

T7PG

BOOLEAN

Transformer7 included in parallel group

T8PG

BOOLEAN

Transformer8 included in parallel group

RAISE

BOOLEAN

Raise voltage order to tapchanger

LOWER

BOOLEAN

Lower voltage order to tapchanger

USETOUT

REAL

Voltage setpoint used in single mode (service

value)

IPRIM

REAL

Max of 3 phase currents (service value)

Table 496:
Name

TCMYLTC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

YLTCIN

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input group connection for YLTC

TCINPROG

BOOLEAN

Indication that tap is moving

INERR

BOOLEAN

Supervision signal of the input board

RESETERR

BOOLEAN

Reset of command and tap error

OUTERR

BOOLEAN

Supervision off the digital output board

RS_CLCNT

BOOLEAN

Reset of the contact life counter

RS_OPCNT

BOOLEAN

Resets the operation counter

PARITY

BOOLEAN

Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position

BIERR

BOOLEAN

Error bit from tap changer for the tap position

B1

BOOLEAN

Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position

B2

BOOLEAN

Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position

B3

BOOLEAN

Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position

B4

BOOLEAN

Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position

B5

BOOLEAN

Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position

B6

BOOLEAN

Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position

MA

REAL

mA from tap changer for the tap position

856
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 497:
Name

TCMYLTC Output signals

Type

Description

URAISE

BOOLEAN

Raise voltage command to tap changer

ULOWER

BOOLEAN

Lower voltage command to tap changer

HIPOSAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm for tap in highest volt position

LOPOSAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm for tap in lowest volt position

POSERRAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm that indicates a problem with the position

indication

CMDERRAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm for a command without an expected

position change

TCERRAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm for none or illegal tap position change

POSOUT

BOOLEAN

Tap position outside min and max position

CONVERR

BOOLEAN

General tap position conversion error

NEWPOS

BOOLEAN

A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse

HIDIFPOS

BOOLEAN

Tap position has changed more than one position

INVALPOS

BOOLEAN

Last position change was an invalid change

CNT_VAL

INTEGER

Number of operations on tap changer

TCPOS

INTEGER

Integer value corresponding to actual tap position

YLTCOUT

GROUP SIGNAL

Group connection to ATCCIN

Table 498:
Name

TCLYLTC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

YLTCIN

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input group connection for YLTC

TCINPROG

BOOLEAN

Indication that tap is moving

INERR

BOOLEAN

Supervision signal of the input board

RESETERR

BOOLEAN

Reset of command and tap error

OUTERR

BOOLEAN

Supervision off the digital output board

RS_CLCNT

BOOLEAN

Reset of the contact life counter

RS_OPCNT

BOOLEAN

Resets the operation counter

PARITY

BOOLEAN

Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position

BIERR

BOOLEAN

Error bit from tap changer for the tap position

B1

BOOLEAN

Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position

B2

BOOLEAN

Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position

B3

BOOLEAN

Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position

B4

BOOLEAN

Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position

B5

BOOLEAN

Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position

B6

BOOLEAN

Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position

B7

BOOLEAN

Bit 7 from tap changer for the tap position

B8

BOOLEAN

Bit 8 from tap changer for the tap position

B9

BOOLEAN

Bit 9 from tap changer for the tap position

Table continues on next page

857
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

B10

BOOLEAN

Bit 10 from tap changer for the tap position

B11

BOOLEAN

Bit 11 from tap changer for the tap position

B12

BOOLEAN

Bit 12 from tap changer for the tap position

B13

BOOLEAN

Bit 13 from tap changer for the tap position

B14

BOOLEAN

Bit 14 from tap changer for the tap position

B15

BOOLEAN

Bit 15 from tap changer for the tap position

B16

BOOLEAN

Bit 16 from tap changer for the tap position

B17

BOOLEAN

Bit 17 from tap changer for the tap position

B18

BOOLEAN

Bit 18 from tap changer for the tap position

B19

BOOLEAN

Bit 19 from tap changer for the tap position

B20

BOOLEAN

Bit 20 from tap changer for the tap position

B21

BOOLEAN

Bit 21 from tap changer for the tap position

B22

BOOLEAN

Bit 22 from tap changer for the tap position

B23

BOOLEAN

Bit 23 from tap changer for the tap position

B24

BOOLEAN

Bit 24 from tap changer for the tap position

B25

BOOLEAN

Bit 25 from tap changer for the tap position

B26

BOOLEAN

Bit 26 from tap changer for the tap position

B27

BOOLEAN

Bit 27 from tap changer for the tap position

B28

BOOLEAN

Bit 28 from tap changer for the tap position

B29

BOOLEAN

Bit 29 from tap changer for the tap position

B30

BOOLEAN

Bit 30 from tap changer for the tap position

B31

BOOLEAN

Bit 31 from tap changer for the tap position

B32

BOOLEAN

Bit 32 from tap changer for the tap position

MA

REAL

mA from tap changer for the tap position

Table 499:
Name

TCLYLTC Output signals

Type

Description

URAISE

BOOLEAN

Raise voltage command to tap changer

ULOWER

BOOLEAN

Lower voltage command to tap changer

HIPOSAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm for tap in highest volt position

LOPOSAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm for tap in lowest volt position

POSERRAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm that indicates a problem with the position

indication

CMDERRAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm for a command without an expected

position change

TCERRAL

BOOLEAN

Alarm for none or illegal tap position change

POSOUT

BOOLEAN

Tap position outside min and max position

CONVERR

BOOLEAN

General tap position conversion error

NEWPOS

BOOLEAN

A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse

HIDIFPOS

BOOLEAN

Tap position has changed more than one position

Table continues on next page

858
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type
BOOLEAN

Last position change was an invalid change

CNT_VAL

INTEGER

Number of operations on tap changer

TCPOS

INTEGER

Integer value corresponding to actual tap position

YLTCOUT

GROUP SIGNAL

Group connection to ATCCIN

Table 500:

VCTRRCV Input signals

Name

Type

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Table 501:

Table 502:
Name

Default
0

Description
Block of function

VCTRRCV Output signals

Name

14.4.8

Description

INVALPOS

Type

Description

VCTR_REC

GROUP SIGNAL

Received data from horizontal communication

COMVALID

BOOLEAN

Communication is valid

DATVALID

BOOLEAN

Data valid

Settings
TR1ATCC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

MeasMode

L1
L2
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq

PosSeq

Selection of measured voltage and

current

TotalBlock

Off
On

Off

Total block of the voltage control function

AutoBlock

Off
On

Off

Block of the automatic mode in voltage

control function

FSDMode

Off
Auto
AutoMan

Off

Fast step down function activation mode

tFSD

1.0 - 100.0

0.1

15.0

Time delay for lower command when

fast step down mode is activated

USet

85.0 - 120.0

%UB

0.1

100.0

Voltage control set voltage, % of rated

voltage

UDeadband

0.2 - 9.0

%UB

0.1

1.2

Outer voltage deadband, % of rated

voltage

UDeadbandInner

0.1 - 9.0

%UB

0.1

0.9

Inner voltage deadband, % of rated

voltage

Table continues on next page

859
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Umax

80 - 180

%UB

105

Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated

voltage

Umin

70 - 120

%UB

80

Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated

voltage

Ublock

50 - 120

%UB

80

Undervoltage block level, % of rated

voltage

t1Use

Constant
Inverse

Constant

Activation of long inverse time delay

t1

3 - 1000

60

Time delay (long) for automatic control

commands

t2Use

Constant
Inverse

Constant

Activation of short inverse time delay

t2

1 - 1000

15

Time delay (short) for automatic control

commands

tMin

3 - 120

Minimum operating time in inverse mode

OperationLDC

Off
On

Off

Operation line voltage drop compensation

OperCapaLDC

Off
On

Off

LDC compensation for capacitive load

Rline

0.00 - 150.00

Ohm

0.01

0.0

Line resistance, primary values, in ohm

Xline

-150.00 - 150.00

Ohm

0.01

0.0

Line reactance, primary values, in ohm

LVAConst1

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated

voltage

LVAConst2

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated

voltage

LVAConst3

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated

voltage

LVAConst4

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated

voltage

VRAuto

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Load voltage auto correction, % of rated

voltage

OperationRA

Off
On

Off

Enable block from reverse action

supervision

tRevAct

30 - 6000

60

Duration time for the reverse action

block signal

RevActLim

0 - 100

%IB1

95

Current limit for reverse action block in

% of I1Base

Iblock

5 - 250

%IB1

150

Overcurrent block level, % of rated current

HourHuntDetect

0 - 30

Op/H

30

Level for number of counted raise/lower

within one hour

DayHuntDetect

0 - 100

Op/D

100

Level for number of counted raise/lower

within 24 hour

tWindowHunt

1 - 120

Min

60

Time window for hunting alarm, minutes

NoOpWindow

3 - 30

Op/W

30

Hunting detection alarm, max operations/

window

P>

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MW

0.01

1000

Alarm level of active power in forward

direction

Table continues on next page

860
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

P<

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MW

0.01

-1000

Alarm level of active power in reverse

direction

Q>

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MVAr

0.01

1000

Alarm level of reactive power in forward

direction

Q<

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MVAr

0.01

-1000

Alarm level of reactive power in reverse

direction

tPower

1 - 6000

10

Time delay for alarms from power

supervision

Table 503:
Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

TR1ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Xr2

0.1 - 200.0

Ohm

0.1

0.5

Transformer reactance in primary ohms

on ATCC side

CmdErrBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto Block

Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for

command error

OCBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto&Man Block

Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for

overcurrent

OVPartBk

Alarm
Auto&Man Block

Auto&Man Block

Alarm or auto&man partial block for

overvoltage

RevActPartBk

Alarm
Auto Block

Alarm

Alarm or auto partial block for reverse

action

TapChgBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto Block

Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for

tap changer error

TapPosBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto Block

Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos

sup

UVBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto Block

Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for

undervoltage

UVPartBk

Alarm
Auto&Man Block

Alarm

Alarm or auto&man partial block for

undervoltage

GlobalBaseSel1

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups, winding 1

GlobalBaseSel2

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups, winding 2

861
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

Table 504:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TR8ATCC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

MeasMode

L1
L2
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq

PosSeq

Selection of measured voltage and

current

Q1

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MVAr

0.01

Size of cap/reactor bank 1 in MVAr, >0

for C and <0 for L

Q2

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MVAr

0.01

Size of cap/reactor bank 2 in MVAr, >0

for C and <0 for L

Q3

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MVAr

0.01

Size of cap/reactor bank 3 in MVAr, >0

for C and <0 for L

TotalBlock

Off
On

Off

Total block of the voltage control function

AutoBlock

Off
On

Off

Block of the automatic mode in voltage

control function

FSDMode

Off
Auto
AutoMan

Off

Fast step down function activation mode

tFSD

1.0 - 100.0

0.1

15.0

Time delay for lower command when

fast step down mode is activated

USet

85.0 - 120.0

%UB

0.1

100.0

Voltage control set voltage, % of rated

voltage

UDeadband

0.2 - 9.0

%UB

0.1

1.2

Outer voltage deadband, % of rated

voltage

UDeadbandInner

0.1 - 9.0

%UB

0.1

0.9

Inner voltage deadband, % of rated

voltage

Umax

80 - 180

%UB

105

Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated

voltage

Umin

70 - 120

%UB

80

Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated

voltage

Ublock

50 - 120

%UB

80

Undervoltage block level, % of rated

voltage

t1Use

Constant
Inverse

Constant

Activation of long inverse time delay

t1

3 - 1000

60

Time delay (long) for automatic control

commands

t2Use

Constant
Inverse

Constant

Activation of short inverse time delay

t2

1 - 1000

15

Time delay (short) for automatic control

commands

tMin

3 - 120

Minimum operating time in inverse mode

OperationLDC

Off
On

Off

Operation line voltage drop compensation

OperCapaLDC

Off
On

Off

LDC compensation for capacitive load

Table continues on next page

862
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Rline

0.00 - 150.00

Unit
Ohm

Step
0.01

Default
0.0

Description
Line resistance, primary values, in ohm

Xline

-150.00 - 150.00

Ohm

0.01

0.0

Line reactance, primary values, in ohm

LVAConst1

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated

voltage

LVAConst2

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated

voltage

LVAConst3

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated

voltage

LVAConst4

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated

voltage

VRAuto

-20.0 - 20.0

%UB

0.1

0.0

Load voltage auto correction, % of rated

voltage

OperationRA

Off
On

Off

Enable block from reverse action

supervision

tRevAct

30 - 6000

60

Duration time for the reverse action

block signal

RevActLim

0 - 100

%IB1

95

Current limit for reverse action block in

% of I1Base

Iblock

5 - 250

%IB1

150

Overcurrent block level, % of rated current

HourHuntDetect

0 - 30

Op/H

30

Level for number of counted raise/lower

within one hour

DayHuntDetect

0 - 100

Op/D

100

Level for number of counted raise/lower

within 24 hour

tWindowHunt

1 - 120

Min

60

Time window for hunting alarm, minutes

NoOpWindow

3 - 30

Op/W

30

Hunting detection alarm, max operations/

window

P>

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MW

0.01

1000

Alarm level of active power in forward

direction

P<

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MW

0.01

-1000

Alarm level of active power in reverse

direction

Q>

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MVAr

0.01

1000

Alarm level of reactive power in forward

direction

Q<

-9999.99 - 9999.99

MVAr

0.01

-1000

Alarm level of reactive power in reverse

direction

tPower

1 - 6000

10

Time delay for alarms from power

supervision

OperationPAR

Off
CC
MF

Off

Parallel operation, Off/CirculatingCurrent/

MasterFollower

OperCCBlock

Off
On

On

Enable block from circulating current

supervision

CircCurrLimit

0.0 - 20000.0

%IB2

0.1

100.0

Block level for circulating current

tCircCurr

0 - 1000

30

Time delay for block from circulating

current

Comp

0 - 2000

100

Compensation parameter in % for

Circulating Current

OperSimTap

Off
On

Off

Simultaneous tapping prohibited

Table continues on next page

863
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OperUsetPar

Off
On

Off

Use common voltage set point for

parallel operation

OperHoming

Off
On

Off

Activate homing function

VTmismatch

0.5 - 10.0

%UB

0.1

10.0

Alarm level for VT supervision, % of

rated voltage

tVTmismatch

1 - 600

10

Time delay for VT supervision alarm

T1RXOP

Off
On

Off

Receive block operation from parallel

transformer1

T2RXOP

Off
On

Off

Receive block operation from parallel

transformer2

T3RXOP

Off
On

Off

Receive block operation from parallel

transformer3

T4RXOP

Off
On

Off

Receive block operation from parallel

transformer4

T5RXOP

Off
On

Off

Receive block operation from parallel

transformer5

T6RXOP

Off
On

Off

Receive block operation from parallel

transformer6

T7RXOP

Off
On

Off

Receive block operation from parallel

transformer7

T8RXOP

Off
On

Off

Receive block operation from parallel

transformer8

TapPosOffs

-5 - 5

Tap position offset in relation to the master

MFPosDiffLim

1 - 20

Limit for tap pos difference from master

tMFPosDiff

0 - 6000

60

Time for tap pos difference from master

Table 505:
Name

TR8ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrfId

T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8

T1

Identity of transformer

Xr2

0.1 - 200.0

Ohm

0.1

0.5

Transformer reactance in primary ohms

on ATCC side

tAutoMSF

0 - 60

10

Time delay for command for auto follower

OperationAdapt

Off
On

Off

Enable adapt mode

MFMode

Follow Cmd
Follow Tap

Follow Cmd

Select follow tap or follow command

CircCurrBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Alarm

Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for

high circ current

Table continues on next page

864
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CmdErrBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto Block

Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for

command error

OCBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto&Man Block

Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for

overcurrent

MFPosDiffBk

Alarm
Auto Block

Auto Block

Alarm or auto block for tap position

difference in MF

OVPartBk

Alarm
Auto&Man Block

Auto&Man Block

Alarm or auto&man partial block for

overvoltage

RevActPartBk

Alarm
Auto Block

Alarm

Alarm or auto partial block for reverse

action

TapChgBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto Block

Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for

tap changer error

TapPosBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto Block

Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos

sup

UVBk

Alarm
Auto Block
Auto&Man Block

Auto Block

Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for

undervoltage

UVPartBk

Alarm
Auto&Man Block

Alarm

Alarm or auto&man partial block for

undervoltage

GlobalBaseSel1

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups, winding 1

GlobalBaseSel2

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups, winding 2

Table 506:
Name

TCMYLTC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

tTCTimeout

1 - 120

Tap changer constant time-out

tPulseDur

0.5 - 10.0

0.1

1.5

Raise/lower command output pulse

duration

Table 507:
Name

TCMYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

LowVoltTap

1 - 63

Tap position for lowest voltage

HighVoltTap

1 - 63

33

Tap position for highest voltage

mALow

0.000 - 25.000

mA

0.001

4.000

mA for lowest voltage tap position

mAHigh

0.000 - 25.000

mA

0.001

20.000

mA for highest voltage tap position

CodeType

BIN
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA

BIN

Type of code conversion

Table continues on next page

865
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

UseParity

Off
On

Off

Enable parity check

tStable

1 - 60

Time after position change before the

value is accepted

CLFactor

1.0 - 3.0

0.1

2.0

Adjustable factor for contact life function

InitCLCounter

0 - 9999999

250000

CL counter start value

EnabTapCmd

Off
On

On

Enable commands to tap changer

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

Table 508:
Name

TCLYLTC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

tTCTimeout

1 - 120

Tap changer constant time-out

tPulseDur

0.5 - 10.0

0.1

1.5

Raise/lower command output pulse

duration

Table 509:
Name

TCLYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

LowVoltTap

1 - 63

Tap position for lowest voltage

HighVoltTap

1 - 63

33

Tap position for highest voltage

mALow

0.000 - 25.000

mA

0.001

4.000

mA for lowest voltage tap position

mAHigh

0.000 - 25.000

mA

0.001

20.000

mA for highest voltage tap position

CodeType

BIN
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA

BIN

Type of code conversion

UseParity

Off
On

Off

Enable parity check

tStable

1 - 60

Time after position change before the

value is accepted

CLFactor

1.0 - 3.0

0.1

2.0

Adjustable factor for contact life function

InitCLCounter

0 - 9999999

250000

CL counter start value

EnabTapCmd

Off
On

On

Enable commands to tap changer

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

866
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.4.9

Monitored data
Table 510:
Name

TR1ATCC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

RAISE

BOOLEAN

Raise voltage order to

tapchanger

LOWER

BOOLEAN

Lower voltage order to

tapchanger

BUSVOLT

REAL

kV

The average of the

measured busbar
voltage (service value)

VOLTDEV

REAL

Voltage deviation
compared to dead band
(%)

TRLDCURR

REAL

Amplitude of own load

current

USETOUT

REAL

kV

Voltage setpoint used in

single mode (service
value)

ULOAD

REAL

kV

Calculated compensated
voltage (service value)

REAL

MW

Calculated active power

(service value)

REAL

MVAr

Calculated reactive
power (service value)

IPRIM

REAL

Max of 3 phase currents

(service value)

Table 511:
Name

TR8ATCC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

RAISE

BOOLEAN

Raise voltage order to

tapchanger

LOWER

BOOLEAN

Lower voltage order to

tapchanger

BUSVOLT

REAL

kV

The average of the

measured busbar
voltage (service value)

VOLTDEV

REAL

Voltage deviation
compared to dead band
(%)

TRLDCURR

REAL

Amplitude of own load

current

USETOUT

REAL

kV

Voltage setpoint used in

single mode (service
value)

ULOAD

REAL

kV

Calculated compensated
voltage (service value)

REAL

MW

Calculated active power

(service value)

Table continues on next page

867
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Unit

Description

REAL

MVAr

Calculated reactive
power (service value)

IPRIM

REAL

Max of 3 phase currents

(service value)

CCAVolt

REAL

kV

Circulating Current
Adjusted Voltage

USETPAR

REAL

kV

Average voltage setpoint

used in parallel mode

ICIRCUL

REAL

Circulating current

Table 512:

TCMYLTC Monitored data

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CNT_VAL

INTEGER

Number of operations on
tap changer

CLCNT_VAL

REAL

Remaining number of
operations at rated load

TCPOS

INTEGER

Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

Table 513:

TCLYLTC Monitored data

Name

14.4.10

Values (Range)

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CNT_VAL

INTEGER

Number of operations on
tap changer

CLCNT_VAL

REAL

Remaining number of
operations at rated load

TCPOS

INTEGER

Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

Operation principle
The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks. Both are logical
nodes in IEC 61850-8-1.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer

TR1ATCC for single control

TR8ATCC for parallel control

Tap changer control and supervision

TCMYLTC, 6 binary inputs

TCLYLTC, 32 binary inputs

TR1ATCCand TR8ATCC are designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the

LV-side side of a power transformer within given limits around a set target voltage.
868
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A raise or lower command is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given
period of time, deviates from the set target value by more than the preset deadband
value that is, degree of insensitivity. A time-delay (inverse or definite time) is set to
avoid unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the target
value, and in order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the
system.
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC are an interface between TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC
and the transformer load tap changer. More specifically this means that it receives
information from TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and based on this it gives commandpulses to a power transformer motor driven on-load tap changer and also receives
information from the load tap changer regarding tap position, progress of given
commands, and so on.
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC also serve the purpose of giving information about tap
position to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF.

14.4.11

Technical data
Table 514:

TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Transformer reactance

(0.1200.0), primary

Time delay for lower

command when fast step
down mode is activated

(1.0100.0) s

Voltage control set voltage

(85.0120.0)% of UBase

0.25 % of Ur

Outer voltage deadband

(0.29.0)% of UBase

Inner voltage deadband

(0.19.0)% of UBase

Upper limit of busbar voltage

(80180)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Lower limit of busbar voltage

(70120)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Undervoltage block level

(50120)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Time delay (long) for

automatic control commands

(31000) s

0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater

Time delay (short) for

automatic control commands

(11000) s

0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater

Minimum operating time in

inverse mode

(3120) s

0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater

Line resistance

(0.00150.00), primary

Line reactance

(-150.00150.00), primary

Load voltage adjustment

constants

(-20.020.0)% of UBase

Load voltage auto correction

(-20.020.0)% of UBase

Duration time for the reverse

action block signal

(306000) s

0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater

Current limit for reverse

action block

(0100)% of I1Base

Table continues on next page

869
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Overcurrent block level

(5250)% of I1Base

1.0% of Ir at IIr
1.0% of I at I>Ir

Level for number of counted

raise/lower within one hour

(030) operations/hour

Level for number of counted

raise/lower within 24 hours

(0100) operations/day

Time window for hunting

alarm

(1120) minutes

Hunting detection alarm,

max operations/window

(330) operations/window

Alarm level of active power

in forward and reverse
direction at (10-200)% of Sr
and (85-120)% of UBase

(-9999.999999.99) MW

1.0% of Sr

Alarm level of reactive

power in forward and
reverse direction at
(10-200)% of Sr and
(85-120)% of UBase

(-9999.999999.99) MVAr

1.0% of Sr

Time delay for alarms from

power supervision

(16000) s

0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater

Tap position for lowest and

highest voltage

(163)

mA for lowest and highest

voltage tap position

(0.00025.000) mA

Type of code conversion

BIN, BCD, GRAY, SINGLE, mA

Time after position change

before the value is accepted

(160) s

0.2% or 200 ms
whichever is greater

Tap changer constant timeout

(1120) s

0.2% or 200 ms
whichever is greater

Raise/lower command
output pulse duration

(0.510.0) s

0.2% or 200 ms
whichever is greater

14.5

Logic rotating switch for function selection and

LHMI presentation SLGAPC

14.5.1

Identification
Function description
Logic rotating switch for function
selection and LHMI presentation

IEC 61850
identification
SLGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

870
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.5.2

Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC
(or the selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch
functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch.
Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have
different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however
sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase
portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all these problems.

14.5.3

Function block
SLGAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
UP
DOWN

^P01
^P02
^P03
^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN
IEC14000005-1-en.vsd

IEC14000005 V1 EN

Figure 431:

14.5.4

SLGAPC function block

Signals
Table 515:
Name

SLGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

UP

BOOLEAN

Binary "UP" command

DOWN

BOOLEAN

Binary "DOWN" command

871
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 516:
Name

SLGAPC Output signals

Type

Description

P01

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 1

P02

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 2

P03

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 3

P04

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 4

P05

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 5

P06

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 6

P07

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 7

P08

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 8

P09

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 9

P10

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 10

P11

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 11

P12

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 12

P13

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 13

P14

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 14

P15

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 15

P16

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 16

P17

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 17

P18

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 18

P19

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 19

P20

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 20

P21

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 21

P22

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 22

P23

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 23

P24

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 24

P25

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 25

P26

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 26

P27

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 27

P28

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 28

P29

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 29

P30

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 30

P31

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 31

P32

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 32

SWPOSN

INTEGER

Switch position (integer)

872
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.5.5
Table 517:
Name

Settings
SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

NrPos

2 - 32

32

Number of positions in the switch

OutType

Pulsed
Steady

Steady

Output type, steady or pulse

tPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Operate pulse duration, in [s]

tDelay

0.000 - 60000.000

0.010

0.000

Time delay on the output, in [s]

StopAtExtremes

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Stop when min or max position is reached

14.5.6

Monitored data
Table 518:
Name
SWPOSN

14.5.7

SLGAPC Monitored data

Type
INTEGER

Values (Range)
-

Unit
-

Description
Switch position (integer)

Operation principle
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on
the UP input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated
output, in ascending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and
one activates the UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a signal is
received on the DOWN input, the function will activate the output next to the
present activated output, in descending order (for example if the present activated
output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be
activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or
pulsed. In case of steady signals, the output will be active till the time it receives
next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the settings one can have
a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the
output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application
Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the
desired position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either
locally or remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the
function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present
position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place
(local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed
the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected.
SLGAPC function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual

873
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user.
These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names
instead of a number.

14.5.7.1

Graphical display
There are two possibilities for SLGAPC

if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions,
but only the first three letters of the name will be used.

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it
when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the
control, the following sequence of commands will ensure:

874
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

From the graphical display:

Change to the "Switches" page

of the SLD by left-right arrows.
Select switch by up-down
arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DAL

Control
Single Line Diagram
Commands

Control
Measurements
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language

../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM

Select switch. Press the

I or O key. A dialog box
appears.

Pilot setup
OFF

P: Disc

The pos will not be modified

(outputs will not be activated) until
you press the E-button for O.K.

OK

N: Disc Fe
Cancel

../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
IEC06000421-2-en.vsd
IEC06000421 V2 EN

Figure 432:
Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.

14.6

Selector mini switch VSGAPC

14.6.1

Identification
Function description
Selector mini switch

IEC 61850
identification
VSGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

875
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.6.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used
for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line
diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.

14.6.3

Function block
VSGAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2

BLOCKED
POSITION
POS1
POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
IEC14000066-1-en.vsd

IEC14000066 V1 EN

Figure 433:

14.6.4

VSGAPC function block

Signals
Table 519:
Name

VSGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

IPOS1

BOOLEAN

Position 1 indicating input

IPOS2

BOOLEAN

Position 2 indicating input

Table 520:
Name

VSGAPC Output signals

Type

Description

BLOCKED

BOOLEAN

The function is active but the functionality is

blocked

POSITION

INTEGER

Position indication, integer

POS1

BOOLEAN

Position 1 indication, logical signal

POS2

BOOLEAN

Position 2 indication, logical signal

CMDPOS12

BOOLEAN

Execute command from position 1 to position 2

CMDPOS21

BOOLEAN

Execute command from position 2 to position 1

876
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.6.5
Table 521:
Name

Settings
VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

CtlModel

Dir Norm
SBO Enh

Dir Norm

Specifies the type for control model

according to IEC 61850

Mode

Steady
Pulsed

Pulsed

Operation mode

tSelect

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

30.000

Max time between select and execute

signals

tPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Command pulse lenght

14.6.6

Operation principle
Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the
same way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through
the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the
POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and
distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is
associated with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be
displayed on the screen. A symbol is created and configured in
GDE tool in PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote).
An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit
representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.

877
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IPOS1

IPOS2

Name of displayed string Default string value

PosUndefined

P00

Position1

P01

Position2

P10

PosBadState

P11

14.7

Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC

14.7.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Generic communication function for

Double Point indication

14.7.2

IEC 60617
identification

DPGAPC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function
block is used to send double indications to other systems, equipment or functions in
the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is
especially used in the interlocking station-wide logics.

14.7.3

Function block

IEC13000081 V1 EN

Figure 434:

14.7.4

DPGAPC function block

Signals
Table 522:
Name

DPGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

OPEN

BOOLEAN

Open indication

CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Close indication

VALID

BOOLEAN

Valid indication

878
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 523:

DPGAPC Output signals

Name
POSITION

14.7.5

Type
INTEGER

Description
Double point indication

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.7.6

Operation principle
When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1
to the systems, equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these
signals. To be able to get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions,
one must use other tools, described in the Engineering manual and define which
function block in which systems, equipment or functions should receive this
information.

14.8

Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC

14.8.1

Identification
Function description
Single point generic control 8 signals

14.8.2

IEC 61850
identification
SPC8GAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a
collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from
REMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need
extensive command receiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way,
simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by
other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands
can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.

879
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.8.3

Function block
SPC8GAPC
BLOCK
PSTO

^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
IEC07000143-3-en.vsd

IEC07000143 V3 EN

Figure 435:

14.8.4

SPC8GAPC function block

Signals
Table 524:

SPC8GAPC Input signals

Name

Type

Blocks the function operation

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

SPC8GAPC Output signals

Name

Table 526:
Name

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 525:

14.8.5

Default

BLOCK

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Command output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Command output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Command output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Command output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Command output 5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Command output 6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Command output 7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Command output 8

Settings
SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

PulseMode1

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for

output 1

tPulse1

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Pulse time output 1

PulseMode2

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for

output 2

tPulse2

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Pulse time output 2

Table continues on next page

880
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

PulseMode3

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for

output 3

tPulse3

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Pulse time output 3

PulseMode4

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for

output 4

tPulse4

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Pulse time output 4

PulseMode5

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for

output 5

tPulse5

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Pulse time output 5

PulseMode6

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for

output 6

tPulse6

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Pulse time output 6

PulseMode7

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for

output 7

tPulse7

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Pulse time output 7

PulseMode8

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for

output 8

tPulse8

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Pulse time output 8

14.8.6

Operation principle
The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of
the eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place
selected. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will
determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched
(steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a command is
sent, no output will be activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control
functions. Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or
ALL operator places only, REMOTE operator place is used in
SPC8GAPC function.

14.9

AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS

14.9.1

Identification
Function description
AutomationBits, command function for
DNP3

IEC 61850
identification
AUTOBITS

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
881

Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.9.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get
into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The
AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

14.9.3

Function block
AUTOBITS
BLOCK
PSTO

^CMDBIT1
^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
IEC09000925-1-en.vsd

IEC09000925 V1 EN

Figure 436:

14.9.4

AUTOBITS function block

Signals
Table 527:
Name

AUTOBITS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

882
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 528:

AUTOBITS Output signals

Name

14.9.5
Table 529:
Name
Operation

Type

Description

CMDBIT1

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 1

CMDBIT2

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 2

CMDBIT3

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 3

CMDBIT4

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 4

CMDBIT5

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 5

CMDBIT6

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 6

CMDBIT7

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 7

CMDBIT8

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 8

CMDBIT9

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 9

CMDBIT10

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 10

CMDBIT11

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 11

CMDBIT12

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 12

CMDBIT13

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 13

CMDBIT14

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 14

CMDBIT15

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 15

CMDBIT16

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 16

CMDBIT17

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 17

CMDBIT18

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 18

CMDBIT19

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 19

CMDBIT20

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 20

CMDBIT21

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 21

CMDBIT22

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 22

CMDBIT23

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 23

CMDBIT24

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 24

CMDBIT25

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 25

CMDBIT26

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 26

CMDBIT27

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 27

CMDBIT28

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 28

CMDBIT29

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 29

CMDBIT30

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 30

CMDBIT31

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 31

CMDBIT32

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 32

Settings
AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off / On

883
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

Table 530:
Name
Operation

Table 531:
Name
BaudRate

Table 532:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation mode Off / On

CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
300 Bd
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
115200 Bd

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
9600 Bd

Description
Baud-rate for serial port

CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DLinkConfirm

Never
Sometimes
Always

Never

Data-link confirm

tDLinkTimeout

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Data-link confirm timeout in s

DLinkRetries

0 - 255

Data-link maximum retries

tRxToTxMinDel

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Rx to Tx minimum delay in s

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment

size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment

size

StopBits

1-2

Stop bits

Parity

No
Even
Odd

Even

Parity

tRTSWarmUp

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

RTS warm-up in s

tRTSWarmDown

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

RTS warm-down in s

tBackOffDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.050

RS485 back-off delay in s

tMaxRndDelBkOf

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

RS485 maximum back-off random delay

in s

884
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 533:
Name

CH1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only

Off

Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort

1 - 65535

20000

TCP/IP listen port

UDPPortAccData

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master

UDPPortInitNUL

1 - 65535

20000

UDP portfor initial NULL response

UDPPortCliMast

0 - 65535

UDP port to remote client/master

Table 534:
Name

CH1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment

size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment

size

Table 535:
Name

CH2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only

Off

Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort

1 - 65535

20000

TCP/IP listen port

UDPPortAccData

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master

UDPPortInitNUL

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port for initial NULL response

UDPPortCliMast

0 - 65535

UDP port to remote client/master

Table 536:
Name

CH2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment

size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment

size

885
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

Table 537:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

CH3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only

Off

Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort

1 - 65535

20000

TCP/IP listen port

UDPPortAccData

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master

UDPPortInitNUL

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port for initial NULL response

UDPPortCliMast

0 - 65535

UDP port to remote client/master

Table 538:
Name

CH3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment

size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment

size

Table 539:
Name

CH4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only

Off

Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort

1 - 65535

20000

TCP/IP listen port

UDPPortAccData

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master

UDPPortInitNUL

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port for initial NULL response

UDPPortCliMast

0 - 65535

UDP port to remote client/master

Table 540:
Name

CH4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment

size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment

size

Table 541:
Name

MSTSER Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

ChToAssociate

RS485
Optical

RS485

Channel to associate to

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

Table continues on next page

886
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj3DefVar

1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag

1:DIWithoutFlag

Object 3, default variation

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 542:
Name

MSTSER Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

Table continues on next page

887
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

UREvClassMask

Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Off

Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay

in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event

buffer timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

ExtTimeFormat

LocalTime
UTC

UTC

External time format

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

Yes

Allow DNP to set time in IED

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after

timeout

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

888
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 543:
Name

MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

MasterIP-Addr

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Master IP-address

MasterIPNetMsk

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.255

Master IP net mask

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj3DefVar

1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag

1:DIWithoutFlag

Object 3, default variation

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

889
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

Table 544:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

UREvClassMask

Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Off

Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay

in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event

buffer timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

ExtTimeFormat

LocalTime
UTC

UTC

External time format

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

No

Allow DNP to set time in IED

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after

timeout

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

Table continues on next page

890
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Unit

Step

Default

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

tBrokenConTout

0 - 3600

Broken connection timeout

tKeepAliveT

0 - 3600

10

Keep-Alive timer

Table 545:
Name

Values (Range)

Description

MST2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

MasterIP-Addr

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Master IP-address

MasterIPNetMsk

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.255

Master IP net mask

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj3DefVar

1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag

1:DIWithoutFlag

Object 3, default variation

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Table continues on next page

891
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 546:
Name

MST2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

UREvClassMask

Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Off

Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay

in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

Table continues on next page

892
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Unit

Step

Default

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event

buffer timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

ExtTimeFormat

LocalTime
UTC

UTC

External time format

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

No

Allow DNP to set time in IED

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after

timeout

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

tBrokenConTout

0 - 3600

Broken connection timeout

tKeepAliveT

0 - 3600

10

Keep-Alive timer

Table 547:
Name

Values (Range)

Description

MST3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

MasterIP-Addr

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Master IP-address

MasterIPNetMsk

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.255

Master IP net mask

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj3DefVar

1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag

1:DIWithoutFlag

Object 3, default variation

Table continues on next page

893
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 548:
Name

MST3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

UREvClassMask

Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Off

Unsolicited response, event class mask

Table continues on next page

894
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay

in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event

buffer timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

ExtTimeFormat

LocalTime
UTC

UTC

External time format

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

No

Allow DNP to set time in IED

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after

timeout

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

tBrokenConTout

0 - 3600

Broken connection timeout

tKeepAliveT

0 - 3600

10

Keep-Alive timer

Table 549:
Name

MST4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

MasterIP-Addr

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Master IP-address

Table continues on next page

895
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MasterIPNetMsk

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.255

Master IP net mask

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj3DefVar

1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag

1:DIWithoutFlag

Object 3, default variation

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 550:
Name

MST4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

Table continues on next page

896
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

UREvClassMask

Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Off

Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay

in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event

buffer timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event

buffer timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

ExtTimeFormat

LocalTime
UTC

UTC

External time format

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

No

Allow DNP to set time in IED

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after

timeout

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

tBrokenConTout

0 - 3600

Broken connection timeout

tKeepAliveT

0 - 3600

10

Keep-Alive timer

897
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.9.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Operation principle
AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can
be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object
12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and
off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On,
latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be
regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5
would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in
the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation
of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts
like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon
deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the
operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If
PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

14.10

Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD

14.10.1

Identification
Function description
Single command, 16 signals

14.10.2

IEC 61850
identification
SINGLECMD

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

898
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

14.10.3

Function block
SINGLECMD
BLOCK

^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16
IEC05000698-2-en.vsd

IEC05000698 V3 EN

Figure 437:

14.10.4

SINGLECMD function block

Signals
Table 551:
Name
BLOCK

Table 552:
Name

SINGLECMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block single command function

SINGLECMD Output signals

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Single command output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Single command output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Single command output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Single command output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Single command output 5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Single command output 6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Single command output 7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Single command output 8

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Single command output 9

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Single command output 10

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Single command output 11

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Single command output 12

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Single command output 13

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Single command output 14

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Single command output 15

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Single command output 16

899
Technical Manual

Section 14
Control
14.10.5
Table 553:
Name
Operation

14.10.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
Steady
Pulsed

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off / On

Operation principle
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals.
The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of
13 characters in PCM600.
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole
function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode,
SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power
interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the
updating of the outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in
functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

900
Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 15

Scheme communication

15.1

Scheme communication logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECPSCH

15.1.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Scheme communication logic for

residual overcurrent protection

15.1.2

ECPSCH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85

Functionality
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional
residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses
communication channels.
In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be
transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time
of the protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short
operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.
The communication logic module for directional residual current protection
enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching, and unblocking
schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed
and current reversal, included in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for
residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH function.

15.1.3

Function block
ECPSCH
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKCS
CSBLK
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG

TRIP
CS
CRL
LCG

IEC06000288-2-en.vsd
IEC06000288 V2 EN

Figure 438:

ECPSCH function block

901
Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication
15.1.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 554:

ECPSCH Input signals

Name

Type
BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic

BLKCS

BOOLEAN

Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking

schemes

CSBLK

BOOLEAN

Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier

Send

CACC

BOOLEAN

Signal to be used for tripping by Communication

Scheme

CSOR

BOOLEAN

Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for

Carrier Send

CSUR

BOOLEAN

Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for

Carrier Send

CR

BOOLEAN

Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic

CRG

BOOLEAN

Carrier guard signal received

ECPSCH Output signals

Name

Table 556:
Name

Description

BLOCK

Table 555:

15.1.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal by communication scheme logic

CS

BOOLEAN

Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic

CRL

BOOLEAN

Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme

Logic

LCG

BOOLEAN

loss of carrier guard signal

Settings
ECPSCH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

SchemeType

Off
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking

Permissive UR

Scheme type, Mode of Operation

tCoord

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.035

Communication scheme coordination

time

tSendMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

902
Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 557:
Name

ECPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Unblock

Off
NoRestart
Restart

Off

Operation mode of unblocking logic

tSecurity

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.035

Security timer for loss of carrier guard

detection

15.1.6

Operation principle
The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC is configured to
give input information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the ECPSCH
logic:

Input signal CACC is used for tripping of the communication scheme,

normally the start signal of a forward overreaching step of STFW.
Input signal CSBLK is used for sending block signal in the blocking
communication scheme, normally the start signal of a reverse overreaching
step of STRV.
Input signal CSUR is used for sending permissive signal in the underreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
underreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underreaching step.
Input signal CSOR is used for sending permissive signal in the overreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
overreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreaching step.

In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to

the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.

15.1.6.1

Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional
element detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional
element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received
from the opposite line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the
communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.
One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency)
is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for
zero and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will
occur due to the fault.
Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is
no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to
current reversals because the received signal is maintained long enough to avoid
unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end
903

Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking
signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally
longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme.
If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received
signal) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

IEC05000448 V1 EN

Figure 439:

15.1.6.2

Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme

Permissive under/overreaching scheme

In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth-fault measuring element sends
a permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward
direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive
signal before activating a trip signal. Independent channels must be available for
the communication in each direction.
An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring IED works
in the permissive overreaching mode, common channels can be used in single line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may
detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.
Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in
the distance or earth-fault protection.
In case of an internal earth-fault, the forward directed measuring element operates
and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (sent signal).

904
Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates
and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (received signal).
The permissive scheme can be of either underreaching or overreaching type. In the
underreaching alternative, an underreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSUR.
In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSOR. Also the underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.

BLOCK

CRL

AND

CR

25 ms
0 - 60 s
AND

CACC

AND

t
tCoord

TRIP

t
50 ms
t

AND
BLKCS
AND
Overreach
CSOR

AND

CSUR

OR

CS

50 ms
OR

en05000280_3_en.vsd
IEC05000280 V3 EN

15.1.6.3

Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome
by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally
create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 440. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
905

Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.
CR
1

tSecurity
t

CRG
200 ms
t

CRL

>1
150 ms

AND

OR

AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN

Figure 440:

Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off:

The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart:

Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored

If CRG disappears, a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)

Restart

Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored

It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signaling

15.1.7

Technical data
Table 558:

ECPSCH technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Scheme type

Permissive Underreaching
Permissive Overreaching
Blocking

Communication scheme
coordination time

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 15 ms whichever
is greater

906
Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

15.2

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH

15.2.1

Identification
Function description
Current reversal and weak-end infeed
logic for residual overcurrent protection

15.2.2

IEC 61850
identification
ECRWPSCH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85

Functionality
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH.
To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth
fault protection function can be supported with logic that uses tele protection
channels.
The 670 series IEDs have for this reason available additions to scheme
communication logic.
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching
permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current
reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on
the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection
between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal
logic (transient blocking logic) can be used.
Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can
basically operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault.
The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this
IED. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive and/
or zero-sequence source impedance behind this IED. To overcome these
conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is
limited to 200 ms to avoid channel lockup.

907
Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication
15.2.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
ECRWPSCH
U3P*
BLOCK
IRVBLK
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

IRVL
TRWEI
ECHO

IEC06000289-3-en.vsd
IEC06000289 V3 EN

Figure 441:

15.2.4

ECRWPSCH function block

Signals
Table 559:
Name

ECRWPSCH Input signals

Type

Default

Description

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IRVBLK

BOOLEAN

Block of current reversal function

IRV

BOOLEAN

Activation of current reversal logic

WEIBLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI Logic

WEIBLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic due to operation of other

protections

VTSZ

BOOLEAN

Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure

function

CBOPEN

BOOLEAN

Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker

CRL

BOOLEAN

POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 560:
Name

ECRWPSCH Output signals

Type

Description

IRVL

BOOLEAN

Operation of current reversal logic

TRWEI

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from weak end infeed logic

ECHO

BOOLEAN

Permissive signal transmitted as echo signal or in

case of weak end infeed

908
Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

15.2.5
Table 561:
Name

Settings
ECRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CurrRev

Off
On

Off

Operating mode of Current Reversal

Logic

tPickUpRev

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Pickup time for current reversal logic

tDelayRev

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.060

Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and

local trip

WEI

Off
Echo
Echo & Trip

Off

Operating mode of WEI logic

tPickUpWEI

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Coordination time for the WEI logic

3U0>

5 - 70

%UB

25

Neutral voltage setting for fault

conditions measurement

Table 562:
Name
GlobalBaseSel

ECRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12

Unit
-

Step

Default

15.2.6

Operation principle

15.2.6.1

Directional comparison logic function

Description
Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and
permissive overreaching schemes.
The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current
reversal and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the
blocking overreaching scheme.
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth fault
protection module to get backup tripping in case the communication equipment
malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.
Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK
input of the directional comparison module.

15.2.6.2

Fault current reversal logic

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to the
input signal IRV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the
reverse direction element is activated the output signal IRVL is activated which is
shown in Figure 442. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without
909

Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tripping. The output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input on the
permissive overreaching scheme.
When the fault current is reversed on the healthy line, IRV is deactivated and
IRVBLK is activated. The tDelayRev timer delays the reset of the output signal.
The signal blocks operation of the overreach permissive scheme for residual
current and thus prevents unwanted operation caused by fault current reversal.
BLOCK
IRVBLK
IRV

tPickUpRev

10 ms

tPickUpRev

AND

tDelayRev
t

IRVL

CurrRev = On

IEC09000031-4-en.vsd
IEC09000031 V4 EN

Figure 442:

15.2.6.3

Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo)
or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). The corresponding logic
diagrams are depicted in Figure 443 and Figure 444.
The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction
element, connected to WEIBLK2 via an OR-gate. If neither the forward nor the
reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the weakend infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal as shown in Figure 443
and Figure 444. The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive
signal when CBOPEN is high (local breaker opens) prior to faults appeared at the
end of line.
If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the
last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the
earth fault function that is in operation.

910
Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BLOCK

CR

AND

VTSZ
OR
tPickUpWEI

WEIBLK1

AND

AND

OR

50 ms
t

200 ms
t

200 ms
t

CRL

ECHO

AND

WEIBLK2
AND

CBOPEN

1500 ms

OR

WEI = Echo

IEC09000032-5-en.vsd
IEC09000032 V5 EN

Figure 443:

Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo

With the WEI= Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to the
diagram above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the
echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate
value for 3U0>.
The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
earth fault function which is in operation.
BLOCK
VTSZ
OR
tPickUpWEI
t

WEIBLK1

AND

AND

OR

50 ms
t

200 ms
t

200 ms
t

AND

ECHO

CRL

AND

WEIBLK2

1500 ms
t

OR

CBOPEN
AND

ST3U0
3U0>

a>b

AND

15 ms
t

TRWEI

WEI = Echo&Trip

IEC09000020-5-en.vsd
IEC09000020 V5 EN

Figure 444:

Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo & Trip

911
Technical Manual

Section 15
Scheme communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of
200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo
signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing
action if the weak-end echo is selected for both line ends.

15.2.7

Technical data
Table 563:

ECRWPSCH technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate mode of WEI logic

Off
Echo
Echo & Trip

Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI trip

(5-70)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur

Operate time for current reversal

logic

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 30 ms whichever
is greater

Delay time for current reversal

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 30 ms whichever
is greater

Coordination time for weak-end

infeed logic

(0.00060.000) s

0.2% or 30 ms whichever
is greater

912
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 16

Logic

16.1

Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC

16.1.1

Identification
Function description
Tripping logic common 3-phase output

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SMPPTRC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
94

I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN

16.1.2

Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker
involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to
ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for
correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving
faults and breaker lock-out.

16.1.3

Function block
SMPPTRC
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT
TRL1
TRIN
TRL2
TRINL1
TRL3
TRINL2
TR1P
TRINL3
TR2P
PSL1
TR3P
PSL2
CLLKOUT
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
IEC05000707-2-en.vsd
IEC05000707 V2 EN

Figure 445:

SMPPTRC function block

913
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic
16.1.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 564:
Name

SMPPTRC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKLKOUT

BOOLEAN

Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)

TRIN

BOOLEAN

Trip all phases

TRINL1

BOOLEAN

Trip phase 1

TRINL2

BOOLEAN

Trip phase 2

TRINL3

BOOLEAN

Trip phase 3

PSL1

BOOLEAN

Functional input for phase selection in phase L1

PSL2

BOOLEAN

Functional input for phase selection in phase L2

PSL3

BOOLEAN

Functional input for phase selection in phase L3

1PTRZ

BOOLEAN

Zone Trip with a separate phase selection

1PTREF

BOOLEAN

Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase

selection

P3PTR

BOOLEAN

Prepare all tripping to be three-phase

SETLKOUT

BOOLEAN

Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function

RSTLKOUT

BOOLEAN

Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout

function

Table 565:
Name

SMPPTRC Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip output signal

TRL1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L1

TRL2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L2

TRL3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase L3

TR1P

BOOLEAN

Tripping single-pole

TR2P

BOOLEAN

Tripping two-pole

TR3P

BOOLEAN

Tripping three-pole

CLLKOUT

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

914
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.1.5
Table 566:
Name

Settings
SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

Program

3 phase
1ph/3ph
1ph/2ph/3ph

1ph/3ph

Three ph; single or three ph; single, two

or three ph trip

tTripMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Minimum duration of trip output signal

tWaitForPHS

0.020 - 0.500

0.001

0.050

Secures 3-pole trip when phase

selection failed

Table 567:
Name

SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TripLockout

Off
On

Off

On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip

latch, Off: only outp

AutoLock

Off
On

Off

On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and

trip, Off: only inp

16.1.6

Operation principle
The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to
secure the breaker opening.
For three-phase tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC has a single
input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions
within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs
binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or
more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED
requiring this signal.

BLOCK
tTripMin

TRIN

AND

OR

TRIP

Operation Mode = On
Program = 3Ph

en05000789.vsd
IEC05000789 V1 EN

Figure 446:

Simplified logic diagram for three phase trip

915
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

SMPPTRC function for single-phase and two-phase tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter
inputs enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions which do not
have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single
trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase
segregated trip inputs of the expanded SMPPTRC function. Examples of such
protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded
SMPPTRC function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping
(for example, carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication
logic), and one for earth fault tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual
overcurrent protection).
Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip
command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase
selection signals.
The expanded SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3
(besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the
IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these
signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single-phase, two-phase or
three-phase trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser
SMBRREC function.
The expanded SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A
special input is also provided which disables single- phase and two-phase tripping,
forcing all tripping to be three-phase.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each
breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal
from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a threephase trip, if desired.
It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of
closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout.

916
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.1.6.1

Logic diagram
TRINL1
TRINL2
TRINL3

OR
OR

1PTRZ
1PTREF
TRIN

OR
AND

RSTTRIP

Program = 3ph
IEC05000517-2-en.vsd
IEC05000517 V2 EN

Figure 447:

Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram

TRIN
TRINL1
PSL1

OR

AND

L1TRIP

TRINL2
PSL2

OR

AND

L2TRIP

TRINL3
PSL3

OR

AND

L3TRIP

OR

OR

OR
-loop

-loop

OR
AND
1PTREF

AND
AND

tWaitForPHS

OR

1PTRZ

AND

t
IEC10000056-2-en.vsd

IEC10000056 V2 EN

Figure 448:

Phase segregated front logic

917
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

L1TRIP

150 ms

OR

RTRIP

OR

2000 ms
t

OR

L2TRIP

150 ms

AND

OR

STRIP

OR

2000 ms
t

OR

L3TRIP

150 ms

AND

OR

TTRIP

OR

2000 ms
t

OR

AND

OR

OR

P3PTR

AND

OR
-loop
IEC05000519-2-en.vsd
IEC05000519-WMF V2 EN

Figure 449:

Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

918
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

L1TRIP

150 ms

OR

RTRIP

OR

2000 ms
t

AND

L2TRIP

150 ms

OR

STRIP

OR

2000 ms
t

AND
AND

L3TRIP

150 ms

OR

TTRIP

OR

2000 ms
t

AND

OR
AND

OR

P3PTR

OR
-loop
IEC05000520-2-en.vsd
IEC05000520-WMF V2 EN

Figure 450:

Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

919
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BLOCK
RTRIP

STRIP

OR

TRL1

AND

OR

TRL2

AND

TTRIP

OR

TRL3

AND

RSTTRIP

TRIP

OR

AND

OR

TR3P

AND
-loop
10 ms

AND

AND

AND

TR1P

t
5 ms

AND

TR2P

OR

AND

-loop
IEC05000521-2-en.vsd
IEC05000521-WMF V2 EN

Figure 451:

16.1.7

Final tripping circuits

Technical data
Table 568:

SMPPTRC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Trip action

3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph

Minimum trip pulse length

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 30 ms whichever
is greater

3-pole trip delay

(0.020-0.500) s

0.2% or 10 ms whichever
is greater

Single phase delay, two phase

delay and evolving fault delay

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 10 ms whichever
is greater

16.2

Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC

16.2.1

Identification
Function description
Trip matrix logic

IEC 61850
identification
TMAGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

920
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.2.2

Functionality
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other
logical output signals to different output contacts on the IED.
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be
connected to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs
for settable pulse or steady output.

16.2.3

Function block
TMAGAPC
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32

OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3

IEC13000197-1-en.vsd
IEC13000197 V1 EN

Figure 452:

16.2.4

TMAGAPC function block

Signals
Table 569:
Name

TMAGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of output 1

BLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of output 2

BLK3

BOOLEAN

Block of output 3

Table continues on next page

921
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Binary input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Binary input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Binary input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Binary input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Binary input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Binary input 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Binary input 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Binary input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Binary input 16

INPUT17

BOOLEAN

Binary input 17

INPUT18

BOOLEAN

Binary input 18

INPUT19

BOOLEAN

Binary input 19

INPUT20

BOOLEAN

Binary input 20

INPUT21

BOOLEAN

Binary input 21

INPUT22

BOOLEAN

Binary input 22

INPUT23

BOOLEAN

Binary input 23

INPUT24

BOOLEAN

Binary input 24

INPUT25

BOOLEAN

Binary input 25

INPUT26

BOOLEAN

Binary input 26

INPUT27

BOOLEAN

Binary input 27

INPUT28

BOOLEAN

Binary input 28

INPUT29

BOOLEAN

Binary input 29

INPUT30

BOOLEAN

Binary input 30

INPUT31

BOOLEAN

Binary input 31

INPUT32

BOOLEAN

Binary input 32

Table 570:
Name

TMAGAPC Output signals

Type

Description

OUTPUT1

BOOLEAN

OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

OUTPUT2

BOOLEAN

OR function between inputs 17 to 32

OUTPUT3

BOOLEAN

OR function between inputs 1 to 32

922
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.2.5
Table 571:
Name

Settings
TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

PulseTime

0.050 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Output pulse time

OnDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Output on delay time

OffDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Output off delay time

ModeOutput1

Steady
Pulsed

Steady

Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed

ModeOutput2

Steady
Pulsed

Steady

Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed

ModeOutput3

Steady
Pulsed

Steady

Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed

16.2.6

Operation principle
The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3
output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the
function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1.
2.
3.

when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical
value 1 the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The
OnDelay is always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set
time. The ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be
steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with
duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are
connected in an OR-function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all
related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. For steady operation the
OffDelay will start when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is
shown in figure 453

923
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

PulseTime

&

ModeOutput1=Pulsed

INPUT 1
Offdelay

Ondelay

&

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

INPUT 16

PulseTime

&

ModeOutput2=Pulsed

INPUT 17
Ondelay

Offdelay

&

INPUT 32

PulseTime

&

ModeOutput3=Pulsed
Ondelay

Offdelay

&

IEC09000612-3-en.vsd
IEC09000612 V3 EN

Figure 453:

Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain
satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

16.3

Logic for group alarm ALMCALH

16.3.1

Identification
Function description
Logic for group alarm

16.3.2

IEC 61850
identification
ALMCALH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

924
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.3.3

Function block
ALMCALH
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

ALARM

IEC13000181-1-en.vsd
IEC13000181 V1 EN

16.3.4

Signals
Table 572:
Name

ALMCALH Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Binary input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Binary input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Binary input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Binary input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Binary input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Binary input 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Binary input 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Binary input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Binary input 16

Table 573:
Name
ALARM

ALMCALH Output signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Description
OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

925
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.3.5
Table 574:
Name
Operation

16.3.6

Settings
ALMCALH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit

Step

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off / On

Operation principle
The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and
one ALARM output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate
in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM
signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
ALARM output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.
Input 1
200 ms

ALARM

Input 16

IEC13000191-1-en.vsd
IEC13000191 V1 EN

Figure 454:

16.4

Group alarm logic

Identification
Function description
Logic for group warning

16.4.1

IEC 61850
identification
WRNCALH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Group alarm logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning signals to
a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

926
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.4.2

Function block
WRNCALH
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

WARNING

IEC13000182-1-en.vsd
IEC13000182 V1 EN

16.4.3

Operation principle
The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals
and 1 WARNING output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR
gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output
WARNING signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.
INPUT1
200 ms

WARNING

INPUT16

IEC13000192-1-en.vsd
IEC13000192 V1 EN

16.4.4

Signals
Table 575:
Name

WRNCALH Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary input 4

Table continues on next page

927
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Binary input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Binary input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Binary input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Binary input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Binary input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Binary input 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Binary input 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Binary input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Binary input 16

WRNCALH Output signals

Name

Type

WARNING

Table 577:
Name
Operation

16.5

Description

BOOLEAN

OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Settings
WRNCALH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off / On

Identification
Function description
Logic for group indication

16.5.1

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 576:

16.4.5

Default

INPUT5

IEC 61850
identification
INDCALH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

928
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.5.2

Function block
INDCALH
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IND

IEC13000183-1-en.vsd
IEC13000183 V1 EN

16.5.3

Operation principle
The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals
and 1 IND output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in
order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from
the function block.
When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
IND output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.
INPUT1
200 ms

IND

INPUT16

IEC13000193-1-en.vsd
IEC13000193 V1 EN

16.5.4

Signals
Table 578:
Name

INDCALH Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary input 4

Table continues on next page

929
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Binary input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Binary input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Binary input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Binary input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Binary input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Binary input 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Binary input 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Binary input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Binary input 16

INDCALH Output signals

Name

Type

IND

Table 580:
Name
Operation

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 579:

16.5.5

Default

INPUT5

Description

BOOLEAN

OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Settings
INDCALH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

16.6

Configurable logic blocks

16.6.1

Functionality

Description
Operation Off / On

A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.

OR function block. Each block has 6 inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.

PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

930
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to
pass from the input to the output.

XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle.

TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.

AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted

SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. Set input has priority.

RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. RESET input has priority.

Configurable logic Q/T

A number of logic blocks and timers, with the capability to propagate timestamp
and quality of the input signals, are available. The function blocks assist the user to
adapt the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

ORQT OR function block that also propagates timestamp and quality of input
signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.

PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

931
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to

the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one
is inverted.

SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output

from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption
should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output

from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption
should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a

"valid" input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality
invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The
timestamp of an output will be set to the latest timestamp of INPUT and
VALID inputs.

INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single

position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied
to time part of SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the
corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.

INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. Value

part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. Time part of single
position input is copied to TIME output. Quality bits in common part and
indication part of inputs signal is copied to the corresponding quality output.

16.6.2

Inverter function block INV

16.6.2.1

Function block
INV
INPUT

OUT
IEC04000404_2_en.vsd

IEC04000404 V2 EN

Figure 455:

INV function block

932
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.6.2.2

Signals
Table 581:

INV Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

BOOLEAN

Table 582:

Description
Input

INV Output signals

Name

Type

OUT

16.6.3

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Output

OR function block OR
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

16.6.3.1

Function block
OR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

OUT
NOUT

IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN

Figure 456:

16.6.3.2

OR function block

Signals
Table 583:
Name

OR Input signals
Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Input 1 to OR gate

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input 2 to OR gate

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Input 3 to OR gate

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Input 4 to OR gate

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Input 5 to OR gate

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Input 6 to OR gate

Table 584:
Name

OR Output signals
Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output from OR gate

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output from OR gate

933
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic
16.6.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

AND function block AND

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs are inverted.

16.6.4.1

Function block
AND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4

OUT
NOUT

IEC14000071-1-en.vsd
IEC14000071 V1 EN

Figure 457:

16.6.4.2

AND function block

Signals
Table 585:

AND Input signals

Name

Type

Description

BOOLEAN

Input signal 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input signal 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Input signal 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Input signal 4

Table 586:

AND Output signals

Name

16.6.5

Default

INPUT1

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

Timer function block TIMER

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (T).

16.6.5.1

Function block
TIMER
INPUT

ON
OFF
IEC04000378-3-en.vsd

IEC04000378 V2 EN

Figure 458:

TIMER function block

934
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.6.5.2

Signals
Table 587:

TIMER Input signals

Name

Type
BOOLEAN

Table 588:

TIMER Output signals

Name

16.6.5.3
Table 589:
Name
T

16.6.6

Default

INPUT

Type

Description
Input to timer

Description

ON

BOOLEAN

Output from timer , pick-up delayed

OFF

BOOLEAN

Output from timer, drop-out delayed

Settings
TIMER Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

0.000 - 90000.000

Step

0.001

Default

Description

0.000

Time delay of function

Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.

16.6.6.1

Function block
PULSETIMER
INPUT

OUT
IEC04000407-3-en.vsd

IEC04000407 V3 EN

Figure 459:

16.6.6.2

PULSETIMER function block

Signals
Table 590:
Name
INPUT

Table 591:
Name
OUT

PULSETIMER Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Input to pulse timer

PULSETIMER Output signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Description
Output from pulse timer

935
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic
16.6.6.3
Table 592:
Name
t

16.6.7

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

0.000 - 90000.000

Step

Default

0.001

Description

0.010

Time delay of function

Exclusive OR function block XOR

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions
with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the
same.

16.6.7.1

Function block
XOR
INPUT1
INPUT2

OUT
NOUT
IEC04000409-2-en.vsd

IEC04000409 V2 EN

Figure 460:

16.6.7.2

Signals
Table 593:
Name

XOR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Input 1 to XOR gate

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input 2 to XOR gate

Table 594:
Name

16.6.8

XOR function block

XOR Output signals

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output from XOR gate

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output from XOR gate

Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY

The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.

936
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.6.8.1

Function block
LOOPDELAY
INPUT

OUT
IEC09000296-1-en.vsd

IEC09000296 V1 EN

Figure 461:

16.6.8.2

LOOPDELAY function block

Signals
Table 595:

LLD Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

Table 596:

Description
Input signal

LLD Output signals

Name

Type

OUT

16.6.9

Default

BOOLEAN

Description

BOOLEAN

Output signal delayed one execution cycle

Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with
memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had
before or if it will be reset.
Table 597:
SET

16.6.9.1

Truth table for SRMEMORY function block

RESET

OUT

NOUT

Last
value

Inverted
last value

Function block
SRMEMORY
SET
OUT
RESET
NOUT
IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN

Figure 462:

SRMEMORY function block

937
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.6.9.2

Signals
Table 598:

SRMEMORY Input signals

Name

Type

Input signal to set

RESET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to reset

SRMEMORY Output signals

Name

Table 600:
Name
Memory

16.6.10

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 599:

16.6.9.3

Default

SET

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

Settings
SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit

Step

Default
On

Description
Operating mode of the memory function

Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with
memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each
RSMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had
before or if it will be reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher
priority over SET input.
Table 601:
RESET

Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

SET

OUT

NOUT

Last
value

Inverted last
value

938
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.6.10.1

Function block
RSMEMORY
SET
RESET

OUT
NOUT
IEC09000294-1-en.vsd

IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 463:

16.6.10.2

RSMEMORY function block

Signals
Table 602:

RSMEMORY Input signals

Name

Type

Input signal to set

RESET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to reset

RSMEMORY Output signals

Name

Table 604:
Name
Memory

16.6.11

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 603:

16.6.10.3

Default

SET

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

Settings
RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Off
On

Step

Default
On

Description
Operating mode of the memory function

Controllable gate function block GATE

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal
should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

16.6.11.1

Function block
GATE
INPUT

OUT
IEC04000410-2-en.vsd

IEC04000410 V2 EN

Figure 464:

GATE function block

939
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.6.11.2

Signals
Table 605:

GATE Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

Table 606:

Type

OUT

Table 607:
Name
Operation

16.6.12

Description
Input to gate

GATE Output signals

Name

16.6.11.3

Default

BOOLEAN

Description

BOOLEAN

Output from gate

Settings
GATE Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Off
On

Step

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off/On

Settable timer function block TIMERSET

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has outputs for delayed input
signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an
Operation setting On/, Off/ that controls the operation of the timer.

16.6.12.1

Function block
TIMERSET
INPUT

ON
OFF
IEC04000411-2-en.vsd

IEC04000411 V2 EN

Figure 465:

16.6.12.2

TIMERSET function block

Signals
Table 608:
Name
INPUT

Table 609:
Name

TIMERSET Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Input to timer

TIMERSET Output signals

Type

Description

ON

BOOLEAN

Output from timer, pick-up delayed

OFF

BOOLEAN

Output from timer, drop-out delayed

940
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.6.12.3
Table 610:
Name

Settings
TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

0.000 - 90000.000

0.001

0.000

Delay for settable timer n

16.7

Configurable logic Q/T

16.7.1

Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers with the capability to propagate timestamp
and quality of the input signals are available. The function blocks assist the user to
adapt the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

16.7.2

ANDQT function block

ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.

16.7.2.1

Function block
ANDQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4

OUT
NOUT

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN

Figure 466:

16.7.2.2

ANDQT function block

Signals
Table 611:
Name

ANDQT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Input signal 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input signal 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Input signal 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Input signal 4

941
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 612:

ANDQT Output signals

Name

16.7.3

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

ORQT function block

ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions
with boolean variables. ORQT function block has six inputs and two outputs. One
of the outputs is inverted.

16.7.3.1

Function block
ORQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

OUT
NOUT

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN

Figure 467:

16.7.3.2

Signals
Table 613:
Name

ORQT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Input signal 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input signal 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Input signal 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Input signal 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Input signal 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Input signal 6

Table 614:
Name

16.7.4

ORQT function block

ORQT Output signals

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

Inverter function block INVERTERQT

942
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.7.4.1

Function block
INVERTERQT
INPUT

OUT
IEC09000299-1-en.vsd

IEC09000299 V1 EN

Figure 468:

16.7.4.2

INVERTERQT function block

Signals
Table 615:

INVERTERQT Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

BOOLEAN

Table 616:

Description
Input signal

INVERTERQT Output signals

Name

Type

OUT

16.7.5

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Output signal

Exclusive OR function block XORQT

The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory
expressions with boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two
outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals
are different and 0 if they are equal.

16.7.5.1

Function block
XORQT
INPUT1
INPUT2

OUT
NOUT
IEC09000300-1-en.vsd

IEC09000300 V1 EN

Figure 469:

16.7.5.2

XORQT function block

Signals
Table 617:
Name

XORQT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Input signal 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input signal 2

943
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 618:

XORQT Output signals

Name

16.7.6

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT

The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop
after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
SRMEMORYQT propagates quality and time as well as value.
Table 619:
SET

Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

RESET

OUT

NOUT

Last
value

Inverted
last value

If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

16.7.6.1

Function block
SRMEMORYQT
SET
RESET

OUT
NOUT
IEC14000070-1-en.vsd

IEC14000070 V1 EN

Figure 470:

16.7.6.2

SRMEMORYQT function block

Signals
Table 620:
Name

SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

SET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to set

RESET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to reset

944
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 621:

SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Name

16.7.6.3
Table 622:
Name
Memory

16.7.7

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

Settings
SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Off
On

Step

Default

Description

On

Operating mode of the memory function

Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT

The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function
block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flipflop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
Table 623:

Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block

RESET

16.7.7.1

SET

OUT

NOUT

Last
value

Inverted last
value

Function block
RSMEMORYQT
SET
RESET

OUT
NOUT
IEC14000069-1-en.vsd

IEC14000069 V1 EN

Figure 471:

16.7.7.2

RSMEMORYQT function block

Signals
Table 624:
Name

RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

SET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to set

RESET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to reset

945
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 625:

RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Name

16.7.7.3
Table 626:
Name
Memory

16.7.8

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

Settings
RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Off
On

Step

Default
On

Description
Operating mode of the memory function

Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has pick-up and drop-out
delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).
When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the
output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.
TIMERSETQT
INPUT

ON
OFF
IEC14000068-1-en.vsd

IEC14000068 V1 EN

Figure 472:

16.7.8.1

TIMERSETQT function

Signals
Table 627:
Name
INPUT

Table 628:
Name

TIMERSETQT Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Input signal

TIMERSETQT Output signals

Type

Description

ON

BOOLEAN

Output signal, pick-up delayed

OFF

BOOLEAN

Output signal, drop-out delayed

946
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.7.8.2
Table 629:
Name

Settings
TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

0.000 - 90000.000

0.001

0.000

Delay for settable timer n

16.7.9

Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT

Pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer has a settable length
and will also propagate quality and time.
When the input goes to 1 the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay
parameter t. Then return to 0.
When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated.
The supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to
the output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

16.7.9.1

Signals
Table 630:

PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

BOOLEAN

Table 631:

Type

OUT

Table 632:
Name
t

16.7.10

Description

Input signal

PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Name

16.7.9.2

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Output signal

Settings
PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.000 - 90000.000

Unit
s

Step
0.001

Default
0.010

Description
Pulse time length

InvalidLogic INVALIDQT
Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.

947
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Inputs are copied to outputs. If InputValid input is 0 or if its quality invalid bit is
set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The timestamp of output
will be set to the latest timestamp of input and InputValid input.

16.7.10.1

Function block
INVALIDQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
VALID

OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16

iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN

Figure 473:

16.7.10.2

INVALIDQT function block

Signals
Table 633:
Name

INVALIDQT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Indication input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Indication input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Indication input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Indication input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Indication input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Indication input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Indication input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Indication input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Indication input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Indication input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Indication input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Indication input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Indication input 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Indication input 14

Table continues on next page

948
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Indication input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Indication input 16

VALID

BOOLEAN

Inputs are valid or not

Table 634:
Name

16.7.11

Type

INPUT15

INVALIDQT Output signals

Type

Description

OUTPUT1

BOOLEAN

Indication output 1

OUTPUT2

BOOLEAN

Indication output 2

OUTPUT3

BOOLEAN

Indication output 3

OUTPUT4

BOOLEAN

Indication output 4

OUTPUT5

BOOLEAN

Indication output 5

OUTPUT6

BOOLEAN

Indication output 6

OUTPUT7

BOOLEAN

Indication output 7

OUTPUT8

BOOLEAN

Indication output 8

OUTPUT9

BOOLEAN

Indication output 9

OUTPUT10

BOOLEAN

Indication output 10

OUTPUT11

BOOLEAN

Indication output 11

OUTPUT12

BOOLEAN

Indication output 12

OUTPUT13

BOOLEAN

Indication output 13

OUTPUT14

BOOLEAN

Indication output 14

OUTPUT15

BOOLEAN

Indication output 15

OUTPUT16

BOOLEAN

Indication output 16

Single indication signal combining function block

INDCOMBSPQT
Single position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is
copied to time part of SP_OUT output. State input bits are copied to the
corresponding state part of SP_OUT output. If the state or value on the SP_OUT
output changes, the Event bit in the state part is toggled.

16.7.11.1

Signals

949
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 635:

INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

Name

Type

Description

SP_IN

BOOLEAN

Single point indication

TIME

GROUP
SIGNAL

Timestamp

BLOCKED

BOOLEAN

Blocked for update

SUBST

BOOLEAN

Substitued

INVALID

BOOLEAN

Invalid value

TEST

BOOLEAN

Testmode

Table 636:

INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

Name

Type

SP_OUT

16.7.12

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Single point indication

Function block
INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN*

SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST
IEC14000067-1-en.vsd

IEC14000067 V1 EN

Figure 474:

INDEXTSPQT function block

Value part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output.

Time part of single position input is copied to TIME output.
State bits in common part and indication part of inputs signal is copied to the
corresponding state output.

16.7.12.1

Signals
Table 637:
Name
SI_IN

INDEXTSPQT Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Single indication

950
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 638:

INDEXTSPQT Output signals

Name

16.8

Type

Description

SI_OUT

BOOLEAN

Single indication

TIME

GROUP SIGNAL

Timestamp of input

BLOCKED

BOOLEAN

Blocked for update

SUBST

BOOLEAN

Substituted

INVALID

BOOLEAN

Invalid value

TEST

BOOLEAN

Testmode

Technical data
Table 639:

Configurable logic blocks

Logic block

Quantity with cycle time

fast
medium

normal

Range or
value

Accuracy

LogicAND

60

60

160

LogicOR

60

60

160

LogicXOR

10

10

20

LogicInverter

30

30

80

LogicSRMemory

10

10

20

LogicRSMemory

10

10

20

LogicGate

10

10

20

LogicTimer

10

10

20

(0.000
90000.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

LogicPulseTimer

10

10

20

(0.000
90000.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

LogicTimerSet

10

10

20

(0.000
90000.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

LogicLoopDelay

10

10

20

(0.000
90000.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Trip Matrix Logic

Boolean 16 to Integer

Boolean 16 to
integer with Logic
Node

Integer to Boolean 16

Integer to Boolean
16 with Logic Node

951
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 640:

Extension logic package

Logic block

Quantity with cycle time

fast
medium

Accuracy

LogicAND

40

40

100

LogicXOR

49

LogicSRMemory

110

LogicTimer

49

(0.000
90000.00
0) s

0.5% 10 ms

LogicPulseTimer

49

(0.000
90000.00
0) s

0.5% 10 ms

Trip matrix logic

18

SLGAPC

10

10

54

VSGAPC

10

10

10

LogicOR

40

40

100

LogicGate

49

LogicTimerSet

49

LogicLoopDelay

49

16.9

Fixed signals FXDSIGN

16.9.1

Identification
Function description
Fixed signals

16.9.2

Range or
value

normal

IEC 61850
identification
FXDSIGN

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that
can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean,
integer, floating point, string types of signals are available.

952
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.9.3

Function block
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN

Figure 475:

16.9.4

Signals
Table 641:
Name

16.9.5

FXDSIGN function block

FXDSIGN Output signals

Type

Description

OFF

BOOLEAN

Boolean signal fixed off

ON

BOOLEAN

Boolean signal fixed on

INTZERO

INTEGER

Integer signal fixed zero

INTONE

INTEGER

Integer signal fixed one

INTALONE

INTEGER

Integer signal fixed all ones

REALZERO

REAL

Real signal fixed zero

STRNULL

STRING

String signal with no characters

ZEROSMPL

GROUP SIGNAL

Channel id for zero sample

GRP_OFF

GROUP SIGNAL

Group signal fixed off

Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

16.9.6

Operation principle
There are eight outputs from FXDSIGN function block:

OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value

953
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value

ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

16.10

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

16.10.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Boolean 16 to integer conversion

IEC 60617
identification

B16I

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16

binary (logical) signals into an integer.

16.10.2

Function block
B16I
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

OUT

IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN

Figure 476:

16.10.3

B16I function block

Signals
Table 642:
Name

B16I Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

Table continues on next page

954
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Description

Input 5

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

IN13

BOOLEAN

Input 13

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

Name
OUT

B16I Output signals

Type

Description

INTEGER

Output value

Monitored data
Table 644:
Name
OUT

16.10.5

Default

BOOLEAN

Table 643:

16.10.4

Type

IN5

B16I Monitored data

Type
INTEGER

Values (Range)
-

Unit
-

Description
Output value

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

16.10.6

Operation principle
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination
of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1x16 to an integer. Each INx represents a
value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general
formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx
will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx
that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx where 1x16 are activated
that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output
OUT. B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the
BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1x16.

955
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input

Type

Default

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

IN5

BOOLEAN

Input 5

16

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

32

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

64

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

128

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

256

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

512

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

1024

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

2048

IN13

BOOLEAN

Input 13

4096

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

8192

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

16384

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

32768

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

16.11

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation BTIGAPC

16.11.1

Identification
Function description
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with
logic node representation

IEC 61850
identification
BTIGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

956
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.11.2

Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
BTIGAPC is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
The block input will freeze the output at the last value.
BTIGAPC can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator
position input (PSTO).

16.11.3

Function block
BTIGAPC
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

OUT

IEC13000303-1-en.vsd
IEC13000303 V1 EN

Figure 477:

16.11.4

BTIGAPC function block

Signals
Table 645:
Name

BTIGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

IN5

BOOLEAN

Input 5

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

Table continues on next page

957
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Input 13

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

Table 646:
Name
OUT

16.11.5

Type

IN13

BTIGAPC Output signals

Type

Description

INTEGER

Output value

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

16.11.6

Monitored data
Table 647:
Name
OUT

16.11.7

BTIGAPC Monitored data

Type
INTEGER

Values (Range)
-

Unit
-

Description
Output value

Operation principle
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx where
1x16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The
sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a
sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When
all INx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed
for receiving the integer input from a station computer - for example, over IEC
61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.

958
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name of input

Type

Default

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

IN5

BOOLEAN

Input 5

16

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

32

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

64

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

128

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

256

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

512

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

1024

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

2048

IN13

BOOLEAN

Input 13

4096

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

8192

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

16384

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

32768

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

16.12

Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A

16.12.1

Identification
Function description
Integer to boolean 16 conversion

16.12.2

IEC 61850
identification
IB16

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.

959
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic
16.12.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
IB16
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC06000501-2-en.vsd
IEC06000501 V2 EN

Figure 478:

16.12.4

IB16 function block

Signals
Table 648:
Name

IB16 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INP

INTEGER

Integer Input

Table 649:
Name

IB16 Output signals

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

960
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.12.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

16.12.6

Operation principle
With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value
=1, OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The
sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1x16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with
a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1x16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will
then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are
according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for
receiving the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx

Type

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

16

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

32

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

64

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

128

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

256

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

512

Table continues on next page

961
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name of OUTx

Type

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

1024

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

2048

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

4096

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

8192

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

16384

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

32768

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where
x = 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the IB16 function block.

16.13

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC

16.13.1

Identification
Function description
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with
logic node representation

16.13.2

IEC 61850
identification
ITBGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is
used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by
the function to 16 binary coded (logic) output signals.
ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for
the operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the
corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block.
The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new
integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.

962
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

16.13.3

Function block
ITBGAPC
BLOCK
PSTO

OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC14000012-1-en.vsd

IEC14000012 V1 EN

Figure 479:

16.13.4

ITBGAPC function block

Signals
Table 650:
Name

ITBGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

Table 651:
Name

ITBGAPC Output signals

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

963
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic
16.13.5

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
This function does not have any setting parameters.

16.13.6

Operation principle
An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to
and received by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC61850 the OUTx changes from
0 to 1 on each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5x16)
remains 0. The boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values
of each of the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8.
The sum of these OUTx (1x4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the
IEC61850 network. The remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the Table 652. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
The value of each OUTx for 1x16 (1x16) follows the general formulae:
OUTx = 2x-1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1x16
will be equal to the integer value received over IEC61850 to the ITBGAPC_1
function block.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function
(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535
communicated via IEC61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a
combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1x16. The values represented by
the different OUTx are according to Table 652. When an OUTx is not activated, its
value is 0.
The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 652:
Name of OUTx

Outputs and their values when activated

Type

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

16

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

32

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

64

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

128

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

256

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

512

Table continues on next page

964
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name of OUTx

Type

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

1024

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

2048

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

4096

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

8192

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

16384

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

32768

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx
(1x16) are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted
to boolean by the ITBGAPC function block.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer
number that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block
while the PSTO is in position Remote. If PSTO is in position Off or Local,
then no changes are applied to the outputs.

16.14

Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

16.14.1

Identification
Function Description
Elapsed time integrator

16.14.2

IEC 61850
identification
TEIGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

number
-

Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the
elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 480.

965
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

BLOCK
RESET
IN

ACCTIME

Time Integration
with Retain

q-1

999 999 s

a=b

tWarning

a=b

tAlarm

a=b

q-1 = unit delay

OVERFLOW

&

WARNING

&

ALARM

&

IEC13000290-1-en.vsd

IEC13000290 V1 EN

Figure 480:

TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC

Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

Supervision of overflow
Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10
milliseconds
Retain the integration value
Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
Report of the integrated time

16.14.3

Function block
TEIGAPC
BLOCK
IN
RESET

WARNING
ALARM
OVERFLOW
ACCTIME
IEC14000014-1-en.vsd

IEC14000014 V1 EN

Figure 481:

16.14.4

TEIGAPC function block

Signals
Table 653:
Name

TEIGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Freeze the integration and block the other outputs

IN

BOOLEAN

The input signal that is used to measure the

elapsed time, when its value is high

RESET

BOOLEAN

Reset the integration time

966
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 654:

TEIGAPC Output signals

Name

16.14.5
Table 655:
Name

Type

Description

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Indicator of the integrated time has reached the

warning limit

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Indicator of the integrated time has reached the

alarm limit

OVERFLOW

BOOLEAN

Indicator of the integrated time has reached the

overflow limit

ACCTIME

REAL

Integrated elapsed time in seconds

Settings
TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

tWarning

1.00 - 999999.99

0.01

600.00

Time limit for warning supervision

tAlarm

1.00 - 999999.99

0.01

1200.00

Time limit for alarm supervision

16.14.6

Operation principle
The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides

time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has
been high
blocking and reset of the total integrated time
supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
retaining of the integrated value

Figure 482 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block Time
Integration covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
Transgression Supervision Plus Retain contains the logics for the last two.

967
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Loop Delay

tWarning

OVERFLOW

tAlarm

WARNING

Transgression Supervision
Plus Retain

ALARM

BLOCK
RESET

ACCTIME

Time Integration

IN

Loop Delay

IEC12000195-3-en.vsd

IEC12000195 V3 EN

Figure 482:

TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities

integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high

RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also
reset

unconditionally on the input IN value

reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero

BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs

applicable to long time integration (999 999.9 seconds)

output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation
value for the integration following by a restart

unconditionally on the signal value

BLOCK request overrides RESET request

Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression

overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds

alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
warning if ACCTIME > tWarning

The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow,
tAlarm and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is,
there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

968
Technical Manual

Section 16
Logic

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms,

depending on the level of the defined values for the parameters.
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs
freeze if an overflow occurs.

16.14.6.1

Operation Accuracy
The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

function cycle time

the pulse length
the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more
pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.

16.14.6.2

Memory storage
The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

16.14.7

Technical data
Table 656:

TEIGAPC Technical data

Function
Elapsed time
integration

Cycle time (ms)

Range or value

Accuracy

0 ~ 999999.9 s

0.2% or 20 ms
whichever is greater

0 ~ 999999.9 s

0.2% or 100 ms
whichever is greater

100

0 ~ 999999.9 s

0.2% or 250 ms
whichever is greater

969
Technical Manual

970

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 17

Monitoring

17.1

Measurements

17.1.1

Identification
Function description
Measurements

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

CVMMXN

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN

Phase current measurement

CMMXU

I
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN

Phase-phase voltage measurement

VMMXU

U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

Current sequence component

measurement

CMSQI

I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN

Voltage sequence component

measurement

VMSQI

U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN

Phase-neutral voltage measurement

VNMMXU

U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

17.1.2

Functionality
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values
of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is

971
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It

provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the
power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of
protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of
instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic
comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the
proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it
can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional
overcurrent protection function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the
actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low
limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also
supported, that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which
reduces the impact of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure
value can also be based on periodic reporting.
Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system
quantities:

P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

PF: power factor
U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
I: phase current amplitude
F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:

I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using

fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively
voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as
instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low
pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

972
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual
hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component
quantities:

17.1.3

I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and
angle).

Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P*
U3P*

S
S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
IEC10000016-1-en.vsd

IEC10000016 V1 EN

Figure 483:

CVMMXN function block

CMMXU
I3P*

IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
IEC05000699-2-en.vsd

IEC05000699 V2 EN

Figure 484:

CMMXU function block

973
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

VMMXU
U3P*

UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL
IEC05000701-2-en.vsd

IEC05000701 V2 EN

Figure 485:

VMMXU function block

CMSQI
I3P*

3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
IEC05000703-2-en.vsd

IEC05000703 V2 EN

Figure 486:

CMSQI function block

VMSQI
U3P*

3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL
IEC05000704-2-en.vsd

IEC05000704 V2 EN

Figure 487:

VMSQI function block

VNMMXU
U3P*

UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL
IEC09000850-1-en.vsd

IEC09000850 V1 EN

Figure 488:

VNMMXU function block

974
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.1.4

Signals
Table 657:
Name

CVMMXN Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

U3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

Table 658:
Name

CVMMXN Output signals

Type

Description

REAL

Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value

S_RANGE

INTEGER

Apparent Power range

P_INST

REAL

Active Power

REAL

Active Power magnitude of deadband value

P_RANGE

INTEGER

Active Power range

Q_INST

REAL

Reactive Power

REAL

Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value

Q_RANGE

INTEGER

Reactive Power range

PF

REAL

Power Factor magnitude of deadband value

PF_RANGE

INTEGER

Power Factor range

ILAG

BOOLEAN

Current is lagging voltage

ILEAD

BOOLEAN

Current is leading voltage

REAL

Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value

U_RANGE

INTEGER

Calculated voltage range

REAL

Calculated current magnitude of deadband value

I_RANGE

INTEGER

Calculated current range

REAL

System frequency magnitude of deadband value

F_RANGE

INTEGER

System frequency range

Table 659:
Name
I3P

Table 660:
Name

CMMXU Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Default
-

Description
Group signal for current input

CMMXU Output signals

Type

Description

IL1

REAL

IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

IL1RANG

INTEGER

IL1 Amplitude range

IL1ANGL

REAL

IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table continues on next page

975
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

IL2

REAL

IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

IL2RANG

INTEGER

IL2 Amplitude range

IL2ANGL

REAL

IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

IL3

REAL

IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

IL3RANG

INTEGER

IL3 Amplitude range

IL3ANGL

REAL

IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 661:
Name
U3P

Table 662:
Name

VMMXU Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Default
-

Description
Group connection abstract block 2

VMMXU Output signals

Type

Description

UL12

REAL

UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

UL12RANG

INTEGER

UL12 Amplitude range

UL12ANGL

REAL

UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value

UL23

REAL

UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

UL23RANG

INTEGER

UL23 Amplitude range

UL23ANGL

REAL

UL23 Angle, magnitude of reported value

UL31

REAL

UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

UL31RANG

INTEGER

UL31 Amplitude range

UL31ANGL

REAL

UL31 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 663:
Name
I3P

Table 664:
Name

CMSQI Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Default
-

Description
Group connection abstract block 3

CMSQI Output signals

Type

Description

3I0

REAL

3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

3I0RANG

INTEGER

3I0 Amplitude range

3I0ANGL

REAL

3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value

I1

REAL

I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

I1RANG

INTEGER

I1 Amplitude range

I1ANGL

REAL

I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table continues on next page

976
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

I2

REAL

I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

I2RANG

INTEGER

I2 Amplitude range

I2ANGL

REAL

I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 665:
Name
U3P

Table 666:
Name

VMSQI Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Default
-

Description
Group connection abstract block 4

VMSQI Output signals

Type

Description

3U0

REAL

3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

3U0RANG

INTEGER

3U0 Amplitude range

3U0ANGL

REAL

3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value

U1

REAL

U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

U1RANG

INTEGER

U1 Amplitude range

U1ANGL

REAL

U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value

U2

REAL

U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

U2RANG

INTEGER

U2 Amplitude range

U2ANGL

REAL

U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 667:
Name
U3P

Table 668:
Name

VNMMXU Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Default
-

Description
Group signal for voltage input

VNMMXU Output signals

Type

Description

UL1

REAL

UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

UL1RANG

INTEGER

UL1 Amplitude range

UL1ANGL

REAL

UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value

UL2

REAL

UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

UL2RANG

INTEGER

UL2 Amplitude range

UL2ANGL

REAL

UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

UL3

REAL

UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

UL3RANG

INTEGER

UL3 Amplitude range

UL3ANGL

REAL

UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

977
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.1.5

Settings
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.
These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only
available in the first setting group.
The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:

Table 669:
Name

UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for
voltage setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary
voltage supervised object.
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of
the supervised object.
SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.

CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Step

Default

SLowLim

Values (Range)
0.0 - 2000.0

Unit
%SB

0.1

80.0

Description
Low limit in % of SBase

SLowLowLim

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of SBase

SMin

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of SBase

SMax

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of SBase

SRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

PMin

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-200.0

Minimum value in % of SBase

PMax

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of SBase

PRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

QMin

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-200.0

Minimum value in % of SBase

QMax

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of SBase

QRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

PFMin

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

-1.000

Minimum value

PFMax

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Maximum value

PFRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

UMin

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

UMax

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

Table continues on next page

978
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

URepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

IMin

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

5.0

Minimum value in % of IBase

IMax

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of IBase

IRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

FrMin

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

FrMax

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

70.000

Maximum value

FrRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

Mode

L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

L1, L2, L3

Selection of measured current and

voltage

PowAmpFact

0.000 - 6.000

0.001

1.000

Amplitude factor to scale power

calculations

PowAngComp

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Angle compensation for phase shift

between measured I & U

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

0.000

Low pass filter coefficient for power

measurement, U and I

Table 670:
Name

CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

SZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

SHiHiLim

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of SBase

SHiLim

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of SBase

SLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common

for all limits)

PDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

PZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

PHiHiLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of SBase

PHiLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of SBase

Table continues on next page

979
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Step

Default

PLowLim

Values (Range)
-2000.0 - 2000.0

Unit
%SB

0.1

-120.0

Description
Low limit in % of SBase

PLowLowLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-150.0

Low Low limit in % of SBase

PLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common

for all limits)

QDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

QZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

QHiHiLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of SBase

QHiLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of SBase

QLowLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-120.0

Low limit in % of SBase

QLowLowLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-150.0

Low Low limit in % of SBase

QLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common

for all limits)

PFDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

PFZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

PFHiHiLim

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

High High limit (physical value)

PFHiLim

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

0.800

High limit (physical value)

PFLowLim

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

-0.800

Low limit (physical value)

PFLowLowLim

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

-1.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

PFLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common

for all limits)

UDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

UZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

UHiHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of UBase

UHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

ULowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

ULowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

ULimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common

for all limits)

IDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

IZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

IHiHiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of IBase

IHiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of IBase

ILowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of IBase

ILowLowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of IBase

ILimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common

for all limits)

FrDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

FrZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

Table continues on next page

980
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FrHiHiLim

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

65.000

High High limit (physical value)

FrHiLim

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

63.000

High limit (physical value)

FrLowLim

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

47.000

Low limit (physical value)

FrLowLowLim

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

45.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

FrLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common

for all limits)

UGenZeroDb

1 - 100

%UB

Zero point clamping in % of UBase

IGenZeroDb

1 - 100

%IB

Zero point clamping in % of IBase

UAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at

5% of Ur

UAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at

30% of Ur

UAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at

100% of Ur

IAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate current at

5% of Ir

IAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate current at

30% of Ir

IAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate current at

100% of Ir

IAngComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir

IAngComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir

IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

Table 671:
Name

CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IL1DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Mode On / Off

IL1Max

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of IBase

IL1RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

IL1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

IL2DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

IL2Max

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of IBase

IL2RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table continues on next page

981
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IL2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

IL3DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

IL3Max

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of IBase

IL3RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

IL3AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

Table 672:
Name

CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IL1ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

IL1HiHiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of IBase

IL1HiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of IBase

IAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate current at

5% of Ir

IAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate current at

30% of Ir

IL1LowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of IBase

IL1LowLowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of IBase

IAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate current at

100% of Ir

IAngComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir

IL1Min

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of IBase

IAngComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir

IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

IL1LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

IL2ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

IL2HiHiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of IBase

IL2HiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of IBase

IL2LowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of IBase

IL2LowLowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of IBase

IL2Min

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of IBase

IL2LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

IL3ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

IL3HiHiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of IBase

IL3HiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of IBase

IL3LowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of IBase

Table continues on next page

982
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Step

Default

IL3LowLowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of IBase

IL3Min

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of IBase

IL3LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

Table 673:
Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

UL12DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Mode On / Off

UL12ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

UL12Max

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

UL12RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

UL12AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

UL23DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

UL2ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

UL23Max

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

UL23RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL23AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

UL31DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

UL3ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

UL31Max

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

UL31RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL31AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

Table 674:
Name

VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Step

Default

UL12HiHiLim

Values (Range)
0.0 - 200.0

Unit
%UB

0.1

150.0

Description
High High limit in % of UBase

UL12HiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

UL12LowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

Table continues on next page

983
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Step

Default

UL12LowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

UAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at

100% of Ur

UL12Min

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in in % of UBase

UL12LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

UL23HiHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of UBase

UL23HiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

UL23LowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

UL23LowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

UL23Min

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

UL23LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

UL31HiHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of UBase

UL31HiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

UL31LowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

UL31LowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

UL31Min

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

UL31LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

Table 675:
Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

3I0DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

3I0ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

3I0Min

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of IBase

3I0Max

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of IBase

3I0RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

3I0LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

3I0AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Mode On / Off

3I0AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

3I0AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

3I0AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table continues on next page

984
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

I1DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

I1ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

I1Min

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of IBase

I1Max

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of IBase

I1RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

I1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

I1AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

I1AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

I2DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

I2ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

I2Min

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of IBase

I2Max

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of IBase

I2RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

I2LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

I2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

I2AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

I2AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table 676:
Name

CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Step

Default

3I0HiHiLim

Values (Range)
0.0 - 500.0

Unit
%IB

0.1

150.0

Description
High High limit in % of IBase

3I0HiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of IBase

3I0LowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of IBase

3I0LowLowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of IBase

3I0AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

I1HiHiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of IBase

I1HiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of IBase

I1LowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of IBase

I1LowLowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of IBase

I1LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

Table continues on next page

985
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

I1AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

I1AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

I2HiHiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of IBase

I2HiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of IBase

I2LowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of IBase

I2LowLowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of IBase

I2AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

I2AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

Table 677:
Name

VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

3U0DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

3U0ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

3U0Min

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

3U0Max

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

3U0RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

3U0LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

3U0AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Mode On / Off

3U0AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

3U0AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

3U0AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

3U0AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

U1DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

U1ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

U1Min

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

U1Max

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

U1RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

U1LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

Table continues on next page

986
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

U1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

U2DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

U2ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

U2Min

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

U2Max

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

U2RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

U2LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

U2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

U2AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

U2AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

U2AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

UAmpPreComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage

at 5% of Ur

UAmpPreComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage

at 30% of Ur

UAmpPreComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage

at 100% of Ur

Table 678:
Name

VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Step

Default

3U0HiHiLim

Values (Range)
0.0 - 200.0

Unit
%UB

0.1

150.0

Description
High High limit in % of UBase

3U0HiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

3U0LowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

3U0LowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

U1HiHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of UBase

U1HiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

U1LowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

U1LowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

U1AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

U1AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

U1AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

U1AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

U2HiHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of UBase

U2HiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

Table continues on next page

987
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Step

Default

U2LowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

U2LowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

U2AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

Table 679:
Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

UL1DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Mode On / Off

UL1ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

UL1Max

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

UL1RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

UL1LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

UL1AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

UL2DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

UL2ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

UL2Max

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

UL2RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL2LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

UL2AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

UL3DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

UL3ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping

UL3Max

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

UL3RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL3LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

UL3AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

988
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 680:
Name

VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

UL1HiHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of UBase

UL1HiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

UL1LowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

UL1LowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

UAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at

100% of Ur

UL1Min

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

UL2HiHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of UBase

UL2HiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

UL2LowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

UL2LowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

UL2Min

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

UL3HiHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of UBase

UL3HiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

UL3LowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

UL3LowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

UL3Min

0.0 - 200.0

%UB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

17.1.6

Monitored data
Table 681:
Name

CVMMXN Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

S_IMAG

REAL

Apparent Power
magnitude of
instantaneous value

REAL

MVA

Apparent Power
magnitude of deadband
value

P_IMAG

REAL

Active Power magnitude

of instantaneous value

REAL

MW

Active Power magnitude

of deadband value

Q_IMAG

REAL

Reactive Power
magnitude of
instantaneous value

REAL

MVAr

Reactive Power
magnitude of deadband
value

PF_IMAG

REAL

Power Factor magnitude

of instantaneous value

PF

REAL

Power Factor magnitude

of deadband value

Table continues on next page

989
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

U_IMAG

REAL

Calcuated voltage
magnitude of
instantaneous value

REAL

kV

Calculated voltage
magnitude of deadband
value

I_IMAG

REAL

Caculated current
magnitude of
instantaneous value

REAL

Calculated current
magnitude of deadband
value

F_IMAG

REAL

System frequency
magnitude of
instantaneous value

REAL

Hz

System frequency
magnitude of deadband
value

Table 682:
Name

CMMXU Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

IL1IMAG

REAL

IL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

IL1

REAL

IL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

IL1ANGIM

REAL

IL1 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value

IL1ANGL

REAL

deg

IL1 Angle, magnitude of

reported value

IL2IMAG

REAL

IL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

IL2

REAL

IL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

IL2ANGIM

REAL

IL2 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value

IL2ANGL

REAL

deg

IL2 Angle, magnitude of

reported value

IL3IMAG

REAL

IL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

IL3

REAL

IL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

IL3ANGIM

REAL

IL3 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value

IL3ANGL

REAL

deg

IL3 Angle, magnitude of

reported value

990
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 683:
Name

VMMXU Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UL12IMAG

REAL

UL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

UL12

REAL

kV

UL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

UL12ANGIM

REAL

UL12 Angle, magnitude

of instantaneous value

UL12ANGL

REAL

deg

UL12 Angle, magnitude

of reported value

UL23IMAG

REAL

UL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

UL23

REAL

kV

UL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

UL23ANGIM

REAL

UL23 Angle, magnitude

of instantaneous value

UL23ANGL

REAL

deg

UL23 Angle, magnitude

of reported value

UL31IMAG

REAL

UL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

UL31

REAL

kV

UL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

UL31ANGIM

REAL

UL31 Angle, magnitude

of instantaneous value

UL31ANGL

REAL

deg

UL31 Angle, magnitude

of reported value

Table 684:
Name

CMSQI Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

3I0IMAG

REAL

3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

3I0

REAL

3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

3I0ANGIM

REAL

3I0 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value

3I0ANGL

REAL

deg

3I0 Angle, magnitude of

reported value

I1IMAG

REAL

I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value

I1

REAL

I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value

Table continues on next page

991
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

I1ANGIM

REAL

I1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value

I1ANGL

REAL

deg

I1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

I2IMAG

REAL

I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value

I2

REAL

I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value

I2ANGIM

REAL

I2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value

I2ANGL

REAL

deg

I2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

Table 685:
Name

VMSQI Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

3U0IMAG

REAL

3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

3U0

REAL

kV

3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

3U0ANGIM

REAL

3U0 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value

3U0ANGL

REAL

deg

3U0 Angle, magnitude of

reported value

U1IMAG

REAL

U1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

U1

REAL

kV

U1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

U1ANGIM

REAL

U1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value

U1ANGL

REAL

deg

U1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

U2IMAG

REAL

U2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

U2

REAL

kV

U2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

U2ANGIM

REAL

U2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value

U2ANGL

REAL

deg

U2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

992
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 686:
Name

VNMMXU Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UL1IMAG

REAL

UL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

UL1

REAL

kV

UL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

UL1ANGIM

REAL

UL1 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value

UL1ANGL

REAL

deg

UL1 Angle, magnitude of

reported value

UL2IMAG

REAL

UL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

UL2

REAL

kV

UL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

UL2ANGIM

REAL

UL2 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value

UL2ANGL

REAL

deg

UL2 Angle, magnitude of

reported value

UL3IMAG

REAL

UL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value

UL3

REAL

kV

UL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value

UL3ANGIM

REAL

UL3 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value

UL3ANGL

REAL

deg

UL3 Angle, magnitude of

reported value

17.1.7

Operation principle

17.1.7.1

Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the preprocessing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities
depends on the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

Locally by means of the local HMI

Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function

993
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The
General setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section
"Analog inputs".

Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1,
I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point
clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXU.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 489. The
monitoring has two different modes of operating:

Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 489.

Y
X_RANGE = 3

High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1

Hysteresis

High limit
X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN

Figure 489:

Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output

(X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1:
High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below
Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block
(XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary signals.

994
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 489.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference
between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for
each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating
values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting
of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:

Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting

(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Y
Value Reported
(1st)

Value Reported

Value Reported

Value Reported

Value Reported

Y3
Y2

Y4

Y1

Y5

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

t (*)

Value 5

Value 4

t (*)

Value 3

t (*)

Value 2

Value 1

t (*)

en05000500.vsd

IEC05000500 V1 EN

Figure 490:

Periodic reporting
995

Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Amplitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the
change is larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn),
then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the
information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 491 shows an example with the
amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not
continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle
from each other.
Value Reported

Y
Value Reported
(1st)

Value Reported
Y3
Y2

Y1

Value Reported
DY
DY

DY
DY

DY
DY

t
99000529.vsd

IEC99000529 V1 EN

Figure 491:

Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more
than defined by the Y set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the preset limit (XDbRepInt), figure 492, where an example of reporting with integral deadband supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous
but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each
other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 492 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is
exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for
the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
996
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals

with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
A1 >=
pre-set value

Y
A >=
pre-set value

A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3

Y2
Value Reported
(1st)

A1

Value
Reported

A2
Value
Reported

Y1

Y4
Value
Reported

A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3

A5

A6

A7

Y5
Value
Reported
t
99000530.vsd

IEC99000530 V1 EN

Figure 492:

17.1.7.2

Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and threephase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to
measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending
on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by
a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:

997
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter

phase power calculation
Mode
1

L1, L2, L3

S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
EQUATION1385 V1 EN

Formula used for voltage and

current magnitude calculation

Comment

U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
EQUATION1386 V1 EN

Arone

S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
*

(Equation 199)

EQUATION1387 V1 EN

U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
EQUATION1388 V1 EN

PosSeq

S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*

(Equation 201)

EQUATION1389 V1 EN

U =

3 U PosSeq

I = I PosSeq
EQUATION1390 V1 EN

L1L2

S = U L1 L 2 ( I L*1 - I L* 2 )
(Equation 203)

EQUATION1391 V1 EN

L2L3

S = U L 2 L3 ( I L 2 - I L3 )
*

(Equation 205)

EQUATION1393 V1 EN

I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2

L3L1

S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3 - I L1 )
*

(Equation 207)

EQUATION1395 V1 EN

I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2

L1

S = 3 U L1 I L1
*

(Equation 209)

EQUATION1397 V1 EN

I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2

U =

L2

S = 3 U L2 I L2
*

(Equation 211)

EQUATION1399 V1 EN

U =

L3

S = 3 U L3 I L3
*

EQUATION1401 V1 EN

(Equation 213)

Used when
only UL1L2
phase-tophase
voltage is
available
Used when
only UL2L3
phase-tophase
voltage is
available
Used when
only UL3L1
phase-tophase
voltage is
available

Used when
only UL2
phase-toearth voltage
is available

3 U L2

(Equation 212)
Used when
only UL3
phase-toearth voltage
is available

3 U L3

I = I L3
EQUATION1402 V1 EN

Used when
only
symmetrical
three phase
power shall
be measured

(Equation 210)

I = IL2

U =

Used when
three two
phase-tophase
voltages are
available

Used when
only UL1
phase-toearth voltage
is available

I = I L1

EQUATION1400 V1 EN

(Equation 208)

3 U L1

EQUATION1398 V1 EN

(Equation 206)

U = U L 3 L1

EQUATION1396 V1 EN

(Equation 204)

U = U L2 L3

EQUATION1394 V1 EN

(Equation 202)

U = U L1 L 2

EQUATION1392 V1 EN

(Equation 200)

Used when
three phaseto-earth
voltages are
available

(Equation 214)

* means complex conjugated value

998
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating
modes that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that
the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is
calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following
formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 215)

EQUATION1403 V1 EN

Q = Im( S )
(Equation 216)

EQUATION1404 V1 EN

S = S =

P +Q
2

EQUATION1405 V1 EN

(Equation 217)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN

(Equation 218)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the
function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and
voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is
lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when
current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.
Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).
The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated
to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in
figure 493.

999
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 493:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P,
Q, S, U, I and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the
step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with
the following recursive formula:
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
(Equation 219)

EQUATION1407 V1 EN

where:
X

is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function

XOld

is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k

is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

1000
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is

not present, it is possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for
current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either
current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values
for power (P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the
measurement supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these
values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the
possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section
"Measurement supervision").

Compensation facility

In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it
is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is
achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the
function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set
as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle
(setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for
these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally
calculated value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for
specific operating range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site.
However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to have an external power
meter with high accuracy class available.

Directionality

If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and

reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is
shown in the following figure 494.

1001
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Busbar

IED

Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-en.vsd
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN

Figure 494:

Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side
of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to
have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power
measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to
value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have
positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency

Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply

obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the
measurement block as an output.

17.1.7.3

Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to threephase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the
function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for
internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and

1002
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below

5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 493.
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each
amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section
"Measurement supervision".

17.1.7.4

Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the
configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on
the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

17.1.7.5

Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or
voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other
than X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to
calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and
transferred to corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

17.1.8

Technical data
Table 687:

CVMMXN technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Frequency

(0.95-1.05) fr

2.0 mHz

Voltage

(0.1-1.5) Ur

0.5% of Ur at UUr
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Connected current

(0.2-4.0) Ir

0.5% of Ir at I Ir
0.5% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

1003
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Active power, P

0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur

0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir

Reactive power, Q

0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur

0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir

Apparent power, S

0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Power factor, cos ()

0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Table 688:

Accuracy
1.0% of Sr at S Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
Conditions:
0.8 x Ur < U < 1.2 Ur
0.2 x Ir < I < 1.2 Ir

0.02

CMMXU technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Current at symmetrical load

(0.1-4.0) Ir

0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Phase angle at symmetrical load

(0.1-4.0) Ir

1.0 at 0.1 Ir < I 0.5 Ir

0.5 at 0.5 Ir < I 4.0 Ir

Table 689:

VMMXU technical data

Function

Range or value

Voltage

(10 to 300) V

0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Phase angle

(10 to 300) V

0.5 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

Table 690:

Accuracy

CMSQI technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Current positive sequence, I1

Three phase settings

(0.14.0) Ir

0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Current zero sequence, 3I0

Three phase settings

(0.11.0) Ir

0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Current negative sequence, I2

Three phase settings

(0.11.0) Ir

0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Phase angle

(0.14.0) Ir

1.0 at 0.1 Ir < I 0.5 Ir

0.5 at 0.5 Ir < I 4.0 Ir

1004
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 691:

VMSQI technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Voltage positive sequence, U1

(10 to 300) V

0.3% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Voltage zero sequence, 3U0

(10 to 300) V

0.3% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Voltage negative sequence, U2

(10 to 300) V

0.3% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Phase angle

(10 to 300) V

0.3 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

Table 692:

VNMMXU technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Voltage

(5 to 175) V

0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Phase angle

(5 to 175) V

0.5 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

17.2

Analog inputs

17.2.1

Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and
all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected
in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection
algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.
A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other
angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.
The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.

1005
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
17.2.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.
The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in
the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool
they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED
and used internally in the configuration.

17.2.3

Signals
Table 693:
Name

TRM_12I Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

CH7(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 7

CH8(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 8

CH9(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 9

CH10(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 10

CH11(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 11

CH12(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 12

Table 694:
Name

TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

CH7(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 7

CH8(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 8

CH9(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 9

Table continues on next page

1006
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

CH10(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 10

CH11(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 11

CH12(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 12

Table 695:
Name

TRM_6I Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

Table 696:
Name

TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

CH7(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 7

CH8(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 8

CH9(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 9

CH10(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 10

CH11(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 11

CH12(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 12

Table 697:
Name

TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Analogue input module status

CH1(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 1

CH2(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 2

CH3(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 3

CH4(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 4

CH5(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 5

Table continues on next page

1007
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

17.2.4

Type

Description

CH6(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 6

CH7(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 7

CH8(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 8

CH9(I)

STRING

Analogue current input 9

CH10(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 10

CH11(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 11

CH12(U)

STRING

Analogue voltage input 12

Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.

1008
Technical Manual

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 698:

Section 17
Monitoring

AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

1009
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name
PhaseAngleRef

1010

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)
TRM40-Ch1
TRM40-Ch2
TRM40-Ch3
TRM40-Ch4
TRM40-Ch5
TRM40-Ch6
TRM40-Ch7
TRM40-Ch8
TRM40-Ch9
TRM40-Ch10
TRM40-Ch11
TRM40-Ch12
TRM41-Ch1
TRM41-Ch2
TRM41-Ch3
TRM41-Ch4
TRM41-Ch5
TRM41-Ch6
TRM41-Ch7
TRM41-Ch8
TRM41-Ch9
TRM41-Ch10
TRM41-Ch11
TRM41-Ch12
MU1-L1I
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
MU4-L1I
MU4-L2I
MU4-L3I
MU4-L4I
MU4-L1U
MU4-L2U
MU4-L3U
MU4-L4U
MU5-L1I
MU5-L2I
MU5-L3I
MU5-L4I
MU5-L1U
MU5-L2U
MU5-L3U
MU5-L4U
MU6-L1I
MU6-L2I
MU6-L3I
MU6-L4I
MU6-L1U
MU6-L2U
MU6-L3U
MU6-L4U

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
TRM40-Ch1

Description
Reference channel for phase angle
presentation

Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 699:
Name

TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint7

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec7

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim7

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint8

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec8

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim8

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint9

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec9

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim9

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint10

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec10

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim10

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint11

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec11

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

Table continues on next page

1011
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTprim11

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint12

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec12

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim12

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

Table 700:
Name

TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

VTsec7

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim7

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec8

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim8

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec9

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim9

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec10

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim10

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec11

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

Table continues on next page

1012
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

VTprim11

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec12

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim12

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

Step

Default

Table 701:
Name

Description

TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

Table 702:
Name

TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

Table continues on next page

1013
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint7

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec7

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim7

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

VTsec8

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim8

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec9

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim9

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec10

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim10

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec11

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim11

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec12

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim12

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

Step

Default

Table 703:
Name

TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

Table continues on next page

1014
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint7

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec7

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim7

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint8

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec8

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim8

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CTStarPoint9

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec9

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim9

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

VTsec10

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim10

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec11

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim11

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec12

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim12

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

17.2.5

Monitored data
Table 704:
Name
Status

AISVBAS Monitored data

Type
INTEGER

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

Unit
-

Description
Service value status

1015
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 705:
Name
STATUS

Table 706:
Name
STATUS

Table 707:
Name
STATUS

Table 708:
Name
STATUS

Table 709:
Name
STATUS

17.2.6

TRM_12I Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

TRM_6I Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Analogue input module
status

Operation principle
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
into the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
out from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see
figure 2)

Forward means the direction is into the object.

Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

1016
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Definition of direction
for directional functions
Reverse

Definition of direction
for directional functions

Forward

Forward

Reverse

Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object

e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object

Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"

Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"
en05000456.vsd

IEC05000456 V1 EN

Figure 495:

Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject

or ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs
and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with their rated ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

17.3

Gas medium supervision SSIMG

17.3.1

Identification
Function description
Gas medium supervision

17.3.2

IEC 61850
identification
SSIMG

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
63

Functionality
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is
used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms
based on received information.

1017
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
17.3.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
SSIMG
BLOCK
BLK_ALM
PRESSURE
TEMP
PRES_ALM
PRES_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

PRESSURE
PRES_ALM
PRES_LO
TEMP
TEMP_ALM
TEMP_LO

IEC09000129-1-en.vsd
IEC09000129 V1 EN

Figure 496:

17.3.4

SSIMG function block

Signals
Table 710:
Name

SSIMG Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLK_ALM

BOOLEAN

Block all the alarms

PRESSURE

REAL

0.0

Pressure input from CB

TEMP

REAL

0.0

Temperature of the insulation medium from CB

PRES_ALM

BOOLEAN

Pressure alarm signal

PRES_LO

BOOLEAN

Pressure lockout signal

SET_P_LO

BOOLEAN

Set pressure lockout

SET_T_LO

BOOLEAN

Set temperature lockout

RESET_LO

BOOLEAN

Reset pressure and temperature lockout

Table 711:
Name

SSIMG Output signals

Type

Description

PRESSURE

REAL

Pressure service value

PRES_ALM

BOOLEAN

Pressure below alarm level

PRES_LO

BOOLEAN

Pressure below lockout level

TEMP

REAL

Temperature of the insulation medium

TEMP_ALM

BOOLEAN

Temperature above alarm level

TEMP_LO

BOOLEAN

Temperature above lockout level

1018
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.3.5

Settings

Table 712:

SSIMG Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

PressAlmLimit

1.00 - 100.00

0.01

5.00

Alarm setting for pressure

PressLOLimit

1.00 - 100.00

0.01

3.00

Pressure lockout setting

TempAlarmLimit

-40.00 - 200.00

0.01

30.00

Temperature alarm level setting of the

medium

TempLOLimit

-40.00 - 200.00

0.01

30.00

Temperature lockout level of the medium

tPressureAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for pressure alarm

tPressureLO

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for pressure lockout indication

tTempAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for temperature alarm

tTempLockOut

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for temperture lockout

tResetPressAlm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time delay for pressure alarm

tResetPressLO

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time delay for pressure lockout

tResetTempLO

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time delay for temperture lockout

tResetTempAlm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time delay for temperture alarm

17.3.6

Operation principle
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, and gas pressure
signal PRESSURE, are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and
PRES_LO. When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB
PRES_ALM is high then the gas pressure alarm, PRES_ALM will be initiated.
Similarly, if pressure input PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal
from CB PRES_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level
TempLOLimit then the gas pressure lockout, PRES_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which
the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tPressureAlarm or tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the
settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
PRES_ALM or lockout PRES_LO will be initiated. The SET_P_LO binary input is
used for setting the gas pressure lockout. The PRES_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

1019
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is
greater than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above
the settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input
is used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

17.3.7

Technical data
Table 713:

SSIMG Technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Pressure alarm level

1.00-100.00

10.0% of set value

Pressure lockout level

1.00-100.00

10.0% of set value

Temperature alarm level

-40.00-200.00

2.5% of set value

Temperature lockout level

-40.00-200.00

2.5% of set value

Time delay for pressure alarm

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Reset time delay for pressure

alarm

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Time delay for pressure lockout

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Time delay for temperature

alarm

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Reset time delay for

temperature alarm

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Time delay for temperature

lockout

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

17.4

Liquid medium supervision SSIML

17.4.1

Identification
Function description
Liquid medium supervision

IEC 61850
identification
SSIML

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
71

1020
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.4.2

Functionality
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as
input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on
received information.

17.4.3

Function block
SSIML
BLOCK
BLK_ALM
LEVEL
TEMP
LVL_ALM
LEVEL_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

LEVEL
LVL_ALM
LVL_LO
TEMP
TEMP_ALM
TEMP_LO

IEC09000128-1-en.vsd
IEC09000128 V1 EN

Figure 497:

17.4.4

SSIML function block

Signals
Table 714:
Name

SSIML Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLK_ALM

BOOLEAN

Block all the alarms

LEVEL

REAL

0.0

Level input from CB

TEMP

REAL

0.0

Temperature of the insulation medium from CB

LVL_ALM

BOOLEAN

Level alarm signal

LEVEL_LO

BOOLEAN

Level lockout signal

SET_L_LO

BOOLEAN

Set level lockout

SET_T_LO

BOOLEAN

Set temperature lockout

RESET_LO

BOOLEAN

Reset level and temperature lockout

Table 715:
Name

SSIML Output signals

Type

Description

LEVEL

REAL

Level service value

LVL_ALM

BOOLEAN

Level below alarm level

LVL_LO

BOOLEAN

Level below lockout level

TEMP

REAL

Temperature of the insulation medium

TEMP_ALM

BOOLEAN

Temperature above alarm level

TEMP_LO

BOOLEAN

Temperature above lockout level

1021
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.4.5
Table 716:
Name

Settings
SSIML Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

LevelAlmLimit

1.00 - 100.00

0.01

5.00

Alarm setting for level

LevelLOLimit

1.00 - 100.00

0.01

3.00

Level lockout setting

TempAlarmLimit

-40.00 - 200.00

0.01

30.00

Temperature alarm level setting of the

medium

TempLOLimit

-40.00 - 200.00

0.01

30.00

Temperature lockout level of the medium

tLevelAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for level alarm

tLevelLockOut

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for level lockout indication

tTempAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for temperature alarm

tTempLockOut

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for temperture lockout

tResetLevelAlm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time delay for level alarm

tResetLevelLO

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time delay for level lockout

tResetTempLO

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time delay for temperture lockout

tResetTempAlm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time delay for temperture alarm

17.4.6

Operation principle
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of oil level LVL_ALM, LEVEL_LO and oil level signal
LEVEL are taken into account to initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO.
When LEVEL is less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_ALM is
high, then the oil level indication alarm, LVL_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if
oil level input LEVEL is less than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB
LVL_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit,
then the oil level indication lockout, LVL_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or
tLevelLockOut have been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for
more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or
lockout LVL_LO will be initiated. The SET_L_LO binary input is used for setting
the gas pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output retains the last value until it is reset
by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used
with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM
can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms
and the lockout indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

1022
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is
greater than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above
the settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input
is used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

17.4.7

Technical data
Table 717:

SSIMLTechnical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Oil alarm level

1.00-100.00

10.0% of set value

Oil lockout level

1.00-100.00

10.0% of set value

Temperature alarm level

-40.00-200.00

2.5% of set value

Temperature lockout level

-40.00-200.00

2.5% of set value

Time delay for oil alarm

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Reset time delay for oil alarm

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Time delay for oil lockout

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Time delay for temperature

alarm

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Reset time delay for

temperature alarm

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

Time delay for temperature

lockout

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2% or 250ms whichever is

greater

17.5

Breaker monitoring SSCBR

17.5.1

Identification
Function description
Breaker monitoring

IEC 61850
identification
SSCBR

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

1023
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
17.5.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of
the breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of
operations reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit
breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge
indication or breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and estimate the
accumulated energy during arcing periods.

17.5.3

Function block
SSCBR
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKALM
TRIND
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
PRESALM
PRESLO
SPRCHRST
SPRCHRD
RSTCBWR
RSTTRVT
RSTIPOW
RSTSPCHT

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
TRCMD
TRVTOPAL
TRVTCLAL
OPERALM
OPERLO
CBLIFEAL
MONALM
IPOWALPH
IPOWLOPH
SPCHALM
GPRESALM
GPRESLO
IEC13000231-2-en.vsd

IEC13000231 V2 EN

Figure 498:

17.5.4

SSCBR function block

Signals
Table 718:
Name

SSCBR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block all the alarm and lockout indication

BLKALM

BOOLEAN

Block all the alarms

TRIND

BOOLEAN

Trip command from trip circuit

POSOPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O

POSCLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O

PRESALM

BOOLEAN

Pressure alarm indication from CB

PRESLO

BOOLEAN

Pressure lockout indication from CB

SPRCHRST

BOOLEAN

CB spring charging started indication signal

SPRCHRD

BOOLEAN

CB spring charged indication signal

RSTCBWR

BOOLEAN

Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter

RSTTRVT

BOOLEAN

Reset of CB closing and opening travel times

RSTIPOW

BOOLEAN

Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent

RSTSPCHT

BOOLEAN

Reset of CB spring charging time

1024
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 719:

SSCBR Output signals

Name

17.5.5
Table 720:
Name

Type

Description

OPENPOS

BOOLEAN

CB is in open position

CLOSEPOS

BOOLEAN

CB is in closed position

INVDPOS

BOOLEAN

CB is in Invalid Position

TRCMD

BOOLEAN

Open command issued to CB

TRVTOPAL

BOOLEAN

CB open travel time exceeded set value

TRVTCLAL

BOOLEAN

CB close travel time exceeded set value

OPERALM

BOOLEAN

Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit

OPERLO

BOOLEAN

Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit

CBLIFEAL

BOOLEAN

Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level

MONALM

BOOLEAN

CB 'not operated for long time' alarm

IPOWALPH

BOOLEAN

Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open

travel time exceeds alarm limit

IPOWLOPH

BOOLEAN

Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open

travel time exceeds lockout limit

SPCHALM

BOOLEAN

Spring charging time has crossed the set value

GPRESALM

BOOLEAN

Pressure below alarm level

GPRESLO

BOOLEAN

Pressure below lockout level

Settings
SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

PhSel

Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3

Phase L1

Phase selection

RatedOperCurr

100.00 - 5000.00

0.01

1000.00

Rated operating current of the breaker

OperNoRated

1 - 99999

10000

Number of operations possible at rated

current

RatedFltCurr

500.00 - 99999.99

0.01

5000.00

Rated fault current of the breaker

OperNoFault

1 - 10000

1000

Number of operations possible at rated

fault current

tTrOpenAlm

0.000 - 0.200

0.001

0.040

Alarm level for open travel time

tTrCloseAlm

0.000 - 0.200

0.001

0.040

Alarm level for close travel time

OperAlmLevel

0 - 9999

200

Alarm level for number of operations

OperLOLevel

0 - 9999

300

Lockout level for number of operations

AccSelCal

Aux Contact
Trip Signal

Trip Signal

Accumulated energy calculation selection

Table continues on next page

1025
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Step

Default

CurrExponent

0.50 - 3.00

0.01

2.00

Current exponent value used for energy

calculation

AccStopCurr

5.00 - 100.00

%IB

0.01

10.00

RMS current level below which energy

accumulation stops

AlmAccCurrPwr

0.00 - 20000.00

0.01

2500.00

Alarm level for accumulated

I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time

LOAccCurrPwr

0.00 - 20000.00

0.01

2500.00

Lockout level for accumulated

I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time

SpChAlmTime

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

1.00

Alarm level for spring charging time

InitCBRemLife

1 - 99999

10000

Initial value for remaining life estimates

InactiveAlDays

0 - 9999

Day

2000

Alarm level for inactive days counter

Table 721:
Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

OpenTimeCorr

-0.100 - 0.100

Step
0.001

Default
0.010

Description
Correction for open travel time

CloseTimeCorr

-0.100 - 0.100

0.001

0.010

Correction for close travel time

DirCoef

-3.00 - -0.50

0.01

-1.50

Directional coefficient for CB life

calculation

CBLifeAlmLevel

1 - 99999

5000

Alarm level for CB remaining life

ContTrCorr

-0.010 - 0.010

0.001

0.005

Correction for time difference in auxiliary

and main contacts open time

OperTimeDelay

0.000 - 0.200

0.001

0.020

Time delay between change of status of

trip output and start of main contact
separation

tDGasPresAlm

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

0.10

Time delay for gas pressure alarm

tDGasPresLO

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

0.10

Time delay for gas pressure lockout

InitCounterVal

0 - 9999

Initial value for number of operations

InitAccCurrPwr

0.00 - 9999.99

0.01

0.00

Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent

integr over CB open travel time value

InitInactDays

0 - 9999

Day

Initial value for inactive days

InactiveAlHrs

0 - 23

Hour

Alarm time for inactive days counter in

hours

1026
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.5.6

Monitored data
Table 722:
Name

17.5.7

SSCBR Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

TTRVOP

REAL

ms

Travel time of the CB

during opening operation

TTRVCL

REAL

ms

Travel time of the CB

during closing operation

NOOPER

INTEGER

Number of CB operation
cycle

CBLIFEPH

INTEGER

CB Remaining life of
respective phase

INADAYS

INTEGER

The number of days CB

has been inactive

IPOWPH

REAL

Accumulated
I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open
travel time

SPCHT

REAL

The charging time of the

CB spring

IRMSOUT

REAL

Service value output for

rms phase current input

Operation principle
The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions.
The subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are On and Off.
The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in
Figure 499. All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

1027
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
BLOCK

TTRVOP

CB Contact Travel
Time

TTRVCL
TRVTOPAL
TRVTCLAL

BLKALM
RSTTRVT

OPENPOS

CB Status

CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS

CBLIFEAL

Remaining Life of CB

CBLIFEPH

RSTCBWR

TRCMD

I3P-IL

Accumulated
energy

TRIND

IPOWALPH
IPOWLOPH
IPOWPH

RSTIPOW

CB Operation
Cycles

OPERALM

CB Operation
Monitoring

MONALM

NOOPER

INADAYS

SPCHALM
SPRCHRST
SPRCHRD

CB Spring Charge
Monitoring

SPCHT

CB Gas Pressure
Indication

GPRESALM

RSTSPCHT

PRESALM
PRESLO

GPRESLO
IEC12000624-3-en.vsd

IEC12000624 V3 EN

Figure 499:

Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

1028
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.5.7.1

Circuit breaker contact travel time

The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact
travel time for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact
travel time measurement is described in Figure 500.
POSCLOSE

TTRVOP

Contact travel
time
calculation

POSOPEN
RSTTRVT

TTRVCL

TRVTOPAL

Alarm limit
check

BLOCK

TRVTCLAL

BLKALM
IEC12000615-2-en.vsd

IEC12000615 V2 EN

Figure 500:

Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time

Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state
of change of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the
opening of the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts.
Similarly, the closing travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation
factor has been added to consider the time difference between auxiliary contact
operation and the actual physical opening of the breaker main contact.
Main Contact

1
0
POSCLOSE

1
0
POSOPEN

1
0

t1

tOpen

t2

tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2

t3

tClose

t4

tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4
IEC12000616_1_en.vsd

IEC12000616 V1 EN

Figure 501:

Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact
is completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the
actual opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting.
1029
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr
(t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time
(TTRVCL) are given as service values.
The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the
input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the
tTrOpenAlm setting, the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the
measured closing travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting,
the TRVTCLAL output is activated.
It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by
activating the BLOCK input.

17.5.7.2

Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker,
that is, whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is
described in Figure 502.

Phase current
check

I3P-ILRMSPH

Contact
position
indicator

POSCLOSE
POSOPEN

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
IEC12000613-3-en.vsd

IEC12000613 V3 EN

Figure 502:

Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status

Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting.
If the current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact
position indicator module as closed circuit breaker.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is
low, the POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting
AccStopCurr value. The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low
and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary

1030
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low
and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr.
The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS,
CLOSEPOS and INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.

17.5.7.3

Remaining life of circuit breaker

The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on
the wear and tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of
the circuit breaker reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the
interrupted current. The remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit
breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is decreased
by at least one when the circuit breaker is opened. The operation of the remaining
life of circuit breaker subfunction is described in Figure 503.
I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining
life estimation

POSCLOSE

CBLIFEPH

RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
Check

BLOCK

CBLIFEAL

BLKALM
IEC12000620-3-en.vsd

IEC12000620 V3 EN

Figure 503:

Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit

breaker

Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the
RatedOperCurr setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one
operation. If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the
RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced
by the set OperNoRated by divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the tripping
current is between these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is
calculated based on the maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer.
The OperNoRated parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform
at the rated current. The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the
breaker can perform at the rated fault current.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the
CBLifeAlmLevel setting, the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.
It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary
input BLKALM.

1031
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to
the InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from
LHMI or by activating the input RSTCBWR.

17.5.7.4

Accumulated energy
The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based
on current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The
operation is described in Figure 504.
The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil
circuit TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.
I3P-IL
I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE
TRIND

TRCMD
Accumulated
energy
calculation

IPOWPH

LRSTIPOW

Alarm limit
Check

BLOCK

IPOWALPH
IPOWLOPH

BLKALM
IEC12000619-3-en.vsd
IEC12000619 V3 EN

Figure 504:

Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by
selecting the AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.
The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends
when the RMS current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.

1032
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Main Contact

Main Contact

close

close
open

POSCLOSE

open

POSCLOSE 1

Energy
Accumulation
starts

Energy
Accumulation
starts

ContTrCorr
(Negative)

ContTrCorr
(Positive)
IEC12000618_1_en.vsd

IEC12000618 V1 EN

Figure 505:

Significance of correction factor setting

The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to

the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy
starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the
ContTrCorr setting has passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts
in advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.
Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip
output. TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay
between the trip initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the
setting OperTimeDelay.
The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value
can be reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input
RSTIPOW.

Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set
value AlmAccCurrPwr.
IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the
LOAccCurrPwr setting.
The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary
input BLOCK.

17.5.7.5

Circuit breaker operation cycles

The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closingopening sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after
each closing-opening sequence. The operation is described in Figure 506.

1033
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

POSCLOSE
Operation
counter

POSOPEN

NOOPER

RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
Check

BLOCK
BLKALM

OPERALM
OPERLO

IEC12000617 V2 EN

Figure 506:

Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change
of the auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit
breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCounterVal parameter and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on
the LHMI or activating the input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.
If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the
OperLOLevel setting, the OPERLO output is activated.
The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLOCK
input is activated.

17.5.7.6

Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of
the circuit breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set
level. The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in Figure
507.
POSCLOSE

INADAYS

Inactive timer

POSOPEN

BLOCK

Alarm limit
Check

MONALM

BLKALM
IEC12000614 V2 EN

Figure 507:

Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring

1034
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has
remained in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring
the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial
number of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit
value defined by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal
MONALM can be blocked by activating the binary inputs BLOCK and BLKALM.

17.5.7.7

Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring
charging time. The operation is described in Figure 508.
SPRCHRST

Spring charging
time
measurement

SPRCHRD
RSTSPCHT

SPCHT

Alarm limit
Check

BLOCK

SPCHALM

BLKALM
IEC12000621 V2 EN

Figure 508:

Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge

indication

Spring charging time measurement

The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging
time. SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring
charging time is calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring
charging indication is described in Figure508.
The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The
spring charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input
RSTSPCHT.

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the
SpChAlmTime setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.
It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary
input.

1035
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
17.5.7.8

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure
inside the arc chamber. The operation is described in Figure 509.
PRESALM
BLOCK

AND

tDGasPresAlm

GPRESALM

BLKALM
PRESLO

AND

tDGasPresLO

GPRESLO

IEC12000622 V3 EN

Figure 509:

Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure

indication

When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated
after a time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can
be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes
high, activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the
tDGasPresLO setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLOCK input.
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals
from the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

17.5.8

Technical data
Table 723:

SSCBR Technical data

Function

17.6

Range or value

Accuracy

Alarm level for open and close

travel time

(0 200) ms

2 ms

Alarm level for number of

operations

(0 9999)

Independent time delay for

spring charging time alarm

(0.00 60.00) s

0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
greater

Independent time delay for gas

pressure alarm

(0.00 60.00) s

0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
greater

Independent time delay for gas

pressure lockout

(0.00 60.00) s

0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
greater

Event function EVENT

1036
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.6.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Event function

IEC 60617
identification

EVENT

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

S00946 V1 EN

17.6.2

Functionality
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is
connected to the Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for
LON and SPA communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.

17.6.3

Function block
EVENT
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN

Figure 510:

17.6.4

EVENT function block

Signals
Table 724:
Name

EVENT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 1

INPUT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 2

INPUT3

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 3

Table continues on next page

1037
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

17.6.5
Table 725:

Type

Default

Description

INPUT4

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 4

INPUT5

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 5

INPUT6

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 6

INPUT7

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 7

INPUT8

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 8

INPUT9

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 9

INPUT10

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 10

INPUT11

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 11

INPUT12

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 12

INPUT13

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 13

INPUT14

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 14

INPUT15

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 15

INPUT16

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 16

Step

Default

Settings
EVENT Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

SPAChannelMask

Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16

Off

SPA channel mask

LONChannelMask

Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16

Off

LON channel mask

EventMask1

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 1

EventMask2

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 2

Table continues on next page

1038
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

EventMask3

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 3

EventMask4

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 4

EventMask5

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 5

EventMask6

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 6

EventMask7

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 7

EventMask8

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 8

EventMask9

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 9

EventMask10

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 10

EventMask11

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 11

EventMask12

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 12

EventMask13

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 13

Table continues on next page

1039
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

EventMask14

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 14

EventMask15

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 15

EventMask16

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 16

MinRepIntVal1

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 1

MinRepIntVal2

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 2

MinRepIntVal3

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 3

MinRepIntVal4

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 4

MinRepIntVal5

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 5

MinRepIntVal6

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 6

MinRepIntVal7

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 7

MinRepIntVal8

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 8

MinRepIntVal9

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 9

MinRepIntVal10

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 10

MinRepIntVal11

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 11

MinRepIntVal12

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 12

MinRepIntVal13

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 13

MinRepIntVal14

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 14

MinRepIntVal15

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 15

MinRepIntVal16

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 16

17.6.6

Operation principle
The main purpose of the event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the
state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a
state transition, for which event generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given
a name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to
create single events, but are also intended for double indication events.
EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical
signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the

1040
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal
logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of
EVENT function. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary
input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.
The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and
alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each
input is intended to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are
treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can
be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This
can be performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask
respectively. For each communication type these settings are available:

Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It
is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each
input channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily
saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota
limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume
the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block
will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66%
of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45
events per second.

17.7

Disturbance report DRPRDRE

1041
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
17.7.1

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Identification
Function description

17.7.2

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Analog input signals

A41RADR

Disturbance report

DRPRDRE

Disturbance report

A1RADR

Disturbance report

A2RADR

Disturbance report

A3RADR

Disturbance report

A4RADR

Disturbance report

B1RBDR

Disturbance report

B2RBDR

Disturbance report

B3RBDR

Disturbance report

B4RBDR

Disturbance report

B5RBDR

Disturbance report

B6RBDR

Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with
a, maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

Event list
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR
function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected
signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in
the recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The
same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local
1042
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

HMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files
may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

17.7.3

Function block
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN

Figure 511:

DRPRDRE function block

A1RADR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
IEC05000430-3-en.vsd
IEC05000430 V3 EN

Figure 512:

A1RADR function block

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40
IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN

Figure 513:

A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

1043
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN

Figure 514:

17.7.4

B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR B6RBDR

Signals
Table 726:
Name

DRPRDRE Output signals

Type

Description

DRPOFF

BOOLEAN

Disturbance report function turned off

RECSTART

BOOLEAN

Disturbance recording started

RECMADE

BOOLEAN

Disturbance recording made

CLEARED

BOOLEAN

All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared

MEMUSED

BOOLEAN

More than 80% of memory used

Table 727:
Name

A1RADR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

GRPINPUT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 1

GRPINPUT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 2

GRPINPUT3

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 3

GRPINPUT4

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 4

GRPINPUT5

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 5

GRPINPUT6

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 6

GRPINPUT7

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 7

Table continues on next page

1044
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

GRPINPUT8

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 8

GRPINPUT9

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 9

GRPINPUT10

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 10

Table 728:
Name

A2RADR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

GRPINPUT11

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 11

GRPINPUT12

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 12

GRPINPUT13

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 13

GRPINPUT14

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 14

GRPINPUT15

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 15

GRPINPUT16

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 16

GRPINPUT17

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 17

GRPINPUT18

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 18

GRPINPUT19

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 19

GRPINPUT20

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 20

Table 729:
Name

A3RADR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

GRPINPUT21

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 21

GRPINPUT22

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 22

GRPINPUT23

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 23

GRPINPUT24

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 24

GRPINPUT25

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 25

GRPINPUT26

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 26

GRPINPUT27

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 27

Table continues on next page

1045
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Default

Description

GRPINPUT28

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 28

GRPINPUT29

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 29

GRPINPUT30

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 30

Table 730:
Name

A4RADR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT31

REAL

Analog channel 31

INPUT32

REAL

Analog channel 32

INPUT33

REAL

Analog channel 33

INPUT34

REAL

Analog channel 34

INPUT35

REAL

Analog channel 35

INPUT36

REAL

Analog channel 36

INPUT37

REAL

Analog channel 37

INPUT38

REAL

Analog channel 38

INPUT39

REAL

Analog channel 39

INPUT40

REAL

Analog channel 40

Table 731:
Name

B1RBDR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 16

1046
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 732:
Name

B2RBDR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT17

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 17

INPUT18

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 18

INPUT19

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 19

INPUT20

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 20

INPUT21

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 21

INPUT22

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 22

INPUT23

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 23

INPUT24

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 24

INPUT25

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 25

INPUT26

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 26

INPUT27

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 27

INPUT28

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 28

INPUT29

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 29

INPUT30

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 30

INPUT31

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 31

INPUT32

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 32

Table 733:
Name

B3RBDR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT33

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 33

INPUT34

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 34

INPUT35

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 35

INPUT36

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 36

INPUT37

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 37

INPUT38

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 38

INPUT39

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 39

INPUT40

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 40

INPUT41

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 41

INPUT42

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 42

INPUT43

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 43

INPUT44

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 44

INPUT45

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 45

INPUT46

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 46

INPUT47

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 47

INPUT48

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 48

1047
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 734:
Name

B4RBDR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT49

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 49

INPUT50

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 50

INPUT51

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 51

INPUT52

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 52

INPUT53

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 53

INPUT54

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 54

INPUT55

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 55

INPUT56

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 56

INPUT57

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 57

INPUT58

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 58

INPUT59

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 59

INPUT60

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 60

INPUT61

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 61

INPUT62

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 62

INPUT63

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 63

INPUT64

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 64

Table 735:
Name

B5RBDR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT65

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 65

INPUT66

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 66

INPUT67

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 67

INPUT68

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 68

INPUT69

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 69

INPUT70

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 70

INPUT71

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 71

INPUT72

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 72

INPUT73

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 73

INPUT74

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 74

INPUT75

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 75

INPUT76

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 76

INPUT77

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 77

INPUT78

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 78

INPUT79

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 79

INPUT80

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 80

1048
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 736:

B6RBDR Input signals

Name

17.7.5
Table 737:
Name

Type

Default

Description

INPUT81

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 81

INPUT82

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 82

INPUT83

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 83

INPUT84

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 84

INPUT85

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 85

INPUT86

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 86

INPUT87

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 87

INPUT88

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 88

INPUT89

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 89

INPUT90

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 90

INPUT91

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 91

INPUT92

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 92

INPUT93

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 93

INPUT94

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 94

INPUT95

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 95

INPUT96

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 96

Settings
DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

PreFaultRecT

0.05 - 9.90

0.01

0.10

Pre-fault recording time

PostFaultRecT

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

0.5

Post-fault recording time

TimeLimit

0.5 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Fault recording time limit

PostRetrig

Off
On

Off

Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)

MaxNoStoreRec

10 - 100

100

Maximum number of stored disturbances

ZeroAngleRef

1 - 30

Ch

Trip value recorder, phasor reference

channel

OpModeTest

Off
On

Off

Operation mode during test mode

1049
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

Table 738:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation01

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Operation02

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Operation03

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Operation04

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Operation05

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Operation06

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Operation07

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Operation08

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Operation09

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Operation10

Off
On

Off

Operation On/Off

Table 739:
Name

A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

NomValue01

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 1

UnderTrigOp01

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 1 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe01

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 1

in % of signal

OverTrigOp01

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

1 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe01

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in

% of signal

NomValue02

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 2

UnderTrigOp02

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 2 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe02

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 2

in % of signal

OverTrigOp02

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

2 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe02

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in

% of signal

NomValue03

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 3

UnderTrigOp03

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 3 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe03

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 3

in % of signal

Table continues on next page

1050
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OverTrigOp03

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

3 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe03

0 - 5000

200

Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in

% of signal

NomValue04

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 4

UnderTrigOp04

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 4 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe04

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 4

in % of signal

OverTrigOp04

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

4 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe04

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in

% of signal

NomValue05

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 5

UnderTrigOp05

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 5 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe05

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 5

in % of signal

OverTrigOp05

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

5 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe05

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in

% of signal

NomValue06

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 6

UnderTrigOp06

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 6 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe06

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 6

in % of signal

OverTrigOp06

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

6 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe06

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in

% of signal

NomValue07

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 7

UnderTrigOp07

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 7 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe07

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 7

in % of signal

OverTrigOp07

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

7 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe07

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in

% of signal

NomValue08

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 8

UnderTrigOp08

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 8 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe08

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 8

in % of signal

OverTrigOp08

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

8 (on) or not (off)

Table continues on next page

1051
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OverTrigLe08

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 8 in

% of signal

NomValue09

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 9

UnderTrigOp09

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 9 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe09

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 9

in % of signal

OverTrigOp09

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

9 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe09

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in

% of signal

NomValue10

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 10

UnderTrigOp10

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 10 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe10

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 10

in % of signal

OverTrigOp10

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

10 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe10

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 10

in % of signal

Table 740:
Name

A2RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation11

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation12

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation13

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation14

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation15

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation16

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation17

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation18

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation19

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation20

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

1052
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 741:
Name

A2RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

NomValue11

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 11

UnderTrigOp11

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 11 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe11

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 11

in % of signal

OverTrigOp11

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

11 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe11

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 11

in % of signal

NomValue12

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 12

UnderTrigOp12

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 12 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe12

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 12

in % of signal

OverTrigOp12

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

12 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe12

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 12

in % of signal

NomValue13

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 13

UnderTrigOp13

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 13 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe13

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 13

in % of signal

OverTrigOp13

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

13 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe13

0 - 5000

200

Overtrigger level for analog channel 13

in % of signal

NomValue14

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 14

UnderTrigOp14

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 14 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe14

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 14

in % of signal

OverTrigOp14

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

14 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe14

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 14

in % of signal

NomValue15

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 15

UnderTrigOp15

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 15 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe15

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 15

in % of signal

OverTrigOp15

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

15 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe15

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 15

in % of signal

NomValue16

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 16

Table continues on next page

1053
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

UnderTrigOp16

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 16 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe16

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 16

in % of signal

OverTrigOp16

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

16 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe16

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 16

in % of signal

NomValue17

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 17

UnderTrigOp17

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 17 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe17

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 17

in % of signal

OverTrigOp17

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

17 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe17

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 17

in % of signal

NomValue18

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 18

UnderTrigOp18

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 18 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe18

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 18

in % of signal

OverTrigOp18

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

18 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe18

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 18

in % of signal

NomValue19

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 19

UnderTrigOp19

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 19 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe19

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 19

in % of signal

OverTrigOp19

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

19 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe19

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 19

in % of signal

NomValue20

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 20

UnderTrigOp20

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 20 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe20

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 20

in % of signal

OverTrigOp20

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

20 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe20

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 20

in % of signal

1054
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 742:
Name

A3RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation21

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation22

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation23

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation24

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation25

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation26

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation27

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation28

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation29

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation30

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Table 743:
Name

A3RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

NomValue21

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 21

UnderTrigOp21

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 21 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe21

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 21

in % of signal

OverTrigOp21

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

21 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe21

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 21

in % of signal

NomValue22

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 22

UnderTrigOp22

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 22 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe22

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 22

in % of signal

OverTrigOp22

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

22 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe22

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 22

in % of signal

NomValue23

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 23

UnderTrigOp23

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 23 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe23

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 23

in % of signal

Table continues on next page

1055
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OverTrigOp23

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

23 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe23

0 - 5000

200

Overtrigger level for analog channel 23

in % of signal

NomValue24

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 24

UnderTrigOp24

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 24 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe24

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 24

in % of signal

OverTrigOp24

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

24 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe24

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 24

in % of signal

NomValue25

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 25

UnderTrigOp25

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 25 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe25

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 25

in % of signal

OverTrigOp25

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

25 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe25

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 25

in % of signal

NomValue26

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 26

UnderTrigOp26

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 26 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe26

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 26

in % of signal

OverTrigOp26

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

26 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe26

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 26

in % of signal

NomValue27

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 27

UnderTrigOp27

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 27 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe27

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 27

in % of signal

OverTrigOp27

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

27 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe27

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 27

in % of signal

NomValue28

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 28

UnderTrigOp28

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 28 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe28

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 28

in % of signal

OverTrigOp28

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

28 (on) or not (off)

Table continues on next page

1056
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OverTrigLe28

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 28

in % of signal

NomValue29

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 29

UnderTrigOp29

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 29 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe29

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 29

in % of signal

OverTrigOp29

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

29 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe29

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 29

in % of signal

NomValue30

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 30

UnderTrigOp30

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 30 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe30

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 30

in % of signal

OverTrigOp30

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

30 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe30

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 30

in % of signal

Table 744:
Name

A4RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation31

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation32

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation33

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation34

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation35

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation36

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation37

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation38

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation39

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

Operation40

Off
On

Off

Operation On/off

1057
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

Table 745:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A4RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

NomValue31

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 31

UnderTrigOp31

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 31 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe31

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 31

in % of signal

OverTrigOp31

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

31 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe31

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 31

in % of signal

NomValue32

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 32

UnderTrigOp32

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 32 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe32

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 32

in % of signal

OverTrigOp32

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

32 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe32

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 32

in % of signal

NomValue33

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 33

UnderTrigOp33

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 33 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe33

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 33

in % of signal

OverTrigOp33

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

33 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe33

0 - 5000

200

Overtrigger level for analog channel 33

in % of signal

NomValue34

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 34

UnderTrigOp34

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 34 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe34

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 34

in % of signal

OverTrigOp34

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

34 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe34

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 34

in % of signal

NomValue35

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 35

UnderTrigOp35

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 35 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe35

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 35

in % of signal

OverTrigOp35

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

35 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe35

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 35

in % of signal

NomValue36

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 36

Table continues on next page

1058
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

UnderTrigOp36

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 36 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe36

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 36

in % of signal

OverTrigOp36

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

36 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe36

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 36

in % of signal

NomValue37

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 37

UnderTrigOp37

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 37 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe37

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 37

in % of signal

OverTrigOp37

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

37 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe37

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 37

in % of signal

NomValue38

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 38

UnderTrigOp38

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 38 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe38

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 38

in % of signal

OverTrigOp38

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

38 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe38

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 38

in % of signal

NomValue39

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 39

UnderTrigOp39

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 39 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe39

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 39

in % of signal

OverTrigOp39

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

39 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe39

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 39

in % of signal

NomValue40

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 40

UnderTrigOp40

Off
On

Off

Use under level trigger for analog

channel 40 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe40

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog channel 40

in % of signal

OverTrigOp40

Off
On

Off

Use over level trigger for analog channel

40 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe40

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog channel 40

in % of signal

1059
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

Table 746:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR01

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED01

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1

TrigDR02

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED02

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2

TrigDR03

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED03

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3

TrigDR04

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED04

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4

TrigDR05

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED05

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5

TrigDR06

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED06

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6

TrigDR07

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED07

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7

TrigDR08

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED08

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8

TrigDR09

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

Table continues on next page

1060
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SetLED09

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9

TrigDR10

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED10

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10

TrigDR11

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED11

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11

TrigDR12

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED12

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12

TrigDR13

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED13

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13

TrigDR14

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED14

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14

TrigDR15

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED15

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15

TrigDR16

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED16

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16

FunType1

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo1

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel 1

(IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType2

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

Table continues on next page

1061
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

InfNo2

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel 2

(IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType3

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo3

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel 3

(IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType4

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo4

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel 4

(IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType5

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo5

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel 5

(IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType6

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo6

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel 6

(IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType7

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo7

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel 7

(IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType8

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo8

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel 8

(IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType9

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo9

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel 9

(IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType10

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo10

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

10 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType11

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo11

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

11 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType12

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo12

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

12 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType13

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo13

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

13 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType14

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

Table continues on next page

1062
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

InfNo14

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

14 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType15

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo15

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

15 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType16

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo16

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

16 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 747:
Name

B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigLevel01

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 1

IndicationMa01

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 1

TrigLevel02

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 2

IndicationMa02

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 2

TrigLevel03

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 3

IndicationMa03

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 3

TrigLevel04

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 4

IndicationMa04

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 4

TrigLevel05

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 5

IndicationMa05

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 5

TrigLevel06

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 6

IndicationMa06

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 6

TrigLevel07

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 7

IndicationMa07

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 7

TrigLevel08

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 8

IndicationMa08

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 8

TrigLevel09

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 9

Table continues on next page

1063
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IndicationMa09

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 9

TrigLevel10

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 10

IndicationMa10

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 10

TrigLevel11

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 11

IndicationMa11

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 11

TrigLevel12

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 12

IndicationMa12

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 12

TrigLevel13

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 13

IndicationMa13

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 13

TrigLevel14

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 14

IndicationMa14

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 14

TrigLevel15

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 15

IndicationMa15

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 15

TrigLevel16

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 16

IndicationMa16

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 16

Table 748:
Name

B2RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR17

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED17

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 17

TrigDR18

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED18

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 18

TrigDR19

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

Table continues on next page

1064
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SetLED19

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 19

TrigDR20

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED20

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 20

TrigDR21

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED21

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 21

TrigDR22

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED22

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 22

TrigDR23

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED23

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 23

TrigDR24

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED24

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 24

TrigDR25

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED25

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 25

TrigDR26

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED26

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 26

TrigDR27

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED27

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 27

Table continues on next page

1065
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR28

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED28

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 28

TrigDR29

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED29

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 29

TrigDR30

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED30

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 30

TrigDR31

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED31

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 31

TrigDR32

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED32

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 32

FunType17

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 17 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo17

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

17 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType18

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 18 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo18

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

18 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType19

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 19 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo19

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

19 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType20

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 20 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo20

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

20 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType21

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 21 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo21

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

21 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType22

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 22 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

Table continues on next page

1066
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

InfNo22

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

22 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType23

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 23 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo23

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

23 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType24

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 24 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo24

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

24 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType25

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 25 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo25

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

25 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType26

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 26 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo26

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

26 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType27

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 27 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo27

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

27 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType28

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 28 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo28

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

28 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType29

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 29 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo29

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

29 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType30

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 30 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo30

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

30 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType31

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 31 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo31

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

31 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType32

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 32 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo32

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

32 (IEC -60870-5-103)

1067
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

Table 749:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

B2RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigLevel17

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 17

IndicationMa17

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 17

TrigLevel18

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 18

IndicationMa18

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 18

TrigLevel19

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 19

IndicationMa19

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 19

TrigLevel20

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 20

IndicationMa20

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 20

TrigLevel21

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 21

IndicationMa21

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 21

TrigLevel22

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 22

IndicationMa22

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 22

TrigLevel23

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 23

IndicationMa23

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 23

TrigLevel24

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 24

IndicationMa24

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 24

TrigLevel25

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 25

IndicationMa25

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 25

TrigLevel26

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 26

IndicationMa26

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 26

TrigLevel27

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 27

IndicationMa27

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 27

TrigLevel28

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 28

IndicationMa28

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 28

Table continues on next page

1068
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigLevel29

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 29

IndicationMa29

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 29

TrigLevel30

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 30

IndicationMa30

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 30

TrigLevel31

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 31

IndicationMa31

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 31

TrigLevel32

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 32

IndicationMa32

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 32

Table 750:
Name

B3RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR33

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED33

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 33

TrigDR34

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED34

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 34

TrigDR35

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED35

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 35

TrigDR36

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED36

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 36

TrigDR37

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED37

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 37

Table continues on next page

1069
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR38

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED38

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 38

TrigDR39

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED39

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 39

TrigDR40

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED40

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 40

TrigDR41

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED41

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 41

TrigDR42

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED42

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 42

TrigDR43

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED43

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 43

TrigDR44

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED44

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 44

TrigDR45

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED45

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 45

TrigDR46

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

Table continues on next page

1070
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SetLED46

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 46

TrigDR47

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED47

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 47

TrigDR48

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED48

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 48

FunType33

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 33 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo33

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

33 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType34

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 34 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo34

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

34 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType35

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 35 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo35

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

35 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType36

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 36 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo36

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

36 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType37

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 37 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo37

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

37 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType38

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 38 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo38

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

38 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType39

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 39 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo39

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

39 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType40

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 40 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo40

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

40 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType41

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 41 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

Table continues on next page

1071
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

InfNo41

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

41 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType42

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 42 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo42

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

42 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType43

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 43 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo43

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

43 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType44

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 44 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo44

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

44 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType45

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 45 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo45

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

45 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType46

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 46 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo46

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

46 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType47

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 47 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo47

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

47 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType48

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 48 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo48

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

48 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 751:
Name

B3RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigLevel33

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 33

IndicationMa33

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 33

TrigLevel34

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 34

IndicationMa34

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 34

TrigLevel35

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 35

IndicationMa35

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 35

TrigLevel36

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 36

Table continues on next page

1072
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IndicationMa36

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 36

TrigLevel37

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 37

IndicationMa37

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 37

TrigLevel38

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 38

IndicationMa38

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 38

TrigLevel39

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 39

IndicationMa39

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 39

TrigLevel40

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 40

IndicationMa40

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 40

TrigLevel41

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 41

IndicationMa41

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 41

TrigLevel42

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 42

IndicationMa42

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 42

TrigLevel43

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 43

IndicationMa43

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 43

TrigLevel44

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 44

IndicationMa44

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 44

TrigLevel45

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 45

IndicationMa45

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 45

TrigLevel46

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 46

IndicationMa46

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 46

TrigLevel47

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 47

Table continues on next page

1073
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IndicationMa47

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 47

TrigLevel48

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 48

IndicationMa48

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 48

Table 752:
Name

B4RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR49

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED49

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 49

TrigDR50

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED50

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 50

TrigDR51

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED51

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 51

TrigDR52

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED52

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 52

TrigDR53

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED53

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 53

TrigDR54

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED54

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 54

TrigDR55

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED55

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 55

Table continues on next page

1074
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR56

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED56

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 56

TrigDR57

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED57

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 57

TrigDR58

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED58

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 58

TrigDR59

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED59

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 59

TrigDR60

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED60

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 60

TrigDR61

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED61

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 61

TrigDR62

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED62

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 62

TrigDR63

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED63

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 63

TrigDR64

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

Table continues on next page

1075
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SetLED64

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 64

FunType49

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 49 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo49

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

49 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType50

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 50 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo50

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

50 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType51

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 51 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo51

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

51 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType52

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 52 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo52

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

52 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType53

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 53 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo53

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

53 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType54

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 54 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo54

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

54 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType55

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 55 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo55

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

55 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType56

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 56 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo56

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

56 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType57

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 57 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo57

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

57 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType58

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 58 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo58

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

58 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType59

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 59 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo59

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

59 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType60

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 60 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

Table continues on next page

1076
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

InfNo60

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

60 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType61

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 61 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo61

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

61 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType62

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 62 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo62

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

62 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType63

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 63 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo63

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

63 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType64

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 64 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo64

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

64 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 753:
Name

B4RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigLevel49

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 49

IndicationMa49

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 49

TrigLevel50

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 50

IndicationMa50

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 50

TrigLevel51

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 51

IndicationMa51

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 51

TrigLevel52

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 52

IndicationMa52

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 52

TrigLevel53

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 53

IndicationMa53

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 53

TrigLevel54

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 54

IndicationMa54

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 54

TrigLevel55

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 55

Table continues on next page

1077
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IndicationMa55

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 55

TrigLevel56

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 56

IndicationMa56

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 56

TrigLevel57

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 57

IndicationMa57

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 57

TrigLevel58

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 58

IndicationMa58

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 58

TrigLevel59

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 59

IndicationMa59

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 59

TrigLevel60

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 60

IndicationMa60

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 60

TrigLevel61

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 61

IndicationMa61

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 61

TrigLevel62

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 62

IndicationMa62

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 62

TrigLevel63

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 63

IndicationMa63

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 63

TrigLevel64

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 64

IndicationMa64

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 64

1078
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 754:
Name

B5RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR65

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED65

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 65

TrigDR66

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED66

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 66

TrigDR67

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED67

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 67

TrigDR68

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED68

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 68

TrigDR69

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED69

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 69

TrigDR70

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED70

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 70

TrigDR71

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED71

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 71

TrigDR72

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED72

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 72

TrigDR73

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

Table continues on next page

1079
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SetLED73

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 73

TrigDR74

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED74

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 74

TrigDR75

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED75

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 75

TrigDR76

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED76

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 76

TrigDR77

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED77

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 77

TrigDR78

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED78

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 78

TrigDR79

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED79

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 79

TrigDR80

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED80

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 80

FunType65

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 65 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo65

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

65 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType66

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 66 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

Table continues on next page

1080
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

InfNo66

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

66 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType67

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 67 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo67

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

67 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType68

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 68 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo68

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

68 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType69

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 69 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo69

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

69 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType70

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 70 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo70

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

70 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType71

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 71 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo71

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

71 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType72

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 72 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo72

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

72 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType73

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 73 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo73

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

73 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType74

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 74 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo74

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

74 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType75

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 75 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo75

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

75 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType76

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 76 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo76

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

76 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType77

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 77 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo77

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

77 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType78

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 78 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

Table continues on next page

1081
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

InfNo78

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

78 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType79

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 79 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo79

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

79 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType80

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 80 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo80

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

80 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 755:
Name

B5RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigLevel65

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 65

IndicationMa65

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 65

TrigLevel66

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 66

IndicationMa66

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 66

TrigLevel67

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 67

IndicationMa67

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 67

TrigLevel68

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 68

IndicationMa68

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 68

TrigLevel69

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 69

IndicationMa69

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 69

TrigLevel70

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 70

IndicationMa70

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 70

TrigLevel71

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 71

IndicationMa71

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 71

TrigLevel72

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 72

IndicationMa72

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 72

TrigLevel73

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 73

Table continues on next page

1082
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IndicationMa73

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 73

TrigLevel74

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 74

IndicationMa74

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 74

TrigLevel75

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 75

IndicationMa75

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 75

TrigLevel76

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 76

IndicationMa76

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 76

TrigLevel77

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 77

IndicationMa77

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 77

TrigLevel78

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 78

IndicationMa78

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 78

TrigLevel79

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 79

IndicationMa79

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 79

TrigLevel80

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 80

IndicationMa80

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 80

Table 756:
Name

B6RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR81

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED81

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 81

TrigDR82

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED82

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 82

TrigDR83

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

Table continues on next page

1083
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SetLED83

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 83

TrigDR84

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED84

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 84

TrigDR85

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED85

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 85

TrigDR86

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED86

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 86

TrigDR87

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED87

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 87

TrigDR88

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED88

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 88

TrigDR89

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED89

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 89

TrigDR90

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED90

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 90

TrigDR91

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED91

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 91

Table continues on next page

1084
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigDR92

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED92

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 92

TrigDR93

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED93

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 93

TrigDR94

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED94

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 94

TrigDR95

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED95

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 95

TrigDR96

Off
On

Off

Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED96

Off
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Off

Set LED on HMI for binary channel 96

FunType81

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 81 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo81

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

81 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType82

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 82 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo82

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

82 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType83

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 83 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo83

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

83 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType84

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 84 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo84

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

84 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType85

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 85 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo85

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

85 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType86

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 86 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

Table continues on next page

1085
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

InfNo86

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

86 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType87

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 87 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo87

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

87 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType88

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 88 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo88

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

88 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType89

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 89 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo89

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

89 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType90

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 90 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo90

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

90 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType91

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 91 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo91

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

91 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType92

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 92 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo92

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

92 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType93

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 93 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo93

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

93 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType94

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 94 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo94

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

94 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType95

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 95 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo95

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

95 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FunType96

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 96 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

InfNo96

0 - 255

Information number for binary channel

96 (IEC -60870-5-103)

1086
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 757:
Name

B6RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigLevel81

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 81

IndicationMa81

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 81

TrigLevel82

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 82

IndicationMa82

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 82

TrigLevel83

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 83

IndicationMa83

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 83

TrigLevel84

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 84

IndicationMa84

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 84

TrigLevel85

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 85

IndicationMa85

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 85

TrigLevel86

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 86

IndicationMa86

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 86

TrigLevel87

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 87

IndicationMa87

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 87

TrigLevel88

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 88

IndicationMa88

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 88

TrigLevel89

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 89

IndicationMa89

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 89

TrigLevel90

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 90

IndicationMa90

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 90

TrigLevel91

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 91

IndicationMa91

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 91

TrigLevel92

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 92

IndicationMa92

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 92

Table continues on next page

1087
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TrigLevel93

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 93

IndicationMa93

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 93

TrigLevel94

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 94

IndicationMa94

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 94

TrigLevel95

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 95

IndicationMa95

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 95

TrigLevel96

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)

slope for binary input 96

IndicationMa96

Hide
Show

Show

Indication mask for binary channel 96

17.7.6

Monitored data
Table 758:
Name

DRPRDRE Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

MemoryUsed

INTEGER

Memory usage (0-100%)

UnTrigStatCh1

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 1
activated

OvTrigStatCh1

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 1 activated

UnTrigStatCh2

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 2
activated

OvTrigStatCh2

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 2 activated

UnTrigStatCh3

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 3
activated

OvTrigStatCh3

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 3 activated

UnTrigStatCh4

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 4
activated

OvTrigStatCh4

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 4 activated

UnTrigStatCh5

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 5
activated

OvTrigStatCh5

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 5 activated

Table continues on next page

1088
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UnTrigStatCh6

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 6
activated

OvTrigStatCh6

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 6 activated

UnTrigStatCh7

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 7
activated

OvTrigStatCh7

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 7 activated

UnTrigStatCh8

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 8
activated

OvTrigStatCh8

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 8 activated

UnTrigStatCh9

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 9
activated

OvTrigStatCh9

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 9 activated

UnTrigStatCh10

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 10
activated

OvTrigStatCh10

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 10 activated

UnTrigStatCh11

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 11
activated

OvTrigStatCh11

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 11 activated

UnTrigStatCh12

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 12
activated

OvTrigStatCh12

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 12 activated

UnTrigStatCh13

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 13
activated

OvTrigStatCh13

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 13 activated

UnTrigStatCh14

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 14
activated

OvTrigStatCh14

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 14 activated

UnTrigStatCh15

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 15
activated

OvTrigStatCh15

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 15 activated

Table continues on next page

1089
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UnTrigStatCh16

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 16
activated

OvTrigStatCh16

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 16 activated

UnTrigStatCh17

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 17
activated

OvTrigStatCh17

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 17 activated

UnTrigStatCh18

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 18
activated

OvTrigStatCh18

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 18 activated

UnTrigStatCh19

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 19
activated

OvTrigStatCh19

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 19 activated

UnTrigStatCh20

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 20
activated

OvTrigStatCh20

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 20 activated

UnTrigStatCh21

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 21
activated

OvTrigStatCh21

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 21 activated

UnTrigStatCh22

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 22
activated

OvTrigStatCh22

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 22 activated

UnTrigStatCh23

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 23
activated

OvTrigStatCh23

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 23 activated

UnTrigStatCh24

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 24
activated

OvTrigStatCh24

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 24 activated

UnTrigStatCh25

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 25
activated

OvTrigStatCh25

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 25 activated

Table continues on next page

1090
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UnTrigStatCh26

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 26
activated

OvTrigStatCh26

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 26 activated

UnTrigStatCh27

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 27
activated

OvTrigStatCh27

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 27 activated

UnTrigStatCh28

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 28
activated

OvTrigStatCh28

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 28 activated

UnTrigStatCh29

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 29
activated

OvTrigStatCh29

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 29 activated

UnTrigStatCh30

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 30
activated

OvTrigStatCh30

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 30 activated

UnTrigStatCh31

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 31
activated

OvTrigStatCh31

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 31 activated

UnTrigStatCh32

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 32
activated

OvTrigStatCh32

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 32 activated

UnTrigStatCh33

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 33
activated

OvTrigStatCh33

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 33 activated

UnTrigStatCh34

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 34
activated

OvTrigStatCh34

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 34 activated

UnTrigStatCh35

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 35
activated

OvTrigStatCh35

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 35 activated

Table continues on next page

1091
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

17.7.7

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

UnTrigStatCh36

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 36
activated

OvTrigStatCh36

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 36 activated

UnTrigStatCh37

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 37
activated

OvTrigStatCh37

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 37 activated

UnTrigStatCh38

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 38
activated

OvTrigStatCh38

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 38 activated

UnTrigStatCh39

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 39
activated

OvTrigStatCh39

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 39 activated

UnTrigStatCh40

BOOLEAN

Under level trig for

analog channel 40
activated

OvTrigStatCh40

BOOLEAN

Over level trig for analog

channel 40 activated

FaultNumber

INTEGER

Disturbance fault number

Operation principle
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply
the operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events
in the system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:

Event list (EL)

Indications (IND)
Event recorder (ER)
Trip value recorder(TVR)
Disturbance recorder (DR)

Figure 515 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions
and function blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value
recorder (TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks
(AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both
AxRADR and BxRBDR.

1092
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A1-4RADR

Disturbance Report

A4RADR

DRPRDRE

Analog signals
Trip value rec

B1-6RBDR

Binary signals

Disturbance
recorder

B6RBDR
Event list
Event recorder
Indications

IEC09000337-2-en.vsd
IEC09000337 V2 EN

Figure 515:

Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile
flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary
power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report

Record no. N

General dist.
information

Indications

Record no. N+1

Trip
values

Record no. N+100

Event
recordings

Disturbance
recording

Event list

en05000161.vsd
IEC05000161 V1 EN

Figure 516:

Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new
one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of
sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time.
Figure 517 shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested
for a typical configuration, that is, in a 50 Hz system it is possible to record 100
1093
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect
the rest of the disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER), Indications
(IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR)).

Number of recordings
100

3,4 s
20 analog
96 binary

3,4 s

80

40 analog
96 binary

60

6,3 s

6,3 s
50 Hz

6,3 s

40

60 Hz

Total recording time

250

300

350

400 s
en05000488.vsd

IEC05000488 V1 EN

Figure 517:

Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings

total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.

Disturbance information

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP
or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or
remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

1094
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Indications (IND)

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of
the disturbance (not time-tagged), see section "" for more detailed information.

Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.

Event list (EL)

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.

Trip value recorder (TVR)

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault
and during the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after
the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.

Time tagging

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all
time tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a

settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register
disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =

PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

1095
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT

PostFaultRecT

3
en05000487.vsd

IEC05000487 V1 EN

Figure 518:

The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1

Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the
operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.

tFault, 2

Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as
any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit
the limit time).

PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit

Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording
was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger
that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum
recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already
stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder

and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved
for external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data
communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and
summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally
calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input
signals, phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

1096
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A1RADR

SMAI
External
analogue
signals

Block
^GRP2L1

AI3P
AI1

^GRP2L2
^GRP2L3

AI2
AI3

INPUT2

^GRP2N
Type

AI4
AIN

INPUT4

A2RADR
INPUT1

A3RADR

INPUT3
INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32

Internal analogue signals

INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
IEC10000029-1-en.vsd

IEC10000029 V1 EN

Figure 519:

Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated
according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at
lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest
updated sample until a new updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).
In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated
residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input
signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output
(AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

1097
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.

However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The
input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect
the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals

Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The

signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary
signal is selected to be recorded when:

the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report

(Operation = Off). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the
local HMI (SetLED = On/Off).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are
used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local
HMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list,
which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition
is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies
the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:

Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or
via station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger
signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the
operator's manual for procedure.

Binary-signal trigger

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a
trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to

1098
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the
indications list of the disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded
in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the
average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger,
this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in
the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

Post Retrigger

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig
condition during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset.
However, under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the
post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering
(PostRetrig = On) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete
recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not
start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be started.
Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance
recordings.

17.7.8

Technical data
Table 759:

DRPRDRE technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Pre-fault time

(0.059.90) s

Post-fault time

(0.110.0) s

Limit time

(0.510.0) s

Table continues on next page

1099
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Maximum number of recordings

100, first in - first out

Time tagging resolution

1 ms

See table 931

Maximum number of analog inputs

30 + 10 (external + internally
derived)

Maximum number of binary inputs

96

Maximum number of phasors in the

Trip Value recorder per recording

30

Maximum number of indications in a

disturbance report

96

Maximum number of events in the

Event recording per recording

150

Maximum number of events in the

Event list

1000, first in - first out

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s

recording time and maximum number
of channels, typical value)

340 seconds (100 recordings)

at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz

Sampling rate

1 kHz at 50 Hz
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz

Recording bandwidth

(5-300) Hz

17.8

Logical signal status report BINSTATREP

17.8.1

Identification
Function description
Logical signal status report

17.8.2

IEC 61850
identification
BINSTATREP

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a
SPA master to poll signals from various other functions.

1100
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.8.3

Function block
BINSTATREP
OUTPUT1
BLOCK
^INPUT1
OUTPUT2
^INPUT2
OUTPUT3
^INPUT3
OUTPUT4
^INPUT4
OUTPUT5
^INPUT5
OUTPUT6
^INPUT6
OUTPUT7
^INPUT7
OUTPUT8
^INPUT8
OUTPUT9
^INPUT9
OUTPUT10
^INPUT10
OUTPUT11
^INPUT11
OUTPUT12
^INPUT12
OUTPUT13
^INPUT13
OUTPUT14
^INPUT14
OUTPUT15
^INPUT15
OUTPUT16
^INPUT16
IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN

Figure 520:

17.8.4

BINSTATREP function block

Signals
Table 760:
Name

BINSTATREP Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 16

1101
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 761:

BINSTATREP Output signals

Name

17.8.5
Table 762:
Name
t

17.8.6

Type

Description

OUTPUT1

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 1

OUTPUT2

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 2

OUTPUT3

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 3

OUTPUT4

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 4

OUTPUT5

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 5

OUTPUT6

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 6

OUTPUT7

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 7

OUTPUT8

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 8

OUTPUT9

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 9

OUTPUT10

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 10

OUTPUT11

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 11

OUTPUT12

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 12

OUTPUT13

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 13

OUTPUT14

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 14

OUTPUT15

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 15

OUTPUT16

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 16

Settings
BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.0 - 60.0

Unit

Step

Default

0.1

10.0

Description
Time delay of function

Operation principle
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16
outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or
via SPA communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the
input signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the
input signal resets.

1102
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t

t
IEC09000732-1-en.vsd

IEC09000732 V1 EN

Figure 521:

BINSTATREP logical diagram

17.9

Measured value expander block RANGE_XP

17.9.1

Identification
Function description
Measured value expander block

17.9.2

IEC 61850
identification
RANGE_XP

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI
and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and highhigh limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced
to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5
binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or
above high-high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the
configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

17.9.3

Function block
RANGE*

RANGE_XP
HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
IEC05000346-2-en.vsd

IEC05000346 V2 EN

Figure 522:

RANGE_XP function block

1103
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring
17.9.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 763:

RANGE_XP Input signals

Name

Type

RANGE

Table 764:

INTEGER

Description
Measured value range

RANGE_XP Output signals

Name

17.9.5

Default

Type

Description

HIGHHIGH

BOOLEAN

Measured value is above high-high limit

HIGH

BOOLEAN

Measured value is between high and high-high limit

NORMAL

BOOLEAN

Measured value is between high and low limit

LOW

BOOLEAN

Measured value is between low and low-low limit

LOWLOW

BOOLEAN

Measured value is below low-low limit

Operation principle
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC).
The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals
according to table 765.
Table 765:

Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised
value is:
Output:
LOWLOW
LOW

below low-low between low

limit
low and low
limit

between low
and high limit

between high- above highhigh and high high limit

limit

High
High

NORMAL

High

HIGH

High

HIGHHIGH

High

17.10

Limit counter L4UFCNT

17.10.1

Identification

17.10.1.1

Identification
Function description
Limit counter

IEC 61850
identification
L4UFCNT

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

1104
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.10.2

Functionality
The 12 Up limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four
independent limits where the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the
input signal are counted against the setting values for limits. The output for each
limit is activated when the counted value reaches that limit.
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

17.10.3

Operation principle
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on
the binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks
if the accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The
four limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain
activated until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is
stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

17.10.3.1

Design
Figure 523 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.
BLOCK
INPUT

Operation
Counter

RESET

VALUE
Overflow
Detection

CountType

OVERFLOW

OnMaxValue
Limit
Check

MaxValue

LIMIT1 4

CounterLimit1...4
Error
Detection

InitialValue

ERROR

IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN

Figure 523:

Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of
the function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three
possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are:

1105
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count

The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 524.

Overflow indication
Actual value

... Max value -1

Max value

Counted value

... Max value -1

Max value

Max value +1
0

Max value +2
1

Max value +3 ...

2

...

IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN

Figure 524:

Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or
initial value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting
the input and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error
condition remains until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value
setting(s) are applied.
The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is
not counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can
be initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their
initial states until the release of the block input.

17.10.3.2

Reporting
The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.
Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.
Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely,
for example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a
measurement on the local HMI graphical display.

1106
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.10.4

Function block
L4UFCNT
BLOCK
INPUT
RESET

ERROR
OVERFLOW
LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE
IEC12000029-1-en.vsd

IEC12000029 V1 EN

Figure 525:

17.10.5

L4UFCNT function block

Signals
Table 766:
Name

L4UFCNT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT

BOOLEAN

Input for counter

RESET

BOOLEAN

Reset of function

Table 767:
Name

L4UFCNT Output signals

Type

Description

ERROR

BOOLEAN

Error indication on counter limit and/or initial

value settings

OVERFLOW

BOOLEAN

Overflow indication on count of greater than

MaxValue

LIMIT1

BOOLEAN

Counted value is larger than or equal to

CounterLimit1

LIMIT2

BOOLEAN

Counted value is larger than or equal to

CounterLimit2

LIMIT3

BOOLEAN

Counted value is larger than or equal to

CounterLimit3

LIMIT4

BOOLEAN

Counted value is larger than or equal to

CounterLimit4

VALUE

INTEGER

Counted value

1107
Technical Manual

Section 17
Monitoring

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

17.10.6
Table 768:
Name

Settings
L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

CountType

Positive edge
Negative edge
Both edges

Positive edge

Select counting on positive and/or

negative flanks

CounterLimit1

1 - 65535

100

Value of the first limit

CounterLimit2

1 - 65535

200

Value of the second limit

CounterLimit3

1 - 65535

300

Value of the third limit

CounterLimit4

1 - 65535

400

Value of the fourth limit

MaxValue

1 - 65535

500

Maximum count value

OnMaxValue

Stop
Rollover Steady
Rollover Pulsed

Stop

Select if counter stops or rolls over after

reaching maxValue with steady or
pulsed overflow flag

InitialValue

0 - 65535

Initial count value after reset of the

function

17.10.7

Monitored data
Table 769:

L4UFCNT Monitored data

Name

Type

VALUE

17.10.8

INTEGER

Values (Range)
-

Unit

Description

Counted value

Technical data
Table 770:

L4UFCNTtechnical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Counter value

0-65535

Max. count up speed

30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle)

1108
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 18

Metering

18.1

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT

18.1.1

Identification
Function description
Pulse-counter logic

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

PCFCNT

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

S00947 V1 EN

18.1.2

Functionality
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses,
for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then
read by the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station
bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
must be ordered to achieve this functionality.

18.1.3

Function block
PCFCNT
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE*
RS_CNT

INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
IEC14000043-1-en.vsd

IEC09000335 V3 EN

Figure 526:

PCFCNT function block

1109
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

18.1.4

Signals
Table 771:

PCFCNT Input signals

Name

Type
BOOLEAN

Block of function

READ_VAL

BOOLEAN

Initiates an additional pulse counter reading

BI_PULSE

BOOLEAN

Connect binary input channel for metering

RS_CNT

BOOLEAN

Resets pulse counter value

PCFCNT Output signals

Name

Table 773:
Name

Description

BLOCK

Table 772:

18.1.5

Default

Type

Description

INVALID

BOOLEAN

The pulse counter value is invalid

RESTART

BOOLEAN

The reported value does not comprise a complete

integration cycle

BLOCKED

BOOLEAN

The pulse counter function is blocked

NEW_VAL

BOOLEAN

A new pulse counter value is generated

SCAL_VAL

REAL

Scaled value with time and status information

Settings
PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

EventMask

NoEvents
ReportEvents

NoEvents

Report mask for analog events from

pulse counter

CountCriteria

Off
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange

RisingEdge

Pulse counter criteria

Scale

1.000 - 90000.000

0.001

1.000

Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to

unit per counted value

Quantity

Count
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy

Count

Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output

tReporting

0 - 3600

60

Cycle time for reporting of counter value

1110
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

18.1.6

Monitored data
Table 774:
Name

18.1.7

PCFCNT Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CNT_VAL

INTEGER

Actual pulse counter

value

SCAL_VAL

REAL

Scaled value with time

and status information

Operation principle
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16
binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter
values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and
is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse
counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single
counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation
command (GI) or IEC 61850.
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional
incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter
uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a
range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled
Value (pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter
Quality consists of:

Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

Wrapped around
Blocked
Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that
is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is
finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can
be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the
station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the
function.
The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card,
BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.

1111
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Figure 527 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the
inputs and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
I/O-module

Pulse
INPUT OUT
Pulse length >1s
Reset counter

EVENT

PulseCounter
BLOCK
INVALID
RESTART
READ_VAL
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
BI_PULSE
RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL

SMS settings
1.Operation = Off/On
2.tReporting = 0s...60min
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC EVENT

Database
Pulse counter value:
0...2147483647
en05000744.vsd

IEC05000744 V1 EN

Figure 527:

Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local
HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal
connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The
signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC
Event function block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module,
where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED startup, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around
during last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked.
There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

The BLOCK input is set, or

The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

1112
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale),

time and status information.

18.1.8

Technical data
Table 775:

PCFCNT technical data

Function

Setting range

Accuracy

Input frequency

See Binary Input Module (BIM)

Cycle time for report of

counter value

(13600) s

18.2

Function for energy calculation and demand

handling ETPMMTR

18.2.1

Identification
Function description
Function for energy calculation and
demand handling

18.2.2

IEC 61850
identification
ETPMMTR

IEC 60617
identification
W_Varh

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well
as reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction.
Energy values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values
are also calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to
remove noise from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy
calculations, integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm
signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum power demand, can be
found.
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power
values by integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active
1113

Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

and reactive energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions.
These energy values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs.
Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC and
STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC
input.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set
time interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output
channels. The active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated
for both forward and reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD
input.

18.2.3

Function block
ETPMMTR
P*
ACCINPRG
Q*
EAFPULSE
STARTACC
EARPULSE
STOPACC
ERFPULSE
RSTACC
ERRPULSE
RSTDMD
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC14000019-1-en.vsd
IEC14000019 V1 EN

Figure 528:

18.2.4

ETPMMTR function block

Signals
Table 776:
Name

ETPMMTR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

REAL

Measured active power

REAL

Measured reactive power

STARTACC

BOOLEAN

Start to accumulate energy values

STOPACC

BOOLEAN

Stop to accumulate energy values.

RSTACC

BOOLEAN

Reset of accumulated enery reading

RSTDMD

BOOLEAN

Reset of maximum demand reading

1114
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 777:

ETPMMTR Output signals

Name

18.2.5
Table 778:
Name

Type

Description

ACCINPRG

BOOLEAN

Accumulation of energy values in progress

EAFPULSE

BOOLEAN

Accumulated forward active energy pulse

EARPULSE

BOOLEAN

Accumulated reverse active energy pulse

ERFPULSE

BOOLEAN

Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse

ERRPULSE

BOOLEAN

Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse

EAFALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in

set interval

EARALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in

set interval

ERFALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in

set interval

ERRALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in

set interval

EAFACC

REAL

Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws

EARACC

REAL

Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws

ERFACC

REAL

Accumulated forward reactive energy value in

VArS

ERRACC

REAL

Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in

VArS

MAXPAFD

REAL

Maximum forward active power demand value for

set interval

MAXPARD

REAL

Maximum reverse active power demand value for

set interval

MAXPRFD

REAL

Maximum forward reactive power demand value

for set interval

MAXPRRD

REAL

Maximum reactive power demand value in

reverse direction

Settings
ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

EnaAcc

Off
On

Off

Activate the accumulation of energy

values

tEnergy

1 Minute
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes

1 Minute

Time interval for energy calculation

tEnergyOnPls

0.100 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Energy accumulated pulse ON time in

secs

Table continues on next page

1115
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

tEnergyOffPls

0.100 - 60.000

0.001

0.500

Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in

secs

EAFAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

MWh

0.001

100.000

Pulse quantity for active forward

accumulated energy value

EARAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

MWh

0.001

100.000

Pulse quantity for active reverse

accumulated energy value

ERFAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

MVArh

0.001

100.000

Pulse quantity for reactive forward

accumulated energy value

ERRAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

MVArh

0.001

100.000

Pulse quantity for reactive reverse

accumulated energy value

Table 779:
Name

Step

Default

Description

ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

EALim

0.001 10000000000.000

MWh

0.001

1000000.000

Active energy limit

ERLim

0.001 10000000000.000

MVArh

0.001

1000.000

Reactive energy limit

EnZeroClamp

Off
On

On

Enable of zero point clamping detection

function

LevZeroClampP

0.001 - 10000.000

MW

0.001

10.000

Zero point clamping level at active Power

LevZeroClampQ

0.001 - 10000.000

MVAr

0.001

10.000

Zero point clamping level at reactive

Power

DirEnergyAct

Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of active energy flow Forward/

Reverse

DirEnergyReac

Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/

Reverse

EAFPrestVal

0.000 100000000.000

MWh

0.001

0.000

Preset Initial value for forward active

energy

EARPrestVal

0.000 100000000.000

MWh

0.001

0.000

Preset Initial value for reverse active

energy

ERFPresetVal

0.000 100000000.000

MVArh

0.001

0.000

Preset Initial value for forward reactive

energy

ERRPresetVal

0.000 100000000.000

MVArh

0.001

0.000

Preset Initial value for reverse reactive

energy

18.2.6

Monitored data
Table 780:
Name

ETPMMTR Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

EAFACC

REAL

MWh

Accumulated forward
active energy value in Ws

EARACC

REAL

MWh

Accumulated reverse
active energy value in Ws

ERFACC

REAL

MVArh

Accumulated forward
reactive energy value in
VArS

Table continues on next page

1116
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

18.2.7

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

ERRACC

REAL

MVArh

Accumulated reverse
reactive energy value in
VArS

MAXPAFD

REAL

MW

Maximum forward active

power demand value for
set interval

MAXPARD

REAL

MW

Maximum reverse active

power demand value for
set interval

MAXPRFD

REAL

MVAr

Maximum forward
reactive power demand
value for set interval

MAXPRRD

REAL

MVAr

Maximum reactive power

demand value in reverse
direction

Operation principle
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the
Measurements function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time
tEnergy to measure the integrated energy. Figure 529 shows the overall
functionality of the energy calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR.
MAXPAFD

RSTDMD

MAXPARD
MAXPRFD

Zero Clamping
Detection

Maximum Power
Demand Calculation

MAXPRRD
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM

ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
STARTACC

Energy Accumulation
Calculation

ERRPULSE
EAFACC
EARACC

STOPACC

ERFACC
ERRACC

RSTACC

IEC13000185-2-en.vsd
IEC13000185 V2 EN

Figure 529:

ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled
by the STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the
output ACCINPRG is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 530 shows the logic of the
ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and
the EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the

1117
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG

is deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.
STOPACC

FALSE
STARTACC

&

&

EnaAcc

ACCINPRG

q-1
RSTACC
q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000186-4-en.vsd

IEC13000186 V4 EN

Figure 530:

ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service
values and also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can
be connected to a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for
forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to
initial accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or
with the input signal RSTACC. Figure 531 shows the logic for integration of energy
in active forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active reverse,
reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
RSTACC

EAFPrestVal
ACCINPRG

P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X

60.0

T
T

EAFACC

&

q-1
T

EALim
q-1

a
b

0.0

a>b

-1

q = unit delay

IEC13000187-4-en.vsd

IEC13000187 V4 EN

Figure 531:

Logic for integration of active forward energy

1118
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy

values and energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy
values are divided by the energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The
number of pulses can be reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the
local HMI reset menu. The pulse on and off time duration is set by the settings
tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure 532 shows the logic for pulse output
generation for the integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the
pulse generation for integrated energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and
reactive reverse is done.
tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC
a

EALim

Counter
CU
CV

a>b

q-1

Rst
R

tOff
t

q-1
0

T
a

EAFAccPlsQty

RSTACC

a>b

TP

EAFPULSE

0
Counter
CU
CV
Rst

q-1
tEnergyOnPls
q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000188-4-en.vsd

IEC13000188 V4 EN

Figure 532:

Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the
set time interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and
stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD,
MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward
and reverse direction. When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset
menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated once the
periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 533 shows the logic
of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active
power demand value. Similarly, the maximum power calculation and energy alarm
outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is implemented.

1119
Technical Manual

Section 18
Metering

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

P (ACTIVE FORWARD)

Average Power
Calculation

tEnergy

EAFALM

a>b

EALim
RSTMAXD

0.0
MAX

MAXPAFD

q-1

q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000189-4-en.vsd

IEC13000189 V4 EN

Figure 533:

Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

18.2.8

Technical data

18.2.8.1

Technical data
Table 781:
Function
Energy metering

Range or value
MWh Export/Import, MVarh
Export/Import

Accuracy
Input from MMXU. No extra
error at steady load

1120
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 19

Station communication

19.1

670 series protocols

Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one
or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation
Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Following communication protocols are available:

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
LON communication protocol
SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
DNP3.0 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

19.2

DNP3 protocol
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to
communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a
detailed description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol
manual.

19.3

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

19.3.1

Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 782:
Protocol

Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Ethernet

Serial

100BASE-FX LC

Glass fibre (ST

connector)

IEC 6185081

DNP3

IEC 60870-5-103

EIA-485

= Supported

1121
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two
ports are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IPaddress 138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2
has IP-address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

19.3.2
Table 783:

Settings
IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

PortSelGOOSE

Front
LANAB
LANCD

LANAB

Port selection for GOOSE communication

PortSelMMS

Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any

Any

Port selection for MMS communication

ProtocolEdition

Ed 1
Ed 2

Ed 1

Protocol Edition

RemoteModControl

Off
Maintenance
All levels

Off

Remote Mode Control

AllowGOOSESimulation

No
Yes

No

Allow enabling of GOOSE Simulation

IEC61850BufTimEnable

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable BRC buf time behavior

19.3.3

Technical data
Table 784:

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Function

19.3.4

Value

Protocol

IEC 61850-8-1

Communication speed for the IEDs

100BASE-FX

Protocol

IEC 6085103

Communication speed for the IEDs

9600 or 19200 Bd

Protocol

DNP3.0

Communication speed for the IEDs

30019200 Bd

Protocol

TCP/IP, Ethernet

Communication speed for the IEDs

100 Mbit/s

Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC

1122
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.3.4.1

Functionality
Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to
send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

19.3.4.2

Function block
SPGAPC
BLOCK
^IN
IEC14000021-1-en.vsd
IEC14000021 V1 EN

Figure 534:

SPGAPC function block

SP16GAPC
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16
IEC14000020-1-en.vsd
IEC14000020 V1 EN

Figure 535:

19.3.4.3

SP16GAPC function block

Signals
Table 785:
Name

SPGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IN

BOOLEAN

Input status

Table 786:
Name

SP16GAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1 status

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2 status

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3 status

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4 status

IN5

BOOLEAN

Input 5 status

Table continues on next page

1123
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

19.3.4.4

Type

Default

Description

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6 status

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7 status

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8 status

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9 status

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10 status

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11 status

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12 status

IN13

BOOLEAN

Input 13 status

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14 status

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15 status

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16 status

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

19.3.4.5

Monitored data
Table 787:
Name
OUT

Table 788:
Name

SPGAPC Monitored data

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Values (Range)
-

Unit
-

Description
Output status

SP16GAPC Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

OUT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 1 status

OUT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 2 status

OUT3

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 3 status

OUT4

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 4 status

OUT5

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 5 status

OUT6

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 6 status

OUT7

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 7 status

OUT8

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 8 status

OUT9

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 9 status

Table continues on next page

1124
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

19.3.4.6

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

OUT10

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 10 status

OUT11

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 11 status

OUT12

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 12 status

OUT13

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 13 status

OUT14

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 14 status

OUT15

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 15 status

OUT16

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output 16 status

OUTOR

GROUP
SIGNAL

Output status logic OR

gate for input 1 to 16

Operation principle
Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single
Point indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be
used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive
this information.

19.3.5

Generic communication function for Measured Value

MVGAPC

19.3.5.1

Functionality
Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used
to send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment
in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE
aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

19.3.5.2

Function block
MVGAPC
BLOCK
^IN

^VALUE
RANGE
IEC14000022-1-en.vsd

IEC14000022 V1 EN

Figure 536:

MVGAPC function block

1125
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.3.5.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 789:

MVGAPC Input signals

Name

Type

Block of function

IN

REAL

Analog input value

MVGAPC Output signals

Name

Table 791:
Name

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 790:

19.3.5.4

Default

BLOCK

Type

Description

VALUE

REAL

Magnitude of deadband value

RANGE

INTEGER

Range

Settings
MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

BasePrefix

micro
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera

unit

Base prefix (multiplication factor)

MV db

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s

MV zeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

MV hhLim

-5000.00 - 5000.00

xBase

0.01

900.00

High High limit multiplied with the base

prefix (multiplication factor)

MV hLim

-5000.00 - 5000.00

xBase

0.01

800.00

High limit multiplied with the base prefix

(multiplication factor)

MV lLim

-5000.00 - 5000.00

xBase

0.01

-800.00

Low limit multiplied with the base prefix

(multiplication factor)

MV llLim

-5000.00 - 5000.00

xBase

0.01

-900.00

Low Low limit multiplied with the base

prefix (multiplication factor)

MV min

-5000.00 - 5000.00

xBase

0.01

-1000.00

Minimum value multiplied with the base

prefix (multiplication factor)

MV max

-5000.00 - 5000.00

xBase

0.01

1000.00

Maximum value multiplied with the base

prefix (multiplication factor)

MV dbType

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Dead band

Reporting type

MV limHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common

for all limits)

1126
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.3.5.5

Monitored data
Table 792:

MVGAPC Monitored data

Name

19.3.5.6

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

INSTMAGN

REAL

Magnitude of
instantaneous value

VALUE

REAL

Magnitude of deadband
value

RANGE

INTEGER

1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal

Range

Operation principle
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the
range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the
value, to other IEC 61850 clients in the substation.

19.3.6

IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

Function description

19.3.6.1

LHMI identification

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Parallel Redundancy
Protocol Status

PRPSTATUS

RCHLCCH

Duo driver
configuration

PRP

Functionality
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and
IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 are available as options in 670 series IEDs. IEC 62439-3
parallel redundant protocol is an optional quantity and the selection is made at
ordering. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses
both port AB and port CD on the OEM module.

19.3.6.2

Function block
PRPSTATUS
LAN-A-Status
LAN-B-Status
IEC09000757-1-en.vsd
IEC09000757 V1 EN

Figure 537:

PRPSTATUS function block

1127
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.3.6.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 793:

PRPSTATUS Output signals

Name

19.3.6.4
Table 794:
Name

Type

Description

PRP-A LINK

BOOLEAN

PRP-A Link Status

PRP-A VALID

BOOLEAN

PRP-A Link Valid

PRP-B LINK

BOOLEAN

PRP-B Link Status

PRP-B VALID

BOOLEAN

PRP-B Link Valid

Settings
PRP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off / On

PRPMode

PRP-0
PRP-1

PRP-1

PRP Mode

IPAddress

0 - 18

IP
Address

192.168.7.10

IP-Address

IPMask

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.0

IP-Mask

19.3.6.5

Monitored data
Table 795:
Name

19.3.6.6

PRPSTATUS Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

AB Beh

INTEGER

2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On

AB Link Beh

CD Beh

INTEGER

1=On
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off

CD Link Beh

PRP Beh

INTEGER

2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On

PRP Beh

Principle of operation
The redundant station bus communication (DUODRV) is configured using the
local HMI. The settings for DUODRV are also visible in PST in PCM600.

1128
Technical Manual

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 19
Station communication

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is

transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from
one channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel, if the
same, the last package is discarded.
PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the
last 10 s, the output LAN-A-STATUS and/or LAN-B-STATUS is set to 0 which
indicate error.

1129
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision
Duo

Data

Data

Switch A

Switch B

1 2

1 2

Data

Data

AB
Configuration

CD

IED

OEM

DUODRV

PRPSTATUS

IEC09000758-2-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V2 EN

Figure 538:

Redundant station bus

1130
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.4

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

19.4.1

Introduction
The IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to
communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly
known as Merging Units (MU). The physical interface in the IED that is used for
the communication is the OEM modules (the two port module version) "CD" port.

19.4.2

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.
The signals appear only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU)
are included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In
the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input
(SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.

19.4.3

Signals

19.4.3.1

Output signals
Table 796:
Name

MU1_4I_4U Output signals

Type

Description

I1

STRING

Analogue input I1

I2

STRING

Analogue input I2

I3

STRING

Analogue input I3

I4

STRING

Analogue input I4

U1

STRING

Analogue input U1

U2

STRING

Analogue input U2

U3

STRING

Analogue input U3

U4

STRING

Analogue input U4

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

Fatal error, serious data loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Synchronization lost in MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

MU in test mode

1131
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

Table 797:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

MU2_4I_4U Output signals

Type

Description

I1

STRING

Analogue input I1

I2

STRING

Analogue input I2

I3

STRING

Analogue input I3

I4

STRING

Analogue input I4

U1

STRING

Analogue input U1

U2

STRING

Analogue input U2

U3

STRING

Analogue input U3

U4

STRING

Analogue input U4

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

Fatal error, serious data loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Synchronization lost in MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

MU in test mode

Table 798:
Name

MU3_4I_4U Output signals

Type

Description

I1

STRING

Analogue input I1

I2

STRING

Analogue input I2

I3

STRING

Analogue input I3

I4

STRING

Analogue input I4

U1

STRING

Analogue input U1

U2

STRING

Analogue input U2

U3

STRING

Analogue input U3

U4

STRING

Analogue input U4

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

Fatal error, serious data loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Synchronization lost in MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

MU in test mode

Table 799:
Name

MU4_4I_4U Output signals

Type

Description

I1

STRING

Analogue input I1

I2

STRING

Analogue input I2

I3

STRING

Analogue input I3

I4

STRING

Analogue input I4

U1

STRING

Analogue input U1

Table continues on next page

1132
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

U2

STRING

Analogue input U2

U3

STRING

Analogue input U3

U4

STRING

Analogue input U4

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

Fatal error, serious data loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Synchronization lost in MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

MU in test mode

Table 800:
Name

MU5_4I_4U Output signals

Type

Description

I1

STRING

Analogue input I1

I2

STRING

Analogue input I2

I3

STRING

Analogue input I3

I4

STRING

Analogue input I4

U1

STRING

Analogue input U1

U2

STRING

Analogue input U2

U3

STRING

Analogue input U3

U4

STRING

Analogue input U4

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

Fatal error, serious data loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Synchronization lost in MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

MU in test mode

Table 801:
Name

MU6_4I_4U Output signals

Type

Description

I1

STRING

Analogue input I1

I2

STRING

Analogue input I2

I3

STRING

Analogue input I3

I4

STRING

Analogue input I4

U1

STRING

Analogue input U1

U2

STRING

Analogue input U2

U3

STRING

Analogue input U3

U4

STRING

Analogue input U4

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

Fatal error, serious data loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED

Table continues on next page

1133
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

19.4.4
Table 802:
Name

Type

Description

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Synchronization lost in MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

MU in test mode

Settings
MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SVId

10 - 34

ABB_MU0101

MU identifier

SmplGrp

0 - 65535

Sampling group

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

Table 803:
Name
SynchMode

Table 804:
Name

MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
NoSynch
Init
Operation

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Operation

Description
Synchronization mode

MU2_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SVId

10 - 34

ABB_MU0102

MU identifier

SmplGrp

0 - 65535

Sampling group

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

Table 805:
Name
SynchMode

MU2_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
NoSynch
Init
Operation

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Operation

Description
Synchronization mode

1134
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 806:
Name

MU3_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SVId

10 - 34

ABB_MU0103

MU identifier

SmplGrp

0 - 65535

Sampling group

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

Table 807:
Name
SynchMode

Table 808:
Name

MU3_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
NoSynch
Init
Operation

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Operation

Description
Synchronization mode

MU4_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SVId

10 - 34

ABB_MU0104

MU identifier

SmplGrp

0 - 65535

Sampling group

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

Table 809:
Name
SynchMode

MU4_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
NoSynch
Init
Operation

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Operation

Description
Synchronization mode

1135
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

Table 810:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

MU5_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SVId

10 - 34

ABB_MU0105

MU identifier

SmplGrp

0 - 65535

Sampling group

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

Table 811:
Name
SynchMode

Table 812:
Name

MU5_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
NoSynch
Init
Operation

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Operation

Description
Synchronization mode

MU6_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SVId

10 - 34

ABB_MU0106

MU identifier

SmplGrp

0 - 65535

Sampling group

CTStarPoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTStarPoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

Table 813:
Name
SynchMode

MU6_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
NoSynch
Init
Operation

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Operation

Description
Synchronization mode

1136
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.4.5

Monitored data
Table 814:
Name

MU1_4I_4U Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Fatal error, serious data

loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

MU clock synchronized
to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Synchronization lost in
MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

MU in test mode

Table 815:
Name

MU2_4I_4U Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Fatal error, serious data

loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

MU clock synchronized
to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Synchronization lost in
MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

MU in test mode

Table 816:
Name

MU3_4I_4U Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Fatal error, serious data

loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

MU clock synchronized
to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Synchronization lost in
MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

MU in test mode

1137
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

Table 817:
Name

MU4_4I_4U Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Fatal error, serious data

loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

MU clock synchronized
to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Synchronization lost in
MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

MU in test mode

Table 818:
Name

MU5_4I_4U Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Fatal error, serious data

loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

MU clock synchronized
to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Synchronization lost in
MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

MU in test mode

Table 819:
Name

19.4.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

MU6_4I_4U Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Fatal error, serious data

loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

MU clock synchronized
to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Synchronization lost in
MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

1=Yes
0=No

MU in test mode

Operation principle
The ABB merging units (MUs) are situated close to primary equipment, like circuit
breakers, isolators, etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values
from measuring transformers, non-conventional transducers or both. The gathered
data are then transmitted to subscribers over the process bus, utilizing the IEC
61850-9-2LE protocol.

1138
Technical Manual

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 19
Station communication

ABB "physical MU" contains up to 3 logical MUs, each capable of sampling 4

currents and 4 voltages.
The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the OEM module
port "CD". For the user, the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input
module and is engineered in the very same way.

1139
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IED
Application

Preprocessing blocks
SMAI

Station Wide
GPS Clock

Preprocessing blocks
SMAI

MU1

MU2

Splitter
Electrical-toOptical Converter

1PPS
TRM module

OEM Module
CD

110 V

1A

1A

IEC61850-9-2LE

Ethernet Switch
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE

ABB
Merging
Unit

CT

ABB
Merging
Unit

1PPS

Combi
Sensor

CT

1PPS

Combi
Sensor

Conventional VT
en08000072-2.vsd
IEC08000072 V2 EN

Figure 539:

Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and

conventional CT/VT

The function has the following alarm signals:

1140
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

MUDATA: Indicates when sample sequence needs to be realigned. that is the

application soon needs to be restarted. The signal is raised to 2 s before the
application is restarted.
SYNCH: Indicates that the time quality of the hardware is out of the set value
from parameter synchAccLevel (1 s, 4 s or unspecified) and the parameter
AppSynch is set to Synch. In case of AppSynch is set to NoSynch the SYNCH
output will never go high.
SMPLLOST: Indicates that more than one sample has been lost/been marked
invalid/ overflow/ been marked failed, and the sample has thereafter been
substituted. When SMPLLOST is high, protection is blocked.
MUSYNCH: Indicates that the MU connected is not synchronized. Received
from quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
TESTMODE: Indicates that the MU connected is in TestMode. Received from
quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.

Timeout
TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or
the time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is
individually specified per time source (PPS, IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section
"Time synchronization"
Blocking condition
Blocking of protection functions is indicated by (SAMPLOST is high) or
(MUSYNCH is high and AppSynch is set to Synch) or (SYNCH is high)
Application synch is not required for differential protection based on ECHO mode.
A missing PPS however will lead to a drift between MU and IED. Therefore
protection functions in this case will be blocked.

19.4.7

Technical data
Table 820:

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

Functions

Value

Protocol

IEC 61850-9-2LE

Communication speed for the IEDs

100BASE-FX

19.5

LON communication protocol

19.5.1

Functionality
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This
enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators
workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.

1141
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification

Version 3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control
networks. These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short
messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication
media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk
supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol
follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the
International Standardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are
available. For other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.

19.5.2
Table 821:
Name
Operation

Table 822:
Name

Settings
HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Off
On

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation

ADE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation

TimerClass

Slow
Normal
Fast

Slow

Timer class

TimeDomain

Local without DST

Local with DST

Local with DST

Time domain

19.5.3

Operation principle
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With
protection and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of
the maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where
all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The
own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127
nodes per one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent
to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for
example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus
master.

1142
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short
messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking
signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as
events and explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for
multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of
network variables.

Introduction of LON protocol

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and
Control, Users manual and Technical description.

LON protocol
Configuration of LON
LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a
LonWorks network, is easily accessible on a single tool program.
Activate LON Communication
Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main menu/
Communication/ SLM configuration/ Rear optical LON port/ Horizontal
communication, where Operation must be set to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT
A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by
installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with
the SLDT 670 series package version 1p2 r03.
LON net address
To establish a LON connection with the 670 series IEDs, the IED has to be given a
unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is
accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.
Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.
Events and indications
Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code
44H) with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a
signal is changed in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is
transmitted from terminal.
1143
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in
the 670 series IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses.
Table 823 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks.
The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after
the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EVENT:17 has the address
1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can
be used for other type of events at the same event block.
As basic, three event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast
loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670 series IEDs. The remaining event function
blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EVENT:10 to
EVENT:20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send
binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring
functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 and 24 mA
input service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are
available in the 670 series IEDs.
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 823
Table 823:
Function block

LON adresses for Event functions

First LON address in
function block

EVENT:1

1024

EVENT:2

1040

EVENT:3

1056

EVENT:4

1072

EVENT:5

1088

EVENT:6

1104

EVENT:7

1120

EVENT:8

1136

EVENT:9

1152

EVENT:10

1168

EVENT:11

1184

EVENT:12

1200

EVENT:13

1216

EVENT:14

1232

EVENT:15

1248

EVENT:16

1264

EVENT:17

1280

EVENT:18

1296

EVENT:19

1312

EVENT:20

1328

1144
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Settings/ General Settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the
event function block.
Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is
always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function
block. Other Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection
function is event masked in the event function block.
Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the
event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is
done in the event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an event function block.

00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

01 generates an open event with the read status 1
10 generates a close event with the read status 2
11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from
the event function block.
Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or
N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out

1145
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before
sending the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That
is, the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 28;
the SPA addresses are according to table 824.

Horizontal communication

Network variables are used for communication between 500 series and 670 series
IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83).
SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the
information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and
presented for the application by a multiple command receive function block
(MULTICMDRCV). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the
multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) must be set to 1. There
are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60 MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. The
MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function blocks are connected using
LON network tool (LNT). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for 670 series IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables
Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the
LON network tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure
network variables concerning, for example, interlocking between two IEDs.
LON
BAY E1

BAY E3

MULTICMDSND: 7

MULTICMDSND: 9

BAY E4
MULTICMDSND: 9

en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN

Figure 540:

Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and

MULTICMDRCV function blocks in three IEDs

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window.
From LNT window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.

1146
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN

Figure 541:

The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the
drag-and-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag
them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them
there; or, they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/
Download.

1147
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN

Figure 542:

The download configuration window in LNT

Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the

Main Processing Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103 and
DNP communication.
There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables, and 2) ST/
bayonet for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a
combination of both, which is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions
concerning handling and connection of fibre cables.
Table 824:

SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

BL_CMD

SCSWI01

1 I 5115

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI02

1 I 5139

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI02

1 I 5161

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI04

1 I 5186

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI05

1 I 5210

SPA parameters for block

command

Table continues on next page

1148
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

BL_CMD

SCSWI06

1 I 5234

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI07

1 I 5258

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI08

1 I 5283

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI09

1 I 5307

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI10

1 I 5331

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI11

1 I 5355

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI12

1 I 5379

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI13

1 I 5403

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI14

1 I 5427

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI15

1 I 5451

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI16

1 I 5475

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI17

1 I 5499

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI18

1 I 5523

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI19

1 I 5545

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI20

1 I 5571

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI21

1 I 5594

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI22

1 I 5619

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI23

1 I 5643

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI24

1 I 5667

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI25

1 I 5691

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI26

1 I 5715

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI27

1 I 5739

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI28

1 I 5763

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI29

1 I 5787

SPA parameters for block

command

Table continues on next page

1149
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

BL_CMD

SCSWI30

1 I 5811

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI31

1 I 5835

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI32

1 I 5859

SPA parameters for block

command

CANCEL

SCSWI01

1 I 5107

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI02

1 I 5131

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI03

1 I 5153

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI04

1 I 5178

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI05

1 I 5202

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI06

1 I 5226

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI07

1 I 5250

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI08

1 I 5275

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI09

1 I 5299

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI10

1 I 5323

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI11

1 I 5347

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI12

1 I 5371

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI13

1 I 5395

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI14

1 I 5419

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI15

1 I 5443

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI16

1 I 5467

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI17

1 I 5491

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI18

1 I 5515

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI19

1 I 5537

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI20

1 I 5563

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI21

1 I 5586

SPA parameters for cancel

command

Table continues on next page

1150
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

CANCEL

SCSWI22

1 I 5611

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI23

1 I 5635

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI24

1 I 5659

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI25

1 I 5683

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI26

1 I 5707

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI27

1 I 5731

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI28

1 I 5755

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI29

1 I 5779

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI30

1 I 5803

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI31

1 I 5827

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI32

1 I 5851

SPA parameters for cancel

command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01,
SELOpen+ILO=10,
SELClose+ILO=11,
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31

SCSWI01

1 I 5105

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command
before operate command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI02

1 I 5129

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI03

1 I 5151

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI04

1 I 5176

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI05

1 I 5200

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI06

1 I 5224

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI07

1 I 5248

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI08

1 I 5273

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI09

1 I 5297

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI10

1 I 5321

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI11

1 I 5345

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

Table continues on next page

1151
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI12

1 I 5369

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI13

1 I 5393

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI14

1 I 5417

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI15

1 I 5441

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI16

1 I 5465

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI17

1 I 5489

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI18

1 I 5513

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI19

1 I 5535

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI20

1 I 5561

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI21

1 I 5584

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI22

1 I 5609

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI23

1 I 5633

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI24

1 I 5657

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI25

1 I 5681

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI26

1 I 5705

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI27

1 I 5729

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI28

1 I 5753

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI29

1 I 5777

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI30

1 I 5801

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI31

1 I 5825

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI32

1 I 5849

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01,
ExcOpen+ILO=10,
ExcClose+ILO=11,
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31

SCSWI01

1 I 5106

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command
before operate command

Table continues on next page

1152
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI02

1 I 5130

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI02

1 I 5152

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI04

1 I 5177

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI05

1 I 5201

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI06

1 I 5225

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI07

1 I 5249

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI08

1 I 5274

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI09

1 I 5298

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI10

1 I 5322

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI11

1 I 5346

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI12

1 I 5370

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI13

1 I 5394

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI14

1 I 5418

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI15

1 I 5442

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI16

1 I 5466

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI17

1 I 5490

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI18

1 I 5514

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI19

1 I 5536

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI20

1 I 5562

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI21

1 I 5585

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI22

1 I 5610

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI23

1 I 5634

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI24

1 I 5658

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI25

1 I 5682

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

Table continues on next page

1153
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI26

1 I 5706

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI27

1 I 5730

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI28

1 I 5754

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI29

1 I 5778

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI30

1 I 5802

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI31

1 I 5826

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI32

1 I 5850

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

Sub Value

SXCBR01

2 I 7854

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable

Sub Value

SXCBR02

2 I 7866

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR03

2 I 7884

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR04

2 I 7904

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR05

2 I 7923

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR06

2 I 7942

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR07

2 I 7961

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR08

2 I 7980

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR09

3I7

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR10

3 I 26

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR11

3 I 45

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR12

3 I 56

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR13

3 I 74

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR14

3 I 94

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR15

3 I 120

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR16

3 I 133

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR17

3 I 158

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Table continues on next page

1154
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Sub Value

SXCBR18

3 I 179

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI01

3 I 196

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI02

3 I 216

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI03

3 I 235

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI04

3 I 254

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI05

3 I 272

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI06

3 I 292

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI07

3 I 310

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI08

3 I 330

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI09

3 I 348

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI10

3 I 359

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI11

3 I 378

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI12

3 I 397

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI13

3 I 416

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI14

3 I 435

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI15

3 I 454

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI16

3 I 473

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI17

3 I 492

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI18

3 I 511

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI19

3 I 530

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI20

3 I 549

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI21

3 I 568

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI22

3 I 587

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI23

3 I 606

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Table continues on next page

1155
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Sub Value

SXSWI24

3 I 625

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI25

3 I 644

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI26

3 I 663

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI27

3 I 682

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI28

3 I 701

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Enable

SXCBR01

2 I 7855

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable

Sub Enable

SXCBR02

2 I 7865

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR03

2 I 7885

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR04

2 I 7903

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR05

2 I 7924

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR06

2 I 7941

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR07

2 I 7962

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR08

2 I 7979

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR09

3I8

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR10

3 I 25

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR11

3 I 46

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR12

3 I 55

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR13

3 I 75

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR14

3 I 93

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR15

3 I 121

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR16

3 I 132

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR17

3 I 159

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR18

3 I 178

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Table continues on next page

1156
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Sub Enable

SXSWI01

3 I 197

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI02

3 I 215

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI03

3 I 234

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI04

3 I 252

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI05

3 I 271

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI06

3 I 290

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI07

3 I 309

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI08

3 I 328

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI09

3 I 347

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI10

3 I 360

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI11

3I 379

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI12

3 I 398

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI13

3 I 417

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI14

3 I 436

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI15

3 I 455

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI16

3 I 474

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI17

3 I 493

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI18

3 I 512

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI19

3 I 531

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI20

3 I 550

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI21

3 I 569

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI22

3 I 588

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI23

3 I 607

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI24

3 I 626

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Table continues on next page

1157
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Sub Enable

SXSWI25

3 I 645

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI26

3 I 664

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI27

3 I 683

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI28

3 I 702

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Update Block

SXCBR01

2 I 7853

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR02

2 I 7864

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR03

2 I 7883

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR04

2 I 7905

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR05

2 I 7922

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR06

2 I 7943

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR07

2 I 7960

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR08

2 I 7981

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR09

3I6

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR10

3 I 27

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR11

3 I 44

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR12

3 I 57

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR13

3 I 73

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR14

3 I 92

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR15

3 I 122

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR16

3 I 131

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR17

3 I 160

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR18

3 I 177

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI01

3 I 198

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI02

3 I 214

SPA parameter for update block

command

Table continues on next page

1158
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Update Block

SXSWI03

3 I 236

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI04

3 I 253

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI05

3 I 273

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI06

3 I 291

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI07

3 I 311

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI08

3 I 329

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI09

3 I 349

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI10

3 I 358

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI11

3 I 377

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI12

3 I 396

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI13

3 I 415

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI14

3 I 434

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI15

3 I 453

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI16

3 I 472

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI17

3 I 491

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI18

3 I 510

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI19

3 I 529

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI20

3 I 548

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI21

3 I 567

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI22

3 I 586

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI23

3 I 605

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI24

3 I 624

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI25

3 I 643

SPA parameter for update block

command

Table continues on next page

1159
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

19.5.4

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Update Block

SXSWI26

3 I 662

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI27

3 I 681

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI28

3 I 700

SPA parameter for update block

command

Technical data
Table 825:

LON communication protocol

Function

Value

Protocol

LON

Communication speed

1.25 Mbit/s

19.6

SPA communication protocol

19.6.1

Functionality
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.

19.6.2

Design
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC
requires the following equipment:

Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600. (Note! SPA
cannot be used with PCM600 2.6).
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required
is a front-connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for
using "FSTACCS", that is, Field Service Tool Access.

1160
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.6.3
Table 826:
Name

Settings
SPA Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SlaveAddress

1 - 899

30

Slave address

BaudRate

300 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd

9600 Bd

Baudrate on serial line

Table 827:
Name

LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation

SlaveAddress

1 - 899

30

Slave address

19.6.4

Operation principle
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7
data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For
more information on recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to
Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated
need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves
and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data
to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced
polling (for example, for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends
information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all
slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive
state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol

The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data
to an IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found
in table 828.

1161
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

Table 828:

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

SPA addresses for the MIM function

Function block

SPA address

MIM3-CH1

4-O-6508

MIM3-CH2

4-O-6511

MIM3-CH3

4-O-6512

MIM3-CH4

4-O-6515

MIM3-CH5

4-O-6516

MIM3-CH6

4-O-6519

MIM4-CH1

4-O-6527

MIM4-CH2

4-O-6530

MIM4-CH3

4-O-6531

MIM4-CH4

4-O-6534

MIM4-CH5

4-O-6535

MIM4-CH6

4-O-6538

MIM5-CH1

4-O-6546

MIM5-CH2

4-O-6549

MIM5-CH3

4-O-6550

MIM5-CH4

4-O-6553

MIM5-CH5

4-O-6554

MIM5-CH6

4-O-6557

MIM6-CH1

4-O-6565

MIM6-CH2

4-O-6568

MIM6-CH3

4-O-6569

MIM6-CH4

4-O-6572

MIM6-CH5

4-O-6573

MIM6-CH6

4-O-6576

MIM7-CH1

4-O-6584

MIM7-CH2

4-O-6587

MIM7-CH3

4-O-6588

MIM7-CH4

4-O-6591

MIM7-CH5

4-O-6592

MIM7-CH6

4-O-6595

MIM8-CH1

4-O-6603

MIM8-CH2

4-O-6606

MIM8-CH3

4-O-6607

MIM8-CH4

4-O-6610

MIM8-CH5

4-O-6611

MIM8-CH6

4-O-6614

MIM9-CH1

4-O-6622

MIM9-CH2

4-O-6625

Table continues on next page

1162
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block

SPA address

MIM9-CH3

4-O-6626

MIM9-CH4

4-O-6629

MIM9-CH5

4-O-6630

MIM9-CH6

4-O-6633

MIM10-CH1

4-O-6641

MIM10-CH2

4-O-6644

MIM10-CH3

4-O-6645

MIM10-CH4

4-O-6648

MIM10-CH5

4-O-6649

MIM10-CH6

4-O-6652

MIM11-CH1

4-O-6660

MIM11-CH2

4-O-6663

MIM11-CH3

4-O-6664

MIM11-CH4

4-O-6667

MIM11-CH5

4-O-6668

MIM11-CH6

4-O-6671

MIM12-CH1

4-O-6679

MIM12-CH2

4-O-6682

MIM12-CH3

4-O-6683

MIM12-CH4

4-O-6686

MIM12-CH5

4-O-6687

MIM12-CH6

4-O-6690

MIM13-CH1

4-O-6698

MIM13-CH2

4-O-6701

MIM13-CH3

4-O-6702

MIM13-CH4

4-O-6705

MIM13-CH5

4-O-6706

MIM13-CH6

4-O-6709

MIM14-CH1

4-O-6717

MIM14-CH2

4-O-6720

MIM14-CH3

4-O-6721

MIM14-CH4

4-O-6724

MIM14-CH5

4-O-6725

MIM14-CH6

4-O-6728

MIM15-CH1

4-O-6736

MIM15-CH2

4-O-6739

MIM15-CH3

4-O-6740

MIM15-CH4

4-O-6743

MIM15-CH5

4-O-6744

Table continues on next page

1163
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block

SPA address

MIM15-CH6

4-O-6747

MIM16-CH1

4-O-6755

MIM16-CH2

4-O-6758

MIM16-CH3

4-O-6759

MIM16-CH4

4-O-6762

MIM16-CH5

4-O-6763

MIM16-CH6

4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are
found in table 829.
Table 829:
Function block

SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function

SPA address CNT_VAL

SPA address NEW_VAL

PCFCNT:1

6-O-2788

6-O-2787

PCFCNT:2

6-O-2794

6-O-2793

PCFCNT:3

6-O-2800

6-O-2799

PCFCNT:4

6-O-2806

6-O-2805

PCFCNT:5

6-O-2812

6-O-2811

PCFCNT:6

6-O-2818

6-O-2817

PCFCNT:7

6-O-2824

6-O-2823

PCFCNT:8

6-O-2830

6-O-2829

PCFCNT:9

6-O-2836

6-O-2835

PCFCNT:10

6-O-2842

6-O-2841

PCFCNT:11

6-O-2848

6-O-2847

PCFCNT:12

6-O-2854

6-O-2853

PCFCNT:13

6-O-2860

6-O-2859

PCFCNT:14

6-O-2866

6-O-2865

PCFCNT:15

6-O-2872

6-O-2871

PCFCNT:16

6-O-2878

6-O-2877

I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module
function block are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses,
refer to section Related documents in Product Guide.
Single command, 16 signals
The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a
substation automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block
has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.

1164
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks;

SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 16 signals
function block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first
output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example,
output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 830.
Table 830:

SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function

Function block

SPA address CMD Input

SPA address CMD output

SINGLECMD1-Cmd1

4-S-4639

5-O-511

SINGLECMD1-Cmd2

4-S-4640

5-O-512

SINGLECMD1-Cmd3

4-S-4641

5-O-513

SINGLECMD1-Cmd4

4-S-4642

5-O-514

SINGLECMD1-Cmd5

4-S-4643

5-O-515

SINGLECMD1-Cmd6

4-S-4644

5-O-516

SINGLECMD1-Cmd7

4-S-4645

5-O-517

SINGLECMD1-Cmd8

4-S-4646

5-O-518

SINGLECMD1-Cmd9

4-S-4647

5-O-519

SINGLECMD1-Cmd10

4-S-4648

5-O-520

SINGLECMD1-Cmd11

4-S-4649

5-O-521

SINGLECMD1-Cmd12

4-S-4650

5-O-522

SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13

4-S-4651

5-O-523

SINGLECMD1-Cmd14

4-S-4652

5-O-524

SINGLECMD1-Cmd15

4-S-4653

5-O-525

SINGLECMD1-Cmd16

4-S-4654

5-O-526

SINGLECMD2-Cmd1

4-S-4672

5-O-527

SINGLECMD2-Cmd2

4-S-4673

5-O-528

SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3

4-S-4674

5-O-529

SINGLECMD2-Cmd4

4-S-4675

5-O-530

SINGLECMD2-Cmd5

4-S-4676

5-O-531

SINGLECMD2-Cmd6

4-S-4677

5-O-532

SINGLECMD2-Cmd7

4-S-4678

5-O-533

SINGLECMD2-Cmd8

4-S-4679

5-O-534

SINGLECMD2-Cmd9

4-S-4680

5-O-535

SINGLECMD2-Cmd10

4-S-4681

5-O-536

SINGLECMD2-Cmd11

4-S-4682

5-O-537

SINGLECMD2-Cmd12

4-S-4683

5-O-538

SINGLECMD2-Cmd13

4-S-4684

5-O-539

Table continues on next page

1165
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
Function block

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

SPA address CMD Input

SPA address CMD output

SINGLECMD2-Cmd14

4-S-4685

5-O-540

SINGLECMD2-Cmd15

4-S-4686

5-O-541

SINGLECMD2-Cmd16

4-S-4687

5-O-542

SINGLECMD3-Cmd1

4-S-4705

5-O-543

SINGLECMD3-Cmd2

4-S-4706

5-O-544

SINGLECMD3-Cmd3

4-S-4707

5-O-545

SINGLECMD3-Cmd4

4-S-4708

5-O-546

SINGLECMD3-Cmd5

4-S-4709

5-O-547

SINGLECMD3-Cmd6

4-S-4710

5-O-548

SINGLECMD3-Cmd7

4-S-4711

5-O-549

SINGLECMD3-Cmd8

4-S-4712

5-O-550

SINGLECMD3-Cmd9

4-S-4713

5-O-551

SINGLECMD3-Cmd10

4-S-4714

5-O-552

SINGLECMD3-Cmd11

4-S-4715

5-O-553

SINGLECMD3-Cmd12

4-S-4716

5-O-554

SINGLECMD3-Cmd13

4-S-4717

5-O-555

SINGLECMD3-Cmd14

4-S-4718

5-O-556

SINGLECMD3-Cmd15

4-S-4719

5-O-557

SINGLECMD3-Cmd16

4-S-4720

5-O-558

Figure 543 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection
IED for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:
1 are shown in table 830.

1166
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

PULSETIMER

SINGLECMD
BLOCK

INPUT

^OUT1
^OUT2

#1.000

OUT

To output board, CLOSE

^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11

PULSETIMER

AND

^OUT7
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4N

OUT
NOUT

INPUT
#1.000

OUT

To output board, OPEN

^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

SYNCH OK

IEC05000717-2-en.vsd
IEC05000717 V2 EN

Figure 543:

Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control

of a circuit breaker

The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady
or pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting /
General Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command.
Event function
Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for
example, operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented
in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. All the internal signals are time tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on
each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The
event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events
according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest
event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED,
Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Setting / General Setting / Monitoring / Event Function as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 831.

1167
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

Table 831:
Event block

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Status and event codes

Status

Single indication1)
Set event
Reset
event

Double indication
Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
ate 00
11

EVENT:1
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Input 16

22O1
22O2
22O3
22O4
22O5
22O6
22O7
22O8
22O9
22O10
22O11
22O12
22O13
22O14
22O15
22O16

22E33
22E35
22E37
22E39
22E41
22E43
22E45
22E47
22E49
22E51
22E53
22E55
22E57
22E59
22E61
22E63

22E32
22E34
22E36
22E38
22E40
22E42
22E44
22E46
22E48
22E50
22E52
22E54
22E56
22E58
22E60
22E62

22E0
22E4
22E8
22E12
22E16
22E20
22E24
22E28
-

22E1
22E5
22E9
22E13
22E17
22E21
22E25
22E29
-

22E2
22E6
22E10
22E14
22E18
22E22
22E26
22E30
-

22E3
22E7
22E11
22E15
22E19
22E23
22E27
22E31
-

EVENT:2
EVENT:3
EVENT:20

230..
240..
410..

23E..
24E..
41E..

23E..
24E..
41E..

23E..
24E..
41E..

23E..
23E..
41E..

23E..
24E..
41E..

23E..
24E..
41E..

These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.
Connection of signals as events
Signals coming from different protection and control functions and must be sent as
events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the
Event function block according to figure 544.
EVENT
Block
ILRANG
PSTO
UL12RANG
UL23RANG
UL31RANG
3I0RANG
3U0RANG
FALSE

BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC07000065-2-en.vsd
IEC07000065 V2 EN

Figure 544:

Connection of protection signals for event handling

1168
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.6.4.1

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the
analog/digital conversion module (ADM) and is used for LON, SPA,
IEC60870-5-103, or DNP communication.
There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables and 2) ST/
bayonet for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a
combination of both, which is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions
concerning handling and connection of fibre cables.
For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the
Application Manual and Commissioning Manual respectively.

19.6.5

Technical data
Table 832:

SPA communication protocol

Function

Value

Protocol

SPA

Communication speed

300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400

Bd

Slave number

1 to 899

19.7

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

19.7.1

Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must
have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

19.7.2

Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

19.7.2.1

Functionality
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.
The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data
Units) are generated.

1169
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P,
Q, F are optional but there can be no holes.
3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).

Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IL1
3.4 = IN AND UN
3.3 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND P AND Q
3.2 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IL2 AND NOT ( 3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)

19.7.2.2

Identification
Function description

Function block
name

Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.2.3

IEC 60617
identification

I103MEAS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block
I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F
IEC10000287-1-en.vsd
IEC10000287 V1 EN

Figure 545:

19.7.2.4

I103MEAS function block

Signals
Table 833:
Name

I103MEAS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of service value reporting

IL1

REAL

0.0

Service value for current phase L1

IL2

REAL

0.0

Service value for current phase L2

IL3

REAL

0.0

Service value for current phase L3

Table continues on next page

1170
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

19.7.2.5
Table 834:
Name

Type

Default

Description

IN

REAL

0.0

Service value for residual current IN

UL1

REAL

0.0

Service value for voltage phase L1

UL2

REAL

0.0

Service value for voltage phase L2

UL3

REAL

0.0

Service value for voltage phase L3

UL1L2

REAL

0.0

Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2

UN

REAL

0.0

Service value for residual voltage UN

REAL

0.0

Service value for active power

REAL

0.0

Service value for reactive power

REAL

0.0

Service value for system frequency

Settings
I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FunctionType

1 - 255

Function type (1-255)

MaxIL1

1 - 99999

3000

Maximum current phase L1

MaxIL2

1 - 99999

3000

Maximum current phase L2

MaxIL3

1 - 99999

3000

Maximum current phase L3

MaxIN

1 - 99999

3000

Maximum residual current IN

MaxUL1

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

230.00

Maximum voltage for phase L1

MaxUL2

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

230.00

Maximum voltage for phase L2

MaxUL3

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

230.00

Maximum voltage for phase L3

MaxUL1-UL2

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2

MaxUN

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

230.00

Maximum residual voltage UN

MaxP

0.00 - 2000.00

MW

0.05

1200.00

Maximum value for active power

MaxQ

0.00 - 2000.00

MVAr

0.05

1200.00

Maximum value for reactive power

MaxF

45.0 - 66.0

Hz

1.0

51.0

Maximum system frequency

19.7.3

Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR

19.7.3.1

Functionality
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each
block in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.

1171
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.7.3.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Identification
Function description

Function block
name

Measurands user defined signals for

IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.3.3

IEC 60617
identification

I103MEASUSR

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN

Figure 546:

19.7.3.4

I103MEASUSR function block

Signals
Table 835:
Name

I103MEASUSR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of service value reporting

INPUT1

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 1

INPUT2

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 2

INPUT3

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 3

INPUT4

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 4

INPUT5

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 5

INPUT6

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 6

INPUT7

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 7

INPUT8

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 8

INPUT9

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 9

1172
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.7.3.5
Table 836:
Name

Settings
I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FunctionType

1 - 255

25

Function type (1-255)

InfNo

1 - 255

Information number for measurands

(1-255)

MaxMeasur1

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Maximum value for measurement on

input 1

MaxMeasur2

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Maximum value for measurement on

input 2

MaxMeasur3

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Maximum value for measurement on

input 3

MaxMeasur4

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Maximum value for measurement on

input 4

MaxMeasur5

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Maximum value for measurement on

input 5

MaxMeasur6

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Maximum value for measurement on

input 6

MaxMeasur7

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Maximum value for measurement on

input 7

MaxMeasur8

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Maximum value for measurement on

input 8

MaxMeasur9

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Maximum value for measurement on

input 9

19.7.4

Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR

19.7.4.1

Functionality
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

19.7.4.2

Identification
Function description
Function status auto-recloser for IEC
60870-5-103

Function block
name
I103AR

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

1173
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.7.4.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD
IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN

Figure 547:

19.7.4.4

I103AR function block

Signals
Table 837:

I103AR Input signals

Name

19.7.4.5
Table 838:
Name
FunctionType

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

16_ARACT

BOOLEAN

Information number 16, auto-recloser active

128_CBON

BOOLEAN

Information number 128, circuit breaker on by autorecloser

130_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked

Settings
I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Function type (1-255)

19.7.5

Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF

19.7.5.1

Functionality
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

19.7.5.2

Identification
Function description
Function status earth-fault for IEC
60870-5-103

Function block
name
I103EF

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

1174
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.7.5.3

Function block
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN

Figure 548:

19.7.5.4

I103EF function block

Signals
Table 839:

I103EF Input signals

Name

19.7.5.5
Table 840:
Name
FunctionType

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

51_EFFW

BOOLEAN

Information number 51, earth-fault forward

52_EFREV

BOOLEAN

Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

Settings
I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
160

Description
Function type (1-255)

19.7.6

Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

19.7.6.1

Functionality
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to
a correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN
represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the
general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that
is triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the
IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.

19.7.6.2

Identification
Function description
Function status fault protection for IEC
60870-5-103

Function block
name
I103FLTPROT

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

1175
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.7.6.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
IEC10000291-1-en.vsd
IEC10000291 V1 EN

Figure 549:

19.7.6.4

I103FLTPROT function block

Signals
Table 841:
Name

I103FLTPROT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting.

64_STL1

BOOLEAN

Information number 64, start phase L1

65_STL2

BOOLEAN

Information number 65, start phase L2

66_STL3

BOOLEAN

Information number 66, start phase L3

67_STIN

BOOLEAN

Information number 67, start residual current IN

68_TRGEN

BOOLEAN

Information number 68, trip general

69_TRL1

BOOLEAN

Information number 69, trip phase L1

70_TRL2

BOOLEAN

Information number 70, trip phase L2

71_TRL3

BOOLEAN

Information number 71, trip phase L3

72_TRBKUP

BOOLEAN

Information number 72, back up trip I>>

73_SCL

REAL

Information number 73, fault location in ohm

74_FW

BOOLEAN

Information number 74, forward/line

75_REV

BOOLEAN

Information number 75, reverse/busbar

Table continues on next page

1176
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

19.7.6.5
Table 842:
Name
FunctionType

Type

Default

Description

76_TRANS

BOOLEAN

Information number 76, signal transmitted

77_RECEV

BOOLEAN

Information number 77, signal received

78_ZONE1

BOOLEAN

Information number 78, zone 1

79_ZONE2

BOOLEAN

Information number 79, zone 2

80_ZONE3

BOOLEAN

Information number 80, zone 3

81_ZONE4

BOOLEAN

Information number 81, zone 4

82_ZONE5

BOOLEAN

Information number 82, zone 5

84_STGEN

BOOLEAN

Information number 84, start general

85_BFP

BOOLEAN

Information number 85, breaker failure

86_MTRL1

BOOLEAN

Information number 86, trip measuring system

phase L1

87_MTRL2

BOOLEAN

Information number 87, trip measuring system

phase L2

88_MTRL3

BOOLEAN

Information number 88, trip measuring system

phase L3

89_MTRN

BOOLEAN

Information number 89, trip measuring system

neutral N

90_IOC

BOOLEAN

Information number 90, over current trip, stage low

91_IOC

BOOLEAN

Information number 91, over current trip, stage high

92_IEF

BOOLEAN

Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low

93_IEF

BOOLEAN

Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high

ARINPROG

BOOLEAN

Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

FLTLOC

BOOLEAN

Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLOCALCMADE)

Settings
I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
128

Description
Function type (1-255)

19.7.7

IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

19.7.7.1

Functionality
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is
defined for each input signal.

1177
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.7.7.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Identification
Function description

Function block
name

IED status for IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.7.3

IEC 60617
identification

I103IED

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN

Figure 550:

19.7.7.4

I103IED function block

Signals
Table 843:

I103IED Input signals

Name

19.7.7.5
Table 844:
Name
FunctionType

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

19_LEDRS

BOOLEAN

Information number 19, reset LEDs

21_TESTM

BOOLEAN

Information number 21, test mode is active

22_SETCH

BOOLEAN

Information number 22, setting changed

23_GRP1

BOOLEAN

Information number 23, setting group 1 is active

24_GRP2

BOOLEAN

Information number 24, setting group 2 is active

25_GRP3

BOOLEAN

Information number 25, setting group 3 is active

26_GRP4

BOOLEAN

Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

Settings
I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Function type (1-255)

1178
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.7.8

Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV

19.7.8.1

Functionality
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications
in monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

19.7.8.2

Identification
Function description

Function block
name

Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.8.3

IEC 60617
identification

I103SUPERV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN

Figure 551:

19.7.8.4

I103SUPERV function block

Signals
Table 845:
Name

I103SUPERV Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

32_MEASI

BOOLEAN

Information number 32, measurand supervision of

I

33_MEASU

BOOLEAN

Information number 33, measurand supervision of

U

37_IBKUP

BOOLEAN

Information number 37, I high-high back-up

protection

38_VTFF

BOOLEAN

Information number 38, fuse failure VT

46_GRWA

BOOLEAN

Information number 46, group warning

47_GRAL

BOOLEAN

Information number 47, group alarm

1179
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.7.8.5
Table 846:
Name
FunctionType

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
-

Step

Default

Description
Function type (1-255)

19.7.9

Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

19.7.9.1

Functionality
I103USRDEF is a function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each
block in the private range, and the information number parameter for each input
signal.

GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN

Figure 552:

19.7.9.2

Identification
Function description
Status for user defiend signals for IEC
60870-5-103

Function block
name
I103USRDEF

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

1180
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.7.9.3

Function block
I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
IEC10000294-1-en.vsd
IEC10000294 V1 EN

Figure 553:

19.7.9.4

I103USRDEF function block

Signals
Table 847:

I103USRDEF Input signals

Name

19.7.9.5
Table 848:
Name

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary signal Input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 8

Settings
I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FunctionType

1 - 255

Function type (1-255)

InfNo_1

1 - 255

Information number for binary input 1

(1-255)

InfNo_2

1 - 255

Information number for binary input 2

(1-255)

InfNo_3

1 - 255

Information number for binary input 3

(1-255)

InfNo_4

1 - 255

Information number for binary input 4

(1-255)

InfNo_5

1 - 255

Information number for binary input 5

(1-255)

Table continues on next page

1181
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

InfNo_6

1 - 255

Information number for binary input 6

(1-255)

InfNo_7

1 - 255

Information number for binary input 7

(1-255)

InfNo_8

1 - 255

Information number for binary input 8

(1-255)

19.7.10

Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

19.7.10.1

Functionality
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined
output signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in
case of restart.

19.7.10.2

Identification
Function description

Function block
name

Function commands for IEC

60870-5-103

19.7.10.3

IEC 60617
identification

I103CMD

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block
I103CMD
BLOCK

16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
IEC10000282-1-en.vsd

IEC10000282 V1 EN

Figure 554:

19.7.10.4

I103CMD function block

Signals
Table 849:
Name
BLOCK

Table 850:
Name

I103CMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of commands

I103CMD Output signals

Type

Description

16-AR

BOOLEAN

Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser

17-DIFF

BOOLEAN

Information number 17, block of differential

protection

18-PROT

BOOLEAN

Information number 18, block of protection

1182
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.7.10.5
Table 851:
Name
FunctionType

Settings
I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

1 - 255

Step

Default

Description

Function type (1-255)

19.7.11

IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

19.7.11.1

Functionality
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.
All outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter.

19.7.11.2

Identification
Function description

Function block
name

IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.11.3

IEC 60617
identification

I103IEDCMD

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block
BLOCK

I103IEDCMD
19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
IEC10000283-1-en.vsd

IEC10000283 V1 EN

Figure 555:

19.7.11.4

I103IEDCMD function block

Signals
Table 852:
Name
BLOCK

Table 853:
Name

I103IEDCMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of commands

I103IEDCMD Output signals

Type

Description

19-LEDRS

BOOLEAN

Information number 19, reset LEDs

23-GRP1

BOOLEAN

Information number 23, activate setting group 1

24-GRP2

BOOLEAN

Information number 24, activate setting group 2

25-GRP3

BOOLEAN

Information number 25, activate setting group 3

26-GRP4

BOOLEAN

Information number 26, activate setting group 4

1183
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.7.11.5
Table 854:
Name
FunctionType

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

1 - 255

Step

Default

Description

255

Function type (1-255)

19.7.12

Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD

19.7.12.1

Functionality
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output
signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block
in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.

19.7.12.2

Identification
Function description

Function block
name

Function commands user defined for

IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.12.3

IEC 60617
identification

I103USRCMD

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block
BLOCK

I103USRCMD
^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8
IEC10000284-1-en.vsd

IEC10000284 V1 EN

Figure 556:

19.7.12.4

I103USRCMD function block

Signals
Table 855:
Name
BLOCK

I103USRCMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of commands

1184
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 856:

I103USRCMD Output signals

Name

19.7.12.5
Table 857:
Name

Type

Description

OUTPUT1

BOOLEAN

Command output 1

OUTPUT2

BOOLEAN

Command output 2

OUTPUT3

BOOLEAN

Command output 3

OUTPUT4

BOOLEAN

Command output 4

OUTPUT5

BOOLEAN

Command output 5

OUTPUT6

BOOLEAN

Command output 6

OUTPUT7

BOOLEAN

Command output 7

OUTPUT8

BOOLEAN

Command output 8

Settings
I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FunctionType

1 - 255

Function type (1-255)

PulseMode

Steady
Pulsed

Pulsed

Pulse mode

PulseLength

0.200 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Pulse length

InfNo_1

1 - 255

Information number for output 1 (1-255)

InfNo_2

1 - 255

Information number for output 2 (1-255)

InfNo_3

1 - 255

Information number for output 3 (1-255)

InfNo_4

1 - 255

Information number for output 4 (1-255)

InfNo_5

1 - 255

Information number for output 5 (1-255)

InfNo_6

1 - 255

Information number for output 6 (1-255)

InfNo_7

1 - 255

Information number for output 7 (1-255)

InfNo_8

1 - 255

Information number for output 8 (1-255)

19.7.13

Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

19.7.13.1

Functionality
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103.
The function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2
steady ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2,
while the OFF output is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON
asserted and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with command 1.

1185
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Steady mode is selected by setting PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is retained,

and a command in steady mode will be reissued on restart.

19.7.13.2

Identification
Function description

Function block
name

Function commands generic for IEC

60870-5-103

19.7.13.3

IEC 60617
identification

I103GENCMD

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block
BLOCK

I103GENCMD
^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON
IEC10000285-1-en.vsd

IEC10000285 V1 EN

Figure 557:

19.7.13.4

I103GENCMD function block

Signals
Table 858:

I103GENCMD Input signals

Name

Type

BLOCK

Table 859:

Table 860:
Name

Description
Block of command

I103GENCMD Output signals

Name

19.7.13.5

Default

BOOLEAN

Type

Description

CMD_OFF

BOOLEAN

Command output OFF

CMD_ON

BOOLEAN

Command output ON

Settings
I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FunctionType

1 - 255

Function type (1-255)

PulseLength

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Pulse length

InfNo

1 - 255

Information number for command output

(1-255)

1186
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.7.14

IED commands with position and select for IEC

60870-5-103 I103POSCMD

19.7.14.1

Functionality
I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are getting the position
value as an integer (for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI
function block) and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). The
standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3. However, when connected to a
switching device, these values are transmitted.
The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring direction (the position
information), not the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used
to indicate that the monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-beforeoperate type of control)

19.7.14.2

Identification
Function description

Function block
name

IED commands with position and select

for IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.14.3

IEC 60617
identification

I103POSCMD

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Function block
I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT
IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN

Figure 558:

19.7.14.4

I103POSCMD function block

Signals
Table 861:
Name

I103POSCMD Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of command

POSITION

INTEGER

Position of controllable object

SELECT

BOOLEAN

Select of controllable object

1187
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.7.14.5
Table 862:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FunctionType

1 - 255

Fucntion type (1-255)

InfNo

160 - 196

160

Information number for command output

(1-255)

19.7.15

Operation principle

19.7.15.1

General
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master
and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.

Introduction to IEC 608705103 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:

Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Command handling

Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)

File transfer (disturbance files)

Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard
part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs
with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in
the protection and control IED.

1188
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be

considered to ensure correct time stamping.

Commands in control direction

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Table 863:

I103IEDCMD supported indications

INF

Description

19

LED Reset

23

Activate setting group 1

24

Activate setting group 2

25

Activate setting group 3

26

Activate setting group 4

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Table 864:
INF

Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications

Description

16

Auto-recloser on/off

17

Teleprotection on/off

18

Protection on/off

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Number of instances: 4
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with
parameter FunctionType.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.

1189
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

Table 865:
INF

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

I103UserCMD supported indications

Description

11)

Output signal 01

2*

Output signal 02

3*

Output signal 03

4*

Output signal 04

5*

Output signal 05

6*

Output signal 06

7*

Output signal 07

8*

Output signal 08

1) * User defined information number

Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each input signals.
Table 866:

I103IED supported functions

INF

Description

19

LED reset

21

TestMode

22

Local Parameter setting

23

Setting group 1 active

24

Setting group 2 active

25

Setting group 3 active

26

Setting group 4 active

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef

Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Number of instances: 20
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType for each function block
instance in private range.
Information number is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in
range 1 - 8.

1190
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 867:
INF

I103UserDef supported indications

Description

11)

Input signal 01

2*

Input signal 02

3*

Input signal 03

4*

Input signal 04

5*

Input signal 05

6*

Input signal 06

7*

Input signal 07

8*

Input signal 08

1) * User defined information number

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for output signals.
Table 868:
INF

I103SUPERV supported functions

Description

TYP

GI

COT

32

Measurand supervision I

1,7,9

33

Measurand supervision U

1,7,9

37

I>>back-up operation

1,7,9

38

VT fuse failure

1,7,9

46

Group warning

1,7,9

47

Group alarm

1,7,9

Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 869:
INF

I103EF supported indications

Description

51

Earth fault forward

52

Earth fault reverse

1191
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Number of instances: 1
Info. no.

Message

Supported

64

Start L1

Yes

65

Start L2

Yes

66

Start L3

Yes

67

Start IN

Yes

84

General start

Yes

69

Trip L1

Yes

70

Trip L2

Yes

71

Trip L3

Yes

68

General trip

Yes

74

Fault forward/line

Yes

75

Fault reverse/busbar

Yes

78

Zone 1

Yes

79

Zone 2

Yes

80

Zone 3

Yes

81

Zone 4

Yes

82

Zone 5

Yes

76

Signal transmitted

Yes

77

Signal received

Yes

73

SCL, Fault location in ohm

Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential,
overcurrent and earth fault protection functions.
FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Number of instances: 1

1192
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Info. no.

Message

Supported

64

Start L1

Yes

65

Start L2

Yes

66

Start L3

Yes

67

Start IN

Yes

84

General start

Yes

69

Trip L1

Yes

70

Trip L2

Yes

71

Trip L3

Yes

68

General trip

Yes

74

Fault forward/line

Yes

75

Fault reverse/busbar

Yes

85

Breaker failure

Yes

86

Trip measuring system L1

Yes

87

Trip measuring system L2

Yes

88

Trip measuring system L3

Yes

89

Trip measuring system N

Yes

90

Over current trip I>

Yes

91

Over current trip I>>

Yes

92

Earth fault trip IN>

Yes

93

Earth fault trip IN>>

Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 870:
INF

I103AR supported indications

Description

16

Autorecloser active

128

CB on by Autorecloser

130

Autorecloser blocked

Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
Measurands in public range, I103MEAS
Number of instances: 1
1193
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU
(Application Service Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as
OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and 2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require
that a rated value to use as base exists, and then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as
maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as there is no way to propagate
value to client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not make much difference.
You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or
client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>
If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaledmax ::= 1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2
Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the
best accuracy.
Table 871:
INF

I103MEAS supported indications

Description

148

IL1

144, 145,
146, 148

IL2

148

IL3

147

IN, Neutral current

148

UL1

148

UL2

148

UL3

145, 146

UL1-UL2

147

UN, Neutral voltage

146, 148

P, active power

146, 148

Q, reactive power

148

f, frequency

Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr

Number of instances: 3
Function type parameter for each block in private range.
Information number must be selected for measurands.

1194
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 872:

I103MeasUsr supported indications

INF

FUN

*1)

*2)

GI

TYP

COT

No, polled
with CL2

*3)

Description

2,7

Meas1

No, polled
with CL2

2,7

Meas2

No, polled
with CL2

2,7

Meas3

No, polled
with CL2

2,7

Meas4

No, polled
with CL2

2,7

Meas5

No, polled
with CL2

2,7

Meas6

No, polled
with CL2

2,7

Meas7

No, polled
with CL2

2,7

Meas8

No, polled
with CL2

2,7

Meas9

1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is
defined by semantics of connected source.

<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.

Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.
<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that
is, only Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted.
Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be
specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:

IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR

1195
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the
private range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available
for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by
the master) will not be reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded
disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can
be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example,
when a disturbance is deleted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new
disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however,
some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance
recorder in 670 series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF
(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates
whether:

Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event
than start

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other
information is always set (hard coded) to:
TP

Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM

Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]

OTEV

Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to

the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes
1196
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

action. In 670 series FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for
each disturbance.
ASDU26 / ASDU31
When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault
number in the power system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip
and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF
is in 670 series, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.

Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485

No

number of loads

No

Optical interface
glass fibre

Yes

plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s

Yes

19200 bit/s

Yes

Link Layer
DFC-bit used

Yes

Connectors
connector F-SMA

No

connector BFOC/2.5

Yes

Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU

Yes

Time-tagged message

Yes

Time-tagged message with rel. time

Yes

Measurands I

Yes

Time-tagged message with rel. time

Yes

Identification

Yes

Time synchronization

Yes

End of general interrogation

Yes

Measurands II

Yes

10

Generic data

No

Table continues on next page

1197
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Supported
11

Generic identification

No

23

List of recorded disturbances

Yes

26

Ready for transm. of disturbance data

Yes

27

Ready for transm. of a channel

Yes

28

Ready for transm of tags

Yes

29

Transmission of tags

Yes

30

Transmission fo disturbance data

Yes

31

End of transmission

Yes

Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction

ASDU

Yes

Time synchronization

Yes

General interrogation

Yes

10

Generic data

No

20

General command

Yes

21

Generic command

No

24

Order for disturbance data transmission

Yes

25

Acknowledgement for distance data transmission

Yes

Selection of basic application functions

19.7.15.2

Test mode

No

Blocking of monitoring direction

Yes

Disturbance data

Yes

Private data

Yes

Generic services

No

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP
and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed
on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication
module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre
cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different
types are available depending on type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of
the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

1198
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.7.16

Technical data
Table 873:

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Function

Value

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103

Communication speed

9600, 19200 Bd

19.8

Horizontal communication via GOOSE for

interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV

19.8.1

Functionality
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via
the IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending
apparatus position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n
control. GOOSE can also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point
and analog measured values between IEDs.

1199
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.8.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK
^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL
IEC07000048-2-en.vsd
IEC07000048 V2 EN

Figure 559:

19.8.3

GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

Signals
Table 874:
Name
BLOCK

GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of output signals

1200
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 875:
Name

GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Type

Description

RESREQ

BOOLEAN

Reservation request

RESGRANT

BOOLEAN

Reservation granted

APP1_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 1 position is open

APP1_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 1 position is closed

APP1VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 1 position is valid

APP2_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 2 position is open

APP2_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 2 position is closed

APP2VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 2 position is valid

APP3_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 3 position is open

APP3_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 3 position is closed

APP3VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 3 position is valid

APP4_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 4 position is open

APP4_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 4 position is closed

APP4VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 4 position is valid

APP5_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 5 position is open

APP5_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 5 position is closed

APP5VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 5 position is valid

APP6_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 6 position is open

APP6_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 6 position is closed

APP6VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 6 position is valid

APP7_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 7 position is open

APP7_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 7 position is closed

APP7VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 7 position is valid

APP8_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 8 position is open

APP8_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 8 position is closed

APP8VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 8 position is valid

APP9_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 9 position is open

APP9_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 9 position is closed

APP9VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 9 position is valid

APP10_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 10 position is open

APP10_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 10 position is closed

APP10VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 10 position is valid

APP11_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 11 position is open

APP11_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 11 position is closed

APP11VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 11 position is valid

APP12_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 12 position is open

APP12_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 12 position is closed

APP12VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 12 position is valid

Table continues on next page

1201
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type
BOOLEAN

Apparatus 13 position is open

APP13_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 13 position is closed

APP13VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 13 position is valid

APP14_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 14 position is open

APP14_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 14 position is closed

APP14VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 14 position is valid

APP15_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 15 position is open

APP15_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 15 position is closed

APP15VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 15 position is valid

COMMVALID

BOOLEAN

Communication Valid

TEST

BOOLEAN

Test Output

19.8.4

Settings

Table 876:

GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name
Operation

Values (Range)
Off
On

Description

APP13_OP

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off/On

1202
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.9

Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

19.9.1

Function block
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK

^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL
IEC07000047-2-en.vsd

IEC07000047 V2 EN

Figure 560:

19.9.2

GOOSEBINRCV function block

Signals
Table 877:
Name
BLOCK

Table 878:
Name

GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of output signals

GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary output 1

DVALID1

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary output 2

DVALID2

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary output 3

DVALID3

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 3

Table continues on next page

1203
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

19.9.3
Table 879:
Name
Operation

Type

Description

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary output 4

DVALID4

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Binary output 5

DVALID5

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary output 6

DVALID6

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary output 7

DVALID7

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary output 8

DVALID8

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 8

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Binary output 9

DVALID9

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 9

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Binary output 10

DVALID10

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 10

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Binary output 11

DVALID11

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 11

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Binary output 12

DVALID12

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 12

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Binary output 13

DVALID13

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 13

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Binary output 14

DVALID14

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 14

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Binary output 15

DVALID15

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 15

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Binary output 16

DVALID16

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 16

COMMVALID

BOOLEAN

Communication Valid

TEST

BOOLEAN

Test Output

Settings
GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off/On

1204
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.10

GOOSE function block to receive a double point

value GOOSEDPRCV

19.10.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

GOOSE function block to receive a

double point value

19.10.2

IEC 60617
identification

GOOSEDPRCV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol
via GOOSE.

19.10.3

Function block
GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK

^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000249-1-en.vsd

IEC10000249 V1 EN

Figure 561:

19.10.4

GOOSEDPRCV function block

Signals
Table 880:
Name
BLOCK

Table 881:
Name

GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of function

GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Type

Description

DPOUT

INTEGER

Double point output

DATAVALID

BOOLEAN

Data valid for double point output

COMMVALID

BOOLEAN

Communication valid for double point output

TEST

BOOLEAN

Test output

1205
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.10.5
Table 882:
Name
Operation

19.10.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off/On

Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means
of a cross to receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.11

GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

19.11.1

Identification
Function description
GOOSE function block to receive an
integer value

19.11.2

IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEINTRCV

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

1206
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.11.3

Function block
BLOCK

GOOSEINTRCV
^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000250-1-en.vsd

IEC10000250 V1 EN

Figure 562:

19.11.4

GOOSEINTRCV function block

Signals
Table 883:

GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

Name

Type

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Table 884:

Table 885:
Name
Operation

19.11.6

Description
Block of function

GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name

19.11.5

Default

Type

Description

INTOUT

INTEGER

Integer output

DATAVALID

BOOLEAN

Data valid for integer output

COMMVALID

BOOLEAN

Communication valid for integer output

TEST

BOOLEAN

Test output

Settings
GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off/On

Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means
of a cross to receive the integer values.

1207
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.12

GOOSE function block to receive a measurand

value GOOSEMVRCV

19.12.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

GOOSE function block to receive a

measurand value

19.12.2

IEC 60617
identification

GOOSEMVRCV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

19.12.3

Function block
BLOCK

GOOSEMVRCV
^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000251-1-en.vsd

IEC10000251 V1 EN

Figure 563:

19.12.4

GOOSEMVRCV function block

Signals
Table 886:
Name
BLOCK

GOOSEMVRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of function

1208
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 887:

GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name

19.12.5
Table 888:
Name
Operation

19.12.6

Type

Description

MVOUT

REAL

Measurand value output

DATAVALID

BOOLEAN

Data valid for measurand value output

COMMVALID

BOOLEAN

Communication valid for measurand value output

TEST

BOOLEAN

Test output

Settings
GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off/On

Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means
of a cross to receive the float values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.13

GOOSE function block to receive a single point

value GOOSESPRCV

19.13.1

Identification
Function description
GOOSE function block to receive a
single point value

IEC 61850
identification
GOOSESPRCV

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

1209
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.13.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol
via GOOSE.

19.13.3

Function block
GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK

^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000248-1-en.vsd

IEC10000248 V1 EN

Figure 564:

19.13.4

GOOSESPRCV function block

Signals
Table 889:

GOOSESPRCV Input signals

Name

Type

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Table 890:

Table 891:
Name
Operation

19.13.6

Description
Block of function

GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name

19.13.5

Default

Type

Description

SPOUT

BOOLEAN

Single point output

DATAVALID

BOOLEAN

Data valid for single point output

COMMVALID

BOOLEAN

Communication valid for single point output

TEST

BOOLEAN

Test output

Settings
GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Off

Description
Operation Off/On

Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

1210
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means

of a cross to receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.14

GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive

GOOSEVCTRCONF

19.14.1

Identification
Function description
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send
and receive

19.14.2

IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEVCTRC
ONF

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
GOOSEVCTRCONF function is used to control the rate (in seconds) at which
voltage control information from TR8ATCC is transmitted/received to/from other
IEDs via GOOSE communication. GOOSEVCTRCONF function is visible in PST.
The following voltage control information can be sent from TR8ATCC via
GOOSE communication:

BusV
LoadAIm
LoadARe
PosRel
SetV
VCTRStatus
X2

1211
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.14.3
Table 892:

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
GOOSEVCTRCONF Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SendOperation

Off
On

On

Send operation

SendInterval

0.1 - 5.0

0.1

0.3

Send interval

ReceiveOperation

Off
On

On

Receive operation

ReceiveInterval

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

0.8

Receive interval

19.15

GOOSE voltage control receiving block

GOOSEVCTRRCV

19.15.1

Identification
Function description
GOOSE voltage control receiving block

19.15.2

IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEVCTRR
CV

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
GOOSEVCTRRCV component receives the voltage control data from GOOSE
network at the user defined rate.
This component also checks the received data validity, communication validity and
test mode. Communication validity will be checked upon the rate of data reception.
Data validity also depends upon the communication. If communication is invalid
then data validity will also be invalid. IEC 61850 also checks for data validity
using internal parameters which will also be passed to the DATAVALID output.

19.15.3

Function block
GOOSEVCTRRCV
BLOCK
VCTR_RCV
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000252-1-en.vsd
IEC10000252 V1 EN

Figure 565:

GOOSEVCTRRCV function block

1212
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.15.4

Signals
Table 893:

GOOSEVCTRRCV Input signals

Name

Type

BLOCK

Table 894:

BOOLEAN

Type

Block function

Description

VCTR_RCV

GROUP SIGNAL

Output group connection to voltage control

DATAVALID

BOOLEAN

Data valid for output signals

COMMVALID

BOOLEAN

Communication valid for output signals

TEST

BOOLEAN

Test output

MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND

Function description

19.16.1

Description

GOOSEVCTRRCV Output signals

Name

19.16

Default

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Multiple command and receive

MULTICMDRCV

Multiple command and send

MULTICMDSND

Functionality
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive
signals via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes
16 binary inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving
function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.

19.16.2

Design

19.16.2.1

General
The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of
two modes: Steady or Pulse.

1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse
with a duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the
corresponding binary output. This means that no connected function block
may have a cycle time that is higher than the execution cycle time of the
particular MULTICMDRCV instance.

1213
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
19.16.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK

ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
IEC06000007-2-en.vsd

IEC06000007 V2 EN

Figure 566:

MULTICMDRCV function block

MULTICMDSND
BLOCK
ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
IEC06000008 V2 EN

Figure 567:

19.16.4

MULTICMDSND function block

Signals
Table 895:
Name
BLOCK

MULTICMDRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of function

1214
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 896:
Name

MULTICMDSND Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Input 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

Table 897:
Name

MULTICMDRCV Output signals

Type

Description

ERROR

BOOLEAN

MultiReceive error

NEWDATA

BOOLEAN

New data is received

OUTPUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUTPUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUTPUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUTPUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUTPUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

OUTPUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

OUTPUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

OUTPUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

OUTPUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

OUTPUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

OUTPUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

OUTPUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

OUTPUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

OUTPUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

OUTPUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

OUTPUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

VALID

BOOLEAN

Output data is valid

1215

Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 898:

MULTICMDSND Output signals

Name

Type

ERROR

19.16.5
Table 899:
Name

Description

BOOLEAN

MultiSend error

Settings
MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tMaxCycleTime

0.050 - 200.000

0.001

11.000

Maximum cycle time between receptions

of input data

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum cycle time between receptions

of input data

Mode

Steady
Pulsed

Steady

Mode for output signals

tPulseTime

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Pulse length for multi command outputs

Table 900:
Name

MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tMaxCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

5.000

Maximum time interval between

transmission of output data

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum time interval between

transmission of output data

19.16.6

Operation principle
There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are
fast (8 ms cycle time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance
has 16 binary inputs, to which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected
signals are sent through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent,
MULTICMDRCV, located on a different IED.
The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through
the command block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are
60 instances of the MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the
others are slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision
function, which sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not
receive any data within the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.
LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).

1216
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

19.17

Security events on protocols SECALARM

19.17.1

Security alarm SECALARM

19.17.1.1

Signals
Table 901:

SECALARM Output signals

Name

19.17.1.2
Table 902:
Name
Operation

Type

Description

EVENTID

INTEGER

EventId of the generated security event

SEQNUMBER

INTEGER

Sequence number of the generated security event

Settings
SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
On

Description
Operation On/Off

19.18

Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG

19.18.1

Activity logging ACTIVLOG

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.
There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be
configured with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be
either syslog (RFC 5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

19.18.2
Table 903:
Name

Settings
ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ExtLogSrv1Type

Off
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP

Off

External log server 1 type

ExtLogSrv1Port

1 - 65535

514

External log server 1 port number

ExtLogSrv1IP

0 - 18

IP
Address

127.0.0.1

External log server 1 IP-address

ExtLogSrv2Type

Off
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP

Off

External log server 2 type

Table continues on next page

1217
Technical Manual

Section 19
Station communication
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ExtLogSrv2Port

1 - 65535

514

External log server 2 port number

ExtLogSrv2IP

0 - 18

IP
Address

127.0.0.1

External log server 2 IP-address

ExtLogSrv3Type

Off
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP

Off

External log server 3 type

ExtLogSrv3Port

1 - 65535

514

External log server 3 port number

ExtLogSrv3IP

0 - 18

IP
Address

127.0.0.1

External log server 3 IP-address

ExtLogSrv4Type

Off
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP

Off

External log server 4 type

ExtLogSrv4Port

1 - 65535

514

External log server 4 port number

ExtLogSrv4IP

0 - 18

IP
Address

127.0.0.1

External log server 4 IP-address

ExtLogSrv5Type

Off
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP

Off

External log server 5 type

ExtLogSrv5Port

1 - 65535

514

External log server 5 port number

ExtLogSrv5IP

0 - 18

IP
Address

127.0.0.1

External log server 5 IP-address

ExtLogSrv6Type

Off
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP

Off

External log server 6 type

ExtLogSrv6Port

1 - 65535

514

External log server 6 port number

ExtLogSrv6IP

0 - 18

IP
Address

127.0.0.1

External log server 6 IP-address

1218
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 20

Remote communication

20.1

Binary signal transfer

20.1.1

Identification
Function description

20.1.2

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Binary signal transfer

BinSignReceive

Binary signal transfer

BinSignTransm

Functionality
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection,
or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 670 series
IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any
purpose, for example, communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or
other binary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an
LDCM (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a
64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
The IED can be equipped with up to two short range or medium range LDCM.

1219
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication
20.1.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000043-2-en.vsd
IEC07000043 V2 EN

LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
IEC07000044 V2 EN

Figure 568:

LDCMRecBinStat function blocks

LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
IEC05000451 V2 EN

Figure 569:

20.1.4

LDCMRecBinStat function block

Signals
Table 904:
Name

LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals

Type

Description

COMFAIL

BOOLEAN

Detected error in the differential communication

YBIT

BOOLEAN

Detected error in remote end with incoming

message

NOCARR

BOOLEAN

No carrier is detected in the incoming message

Table continues on next page

1220
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Description

NOMESS

BOOLEAN

No start and stop flags identified for the incoming

message

ADDRERR

BOOLEAN

Incoming message from non-valid address

LNGTHERR

BOOLEAN

Wrong length of the incoming message

CRCERROR

BOOLEAN

Identified error by CRC check in incoming message

REMCOMF

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with received

message

LOWLEVEL

BOOLEAN

Low signal level on the receive link

Table 905:
Name

LDCMRecBinStat2 Output signals

Type

Description

CH1

STRING

Remote communication channel 1

CH2

STRING

Remote communication channel 2

CH3

STRING

Remote communication channel 3

CH4

STRING

Remote communication channel 4

COMFAIL

BOOLEAN

Detected error in the differential communication

YBIT

BOOLEAN

Detected error in remote end with incoming

message

NOCARR

BOOLEAN

No carrier is detected in the incoming message

NOMESS

BOOLEAN

No start and stop flags identified for the incoming

message

ADDRERR

BOOLEAN

Incoming message from non-valid address

LNGTHERR

BOOLEAN

Wrong length of the incoming message

CRCERROR

BOOLEAN

Identified error by CRC check in incoming message

TRDELERR

BOOLEAN

Transmission time is longer than permitted

SYNCERR

BOOLEAN

Error in echo synchronization

REMCOMF

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with received

message

REMGPSER

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS

synchronization

SUBSTITU

BOOLEAN

Link error, values are substituted

LOWLEVEL

BOOLEAN

Low signal level on the receive link

Table 906:
Name

LDCMRecBinStat3 Output signals

Type

Description

CH1

STRING

Remote communication channel 1

CH2

STRING

Remote communication channel 2

CH3

STRING

Remote communication channel 3

CH4

STRING

Remote communication channel 4

COMFAIL

BOOLEAN

Detected error in the differential communication

Table continues on next page

1221
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type
BOOLEAN

Detected error in remote end with incoming

message

NOCARR

BOOLEAN

No carrier is detected in the incoming message

NOMESS

BOOLEAN

No start and stop flags identified for the incoming

message

ADDRERR

BOOLEAN

Incoming message from non-valid address

LNGTHERR

BOOLEAN

Wrong length of the incoming message

CRCERROR

BOOLEAN

Identified error by CRC check in incoming message

TRDELERR

BOOLEAN

Transmission time is longer than permitted

SYNCERR

BOOLEAN

Error in echo synchronization

REMCOMF

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with received

message

REMGPSER

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS

synchronization

SUBSTITU

BOOLEAN

Link error, values are substituted

LOWLEVEL

BOOLEAN

Low signal level on the receive link

20.1.5

Settings

Table 907:

LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)

Name

Description

YBIT

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ChannelMode

Blocked
Normal
OutOfService

Normal

Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,

2=OutOfService

TerminalNo

0 - 255

Terminal number used for line differential

communication

RemoteTermNo

0 - 255

Terminal number on remote terminal

CommSync

Slave
Master

Slave

Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=Slave, 1=Master

OptoPower

LowPower
HighPower

LowPower

Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,

1=High

ComFailAlrmDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before communication error

signal is activated

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Reset delay before communication error

signal is reset

InvertPolX21

Off
On

Off

Invert polarization for X21 communication

1222
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 908:
Name

LDCMRecBinStat2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ChannelMode

Blocked
Normal
OutOfService

Normal

Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,

2=OutOfService

TerminalNo

0 - 255

Terminal number used for line differential

communication

RemoteTermNo

0 - 255

Terminal number on remote terminal

DiffSync

Echo
GPS

Echo

Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=ECHO, 1=GPS

GPSSyncErr

Block
Echo

Block

Operation mode when GPS

synchroniation signal is lost

CommSync

Slave
Master

Slave

Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=Slave, 1=Master

OptoPower

LowPower
HighPower

LowPower

Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,

1=High

TransmCurr

CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2

CT-GRP1

Summation mode for transmitted current

values

ComFailAlrmDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before communication error

signal is activated

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Reset delay before communication error

signal is reset

RedChSwTime

5 - 500

ms

Time delay before switching in

redundant channel

RedChRturnTime

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before switching back from

redundant channel

AsymDelay

-20.00 - 20.00

ms

0.01

0.00

Asymmetric delay when communication

use echo synch.

AnalogLatency

2 - 20

Latency between local analogue data

and transmitted

remAinLatency

2 - 20

Analog latency of remote terminal

MaxTransmDelay

0 - 40

ms

20

Max allowed transmission delay

CompRange

0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA

0-25kA

Compression range

MaxtDiffLevel

200 - 2000

us

600

Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up

DeadbandtDiff

200 - 1000

us

300

Deadband for t Diff

InvertPolX21

Off
On

Off

Invert polarization for X21 communication

1223
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication

Table 909:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

LDCMRecBinStat3 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ChannelMode

Blocked
Normal
OutOfService

Normal

Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,

2=OutOfService

TerminalNo

0 - 255

Terminal number used for line differential

communication

RemoteTermNo

0 - 255

Terminal number on remote terminal

DiffSync

Echo
GPS

Echo

Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=ECHO, 1=GPS

GPSSyncErr

Block
Echo

Block

Operation mode when GPS

synchroniation signal is lost

CommSync

Slave
Master

Slave

Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=Slave, 1=Master

OptoPower

LowPower
HighPower

LowPower

Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,

1=High

TransmCurr

CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel

CT-GRP1

Summation mode for transmitted current

values

ComFailAlrmDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before communication error

signal is activated

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Reset delay before communication error

signal is reset

RedChSwTime

5 - 500

ms

Time delay before switching in

redundant channel

RedChRturnTime

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before switching back from

redundant channel

AsymDelay

-20.00 - 20.00

ms

0.01

0.00

Asymmetric delay when communication

use echo synch.

AnalogLatency

2 - 20

Latency between local analogue data

and transmitted

remAinLatency

2 - 20

Analog latency of remote terminal

MaxTransmDelay

0 - 40

ms

20

Max allowed transmission delay

CompRange

0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA

0-25kA

Compression range

MaxtDiffLevel

200 - 2000

us

600

Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up

DeadbandtDiff

200 - 1000

us

300

Deadband for t Diff

InvertPolX21

Off
On

Off

Invert polarization for X21 communication

1224
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

20.1.6

Monitored data
Table 910:
Name

LDCMRecBinStat1 Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

NoOfShInterr

BOOLEAN

Number of short
communication
interruptions

NoOfMedInterr

BOOLEAN

Number of medium
communication
interruptions

NoOfLongInterr

BOOLEAN

Number of long
communication
interruptions

CommStatus

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

Status of communication
link

NoOfTXD

BOOLEAN

Percentage of
theroretical possible
transmitted message

NoOfRXD

BOOLEAN

Percentage of
theroretical possible
received message

RxAddress

INTEGER

Address of received
packets

ConfAddress

INTEGER

Configured receive
address

Table 911:
Name

LDCMRecBinStat2 Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

TransmDelay

REAL

Transmission delay, for

echo half loop time, GPS
actual

NoOfShInterr

BOOLEAN

Number of short
communication
interruptions

NoOfMedInterr

BOOLEAN

Number of medium
communication
interruptions

NoOfLongInterr

BOOLEAN

Number of long
communication
interruptions

Table continues on next page

1225
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CommStatus

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

Status of communication
link

NoOfTXD

BOOLEAN

Percentage of
theroretical possible
transmitted message

NoOfRXD

BOOLEAN

Percentage of
theroretical possible
received message

AsymDelay

REAL

Different transmission
delays between the two
directions

RxAddress

INTEGER

Address of received
packets

ConfAddress

INTEGER

Configured receive
address

Table 912:
Name

LDCMRecBinStat3 Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

TransmDelay

REAL

Transmission delay, for

echo half loop time, GPS
actual

NoOfShInterr

BOOLEAN

Number of short
communication
interruptions

NoOfMedInterr

BOOLEAN

Number of medium
communication
interruptions

NoOfLongInterr

BOOLEAN

Number of long
communication
interruptions

Table continues on next page

1226
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

20.1.7

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CommStatus

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

Status of communication
link

NoOfTXD

BOOLEAN

Percentage of
theroretical possible
transmitted message

NoOfRXD

BOOLEAN

Percentage of
theroretical possible
received message

AsymDelay

REAL

Different transmission
delays between the two
directions

RxAddress

INTEGER

Address of received
packets

ConfAddress

INTEGER

Configured receive
address

Operation principle
The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s
channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms
(same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format
used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be
transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated
with C37.94).
Start
flag
8 bits

Information
n x 16 bits

CRC

Stop
flag

16 bits

8 bits

en01000134.vsd
IEC01000134 V1 EN

Figure 570:

Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in
the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16
definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a
separate addressing is included in the data field.

1227
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from
the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC
function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the
evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and
eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are
represented as sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data
capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which
gives the capacity of 192 signals.

20.2

Transmission of analog data from LDCM

LDCMTransmit

20.2.1

Function block
LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N
IEC10000017-1-en.vsd
IEC10000017 V1 EN

Figure 571:

LDCMTransmit function block

The function blocks are not represented in the Application

Configuration tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is
visible in ACT. The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool
when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function
selector tool.

1228
Technical Manual

Section 20
Remote communication

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

20.2.2

Signals
Table 913:
Name

LDCMTRN Input signals

Type

Default

Description

CT1L1

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to

remote end

CT1L2

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L2 to

remote end

CT1L3

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L3 to

remote end

CT1N

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N

to remote end

CT2L1

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L1 to

remote end

CT2L2

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L2 to

remote end

CT2L3

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L3 to

remote end

CT2N

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N

to remote end

1229
Technical Manual

1230

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 21

Basic IED functions

21.1

Authority check ATHCHCK

21.1.1

Identification
Function description
Authority check

21.1.2

IEC 61850
identification
ATHCHCK

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:

local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user
management tool.

1231
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC12000202-2-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V2 EN

Figure 572:

PCM600 user management tool

21.1.3

Settings

21.1.4

Operation principle
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different
areas of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in
Table 914.
Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required
when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:

R= Read
W= Write
- = No access rights

1232
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 914:

Pre-defined user types

Access rights

Guest

Super User

SPA Guest

System
Operator

Protection
Engineer

Design
Engineer

User
Administrator

Basic setting possibilities (change

setting group, control settings,
limit supervision)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Advanced setting possibilities (for

example protection settings)

R/W

R/W

R/W

Basic control possibilities (process

control, no bypass)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Advanced control possibilities

(process control including interlock
trigg)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Basic command handling (for

example clear LEDs, manual trigg)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Advanced command handling (for

example clear disturbance record)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Basic configuration possibilities (I/

O-configuration in SMT)

R/W

R/W

R/W

Advanced configuration
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT, GDE
and CMT)

R/W

R/W

R/W

File loading (database loading

from XML-file)

R/W

R/W

R/W

File dumping (database dumping

to XML-file)

R/W

R/W

R/W

File transfer (FTP file transfer)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

File transfer (limited) (FTP file

transfer)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

File Transfer (SPA File Transfer)

R/W

R/W

Database access for normal user

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

User administration (user

management FTP File Transfer)

R/W

R/W

User administration (user

management SPA File Transfer)

R/W

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User
Management within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local
HMI on the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on
local HMI.
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names
and passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 18.

1233
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group

to be able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

21.1.4.1

Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the
IED until a user has been created with the IED User Management..
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: No
user defined!
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED
returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to
60 minutes at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and
downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or
when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log
on window will appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, the
user can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and
down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E
key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following
character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the password.
After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and
press the E key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the
Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the
Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes
it right or presses Cancel.

21.2

Authority management AUTHMAN

21.2.1

Identification
Function description
Authority management

IEC 61850
identification
AUTHMAN

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

1234
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.2.2

AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
maintenance menu log on time out.

21.2.3
Table 915:

Settings
AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MaintMenuDisAuth

Disable
Enable

Enable

In maintenance menu, disable authority

selection is shown

AuthTimeout

600 - 3600

600

600

Authority blocking timeout

21.3

FTP access with password FTPACCS

21.3.1

Identification
Function description
FTP access with SSL

21.3.2

IEC 61850
identification
FTPACCS

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

FTP access with SSL, FTPACCS

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate
with SSL.
The automatic negotiation mode acts on port number and server features, it tries to
negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS. If the specified port is any other,
it tries to negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS.
Using FTP without SSL encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This
mode is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.
If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create
a specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File
transfer. The password of this user will be exposed in clear text on
the wire.

1235
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions
21.3.3
Table 916:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Settings
FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

PortSelection

None
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any

Any

Port selection for communication

SSLMode

FTP+FTPS
FTPS

FTPS

Support for AUTH TLS/SSL

TCPPortFTP

1 - 65535

21

TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit

SSL

21.4

Authority status ATHSTAT

21.4.1

Identification
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Authority status

21.4.2

IEC 60617
identification

ATHSTAT

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.

21.4.3

Function block
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN

Figure 573:

21.4.4

ATHSTAT function block

Signals
Table 917:
Name

ATHSTAT Output signals

Type

Description

USRBLKED

BOOLEAN

At least one user is blocked by invalid password

LOGGEDON

BOOLEAN

At least one user is logged on

1236
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.4.5

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

21.4.6

Operation principle
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED
and the user authorization:

the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it
was blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event
(EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC
61850 station bus.

21.5

Self supervision with internal event list

21.5.1

Functionality
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal
system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The
internal events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in
PCM600 event viewer tool.

21.5.2

Function block

IEC09000787 V1 EN

Figure 574:

INTERRSIG function block

1237
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions
21.5.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 918:
Name

21.5.4

INTERRSIG Output signals

Type

Description

FAIL

BOOLEAN

Internal fail

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Internal warning

TSYNCERR

BOOLEAN

Time synchronization error

RTCERR

BOOLEAN

Real time clock error

STUPBLK

BOOLEAN

Application startup block

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

21.5.5

Operation principle
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

Checking of digitized measuring signals.
Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the
Event Viewer in PCM600.
The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A
maximum of 40 internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.

GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN

1238
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm

contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of
this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 576
and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 575

IEC04000520 V1 EN

Figure 575:

Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact

IO fail

OR

IO stopped

Set
Reset

IO started

e.g. BIM 1 Error

e.g. IOM2 Error

e.g. IO (n) Error

OR

Internal
FAIL

OR

LON ERROR
FTF fatal error

OR

Watchdog

NUMFAIL

RTE fatal error

RTE Appl-fail
RTE OK

OR

Reset

IEC61850 not ready

RTCERROR

Internal
WARN

Set

OR

RTCERROR

Set

RTC OK

Reset

TIMESYNCHERROR
Time reset

OR

Set
Reset

SYNCH OK
Settings changed

NUMWARNING

TIMESYNCHERROR
SETCHGD

1 second pulse
en04000519-1.vsd

IEC04000519 V2 EN

Figure 576:

Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block

1239

Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The
signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary
outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for
other functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module
in the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained
from the time synchronization block TIME.

21.5.5.1

Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also
called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.

Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 919.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 920.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 921.

Table 919:

Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal

Description

FAIL

Internal Fail status

WARNING

Internal Warning status

RTCERROR

Real Time Clock status

TIMESYNCHERROR

Time Synchronization status

RTEERROR

Runtime Execution Error status

IEC61850ERROR

IEC 61850 Error status

WATCHDOG

SW Watchdog Error status

LMDERROR

LON/Mip Device Error status

APPERROR

Runtime Application Error status

SETCHGD

Settings changed

SETGRPCHGD

Setting groups changed

Table 920:
Card

Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Name of signal

Description

PSM

PSM-Error

Power Supply Module Error status

ADOne

ADOne-Error

Analog In Module Error status

BIM

BIM-Error

Binary In Module Error status

BOM

BOM-Error

Binary Out Module Error status

Table continues on next page

1240
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Card

Name of signal
IOM-Error

In/Out Module Error status

MIM

MIM-Error

Millampere Input Module Error status

LDCM

LDCM-Error

Line Differential Communication Error status

Table 921:

Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal

21.5.5.2

Description

IOM

Reasons for activation

FAIL

This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal

signals are active; LMDERROR, WATCHDOG, APPERROR,
RTEERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals

WARNING

This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal

signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR,
TIMESYNCHERROR

RTCERROR

This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the
real time clock.

TIMESYNCHERROR

This signal will be active when the source of the time

synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a
time reset.

RTEERROR

This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some

actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading
of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting
groups, loading or unloading of application threads.

IEC61850ERROR

This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed
in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup,
for example

WATCHDOG

This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under
too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.

LMDERROR

LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error

state.

APPERROR

This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads

are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can
be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example

SETCHGD

This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event

list if any settings are changed.

SETGRPCHGD

This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event

list if any setting groups are changed.

Supervision of analog inputs

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure
577.

1241
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ADx
ADx_Low
x1
u1
x2

ADx_High

ADx
Controller

x1
u1
x2

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN

Figure 577:

Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison
of the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the
CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.
The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

21.5.6

Technical data
Table 922:

Self supervision with internal event list

Data

Value

Recording manner

Continuous, event controlled

List size

40 events, first in-first out

21.6

Time synchronization

21.6.1

Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of
absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it
possible to compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station
automation system. A common source shall be used for IED and merging unit
when IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time
synchronization source.

1242
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.6.2

Function block
TIMEERR
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
IEC05000425-2-en.vsd
IEC05000425 V2 EN

Figure 578:

21.6.3

TIMEERR function block

Signals
Table 923:

TIMEERR Output signals

Name

21.6.4

Type

Description

TSYNCERR

BOOLEAN

Time synchronization error

RTCERR

BOOLEAN

Real time clock error

Settings
Path in the local HMI is located under Main menu/Setting/Time
Path in PCM600 is located under Main menu/Settings/Time/Synchronization

Table 924:
Name

TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CoarseSyncSrc

Off
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
IEC103

Off

Coarse time synchronization source

FineSyncSource

Off
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS

Off

Fine time synchronization source

SyncMaster

Off
SNTP-Server

Off

Activate IEDas synchronization master

TimeAdjustRate

Slow
Fast

Fast

Adjust rate for time synchronization

Table continues on next page

1243
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Unit

Step

Default

Description

HWSyncSrc

Off
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS

Off

Hardware time synchronization source

AppSynch

NoSynch
Synch

NoSynch

Time synchronization mode for

application

SyncAccLevel

Class T5 (1us)
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified

Unspecified

Wanted time synchronization accuracy

Table 925:
Name

BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ModulePosition

3 - 16

Hardware position of IO module for time

synchronization

BinaryInput

1 - 16

Binary input number for time

synchronization

BinDetection

PositiveEdge
NegativeEdge

PositiveEdge

Positive or negative edge detection

Table 926:
Name

SNTP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ServerIP-Add

0 - 255

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Server IP-address

RedServIP-Add

0 - 255

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Redundant server IP-address

1244
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 927:
Name

DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MonthInYear

January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December

March

Month in year when daylight time starts

DayInWeek

Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time starts

WeekInMonth

Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth

Last

Week in month when daylight time starts

UTCTimeOfDay

-24:00
-23:30
-23:00
-22:30
48:00

1:00

UTC Time of day in hours when daylight

time starts

1245
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 928:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MonthInYear

January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December

October

Month in year when daylight time ends

DayInWeek

Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time ends

WeekInMonth

Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth

Last

Week in month when daylight time ends

UTCTimeOfDay

-24:00
-23:30
-23:00
-22:30
48:00

1:00

UTC Time of day in hours when daylight

time ends

1246
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 929:
Name
TimeZone

Table 930:
Name

TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
-12:00
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
1:00

Description
Local time from UTC

IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SynchType

BNC
Opto

Opto

Type of synchronization

TimeDomain

LocalTime
UTC

LocalTime

Time domain

Encoding

IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ

IRIG-B

Type of encoding

TimeZoneAs1344

MinusTZ
PlusTZ

PlusTZ

Time zone as in 1344 standard

1247
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.6.5

Operation principle

21.6.5.1

General concepts
Time definitions

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the
time the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error,
that is, the time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own
faults and tries to compensate for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on a software clock, which can be adjusted from external
time sources and a hardware clock. The protection and control modules will be
timed from a hardware clock, which runs independently from the software clock.
See figure 579
External
Synchronization
sources

Time tagging and general synchronisation

Off
LON
SPA
Min. pulse
GPS
SNTP
DNP

Communication

TimeRegulator
(Setting,
see
technical
reference
manual)

Events

Protection
and control
functions

SW-time
Connected when GPS-time is
used for differential protection

IRIG-B
PPS

Off
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS

TimeRegulator
(fast or slow)

Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)
HW-time

A/D
converter

Diff.communication

Transducers*
*IEC 61850-9-2
IEC08000287-2-en.vsd

IEC08000287 V2 EN

Figure 579:

Design of time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When for example a status
signal is changed in the protection system with the function based on free running
hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the
event recorder. Thus the hardware clock can run independently.
1248
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The echo mode for the differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus,
there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only
when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential
protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock
synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an
automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the
synchronization time as short as possible during start up or at interruptions/
disturbances in the GPS timing. The setting fast or slow is also available on the
local HMI.
If a GPS clock is used for 670 series IEDs other than line differential RED670, the
hardware and software clocks are not synchronized

Fast clock synchronization mode

At startup and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signal, the clock
deviation between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be
substantial. A new startup is also required after for example maintenance of the
auxiliary voltage system.
When the time difference is >16s, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the
clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is,
big time adjustment steps in the beginning, then smaller steps until a time deviation
between the GPS time and the differential time system of >16s has been reached.
Then the differential function is enabled and the synchronization remains in fast
mode or switches to slow mode, depending on the setting.

Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is normally used,
which prevents the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16s, emanating
from the differential protection requirement of correct timing.

Synchronization principle

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical

structure. A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides
synchronization to lower levels.

1249
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 580:

Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock
after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

21.6.5.2

The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message
The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed realtime clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the
power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days,
and after this time the time will be lost completely.

Real-time clock at startup

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS)
gives an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three
things happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as
fine:

If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an

offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly

1250
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in
the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500
milliseconds.If the offset is more than the threshold, the clock jumps a whole
number of seconds so the remaining offset is less than 500ms. The remaining
offset is then slowly adjusted with 10000 ppm until the offset is removed.
With an adjustment of 10000ppm it takes 50 seconds to remove an offset of
500 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of
the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal
time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

Rate accuracy

In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized
for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding
temperature is constant. Normally, it takes an hour to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must

receive time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR).
Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a
TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

21.6.5.3

Synchronization alternatives
Four main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The
synchronization message is applied:

via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message

including date and time
as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
via GPS
via IRIG-B or PPS

The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an

IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to
operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same

1251
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms

accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.
SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse
time synch source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only. The
only reason to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine
source. The combination SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used.
SNTP server requirements
The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than
4-5 switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its
task, or at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with
SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either
synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization.
Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server
in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages
are sent.

Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time,
that is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the
global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time
synchronization Module (GTM).

Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be
generated from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not
synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the
substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This
signal is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the
IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the
substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a
simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the
IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and
timers available in the IED.

1252
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As
only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute
after the last flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:

Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

Pulse length (b):

Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.

Maximum pulse length is optional.

Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

a
b

c
en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN

Figure 581:

Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse.
The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the
pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without
effecting the system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is
less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the
minute pulse will not be accepted.
Binary synchronization example
An IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied
to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and
the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a
minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the
first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be
rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and
1253
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

will reset the time so that the fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border.
After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is
set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time.
If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift
by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the
first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due
to the spike filter. The third pulse will either set the time, if the time offset is more
than 500 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set,
the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is
adjusted, the time will reach its destination within one minute.
Synchronization via IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second
are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are
numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic
BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be
supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via
either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means
a number in the range of 1-7.
00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIGB module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz
modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the
BNC connector.
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains
information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time
within the year, and year information has to come from PCM600 or local HMI.
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the timezone.
It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages, as this local time
plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.

21.6.5.4

Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization

For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate
from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit.
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.

1254
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.6.6

Technical data
Table 931:

Time synchronization, time tagging

Function

Value

Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values

1 ms

Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse

synchronization), events and sampled measurement values

1.0 ms typically

Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled

measurement values

1.0 ms typically

21.7

Parameter setting groups

21.7.1

Functionality
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,
either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly
adaptable IED that can be applied to a variety of power system scenarios.

21.7.2

Function block
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
ACTGRP5
GRP5
ACTGRP6
GRP6
SETCHGD
IEC05000433_2_en.vsd
IEC05000433 V2 EN

Figure 582:

ActiveGroup function block

SETGRPS
MAXSETGR
IEC05000716_2_en.vsd
IEC05000716 V2 EN

Figure 583:

21.7.3

SETGRPS function block

Signals
Table 932:
Name

ACTVGRP Input signals

Type

Default

Description

ACTGRP1

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 1 as active

ACTGRP2

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 2 as active

ACTGRP3

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 3 as active

Table continues on next page

1255
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Selects setting group 4 as active

ACTGRP5

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 5 as active

ACTGRP6

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 6 as active

ACTVGRP Output signals

Name

Table 934:
Name
t

Table 935:
Name

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 933:

21.7.4

Default

ACTGRP4

Type

Description

GRP1

BOOLEAN

Setting group 1 is active

GRP2

BOOLEAN

Setting group 2 is active

GRP3

BOOLEAN

Setting group 3 is active

GRP4

BOOLEAN

Setting group 4 is active

GRP5

BOOLEAN

Setting group 5 is active

GRP6

BOOLEAN

Setting group 6 is active

SETCHGD

BOOLEAN

Pulse when setting changed

Settings
ACTVGRP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.0 - 10.0

Unit

Step

0.1

Default
1.0

Description
Pulse length of pulse when setting
changed

SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ActiveSetGrp

SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6

SettingGroup1

Active setting group

MaxNoSetGrp

1-6

Max number of setting groups 1-6

21.7.5

Operation principle
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of
these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are
available for configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group
is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.

1256
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower
order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and
group two are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use
to switch between.
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2

ACTIVATE GROUP 1

IOx-Bly1
IOx-Bly2
IOx-Bly3
IOx-Bly4

ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2

GRP2

ACTGRP3

GRP3

ACTGRP4

GRP4

IOx-Bly5

ACTGRP5

GRP5

IOx-Bly6

ACTGRP6

GRP6
SETCHGD

en05000119.vsd
IEC05000119 V2 EN

Figure 584:

Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.
SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used
will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.

1257
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.8

ChangeLock function CHNGLCK

21.8.1

Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.

21.8.2

Function block
CHNGLCK
LOCK
IEC09000946-1-en.vsd
IEC09000946 V1 EN

Figure 585:

21.8.3

CHNGLCK function block

Signals
Table 936:

CHNGLCK Input signals

Name

Type

LOCK

BOOLEAN

Table 937:

Table 938:
Name
Operation

Description
Activate change lock

CHNGLCK Output signals

Name

21.8.4

Default

Type

Description

ACTIVE

BOOLEAN

Change lock active

OVERRIDE

BOOLEAN

Change lock override

Settings
CHNGLCK Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
LockHMI and Com
LockHMI,
EnableCom
EnableHMI,
LockCom

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
LockHMI and Com

Description
Operation mode of change lock

1258
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.8.5

Operation principle
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED
state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:

Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
Set system time
Enter and exit from test mode
Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input

Function

Activated

Deactivated

21.9

Test mode functionality TEST

21.9.1

Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing
yellow LED on the local HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes
normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed
and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection
functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will
be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be
changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

1259
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions
21.9.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function block
TESTMODE
IED_TEST

TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850
IEC14000072-1-en.vsd

IEC09000219 V2 EN

Figure 586:

21.9.3

TESTMODE function block

Signals
Table 939:

TESTMODE Input signals

Name

Type

IED_TEST

BOOLEAN

Table 940:

Table 941:
Name

Description
Activate IED test mode

TESTMODE Output signals

Name

21.9.4

Default

Type

Description

TEST

BOOLEAN

In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode

IED_TEST

BOOLEAN

IED test mode is active

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked

NOEVENT

BOOLEAN

Event disabled during test mode

INPUT

BOOLEAN

IED TEST input is active

SETTING

BOOLEAN

IED test mode setting is On

IEC61850

BOOLEAN

Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test

blocked

Settings
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IEDTestMode

Off
On

Off

Activate IED Test mode

EventDisable

Off
On

Off

Event disable during test mode

CmdTestEd1

Off
On

Off

Require test bit in command at test

mode (only for IEC61850 Ed1)

21.9.5

Operation principle
Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by

1260
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block
TESTMODE is activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows
the cause of the Test mode: being in On state. If the input from the configuration
(OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is
activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions
are blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality
and event signalling.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode
(output ACTIVE is activated), see example in figure 587. When leaving the test
mode, that is entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is
set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured
parameter values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are
possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset. The released function will return to blocked state if test
mode is set to off.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so
no outputs will be activated.
When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the
IED will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also
functions that were unblocked before the change. During the reentering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked
for a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is
only valid if the IED is set in TEST mode by a binary input, not by
local HMI.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions
when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24
contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 587.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus
to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example
during a commissioning or maintenance test.
1261
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Disconnection

Normal voltage
U1<
U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1

tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min

IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN

Figure 587:

Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection

function.

21.10

IED identifiers

21.10.1

Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual
IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

1262
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.10.2
Table 942:
Name

Settings
TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

StationName

0 - 18

Station name

Station name

StationNumber

0 - 99999

Station number

ObjectName

0 - 18

Object name

Object name

ObjectNumber

0 - 99999

Object number

UnitName

0 - 18

Unit name

Unit name

UnitNumber

0 - 99999

Unit number

IEDMainFunType

0 - 255

IED main function type for

IEC60870-5-103

TechnicalKey

0 - 16

AA0B0Q0A0

Technical key (part 1)

0 - 16

Technical key (part 2)

0 - 16

Technical key (part 3)

0 - 16

Technical key (part 4)

21.11

Product information

21.11.1

Functionality
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change)
that uniquely identifies the IED:

ProductVer
ProductDef
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
IEDProdType

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiersand underMain menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED
identifiers
This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g.
during repair and maintenance).

21.11.2

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

1263
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions
21.11.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and
very helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between
different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings
can not be changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are
found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product
identifiers
The following identifiers are available:

IEDProdType

ProductDef

Describes the product version. Example: 1.2.3

1

is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the
product

is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new
hardware added to the product

is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware
is either changed or enhanced in the product

IEDMainFunType

Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.2.2.0

ProductVer

Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670

Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128

(meaning line protection).

SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate

21.12

Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI

21.12.1

Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought
in for one IED configuration.

1264
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.12.2

Function block
SMBI
^VIN1
^VIN2
^VIN3
^VIN4
^VIN5
^VIN6
^VIN7
^VIN8
^VIN9
^VIN10

^BI1
^BI2
^BI3
^BI4
^BI5
^BI6
^BI7
^BI8
^BI9
^BI10
IEC05000434-2-en.vsd

IEC05000434 V2 EN

Figure 588:

21.12.3

SMBI function block

Signals
Table 943:
Name

SMBI Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BI1

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

BI2

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

BI3

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

BI4

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

BI5

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

BI6

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

BI7

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

BI8

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

BI9

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

BI10

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

Table 944:
Name

SMBI Output signals

Type

Description

BI1

BOOLEAN

Binary input 1

BI2

BOOLEAN

Binary input 2

BI3

BOOLEAN

Binary input 3

BI4

BOOLEAN

Binary input 4

BI5

BOOLEAN

Binary input 5

BI6

BOOLEAN

Binary input 6

BI7

BOOLEAN

Binary input 7

BI8

BOOLEAN

Binary input 8

BI9

BOOLEAN

Binary input 9

BI10

BOOLEAN

Binary input 10

1265
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions
21.12.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Operation principle
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 588, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to
BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user
defined name. These names will be represented in SMT as information which
signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/
output user defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.

21.13

Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO

21.13.1

Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the
Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs
are sent from one IED configuration.

21.13.2

Function block
SMBO
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10

^BO1
^BO2
^BO3
^BO4
^BO5
^BO6
^BO7
^BO8
^BO9
^BO10
IEC05000439-2-en.vsd

IEC05000439 V2 EN

Figure 589:

21.13.3

SMBO function block

Signals
Table 945:
Name

SMBO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BO1

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO2

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO3

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO4

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO5

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool

Table continues on next page

1266
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

21.13.4

Type

Default

Description

BO6

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO7

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO8

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO9

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO10

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

Operation principle
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 589, receives
logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real
(hardware) outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are
BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The
name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected
between physical IO and the SMBO.
It is important that SMBO inputs are connected when SMBOs
are connected to physical outputs through the Signal Matrix
Tool. If SMBOs are connected (in SMT) but their inputs not, all
the physical outputs will be set by default. This might cause
malfunction of primary equipment and/or injury to personnel.

21.14

Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI

21.14.1

Functionality
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how milliamp (mA) inputs are
brought in for one IED configuration.

21.14.2

Function block
SMMI
^VIN1
^VIN2
^VIN3
^VIN4
^VIN5
^VIN6

AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AI5
AI6
IEC05000440-2-en.vsd

IEC05000440 V2 EN

Figure 590:

SMMI function block

1267
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions
21.14.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Signals
Table 946:

SMMI Input signals

Name

Type

Description

AI1

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

AI2

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

AI3

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

AI4

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

AI5

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

AI6

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

Table 947:

SMMI Output signals

Name

21.14.4

Default

Type

Description

AI1

REAL

Analog milliampere input 1

AI2

REAL

Analog milliampere input 2

AI3

REAL

Analog milliampere input 3

AI4

REAL

Analog milliampere input 4

AI5

REAL

Analog milliampere input 5

AI6

REAL

Analog milliampere input 6

Operation principle
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 590, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and
makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named
AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags
will be represented in SMT.
The outputs on SMMI are normally connected to the IEC61850 generic
communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function for further use of the mA signals.

21.15

Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

21.15.1

Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function
block, analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and
calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase
angle, frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on.

1268
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

This information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI
block in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).

21.15.2

Frequency values
The frequency functions includes a functionality based on level of positive
sequence voltage, IntBlockLevel, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid
or not. If positive sequence voltage is lower than IntBlockLevel the function is
blocked. IntBlockLevel, is set in % of UBase/3
If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph at least two of the inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence
voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows: L1L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3 to GRPxL2, L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be
connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is
Ph-Ph the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 591 to make
SMAI calculating a positive sequence voltage.

IEC10000060-1-en.vsd
IEC10000060 V1 EN

Figure 591:

Connection example

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is
available, the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI
ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be
accounted for when setting IntBlockLevel. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all
three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and
the frequency functions will not work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be
used for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency
protection (SAPTUF) and Rate-of-change frequency protection

1269
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

(SAPFRC) due to that all other information except frequency and

positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.

21.15.3

Function block
SMAI1
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
REVROT
^GRP1L1
^GRP1L2
^GRP1L3
^GRP1N

SPFCOUT
G1AI3P
G1AI1
G1AI2
G1AI3
G1AI4
G1N
IEC14000027-1-en.vsd

IEC14000027 V1 EN

Figure 592:

SMAI1 function block

SMAI2
BLOCK
REVROT
^GRP2L1
^GRP2L2
^GRP2L3
^GRP2N

G2AI3P
G2AI1
G2AI2
G2AI3
G2AI4
G2N
IEC14000028-1-en.vsd

IEC14000028 V1 EN

Figure 593:

21.15.4

SMAI2 function block

Signals
Table 948:
Name

SMAI1 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block group 1

DFTSPFC

REAL

20.0

Number of samples per fundamental cycle used

for DFT calculation

REVROT

BOOLEAN

Reverse rotation group 1

GRP1L1

STRING

First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2

quantity

GRP1L2

STRING

Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3

quantity

GRP1L3

STRING

Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1

quantity

GRP1N

STRING

Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral

quantity

1270
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 949:
Name

Type

Description

SPFCOUT

REAL

Number of samples per fundamental cycle from

internal DFT reference function

G1AI3P

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 3-phase group

G1AI1

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 1

G1AI2

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 2

G1AI3

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 3

G1AI4

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 4

G1N

GROUP SIGNAL

Group parameter for residual sample

Table 950:
Name

SMAI2 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block group 2

REVROT

BOOLEAN

Reverse rotation group 2

GRP2L1

STRING

First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2

quantity

GRP2L2

STRING

Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3

quantity

GRP2L3

STRING

Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1

quantity

GRP2N

STRING

Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral

quantity

Table 951:

SMAI2 Output signals

Name

21.15.5

SMAI1 Output signals

Type

Description

G2AI3P

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 3-phase group

G2AI1

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 1

G2AI2

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 2

G2AI3

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 3

G2AI4

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 4

G2N

GROUP SIGNAL

Group parameter for residual sample

Settings
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default
value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal
nominal frequency DFT reference is then the reference.

1271
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 952:
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

DFTRefExtOut

InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference for external output

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

ConnectionType

Ph-N
Ph-Ph

Ph-N

Input connection type

AnalogInputType

Voltage
Current

Voltage

Analog input signal type

Table 953:
Name

SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Negation

Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N

Off

Negation

MinValFreqMeas

5 - 200

10

Limit for frequency calculation in % of

UBase

1272
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 954:
Name

SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

ConnectionType

Ph-N
Ph-Ph

Ph-N

Input connection type

AnalogInputType

Voltage
Current

Voltage

Analog input signal type

Table 955:
Name

SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Negation

Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N

Off

Negation

MinValFreqMeas

5 - 200

10

Limit for frequency calculation in % of

UBase

21.15.6

Operation principle
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog
signals (three phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current,
see figure 592 and figure 593. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect
of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and
frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will force all
outputs to value zero.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the
four inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. AIN is always
calculated residual sum from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase
information containing all relevant information about four connected inputs. Note
that all other functions, with a few exceptions, use this output in configuration.
Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if
the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always
be connected to AI3P.

1273
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.16

Global base values GBASVAL

21.16.1

Identification

21.16.2

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Global base values

GBASVAL

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values,
common for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values
consists of values for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have
six different sets.
This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a
single point for updating values when necessary.
Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one
out of the six sets of GBASVAL functions.

21.16.3
Table 956:
Name

Settings
GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

UBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Description
Global base voltage

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Global base current

SBase

1.00 - 200000.00

MVA

0.05

2000.00

Global base apparent power

21.17

Primary system values PRIMVAL

21.17.1

Identification
Function description
Primary system values

IEC 61850
identification
PRIMVAL

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

1274
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.17.2

Functionality
The rated system frequency is set under Main menu/General settings/ Power
system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.

21.17.3
Table 957:
Name

Settings
PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Frequency

50.0 - 60.0

Hz

10.0

50.0

Rated system frequency

PhaseRotation

Normal=L1L2L3
Inverse=L3L2L1

Normal=L1L2L3

System phase rotation

21.18

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

21.18.1

Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of
three-phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might
need it.

21.18.2

Function block
3PHSUM
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
G1AI3P*
G2AI3P*

AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC05000441-2-en.vsd

IEC05000441 V2 EN

Figure 594:

21.18.3

3PHSUM function block

Signals
Table 958:
Name

3PHSUM Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block

REVROT

BOOLEAN

Reverse rotation

G1AI3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI

G2AI3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group 2 three phase analog input from second

SMAI

1275
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 959:

3PHSUM Output signals

Name

21.18.4

Type

Description

AI3P

GROUP SIGNAL

Linear combination of two connected three phase

inputs

AI1

GROUP SIGNAL

Linear combination of input 1 signals from both

SMAI blocks

AI2

GROUP SIGNAL

Linear combination of input 2 signals from both

SMAI blocks

AI3

GROUP SIGNAL

Linear combination of input 3 signals from both

SMAI blocks

AI4

GROUP SIGNAL

Linear combination of input 4 signals from both

SMAI blocks

Settings
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default
value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Table 960:
Name

3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

GlobalBaseSel

1 - 12

Selection of one of the Global Base

Value groups

SummationType

Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)

Group1+Group2

Summation type

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

Table 961:
Name
FreqMeasMinVal

21.18.5

3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
5 - 200

Unit
%

Step
1

Default
10

Description
Amplitude limit for frequency calculation
in % of UBase

Operation principle
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

1276
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

21.19

Denial of service DOS

21.19.1

Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic.
The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary
functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so
that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for
instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

21.19.2

Function blocks
DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN

Figure 595:

DOSFRNT function block

DOSLANAB

LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000308-1-en.vsd
IEC13000308 V1 EN

Figure 596:

DOSLANAB function block

Figure 597:

DOSLANCD function block

DOSLANCD

LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000309-1-en.vsd

21.19.3

Signals
Table 962:
Name

DOSFRNT Output signals

Type

Description

LINKUP

BOOLEAN

Ethernet link status

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than normal state

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than throttle state

1277
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 963:

DOSLANAB Output signals

Name

Type

LINKUP

BOOLEAN

Ethernet link status

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than normal state

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Table 964:

DOSLANCD Output signals

Name

21.19.4

Description

Type

Description

LINKUP

BOOLEAN

Ethernet link status

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than normal state

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

21.19.5

Monitored data
Table 965:

DOSFRNT Monitored data

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

State

INTEGER

0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll

Frame rate control state

Quota

INTEGER

Quota level in percent

0-100

IPPackRecNorm

INTEGER

Number of IP packets
received in normal mode

IPPackRecPoll

INTEGER

Number of IP packets
received in polled mode

IPPackDisc

INTEGER

Number of IP packets
discarded

NonIPPackRecNorm

INTEGER

Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode

NonIPPackRecPoll

INTEGER

Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode

NonIPPackDisc

INTEGER

Number of non IP
packets discarded

1278
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 966:

DOSLANAB Monitored data

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

DoSStatus

INTEGER

0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll

Frame rate control state

Quota

INTEGER

Quota level in percent

0-100

IPPackRecNorm

INTEGER

Number of IP packets
received in normal mode

IPPackRecPoll

INTEGER

Number of IP packets
received in polled mode

IPPackDisc

INTEGER

Number of IP packets
discarded

NonIPPackRecNorm

INTEGER

Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode

NonIPPackRecPoll

INTEGER

Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode

NonIPPackDisc

INTEGER

Number of non IP
packets discarded

Table 967:

DOSLANCD Monitored data

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

DoSStatus

INTEGER

0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll

Frame rate control state

Quota

INTEGER

Quota level in percent

0-100

IPPackRecNorm

INTEGER

Number of IP packets
received in normal mode

IPPackRecPoll

INTEGER

Number of IP packets
received in polled mode

IPPackDisc

INTEGER

Number of IP packets
discarded

NonIPPackRecNorm

INTEGER

Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode

NonIPPackRecPoll

INTEGER

Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode

NonIPPackDisc

INTEGER

Number of non IP
packets discarded

1279
Technical Manual

Section 21
Basic IED functions
21.19.6

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Operation principle
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD)
measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not
jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load.
The function has the following outputs:

LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

1280
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 22

IED hardware

22.1

Overview

22.1.1

Variants of case size with local HMI display

IEC04000458-2-en.psd
IEC04000458 V2 EN

Figure 598:

1/2 19 case with local HMI display.

1281
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC05000762-2-en.psd
IEC05000762 V2 EN

Figure 599:

3/4 19 case with local HMI display.

IEC04000460-2-en.psd
IEC04000460 V2 EN

Figure 600:

1/1 19 case with local HMI display.

1282
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.1.2
Table 968:

Case from the rear side

Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or

MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to X51

and X52

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM, RS485 or GTM

X312, 313

TRM

X401

1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1283
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

Table 969:

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or

MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to

X101 and X102

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM, RS485 or GTM

X312, X313

TRM

X401

1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1284
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 970:

Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slot

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or

MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and

X72

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM, RS485 or GTM

X312, X313, X322, X323

TRM 1

X401

TRM 2

X411

1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1285
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

Table 971:

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM,
SOM, IOM or
MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to X161

and X162

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM,RS485 or
GTM

X312, X313

TRM

X401

1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1286
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 972:

Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM,
SOM, IOM or
MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to X131

and X132

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM, RS485 or
GTM

X312, X313, X322, X323

TRM 1

X401

TRM 2

X411

1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1287
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2

Hardware modules

22.2.1

Overview
Table 973:

Basic modules

Module

Description

Power supply module (PSM)

Including a regulated DC/DC converter that

supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.

An internal fail alarm output is available.

Numerical module (NUM)

Module for overall application control. All

information is processed or passed through this
module, such as configuration, settings and
communication.

Local Human machine interface (LHMI)

The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push

button keyboard and an ethernet connector used
to connect a PC to the IED.

Transformer input module (TRM)

Transformer module that galvanically separates

the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It
has 12 analog inputs.

Analog digital conversion module (ADM)

Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.

Table 974:

Application specific modules

Module

Description

Binary input module (BIM)

Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs

Binary output module (BOM)

Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole

command outputs including supervision function

Binary I/O module (IOM)

Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10

outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.

Line data communication modules (LDCM),

short range, medium range, long range, X21

Modules used for digital communication to remote

terminal.

Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3

communication modules (SLM)

Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103/DNP3

communication

Optical ethernet module (OEM)

PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.

mA input module (MIM)

Analog input module with 6 independent,

galvanically separated channels.

GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

Used to provide the IED with GPS time

synchronization.

Static output module (SOM)

Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change

over output relays.

IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B)

Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling

both pulse-width modulated signals and
amplitude modulated signals and one is used for
optical input type ST for PPS time synchronization.

1288
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2.2

Numeric processing module (NUM)

22.2.2.1

Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all
protection functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM
is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.

22.2.2.2

Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, compact-PCI CPU
module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two
compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP
slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a
flash file system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup
of the real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.

1289
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware
22.2.2.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Block diagram

Compact
Flash

Logic

PMC
connector

Memory

Ethernet

UBM
connector

PC-MIP

PCI-PCIbridge

Backplane
connector

North
bridge

CPU

en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN

Figure 601:

Numeric processing module block diagram

22.2.3

Power supply module (PSM)

22.2.3.1

Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is
available.

22.2.3.2

Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different
DC input voltage ranges see table 975. The power supply module contains a built-

1290
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the
terminal and the external battery system.

Connection diagram

IEC08000476 V2 EN

Figure 602:

22.2.3.3

PSM Connection diagram.

Technical data
Table 975:

PSM - Power supply module

Quantity

22.2.4

Rated value

Nominal range

Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input)

EL = (24 - 60) V
EL = (90 - 250) V

EL 20%
EL 20%

Power consumption

50 W typically

Auxiliary DC power in-rush

< 10 A during 0.1 s

Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)

Refer to section "" for information.

22.2.5

Transformer input module (TRM)

22.2.5.1

Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The
module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

22.2.5.2

Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of
the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input
transformers.

1291
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Basic versions:

6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

7 current channels and 5 voltage channels
9 current channels and 3 voltage channels
12 current channels
6 current channels

The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs
are selected at order.
Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with
current transformers intended for protection purposes, due to
limitations in overload characteristics.
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix
for analog inputs SMAI".

IEC08000479 V2 EN

Figure 603:

TRM connection diagram

1292
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2.5.3

Technical data
Table 976:

TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
modules

Quantity

Rated value

Current

Ir = 1 or 5 A

Operative range

(0-100) x Ir

Permissive overload

4 Ir cont.
100 Ir for 1 s *)

Burden

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Ac voltage

Ur = 110 V

Operative range

(0340) V

Permissive overload

420 V cont.
450 V 10 s

Burden

< 20 mVA at 110 V

Frequency

fr = 50/60 Hz

*)

Nominal range
(0.2-40) Ir

0.5288 V

5%

max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Table 977:

TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
modules

Quantity

Rated value

Current

Ir = 1 or 5 A

Permissive overload

1.1 Ir cont.
1.8 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 1 A
1.6 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 5 A

Burden

< 350 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 200 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Ac voltage

Ur = 110 V

Operative range

(0340) V

Permissive overload

420 V cont.
450 V 10 s

Burden

< 20 mVA at 110 V

Frequency

fr = 50/60 Hz

Nominal range
(0-1.8) Irat Ir = 1 A
(0-1.6) Irat Ir = 5 A

0.5288 V

5%

1293
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2.6

Analog digital conversion module, with time

synchronization (ADM)

22.2.6.1

Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC
slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards
according to table 978. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
Table 978:
PC-MIP cards

PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PMC cards

LDCM

SLM

LR-LDCM

OEM 1 ch

MR-LDCM

OEM 2 ch

X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485

22.2.6.2

Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from
the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the
electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts
with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit
dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz
and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

1294
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12

AD1
AD2
1.2v

AD3
AD4

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI
PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN

Figure 604:

The ADM layout

1295
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2.7

Binary input module (BIM)

22.2.7.1

Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the
inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely
programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the
functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and eventrecording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation
of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.

22.2.7.2

Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage
level of the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
inputs SMBI".
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a
hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it
possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 605 The figure shows the typical operating
characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand
disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.
Inputs are debounced by software.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance
and stored by the event recorder if present.

1296
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

[V]
300

176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17
24/30V

48/60V

110/125V

220/250V
xx06000391-2-en.vsd

IEC06000391 V2 EN

Figure 605:

Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Operation

Operation uncertain

No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 606 and 607.

1297
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

[mA]
50

55

[ms]
en07000104-3.vsd

IEC07000104 V3 EN

Figure 606:

Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of

BIM.

[mA]
50

5.5

[ms]
en07000105-1.vsd

IEC07000105 V2 EN

Figure 607:

Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

1298
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC99000503 V3 EN

Figure 608:

22.2.7.3

Connection diagram

Signals
Table 979:
Name

BIM Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Binary input module status

BI1

BOOLEAN

Binary input 1

BI2

BOOLEAN

Binary input 2

BI3

BOOLEAN

Binary input 3

BI4

BOOLEAN

Binary input 4

BI5

BOOLEAN

Binary input 5

BI6

BOOLEAN

Binary input 6

BI7

BOOLEAN

Binary input 7

Table continues on next page

1299
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

22.2.7.4
Table 980:
Name

Type

Description

BI8

BOOLEAN

Binary input 8

BI9

BOOLEAN

Binary input 9

BI10

BOOLEAN

Binary input 10

BI11

BOOLEAN

Binary input 11

BI12

BOOLEAN

Binary input 12

BI13

BOOLEAN

Binary input 13

BI14

BOOLEAN

Binary input 14

BI15

BOOLEAN

Binary input 15

BI16

BOOLEAN

Binary input 16

Settings
BIM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

On

Operation Off/On

DebounceTime

0.001 - 0.020

0.001

0.001

Debounce time for binary inputs

OscBlock

1 - 40

Hz

40

Oscillation block limit

OscRelease

1 - 30

Hz

30

Oscillation release limit

22.2.7.5

Monitored data
Table 981:

BIM Monitored data

Name

Type

STATUS

22.2.7.6

Values (Range)

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Unit

Description

Binary input module

status

Technical data
Table 982:

BIM - Binary input module

Quantity

Rated value

Nominal range

Binary inputs

16

DC voltage, RL

24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V

RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%

Power consumption
24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V

max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input

Counter input frequency

10 pulses/s max

Oscillating signal discriminator

Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz

1300
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 983:

BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities

Quantity

Rated value

Nominal range

Binary inputs

16

DC voltage, RL

24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V

RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%

Power consumption
24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V

max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input

Counter input frequency

10 pulses/s max

Balanced counter input frequency

40 pulses/s max

Oscillating signal discriminator

Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz

22.2.8

Binary output modules (BOM)

22.2.8.1

Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip
output or any signaling purpose.

22.2.8.2

Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each
pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 609.
This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal
on the back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to
breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of
the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel
reinforcement is required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
outputs SMBO".

1301
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Output module

3
xx00000299.vsd
IEC00000299 V1 EN

Figure 609:

Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2

IEC99000505 V3 EN

Figure 610:

Connection diagram

1302
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2.8.3

Signals
Table 984:

BOM Input signals

Name

Type

Block binary outputs

BO1

BOOLEAN

Binary output 1

BO2

BOOLEAN

Binary output 2

BO3

BOOLEAN

Binary output 3

BO4

BOOLEAN

Binary output 4

BO5

BOOLEAN

Binary output 5

BO6

BOOLEAN

Binary output 6

BO7

BOOLEAN

Binary output 7

BO8

BOOLEAN

Binary output 8

BO9

BOOLEAN

Binary output 9

BO10

BOOLEAN

Binary output 10

BO11

BOOLEAN

Binary output 11

BO12

BOOLEAN

Binary output 12

BO13

BOOLEAN

Binary output 13

BO14

BOOLEAN

Binary output 14

BO15

BOOLEAN

Binary output 15

BO16

BOOLEAN

Binary output 16

BO17

BOOLEAN

Binary output 17

BO18

BOOLEAN

Binary output 18

BO19

BOOLEAN

Binary output 19

BO20

BOOLEAN

Binary output 20

BO21

BOOLEAN

Binary output 21

BO22

BOOLEAN

Binary output 22

BO23

BOOLEAN

Binary output 23

BO24

BOOLEAN

Binary output 24

BOM Output signals

Name

Type

STATUS

Table 986:
Name
Operation

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 985:

22.2.8.4

Default

BLOCK

Description

BOOLEAN

Binary output part of IOM module status

Settings
BOM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
On

Description
Operation Off/On

1303
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware
22.2.8.5

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Monitored data
Table 987:
Name

BOM Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Binary output part of

IOM module status

BO1VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 1 value

BO1FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 1 force

BO1

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 1 status

BO2VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 2 value

BO2FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 2 force

BO2

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 2 status

BO3VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 3 value

BO3FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 3 force

BO3

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 3 status

BO4VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 4 value

BO4FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 4 force

BO4

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 4 status

BO5VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 5 value

BO5FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 5 force

BO5

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 5 status

BO6VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 6 value

BO6FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 6 force

BO6

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 6 status

BO7VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 7 value

Table continues on next page

1304
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

BO7FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 7 force

BO7

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 7 status

BO8VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 8 value

BO8FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 8 force

BO8

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 8 status

BO9VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 9 value

BO9FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 9 force

BO9

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 9 status

BO10VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 10 value

BO10FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 10 force

BO10

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 10 status

BO11VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

nary output 11 value

BO11FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 11 force

BO11

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 11 status

BO12VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 12 value

BO12FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 12 force

BO12

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 12 status

BO13VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 13 value

BO13FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 13 force

BO13

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 13 status

BO14VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 14 value

BO14FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 14 force

Table continues on next page

1305
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

BO14

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 14 status

BO15VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 15 value

BO15FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 15 force

BO15

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 15 status

BO16VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 16 value

BO16FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 16 force

BO16

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 16 status

BO17VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 17 value

B017FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 17 force

BO17

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 17 status

BO18VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 18 value

BO18FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 18 force

BO18

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 18 status

BO19VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 19 value

BO19FORCE

BOOLEAN

1=Forced
0=Normal

Binary output 19 force

BO19

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 19 status

BO20VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 20 value

BO20FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 20 force

BO20

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 20 status

BO21VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 21 value

BO21FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 21 force

Table continues on next page

1306
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

22.2.8.6

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

BO21

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 21 status

BO22VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 22 value

BO22FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 22 force

BO22

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 22 status

BO23VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 23 value

BO23FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 23 force

BO23

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 23 status

BO24VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 24 value

BO24FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

nary output 24 force

BO24

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 24 status

Technical data
Table 988:

BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity

Trip and Signal relays

Binary outputs

24

Max system voltage

250 V AC, DC

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min

1000 V rms

Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous
Per relay, 1 s
Per process connector pin, continuous

8A
10 A
12 A

Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s
1.0 s

30 A
10 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4

250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms

an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for
the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated
1307
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current

consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM
should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

22.2.9

Static binary output module (SOM)

22.2.9.1

Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over
output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.

22.2.9.2

Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
The SOM consists mainly of:

An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing

CAN-bus to backplane CBM

IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)

The following parts are supervised:

Interruption in relay coil

Short circuit of relay coil
Driver failure

1308
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC09000974-1-en.vsd

IEC09000974 V1 EN

Figure 611:

SOM Static output principle

IEC09000975 V1 EN

Figure 612:

22.2.9.3

Connection diagram of the static output module

Signals
Table 989:
Name

SOM Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block binary outputs

BO1

BOOLEAN

Binary output 1

BO2

BOOLEAN

Binary output 2

BO3

BOOLEAN

Binary output 3

BO4

BOOLEAN

Binary output 4

Table continues on next page

1309
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Binary output 5

BO6

BOOLEAN

Binary output 6

BO7

BOOLEAN

Static binary output 7

BO8

BOOLEAN

Static binary output 8

BO9

BOOLEAN

Static binary output 9

BO10

BOOLEAN

Static binary output 10

BO11

BOOLEAN

Static binary output 11

BO12

BOOLEAN

Static binary output 12

SOM Output signals

Name

Type

STATUS

Table 991:
Name
Operation

22.2.9.5

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 990:

22.2.9.4

Default

BO5

Description

BOOLEAN

Static binary output module status

Settings
SOM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Off
On

Unit

Step

Default
On

Description
Operation Off/On

Monitored data
Table 992:
Name

SOM Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Static binary output

module status

BO1VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 1 value

BO1FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 1 force

BO1

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 1 status

BO2VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 2 value

BO2FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 2 force

BO2

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 2 status

BO3VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 3 value

Table continues on next page

1310
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

BO3FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 3 force

BO3

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 3 status

BO4VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 4 value

BO4FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 4 force

BO4

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 4 status

BO5VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 5 value

BO5FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 5 force

BO5

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 5 status

BO6VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 6 value

BO6FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 6 force

BO6

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 6 status

BO7VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 7 value

BO7FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 7 force

BO7

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 7 status

BO8VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 8 value

BO8FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 8 force

BO8

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 8 status

BO9VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 9 value

BO9FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 9 force

BO9

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 9 status

BO10VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 10 value

BO10FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 10 force

Table continues on next page

1311
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

22.2.9.6

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

BO10

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 10 status

BO11VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 11 value

BO11FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 11 force

BO11

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 11 status

BO12VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 12 value

BO12FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 12 force

BO12

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 12 status

Technical data
Table 993:

SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs

Function of quantity

Static binary output trip

Rated voltage

48 - 60 VDC

110 - 250 VDC

Number of outputs

Impedance open state

~300 k

~810 k

Test voltage across open contact,

1 min

No galvanic separation

No galvanic separation

Continuous

5A

5A

1.0s

10A

10A

0.2s

30A

30A

1.0s

10A

10A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R

40ms

48V / 1A

110V / 0.4A

60V / 0.75A

125V / 0.35A

Current carrying capacity:

Making capacity at capacitive load

with the maximum capacitance of
0.2 F :

220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
Operating time

<1ms

<1ms

1312
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 994:

SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2):

Electromechanical relay outputs

Function of quantity

Trip and signal relays

Max system voltage

250V AC/DC

Number of outputs

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min

1000V rms

Current carrying capacity:

Continuous

8A

1.0s

10A

Making capacity at capacitive load with the

maximum capacitance of 0.2 F:
0.2s

30A

1.0s

10A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40ms

48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A

22.2.10

Binary input/output module (IOM)

22.2.10.1

Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels
are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any
signaling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for
applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary
inputs cater for required binary input information.

22.2.10.2

Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase
the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved
with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure
606. Inputs are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 605.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.

1313
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance
and stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output
relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output
contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common
and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output
channels, see figure 613.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay
is connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix
for binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

1314
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN

Figure 613:

Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds

to rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named
XB to rear position X32, X42, and so on

The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.

1315
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

xx04000069.vsd
IEC04000069 V1 EN

Figure 614:

22.2.10.3

IOM with MOV protection, relay example

Signals
Table 995:
Name

IOMIN Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Binary input part of IOM module status

BI1

BOOLEAN

Binary input 1

BI2

BOOLEAN

Binary input 2

BI3

BOOLEAN

Binary input 3

BI4

BOOLEAN

Binary input 4

BI5

BOOLEAN

Binary input 5

BI6

BOOLEAN

Binary input 6

BI7

BOOLEAN

Binary input 7

BI8

BOOLEAN

Binary input 8

Table 996:
Name

IOMOUT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLKOUT

BOOLEAN

Block binary outputs

BO1

BOOLEAN

Binary output 1

BO2

BOOLEAN

Binary output 2

BO3

BOOLEAN

Binary output 3

BO4

BOOLEAN

Binary output 4

BO5

BOOLEAN

Binary output 5

BO6

BOOLEAN

Binary output 6

BO7

BOOLEAN

Binary output 7

BO8

BOOLEAN

Binary output 8

BO9

BOOLEAN

Binary output 9

BO10

BOOLEAN

Binary output 10

BO11

BOOLEAN

Binary output 11

BO12

BOOLEAN

Binary output 12

1316
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2.10.4
Table 997:
Name

Settings
IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

On

Binary input/output module in operation

(On) or not (Off)

DebounceTime

0.001 - 0.020

0.001

0.001

Debounce time for binary inputs

OscBlock

1 - 40

Hz

40

Oscillation block limit

OscRelease

1 - 30

Hz

30

Oscillation release limit

22.2.10.5

Monitored data
Table 998:
Name
STATUS

Table 999:
Name

IOMIN Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN

Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error

Unit
-

Description
Binary input part of IOM
module status

IOMOUT Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

BO1VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 1 value

BO1FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 1 force

BO1

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 1 status

BO2VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 2 value

BO2FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 2 force

BO2

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 2 status

BO3VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 3 value

BO3FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 3 force

BO3

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 3 status

BO4VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 4 value

BO4FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 4 force

BO4

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 4 status

Table continues on next page

1317
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

BO5VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 5 value

BO5FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 5 force

BO5

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 5 status

BO6VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 6 value

BO6FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 6 force

BO6

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 6 status

BO7VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 7 value

BO7FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 7 force

BO7

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 7 status

BO8VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 8 value

BO8FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 8 force

BO8

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 8 status

BO9VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 9 value

BO9FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 9 force

BO9

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 9 status

BO10VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 10 value

BO10FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 10 force

BO10

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 10 status

BO11VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 11 value

BO11FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 11 force

BO11

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 11 status

Table continues on next page

1318
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

22.2.10.6

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

BO12VALUE

BOOLEAN

1=1
0=0

Binary output 12 value

BO12FORCE

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced

Binary output 12 force

BO12

BOOLEAN

0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Binary output 12 status

Technical data
Table 1000:

IOM - Binary input/output module

Quantity

Rated value

Nominal range

Binary inputs

DC voltage, RL

24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V

RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%

Power consumption
24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V

Table 1001:

max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input

IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity

Trip and signal relays

Fast signal relays (parallel reed

relay)

Binary outputs

10

Max system voltage

250 V AC, DC

250 V DC

Test voltage across open contact,

1 min

1000 V rms

800 V DC

8A
10 A
12 A

8A
10 A
12 A

30 A
10 A

0.4 A
0.4 A

30 A
10 A

220250 V/0.4 A
110125 V/0.4 A
4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A

Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous
Per relay, 1 s
Per process connector pin,
continuous
Making capacity at inductive load
with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
Making capacity at resistive load
0.2 s
1.0 s
Table continues on next page

1319
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Function or quantity

Trip and signal relays

Fast signal relays (parallel reed

relay)

Breaking capacity for AC, cos >

0.4

250 V/8.0 A

250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R

< 40 ms

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load

10 nF

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms

an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for
the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated
during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life.Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM
should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.
Table 1002:

IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity

Trip and Signal relays

Fast signal relays (parallel

reed relay)

Binary outputs

IOM: 10

IOM: 2

Max system voltage

250 V AC, DC

250 V DC

Test voltage across open

contact, 1 min

250 V rms

250 V rms

8A
10 A
12 A

8A
10 A
12 A

30 A
10 A

0.4 A
0.4 A

0.2 s
1.0 s

30 A
10 A

220250 V/0.4 A
110125 V/0.4 A
4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos

j>0.4

250 V/8.0 A

250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/

R < 40 ms

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load

10 nF

Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous
Per relay, 1 s
Per process connector pin,
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
Making capacity at resistive load

1320
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms

an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for
the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated
during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM
should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

22.2.11

mA input module (MIM)

22.2.11.1

Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to
+20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure
transducers. The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.

22.2.11.2

Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA
inputs SMMI".
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D
converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are
calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a
non-volatile memory on the module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range.

1321
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC99000504 V2 EN

Figure 615:

22.2.11.3

MIM connection diagram

Signals
Table 1003:
Name

MIM Output signals

Type

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

Milliampere input module status

CH1

REAL

Analog input 1

CH2

REAL

Analog input 2

CH3

REAL

Analog input 3

Table continues on next page

1322
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

22.2.11.4
Table 1004:
Name

Type

Description

CH4

REAL

Analog input 4

CH5

REAL

Analog input 5

CH6

REAL

Analog input 6

Settings
MIM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

On

Operation Off/On

MaxReportT

0 - 3600

Maximum time between reports

EnDeadBandCh1

Off
On

Off

Enable amplitude deadband reporting for

channel 1

DeadBandCh1

0.00 - 20.00

mA

0.01

1.00

Deadband amplitude for channel 1

IMinCh1

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

4.00

Min current of transducer for Channel 1

IMaxCh1

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

20.00

Max current of transducer for Channel 1

ValueMinCh1

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

4.000

Min primary value corr. to IMinCh1

ValueMaxCh1

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

20.000

Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh1

EnDeadBandCh2

Off
On

Off

Enable amplitude deadband reporting for

channel 2

DeadBandCh2

0.00 - 20.00

mA

0.01

1.00

Deadband amplitude for channel 2

IMinCh2

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

4.00

Min current of transducer for Channel 2

IMaxCh2

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

20.00

Max current of transducer for Channel 2

ValueMinCh2

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

4.000

Min primary value corr. to IMinCh2

ValueMaxCh2

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

20.000

Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh2

EnDeadBandCh3

Off
On

Off

Enable amplitude deadband reporting for

channel 3

DeadBandCh3

0.00 - 20.00

mA

0.01

1.00

Deadband amplitude for channel 3

IMinCh3

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

4.00

Min current of transducer for Channel 3

IMaxCh3

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

20.00

Max current of transducer for Channel 3

ValueMinCh3

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

4.000

Min primary value corr. to IMinCh3

ValueMaxCh3

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

20.000

Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh3

EnDeadBandCh4

Off
On

Off

Enable amplitude deadband reporting for

channel 4

DeadBandCh4

0.00 - 20.00

mA

0.01

1.00

Deadband amplitude for channel 4

IMinCh4

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

4.00

Min current of transducer for Channel 4

IMaxCh4

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

20.00

Max current of transducer for Channel 4

Table continues on next page

1323
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware
Name

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ValueMinCh4

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

4.000

Min primary value corr. to IMinCh4

ValueMaxCh4

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

20.000

Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh4

EnDeadBandCh5

Off
On

Off

Enable amplitude deadband reporting for

channel 5

DeadBandCh5

0.00 - 20.00

mA

0.01

1.00

Deadband amplitude for channel 5

IMinCh5

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

4.00

Min current of transducer for Channel 5

IMaxCh5

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

20.00

Max current of transducer for Channel 5

ValueMinCh5

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

4.000

Min primary value corr. to IMinCh5

ValueMaxCh5

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

20.000

Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh5

EnDeadBandCh6

Off
On

Off

Enable amplitude deadband reporting for

channel 6

DeadBandCh6

0.00 - 20.00

mA

0.01

1.00

Deadband amplitude for channel 6

IMinCh6

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

4.00

Min current of transducer for Channel 6

IMaxCh6

-25.00 - 25.00

mA

0.01

20.00

Max current of transducer for Channel 6

ValueMinCh6

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

4.000

Min primary value corr. to IMinCh6

ValueMaxCh6

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

20.000

Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh6

22.2.11.5

Monitored data
Table 1005:
Name

MIM Monitored data

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

STATUS

BOOLEAN

0=Ok
1=Error

Milliampere input module

status

CH1

REAL

Analog input 1

CH2

REAL

Analog input 2

CH3

REAL

Analog input 3

CH4

REAL

Analog input 4

CH5

REAL

Analog input 5

CH6

REAL

Analog input 6

CH1

REAL

Service value analog

input 1

CH2

REAL

Service value analog

input 2

CH3

REAL

Service value analog

input 3

Table continues on next page

1324
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Name

22.2.11.6

Type

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

CH4

REAL

Service value analog

input 4

CH5

REAL

Service value analog

input 5

CH6

REAL

Service value analog

input 6

Technical data
Table 1006:

MIM - mA input module

Quantity:

Rated value:

Nominal range:

Input resistance

Rin = 194 Ohm

Input range

5, 10, 20mA
0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA

Power consumption
each mA-board
each mA input

2W
0.1 W

22.2.12

Serial and LON communication module (SLM)

22.2.12.1

Introduction
The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC
60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical
communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is
used for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port) and one
port is dedicated for LON communication.

22.2.12.2

Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module. Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations
of optical fiber connectors, see figure 616. The plastic fiber connectors are of snapin type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.

1325
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
i
gi
nal
.
psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN

Figure 616:

The SLM variants, component side view

Receiver, LON

Transmitter, LON

Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3

Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3

Snap in connector for plastic fiber

ST connector for glass fiber

Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear
side of the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and
contact 1 in the lowest position.

22.2.12.3

Technical data
Table 1007:

SLM LON port

Quantity

Range or value

Optical connector

Glass fibre: type ST

Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in

Fibre, optical budget

Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)

Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *)

Fibre diameter

Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fibre: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

1326
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1008:

SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Quantity

Range or value

Optical connector

Glass fibre: type ST

Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in

Fibre, optical budget

Glass fibre: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *)

Plastic fibre: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *)

Fibre diameter

Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fibre: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

22.2.13

Galvanic RS485 communication module

22.2.13.1

Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC
60870-5-103 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port.
The RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or
4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and
is a multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant
requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated
signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the
rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.

22.2.13.2

Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module.

RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 617) are presented in
table 1009:
Table 1009:

The arrangement for the pins

Pin

Name 2-wire

Name 4-wire

Description

RS485+

TX+

Receive/transmit high or transmit high

RS485

TX

Receive/transmit

Term

T-Term

Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver

in 2wir case) (connect to TX+)

N.A.

R-Term

Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX

+)

N.A.

RX

Receive low

N.A.

RX+

Receive high

1327
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Angle
bracket

Screw
terminal
X3

Screw
terminal
X1

1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6

RS485
PWB

Backplane

IEC06000517 V1 EN

Figure 617:

RS485 connector

2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5

Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3

Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be
used in two combinations like:

22.2.13.3

Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part .

Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV

Technical data
Table 1010:

Galvanic RS485 communication module

Quantity

Range or value

Communication speed

240019200 bauds

External connectors

RS-485 6-pole connector

Soft ground 2-pole connector

1328
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2.14

Optical ethernet module (OEM)

22.2.14.1

Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication
buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol (OEM rear port A,
B). The process bus use the IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol (OEM rear port C, D). The
module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors.

22.2.14.2

Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems
according to IEC6185081 have been implemented.

22.2.14.3

Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine
card on the ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single
channel or double channel unit.

IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN

Figure 618:

OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

1: Transmitter
2: Receiver

1329
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware
22.2.14.4

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 1011:

OEM - Optical ethernet module

Quantity

Rated value

Number of channels

1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC 61850-8-1 and port C, D

for IEC 61850-9-2LE)

Standard

IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX

Type of fiber

62.5/125 mm multimode fibre

Wave length

1300 nm

Optical connector

Type ST

Communication speed

Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

22.2.15

Line data communication module (LDCM)

22.2.15.1

Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <110 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 619.

Line data communication module LDCM

Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED
communicates.
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.
Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.
Never look into the laser beam.

22.2.15.2

Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:

the ADM
the NUM

1330
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IO-connector

ST

ST

IEC07000087=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC07000087 V2 EN

The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two
PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector

Figure 619:

IEC06000393=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC06000393 V2 EN

Figure 620:

22.2.15.3

The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width

format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

Technical data

1331
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1012:

Line data communication module

Characteristic
Type of LDCM
Type of fibre

Range or value
Short range (SR)

Medium range (MR)

Long range (LR)

Graded-index
multimode
62.5/125 m

Singlemode 9/125
m

Singlemode 9/125 m

820 nm
865 nm
792 nm

1310 nm
1330 nm
1290 nm

1550 nm
1580 nm
1520 nm

13 dB (typical
distance about 3
km *)
9 dB (typical
distance about 2
km *)

22 dB (typical
distance 80 km *)

26 dB (typical distance 110 km *)

Optical connector

Type ST

Type FC/PC

Type FC/PC

Protocol

C37.94

C37.94
implementation **)

C37.94 implementation **)

Data transmission

Synchronous

Synchronous

Synchronous

Transmission rate /
Data rate

2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s

2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s

2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s

Clock source

Internal or
derived from
received signal

Internal or derived
from received signal

Internal or derived from received

signal

Peak Emission
Wave length
Nominal
Maximum
Minimum
Optical budget
Graded-index
multimode 62.5/125
mm,
Graded-index
multimode 50/125
mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as
C37.94

22.2.16

Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)

22.2.16.1

Introduction
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.
Examples of applications:

Line differential protection

Binary signal transfer

1332
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2.16.2

Design

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.

en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN

Figure 621:

Overview of the X.21 LDCM module

1
1

15

en07000239.wmf

IEC07000239 V1 EN

Figure 622:

1.
2.
3.
4.

The X.21 LDCM module external connectors

Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

Ground pin
Soft ground pin, see figure 623
X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27)
balanced version

1333
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

I/O

100kW

100nF

Soft ground
en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN

Figure 623:

Schematic view of soft ground

Grounding
At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IOground can be tested.
Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1.
2.
3.

Direct ground - The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2

direct to the chassi.
No ground - Leave the connector without any connection.
Soft ground - Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 622

X.21 connector
Table 1013:

Pinout for the X.21 communication connector

Pin number

Signal

Shield (ground)

TXD A

Control A

RXD A

Signal timing A

Ground

TXD B

10

Control B

11

RXD B

13

Signal timing B

5,7,12,14,15

Not used

1334
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.2.16.3

Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is
64 kbit/s.
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The
transmission is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a
device is a DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and
when the signal is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be
inverted in the control register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set
as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE
Signal Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.

22.2.16.4

Technical data
Table 1014:

Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)

Quantity

Range or value

Connector, X.21

Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch

Connector, ground selection

2 pole screw terminal

Standard

CCITT X21

Communication speed

64 kbit/s

Insulation

1 kV

Maximum cable length

100 m

22.2.17

GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

22.2.17.1

Introduction
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has
one SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS STconnector output.

1335
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware
22.2.17.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Design
The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots.
The antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to
eliminate the risk of electromagnetic interference.
All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time
data is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at
sampling level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time
synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output
connector is of ST-type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.

22.2.17.3

Monitored data
Table 1015:

SYNCHGPS Monitored data

Name

Type

NoOfSatellites

22.2.17.4

INTEGER

Values (Range)

Unit

Description
Number of GPS signals
from satellites

Technical data
Table 1016:

GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Receiver

1s relative UTC

Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new

position or after power loss longer than 1 month

<30 minutes

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss

longer than 48 hours

<15 minutes

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss

shorter than 48 hours

<5 minutes

22.2.18

GPS antenna

22.2.18.1

Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.

22.2.18.2

Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or
on an antenna mast. See figure 624

1336
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

2
3

xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN

Figure 624:

Antenna with console

where:
1

GPS antenna

TNC connector

Console, 78x150 mm

Mounting holes 5.5 mm

Tab for securing of antenna cable

Vertical mounting position

Horizontal mounting position

Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a
male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose
cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to
the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna
cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.
When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the
receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is
connected.

1337
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware
22.2.18.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Technical data
Table 1017:

GPS Antenna and cable

Function

Value

Max antenna cable attenuation

26 db @ 1.6 GHz

Antenna cable impedance

50 ohm

Lightning protection

Must be provided externally

Antenna cable connector

SMA in receiver end

TNC in antenna end

Accuracy

+/-1s

22.2.19

IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

22.2.19.1

Introduction
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of
the IED from a station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC
61850-9-2LE is used.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.

22.2.19.2

Design
The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle
both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input
type ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.

1338
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

ST

A1

Y2

IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN

Figure 625:

22.2.19.3
Table 1018:
Name

IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm
multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for
IRIG-B signal input

Settings
IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SynchType

BNC
Opto

Opto

Type of synchronization

TimeDomain

LocalTime
UTC

LocalTime

Time domain

Encoding

IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ

IRIG-B

Type of encoding

TimeZoneAs1344

MinusTZ
PlusTZ

PlusTZ

Time zone as in 1344 standard

22.2.19.4

Technical data
Table 1019:

IRIG-B

Quantity

Rated value

Number of channels IRIG-B

Number of channels PPS

Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B

BNC

Pulse-width modulated

5 Vpp

Amplitude modulated
low level
high level

1-3 Vpp
3 x low level, max 9 Vpp

Table continues on next page

1339
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Quantity

Rated value

Supported formats

IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x

Accuracy

+/-10s for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100s for IRIG-B 12x

Input impedance

100 k ohm

Optical connector:
Optical connector PPS and IRIG-B

Type ST

Type of fibre

62.5/125 m multimode fibre

Supported formats

IRIG-B 00x, PPS

Accuracy

+/- 1s

22.3

Dimensions

22.3.1

Case without rear cover

A
D

C
IEC08000164-2-en.vsd

IEC08000164 V2 EN

Figure 626:

Case without rear cover

1340
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

K
F

G
H

J
xx08000166.vsd

IEC08000166 V1 EN

Figure 627:
Case size (mm) A

Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit

E

6U, 1/2 x 19

265.9

223.7

201.1

252.9

205.7

190.5

203.7

187.6

6U, 3/4 x 19

265.9

336.0

201.1

252.9

318.0

190.5

316.0

187.6

6U, 1/1 x 19

265.9

448.3

201.1

252.9

430.3

190.5

428.3

465.1

187.6

482.6

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit

1341
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware
22.3.2

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Case with rear cover

IEC08000163-2-en.vsd
IEC08000163 V2 EN

Figure 628:

Case with rear cover

1342
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

K
F

G
H

J
xx08000165.vsd

IEC08000165 V1 EN

Figure 629:

Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit

IEC05000503-2-en.vsd
IEC05000503 V2 EN

Figure 630:
Case size (mm) A

Rear cover case with details

E

6U, 1/2 x 19

265.9

223.7

242.1

255.8

205.7

190.5

203.7

228.6

6U, 3/4 x 19

265.9

336.0

242.1

255.8

318.0

190.5

316.0

228.6

6U, 1/1 x 19

265.9

448.3

242.1

255.8

430.3

190.5

428.3

465.1

228.6

482.6

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.

1343
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware
22.3.3

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Flush mounting dimensions

E
D
IEC08000162-2-en.vsd
IEC08000162 V2 EN

Figure 631:

Case size
Tolerance

Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm)
A
+/-1

B
+/-1

6U, 1/2 x 19"

210.1

254.3

4.0-10.0

12.5

6U, 3/4 x 19"

322.4

254.3

4.0-10.0

12.5

6U, 1/1 x 19"

434.7

254.3

4.0-10.0

12.5

E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

1344
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.3.4

Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN

Figure 632:

A 1/2 x 19 size 670 series IED side-by-side with RHGS6.

C
xx05000505.vsd
IEC05000505 V1 EN

Figure 633:

Case size (mm) A

Tolerance
1

B
1

Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

C
1

D
1

E
1

F
1

G
1

6U, 1/2 x 19

214.0

259.3

240.4

190.5

34.4

13.2

6.4 diam

6U, 3/4 x 19

326.4

259.3

352.8

190.5

34.4

13.2

6.4 diam

6U, 1/1 x 19

438.7

259.3

465.1

190.5

34.4

13.2

6.4 diam

1345
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware
22.3.5

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Wall mounting dimensions

IEC04000471-2-en.vsd
IEC04000471 V2 EN

Figure 634:

Case size (mm)

Wall mounting

6U, 1/2 x 19

292.0

267.1

272.8

390.0

243.0

6U, 3/4 x 19

404.3

379.4

272.8

390.0

243.0

6U, 1/1 x 19

516.0

491.1

272.8

390.0

243.0

22.3.6

External resistor unit for high impedance differential

protection
WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high
voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object
protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by
national law/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a
protective cover or in a separate box!

1346
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

[6.97]

[4.02]

[1.48]

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

[18.31]

[0.33]

[0.79]

[7.68]

[18.98]

Dimension
mm [inches]

xx06000232.eps

IEC06000232 V2 EN

Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[7.50]

[10.47]

[1.50]

Figure 635:

[0.33]

[18.31]

[0.79]

[7.68]

[18.98]

[inches]

en06000234.eps

IEC06000234 V2 EN

Figure 636:

Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

1347
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.4

Mounting alternatives

22.4.1

Flush mounting

22.4.1.1

Overview
The flush mounting kit are utilized for case sizes:

1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)

Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class
IP54 protection.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs
when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained
when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted

sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.

1348
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.4.1.2

Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1

5
2

6
3

IEC08000161-2-en.vsd
IEC08000161 V2 EN

Figure 637:

Flush mounting details.

PosNo Description

Quantity Type

Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory
mounted between the case and front plate.

Fastener

Groove

Screw, self tapping

2.9x9.5 mm

Joining point of sealing strip

Panel

1349
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.4.2

19 panel rack mounting

22.4.2.1

Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each
size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening
screws for the angles.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19
or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-byside mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19.

When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that

follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

1350
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.4.2.2

Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting

2
1a

1b

IEC08000160-2-en.vsd
IEC08000160 V2 EN

Figure 638:
Pos

19 panel rack mounting details

Description

Quantity

Type

1a, 1b

Mounting angles, which can be mounted, either to

the left or right side of the case.

Screw

M4x6

22.4.3

Wall mounting

22.4.3.1

Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19,1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also
possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
1351

Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows
the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions
than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication
modules with fiber connection.

22.4.3.2

Mounting procedure for wall mounting

IEC13000266-1-en.vsd
DOCUMENT127716-IMG2265 V3 EN

Figure 639:

Wall mounting details.

PosNo

Description

Quantity

Type

Bushing

Screw

M4x10

Screw

M6x12 or
corresponding

Table continues on next page

1352
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

22.4.3.3

Mounting bar

Screw

M5x8

Side plate

How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover, which is recommended to
use with this type of mounting. See figure 640.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged
side.

80 mm

IEC06000135-2-en.vsd
IEC06000135 V3 EN

Figure 640:

How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

PosNo

Description

Type

Screw

M4x10

Screw

M5x8

Rear protection cover

(Ordered separately)

22.4.4

Side-by-side 19 rack mounting

22.4.4.1

Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-byside up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side
mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately.

1353
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.

22.4.4.2

Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2
1

IEC04000456-2-en.vsd
IEC04000456 V2 EN

Figure 641:

22.4.4.3

Side-by-side rack mounting details.

PosNo

Description

Quantity

Type

Mounting plate

2, 3

Screw

16

M4x6

Mounting angle

IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12
depending on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test
switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type
for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip IEDs.

1354
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IEC06000180-2-en.vsd
IEC06000180 V2 EN

Figure 642:

IED in the 670 series (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case
containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch
and a RX2 terminal base

22.4.5

Side-by-side flush mounting

22.4.5.1

Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is
required. If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side
mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out
is 19.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is
obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the
IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted
IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.

1355
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT

switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

22.4.5.2

Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1

3
4

IEC06000181-2-en.vsd
IEC06000181 V2 EN

Figure 643:

Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x

19 IED).

PosNo

Description

Quantity

Type

Mounting plate

2, 3

Screw

16

M4x6

Mounting angle

22.5

Technical data

22.5.1

Enclosure
Table 1020:
Material

Case
Steel sheet

Front plate

Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI

Surface treatment

Aluzink preplated steel

Finish

Light grey (RAL 7035)

1356
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1021:

Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front

IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom

IP20

Rear side

IP20 with screw compression type

IP10 with ring lug terminals

Table 1022:

Weight

Case size

22.5.2

Weight

6U, 1/2 x 19

10 kg

6U, 3/4 x 19

15 kg

6U, 1/1 x 19

18 kg

Connection system
Table 1023:

CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type

Rated voltage and current

Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type

250 V AC, 20 A

4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)

Terminal blocks suitable for

ring lug terminals

250 V AC, 20 A

4 mm2 (AWG12)

Table 1024:

Binary I/O connection system

Connector type

Rated voltage

Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type

250 V AC

2.5 mm2 (AWG14)

2 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)

Terminal blocks suitable for

ring lug terminals

300 V AC

3 mm2 (AWG14)

Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered

for Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two
adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.

22.5.3

Influencing factors
Table 1025:

Temperature and humidity influence

Parameter

Reference value

Nominal range

Influence

Ambient temperature,
operate value

+20 C

-10 C to +55 C

0.02% /C

Relative humidity
Operative range

10%-90%
0%-95%

10%-90%

Storage temperature

-40 C to +85 C

1357

Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1026:

Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on

Reference value

Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage

Operative range

max. 2%
Full wave rectified

15% of EL

0.01% /%

Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate

value

20% of EL

0.01% /%

Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage

24-60 V DC 20%

Interruption
interval
050 ms

Table 1027:

90-250 V DC 20%
No restart

0 s

Correct
behaviour at
power down

Restart time

<300 s

Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602551)

Dependence on

22.5.4

Within nominal range Influence

Within nominal range

Influence

Frequency dependence,
operate value

fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

1.0% / Hz

Frequency dependence
for distance protection
operate value

fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

2.0% / Hz

Harmonic frequency
dependence (20%
content)

2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr

2.0%

Harmonic frequency
dependence for distance
protection (10% content)

2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr

12.0%

Harmonic frequency
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)

2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr

5.0%

Type tests according to standard

Table 1028:

Electromagnetic compatibility

Test

Type test values

Reference standards

1 MHz burst disturbance

2.5 kV

IEC 60255-26

100 kHz slow damped

oscillatory wave immunity
test

2.5 kV

IEC 61000-4-18, Class III

Ring wave immunity test,

100 kHz

2-4 kV

IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV

Surge withstand capability

test

2.5 kV, oscillatory

4.0 kV, fast transient

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1

Table continues on next page

1358
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Test

Type test values

Reference standards

Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application

15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge

IEC 60255-26

Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application

15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1

Fast transient disturbance

4 kV

IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Surge immunity test

2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms

high energy

IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Power frequency immunity

test

150-300 V, 50 Hz

IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Conducted common mode

immunity test

15 Hz-150 kHz

IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV

Power frequency magnetic

field test

1000 A/m, 3 s
100 A/m, cont.

IEC 61000-4-8, Class V

Pulse magnetic field

immunity test

1000 A/m

IEC 6100049, Class V

Damped oscillatory magnetic

field test

100 A/m

IEC 61000-4-10, Class V

Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance

20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz

IEC 60255-26

Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance

20 V/m
80-1000 MHz

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

Conducted electromagnetic
field disturbance

10 V, 0.15-80 MHz

IEC 60255-26

Radiated emission

30-5000 MHz

IEC 60255-26

Radiated emission

30-5000 MHz

IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC

Conducted emission

0.15-30 MHz

IEC 60255-26

Table 1029:

1.4-2.7 GHz

Insulation

Test

Type test values

Dielectric test

2.0 kV AC, 1 min.

Impulse voltage test

5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J

Insulation resistance

>100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 1030:

IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV

Reference standard
IEC 60255-27

Environmental tests

Test

Type test value

Reference standard

Cold operation test

Test Ad for 16 h at -25C

IEC 60068-2-1

Cold storage test

Test Ad for 16 h at -40C

IEC 60068-2-1

Dry heat operation test

Test Bd for 16 h at +70C

IEC 60068-2-2

Dry heat storage test

Test Bd for 16 h at +85C

IEC 60068-2-2

Table continues on next page

1359
Technical Manual

Section 22
IED hardware

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Test

Type test value

Reference standard

Change of temperature test

Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25C

to +85C

IEC 60068-2-14

Damp heat test, steady state

Test Ca for 10 days at +40

C and humidity 93%

IEC 60068-2-78

Damp heat test, cyclic

Test Db for 6 cycles at +25

to +55 C and humidity 93 to
95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)

IEC 60068-2-30

Table 1031:

CE compliance

Test

According to

Immunity

EN 6025526

Emissivity

EN 6025526

Low voltage directive

EN 6025527

Table 1032:

Mechanical tests

Test

Type test values

Reference standards

Vibration response test

Class II

IEC 60255-21-1

Vibration endurance test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-1

Shock response test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-2

Shock withstand test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-2

Bump test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-2

Seismic test

Class II

IEC 60255-21-3

1360
Technical Manual

Section 23
Labels

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 23

Labels

23.1

Labels on IED
Front view of IED

1
2
3
4
5
6
6

7
xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN

1361
Technical Manual

Section 23
Labels

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Product type, description and serial number

Order number, dc supply voltage and rated

frequency

Optional, customer specific information

Manufacturer

Transformer input module, rated currents

and voltages

Transformer designations

Ordering and serial number

IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN

IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN

1362
Technical Manual

Section 23
Labels

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Rear view of IED

1
2
3

4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN

Warning label

Caution label

Class 1 laser product label

IEC06000575 V1 EN

Warning label

1363
Technical Manual

1364

Section 24
Connection diagrams

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 24

Connection diagrams

The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as
part of the product delivery.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.
Connection diagrams for Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.0 1MRK002801-AE
Connection diagrams for Configured products
Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, A10 1MRK002803-TF
Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, A30 1MRK002803-TA
Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, B30 1MRK002803-TB
Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, A40 1MRK002803-TC
Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, B40 1MRK002803-TD
Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, A25 1MRK002803-TE

1365
Technical Manual

1366

Section 25
IED and functionality tests

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 25

IED and functionality tests

Table 1033:

Electromagnetic compatibility

Test

Type test values

Reference standards

1 MHz burst disturbance

2.5 kV

IEC 60255-26

100 kHz slow damped

oscillatory wave immunity
test

2.5 kV

IEC 61000-4-18, Class III

Ring wave immunity test,

100 kHz

2-4 kV

IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV

Surge withstand capability

test

2.5 kV, oscillatory

4.0 kV, fast transient

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1

Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application

15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge

IEC 60255-26

Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application

15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1

Fast transient disturbance

4 kV

IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Surge immunity test

2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms

high energy

IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Power frequency immunity

test

150-300 V, 50 Hz

IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Conducted common mode

immunity test

15 Hz-150 kHz

IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV

Power frequency magnetic

field test

1000 A/m, 3 s
100 A/m, cont.

IEC 61000-4-8, Class V

Pulse magnetic field

immunity test

1000 A/m

IEC 6100049, Class V

Damped oscillatory magnetic

field test

100 A/m

IEC 61000-4-10, Class V

Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance

20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz

IEC 60255-26

Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance

20 V/m
80-1000 MHz

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

Conducted electromagnetic
field disturbance

10 V, 0.15-80 MHz

IEC 60255-26

Radiated emission

30-5000 MHz

IEC 60255-26

Radiated emission

30-5000 MHz

IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC

Conducted emission

0.15-30 MHz

IEC 60255-26

IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV

1.4-2.7 GHz

1367
Technical Manual

Section 25
IED and functionality tests

Table 1034:

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Insulation

Test

Type test values

Reference standard

Dielectric test

2.0 kV AC, 1 min.

Impulse voltage test

5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J

Insulation resistance

>100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 1035:

IEC 60255-27

Environmental tests

Test

Type test value

Reference standard

Cold operation test

Test Ad for 16 h at -25C

IEC 60068-2-1

Cold storage test

Test Ad for 16 h at -40C

IEC 60068-2-1

Dry heat operation test

Test Bd for 16 h at +70C

IEC 60068-2-2

Dry heat storage test

Test Bd for 16 h at +85C

IEC 60068-2-2

Change of temperature test

Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25C

to +85C

IEC 60068-2-14

Damp heat test, steady state

Test Ca for 10 days at +40

C and humidity 93%

IEC 60068-2-78

Damp heat test, cyclic

Test Db for 6 cycles at +25

to +55 C and humidity 93 to
95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)

IEC 60068-2-30

Table 1036:

CE compliance

Test

According to

Immunity

EN 6025526

Emissivity

EN 6025526

Low voltage directive

EN 6025527

Table 1037:

Mechanical tests

Test

Type test values

Reference standards

Vibration response test

Class II

IEC 60255-21-1

Vibration endurance test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-1

Shock response test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-2

Shock withstand test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-2

Bump test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-2

Seismic test

Class II

IEC 60255-21-3

1368
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 26

Inverse time characteristics

26.1

Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at
different points in the network different time delays for the different protections are
normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more
sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both
alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections
operating in series.

I>

I>

I>
xx05000129.vsd

IEC05000129 V1 EN

Figure 644:

Three overcurrent protections operating in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 1

Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN

Figure 645:

Definite time overcurrent characteristics

1369
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Time

Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN

Figure 646:

Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance
time and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of
following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
Reset times of the protections
Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

1370
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A1

B1

I>

I>

Feeder

Time axis

t=0

t=t1

t=t2

t=t3
en05000132.vsd

IEC05000132 V1 EN

Figure 647:

Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0

is The fault occurs

t=t1

is Protection B1 trips

t=t2

is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3

is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay

(instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault
current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker.
The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in
time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1
will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit
breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted.
The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum
opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of
protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when
the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type
of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the
following applications:

1371
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults,
starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the
system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for
other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to
assure the release function.

26.2

Principle of operation

26.2.1

Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the
component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the
current level used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is
reached or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the
hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are
chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 220.

A
k
t[ s ] =
+
B
i p

-C

in >

(Equation 220)

EQUATION1189 V1 EN

where:
p, A, B, C

are constants defined for each curve type,

in>

is the set start current for step n,

is set time multiplier for step n and

is the measured current.

1372
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the
set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can
be seen:

i p

(top - B k )
- C = Ak
in >

(Equation 221)

EQUATION1190 V1 EN

where:
top

is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils
according to equation 222, in addition to the constant time delay:

i p

in > - C dt A k
0

(Equation 222)

EQUATION1191 V1 EN

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

i( j ) p

- C A k
j =1 in >

Dt

(Equation 223)

EQUATION1192 V1 EN

where:
j=1

is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been

detected, that is, when

i
in >

>1

EQUATION1193 V1 EN

Dt

is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,

is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip

time equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and

i (j)

is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the
IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 648.

1373
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Operate
time

tMin

IMin

Current
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd

IEC05000133 V2 EN

Figure 648:

Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse
time curve for measured current of twenty times the set current start value. Note
that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time
multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical
ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 225:

k
t[ s ] =
in >
0.339 - 0.235

i
EQUATION1194 V1 EN

(Equation 225)

where:
in>

is the set start current for step n

is set time multiplier for step n

is the measured current

1374
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex

protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for
sensitive residual earth-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive
earth faults. The curve is described by equation 226:

k in >

t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
EQUATION1195 V1 EN

(Equation 226)

where:
in>

is the set start current for step n,

is set time multiplier for step n and

is the measured current

If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse
time curve according to the general equation 227.

t[ s ] =
+ Bk
i p

-C

in >

EQUATION1196 V1 EN

(Equation 227)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the
possibility to choose between three different reset time-lags.

Instantaneous Reset
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset.

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current
drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the
current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after
fault clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the
hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 228.

1375
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

tr
k
t [s] =
2
i

-1
in >

(Equation 228)

EQUATION1197 V2 EN

where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the

choice of time delay characteristic.
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset
time characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr
and cr must be given, see equation 229:

tr
k
t [s] =
pr
i

- cr
in >

EQUATION1198 V2 EN

(Equation 229)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the
operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay
and the set definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay
is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay
for that stage to zero.

1376
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

26.3

Inverse characteristics
Table 1038:

ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function

Range or value

Operating characteristic:

k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01

A
t=
+ B k + tDef
I P - 1

Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
2.0% or 40 ms
whichever is greater

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:
t =

(I

tr
2

-1

EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse

A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse

A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,

tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse

A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,

tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse

A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,

tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse

A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,

tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse

A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,

tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse

A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,

tr=4.6

1377
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1039:

IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function

Range or value

Operating characteristic:

t =

k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01

A
P
k
( I - 1)

Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse

A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse

A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse

A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse

A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic
Operate characteristic:

k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001

t =

A
P
(I - C )

+ B k

EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN

Reset characteristic:
t =

(I

TR
PR

- CR

EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 1040:

RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function

Range or value

RI type inverse characteristic

1

t =

0.339 -

k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01

0.236

Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater

EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic

t = 5.8 - 1.35 In

I
k

k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

1378
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1041:

ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection

Function

Range or value

Operating characteristic:

k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01

A
t=
+ B k + tDef
I P - 1

Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
whichever is greater

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:
t =

(I

tr
2

-1

EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse

A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse

A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,

tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse

A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,

tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse

A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,

tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse

A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,

tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse

A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,

tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse

A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,

tr=4.6

1379
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1042:

IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection

Function

Range or value

Operating characteristic:

t =

k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01

A
P
k
( I - 1)

Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse

A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse

A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse

A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse

A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic
Operate characteristic:

k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001

t =

A
P
(I - C )

+ B k

EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN

Reset characteristic:
t =

(I

TR
PR

- CR

EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be

used, since this parameter setting is for future use and not
implemented yet.

1380
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1043:

RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection

Function

Range or value

RI type inverse characteristic

1

t =

0.339 -

k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01

0.236

Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater

EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic

t = 5.8 - 1.35 In

I
k

k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 1044:

ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection

Function

Range or value

Operating characteristic:

k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01

A
t=
+ B k + tDef

I P - 1

Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
10.0% or 180 ms
whichever is greater

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:
t =

(I

tr
2

-1

EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse

A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse

A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,

tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse

A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,

tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse

A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,

tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse

A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,

tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse

A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,

tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse

A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,

tr=4.6

1381
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1045:

IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection

Function

Range or value

Operating characteristic:

t =

k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01

A
P
k
( I - 1)

Accuracy
IEC 60255-151,
10.0% or 180 ms
whichever is greater

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse

A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse

A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse

A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse

A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic
Operate characteristic:

k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001

t =

A
P
(I - C )

+ B k

EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN

Reset characteristic:
t =

(I

TR
PR

- CR

EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be

used, since this parameter setting is for future use and not
implemented yet.

1382
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1046:

RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual

overcurrent and power protection

Function

Range or value

RI type inverse characteristic

1

t =

0.339 -

k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01

0.236

Accuracy
IEC 60255-151,
10.0% or 180 ms
whichever is greater

EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic

t = 5.8 - 1.35 In

I
k

k = (0.1-999) in steps of 0.01

EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 1047:

ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

Function

Range or value

Operating characteristic:

0.10 k 3.00

A
t=
+ B k + tDef

I P - 1

Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
whichever is greater

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:
t =

(I

tr
2

-1

EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse

A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse

A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,

tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse

A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,

tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse

A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,

tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse

A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,

tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse

A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,

tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse

A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,

tr=4.6

1383
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1048:

IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

Function

Range or value

Operating characteristic:

t =

0.10 k 3.00

A
P
k
( I - 1)

Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse

A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse

A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse

A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse

A=120, P=1.0

Table 1049:

Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function

Range or value

Type A curve:
t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in
steps of 0.01

Accuracy
5.0% or 45 ms
whichever is greater

U -U >

U >

EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve:
t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in
steps of 0.01

k 480

32 U - U > - 0.5

U >

2.0

- 0.035

EQUATION1437-SMALL V1 EN

Type C curve:
t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in
steps of 0.01

k 480

32 U - U > - 0.5

U >

3.0

- 0.035

EQUATION1438-SMALL V1 EN

Programmable curve:
t =

kA

B U - U >

U >

EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN

-C

+D

k = (0.05-1.10) in
steps of 0.01
A = (0.005-200.000)
in steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps
of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1384
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1050:

Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function

Range or value

Type A curve:

t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in
steps of 0.01

Accuracy
5.0% or 45 ms
whichever is greater

U < -U

U<

EQUATION1431-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve:

t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in
steps of 0.01

k 480

32 U < -U - 0.5

U <

2.0

+ 0.055

EQUATION1432-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Programmable curve:

kA
+D
t =
P
U < -U

-C
B
U <

EQUATION1433-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

k = (0.05-1.10) in
steps of 0.01
A = (0.005-200.000)
in steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in
steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000)
in steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1385
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Table 1051:

Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function

Range or value

Type A curve:
t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01

Accuracy
5.0% or 45 ms
whichever is
greater

U -U >

U>

EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve:
t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k 480

32 U - U > - 0.5

U >

2.0

- 0.035

EQUATION1437-SMALL V1 EN

Type C curve:
t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k 480

32 U - U > - 0.5

U >

3.0

- 0.035

EQUATION1438-SMALL V1 EN

Programmable curve:

t =

kA

B U - U >

U >

EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN

-C

+D

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1386
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 649:

ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

1387
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 650:

ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

1388
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 651:

ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

1389
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 652:

ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

1390
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 653:

ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

1391
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 654:

ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

1392
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 655:

ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

1393
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 656:

IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

1394
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 657:

IEC Very inverse time characteristics

1395
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 658:

IEC Inverse time characteristics

1396
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 659:

IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

1397
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 660:

IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

1398
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 661:

IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

1399
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 662:

RI-type inverse time characteristics

1400
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 663:

RD-type inverse time characteristics

1401
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 664:

Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

1402
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 665:

Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

1403
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 666:

Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

1404
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 667:

Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

1405
Technical Manual

Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 668:

Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

1406
Technical Manual

Section 27
Glossary

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

Section 27

Glossary

27.1

Glossary
AC

Alternating current

ACC

Actual channel

ACT

Application configuration tool within PCM600

A/D converter

Analog-to-digital converter

ADBS

Amplitude deadband supervision

ADM

Analog digital conversion module, with time

synchronization

AI

Analog input

ANSI

American National Standards Institute

AR

Autoreclosing

ASCT

Auxiliary summation current transformer

ASD

Adaptive signal detection

ASDU

Application service data unit

AWG

American Wire Gauge standard

BBP

Busbar protection

BFOC/2,5

Bayonet fibre optic connector

BFP

Breaker failure protection

BI

Binary input

BIM

Binary input module

BOM

Binary output module

BOS

Binary outputs status

BR

External bistable relay

BS

British Standards

BSR

Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks

BST

Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks

C37.94

IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals

between IEDs

CAN

Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for

serial communication
1407

Technical Manual

Section 27
Glossary

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

CB

Circuit breaker

CBM

Combined backplane module

CCITT

Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and

Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.

CCM

CAN carrier module

CCVT

Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer

Class C

Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI

CMPPS

Combined megapulses per second

CMT

Communication Management tool in PCM600

CO cycle

Close-open cycle

Codirectional

Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves

two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit
information in both directions

COM

Command

COMTRADE

Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange

format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC60255-24

Contra-directional

Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves

four twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting
data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals

COT

Cause of transmission

CPU

Central processing unit

CR

Carrier receive

CRC

Cyclic redundancy check

CROB

Control relay output block

CS

Carrier send

CT

Current transformer

CU

Communication unit

CVT or CCVT

Capacitive voltage transformer

DAR

Delayed autoreclosing

DARPA

Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US

developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)

DBDL

Dead bus dead line

DBLL

Dead bus live line

DC

Direct current

DFC

Data flow control

1408
Technical Manual

Section 27
Glossary

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

DFT

Discrete Fourier transform

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DIP-switch

Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board

DI

Digital input

DLLB

Dead line live bus

DNP

Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012

DR

Disturbance recorder

DRAM

Dynamic random access memory

DRH

Disturbance report handler

DSP

Digital signal processor

DTT

Direct transfer trip scheme

EHV network

Extra high voltage network

EIA

Electronic Industries Association

EMC

Electromagnetic compatibility

EMF

Electromotive force

EMI

Electromagnetic interference

EnFP

End fault protection

EPA

Enhanced performance architecture

ESD

Electrostatic discharge

F-SMA

Type of optical fibre connector

FAN

Fault number

FCB

Flow control bit; Frame count bit

FOX 20

Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,

data and protection signals

FOX 512/515

Access multiplexer

FOX 6Plus

Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of

up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers

FUN

Function type

G.703

Electrical and functional description for digital lines used

by local telephone companies. Can be transported over
balanced and unbalanced lines

GCM

Communication interface module with carrier of GPS

receiver module

GDE

Graphical display editor within PCM600

GI

General interrogation command

GIS

Gas-insulated switchgear
1409

Technical Manual

Section 27
Glossary

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

GOOSE

Generic object-oriented substation event

GPS

Global positioning system

GSAL

Generic security application

GTM

GPS Time Module

HDLC protocol

High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC

standard

HFBR connector
type

Plastic fiber connector

HMI

Human-machine interface

HSAR

High speed autoreclosing

HV

High-voltage

HVDC

High-voltage direct current

IDBS

Integrating deadband supervision

IEC

International Electrical Committee

IEC 60044-6

IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6:

Requirements for protective current transformers for
transient performance

IEC 60870-5-103

Communication standard for protection equipment. A

serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point
communication

IEC 61850

Substation automation communication standard

IEC 6185081

Communication protocol standard

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 802.12

A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s

on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable

IEEE P1386.1

PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus

modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known
as Common Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics
and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special
Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).

IEEE 1686

Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices

(IEDs) Cyber Security Capabilities

IED

Intelligent electronic device

I-GIS

Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear

IOM

Binary input/output module

Instance

When several occurrences of the same function are

available in the IED, they are referred to as instances of
that function. One instance of a function is identical to
another of the same kind but has a different number in the

1410
Technical Manual

Section 27
Glossary

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes

defined as an item of information that is representative of a
type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED
is representative of a type of function.
IP

1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP

protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529

IP 20

Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20

IP 40

Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 40

IP 54

Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 54

IRF

Internal failure signal

IRIG-B:

InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,

standard 200

ITU

International Telecommunications Union

LAN

Local area network

LIB 520

High-voltage software module

LCD

Liquid crystal display

LDCM

Line differential communication module

LDD

Local detection device

LED

Light-emitting diode

LNT

LON network tool

LON

Local operating network

MCB

Miniature circuit breaker

MCM

Mezzanine carrier module

MIM

Milli-ampere module

MPM

Main processing module

MVAL

Value of measurement

MVB

Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus

originally developed for use in trains.

NCC

National Control Centre

NOF

Number of grid faults

NUM

Numerical module

OCO cycle

Open-close-open cycle

OCP

Overcurrent protection
1411

Technical Manual

Section 27
Glossary

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

OEM

Optical Ethernet module

OLTC

On-load tap changer

OTEV

Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/

pick-up

OV

Overvoltage

Overreach

A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a

fault condition. For example, a distance relay is
overreaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller
than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the
balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay sees the
fault but perhaps it should not have seen it.

PCI

Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus

PCM

Pulse code modulation

PCM600

Protection and control IED manager

PC-MIP

Mezzanine card standard

PMC

PCI Mezzanine card

POR

Permissive overreach

POTT

Permissive overreach transfer trip

Process bus

Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near

proximity to the measured and/or controlled components

PSM

Power supply module

PST

Parameter setting tool within PCM600

PT ratio

Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio

PUTT

Permissive underreach transfer trip

RASC

Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX

RCA

Relay characteristic angle

RISC

Reduced instruction set computer

RMS value

Root mean square value

RS422

A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital

data in point-to-point connections

RS485

Serial link according to EIA standard RS485

RTC

Real-time clock

RTU

Remote terminal unit

SA

Substation Automation

SBO

Select-before-operate

SC

Switch or push button to close

SCL

Short circuit location

1412
Technical Manual

Section 27
Glossary

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

SCS

Station control system

SCADA

Supervision, control and data acquisition

SCT

System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850

SDU

Service data unit

SLM

Serial communication module.

SMA connector

Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with

constant impedance.

SMT

Signal matrix tool within PCM600

SMS

Station monitoring system

SNTP

Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize

computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.

SOF

Status of fault

SPA

Strmberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/

slave protocol for point-to-point communication

SRY

Switch for CB ready condition

ST

Switch or push button to trip

Starpoint

Neutral point of transformer or generator

SVC

Static VAr compensation

TC

Trip coil

TCS

Trip circuit supervision

TCP

Transmission control protocol. The most common

transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.

TCP/IP

Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The

de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into
4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for
Internet working and encompasses both network layer and
transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two
protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used
to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol
suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and
RDP.

TEF

Time delayed earth-fault protection function

TM

Transmit (disturbance data)

TNC connector

Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance

version of a BNC connector
1413

Technical Manual

Section 27
Glossary

1MRK 504 139-UEN -

TP

Trip (recorded fault)

TPZ, TPY, TPX,

TPS

Current transformer class according to IEC

TRM

Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and

voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for
further signal processing.

TYP

Type identification

UMT

User management tool

Underreach

A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a

fault condition. For example, a distance relay is
underreaching when the impedance presented to it is
greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to
the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not
see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also
Overreach.

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,

maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et
Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated
dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals.
UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by
the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to
synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing
for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational axis
tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular
rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated
Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and
uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and
ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic
alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.

UV

Undervoltage

WEI

Weak end infeed logic

VT

Voltage transformer

X.21

A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom

equipment

3IO

Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the

residual or the earth-fault current

3UO

Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as

the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

1414
Technical Manual

1415

ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters, Sweden
Phone
+46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Fax
+46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation

1MRK 504 139-UEN - Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved.

Contact us